Schneider Switch Fuse 464

Low voltage
Control and protection components

Catalogue 2011/2012
Product reference index
80
504pp 490 NAD 911 pp 490 NTW 000 ppp A AB1 AB8ppp AB1 AC6BL AB1 BCppppp AB1 DV10235U AB1 DVM10235U AB1 Gp
6/88 1/97, 6/89 6/89 1/41, 1/49 2/12, 2/14 1/41, 1/49 1/211 1/211 1/211, 4/30, 4/33, 5/25, 6/51, 6/89, 7/7 5/25 1/211, 4/30, 4/33, 6/51, 6/89, 7/7 2/12, 2/14 1/79, 1/197 1/49 1/49 1/49, 5/186 1/41, 1/49 1/49, 5/186 1/207 1/211 1/210 1/66, 1/210 1/211 1/210 1/211 1/211 1/49, 1/210, 5/186 1/41 1/197 1/197 1/81 1/140 1/130 1/140 1/141 1/141 1/141 1/79 1/28 7/4 7/12 7/4 7/12 7/5 1/41, 1/47 5/241, 5/250 5/241, 5/250 5/250 5/250 5/241, 5/250
D DA1 TSppp DA1 TTppp DE1 DSpppp DE1 LT315 DF1p pppp DF2 pppppp DF22 pppp DF3 pppp DF4 pppppp DF8 ppp DFCC pp DK1 pppp DR2 SCpppp 6/51 6/51, 6/88 2/41 2/52, 2/60 4/29, 4/30 4/72 to 4/75 4/29, 4/30 4/72 and 4/74 4/73 and 4/75 4/29, 4/30 4/33 4/37 5/138, 5/139, 5/188, 5/189, 5/190, 5/191, 5/257 5/135 5/188, 5/189, 5/190, 5/191, 5/257 5/135 5/259 5/259 6/25, 7/7, 5/25 5/124 6/42 5/259 5/186, 5/251 5/279, 5/293 5/279, 5/293 5/279, 5/293 5/279, 5/293 1/41, 1/47, 3/94 3/94 3/95 3/94 5/278 5/286 1/30, 4/36, 4/37 3/57, 3/65 3/53, 3/65 4/59, 4/69 4/59 4/61 4/59, 4/69 4/59, 4/69 4/61 4/61
GS1 DDpp
1/24, 1/31, 1/32, 1/33, 4/53, 4/55, 4/57, 4/68, 6/96 4/68 4/55 4/55 4/55 4/55 4/55 4/55 4/55 4/53 4/59, 4/61, 4/69 4/60, 4/70 4/59 4/60, 4/61, 4/70, 4/71 4/61, 4/71 4/61 4/57 4/68 4/53 1/32, 1/33, 4/53, 4/57, 4/68 4/53, 4/57 4/53 1/32, 1/33, 4/53, 4/57, 1/32, 1/33, 4/57, 4/68 1/32, 1/33, 4/53, 4/57, 4/57 1/32, 1/33, 4/53, 4/57, 4/68 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/31, 1/32, 1/33, 4/53, 4/55, 4/57, 4/68, 6/96, 6/99 4/57, 4/68 1/24, 1/31, 4/53, 4/55, 4/57, 6/96 1/24, 1/25, 1/31, 6/96, 6/99 6/99 1/24, 1/25, 1/31, 6/96, 6/99 1/30, 6/96 1/25, 6/99 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/31, 6/96, 6/99 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/31, 6/96, 6/99 1/24, 1/25, 1/30, 1/31, 6/96, 6/99 3/55, 3/61
GV AEppp GV AMppp GV Apppp GV APppp GV AXppp GV NGCpppp GV1 F03 GV1 Gpp GV1 L3 GV1 V02 GV2 AFpp GV2 AK00 GV2 AP03 GV2 APNpp GV2 Apppp GV2 AXppp GV2 CP21 GV2 DMppppp GV2 DPppppp GV2 Epp GV2 Gppp GV2 Kppp GV2 Lpp GV2 LCpppp GV2 LEpp GV2 MCppp GV2 MEpppppp
3/47, 3/55, 3/61, 4/37 3/47, 3/55, 3/61 3/55, 3/61 1/68, 3/58, 3/62, 3/55 2/18 3/57 1/66, 3/57, 5/85, 4/39, 3/55 3/65 1/7 to 1/11, 3/57, 4/39 3/55 3/51, 3/58 3/58 2/15 2/15 2/12 1/8, 1/9 1/10, 1/11 2/12, 2/14, 2/30 1/66, 3/57, 4/39, 5/85 2/12, 2/14, 2/15, 2/30 1/20, 1/29, 3/53, 6/97 2/18 1/20, 1/28, 3/52, 2/12, 2/14, 2/15 1/6, 1/7, 1/16, 1/17, 1/26, 3/46, 3/47 2/15 2/12 1/17, 1/27, 3/48 3/50, 3/51 2/12, 2/14, 2/30 3/58, 3/61, 4/39 3/65 3/62 3/65 3/65 3/61, 5/85 1/20, 1/21, 1/28, 1/29, 3/53, 6/65, 6/97 3/48, 1/16, 1/26 1/16, 1/17, 1/26, 1/27, 3/48 2/13 5/85 3/67 3/69, 5/84
GV7 ADppp GV7 AE11 GV7 APpp GV7 ASppp GV7 AUppp GV7 REppp GV7 RSppp GV7 V01 GW ppp GY pppppp K KAC 1BZ KAD 1PZ KAE 1BZ KAF ppp KBD 1PZ KBF ppp KCC ppp KCD 1PZ KCE ppp KCF ppp KDD 1PZ KDF ppp KZ ppp L LA1 DNpp LA1 DXpp LA1 DY20 LA1 DZpp LA1 KNppp LA1 LB021 LA1 LCpppp LA1 LDppppp LA1 SKpp LA1 VNppp LA2 KTpp LA4 DApp LA4 DBpp LA4 DBL LA4 DC3U LA4 DEpp LA4 DFB LA4 DTpp LA4 DWB LA4 FDp LA4 FRpp LA4 FSRE LA4 FTp LA4 KA1U LA4 Kpppp LA4 SKppp LA5 Dpppppp LA5 Fppp
3/67 3/67 3/69 3/67 3/67 1/16, 1/26, 3/49, 1/17, 1/27, 3/49 3/69 5/279, 5/293 5/292 4/19 4/11, 4/17 4/19 4/17 4/19 4/19 4/11, 4/17, 4/19 4/11, 4/17 4/17, 4/19 4/17 4/19 4/19 4/11, 4/20, 4/21 2/45, 2/49 5/79, 5/123, 7/21 5/79, 5/123, 7/21 5/79, 5/123, 7/21 5/23, 7/6 1/167 1/167, 2/59 1/171 5/34, 5/35, 7/13 5/235 5/23, 7/6 5/81 5/81 5/83 5/81 5/81 5/83 5/83 5/83 5/124 5/124 5/123 5/124 5/24, 7/7 5/24, 7/7 5/35, 5/43, 7/13 5/85 5/127, 5/177, 5/258
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GS1 EERUpp GS1 Fpp GS1 Gpp GS1 Jpp GS1 Kppp GS1 Lppp GS1 Npp GS1 QQpp GS2 GS2 ADpp GS2 AEpp GS2 AFpp GS2 AHpppp GS2 APpp GS2 AX1 GS2 Dpp GS2 Eppp GS2 Fpp GS2 Gpp
AB1 Pp AB1 Rpp
AB1 VV635UBL ABF H20 ppp ACM GVpppp AE3 FX122 AF1 CDppp AF1 VAppp AF1 VC820 AK5 AK5 BT01 AK5 GF1 AK5 JBpppp AK5 PAppppppp AK5 PCppppp AK5 PEpp AK5 SB1 AM1 ppppp AM3 PA65 APE pppppp APP 2AH40H060 ASI TERV2 ATSppDpp ATSU 01NpppLT ATV21pppppp ATV31pppppp ATV61pppppp ATV71pppppp B BMX FCC pppp C C801p CA2 KNppppp CA2 SKppppp CA3 KNppppp CA3 SKpppp CA4 KNppppp CAD 32pp CR1 BLppppp CR1 BMppppp CR1 BPppppp CR1 BRppppp CR1 Fpppppp
DR5 TEpp
DR5 TF4V DV1 RCppp DV1 RT292 DX1 AP25 DZ3 ppp E ER1 XA2p ET1 KB50 EZ2 LB0601 G GA1 pp GAC pppp GAP 21 GAP 23 GB2 CBpp GB2 CDpp GB2 CSpp GB2 DBpp GC ppppppp GF pppppp GK1 pppp GK2 pppp GK3 pppp GS1 AD10 GS1 AFpp GS1 AHppp GS1 AMppp GS1 ANppp GS1 AVpp GS1 AWpp
GS2 Jpp GS2 Kpppp GS2 Lppp GS2 Mppp GS2 Npp GS2 PPpp GS2 QQpp
GS2 Spp
GV2 MEpp GV2 MPpp GV2 Ppp GV2 RTpp GV2 V01 GV2 V03 GV3 App GV3 APNpp GV3 Bpp GV3 Dpp GV3 Gppp GV3 Lpp
GS2 Tpp GS2 Vpp
GSp F
GSp G GSp J
GSp K GSp KK GSp L
GV3 ME80 GV3 Ppp
GSp N
GSp QQ
GV3 PCpp GV3 S GV7 AB11 GV7 ACpp
GV ADpppp
LA5 FFppp
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5/127, 5/177, 5/258 5/127, 5/177, 5/258 5/127, 5/177, 5/258 5/80 6/25, 6/36, 6/37 1/47, 6/36, 6/37, 5/125 6/12 4/36 5/186, 5/251 2/44, 2/45, 2/48, 2/49 2/21, 2/25, 2/45 5/84 5/124 1/171 1/41, 5/76, 5/77, 5/84 1/39, 1/41, 2/44, 2/45, 5/76, 5/84 1/41 5/84 1/39, 5/76, 5/84 1/39, 5/76, 5/77 1/39, 5/76, 5/77, 5/85 5/76, 5/77 5/85 1/39, 5/76, 5/77, 5/84 1/41, 1/47, 2/45, 2/49, 3/47, 3/57, 5/25, 5/85, 6/25, 6/37, 7/7, 7/23 3/57, 4/39, 5/25 1/49 5/126, 5/176, 5/251, 6/25, 6/37 5/119, 5/121 1/47 5/125 1/47, 5/119, 5/121 5/116, 5/117, 5/126, 5/176, 5/251, 6/37
LA9 FFpppp
LA5 FGppp
5/119, 5/121, 5/124, 5/125, 5/128, 5/253 1/41, 1/47, 5/119, 5/121, 5/124, 5/125, 5/128, 5/176, 5/253 5/128, 5/129 and 5/253 1/47, 5/119, 5/121, 5/124, 5/253 1/47, 5/119, 5/121, 5/124, 5/253 5/119, 5/121, 5/124, 5/125, 5/253 5/119, 5/121, 5/124, 5/125, 5/253 5/119, 5/121, 5/153 5/25 1/66, 3/55 1/172, 2/52, 2/60 1/172 2/87 5/234 1/184, 1/185, 1/186, 1/187 5/85, 7/23 1/195, 3/57, 4/39, 5/76 5/76, 5/77, 5/81, 5/83, 7/22 5/80, 7/22 3/61, 5/85 6/25, 6/58 5/79, 7/21 1/66, 5/85, 6/25, 7/23 2/40 1/39, 5/76 2/40 5/84 1/39, 5/76 3/61, 5/84, 6/25 4/39 1/197 5/85, 7/23 5/84
LAD 9PVGV LAD 9Rpp LAD 9SD3 LAD 9T4 LAD 9Vpp LAD ALLEN4 LAD C22 LAD Nppp
5/76 5/76, 5/77 5/76 2/40 5/76, 5/77 3/61, 5/85, 6/25 5/79, 5/123, 7/21 1/41, 5/79, 5/123, 5/175, 5/251, 7/21 5/80, 5/123, 5/175, 7/22 5/80, 5/123, 5/175, 7/22 1/41, 1/47, 5/80, 5/123, 5/175, 7/22 5/77 5/71 5/156, 5/157 1/163, 1/165, 2/57, 2/58 1/163, 2/57 5/217 5/184, 5/214, 5/215 5/217 5/184, 5/185, 5/214, 5/215 5/217 5/184, 5/185, 5/214, 5/215 5/217 5/184, 5/185, 5/214, 5/215 5/185 1/16, 1/17, 1/20, 1/24 to 1/29, 1/31 to 1/33, 1/39, 1/47, 5/62 to 5/67, 5/71, 5/74, 5/75, 5/102, 5/156, 5/188, 5/190, 5/191, 5/214, 5/215, 5/217, 6/65, 6/96 to 6/99 5/102 5/156 5/188, 5/190, 5/191 5/102
LC1 Fpppppp
LA5 FHppp
LA9 FGpppppppp
LA6 DK20p LA7 Dpppp LA7 Fppp LA7 K0064 LA8 D324 LA9 B103 LA9 D0975 LA9 D09907 LA9 D09966 LA9 D09981 LA9 D09982 LA9 D11ppp LA9 D12ppp
LA9 Fp4p4p
1/16, 1/17, 1/21, 1/24, 1/25, 1/27, 1/29, 1/31 to 1/33, 1/47, 5/114, 5/115, 5/153, 5/163, 5/174, 5/214, 5/215, 5/217, 6/60, 6/65, 6/96, 6/98, 6/99 1/16, 2/28, 5/14, 5/16, 5/214 5/34, 5/42 5/234 5/116 and 5/117 5/18, 5/20 5/234 1/26, 1/28, 1/30, 1/37 1/28, 1/30, 1/45 1/26, 1/28, 1/30, 1/37 1/34 5/14, 5/16, 5/18, 5/20 1/165 1/162 2/56, 2/58, 1/162, 1/165 2/56, 1/162 1/20 2/20, 2/44 2/30 2/28 2/20, 2/24 2/20 2/32, 2/36 2/42 2/32 2/24, 2/48 2/24 2/24, 2/36 2/24 2/85 2/84 2/85 2/84 2/63 2/63 2/62 2/62 2/64 2/68 2/69 5/66, 5/214, 5/215 5/189
LP1 Kppppppp LP1 SKpppppp LP2 Kppppppp LP4 Kppppppp LP5 Kppppppp LR2 Dpppp LR2 F8383 LR2 Kpppp LR2 K0322 LR9 D5367
5/15, 5/17 5/34 5/19, 5/21 5/15, 5/17 5/19, 5/21 1/25, 2/44, 2/48, 6/22 5/241 1/28, 6/12, 1/30 6/12 1/21, 1/24, 1/25, 1/28, 1/29, 1/31, 1/32, 1/33, 5/219, 6/23 1/21, 1/24, 1/25, 1/28 to 1/33, 5/219, 5/241, 6/34 6/58 1/20, 1/24 and 1/25, 1/28 to 1/33, 5/219, 6/20 to 6/22 4/36, 4/37, 1/30 6/50 6/58 6/58 6/58 6/88, 6/96, 6/98, 6/99 6/87 6/87 6/87 6/86, 6/96 to 6/99 1/60, 1/63, 1/85, 1/91 1/85, 1/91 1/63 1/63 1/63 1/68, 1/69, 1/83, 3/62 1/84, 1/90 1/72, 1/81, 1/95, 1/97 1/79, 1/83, 1/95, 1/197 1/63, 1/85, 1/91 1/79, 1/83, 1/93, 1/197, 6/87 1/67 1/61, 1/62, 1/65, 1/79, 1/81, 1/83, 1/87, 1/89, 1/93, 1/95 1/65 1/63, 1/79, 1/81, 1/83, 1/87, 1/89, 1/93, 1/95 1/66
LAD Rp LAD S2 LAD Tp
LC1 Kppppppp
LA9 FHppp
LC1 SKpppppp LC1 Vppppp LC2 Fpppp LC2 Kpppppp LC2 Vpppppp LC3 Dppppppp LC3 Fpppppp LC3 Kpppp LC4 Dppppp LC7 Kppppppp LC8 Kppppppp LD1 LC030p LD1 LD030p LD4 LDpppp
LR9 Fpppp
LA9 FJppp
LC2 Dpppppppp 5/72 to 5/75 LR97 Dppppp LRD pppp
LAD T9Rpp LAD UL1 LAZ R9pp LB1 LD03ppp
LA9 FKppp
LA9 FLppp
LB6 LD03ppp LC1 BL LC1 BLppppp
LS1 Dppppp LT3 Spppppp LT47 06ppp LT47 30ppp LT47 60ppp LT6 CTpppp LTM 9TCS LTM Cpppp LTM EVpppp LTM Rppppp LU2B 12pp LU2B 32BL LU2B 32pp LU2B pppp LU6M B0pp LU9 Apppp LU9 BN11L LU9 CD1 LU9 Gpp LU9 M1 LU9 Rppppp
LA9 D15017 LA9 D2561 LA9 D32ppp LA9 D4pppp LA9 D5pppp LA9 D65App LA9 D730 LA9 D8pppp LA9 D9pp
LA9 FXppp
LC1 BM LC1 BMppppp
LA9 K09pp LA9 LB920 LA9 LCppp LA9 LDppp LA9 LFpppp LA9 V974 LA9 Zppppp
LC1 BP LC1 BPppppp
LD5 LDpppp LEpp LE1 Dpppppp LE1 GVppppppp LE1 M35pppp LE2 Dppppp LE2 Kppppp LE3 Dppppp LE3 Fppppp LE3 Kppppp LE4 Dppppp LE4 Kppppp LE6 Dpppp LE8 Kppppp LF3 Mppp LF3 Pppp LF4 Mppp LF4 Pppp LG1 D1pppppp LG1 Kppppppp LG7 Dpppppp LG7 Kpppppp LG8 Kpppppp LJ7 Kpppppp LJ8 Kpppppp LP1 Dppppppp LP1 DTpppppppp
LC1 BR LC1 BRppppp
LAD 2p LAD 3pppppp LAD 4pppp
LC1 BR34p40 LC1 Dppppppp
LA9 Epp LA9 F100 LA9 F103
8 9 10
LAD 6K10p LAD 7pppp LAD 8ppp LAD 90 LAD 90ppp LAD 912pp LAD 918pp LAD 92560 LAD 93217 LAD 96ppp LAD 99 LAD 9APppp LAD 9Andp LAD 9Pppp
LA9 F15ppp LA9 F18517 LA9 F2100 LA9 F22ppp LA9 F7pp
LU9 SP0 LU9B pppp
LC1 DpKpppp LC1 Dpppp LC1 DTpppppppp LC1 DWK12pp
LU9C p LU9M ppp
LUA Lpp
80
LUA1 pppp LUA8 E20 LUB ppp
1/65 1/65 1/137, 1/58, 1/61, 1/62, 1/84, 1/90, 1/137 1/84, 1/85, 1/90, 1/91 1/84, 1/85, 1/90, 1/91 1/84, 1/85, 1/90, 1/91 1/84, 1/85, 1/90, 1/91 1/71 1/58, 1/60, 1/71 1/59, 1/71, 6/64 1/71 1/71, 6/64 1/136, 1/137 1/61, 1/72, 6/60, 6/64, 6/65 1/59, 1/65, 1/73, 1/97 1/61, 1/83, 1/84, 1/85, 1/87, 1/89, 1/90, 1/91, 1/93, 1/95, 6/60 6/64, 6/65 1/187 5/254 and 5/255 5/254 and 5/255 5/254 and 5/255 5/254 and 5/255 5/254 and 5/255 5/254 and 5/255 5/88 5/89 5/130, 5/178 5/130, 5/178 5/131, 5/179 5/131, 5/179 5/132, 5/133, 5/179 5/132, 5/179 5/133 1/171, 1/173 5/235 5/139 5/90 and 5/91
LX4 D8pp LX4 F8pp LX4 FFppp
5/91 5/133, 5/137 5/134, 5/136, 5/139 5/134, 5/136, 5/139 5/134, 5/136, 5/139 5/135, 5/138, 5/136 5/135, 5/138, 5/137 5/135, 5/138, 5/137 5/137 5/139 5/86, 7/23 5/87 1/21, 1/28, 6/60, 6/65, 6/97, 6/98 5/186, 5/259 5/186, 5/259 5/186, 5/259 1/207 1/207 5/259 5/257, 5/259 5/259 6/51 6/41, 6/42 6/41 6/42 6/88 1/197 1/93 1/93 1/28 5/219 5/219 5/219 1/87, 6/89 1/87 1/79, 1/197 1/97 1/83, 6/89 2/5, 4/14 4/13 4/8 4/13
VBF ppGE VBF pGEp VBFX GEp VCp GUN VCCD pp VCCDN pp VCCF pp VCD pp VCDN pp VCF pp VCF ppGE VCF pGE VCF pGEN VCFN ppGE VCFX GEp VN pp VVD p VW3 A1 pppRpp VW3 A8 1pp
2/4 2/4 2/5 2/10 4/12 4/8 4/12 4/12 4/8 4/12 2/4 2/4 2/4 2/4 2/5 2/5, 4/9 4/13 6/87 1/76, 6/88
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LUC Apppp LUC Bpppp LUC Dpppp LUC Mpppp LUCA pppp LUCA 12FU LUCB pppp LUCC pppp LUCD pppp LUCLpppp LUCM pppp
LX4 FGppp
LX4 FHppp
LX4 FJppp
LX4 FKppp
LX4 FLppp
LX4 FXppp LX5 FJWpp LXD 1ppp LXD 3ppp N NSpppppp
VW3 A8 306 ppp 1/61, 1/95, 1/97, 6/89 VW3 G4104 VZ pp VZN pp W WB1 KBppp 5/188 to 5/191, 5/256 6/25 6/87 1/72 1/72, 6/87 5/85, 7/23 1/76 1/81 1/81 2/99, 1/81 4/21 6/36 2/40 2/40 2/40 2/40 5/186, 5/188, 5/189, 5/190, 5/191, 5/257, 5/259 2/40 1/130 2/6, 2/10, 4/14, 4/20 2/7, 4/9, 4/11, 4/20
LUF pppp LUL pppp
P PA1 LBpp PA1 PB50 PA1 RB50 PA2pppp PA5ppp PN1 FB50 PR4 FBpppp PV1 FA80 R RHZ 66 RM1 XAppp RM1 ZG21 RM1 ZH21 S SR2 CBL06 STB EPI 2145 STB XBE1100 STB XBE1300 STR35ME T TC1pppp TC2pppp TCpppp TSX CAN ppppp TSX CANTD M4 TSX CDP ppp TSX FP ACC12 TSX PBSCAppp V Vpp VBD pp VBDN pp VBF pp
X XB5 Apppppp XBT N410 XBT NU400 XBT Z938 XBY 2U XGS Z24 XZ CG0142 XZ MCpp XZ MG12 Z Z01 ZA2 Bpppp ZB5 AAppp ZB5 ADp ZB5 AL432 ZBA 639 ZC4 GMp
LUT ppppp LV4ppppp LX0 FFppp LX0 FGppp LX0 FHppp LX0 FJppp LX0 FKppp LX0 FLppp LX1 D6pp LX1 D8pp LX1 FFpppp LX1 FGpppp LX1 FHpppp LX1 FJpppp LX1 FKpppp
ZEN L11pp
LX1 FLpppp LX1 FXppp LX1 LDpppp LX1 Vpppppp LX2 FJWpp LX4 D7pp
General contents
TeSys
Control and protection components
1 - TeSys motor starters: open version

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4 b Combination automatic motor starters.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/6 b Combination starters for customer assembly.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/16 b D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/36 b Star-delta starters for motor control.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/52 b TeSys U starter-controllers. b integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers.. . . . . page 1/142 b Adaptators for use with busbar sytem .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/180 b TeSys Quickfit, installation system for motor starter components. . . . . page 1/188 b AK5 pre-assembled panel busbar system.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/205
2 - TeSys motor starters: enclosed version

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/4 b VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors. b Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/12 b D.O.L. starters for motor control.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/18 b Star-delta starters for motor control.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/32 b D.O.L. starters for control in category AC-1 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/44 b integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers.. . . . . . page 2/52 b Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/62 b Enclosed D.O.L starters for AS-Interface cabling system.. . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/72
3 - TeSys protection components: motor circuit-breakers

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2 b TeSys GV thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/46 b TeSys GV magnetic motor circuit-breakers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/52 b TeSys GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers for the protection of control circuits, solenoid valves and transformers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/90
4 - TeSys protection components: fuse protection

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2 b Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard applications. . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/8 b VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance applications. . . . . . . . page 4/12 b TeSys DF fuse carriers for the protection of control circuits or transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/28 b TeSys GK1 fuse carriers for motor protection.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/32 b TeSys GS switch-disconnectors-fuses for motor or variable speed drive protection .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/34 b TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses provide on-load breaking and making, safe isolation and overcurrent protection.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/42 b Cartridge fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/74
5 - TeSys contactors and reversing contactors

b Definitions and comments .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/2 Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/6 b TeSys K contactors and reversing contactors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/8 b TeSys LC1 SK and LP1 SK mini-contators.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/30 b TeSys LC1 SKGC mini-contators.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/38 b TeSys D contactors and reversing contactors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/50 b TeSys contactors for switching 3-phase capacitor banks.. . . . . . . . . . . page 5/104 b TeSys F contactors and reversing contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/106 b High power changeover contactor pairs for distribution.. . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/153 b Capacitive delayed opening devices.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/156 b TeSys FG shockproof contactors.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/158 b TeSys LC1 B contactors.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/182 b Variable composition contactors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/228 b 3-pole vacuum contactors and reversing contactors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/232 b Magnetic latching contactors CR1 F and CR1 B .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/240 b Modular equipment .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/268
6 - TeSys protection components: relays and controllers

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/2 b Motor and machine protection.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/4 b TeSys K thermal overload relays .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/10 b TeSys D, 3-pole thermal overload relays .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/14 b TeSys LR9 D, 3-pole electronic overload relays.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/18 b TeSys LR9 F, 3-pole electronic overload relays.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/30 b TeSys RM1 XA single-pole magnetic over current relays.. . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/40 b TeSys LT3 S thermistor protection units for use with PTC thermistor probes.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/44 b TeSys LR97D and LT47 electronic over current relays.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/54 b TeSys U controllers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/60 b TeSys T, Motor Management System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/68
7 - TeSys control relays

b TeSys K control relays.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/2 b TeSys SK mini-control relays.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/10 b TeSys D control relays and add-on blocks.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/16
8 - Technical information
b Product standards and certifications, degrees of protection, etc .. . . . . . . page 8/2
Contents
1 - TeSys motor starters: open version
b Levels of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2
1 2
Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4
Combination automatic motor starters

b D.O.L starters, type 1 coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/6 b D.O.L starters, type 2 coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10
Combination starters for customer assembly

b D.O.L starters v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/16 v With circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/18 v With fuse protection (NF C or DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/22 b Star-delta starters
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v With circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v With fuse protection (NF C or DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v With fuse protection (BS fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 1/26 page 1/28 page 1/30 page 1/32
D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control

b 45 to 37 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/34
Star-delta starters for motor control

b 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/37 b 7.5 to 132 kW, without mechanical interlock,for customer assembly . . . page 1/39 b 90 to 375 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/45 b 90 to 375 kW, on chassis for customer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/47
TeSys U starter-controllers
b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/52 b Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/58 b Non-reversing and reversing power bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/62 b Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/64 b Control units and function modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/70 b PowerSuite software workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/74 b Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components . . . . page 1/78 b AS-Interface communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/80 b Profibus DP communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/82 b CANopen communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/86 b DeviceNet communication module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/88 b Advantys STB communication module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/92 b Modbus communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/94 b Communication gateways LUF P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/96 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/98 b Tripping curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/106
1/0
b Selection curves according to categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/110 b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/112 b Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/114 b TeSys U starter-controllers, variable speed controllers and soft start/soft stop units v Altistart U01 and TeSys U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/126 v Magnetic control unit for the protection of variable speed controllers and soft start/soft stop units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/138
1 2
integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

b General, terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/142 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/152 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/162 b Accessories and coils references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/167 b Dimensions, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/176
Adaptators for use with busbar sytem

b With 40 mm and 60 mm pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/180
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TeSys Quickfit, installation system for motor starter components

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/188 b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/190 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/195 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/198 b Dimensions, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/200
AK5 pre-assembled panel busbar system

b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/205 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/206 b Mounting (equipment possibilities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/208 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/210 b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/212
1/1
General
TeSys motor starters

Levels of service
1 2 3 4
t Overload zone Low-level short-circuit zone Short-circuit zone
The standard defines tests at different levels of current; the purpose of these tests is to place the equipment in extreme conditions. The standard defines 2 types of coordination, according to the condition of the components after testing: type 1, type 2. To determine the type of coordination, the standard requires that the behaviour of the equipment be tested under overload and short-circuit conditions for 3 fault current values, covering overload and short-circuit conditions. Type 1 coordination Type 1 coordination requires that in a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must not be able to resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts. Type 2 coordination Type 2 coordination requires that In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must subsequently be able to resume operation. The risk of contact welding is permissible; in this case, the manufacturer must indicate measures to be taken regarding maintenance of the equipment. Type 2 coordination increases reliability of operation.
Type 1 and type 2 coordination according to the standard
5
1 2 5 4
Current Ico (overload I < 10 In) The thermal overload relay associated with the contactor provides protection against this type of fault, up to a value Ico (see curve) defined by the manufacturer. Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies the 2 current values to be used for checking coordination between the thermal overload relay and the short-circuit protection device: b at 0.75 Ico only the thermal overload relay must trip, b at 1.25 Ico the short-circuit protection device must operate. Current r (low level short-circuit 10 < I < 50 In) The main cause of this type of fault is the deterioration of insulating materials. Standard IEC 60947-4-1 defines an intermediate short-circuit current r. This test current makes it possible to check whether the protection device is providing protection against low-level short-circuits.
Operational current Ie (AC-3) (A) Ie y 16 16 < Ie y 63 63 < Ie y 125 125 < Ie y 315 315 < Ie y 630 630 < Ie y 1000 Current r (kA) 1 3 5 10 18 30
Current values
6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 3 6
Ir
1 In
10
0,75 Ico 1,25 Ico Ico
50 Iq
Thermal overload relay curve. Fuse. Tripping of thermal overload relay only. Thermal limit of the circuit-breaker. Thermal overload relay limit. Current broken by the SCPD (1). Circuit breaker magnetic trip.
Current Iq (short-circuit > current r) This type of fault corresponds to a dead short and is relatively rare. It can be caused by a connection error during maintenance work. Short-circuit protection is provided by fast operating devices. Standard IEC 60947-4-1 defines a current Iq. The coordination tables supplied by Schneider Electric are based on a current Iq that is generally u50 kA.
(1) SCPD: short-circuit protection device.
1/2
General (continued)
TeSys motor starters

Levels of service
Selection
No coordination Considerable risks to both persons and equipment. Not authorised by standards: v NF C 15-100 and IEC60364-1, article 133-1 (installation regulations), v EN/IEC 60204-1, article 7 (electrical equipment in machines), v IEC 60947-4-1, article 8.2.5. (starters) Type 1 coordination The most frequently used solution. b Equipment costs are lower. b Reliability of operation is not a requirement. b Before restarting, it may be necessary to repair the motor starter. Consequences: v significant amount of machine downtime, v skilled maintenance personnel required to repair, check, obtain supplies. Example: air conditioning in commercial premises. Type 2 coordination This solution ensures reliability of operation. Consequences: v reduced machine downtime, v reduced maintenance after a short-circuit. Example: escalators. Total coordination With this solution, no damage or misadjustment is permissible and reliability of operation is guaranteed. Consequences: v immediate return to service, v no special precautions required. Examples: smoke extraction, fire-fighting pumps.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1/3
Selection guide
TeSys motor starters - open version
Applications
Pre-assembled starters Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters Machines starting under no-load: star-delta starters
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Level of service Starter type
D.O.L. or reversing starters with circuit-breaker
D.O.L. starters with fuse protection
Soft start units or star-delta starters to be used in association with a circuit-breaker or fuses
Type 1 coordination
Type 2 coordination
Power at 400 V
Up to 5.5 kW
Up to 37 kW
Up to 37 kW
Up to 132 kW
Type of components
Combination automatic motor starter with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
Fuse carrier + plate-mounted contactor
3 contactors (line, star and delta, mounted on plate, rail or chassis)
Pages
1/6 and 1/7
1/8 and 1/9
1/10 and 1/11
1/34
1/37
1/4
Starters for customer assembly Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters Machines starting under no-load: star-delta starters
1
D.O.L., reversoing or star-delta starters with fuses
D.O.L. or reversing starters D.O.L., reversing or star-delta starters with circuit-breakers
2 3 4 5
Total coordination
Type 1 and type 2 coordination
6 7 8 9 10
Up to 15 kW
Up to 110 kW
Up to 315 kW
Up to 355 kW
Starter-controller
Thermal magnetic circuit-breaker + contactor(s)
Magnetic circuit-breaker + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay
Fuse carrier + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay
Switch-disconnector-fuse + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay
1/62 and 1/63
1/16 and 1/17, 1/26 and 1/27
1/18 and 1/19, 1/28 and 1/29
1/22 1/30
1/23 and 1/31 1/32 and 1/33
1/5
References

Combination automatic motor starters with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination
1
Characteristics
This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 ME, b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 K, b 1 combination block GV2AF01.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1)
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1
GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V
kA kA kA
ME06K1 50 50 50
ME07K1 50 50 50
ME08K1 50 50 50
ME10K1 50 50 50
ME14K1 50 15 10 (4 kW) 6 (5.5 kW)
ME16K1 15 8 6
References
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-3 440 V 500 V 400/ 415V Setting range of thermal trips Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor circuitbreaker Reference Contactor Reference to be completed (2) LC1K06 Pre-assembled Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) GV2ME06K1pp kg 0.460 Weight
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 GV2ME10K1pp 3 4 5.5
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5
A 11.6
A 22.5
GV2ME06
1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914
33.5 51 78 138 170
GV2ME07 GV2ME08 GV2ME10 GV2ME14 GV2ME16
LC1K06 LC1K06 LC1K06 LC1K09 LC1K12
GV2ME07K1pp GV2ME08K1pp GV2ME10K1pp GV2ME14K1pp GV2ME16K1pp
0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460
Add-on blocks
Description Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference GV2AF01 Weight kg 0.020
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/13. (2) Please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 110 220/230 230 230/240 a 50/60 Hz B7 F7 M7 P7 U7 c (4) BW3 (4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard. 380/400 Q7
Dimensions : page 1/12
Schemes : page 1/14
1/6
References


D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 ME, b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 K, b 1 combination block GV2AF01.
1
ME14K2 50 15 10/4 kW 6/5.5 kW ME16K2 15 8 6
Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA ME06K2 50 50 50 ME07K2 50 50 50 ME08K2 50 50 50 ME10K2 50 50 50
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-3 440 V 500 V 400/ 415V Setting range of thermal trips Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor circuitbreaker Reference Contactor Reference to be completed (2) LC2K06 Pre-assembled Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) GV2ME06K2pp kg 0.460 Weight
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5
A 11.6
A 22.5
GV2ME06
1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914
33.5 51 78 138 170
LC2K06 LC2K06 LC2K06 LC2K09 LC2K12
GV2ME07K2pp GV2ME08K2pp GV2ME10K2pp GV2ME14K2pp GV2ME16K2pp
0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460 0.460
GV2ME10K2pp
Add-on blocks
Description Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference GV2AF01 Weight kg 0.020
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/13. (2) Please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 110 220/230 230 230/240 a 50/60 Hz B7 F7 M7 P7 U7 c (4) BW3 (4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard. 380/400 Q7
Schemes : page 1/14
1/7
References

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination
1
Characteristics
This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2ME, b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 D, b 1 combination block GV2AF3.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Starter type
GV2
DM 102 to DM 110 kA kA kA 50 50 50
DM 114
DM 116
DM 120
DM 121
DM 122
DM 132
Breaking capacity (lq) (1)
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1
400/415 V 440 V 500 V
50 15 6
15 8 6
15 8 6
15 6 4
15 6 4
10 6 4
References

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-3 440 V 500 V 400/ 415V Setting range of thermal trips Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor circuitbreaker Reference Contactor Reference to be completed (2) LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D12pp LC1D18pp LC1D25pp LC1D25pp LC1D32pp Pre-assembled Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) GV2DM102pp (3) GV2DM103pp (3) GV2DM104pp (3) GV2DM105pp (3) GV2DM106pp (3) GV2DM107pp (3) GV2DM108pp (3) GV2DM110pp (3) GV2DM114pp (3) GV2DM116pp GV2DM120pp GV2DM121pp GV2DM122pp GV2DM132pp kg 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.596 0.601 0.606 0.646 0.646 0.651 Weight
GV2DM102pp
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5
A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432
A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416
GV2ME02 GV2ME03 GV2ME04 GV2ME05 GV2ME06 GV2ME07 GV2ME08 GV2ME10 GV2ME14 GV2ME16 GV2ME20 GV2ME21 GV2ME22 GV2ME32
Add-on blocks
Mounting of Sold in Unit Weight GV2 lots of reference kg Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 5 rail 10 GV2 - AF3 0.016 GV2 - AF4 0.016 Mounting plate 10 LAD 311 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/13. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 220 a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 c (4) BD (3) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/17. (4) Only available for GV2DM. Coil with integral suppression device as standard. 230 P7 Description
Schemes : page 24536/4
1/8
References

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 ME, b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 D, b 1 combination block GV2AF3.
1
DM221 15 6 4 DM222 15 6 4 DM232 10 6 4
Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA DM202 to DM210 50 50 50 DM214 50 15 10 DM216 15 8 6 DM220 15 8 6
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing (2)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-3 440 V 500 V 400/ 415V Setting range of thermal trips Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor circuitbreaker Reference GV2ME02 GV2ME03 GV2ME04 GV2ME05 GV2ME06 GV2ME07 GV2ME08 GV2ME10 GV2ME14 GV2ME16 GV2ME20 GV2ME21 GV2ME22 GV2ME32 Contactor Reference to be completed (3) LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D12pp LC2D18pp LC2D25pp LC2D25pp LC2D32pp Pre-assembled Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (4) GV2DM202pp GV2DM203pp GV2DM204pp GV2DM205pp GV2DM206pp GV2DM207pp GV2DM208pp GV2DM210pp GV2DM214pp GV2DM216pp GV2DM220pp GV2DM221pp GV2DM222pp GV2DM232pp kg 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.963 0.973 0.983 1.063 1.063 1.073 Weight
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5
A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432
A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416
GV2DM202pp
Add-on blocks
Mounting of Sold in Unit Weight GV2 lots of reference kg Combination block between 5 rail 10 GV2 - AF3 0.016 circuit-breaker and contactor Mounting plate 10 GV2 - AF4 0.016 LAD 311 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page 1/7. (2) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/19. (3) See page 5/62. (4) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 220 230 a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 c (5) BD (5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard. Description
Schemes : page 1/14
1/9
References

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination
1
Characteristics
This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2P, b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 D, b 1 combination block GV2AF3.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1
GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA
DP102 to DP110 130 130 130
DP114 130 130 50
DP116 130 50 42
DP120 50 20 10
DP121 50 20 10
DP122 50 20 10
DP132 50 20 10
References

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-3 440 V 500 V 400/ 415V Setting range of thermal trips Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor circuitbreaker Reference Contactor Reference to be completed (2) LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D25pp LC1D25pp LC1D25pp LC1D25pp LC1D32pp LC1D50App LC1D65App LC1D50App LC1D65App LC1D65App Pre-assembled Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) GV2DP102pp GV2DP103pp GV2DP104pp GV2DP105pp GV2DP106pp GV2DP107pp GV2DP108pp GV2DP110pp GV2DP114pp GV2DP116pp GV2DP120pp GV2DP121pp GV2DP122pp GV2DP132pp kg 0.686 0.686 0.686 0.686 0.686 0.686 0.696 0.736 0.736 0.741 0.736 0.741 0.741 0.741 1.725 1.730 1.725 1.730 1.730 Weight
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 37
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30
A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 3040 3040 3750 3750 4865
A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416 560 560 700 700 910
GV2P02 GV2P03 GV2P04 GV2P05 GV2P06 GV2P07 GV2P08 GV2P10 GV2P14 GV2P16 GV2P20 GV2P21 GV2P22 GV2P32 GV3 P401 (4) GV3 P401 (4) GV3 P501 (4) GV3 P501 (4) GV3 P651 (4)
GV2DP102pp
Add-on blocks
Mounting of Sold in Unit Weight GV2 lots of reference kg Combination block between 5 rail 10 GV2 - AF3 0.016 circuit-breaker and contactor GV2 - AF4 0.016 Mounting plate 10 LAD 311 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/13. (2) See page 5/62. (3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 220 230 a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 c (5) BD (4) Circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block, which is required for vertical mounting. For side by side mounting, use a GV3 P circuit-breaker with terminal blocks and the GV3S set of S-shape busbars (see page 5/85). (5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard. Dimensions : page 1/13 Schemes : page 1/15 Description
GV3P651 + LC1D65App
1/10
References

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises: b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2P, b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 D, b 1 combination block GV2AF3.
1
DP221 50 20 10 DP222 50 20 10 DP232 50 20 10
Characteristics
Starter type Breaking capacity (lq) (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 GV2 400/415 V 440 V 500 V kA kA kA DP202 to DP210 130 130 130 DP214 130 130 50 DP216 130 50 42 DP220 50 20 10
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-3 440 V 500 V 400/ 415V Setting range of thermal trips Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth For customer assembly Motor circuitbreaker Reference Contactor Reference to be completed (2) LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D09pp LC2D25pp LC2D25pp LC2D25pp LC2D25pp LC2D32pp LC2D50App LC2D65App LC2D50App LC2D65App LC2D65App Pre-assembled Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) GV2DP202pp GV2DP203pp GV2DP204pp GV2DP205pp GV2DP206pp GV2DP207pp GV2DP208pp GV2DP210pp GV2DP214pp GV2DP216pp GV2DP220pp GV2DP221pp GV2DP222pp GV2DP232pp kg 1.053 1.053 1.053 1.053 1.053 1.053 1.073 1.153 1.153 1.163 1.153 1.163 1.163 1.163 2.750 2.760 2.750 2.760 2.760 Weight
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30
kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 37
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30
A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 3040 3040 3750 3750 4865
A 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416 560 560 700 700 910
GV2P02 GV2P03 GV2P04 GV2P05 GV2P06 GV2P07 GV2P08 GV2P10 GV2P14 GV2P16 GV2P20 GV2P21 GV2P22 GV2P32 GV3 P401 (4) GV3 P401 (4) GV3 P501 (4) GV3 P501 (4) GV3 P651 (4)
GV2DP202pp
Add-on blocks
Mounting of Sold in Unit Weight GV2 lots of reference kg Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 5 rail 10 GV2 - AF3 0.016 GV2 - AF4 0.016 Mounting plate 10 LAD 311 (1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1L3, see page3/13. (2) See page 5/62. (3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 220 230 a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 c (5) BD (4) Circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block, which is required for vertical mounting. For side by side mounting, use a GV3 P circuit-breaker with terminal blocks and the GV3S set of S-shape busbars (see page 5/85). (5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard. Schemes : page 1/15 Description
GV3P651 + LC2D65App
1/11
Dimensions, mounting


GV2 MEppKppp
On mounting rail AM1DE200
GV2MEppK1pp
GV2MEppK2pp
152
11
66 87
45
90
GV2DMppppp
On mounting rail AM1DE200 With adapter plate LAD311 GV2DM1pppp GV2DM2pppp
125 3
152
c1 c
c1 c d1 d
GV2 b c c1
234
45
DMp02pp to DMp20pp 176.4 99.6 94.1
c DMp21pp to DMp32pp 186.8 105.9 100.4 GV2 c c1 d d1
90
DMp02pp to DMp20pp 135.6 130.1 112.5 107 DMp21pp to DMp32pp 141.9 136.4 112.5 107
GV2DPppppp
On mounting rail AM1DE200 With adapter plate LAD311 GV2DP1pppp GV2DP2pppp
125 3
c1 c d1 d
234
45
c1 c
GV2 b c c1 d d1 DPp02pp to DPp08pp 176.4 105.6 100.1 100.5 95 DPp10pp to DPp32pp 186.8 111.9 106.4 100.5 95 GV2 c c1
90
DPp02pp to DPp08pp 141.6 136.5 DPp10pp to DPp32pp 147.9 142.4
References: pages 1/6 to 1/11
1/12
Dimensions, mounting (continued)

GV3 Ppp1 + LC1 D40AD65A (for customer assembly)

Vertical mounting (1) Side by side mounting with S-shape busbar system GV3 S (2)
1
138
120
+3 0
231
136 141 120
119
136 141
55
GV3 Ppp1 + LC2 D40AD65A (for customer assembly)

Vertical mounting (1) Side by side mounting with S-shape busbar system GV3 S (2)
233
138
183
119 (1) For several side-by-side motor starters, the maximum current allowed is equal to the nominal current under 400 V. Example: 55 A for a 30 kW motor under 400 V, for a GV3 P65 circuit-breaker and a LC1 D65A contactor association. (2) The maximum current allowed is equal to 90 % of maximum current. Example: 45 A for a LC1 D50A contactor.
1/13
A2 T1/2 T2/4 T3/6

14 22 21/NC 13/NO
14 13/NO
A1 1/L1 2/T1 3/L2 4/T2 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3

T3/6 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3
A2 T1/2 T2/4 3/L2 4/T2 3/L2 1/L1 2/T1 1/L1
A1

1/L1 3/L2
Schemes
GV2DM1pppp
GV2MEppK1pp
1/14

A2 A1 1 3 5 L3 6/T3 13/NO 21/NC 1 3 5 13/NO 21/NC A1
5/L3
A2 T1/2 T2/4 T3/6 14 3/L2 5/L3 13/NO 1/L1
A1 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
2 L1 2/T1 L2 4/T2
3/L2
1/L1
4 6 14 22 2 4 6 14 22 A2
GV2MEppK2pp
GV2DM2pppp
1/L1 T1/2 T2/4 T3/6 14 A2 A1 3/L2 5/L3 13/NO
GV2DM2-SCH-2-M
Schemes (continued)


GV2DP1pppp
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
GV2DP2pppp
1/L1
3/L2
1/L1 2/T1
3/L2 4/T2
5/L3 6/T3
L1 2/T1
L2 4/T2
13/NO
A2
A1
21/NC
L3 6/T3
5/L3
13/NO
21/NC
13/NO
A1
21/NC 22
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
14
22
A2
14
22
Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts

Control circuit a Control circuit c
A1
01
A1
GV2DP2-SCH-2-M
A1
14
A2
A1
A1
02
01
01
KM1
KM2
A1
02
A1
01
02
KM1
02
KM2
KM1
A2
KM2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
1/15
D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
0.06 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 37 45 55 75 90 110 Ie A 0.2 0.3 0.44 0.6 0.85 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 66 66 80 97 132 160 195 Iq (1) kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 15 15 15 10 50 50 50 15 25 25 25 35 35 35 440 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 37 37 45 45 50 75 90 110 132 Ie A 0.19 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.76 0.99 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 76 90 125 146 178 215
Circuit-breaker Reference Setting range of thermal trips A GV2 ME02 GV2 ME03 GV2 ME04 GV2 ME05 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 11.6 1.6.2.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 3040 3750 4865 4880 5680 4880 60100 60100 90150 90150 90150 132220 132220 132220
Contactor Reference (2)
500 V Iq (1) kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 8 8 8 6 6 50 50 50 25 10 25 25 35 35 35 35 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 55 75 90 110 132 160 0.88 1.2 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.9 5.2 6.8 9.2 12.4 13.9 17.6 23 28 33 44 53 64 78 78 106 128 156 184 224 50 50 50 50 5050 50 10 10 6 6 4 4 4 10 10 10 18 4 18 30 30 30 30 30 P kW Ie A Iq (1) kA
LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09 LC1 K09 or LC1 D09 LC1 K12 or LC1 D12 LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D40A LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D65A LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F185 LC1 F265 LC1 F225
GV2 ME06 GV2 ME06 GV2 ME07 GV2 ME08 GV2 ME10 GV2 ME14 GV2 ME16 GV2 ME20 GV2 ME21 GV2 ME22 GV2 ME32 GV3 P40 GV3 P50 GV3 P65 GV7 RE80 GV3 ME80 GV7 RE80 GV7 RE100 GV7 RE100 GV7 RE150 GV7 RE150 GV7 RE150 GV7 RE220 GV7 RE220 GV7 RE220
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
1/16
D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 Ie A 0.2 0.3 0.44 0.6 0.85 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 41 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 Iq (1) kA 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 50 50 50 35 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 440 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 3 4 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 37 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 Ie A 0.19 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.76 0.99 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.42 5.77 4.42 5.77 7.9 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 Iq (1) kA 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 50 50 130 130 15 130 50 50 20 20 25 50 50 50 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 500 V P kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 3 4 5.5 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 30 37 45 55 90 110 132 160 Ie A 0.88 1.2 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.9 5.2 5.2 6.8 9.2 6.8 9.2 12.4 13.9 17.6 23 28 33 44 53 44 53 64 78 128 156 184 224 Iq (1) kA 130 130 130 130 130 130 50 130 10 10 50 50 42 42 10 10 10 10 10 10 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Circuit-breaker Reference Setting range of thermal trips A GV2 P02 or GV2 ME02 GV2 P03 or GV2 ME03 GV2 P04 or GV2 ME04 GV2 P05 or GV2 ME05 GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06 GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06 GV2 P07 or GV2 ME07 GV2 P08 or GV2 ME08 GV2 P10 or GV2 ME10 GV2 ME10 GV2 P10 GV2 P14 or GV2 ME14 GV2 ME14 GV2 P14 GV2 P16 or GV2 ME16 GV2 P20 or GV2 ME20 GV2 P21 or GV2 ME21 GV2 P22 or GV2 ME22 GV2 P22 GV2 P32 or GV2 ME32 GV3 P40 GV3 P40 GV3 P50 GV3 P50 GV3 P65 GV3 P65 GV7 RS40 GV7 RS50 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS50 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS100 GV7 RS150 GV7 RS220 GV7 RS220 GV7 RS220 0.160.25 0.250.4 0.40.63 0.631 11.6 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 46.3 46.3 610 610 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2025 2540 3040 3040 3750 3750 4865 4865 2540 3050 4880 3050 4880 4880 4880 4880 4880 60100 90150 132220 132220 132220
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D12 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D32 LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D65A LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11. (2) Combinations with circuit-breaker GV2 ME are type 2 coordinated only at 400/415 V and 440 V. (3) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
1/17
D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 Ie A 0.2 0.3 0.44 0.6 0.85 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 15 15 15 10 50 50 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 0.55 0.76 1 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.4 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.5 39 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 8 8 8 6 6 50 50 440 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 Ie A 0.19 0.28 0.37 Iq kA 50 50 50
Circuit-breaker Reference Rating A GV2 LE03 GV2 LE03 GV2 LE03 GV2 LE04 GV2 LE04 GV2 LE05 GV2 LE05 GV2 LE06 GV2 LE07 GV2 LE07 GV2 LE08 GV2 LE08 GV2 LE10 GV2 LE10 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE16 GV2 LE16 GV2 LE20 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE32 GV3 L40 GV3 L50 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.63 0.63 1 1 1.6 2.5 2.5 4 4 6.3 6.3 10 10 10 14 14 18 25 25 32 40 50 Irm (1) A 5 5 5 8 8 13 13 22.5 33.5 33.5 51 51 78 78 138 138 138 170 170 223 327 327 416 560 700
Contactor
Thermal overload relay Setting range A 0.160.23 0.230.36 0.360.54 0.360.54 0.540.8 0.540.8 0.81.2 1.21.8 1.21.8 1.82.6 2.63.7 3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 5.58 5.58 811.5 1014 1218 1218 1624 1624 2332 3040 3750
500 V P kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 Ie A 0.88 1.2 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.9 5.2 6.8 12.4 13.9 17.6 23 28 33 44 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 10 6 6 4 4 4 10 10
Reference (2) Reference
LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K06 LC1 K09 LC1 K09 LC1 K09 LC1 K12 LC1 D18 LC1 D18 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D40A LC1 D50A
LR2 K0302 LR2 K0303 LR2 K0304 LR2 K0304 LR2 K0305 LR2 K0305 LR2 K0306 LR2 K0307 LR2 K0307 LR2 K0308 LR2 K0310 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0316 LR2 K0321 LRD 21 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 22 LRD 32 LRD 340 LRD 350
(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
1/18

(continued)
0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination (continued)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 Ie A 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 230 280 350 388 430 Iq kA 50 70 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 440 V P kW 37 37 45 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 280 Ie A 51.5 64 76 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 470 Iq kA 50 50 65 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 500 V P kW 37 37 45 55 50 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 Ie A 53 53 64 78 90 106 128 156 184 224 280 310 344 432 488 Iq kA 10 10 50 25 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) GV3 L65 GV3 L65 GV3 L65
Circuit-breaker Reference Rating A 65 65 65 80 100 100 150 150 150 150 220 220 220 220 220 320 320 320 320 320 320 500 500 500 500 500 500 Irm (1) A 910 910 910 1040 1300 1200 1500 1350 1800 1950 2200 2640 2420 2640 2860 3200 2860 3520 4160 3840 4160 5000 5550 5000 5500 6000 6500
Contactor
Thermal overload relay Setting range A 4865 4865 4865 6380 80104 80104 95120 95120 110140 132220 132220 132220 132220 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 200330 200330 300500 300500 300500 300500 300500 300500 380630
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC1 D65A LC1 D65A LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F330 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F500
LRD 365 LRD 365 LRD 3361 LRD 3363 LRD 3365 LRD 4365 LRD 4367 LRD 4367 LRD 4369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7381
NS80HMA NS100pMA (3) NS100pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3)
(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2. (3) Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code: Breaking performance Iq (kA) 400/415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V Code NS100pMA 25 25 18 8 N 70 65 50 10 H NS160pMA and NS250pMA 36 35 30 8 N 70 65 50 10 H NS400pMA and NS630pMA 70 65 50 20 H 130 130 70 35 L
1/19

(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 Ie A 0.2 0.3 0.44 0.6 0.85 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 Iq kA 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 50 50 50 50 440 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 3 4 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 Ie A 0.19 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.76 0.99 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.42 5.77 4.42 5.77 7.9 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 Iq kA
Circuit-breaker Reference Rating Irm (1) A GV2 L03 or LE03 GV2 L03 or LE03 GV2 L04 or LE04 GV2 L05 or LE05 GV2 L05 or LE05 GV2 L06 or LE06 GV2 L07 or LE07 GV2 L08 or LE08 GV2 L08 or LE08 GV2 L10 or LE10 GV2 LE10 GV2 L10 GV2 L14 or LE14 GV2 LE14 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 or LE14 GV2 LE14 GV2 L14 GV2 LE14 GV2 L14 GV2 L16 GV2 L16 GV2 L20 GV2 L22 GV2 L22 GV3 L32 GV3 L32 0.4 0.4 0.63 1 1 1.6 2.5 4 4 6.3 6.3 6.3 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 14 14 18 25 25 32 32 A 5 5 8 13 13 22.5 33.5 51 51 78 78 78 10 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 170 170 223 327 327 448 448
Contactor
Thermal overload relay Setting range A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.40.63 0.631 11.7 11.7 1.62.5 2.54 46 46 46 46 5.58 5.58 5.58 710 710 710 710 710 913 1218 1218 1624 1624 2332 2332
500 V P kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 3 3 4 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 Ie A 0.88 1.2 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.9 5.2 5.2 5.2 6.8 6.8 9.2 9.2 12.4 13.9 17.6 23 28 Iq kA 130 130 130 130 130 130 13 50 130 10 50 10 50 42 42 10 10 10
130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 50 50 130 130 15 130 50 50 20 20 50
LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D12 LC1 D12 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D25 LC1 D32 LC1 D40A LC1 D65A
LRD 02 LRD 03 LRD 04 LRD 05 LRD 06 LRD 06 LRD 07 LRD 08 LRD 10 LRD 10 LRD 10 LRD 10 LRD 12 LRD 12 LRD 12 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 16 LRD 21 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 22 LRD 332 LRD 332
1/20

(continued)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 18.5 22 Ie A 35 41 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 230 280 350 388 430 Iq kA 50 50 50 70 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 440 V P kW 18.5 22 37 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 Ie A 32.5 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 65 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 500 V P kW 30 37 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 Ie A 44 53 78 106 128 156 184 224 280 310 344 432 488 Iq kA 10 10 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) GV3 L40 GV3 L40 GV3 L50 GV3 L50 GV3 L65 GV3 L65
Circuit-breaker Rating Irm (1) A 40 40 50 50 65 65 80 100 100 150 150 150 150 150 220 220 220 220 320 320 320 320 320 320 500 500 500 500 A 560 560 700 700 910 910 1000 1040 1300 1500 1050 1950 1950 1200 2420 1540 2860 2200 3520 2200 4000 4000 3500 3500 5500 4500 6250 5000
Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 3040 3040 3750 3750 4865 4865 6380 6380 60100 90150 90150 90150 90150 90150 132220 132220 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 300500 200330 300500 300500 300500 300500 380630
Reference
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D65A LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 D150 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F500 LC1 F630
LRD 340 LRD 340 LRD 350 LRD 350 LRD 365 LRD 3359 LRD 3363 LRD 3363 LR9 D5367 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7381
NS80HMA NS100pMA (3) NS100pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3)
(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2. (3) Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code: Breaking performance Iq (kA) 400/415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V Code NS100pMA 25 25 18 8 N 70 65 50 10 H NS160pMA and NS250pMA 36 35 30 8 N 70 65 50 10 H NS400pMA and NS630pMA 70 65 50 20 H 130 130 70 35 L
1/21

D.O.L starters with fuse protection (NF C or DIN fuses, type aM)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 0.06 Ie A 0.2 440 V P kW 0.06 Ie A 0.19 500 V P kW
Fuse carrier (1) (basic block) Reference
aM fuses Size Rating A
Thermal overload relay class 10 Reference Setting range A 0.160.23
Ie A LS1D32 10 x 38 2 LC1K06 LR2K0302
0.09
0.28
LS1D32
10 x 38
LC1K06
LR2K0303
0.230.36
0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4
0.3 0.44 0.6 0.85 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5
0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4
0.37 0.55 0.76 1 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9
0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
0.88 1.2 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.9 5.2 6.8 9.2
LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32
10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38
2 2 2 2 4 4
LC1K06 LC1K06 LC1K06 LC1K06 LC1K06 LC1K06
LR2K0304 LR2K0305 LR2K0306 LR2K0307 LR2K0308 LR2K0310
0.360.54 0.540.8 0.81.2 1.21.8 1.82.6 2.63.7
LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32
10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38
6 8 8 12
LC1K06 LC1K06 LC1K09 LC1K09
LR2K0312 LR2K0312 LR2K0314 LR2K0316
3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 811.5
(1)For breaking under load, add a rotary switch-disconnector. (2)For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
1/22

(continued)


Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 Ie A 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 440 V P kW 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 Ie A 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 500 V P kW 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 Ie A 12.4 13.9 17.6 23 28 33 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 Fuse carrier (1) (basic block) Reference
aM fuses Size Rating A 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 16 16 20
Thermal overload relay classe 10 Reference Setting range A 1014 1218 1218
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC1K12 LC1D18 LC1D25
LR2K0321 LRD21 LRD21
GK1EK GK1EK GK1EK
14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51
25 32 40
LC1D25 LC1D32 LC1D40
LRD22 LRD32 LRD3355
1624 2332 3040
22 30 37 (3) 45 55
41 55 66 80 97
22 30 37 45 55
39 51.5 64 76 90
30 37 45 55 75
44 53 64 78 106
GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK
22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58
50 80 80 80 80 100 100 125 125
LC1D50 LC1D50 LC1D65 LC1D65 LC1D80 LC1D80 LC1D95 LC1D115 LC1D115
LRD3357 LRD3359 LRD3359 LRD3361 LRD3361 LRD3363 LRD3365 LRD4365 LRD4367
3750 4865 4865 5570 5570 6380 8093 80104 95120
(1)For breaking under load, add a rotary switch-disconnector. (2)For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2. (3)400 V maximum.
1/23

(continued)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 Ie A 0.2 0.3 0.44 0.6 0.85 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 230 280 350 388 430 540 440 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400 Ie A 0.19 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.76 1 1.36 1.68 2.37 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 505 549 611 500 V P kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400
Switchdisconnector Reference (1)
aM fuses Size Rating A
Thermal overload relay classe 10 Reference Setting range A 0.160.25 0.250.4 0.40.63 0.631 11.7 1.62.5 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1218 1624 2332 3040 3750 4865 4865 4865 5570 6380 60100 8093 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 200330 300500 300500 380630 380630 380630
Ie A 0.88 1.2 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.9 5.2 6.8 9.2 12.4 13.9 17.6 23 28 33 44 53 64 78 106 128 156 184 224 280 310 344 432 488 552 GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpL GSpL GSpN GSpN GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GS2S GS2S GS2S GS2S GS2V 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 T0 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 T3 T4 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 6 8 10 16 16 20 25 3 40 50 80 80 80 80 100 100 100 125 160 200 250 315 315 400 400 500 500 630 630 800 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D12 LC1D18 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D32 LC1D40A LC1D50A LC1D65A LC1D65A LC1D65A LC1D95 LC1D80 LC1D115 LC1D95 LC1D150 LC1D150 LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F500 LC1F630 LC1F630 LRD02 LRD03 LRD04 LRD05 LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD14 LRD16 LRD21 LRD21 LRD22 LRD32 LRD340 LRD350 LRD365 LRD365 LRD365 LRD3361 LRD3363 LR9D5367 LRD3365 LR9D5369 LR9D5369 LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 LR9F7381 LR9F7381 LR9F7381
(1)GSp: GS1 for direct operator or GS2 for external operator. (2)For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
1/24

(continued)

0.75 to 400 kW at 690 V: type 2 coordination

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 P kW 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400 Ie A 1.1 1.6 2.1 2.8 3.8 4.9 6.7 8.9 12.8 17 21 24 32 39 47 57 77 93 113 134 162 203 224 250 313 354 400 GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpJ GSpJ GSpKK GSpKK GSpKK GSpL GSpN GSpN GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GS2S Switchdisconnector
aM fuses Size 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 Rating A 2 2 4 4 6 6 8 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 125 160 200 250 250 315 355 400 500
Contactor Reference (2) LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D32 LC1D40A LC1D40A LC1D65A LC1D80 LC1D115 LC1D115 LC1D150 LC1F185 LC1F265 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F630 LC1F630
Thermal overload relay classe 10 Reference LRD06 LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD16 LRD16 LRD22 LRD22 LRD332 LRD340 LRD350 LR2 D3357 LR2 D3359 LR2 D3363 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 Setting range A 11.6 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 2.54 46 5.58 913 913 1624 1624 2332 3040 3750 3750 4865 6380 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 300500 300500 300500
Reference (1)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 T00 T00 T00 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3
(1)GSp: GS1 for direct operator or GS2 for external operator. (2)For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
1/25
Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Maximum operating rate: LC3 K: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 37 45 55 75 90 110 Ie A 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 66 66 80 97 132 160 195 IrD (1) A 2 2.9 3.8 4.9 6.4 8.6 10 12 17 20 24 33 40 40 47 58 78 95 115 Iq (2) kA 50 50 50 50 15 15 15 15 10 50 50 50 50 25 25 25 35 35 35 440 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 30 37 37 45 45 55 75 90 110 132 Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 51.5 64 64 76 76 90 125 146 178 215 IrD (1) A 1.8 2.6 3.3 4.6 6 7.9 9.8 12 15 19 23 30 30 37 37 44 44 52 72 84 103 124 Iq (2) kA 50 50 50 15 8 8 8 6 6 50 50 50 50 50 25 10 25 25 35 35 35 35 GV2 ME08 GV2 ME10 GV2 ME14 GV2 ME16 GV2 ME20 GV2 ME20 GV2 ME21 GV2 ME22 GV2 ME32 GV3 P40 GV3 P50 GV3 P50 GV3 P65 GV3 P65 GV7 RE80 GV3 ME80 GV7 RE80 GV7 RE100 GV7 RE150 GV7 RE150 GV7 RE220 GV7 RE220 Circuit-breaker Reference Setting range of thermal trips A 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1318 1723 2025 2432 3040 3750 3750 4865 4865 4880 5680 4880 60100 90150 90150 132220 132220 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K09 LC3 D12A LC3 D12A LC3 D12A LC3 D18A LC3 D18A LC3 D32A LC3 D32A LC3 D32A 3 x LC1 D40A (3) 3 x LC1 D40A (3) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (3) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (3) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (3) LC3 D80 LC3 D115 LC3 D115 LC3 D150 Stardelta contactors Reference
(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection. (2) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11. (3) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
1/26
Combination starters or customer assembly

(continued)
Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
Maximum operating rate: LC1 D: 30 starts/hour; LC1 F: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC1 D: 30 seconds; LC1 F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 Ie A 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 Iq kA 130 130 130 130 130 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 70 70 70 70 70 70 440 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 Iq (1) kA 130 130 130 130 50 50 20 20 50 50 50 50 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 GV2 P08 GV2 P10 GV2 P10 GV2 P14 GV2 P14 GV2 P16 GV2 P16 GV2 P20 GV2 P21 GV2 P22 GV3 P32 GV3 P40 GV3 P40 GV3 P50 GV3 P50 GV3 P65 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS80 GV7 RS100 GV7 RS100 GV7 RS150 GV7 RS150 GV7 RS220 GV7 RS220 Circuit-breaker Reference Setting range of thermal trips A 2.54 46.3 4...6.3 610 610 914 914 1318 1723 2025 2332 3040 3040 3750 3750 4865 4880 4880 60100 60100 90150 90150 132220 132220 3 x LC1 D09 (2) 3 x LC1 D18 (3) 3 x LC1 D18 (3) 3 x LC1 D18 (3) 3 x LC1 D18 (3) 3 x LC1 D25 (3) 3 x LC1 D25 (3) 3 x LC1 D25 (3) 3 x LC1 D25 (3) 3 x LC1 D25 (3) 3 x LC1 D40A (4) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (3) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (4) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (3) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (4) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (4) 3 x LC1 D80 (5) 3 x LC1 D80 (5) 3 x LC1 D115 (6) 3 x LC1 D115 (6) 3 x LC1 D150 (6) 3 x LC1 D150 (6) 3 x LC1 F185 (7) 3 x LC1 F225 (7) Stardelta contactors Reference
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11. (2) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D09, star-delta starter kit LAD 91217 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76. (3) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D18 or LC1 D25, star-delta starter kit LAD 93217 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76. (4) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76. (5) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D80, star-delta starter kit LA9 D8017 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76. (6) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D115 or LC1 D150, see page 1/41. (7) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 F185 or LC1 F225, see pages 1/47 and 1/49.
1/27
Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Maximum operating rate: LC3 K and LC3 F: 12 starts/hour; LC3 D: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC3 K and LC3 D: 30 seconds; LC3 F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 Ie A 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 230 280 350 388 480 540 IrD (1) A 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 12 16 20 24 33 40 47 58 78 96 116 139 165 204 225 278 322 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 15 15 15 15 10 50 50 50 70 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 440 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 375 Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 505 518 575 IrD (1) Iq A 1.8 3 3 5 6 8 1 12 15 19 23 30 37 44 52 72 85 103 125 148 186 204 233 295 300 334 kA 50 50 50 50 15 8 8 8 6 50 50 50 50 65 65 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) GV2 LE08 GV2 LE10 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE10 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE16 GV2 LE16 GV2 LE20 GV2 LE16 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE20 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE32 GV3 L40 GV3 L50 GV3 L65 GV3 L65 GV3 L65 NS80HMA NS80HMA NS80HMA NS160pMA (3) NS100pMA (3) NS100pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) C801p+STR35ME C801p+STR35ME C801p+STR35ME A 4 6.3 10 6.3 10 10 14 14 18 14 25 18 25 25 32 40 50 65 65 65 80 80 80 150 100 100 150 150 220 220 220 320 500 320 320 500 500 500 800 800 800 A 51 78 138 78 138 138 170 170 223 170 327 223 327 327 384 560 700 910 910 910 640 800 640 1200 800 1200 1200 1200 1760 1760 1760 2240 3150 2240 2560 3150 3500 4000 4000 4500 5000 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K06 LC3 K09 LC3 K09 LC3 D12A LC3 K12 LC3 K12 LC3 K12 LC3 D18A LC3 D18A LC3 D18A LC3 D32A LC3 D32A LC3 D32A 3 x LC1 D40A (4) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (4) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (4) 3 x LC1 D40A (4) LC3 D80 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (4) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (4) LC3 D80 LC3 D115 LC3 D115 LC3 D150 LC3 D115 LC3 D150 LC3 F225 LC3 D150 LC3 F185 LC3 F225 LC3 F265 LC3 F330 LC3 F330 LC3 F330 LC3 F400 LR2 K0308 LR2 K0310 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0316 LR2 K0316 LRD 16 LR2 K0316 LR2 K0321 LR2 K0321 LRD 21 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 32 LRD 32 LRD 35 LRD 340 LRD 350 LRD 365 LRD 350 LRD 3363 LRD 350 LRD 365 LRD 3363 LRD 4365 LRD 4365 LRD 4369 LRD 4369 LR9 D5369 LR9 F5371 LRD 4369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 Circuit-breaker Reference Rating Irm (2) Star-delta contactors Reference Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 1.82.6 2.63.7 3.75.5 3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 5.58 811.5 811.5 913 811.5 1014 1014 1218 1218 1624 2332 2332 3038 3040 3750 4865 3750 6380 3750 4865 6380 80104 80104 110140 110140 90150 132220 110140 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 200330 300500
(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection. (2) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (3) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code: Breaking performance Iq (kA) 400/415 V 440 V Code NS100pMA 25 25 E 70 65 S NS160pMA, NS250pMA 36 35 E 70 65 S NS400pMA, NS630pMA 70 65 H 130 130 L C801p+STR35ME 70 65 H 150 100 L
(4) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
1/28

(continued)
Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate thermal overload relay
Maximum operating rate: LC3 D: 30 starts/hour; LC3 F: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC3 D: 30 seconds; LC3 F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie Iq P Ie kW A kA kW A 130 1.5 3.06 1.5 3.6 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 230 280 350 388 430 130 130 130 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 70 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 Circuit-breaker Reference Iq kA 130 130 130 20 20 20 20 20 50 50 50 50 50 65 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) Rating Irm (1) A 4 6.3 10 10 14 18 25 25 32 40 40 50 50 65 65 80 100 150 150 150 220 220 220 320 320 320 500 500 500 A 51 78 138 138 170 223 327 327 448 560 560 700 700 910 910 640 800 1200 1200 1200 1760 1760 1760 2240 2560 2880 3150 3500 4000 Star-delta contactors Reference Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 2.54 46 710 913 913 1218 1218 1624 2332 3040 3040 3750 3750 4865 4865 6380 60100 90150 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 300500 300500 300500 300500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GV2 L08 GV2 L10 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L16 GV2 L20 GV2 L22 GV2 L22 GV3 L32 GV3 L40 GV3 L40 GV3 L50 GV3 L50 GV3 L65 GV3 L65 NS80HMA NS100pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS160pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS250pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS400pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3) NS630pMA (3)
3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D18 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D25 3 x LC1 D40A (2) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (2) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (2) 2 x LC1 D50A + 1 x LC1 D40A (2) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (2) 2 x LC1 D65A + 1 x LC1 D40A (2) 3 x LC1 D80 3 x LC1 D80 3 x LC1 D115 3 x LC1 D115 3 x LC1 D150 3 x LC1 D150 3 x LC1 F185 3 x LC1 F225 3 x LC1 F225 3 x LC1 F265 3 x LC1 F330 3 x LC1 F330 3 x LC1 F400 3 x LC1 F400 3 x LC1 F500
LRD 08 LRD 10 LRD 14 LRD 16 LRD 16 LRD 21 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 332 LRD 340 LRD 340 LRD 350 LRD 350 LRD 365 LRD 3359 LRD 3363 LR9 D5367 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 D5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7379
(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip. (2) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76. (3) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code: Breaking performance Iq (kA) NS100pMA NS160pMA, NS250pMA NS400pMA, NS630pMA 400/415 V 25 70 36 70 70 130 440 V 25 65 35 65 65 130 Code E S E S H L
1/29

Star-delta starters with fuse protection (NF C or DIN fuses)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Maximum operating rate: LC3K and LC3F: 12 starts/hour; LC3D: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC3K and LC3D: 30 seconds; LC3F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P Ie IrD (1) Iq kW A A kA 2 50 1.5 3.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 220 280 315 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 35 42 57 69 81 100 135 165 200 240 285 388 480 555 3 4 5 6 9 10 12 16 20 24 33 40 47 58 78 95 115 139 165 225 278 322 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Fuse carrier (basic block) Reference Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 401 505 518 575 IrD (1) A 2 3 3 5 6 8 10 12 15 19 23 30 37 44 52 72 84 103 124 148 185 233 293 300 334 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 aM fuses Size Rating Star-delta contactors Reference Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 1.82.6 2.63.7 2.63.7 3.75.5 3.75.5 5.58 811.5 913 913 1218 1624 1624 2332 2332 3040 3750 3750 3750 4865 5570 6380 80104 95120 95120 110140 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 200330 300500
440 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 375
LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 LS1D32 GK1EK GK1EK GK1EK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GK1FK GSpK GSpK GSpL GSpL GSpN GSpN GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GS2S GS2S GS2S GS2S
A 10 x 38 4 10 x 38 6 10 x 38 8 10 x 38 8 10 x 38 12 10 x 38 16 10 x 38 16 10 x 38 20 14 x 51 25 14 x 51 32 14 x 51 40 22 x 58 50 22 x 58 50 22 x 58 63 22 x 58 80 22 x 58 80 22 x 58 80 22 x 58 100 22 x 58 100 22 x 58 125 T0 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 T3 160 160 200 200 250 315 400 400 500 500 630 630
LC3K06 LC3K06 LC3K06 LC3K06 LC3K06 LC3K06 LC3K09 LC3D12A LC3D12A LC3D18A LC3D18A LC3D18A LC3D32A LC3D32A LC3D40 LC3D40 LC3D50 LC3D50 LC3D50 LC3D50 LC3D80 LC3D115 LC3D115 LC3D115 LC3D150 LC3F185 LC3F225 LC3F265 LC3F265 LC3F330 LC3F330 LC3F400
LR2K0308 LR2K0310 LR2K0310 LR2K0312 LR2K0312 LR2K0314 LR2K0316 LRD16 LRD16 LRD21 LRD22 LRD22 LRD32 LRD32 LRD3355 LRD3357 LRD3357 LRD3357 LRD3359 LRD3361 LRD3363 LRD4365 LRD4367 LRD4367 LRD4369 LR9F5371 LR9F5369 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7379
(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection.
1/30

Star-delta starters with fuse protection (NF C or DIN fuses)
Maximum operating rate: LC1D: 30 starts/hour; LC1F: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC1D: 30 seconds; LC1F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 440 V P Ie Iq P kW A kA kW 50 1.5 1.5 3.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 35 42 57 69 81 100 135 165 200 240 285 352 388 437 555 605 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400 SwitchaM fuses disconnector-fuse Reference Size Rating Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 32.8 39 51.5 64 76 90 125 146 178 215 256 321 353 401 505 549 611 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 A 4 6 8 10 16 16 25 32 40 50 80 80 80 100 125 125 160 160 200 250 315 315 400 500 500 630 800 800 Star-delta contactors Reference Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1624 2332 3040 3750 5570 6380 8093 60100 90150 90150 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 300500 300500 300500 380630 380630 380630
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpL GSpL GSpL GSpL GSpN GSpN GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GS2S GS2S GS2S GS2V GS2V
10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 T0 T0 T0 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 T4 T4
3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D12 3 x LC1D18 3 x LC1D25 3 x LC1D32 3 x LC1D40 3 x LC1D50 3 x LC1D65 3 x LC1D80 3 x LC1D80 3 x LC1D115 3 x LC1D115 3 x LC1D150 3 x LC1D150 3 x LC1F185 3 x LC1F185 3 x LC1F225 3 x LC1F265 3 x LC1F330 3 x LC1F330 3 x LC1F400 3 x LC1F500 3 x LC1F630 3 x LC1F630 3 x LC1F780
LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD14 LRD16 LRD21 LRD22 LRD32 LRD3355 LRD3357 LRD3361 LRD3363 LRD3365 LR9D5367 LR9D5369 LR9D5369 LR9D5369 LR9D5369 LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 LR9F7381 LR9F7381 LR9F7381
1/31

D.O.L. starters with fuse protection (BS fuses)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 415 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 22 30 45 55 80 100 110 140 160 220 257 270 375 Ie A 0.22 0.36 0.42 0.6 0.88 1 1.5 2 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14 18.1 21 28.5 42 57 81 100 138 182 196 250 285 388 450 460 610 440 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 22 30 45 55 80 100 110 140 160 220 257 270 375 Ie A 0.19 0.28 0.37 0.55 0.76 1 1.36 1.68 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20 26.5 39 51.5 76 90 132 162 178 226 256 353 412 433 577 500 V P A 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 22 30 45 55 80 100 110 140 160 220 257 270 375 425 Ie kA 1 1.2 1.5 2.6 3.8 5 6.5 9 12 13.9 18.4 23 33 45 65 80 116 143 156 200 220 310 362 380 508 556
Switchdisconnectorfuse Reference
BS fuses Size Rating A NIT 2 NIT 2 NIT 2 NIT 2 NIT 4 NIT 6 NIT 10 NIT 10 NIT 16 NIT 16 NIT 20 NIT 20 NIT 20M25 NIT 20M32 TIA 32M35 TIA 32M50 TIA 32M63 TIS 63M80 TIS 63M100 TIS 63M100 TIS 63M100
Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 0.160.25 0.250.4 0.40.63 0.631 0.631 11.7 1.62.5 2.54 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1218 1624 2332 3040 3750 4865 4865 6380 8093 90150 60100 90150 90150 132220 132220 132220 132220 200330 200330 300500 300500 300500 380630 380630
GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2LLB GS2LLB GS2LLB GS2LLB GS2LB GS2LB GS2LB GS2MMB GS2MMB GS2NB GS2NB GS2QQB GS2QQB GS2QQB GS2SB GS2SB GS2SB
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A3 A3 A3 A3 A4 A4 A4 A4 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B3 B3 B4 B4 B4 C2 C2 C2
LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D12 LC1D18 LC1D18 LC1D25 LC1D32 LC1D40 LC1D50 LC1D50 LC1D65
LRD02 LRD03 LRD04 LRD05 LRD05 LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD14 LRD16 LRD21 LRD21 LRD22 LRD32 LRD3355 LRD3357 LRD3359 LRD3359 LRD3363 LRD3365 LR9D5369 LR9D5367 LR9D5369 LR9D5369 LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 LR9F7381 LR9F7381
TCP 100M125 LC1D80 TCP 100M125 LC1D95 TCP 100M160 LC1D115 TCP 100M160 LC1D115 TF 200 TF 200M250 TF 200M250 TF 200M250 TF 200M315 TKF 315M355 TKF 315M355 TKF 315M355 TMF 400 TTM 500 TTM 500 TTM 630 LC1D150 LC1D150 LC1F185 LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F500 LC1F630
TMF 400M450 LC1F400
(1) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
1/32

(continued)

Star-delta starters with fuse protection (BS fuses)

Maximum operating rate: LC1D: 30 starts/hour; LC1F: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC1D: 30 seconds; LC1F: 20 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 415 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 22 30 45 55 80 100 110 140 160 220 257 270 375 Ie A 3.5 5 6.5 8.4 11 14.8 18.1 21 28.5 42 57 81 100 138 182 196 250 285 388 450 460 610 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 440 V P kW 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 22 30 45 55 80 100 110 140 160 220 257 270 375 Ie A 3.06 4.42 5.77 7.9 10.4 13.7 16.9 20.1 26.5 39 51.5 76 90 132 162 178 226 256 353 412 433 577 Iq kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS1DDB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2GB GS2LLB GS2LLB GS2LB GS2MMB GS2MMB GS2NB GS2QQB GS2QQB GS2SB GS2SB A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A3 A3 A3 A4 A4 B2 B2 B2 B3 B3 B4 C2 C2 A NIT 16 NIT 16 NIT 20 NIT 20 NIT 20M25 NIT 20M32 TIA 32M35 TIA 32M50 TIA 32M63 TIS 63M80 TIS 63M100 TIS 63M100 3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D09 3 x LC1D12 3 x LC1D18 3 x LC1D18 3 x LC1D25 3 x LC1D32 3 x LC1D40 3 x LC1D50 3 x LC1D65 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD14 LRD16 LRD21 LRD21 LRD22 LRD32 LRD3355 LRD3359 LRD3359 LRD3363 LR9D5369 LR9D5369 LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 LR9F7381 Switchdisconnectorfuse Reference BS fuses Size Rating Contactor Reference Thermal overload relay Reference Setting range A 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1218 1624 2332 3040 4865 4865 6380 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 300500 300500 380630
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TCP 100M125 3 x LC1D80 TCP 100M160 3 x LC1D115 TF 200M250 TF 200M250 TF 200M315 TFK 315M355 TFK 315M355 3 x LC1D150 3 x LC1F185 3 x LC1F225 3 x LC1F265 3 x LC1F330
TMF 400M450 3 x LC1F400 TTM 500 TTM 630 3 x LC1F500 3 x LC1F630
1/33
References

D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control 4 to 37 kW, (1), with isolating device, pre-assembled
References
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
526459
Utilisation category AC-3 Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz 220 V 380 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V kW kW kW kW 4 4 4 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 LC4D09App 15 18.5 22 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 37 45 5.5 9 11 15 22 30 37 45
500 V kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 22 30 37 55
660 V 690 V kW 18.5 30 33 37 45
Operational current 440 V up to A 9 12 18 25 32 40 50 65 80
Fuses to be fitted by the customer Type aM A 10 x 38 12 10 x 38 16 10 x 38 20 10 x 38 25 14 x 51 32 14 x 51 40 22 x 58 63 22 x 58 80 22 x 58 80 Size
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2)
Weight
LC4D09App LC4D12App LC4D18App LC4D25App LC4D32App LC4D40pp LC4D50pp LC4D65pp LC4D80pp
kg 0.870 0.870 1.150 1.580 2.630 2.930 3.200 3.340 3.650
Specifications
Pre-wired power and control circuit connections. 3-pole isolating device
(1) Thermal overload relay to be ordered separately (see pages 6/20 and 6/21). (2) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 50/60 Hz B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 220 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380 Q7 400 V7 415 N7 440 R7
For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes : page 1/35
1/34
Dimensions, schemes

1
D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control 4 to 37 kW, with isolating device, pre-assembled
Dimensions
D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, pre-assembled

LC4D09AD25A
1
LC4 b c1 without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts) with LA6DK10 with LADT, R, S with LADT, R, S and sealing cover D09AD18A 218 94 96 127 139 147 151 D25A 221 100 102 133 145 153 157
98 79
33
63
173
110
50
2 3 4 5 6
c1
= =
55 71 86
= =
LC4D32A LC4 c1 without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts) with LA6DK10 with LADT, R, S with LADT, R, S and sealing cover D32A 100 102 133 145 153 157
124
36
c1 =
LC4D40D80
88 90 165 =
110
c c1 c2
G a
LC4 a b b1 c c1 without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks with LA1DN (1 contact) with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts) with LA6DK with LADT, R, S with LADT, R, S and sealing cover c2 G
D40D65 281 143 45 130 124 129 149 157 169 177 181 100 263
D80 311 143 48 140 135 140 160 168 180 188 192 178 293
= 100/110
7 8 9 10
60
Scheme
D.O.L. starters
LC4D09A to D80
1/L1
- Q1
4 2 6
3/L2
- KM1
2 4 6
References : page 1/34
5/L3
b1
1/35
Presentation

Start-delta starters for motor control
Star-delta starting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Current 7
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 Speed
This method of starting is applicable to motors on which all 6 stator terminals are accessible and whose delta connection voltage corresponds to the mains voltage. Star-delta starting should be used for motors starting on no-load or having a low load torque and gradual build-up: - the starting torque in star connection is reduced to one third of the direct starting torque, i.e. about 50% of the rated torque. - the starting current in star connection is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated current. The transition from star to delta connection must occur when the machine has run up to speed. A too rapid build-up in load torque would cause the stabilised run-up speed to be too low and would therefore eliminate any advantage in this method of starting: this is the case with certain machines whose load torque depends on the machine speed (a characteristic of centrifugal machines, for example).
(1)
1 Starting in direct delta connection 2 Starting in star connection
Current 2,5
1
1,5
2
0,5
3
0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 Speed
All star-delta starters are supplied with a special LADS2 or LA2KT2p time delay relay which imposes a delay on the delta contactor during the transition period in order to allow the star contactor sufficient breaking time. For ratings D115 and D150, this function is performed by a time delay auxiliary contact block LADT2 and a control relay.
1 Starting in direct delta connection 2 Starting in star connection 3 Resistive torque of the machine
(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques. Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a proportion of the rated torque).
1/36
References

Star-delta starters for motor control 5.5 to 132 kW, (1), without isolating device, pre-assembled
Plate mounted starters

Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Mains voltage delta connection 220/ 380/ 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.

Auxiliary contacts available on each contactor line KM2 delta KM3 star KM1 Star delta mechanical interlock Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6
DF526460
kW 4 5.5 11 15 LC3 D32App 18.5
kW 7.5 11 18.5 25 37
kW 7.5 11 22 30 37
kW 7.5 11 22 30 37
(3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
1 1 1 1 1
With With With With Without With Without With Without With Without With Without With
LC3 D09App LC3 D12App LC3 D18App LC3 D32App LC3 D40pp LC3 D40ppA64 LC3 D50pp LC3 D50ppA64 LC3 D80pp LC3 D80ppA64 LC3 D115pp (4) LC3 D115ppA64 (4) LC3 D150pp (4) LC3 D150ppA64 (4)
kg 1.530 1.530 1.730 2.030 4.360 4.500 4.360 4.500 5.200 5.400 11.800 12.100 12.100 12.100
30
55
59
59
(3)
(3)
37
75
75
75
(3)
(3)
63
110
110
110
(3)
(3)
75
132
132
147
(3)
1 (3)
Rail mounted starters (35 mm 7 rail)

Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Mains voltage delta connection 220/ 380/ 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V Auxiliary contacts available on each contactor line KM2 delta KM3 star KM1 Star delta mechanical interlock Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Weight
kW 3 4
kW 5.5 7.5
kW 5.5 7.5
kW 5.5 7.5 1 1 With With LC3 K06pp LC3 K09pp
kg 0.740 0.740
7 8 9 10
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds

4 5.5 11 15 7.5 11 18.5 25 7.5 11 22 30 7.5 11 22 30 (3) (3) (3) (3) 1 1 1 1 With With With With LC3 D090App LC3 D120App LC3 D180App LC3 D320App 1.530 1.530 1.730 2.030
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current (see pages 6/20 and 6/21). (2) Standard control circuit voltages: Volts a 50/60 Hz 24 36 42 48 110 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 Star-delta starters LC3 K06 and K09 Code B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Star-delta starters LC3 D09A...D150, LC3 D090AD320A Code B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) One auxiliary contact block type LAD N can also be fitted, see page 5/79. (4) These starters consist of contactors LC1 D115 or D150 without connectors. Dimensions : pages 1/42 and 1/43 Schemes : page 1/43
1/37
1 2 3
KM2
4 5
KM3
a 1b 1c
KM1
6 7
KM2
KM1 KM3
8
1b
9 10
a 2 1c 1a
1/38
References
Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1), without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly
(on plate or on mounting rail) (2)
Starters for direct combination with a circuit-breaker

Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors (3) Mains voltagedelta connection 400/ 440 V 415V kW kW 7.5 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker

Contactors (basic references, to be completed by adding the voltage code) (4)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
line KM2 LC1D09pp LC1D12pp LC1D12pp LC1D12pp LC1D18pp
delta KM3 LC1D09pp LC1D12pp LC1D12pp LC1D12pp LC1D18pp
star KM1 LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp
Separate component
Description Mounting kit comprising: power circuit connections and 1 time delay contact block LADS2 Illustration item no. a Reference LAD912GV Weight kg 0.130
Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection

Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors (3) Mains voltage - delta connection 220/ 380/ 230V 400V 415V 440V kW kW kW kW Contactors (basic references, to be completed by adding the voltage code) (4) line KM2 LC1D09pp LC1D18pp (6) LC1D25pp (7) LC1D32pp LC1D40pp LC1D50pp LC1D80pp LC1D115pp LC1D150pp delta KM3 LC1D09pp LC1D12pp LC1D25pp (7) LC1D32pp LC1D40pp LC1D50pp LC1D80pp LC1D115pp LC1D150pp

Separate components (see below) star KM1 LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D09pp LC1D18pp LC1D40pp LC1D40pp LC1D50pp LC1D80pp LC1D115pp
4 5.5 11 15 18.5 30 37 63 75
7.5 11 18.5 25 37 55 75 110 132
7.5 11 22 30 37 59 75 110 132
7.5 11 22 30 37 59 75 110 147
Component types D09 D12 D18 D32 D40 D50 D80 D115 (5) D150 (5)
Separate components
Description Mounting kit comprising: - 1 time delay contact block LADS2 (D09D80) (3), - power circuit connections (D09D80), - screws and clamps for fixing contactors to the plate (D40D80). Illustration item no. 1a 1b 1c For components type (5) D09 and D12 D18 and D32 D40 and D50 D80 Equipment mounting plates 2 D09, D12, D18 D32 D40 and D50 D80 Reference LAD91217 LAD93217 LA9D5017 LA9D8017 LA9D12974 LA9D32974 LA9D40973 LA9D80973 Weight kg 0.180 0.310 0.380 0.680 0.150 0.180 0.300 0.300
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/20 and 6/21. (2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment. (3) See comments on page 1/36. (4) See page 5/62. (5) For D115 and D150 components, see illustration and separate parts on pages 1/40 and 1/41. (6) A D12 component is adequate for the application, but use of a D18 is recommended. (connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections). (7) A D18 component is adequate for the application, but use of a D25 is recommended. (connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).
Illustrations : page 1/38
Dimensions : pages 1/42 and 1/43
Schemes : page 1/43
1/39
13
12
11
10
1 2
14 6
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1/40
References (continued)
Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1), without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly
(on plate or mounting rail) (2)
Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection

Separate components (continued)
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks 1 N/O Control relay Time delay auxiliary contact blocks Lead sealing kit for time delay auxiliary contact blocks Thermal magnetic circuit-breaker for control circuit (200415 V) Set of 3 connectors for wider terminations (optional) Set of power connections with fixing accessories Spare volt free terminals Illustration For item no. use on 1 D115 (star) 3 4 5 D115, D150 D115, D150 D115, D150 No. Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit reference LADN10 CAD32pp (3) LADT2 LA9D901 Weight kg 0.020 0.320 0.060 0.005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
D115, D150
GB2CB05
0.060
D115, D150
LA9FG980
0.200
D115 D150
1 1 1 2
1 1 10 10 10 100 10 1 100 100
LA9D11517 LA9D15017 DZ3HA3 DZ3GA3 AB1BC9535 AB1AB8M35 AM1ED021 AM3PA65 AF1VA618 AF1VA410
0.800 1.050 0.007 0.006 0.236 0.005 0.210 1.950 0.006 0.002
D115, D150
Lug-connector terminal block End stop Mounting rail 5 35 mm Pre-slotted mounting plate Screw with captive washer
10 11 12 13 14
D115, D150 D115, D150 D115, D150 D115, D150 D115, D150
1 3 1 1 12 2
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/20 and 6/21. (2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment. (3) See page 7/21.
Schemes : page 1/43
1/41
Dimensions

Star-delta starters
Dimensions
1 2
Star-delta starters
Plate mounted, pre-assembled LC3K Pre-assembled: LC3D09AD32A For customer assembly: 3 x LC1D with components D09 to D32
124
KM2
110
94
150 175
90 a
3 4 5
On starters LC3D09A to D18A, a connection block is mounted on the upper part of contactor KM2, increasing the overall height of the product by 6.5 mm.
LC3 a b c with LADS with LADS and sealing cover
D09A 143 26.5 139 143
110
=
110
D12A 143 26.5 139 143
KM3
KM1
D18A 144 26.5 139 143
D32A 165 32.5 145 149
Pre-assembled: LC3D40, D50 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1D with components D09 or D50
Pre-assembled: LC3D80 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1D with components D80
100/110
175 (1)
45
263 281
183 (1)
47
293 311
6 7 8 9
(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover Pre-assembled: LC3D115, D150 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1D with components D115 or D150
(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover
G a
a 450 450 b 555 555 c 205 205 G 425 425 H 525 525
10
LC3D115 or 3 x LC1D with components LC3D150 or 3 x LC1D with components References: pages 1/37 to 1/41 Schemes: pages 1/43
D115 D150
1/42
100/110
143
143
60
60
Dimensions (continued), schemes

Star-delta starters
Dimensions (continued)
Star-delta starters (continued)

On mounting rail AM1DP, pre-assembled LC3D090A to D320A
1
2x7
KM3 KM1
KM2
160 175
Schemes
LC3K, LC3D09A to D80 LC3D090A to D320A
L1 L2 L3
LC3 b c with LADS with LADS and sealing cover LC3K

KM3/5
95
D090A to D180A 153 139 143
D320A 137 145 149
2 3
LC3D
KM3/5
21 96
O
96
95
KM2
KM3
KM1
KM2 KM1 54 53
13
U1
V1
W1
(1)
2 4 6
KM2
14
KM3
2 4 6
KM1
22
U1
V1
W1
21
KM1
13 14
22
21
13
(2)
13 22
4 5 6 7 8
171
14
55 14
W2
U2
V2
15
KM2
KM2
21 56
T
A1 16
W2 U2 V2
A1
A1
A1
KM3
KM1
A1 22
A2
A2
A2
KM2/1 (N)
A2
N KM3/1
A2
A2
Note: LC3D09A to D18A: Mechanical interlock between KM3 and KM1. LC3D115 and D150
L1 L2 L3 2 4 6
F1
U1
V1
W1
F1
21 96
W2
U2
V2
153
(2)
l
22
KM2
KM3
KM1
95
13
KM1
184 154
KM2
68
161 56
W2
U2
V2
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
W1
14
67
KM1
55 183
KM1
172
U1
V1
A2
KM1
KM2
A1
KM1 Y
KM3
KM2
KM3
A1 22
21 67
68
KM2
153 13
9 10
KM3
A1 162 A1
KM2
A1154
KA1
A1 14
F2
KM1
A2
KM2
A2
KA1
A2
KM3
A2
(1) Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end). (2) Remote control. References: pages 1/37 to 1/41
1/43
Presentation
Motor starters - open version

Start-delta starters for motor control
Star-delta starting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Current
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 Speed
This method of starting is applicable to motors on which all 6 stator terminals are accessible and whose delta connection voltage corresponds to the mains voltage. Star-delta starting should be used for motors starting on no-load or having a low load torque and gradual build-up: - the starting torque in star connection is reduced to one third of the direct starting torque, i.e. about 50 % of the rated torque. - the starting current in star connection is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated current. The transition from star to delta connection must occur when the machine has run up to speed. A too rapid build-up in load torque would cause the stabilised run-up speed to be too low and would therefore eliminate any advantage in this method of starting: this is the case with certain machines whose load torque depends on the machine speed (a characteristic of centrifugal machines, for example).
(1)
1 Starting in direct delta connection 2 Starting in star connection
Current 2,5
1
1,5
2
0,5
3
0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 Speed
Switching from star to delta connection must be completed within a minimum time. This function is performed by a control relay and a time delay auxiliary contact block.
1 Starting in direct delta connection 2 Starting in star connection 3 Resistive torque of the machine
(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques. Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a proportion of the rated torque).
1/44
References

Star-delta starters for motor control, 90 to 375 kW (1), without isolating device, pre-assembled

Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: LC3Fppppp: 20 seconds, LC3FpppppA64: 30 seconds (3 identical contactors). Composition of starters without mechanical interlock, see pages 1/47 and 1/49. Star-delta starters
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Mains voltage delta connection 220/ 380/ 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V Auxiliary contacts available on each contactor line KM2 delta KM3 star KM1 Star delta mechanical interlock Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Weight
Pre-assembled starters
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(3)
511080
kW 90
kW 160
kW 160
kW 185
Without With
LC3F185pp LC3F185ppA64 LC3F225pp LC3F225ppA64 LC3F265pp LC3F265ppA64 LC3F330pp LC3F330ppA64 LC3F400pp LC3F400ppA64
kg 16.500 16.625 16.500 16.625 27.300 27.425 37.000 37.125 37.000 37.125
100
200
200
220
Without With
110
220
220
250
Without With
LC3FpppppA64
160
280
280
315
Without With
185
315
355
375
Without With
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35. (2) Standard control circuit voltages: Volts a 50/60 Hz 48 110 115 Code E7 F7 FE7 For other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) One auxiliary contact block type LADN can be fitted. 220/230 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380/400 Q7 400 V7 415 N7
Presentation : page 1/44
Schemes : page 1/51
1/45
1 2 3 4
*
1 7
KM1
5 6 7 8 9 10
* *
1 3 4
KM3 KM2
1
* *
1
* See page 1/48

1/46
References
Star-delta starters for motor control, 90 to 375 kW, (1), for customer assembly (on chassis)
Contactors
Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 20 seconds (3)

Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors 220/ 380/ 400V 415V 230V kW kW kW 90 160 160 100 110 160 185 200 220 280 315 200 220 280 355 Contactors (2) 440V kW 185 220 250 315 375 line KM2 LC1F185pp LC1F225pp LC1F265pp LC1F330pp LC1F400pp delta KM3 LC1F185pp LC1F225pp LC1F265pp LC1F330pp LC1F400pp star KM1 LC1D150pp LC1F185pp LC1F185pp LC1F265pp LC1F265pp Separate components (see below) Component types F185 F225 F265 F330 F400
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Separate components (4)

Description Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks 2 N/O + 2 N/C Control relay Time delay auxiliary contact blocks Sealing cover Illustration For item no. use on 1 F185 to F400 2 3 4 F185 to F400 F185 to F400 F185 to F400 F185 to F400 F185 F225 to F400 F185 F225 F265 F330 and F400 Set of 3 busbars for thermal overload connections 8 F185 to F400 No. 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit reference LADN22 CAD32 LADT2 LA9D901 GB2CB10 LA9FG980 LA9FJ980 LA9F18517 LA9F22510 LA9FH610 LA9FJ610 Weight kg 0.050 0.580 0.060 0.005 0.050 0.200 0.490 0.800 1.400 1.400 1.500
Thermal magnetic circuit5 breaker for 5 A control circuit Sets of 3 connectors 6 for wider terminations (optional) Sets of power connections 7
LA7Fppp (Selected according to size of thermal overload relay) see pages 6/34 and 6/35.
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35. (2) Contactors supplied with coil. Complete the reference by adding the control circuit voltage code. Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): LC1D150 Volts 48 110 115 120 220 230 240 380 400 415 50/60 Hz E7 F7 FE7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 LC1F185 and F225 Volts 50 Hz (coil LX1) 60 Hz (coil LX1)
48 E5 E6
110 F5 F6
115 FE5
120 G6
220 M5 M6
230 P5
240 U5 U6
380 Q5 Q6
400 V5
415 N5
LC1F185 to F400 Volts 48 110 115 120 220 40 400 Hz (5) E7 (6) F7 FE7 G7 M7 Standard voltages, see page 5/114. For other voltages between 24 and 660 V, see pages 5/130 to 5/139. (3) For longer starting times, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (4) Other separate components, see page 1/49. (5) Coil LX1: LC1F265, F330 and F400. Coil LX9: LC1F185 and F225. (6) Except for LC1F400.
230 P7
240 U7
380 Q7
400 V7
415 N7
Schemes : page 1/51
1/47
14
12
10
17
1 2 3 4
15
*
9
* *
KM1 KM3 KM2
5 6 7 8 9 10
16 13
* *
* * *
17 11
* See page 25018/2

1/48

Star-delta starters for motor control, 90 to 375 kW, (1), for customer assembly (on chassis)
Separate components (continued from page 1/47)

Description Spare volt free terminals Illustration item no. 9 For use on F185 F225F400 Neutral terminals with stop and spare volt free terminal (for control circuit) 10 F185 No. 3 3 1 2 1 F225 and F265 1 2 1 F330 and F400 1 2 1 Reducer bracket Mounting rails (2) 11 12 13 Uprights (2) 1/4 turn sliding clip nuts and corresponding bolts for rails AM1DE 1/4 turn sliding clip nuts and corresponding bolts for rails AM1DE 1/4 turn sliding clip nuts and corresponding bolts for equipment fixing 14 15 F400 F185F400 F185F400 F115F400 F185F400 2 1 1 2 2 Sold in lots of 10 10 10 100 10 10 100 10 10 100 10 1 10 4 4 10 100 16 F185F400 8 10 10 17 F185F330 15 10 100 F400 8 10 10 100 10 4 Enclosures: metal, grey RAL 7032 F185F225 F265 F330 and F400 Fixing lugs adjustable for enclosure ACM 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 4 Unit reference DZ3GA3 DZ3HA3 AB1BC9535 AB1AB8P35 DZ3HA3 AB1BC15035 AB1AB8M35 DZ3JA3 AB1BC24035 AB1AB8M35 DZ3JA3 LA9F100 AM1DE200 AM1EC200 AM1EC200 AF1CD061 AF1VA618 AF1CD081 AF1VC820 AF1CD061 AF1VA618 AF1CD061 AF1CD081 AF1VA618 AF1VC820 Weight kg 0.006 0.007 0.236 0.006 0.007 0.277 0.007 0.010 0.287 0.007 0.010 0.100 0.900 2.980 2.980 0.020 0.006 0.020 0.024 0.020 0.006 0.020 0.020 0.006 0.024
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
25 x H6 screws with washers ACMGV763 ACMGV973 ACMGV1084 AE3FX122 19.090 33.310 54.000 0.080
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35. (2) Supplied in 2 m lengths. See page 1/50 for cutting to length.
Schemes : page 1/51
1/49
Dimensions

Star-delta starters
Dimensions
1 2 3 4
Chassis mounted starters

Pre-assembled: LC3F185 to LC3F400 For customer assembly: 2xLC1Fppp and 1xLC1D150 or 3xLC1Fppp
G F1 F2
KM2
KM3
KM1
K3
K1 110 110 110 140 140 K2 80 80 100 100 100
K4
c
a
a 565 565 665 765 765 b 675 675 775 975 975 c 235 235 266 276 276 G 525 525 625 725 725 H 625 625 725 825 925 K 160 160 165 195 195 K3 110 110 110 110 180 K4 80 80 110 180 110
5 6 7 8 9 10
LC3F185 or 2 x LC1Fppp + 1 x LC1D with components F185 LC3F225 or 3 x LC1Fppp with components F225 LC3F265 or 3 x LC1Fppp with components F265 LC3F330 or 3 x LC1Fppp with components F330 LC3F400 or 3 x LC1Fppp with components F400
Presentation: page 1/44
References: pages 1/45, 1/47 and 1/49
1/50
K1
K2
Schemes

Star-delta starters
Schemes
Star-delta starters
LC3F185 to F400 Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
L1 L2 L3 2 4 6
1 2
U1
KM2
6 2 4
KM3
6 2 4
KM1
W2 U2 V2 2 4 6
V1
W1
3 4
U1
V1
W1
3 4
F1
W2
U2
V2
F1
96
5 6
172
O
13 22
Remote control
21
95
153
l
14
KM1
184 154
KM2
68
KM1
183
67
KM1
171
7
KA1
14 13
56
KM2
54
KM3
62
61
53
KM2
55
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
F2
KM1
KM2
KA1
KM3
A1
8 9 10
1/51
Discover
TeSys U: starter-controller
Standard TeSys U
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
The Standard TeSys U replaces conventional components in a smaller space b The Standard TeSys U starter-controller incorporates all the conventionally associated functions: circuit breaker + contactor + thermal relay. b It considerably reduces wiring time. b The electrical coordination of the components is intrinsically ensured.
DB124011
equivalent to >
Space-saving Time-saving Safety
DB123408
L1 L2 L3 L1 S1 OFF S2 ON
The Standard TeSys U meets 80 % of protection motor control requirements The functions embedded in the Standard TeSys U unit are those which are commonly deployed in simple solutions: b Adjustable protection against overloads and short-circuits b ON/OFF control of one direction of rotation b The wiring diagram illustrates ON/OFF pushbutton control. TeSys U incorporates "coil" terminals A1-A2 and "self-holding auxiliary contacts" 13-14.
Conventional control diagram Preservation of know-how
A2
A1 13 14
8 9 10
1/52
Discover (continued)
Advanced TeSys U
Furthermore, this version significantly extends the control possibilities. Advanced TeSys U incorporates the basic functions (protection, motor control) to which one or more functions that are usually carried out with automation modules can be added: motor status remote indication, protection trip remote indication, remote reset, overload alarm, transmission over bus, alphanumeric display, etc.
1 2
DB124012
1 2 3 4
equivalent to >
3
Space-saving Economical optimisation
Input / output card Communication interface 3 LCD display unit
By also allowing variable speed control b Advanced TeSys U connected to the XYZ variable speed controller also constitutes a natural variable speed control solution. It makes it possible to maintain the homogeneity of a motor control panel already well equipped with TeSys U starter-controllers.
5 6 7 8 9 10
DB124016
Homogeneity Simplicity Performance
1/53
Standard TeSys U
1 2
Creating a motor feeder with TeSys U requires combination of at least a power base and a control unit. The plug and play principle of this product allows other modules to be added to provide access to additional functions.
DB124014
2 B
Standard TeSys U - non-reversing

This configuration consists of a power base, a control unit and possibly an auxiliary contact module. It is used to protect a motor and to switch it ON/OFF. A LUB12 or LUB32 power base This power base incorporates the power components: terminal blocks, switching mechanism and power contacts. It also includes a set of NO-NC auxiliary contacts and their terminal blocks. C D B LUCA, LUCL control unit These control units incorporate the detection and protection functions with respect to: b overload short circuit b phase failure phase imbalance b earth fault protection (equipment protection only). The LUCL control unit is exclusively used with the variable speed controller. C Additional auxiliary LUF signalling contacts D LUA signalling contacts b Indicate that the protective device has tripped.
3
1 2
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DB124013
Power supply terminal block ON/OFF/Reset control handle 3 "Motor" terminal block 4 "Coil" power supply terminal 5 Built-in auxiliary contacts
LU2B 12 - LU2B 32 Reverser control assembly
Standard TeSys U - non-reversing and reversing

LU2B12 Reversing power base allowing a motor to be controlled in both directions of operation. It incorporates the power components and the auxiliary contacts used to remotely indicate the direction of rotation. The NO-NC auxiliary contacts used to remotely indicate the ON/OFF status are to be ordered separately, in the same way as the LUCA control module.
1/54
Advanced TeSys U
For advanced applications or applications incorporating communication
1 2
Power supply terminal block ON/OFF/Reset control handle 3 "Motor" terminal block
Advanced TeSys U - non-reversing

This version consists of a power base, an advanced control unit and possibly an information or communication module for the measurement and alarm functions. They complement the main ON/OFF control function. A LUB120, LUB320 power base
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DB124032
B 1 A C 2
This power base incorporates the power components: terminal blocks, switching mechanism and power contacts. It also incorporates the auxiliary contacts (terminal block not included). B LUCB, LUCC, LUCD supervisable control units detection / tripping / measurement C LUCM control unit with display
detection / tripping / measurement load parameter, alarm, log display, etc.
3 E
D Thermal overload signalling LUF module, Motor load indication LUF module Motor overload alarm LUF module
E LUL communication modules F AS-Interface, Modbus, Profibus DP, CANopen, DeviceNet or Advantys STB
F LUA signalling contacts indicate that the protective device has tripped
Plug-in integrated auxiliary contact terminal block
DB124015
Advanced TeSys U - non-reversing and reversing

An LU2M reverser block is added according to the principle of the Standard TeSys U. No preassembled reverser assembly in the Advanced TeSys U version. A reverser assembly can be built by ordering the different parts separately. This makes it possible to modify the installation or to create assemblies that incorporate a communication module.
1/55
Choose
Help with choosing units and modules
DB124017
1 2
For assembling components, connecting to the process, ON / OFF operation, resetting.
Power base
Standard TeSys U
LUB12 LUB32
Control unit
This unit is essential for providing all the electrical protection functions. Some of these also provide advanced measurement, alarm and display functions.
Standard control unit

LUCA Class 10 - 3-phase (see page 1/71)
DB124019
Magnetic control unit

LUCL For use with a variable speed controller or a soft starter (see page 1/134)
DB124019 DB124024
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
b Protection against overloads and short-circuits. b Protection against phase failure and phase imbalance. b Earth fault protection (equipment protection only). b Manual reset.
b Short-circuit protection. b Manual reset. b Motor thermal overload protection must be provided by the variable speed controller or the soft starter.
Auxiliary contact module

DB124029
Indication of pole status or cause of tripping
Auxiliary contact module pole status LUFN (see page 1/65)
Auxiliary contact module protection status LUFA1C (depending on configuration) (see page 1/65)
DB124030
For additional remote indication contacts.
Auxiliary contact module (protection status, pole status) on RJ connector LUFC00 (see page 1/78)
Code showing the compatibility of modules with control units.
1/56
Choose (continued)
Help with choosing units and modules
DB124018
Advanced TeSys U
LUB120 LUB320
1 2
Control and diagnostic unit

LUCB Class 10 - 3-phase LUCC Class 10 - single-phase LUCD Class 20 - 3-phase (see page 1/71)
DB124019
Multi-function control unit

LUCM Classes 5 to 30 single-phase and three-phase (see page 1/72)
DB124020
3 4 5 6 7 8
Same functions as the standard control unit. In addition, in conjunction with a function module: b fault differentiation with manual reset, b fault differentiation with remote or automatic reset, b thermal overload alarm, b indication of motor load.
Same functions as the standard control unit. In addition, reset parameters can be set to manual or automatic. b protection function alarm. b indication on front panel or on remote terminal. b "log" function. b main motor parameter "monitoring" function. b differentiation of thermal overload and magnetic fault. b overload, no-load running.
Fault signalling module

For indicating the cause of tripping and allowing a reset.
DB124021 DB124022
Thermal overload signalling module and manual reset. LUFDH11 (see page 1/73)
Thermal overload signalling module and automatic or remote reset LUGDA01 and LUFDA10 (see page 1/73)
Load level module

For indicating the load level, alerting a threshold overshoot.
DB124021 DB124023
Motor load indication module. LUFV2 (see page 1/73)
Thermal overload alarm module LUFW10 (see page 1/73)
Communication module
For monitoring the status of the starter-controller from a centralised automation system.
DB124026 DB124026 DB124027 DB124028
CANopen communication module LUFV2 (see page 1/86)

DB124026
DeviceNet communication module LULC09 (see page 1/92)

DB124025
Advantys stb communication module LULC15 (see page 1/92)

DB124026
Modbus communication module LULC033 (see page 1/94)

DB124028
9 10
BECKHOFF communication module LUFC14 (contact us)
AS-Interface communication module ASILUFC51 (see page 1/80)
Profibus DP communication module LULC07 (see page 1/82)
Module for Ethernet communication LULC033 + TeSys port (contact us)
1/57
Application examples


525971
1 2 3 4 5 6
510901
Starting and protection of a pump. b Power: 4 kW at 400 V. b In: 9 A. b Maximum of 10 class 10 starts per hour. b Duty class S3. b 3-wire control: v Start button (S2), v Stop button (S1), b Control circuit voltage: a 230 V.
Application
Operating conditions
Products used
Description Power base 12 A with screw clamp connections Standard control unit
Item 1 2
Quantity Reference 1 LUB12 1 LUCA12FU
Page 1/62 1/71
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V. b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of service) in case of a short-circuit. b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4. b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In). b Indication of motor status by N/C or N/O contact. b Interlock between the motor starter control and the position of the rotary knob; not possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position.
Functions performed
Scheme
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
230 V
C.U.
7
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 W1 U1 V1
A2
8 9 10
M 3
1/58
A1
14
13


510902
Expansion of an existing installation for improved control of its operation. Monitor the status of the motor and obtain alarm signalling by a digital contact in order to improve operation of the pump and anticipate a complete stoppage due to thermal overload.
Application
1 2 3 4 5
Additional products used

Description
Item
Quantity Reference
Page
Replace the standard control unit with an advanced control unit and insert a thermal overload alarm function module.
Advanced control unit Alarm function module 2 3 1 1 LUCB12FU LUF W10 1/71 1/73
b Alarm information is generated by the advanced control unit and is processed by the thermal overload alarm function module to make it usable. b The advanced control unit includes a thermal trip Test button on its front panel.
Functions performed
Scheme
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
a 230 V
C.U.
14
13
LUF W10
Alarms Module
07
08
To application
6 7 8 9 10
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
W1
U1
V1
A2
M 3a
Other versions
The advanced control unit can provide other functions, depending on the type of function modules used (instead of the LUF W module described above): - thermal fault signalling with function modules LUFDA01, LUFDA10 or LUFDH11, - indication of motor load with function module LUFV2. This module delivers a 4-20 mA analogue signal, which is proportional to the average 3-phase current drawn by the motor. This allows the load current to be monitored and provides access to other application functions using this value, or to predictive or preventive maintenance possibilities (replacement of the motor before it breaks down).
A1
1/59


520971
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Manual control of a 2-position turntable. b Power: 2.2 kW at 400 V. b In: 6 A. b 30 starts per hour b Duty class S4. b 3-wire control: v Pushbutton for Position 1 (S1), v Pushbutton for Position 2 (S2), v Stop button (S5), b Stopping at the positions is achieved by limit switches S3 and S4. b Control circuit voltage: a 115 V.
Application
Products used
Description Power base, reversing, 12 A with screw clamp connections Standard control unit
Item 1 2
Quantity Reference 1 LU2B12FU 1 LUCA12FU
Page 1/63 1/71
523761
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V. b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of service) in case of a short-circuit. b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4. b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In). b Interlock between the motor starter control and the position of the rotary knob; not possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position. Electrical interlocking is ensured by pre-wired connector LU9MR1C included on base LU2B12. The design of the reversing power block makes mechanical interlocking unnecessary.
Functions performed
Scheme (manual control)

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LU2B
A3 B3 A1
Reverser Motor Controller
B1
C.U.
2/T1
4/T2
M 3
W1
U1
V1
6/T3
115 V
1/60
A2


520969
Monitoring operation of a surface pump in a water treatment plant to avoid dry running, which could lead to destruction of the pump. b b b b b
Application
1 2
Page 1/62 1/72 1/95 1/95 1/95 1/95
Power: 15 kW at 400 V. In: 28.5 A. Duty class S1. Control circuit voltage: c 24 V. Control-command by PLC and serial link using the Modbus protocol.
Item 1 2 3 4 Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reference LUB320 LUCM 32BL LUL C033 LU9B N11C VW3A8306Rpp VW3 A8 306 TF03
Products used
Description Power base 32 A without connections Multifunction control unit Modbus communication module Pre-wired coil connection Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals Connection cable for connecting the communication module to the serial bus T-junction
3 4 5 6 7 8
510903
3 4
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V. b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of service) in case of a short-circuit. b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4. b Load switching (1.5 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In). b Measurement of load current and detection of no-load running by the multifunction control unit. b Interlock between the motor starter control and the position of the rotary knob; not possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position. b No-load running or operation under load. To use this function, the following parameters must be entered: v trip: the answer yes/no enables or disables the function, v time before tripping: the time period during which the value of the current must be below the tripping threshold in order to cause tripping (adjustable from 1 to 200 s), v tripping threshold: value as a % of the load current ratio in relation to the setting current. If the ratio remains below this threshold for the time specified in the previous parameter, the product trips (adjustable from 30 to 100 %). b Indication of the various motor starter statuses and currents.
Functions performed
Schemes
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LUCM
Multifunction Control Unit
LUL C033
Modbus Module
D (B) D (A) Gnd
Modbus profile IEC 64915 Commands (Register 704) Forward running Reverse running Reserved Reset Reserved Connection test Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 3-phase control Reserved Reserved Reserved
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15
Status (Register 455) Ready (available) Poles closed Fault Alarms Tripped Reserved reset enabled A1-A2 powered Motor running Motor current % (bit 0) Motor current % (bit 1) Motor current % (bit 2) Motor current % (bit 3) Motor current % (bit 4) Motor current % (bit 5) Reserved Motor starting
24 V Aux
4 5 8
LU9B N11C Pre wired coil
LO1 LI1 LI2
C.U.
U1 2/T1
V1 4/T2
W1 6/T3
c 24 V
M 3a
Modbus
VW3 A8 306 TF03
D (B) D (A) Gnd
24 V 24 V c Aux COM
4 5 8
9 10
The multifunction control unit incorporates other control and protection functions, such as: monitoring and control of phase current, alarm, Module LUL C033 also provides a programmable output and two configurable discrete inputs.
Other functions
1/61
Discover
TeSys U motor starters open version

Starter-controller
Non-reversing power bases
LUB 12, LUB 32
Two types of bases are available, each in two versions: b LUB12, LUB32 Standard power bases: 12 A and 32 A versions. b Advanced power bases for use in conjunction with LUB120, LUB320 function or communication module: 12 A and 32 A versions.
DB124035
Common characteristics
b Breaking capacity: 50 kA at 400 V. b Ratings: 12 A or 32 A at 400 V. b Built-in auxiliary contacts: max. operating voltage (Up): 690 V AC, 250 V DC. Max. current (Ith): 5 A 1 NO, 1 NC. b Guaranteed continuity of service (complete coordination) between the protection and control functions to EN 60947-6-2. b Connection by screw clamp terminal.
Voltage (V) Rating (A) Breaking capacity (kA) Rating (A) Breaking capacity (kA)
References for Standard power bases

y 440 V 12 50 500 V 12 10
690 V 9 4 21 9
Reference LUB12
Weight (kg) 0.900
32 50
23 10
LUB32
1.270
The Standard bases are fitted with auxiliary contacts and a fixed terminal block.
LUB 120, LUB 320

DB124034
References for Advanced power bases

y 440 V 12 50 32 50 500 V 12 10 23 10
690 V 9 4 21 9
Reference LUB2B120
Weight (kg) 0.865
LUB2B320
0.865
b 3 types of terminal blocks are available, providing different types of pole status remote indication and coil control. b A cover is always supplied for each terminal block so that the top cavity of the base designed to receive the function modules (communication, alarm, etc.) can be closed off, if necessary. Terminal block for built-in auxiliary contacts
df510904
Terminal blocks for Advanced power bases
Description
1
Single terminal block for wire remote indication and local coil control
2 Terminal block with status remote indication cable to communication module LUF C00, LUL C033, ASILUF C51, local coil control
Reference LU9BN11 LU9BN11C
2
df510920
3 Terminal block with a cable for controlling the coil via communication module LUL C07, LUL C08, LUL C09, LUL C15, wire remote indication
LU9BN11L
3
df510922
1/62
Discover
TeSys U motor starters open version

Starter-controller
Non-reversing and reversing power bases
DB124037
"Reverser" power bases

The reverser power bases (non-reversing and reversing) consist of a combined power base and reverser block and are supplied as an assembled unit. They can also be assembled by the customer from units ordered separately.
Common characteristics
b Ratings: 12 A or 32 A at 400 V. b Built-in auxiliary contacts: max. operating voltage (Up): 690 V AC, 250 V DC Max. current. (Ith): 5 A 1 NO, 1 NC. b Guaranteed continuity of service (complete coordination) between the protection and control functions to EN 60947-6-2. b Connection by screw clamp terminal. References for Reverser power bases
y 440V 12 50 32 50 500 V 12 10 23 10
690 V 9 4 21 9
Reference LU2 B12
Weight (kg) 1.270
LU2 B32
1.270
Reverser to be assembled: 3 solutions

DB124036 DB124038
Vertical mounting
Side mounting
1 1 1
5 2 3 4
5 4
3 4
DF124033
Assembly components
Description
1 1 2 3 4 5 9 6 7 8
12 A and 32 A bases 120 A and 320 A bases Prewired reverse control link Reverser block for vertical mounting Single terminal block for built-in auxiliary contacts Terminal block for wired control connection Reverser block for side mounting Terminal block with contact status remote indication cable to LULC communication module 9 Terminal block with jumper for controlling the coil via LULC communication module 9
Reference LUB 12, 32 LUB 120, 320 LU9M R1C LU2M B0 LU9 M1 LU9M R1 LU6M B0 LU9M RC LU9M RL
7 8
Full power base references

One or two letters must be added to the power base reference to identify the control voltage of its coil. Example: LUB12B = 12 A power base with 24 V AC coil control Volts c a 24 BL B 4872 ES (1) 110240 FU (2)
c or a (1) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V. (2) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V.
1/63
References
Signalling contacts
Non-reversing power base
Reminder: TeSys U is similar to a motor protection circuit breaker and a contactor sharing the same power contacts (poles).
DB123009
Monitoring TeSys U protection status

Auxiliary contacts are used to identify the operating mode: OPERATION ALLOWED / FAULT-TRIGGERED STOP / OFF They reproduce the status of the rotary handle: (Operation allowed) / TRIP / OFF They can be similar to the contacts of a conventional circuit breaker: v open / closed circuit breaker v OK / tripped. 2 locations for installing the contacts b in the function module cavity: plug-in box 1 b on the side of the power base: side-mounting box
Item
1 1 4 1
2 5 3 6
.
Weight (kg) 0.03 0.03 0.048
Composition 1 SD contact (NC / 95-96) 1 OF contact (NO / 17-18) 1 SD contact (NO / 97-98) 1 OF contact (NO / 17-18) 2 OF contacts (NO)
Reference LUA1C11 LUA1C20 LUA8E20
Covers 3 and 4 for empty cavities are supplied with the basic module.
Monitoring the pole status of the TeSys U

The auxiliary contacts are used to find the status of the load: b ON / OFF b They reproduce the status of the common power contacts (NO contacts) or the reverse status (NC contacts). Auxiliary contacts 6 built into the TeSys U power base Generally used for self-holding
1 NO contact (13-14) 1 NF contact (21-22) built-in built-in
b Module with two additional plug-in contacts Used as an extension to the built-in contacts, for automations, signalling.
Item
2 2 2
Composition 2 NO contacts (33-34 and 43-44) 1 NC contact (31-32) and 1 NO contact (43-44) 2 NF contacts (31-32 and 41-42)
Reference LUFN20 LUFN11 LUFN02
Weight (kg) 0.05 0.05 0.05
Electrical characteristics of the contacts Use of add-on and auxiliary contacts: ~ or = 24 250 V, Ith: 5 A.
1/64
References
Signalling contacts
Non-reversing and reversing power base
Monitoring TeSys U protection status

The auxiliary contacts are used to identify the load running mode: b OPERATION ALLOWED / FAULT-TRIGGERED STOP / OFF. They reproduce the status of the rotary handle: (Operation allowed) / TRIP / OFF. They may be similar to the OF (Open/Closed) and SD (Fault indicating) contacts of a conventional circuit breaker. v OF contact: open / closed circuit breaker v SD contact: circuit breaker OK / tripped 2 locations for installing contacts b in a function module cavity: plug-in box 1 b on the side of the power base: side-mounting box
Item
6 1 4 1
DB124010
2 5 3
Composition 1 SD contact (NC / 95-96) 1 OF contact (NO / 17-18) 1 SD contact (NO / 97-98) 1 OF contact (NO / 17-18) 2 OF contacts (NO)
Reference LUA1C11 LUA1C20 LUA8E20
Weight (kg) 0.03 0.03 0.048
Covers 3 and 4 for empty cavities are supplied with the basic module
b The auxiliary contacts are used to find the status of the load: ON / OFF. They reproduce the status of the common power contacts (NO contacts) or the reverse status (NC contacts). Additional plug-in module with 2 auxiliary contacts The contacts built into the power base are used to control the reverser block. To remotely indicate the status of the power poles, one of the following accessories must be used.
Item
2 2 2
Monitoring the pole status of TeSys U: by auxiliary contacts
Composition 2 NO contact (33-34) 1 NO contact (43-44) 1 NF contact (31-32) 2 NF contacts (31-32 and 41-42)
Reference LUFN20 LUFN11 LUFN02
Weight (kg) 0.05 0.05 0.05
Monitoring the direction of rotation

Auxiliary contacts are used to find the direction of the load control: FORWARD / REVERSED. They reproduce the status of the reverser block power contacts. Auxiliary contact 6 built into the reverser block Generally used to indicate the direction of rotation of a motor. 1 reversing contact (82 - 81 - 84). Electrical characteristics of the contacts Use of add-on and auxiliary contacts: ~or = 24 250 V, Ith: 5 A.
1/65
References
TeSys motor starters open version

Pre-wired system for power connections
Pre-wired system for power connections up to 63 A

Description Sets of 3-pole 63 A busbars Application 2 tap-offs 3 tap-offs 4 tap-offs Pitch mm 45 54 45 54 45 Item
2
1
DB123405
1 8 4
Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1
Unit reference GV2G245 GV2G254 GV2G345 GV2G354 GV2G445 GV2G454 GV2G554 GV1G10 GV1G09
Weight kg 0.036 0.038 0.058 0.060 0.77 0.085 0.100 0.005 0.040
Protective end cover Terminal block for supply to one or more busbar sets
54 54 5 tap-offs For unused busbar outlet

4 3
Pre-wired system for power connections up to 160 A The busbar can be screw-mounted onto any support.
Set of 4-pole busbars: 3-phase + neutral or 3-phase + common Item Length Mounting in Number of tap-off mm enclosure width units at 18 mm mm intervals 18 5 452 800 Reference Weight kg 0.900
DB123401
AK5JB144
Removable 3-phase power sockets

Thermal Number of points used on the busbar current system 16 2 32 Item Cable length 200 250 1000 Sold in lots of 6 6 6 Unit reference Weight kg AK5PC13 (1) AK5PC33 (1) 0.040 0.045
6 6
AK5PC33L (1) 0.060
1/66
References
Limiter blocks and accessories
Limiter blocks and accessories

DB123400
Application
Item
9 8
Limiter7 + 9 disconnector (3) (5) Limiter (3) 8 Limiter cartridge Clip-in marker holder
9
Breaking capacity Iq y 440 V 690 V kA kA 130 70 100 130 35 70
Mounting
Unit reference Weight kg
Direct on power base Separate
LUALB1 (2) LA9LB920
0.310 0.320 0.135 0.001
Limiter-disconnector LUALF1 On power bases, on LAD90 (4) reverser block, on parallel link splitter box
(1) The rated peak current for the power sockets AK5 PC is 6 kA. When used in association with power bases LUB, the prospective short-circuit current must not exceed 7 kA. (2) Supplied with limiter cartridge. (3) These devices make it possible to increase the breaking capacity of the power base. (4) Sold in lots of 100. (5) The limiter must be mounted on an LUB or LU2B power base. The limiter can therefore not be common to several motor starters.
DB123999
Sparateur de phases
Phase barrier LU9 SP0 must be used: b to build a UL 508 Type E certified starter (Self Protected Starter) b without the phase barrier, the starter-controller is certified UL 508 b if the starter-controller is to be used at an operational voltage of 690 V.
Description Phase barrier Item
1
Application
Mounting
Reference LU9SP0
Weight kg 0.030
LUB or LU2B 12 Direct on or 120 terminals LUB or LUB2B 32 L1, L2, L3 or 320 LUA LB1
1/67
References

Extended rotary handle
DB123407
Allows a circuit-breaker or a TeSys U starter-controller installed in back of an enclosure to be operated from the front of the enclosure. The rotary handle can be black or red/yellow, IP 54 or IP 65. It includes a function for locking the circuit breaker or the starter in the O (OFF) or | (ON) position (depending on the type of rotary handle) by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 4 to 8 mm. The extended shaft must be adjusted to the depth of the enclosure. The IP54 rotary handle is fixed with a nut ( 22) to make it easier to assemble.
Padlockable external controls

Description
1 2 3 4 5 6
DB123403
Handle + mounting system kit Universal handle Shaft Shaft support plate for deep enclosure Retrofit accessory Laser Square accessory
Padlockable external controls

Handle + mounting system kit Description Black handle, with error status, IP 54
3 2
Item
1 1 1 2 2 2
Reference LU9APN21 LU9APN22 LU9APN24 GVAPB54 GVAPR54 GVAPR65 GVAPA1 GVAPK12 GVAPP01 GVAPSFR GVAPSEN GVAPSDE GVAPSES GVAPSCN GVAPSPT GVAPSRU GVAPSIT
Weight kg 0.820 0.820 0.820 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.110 0.030 0.160
Red handle, with error status, IP 54 Red handle, without error status, IP 65 Black handle, IP 54 Red handle, IP 54 Red handle, IP 65 Shaft L = 315 mm
4 5
Shaft support plate for deep enclosure Depth u 300 mm Retrofit accessory
Sticker (vendu par lot de 10) French Warning label English German Spanish Chinese Portuguese Russian Italian
DB123402
1/68
References

Remote controls - small handle

Description
DB124404
Item
1
Reference
2
Weight kg 0.586
Handle for mounting in the MCC drawer with fixing kit

1
LU9 AP20
RESET
TEST
1/69
Selection

Control units
Operating characteristics
1 2 3 4
Control units Thermal overload protection Overcurrent protection Short-circuit protection Protection against phase loss Protection against phase imbalance Earth fault protection (equipment protection only) Tripping class Motor type Thermal overload test function Overtorque No-load running Long starting time Reset method Manual Automatic or remote
Standard LUCA
Advanced LUCB LUCC
LUCD
Multifunction LUCM 3 to 17 x the setting current
14.2 x the setting current 14.2 x the max. current
10 3-phase
10 20 Single-phase 3-phase
530 Single-phase and 3-phase
With function module, or parameters can be set via the bus with a communication module, see chart below. Thermal overload alarm only with function module or communication module, see below.
Parameters can be set Parameters can be set Parameters can be set via the bus with a communication module (see below). Possible for each type of fault. Indication on front panel of the control unit, via remote terminal, via PC or via PDA (1). With communication modules to make use of these alarms via a bus, see below. Log of the last 5 trips. Number of starts, number of trips, number of operating hours.
Alarm
5
Log function
6 7 8 9 10
Monitoring function
Display of main motor parameters on front panel of the control unit, via remote terminal, via PC or via PDA (1).
With function modules (2)

Thermal overload alarm Thermal overload signalling and manual reset Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset Indication of motor load (analogue) With module LUFW With module LUFDH11 With modules LUFDA01 and LUFDA10 With module LUFV
With communication module or via Modbus port on control unit LUCM (2)
Starter status (ready, running, fault) Reset method Alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions Log function Monitoring function Built-in function (1) PDA: Personal Digital Assistant. (2) Mounting possibilities: 1 function module or 1 communication module. Function provided with accessory With any communication module Parameters can be set via the bus With modules LULC031, LULC033, LULC15, LULC07, LULC08 and LULC09 (thermal overload alarm only). With module LULC031, LULC033, LULC15, LULC07, LULC08 and LULC09 and Modbus port on the control unit (alarm possible for all types of fault). With modules LULC031, LULC033, LULC15, LULC07, LULC08 and LULC09 and Modbus port on the control unit.
1/70
References

Standard and advanced control units
510913
1 5 2
1 2 3 4 5
Description
Extraction and locking handle Test button (on advanced control unit only) Ir adjustment dial Locking of settings by sealing the transparent cover Sealing of locking handle
Setting range Clip-in mounting on power base Rating A 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 LUCA X6pp LUCA 1Xpp LUCA 05pp LUCA 12pp LUCA 18pp LUCA 32pp Reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Standard control units

Maximum standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz 400/440 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW
A 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832
kg 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135
LUCApppp LUCBpppp
Class 10 for 3-phase motors

0.09 0.25 1.5 5.5 7.5 15 2.2 5.5 9 15 3 9 15 18.5
520735
Pressing the Test button on the front panel simulates tripping on thermal overload. Class 10 for 3-phase motors
0.09 0.25 1.5 5.5 7.5 15 2.2 5.5 9 15 3 9 15 18.5 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 LUCBX6pp LUCB1Xpp LUCB05pp LUCB12pp LUCB18pp LUCB32pp 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140
Advanced control units
Class 10 for single-phase motors

0.09 0.55 2.2 4 7.5 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 LUCCX6pp LUCC1Xpp LUCC05pp LUCC12pp LUCC18pp LUCC32pp 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140
LUBp2 + LUCA pppp
520736
Class 20 for 3-phase motors

0.09 0.25 1.5 5.5 7.5 15 2.2 5.5 9 15 3 9 15 18.5 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 LUCDX6pp LUCD1Xpp LUCD05pp LUCD12pp LUCD18pp LUCD32pp 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140
(1) Standard control circuit voltages: Volts 24 4872 110240 c BL (2), (3) a B ES (4) FU (5) c or a (2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module. (3) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %. (4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V. (5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V. LUBp2 + LUCB pppp
Characteristics: pages 1/98 and 1/101
Schemes: page 1/115
1/71
References

Multifunction control units
510914
1 2
LUCMppBL
6 1 2 3 5
1 2 3 4 5 6
Description
Extraction and locking handle Built-in display window (2 lines, 12 characters) 4-button keypad c 24 V auxiliary power supply Modbus RS485 communication port. Connection by RJ45 connector. Sealing of locking handle
The display window 2 and keypad 3 allow: b in configuration mode: local configuration of protection functions and alarms, b in run mode: display of parameter values and events. The Modbus communication port 5 is used to connect: b an operator terminal, b a PC, b a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA). Parameter entry, monitoring of parameter values and consultation of logs are carried out: b either on the front panel, using the built-in display window/keypad, b or via an operator terminal, b or via a PC or a PDA with PowerSuite software, b or remotely, via a Modbus communication bus. Programming of the product via the keypad requires a c 24 V auxiliary power supply.
Maximum standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz 400/415 V 500 V 690 V kW kW kW 0.09 0.25 1.5 2.2 3 5.5 7.5 15 5.5 9 15 9 15 18.5 Setting range Clip-in mounting on power base Rating A 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 12 and 32 32 32 Reference (1) Weight
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: pages 1/98 and 1/101 Schemes: pages 1/114 and 1/117
520737
Multifunction control units
A 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832
LUCM X6BL LUCM 1XBL LUCM 05BL LUCM 12BL LUCM 18BL LUCM 32BL
kg 0.175 0.175 0.175 0.175 0.175 0.175
LUBp2 + LUCM ppBL
TeSys U users manual (2)

Application On CD-Rom Language Multi-language (3) Reference LU9 CD1 Weight kg 0.022
This compact Magelis terminal enables the parameters of multifunction control unit LUCM to be read and modified. It is supplied pre-configured to provide dialogue with 8 TeSys U starter-controllers (Modbus protocol, application pages and alarm pages loaded). Starter-controller alarm and fault management takes priority.
Language Multi-language (3) XBTNU400 Display window 4lines of 20 characters Length 2.5 m Supply voltage c 24 V Reference XBTNU400 Weight kg 0.150
HMI terminal
521335
Connecting cable (4)

Function
Type SUB-D 25-way female - RJ45
Reference XBTZ938
Connects terminal XBTNU400 to a multifunction control unit.
Weight kg 0.200
(1) Input voltage c 24 V with maximum ripple of 10 %. (2) The CD-Rom contains users manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway programming software. (3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish (4) If a terminal is used with several control units, this cable can be connected to a Modbus hub or to T-junctions (see page 1/95).
1/72
References

Function modules
Function modules
Output Item Application Reference Weight kg
Thermal overload signalling and manual reset Module LUFDH11 makes it possible to differentiate thermal overload and shortcircuit faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks LUA1C). The module includes two contacts for thermal overload signalling, as well as an LED on the front panel. To reset the motor starter, the operator must use the rotary knob on the power base. The module can only be used with an advanced control unit and requires an a/c 24240 V external power supply.
510915
1 2 3 4 5
1 N/O + 1 N/C
a or c 24250 V
LUF DH11
0.060
Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset These modules make it possible to differentiate thermal overload and short-circuit faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks LUA1C). The modules include one contact for thermal overload signalling, as well as an LED on the front panel. A second contact (terminals Z1-Z2) must be wired in series with terminal A1 of the motor starter. In the event of a thermal overload fault, this wiring allows motor control to be switched off. The rotary knob on the power base will then stay in the ready position . Resetting of the motor starter is automatic after the required motor cooling time if terminals X1-X2 are linked by a strap, or remote by pulsed closing of a volt-free contact connected to terminals X1-X2. These modules can only be used with an advanced control unit and require an a/c 24240 V external power supply.
LUBp2 + LUCBpppp + LUFW10 or LUFVp
Note: Terminals X1-X2 are not isolated from the signalling module power supply. For remote resetting, use a volt-free contact specific to each module to be reset. 1 N/C 1 N/O 4 4 a or c 24250 V a or c 24250 V LUF DA01 LUF DA10 0.055 0.055
% 200
100
Thermal overload alarm Through load shedding, this module makes it possible to avoid stoppages in operation due to overload tripping. Imminent thermal overload tripping is displayed as soon as the thermal state exceeds the threshold of 105 % (hysteresis = 5 %). Signalling is possible via an LED on the front panel of the module and externally by an N/O relay output. It can only be used with an advanced control unit, from which it takes its power.
1 2 3
1 N/O 1 2.2 kW 2 4 kW 3 7.5 kW
12 mA 20 mA
6 7 8
510445
a or c 24250 V
LUF W10
0.055
Indication of motor load This module provides a signal which is representative of the motor load status (Iaverage/Ir). b I average = average value of the rms currents in the 3 phases, b Ir = value of the setting current. The value of the signal (4-20 mA) corresponds to a load status of 0 to 200 % (0 to 300 % for a single-phase load). It can be used with an advanced or multifunction control unit. Module LUFV2 requires a c 24 V external power supply.
4 - 20 mA 2 LUF V2 0.050
9 10
Characteristics: pages 1/98 and 1/103 Schemes: page 1/116
1/73
Presentation, functions
PowerSuite software workshop
1 2 3 4 5 6
The PowerSuite software workshop for PC is a user-friendly tool designed for setting up the Schneider Electric control device motors: b TeSysU starter-controllers b TeSysT motor management systems b Altistart soft start/soft stop units b Altivar variable speed drives b Lexium 05 servo drives It includes various functions designed for setup phases such as: b Preparing configurations b Start-up b Maintenance To facilitate start-up and maintenance, the PowerSuite software workshop is compatible with the Bluetooth wireless link.
Presentation
534513
PowerSuite screen on PC
Functions (1) Preparing configurations The PowerSuite software workshop can be used on its own to generate the device configuration, which can be saved, printed and exported to office automation software.
The PowerSuite software workshop can also be used to convert an Altivar 58 or Altivar58F drive configuration into one that is compatible with an Altivar71. Start-up When the PC is connected to the device, the PowerSuite software workshop can be used to: b Transfer the generated configuration b Adjust b Monitor. This option has been enhanced with new functions such as: v The oscilloscope v The high-speed oscilloscope (minimum time base: 2 ms) v The FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) oscilloscope v Display of communication parameters b Control b Save the final configuration
533181
PowerSuite screen on PC View of PI regulator function parameters
7 8 9 10
View of the FTT oscilloscope References: page 1/76
Maintenance To facilitate maintenance operations, the PowerSuite software workshop can be used to: b Compare the configuration of a device currently being used with a saved configuration b Manage the users installed equipment base, in particular: v Organize the installed base into folders (electrical equipment, machinery, workshops, etc.) v Store maintenance messages v Facilitate Modbus TCP connection by storing the IP address User interface The PowerSuite software workshop can be used to: b Present the device parameters (arranged by function) in the form of illustrated views of diagrams or simple tables b Customize the parameter names b Create: v A user menu (choice of particular parameters) v Monitoring control panels with graphic elements (cursors, gauges, bar charts) b Perform sort operations on the parameters b Display text in five languages (English, French, German, Italian and Spanish). The language changes immediately and there is no need to restart the program. It also features online contextual help: b On the PowerSuite tool b On the device functions by direct access to the user manuals
(1) Certain functions are not available for all devices. See the table of available functions, page 1/75.
572706
1/74
Functions (continued)
Functions available for the PowerSuite software workshop Functions not listed in the table are available for all devices.
Function available with devices Controller TeSys T Monitoring Oscilloscope High-speed oscilloscope FFT oscilloscope Display of communication parameters Control Customization of parameter names Creation of a user menu Creation of monitoring control panels Sort operation on parameters Custom logic editor Functions available Functions not available Startercontroller TeSys U Soft start/ soft stop unit ATS48 Drives ATV11 ATV31 ATV61 ATV71 Servo drive LXM05
1 2 3
PowerSuite
Modbus serial link The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected directly to the device terminal port or Modbus network port via the serial port on the PC. Two types of connection are possible: b With a single device (point-to-point connection), use a VW3A8106 PC serial port connection kit. b With a number of devices (multidrop connection), use the XGSZ24 interface. ModbusTCP communication network The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected to a ModbusTCP network. In this case, the devices can be accessed: b Using a VW3A3310 communication card for the Altivar 61 and 71 drives b Using a TSXETG100 Modbus TCP/Modbus gateway Bluetooth wireless link The PowerSuite software workshop can communicate via a Bluetooth radio link if the device is equipped with a Bluetooth Modbus VW3A8114. The adapter plugs into the device connector terminal port or Modbus network port and has a range of 10 m (class2). If the PC does not feature Bluetooth technology, use the VW3A8115 USB Bluetooth adapter. Remote maintenance A simple Modbus TCP connection is all that is required for the PowerSuite software workshop to support remote monitoring and diagnostics. When devices are not connected to the Modbus TCP network, or it is not directly accessible, various remote transmission solutions may be used instead (modem, teleprocessing gateway, etc.). Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
ATV61 ATV71
Connections (1)
536845
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RS 232 XGS Z24 RS 485
Modbus serial link
ATV31 or Lexium05
ATV61
ATV71
TeSysU
ATS48
Modbus multidrop connection
PLC (2)
536846
PowerSuite
Modbus TCP network
Bridge Modbus serial link
ATV31 or Lexium05
ATS 48
(1) Please refer to the compatibility table on page 1/77. (2) Please refer to our specialist "Automation platform Modicon Premium and Unity - PL7 software" and "Automation platform Modicon M340" catalogues.
Modbus TCP connection
References: page 1/76
1/75
References

536848
1 2
Description
Composition
Reference
PowerSuite CD-ROM
VW3A8104 b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian and Spanish b Variable speed drive, starter and servo drive technical manuals b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian and Spanish b Variable speed drive and starter technical manuals VW3A8105
Weight kg 0.100
PowerSuite update CD-ROM (1) PC serial port connection kit for point-to-point Modbus connection
0.100
VW3 A8104
VW3A8106 b 1 x 3 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector on starter-controller or drive side and 1 RS232/RS485 converter with 19-way female SUB-D connector on PC side b For the ATV 11 drive: 1 converter with one 4-way male SUB-D connector and 1 RJ45 connector b For ATV38/58/58F drives: 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter XGSZ24 b 1 Modbus multidrop converter for connection to screw terminals. Requires a 24 V c(20...30V), 20mA power supply (2) VW3A8114 b 1 Bluetooth adapter (10m range, class 2) with 1 RJ45 connector b For PowerSuite: 1 x 0.1 m cable with 2 RJ45 connectors b For TwidoSoft: 1 x 0.1 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector and 1 mini DIN connector b For ATV 38/58/58F drives: 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter This adapter is required in the case of a PC that does not feature Bluetooth technology. It is connected to a USB port on the PC. 10 m range (class 2) VW3A8115
0.350
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
536847
RS 232/RS 485 interface for multidrop Modbus connection Modbus-Bluetooth adapter (3)
0.105 0.155
VW3 A8114
USB - Bluetooth adapter for PC
0.290
(1) Updates a version u V1.40 with the latest available version. For versions < V1.40, you should order the PowerSuite CD-Rom, VW3A8104. (2) Please refer to the "Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies" catalogue. (3) Can also be used to communicate between a Twido PLC and the TwidoSoft software workshop.
Fonctions: page 1/74
1/76
Compatibility
Compatibility of PowerSuite software workshop with the following devices (1)

Connexion Controller TeSysT Modbus Modbus TCP (device equipped with Modbus TCP card) Modbus TCP via Modbus TCP/Modbus gateway Bluetooth Compatible software versions Incompatible software versions V1.50 V2.2 V2.0 V2.2 V2.5 Startercontroller Soft start/ soft stop unit ATS48 V1.30 Drives
Servo drives LXM05A LXM05B LXM05C V2.2 V2.4 V2.5
TeSysU (2) V1.40
ATV11 V1.40
ATV31 V2.0
ATV61 V2.3 V2.3 V2.3 V2.3
ATV71 V2.2 V2.2 V2.2 V2.2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V2.2 V2.2
V2.4 V2.4
V2.5 V2.5
The PowerSuite software workshop can operate in the following PC environments and configurations: b Microsoft Windows XP SP1, SP2, b Pentium III, 800 MHz, hard disk with 300 MB available, 128 MB RAM b SVGA or higher definition monitor
(1) Minimum software version. (2) TeSys U starter-controllerwithout communication module or with Modbus LULC031 or C033 communication module.
Hardware and software environments
Fonctions: page 1/74
1/77
Presentation, references

1
Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components
1 2
1 2
Outputs for starter commands RJ45 connector for connecting to splitter box
The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect starter-controllers to the PLC I/O modules quickly and without any need for tools. It replaces traditional screw terminal and single wire connections. It is used with the Telefast pre-wired system (1). The parallel wiring module provides the status and command information for each starter-controller. It must be used with an LUB12 or LU2BA0BL power base and a c 24 V control unit LUCpppBL. Splitter boxes LU9G02 and LU9G03 distribute information from the PLC I/O modules to each of the starter-controllers connected to it. Splitter box LU9G02 (maximum of 4 reversing starters) is optimised for use with card TSXDMZ28DTK and splitter box LU9G03 (maximum of 8 reversing starters) for use with cards TSXDMZ64DTK and BMXDDM3202K. When used in conjunction with the Advantys STB distributed I/O solution, the TeSysU starter-controller is ideal in decentralised automation architectures (2). The use of dedicated parallel interface module STBEPI2145 allows remote connection of 4 starter-controllers. Parallel wiring module LUFC00 has: b 2 outputs: control of starter forward and reverse running, b 3 inputs: position of the rotary knob, fault indication and position of the poles.
Presentation
511528
4
LU9G02 LU9 G03
511529
510916
Each of the channels of LU9 G0p splitter boxes has: b 2 outputs: control of starter forward and reverse running, in the case of a reversing starter. b 2 inputs: fault indication and position of poles. Connection to the dedicated module is by means of the following cables: b RJ45LU9Rpp, for lengths less than 3 metres, b 490NTW000pp, for lengths greater than 3 metres. Parallel type connection
Architecture
5 6 7 8 9 10
Dedicated parallel interface module (STBEPI2145) 9 Power base 10 c 24 V control unit (LUCB/D/C/M pp BL) 11 Parallel wiring module (LUFC00) 12 Options: add-on contact blocks, reverser blocks 8
510917
4
9 10
To PLC
4 3
11 12 12
3 Parallel wiring module LUFC00 4 Pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11C 5 Connection cable LU9Rp with one RJ45 connector at each end 6 Splitter box LU9G02 or LU9G03 for 8 motor starters with channel connections on the PLC side by two HE 10 connectors and on the startercontroller side by 8 RJ45 connectors. 7 Connection cable TSXCDPppp with one HE 10 connector at each end.
References
Description Item Reference LUF C00
Parallel wiring module
Weight kg 0.045
(1) Please consult our "Power Control and connection components catalogue. (2) Please consult our "IP20 distributed inputs/outputs Advantys STB" catalogue
1/78

Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components
Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.
566964
By pre-wired connector or wire link.
Connection of communication module output terminals to the coil terminals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired connections is recommended.
Description Pre-wired coil connection For use with power base LUBpp LU2Bpp Item Reference LU9B N11C LU9M RC Weight kg 0.045 0.030
4 13
4
LUB + LUF C00 + LU9B
b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC may by used.
Connection of parallel wiring module to the PLC

No tools are required to connect the parallel wiring module to the PLC. Connection is via a splitter box which allows up to 8 starter-controllers to be connected; a maximum of 4 reversing starters per splitter box is allowed. The splitter box requires a c 24 V power supply. Splitter boxes
Connectors PLC side 2 x HE 10 20-way For use with Starter-controller side 8 x RJ45 Reference Weight kg 4 reversing starters maximum 8 reversing starters maximum LU9 G02 (1) LU9 G03 (1) 0.260 0.260
510918
Connection cables to the splitter box

Connectors Item 2 x RJ45 connectors
3 13
Length m 0.3 1 3
Reference LU9 R03 LU9 R10 LU9 R30 Length Reference
Weight kg 0.045 0.065 0.125
Connection cables from splitter box to PLC

Type of connection Gauge PLC side Splitter box side AWG HE 10 HE 10 22 20-way 20-way LU2B + LUF C00 + LU9M 28 0.080 C.s.a. Weight
mm2 0.324
m 0.5 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 0.5 1 2 3 5 10
TSX CDP 053 TSX CDP 103 TSX CDP 203 TSX CDP 303 TSX CDP 503 ABFH20H100 ABFH20H200 ABFH20H300 BMX FCC 053 BMX FCC 103 BMX FCC 203 BMX FCC 303 BMX FCC 503 BMX FCC 1003 TSX CDP 301 TSX CDP 501
kg 0.085 0.150 0.280 0.410 0.670 0.080 0.140 0.210 0.210 0.350 0.630 0.940 1.530 3.000 0.400 0.660
HE 10 40-way
2 x HE 10 20-way
0.324
Bare wires
HE 10 20-way
22
0.324
3 5
(1) Allows "run" and "fault" status of each starter-controller to be fed back to the PLC and transmits commands.
Characteristics : pages 1/98 and 1/103
1/79
Presentation, references

1

AS-Interface communication modules
1
510919
Presentation
AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51 make it easy to connect starter-controllers to the AS-Interface cabling system, and therefore allow remote control and command of these starter-controllers. Module ASILUFC51 features extended addresing.
2 3 4 5 6
3
1 2 3 4
The various operating states of the modules (AS-Interface voltage present, communication fault, addressing fault,) are indicated on the front panel by a green LED 1 and a red LED 2. Operation of the modules is continuously monitored by auto-testing, in a way that is totally transparent to the user.
Green LED: AS-Interface voltage present Red LED: AS-Interface or module fault Outputs for starter commands Black connector for connection to c 24 V auxiliary power supply 5 Yellow connector for connection to the AS-Interface system
The incorporation of AS-Interface V.2.1 functions allows diagnostics to be performed on the modules, either remotely via the line or locally via the ASI TERV2 addressing terminal. The communication modules must be connected to a c 24 V auxiliary supply and must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit, LUCpppBL. The product is supplied with a yellow connector 4 for connection to the AS-Interface system, a black connector 5 for connection to the c 24 V auxiliary supply and a black connector 3 for connection of the outputs. Series type connection
Architecture
6 Communication modules ASILUFC5 or ASILUF C51 7 Tap-off TCS ATV01N2 8 Pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11C
7 8
c 24 V AS-Interface
Information transmitted by the AS-Interface system

AS-Interface profiles Data bits (command) Bit value Command D0 (O) Command D1 (O) Command D2 (O) Command D3 (O) Bit value Status D0 (I) Status D1 (I) Status D2 (I) Status D3 (I) 7.D.F.0 profile and 7.A.7.E profile =0 =1 Stop forward Forward running Stop reverse Reverse running Not used Not used Not used Not used =0 Not ready or fault Stopped Not used Not used =1 Ready Running Not used Not used
Data bits (status)
9
References
Description
Addressing Single 31 slaves Extended 62 slaves
Item
Reference ASI LUF C5 ASI LUF C51
10
Communication modules
6 6
Weight kg 0.065 0.065
1/80

AS-Interface communication modules
510920
By pre-wired connector or wire link.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended.
1
Description Pre-wired coil connection For use with power base LUBpp LU2Bpp Item Reference LU9BN11C LU9MRC
3 5
Weight kg 0.045 0.030
LUB + ASILUF C5 + LU9B

531122
b Wire link Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC may be used. This is achieved by using a tap-off for connection to 2 ribbon cables: b 1 for AS-Interface (yellow). b 1 for separate c 24 V supply (black).
1 5
Description Tap-off Length m 2 Reference XZCG0142 Weight kg 0.265
Connection of the communication module (1)
Consoles and cable adapter

Description Addressing terminal Battery operated. Battery charger supplied AS-InterfaceV.1 and V.2.1 compatible Adjustment and diagnostics console Runs on LR6 batteries Allows addressing of AS-Interface V.2.1 slaves and diagnostics Cable adapter For console XZMC11 Reference XZMC11 ASITERV2 Weight kg 0.550 0.500
LU2B + ASILUF C5 + LU9M
520898
520899
XZMG12
0.070
Software set-up
AS-Interface configuration is carried out using PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software. From the module declaration screen, it is possible to configure all the slave devices corresponding to all the AS-Interface I/O. Configuration is carried out by following the instructions on the screen.
XZ MC11
ASI TERV2

Application
Language
Reference
On CD-Rom
Multi-language LU9CD1 (3) (1) Degree of protection IP 54. Connection by 4 x 0.34 mm2 wires. Black wire: + 24 V. White wire: 0 V. Blue wire: AS-Interface (). Brown wire: AS-Interface (+). (2) The CD-Rom contains users manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway programming software. (3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
Weight kg 0.022
1/81
Presentation

ProfibusDP communication module and pre-wired coil connection components
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
567139
10
When used in conjunction with the power base and control unit, communication module LULC07 allows TeSys U starter-controllers to be controlled via Profibus DP (Deported Periphery). Communication module LULC07 is of the slave type and uses the TeSys U systems internal registers (which can be accessed via the Profibus DP bus) in cyclic or acyclic mode. This module has a 24 V (0.5 A) discrete output and two configurable discrete inputs.
Presentation
Connections
11
Serial bus topology
8 7 6
5
15 13 13 14 16 18 17 12
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 LED indicating module status 2 Fault signalling LED 3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1, OA3 and LO1 4 SUB-D connector for bus link 5 c 24 V supply connection 6 Discrete input 7 Discrete input 8 Discrete output 9 Outputs for starter-controller commands (nonreversing and reversing) 10 Pin for connection to control unit (advanced or multifunction)
15
18
18
18
17 c 24 V
12
c 24 V
Programmable controller with Profibus DP master card Other slave (not powered via the bus) Profibus DP 2-wire cable (TSXPBSCA100 = 100 m, TSXPBSCA400 = 400 m) Standard Profibus DP connector (490NAD91103 or 490NAD91104) Profibus DP power supply module for c 24 V-Aux supply to LULC07 modules (LU9GC7) Profibus DP connector, TeSys U dedicated (LU9AD7) Profibus DP 4-wire cable (LU9RPBppp) Profibus DP communication module (LULC07)
Profibus DP: general information The TeSys U communication module supports 2 Profibus application profiles based on DP V0 and DP V1 services: motor starter (MS), motor management starter (MMS). Cyclic/Acyclic services In general, data is exchanged via cyclic services and via acyclic services. The application profiles define, for the cyclic data: b manufacturer independent data, b manufacturer specific data. DP V1 Read/Write services DP V1 read and write services allow access to all data that cannot be accessed by cyclic data exchange. PKW feature In order to make data which is not cyclically exchanged accessible for DP V0 masters, a function called PKW (Periodically Kept in acyclic Words) is implemented. The cyclic data carries a dedicated zone of 4 input words and 4 output words, called PKW, which makes it possible to access all the registers en bloc. Electronic device description The TeSys U system is described by a GS*- file (1). This file will be used by any Profibus configuration tool to get information about the device. The GS*- files and associated icon, dedicated to the TeSys U system, can be downloaded from the www.schneider-electric.com website (Library/Software Tools).
(1) Replace the asterisk with the letter corresponding to the required language.
1/82
Presentation (continued) references

1

Information carried by the bus Depends on the type of control unit used with module LUL C07. Compatibility of Profibus DP communication module LULC07 with c 24 V control units
Information accessible via Profibus DP LULC07 in conjunction with: LUCB/C/DppBL LUCMppBL LUCAppBL Standard Advanced Multifunction control unit control unit control unit
106949
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LUL C07
Starter status (ready, running, fault) Start and Stop commands Thermal overload alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions Log function Monitoring function Alarms (overcurrent, ...) Functions performed
References
Description ProfibusDP communication module Item Reference LULC07
18
Weight kg 0.108
By pre-wired connector or wire link. b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended.
OA3 OA1 COM
510951
Description Pre-wired coil connection
For use with power base LUBpp LU2Bpp
Item
Reference LU9BN11L LU9MRL
4 6
Weight kg 0.050 0.450
b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block. When this reverser block and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL may be used.
LI2 c 24 V
c 24 V
LO1
LI1
COM
Components for connection to the bus and to the installation
The c 24 V-Aux supply to Profibus DP modules LULC07 must pass through power supply module LU9GC7. LULC07 modules must be connected to the LU9GC7 splitter box in order to be powered. The number of TeSys U starter-controllers that can be powered by an LU9GC7 module is limited by the maximum current (1.5 A) which it can deliver. The c 24 V supply for the inputs/outputs must be provided separately.
Description Profibus DP power supply module Profibus DP connector Profibus DP cables 2-wire
A1 A2 L1 On power base c 24 V
Length m 100 400 10 100 400
Item (1)
Reference LU9 GC7 LU9 AD7 TSXPBSCA100 TSXPBSCA400 LU9RPB010 LU9RPB100 LU9RPB400
15 16 13 13 17 17 17
Weight kg
Profibus DP cables 4-wire
0V
(1) See connection diagram on page 1/82. Connection of power supplies
1/83
Compatibility


567122
1 2 3
Compatibility of Profibus DP communication module LULC07 with starter-controller LUB12/LUB32 Maximum 1 or or 2

power ratings 50/60 Hz 400/415 V Power base Standard control unit Class 10 Advanced control unit Class 10 Class 20 Multifunction control unit Classes 530 LUCM6XBL
3
Profibus DP module
4
Pre-wired coil connection, nonreversing
Nonreversing kW 0.09 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB32
LUCA6XBL
LUCB6XBL LUCD6XBL
LULC07
LU9BN11L
0.25
LUCA1XBL
LUCB1XBL LUCD1XBL
LUCM1XBL
LULC07
LU9BN11L
1.5
LUCA05BL
LUCB05BL LUCD05BL
LUCM05BL
LULC07
LU9BN11L
4
LUB + LUCpppBL + LUL C07 + LU9BN11L 5.5
LUCA12BL
LUCB12BL LUCD12BL
LUCM12BL
LULC07
LU9BN11L
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
7.5
LUCA18BL
LUCB18BL LUCD18BL
LUCM18BL
LULC07
LU9BN11L
15
LUB32
LUCA32BL
LUCB32BL LUCD32BL
LUCM32BL
LULC07
LU9BN11L
Note: Profibus DP module LULC07 is not compatible with LUTM controllers.
1/84
Compatibility (continued)


5
567123
Compatibility of Profibus DP communication module LULC07 with starter-controller LU2B12 / LU2B32 Maximum 5 or or 2
power ratings 50/60 Hz 400/415 V Power base Reversing Standard control unit Class 10 LUCA6XBL Advanced control unit Class 10 Class 20 Multifunction control unit Classes 530 LUCM6XBL
3
Profibus DP module
6
Pre-wired coil connection, reversing
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
kW 0.09
LU2B12BL or LU2B32BL or LU2B12BL LU2B32BL LU2B12BL or LU2B32BL LU2B12BL or LU2B32BL LU2B32BL
LUCB6XBL LUCD6XBL
LULC07
LU9MRL
0.25
LUCA1XBL
LUCB1XBL LUCD1XBL
LUCM1XBL
LULC07
LU9MRL
1.5
LUCA05BL
LUCB05BL LUCD05BL
LUCM05BL
LULC07
LU9MRL
6
LU2B + LUCpppBL + LUL C07 + LU9MRL
5.5
LUCA12BL
LUCB12BL LUCD12BL
LUCM12BL
LULC07
LU9MRL
7.5
LUCA18BL
LUCB18BL LUCD18BL
LUCM18BL
LULC07
LU9MRL
15
LU2B32BL
LUCA32BL
LUCB32BL LUCD32BL
LUCM32BL
LULC07
LU9MRL
Note: Profibus DP module LULC07 is not compatible with LUTM controllers.
1/85
Presentation

CANopen communication module and pre-wired coil connection components
1 2 3
and LO1
Communication module LUL C08 allows direct connection of TeSys U startercontrollers and controllers on a CANopen bus. Module LULC08 is of the slave type. When used in conjunction with an LUCpppBL or LUCpT1BL control unit, module LUL C08 provides control and command of the starter-controller and of the controller. 9 4 For local control requirements, the module is equipped with a configurable, c24V. 0.5 V discrete output and two configurable discrete inputs. LULC08 communication modules can be connected to Advantys STB module : XBE2100K. 8 7 6 5
Presentation
Connections
Star topology Bus topology
1 LED indicating module status 2 Fault signalling LED 3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1, OA3
10
12
12
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 5 6 7 8 9
SUB-D connector for bus link c 24 V supply connection Discrete input Discrete input Discrete output Outputs for starter commands or
16 11
c 24 V
16 11 17 16 17
13 17 14 19 11 14 17 16
c 24 V
15
10 CANopen master module TSX CPP110 (PMCIA card with

junction box).
11 Cable TSXCANCpp equipped with a TSX CANKCDF90T

connector (to be assembled)
12 Terminal block TSX CANTDM4 with 4 SUB D type
18
15
connectors for connection of slaves and screw terminal blocks (connection of bus and dedicated 24 V supply to modules LUL C08).
13 Connection between junction boxes TSX CANTDM4 by 14 The slaves are connected by means of cables
TSXCANCADDpp
cable TSXCANCADDpp or cable TSXCANCpp fitted with TSXCANKCDF90T connectors.
Connection of power supplies The c 24 V power supply for modules LUL C08 is distributed via the bus and must be connected to the first TSX CANTDM4 junction box. The cable c.s.a. allows connection of up to 25 LUL C08 modules . Above this number, another power supply must be connected to the next junction box. A c 24 V supply must be connected to module LUL C08 for outputs OA1, OA3 and LO1. Information carried by the bus Depends on the type of control unit used.
Control unit Standard Advanced Multifunction Starter status (ready, running, fault) Start and Stop commands Thermal overload alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions "Log" function "Monitoring" function Alarms (overcurrent, ...) Functions performed For more detailed information, please refer to User's Manual LU9 CD1, see page opposite.
15 Connections are made by means of cables TSXCANCpp

fitted with TSXCANKCDF180T connectors for the slaves and with TSXCANKCDF90T connectors for the junction boxes. 16 Starter-controller 17 CANopen communication module LUL C08
18 Advantys STB island (NIM: Network Interface Modules

+ I/O modules)
19 CANopen extension module STB XBE 2100K
Compatibility of CANopen communication module with control units
LUCAppBL / BppBL / C ppBL / D ppBL All versions marketed after 2T04081 (1) LUCMppBL All versions u V3.2 LUCMT1BL All versions u V3.2 (1) This date code is made up as follows: 2T or 2C factory code. 04,05,06 and so on: year of manufacture. 08: week. 1: 1st day of the week.
1/86
References


CANopen communication module and pre-wired coil connection components
Communication module LUL C08 uses PDO, SDO and PKW type objects for data exchange (Process Data Objects, Service Data Objects, Periodically Kept in Acyclic Words). Transmit and Receive PDO
PDO 1 Real time command-control Preconfigured and enabled To be defined by configuration PDO 2, PDO 3 Unused PDO 4
Communication services
1 2 3 4
Adjustment, diagnostics and acyclic exchanges Preconfigured and enabled
510922
References
Description CANopen communication module Item Reference LULC08
16
Weight kg 0.108
Note: The Electronic Data Sheets (EDS), and users manuals are available on the website www.schneider-electric.com.
16
Description Pre-wired coil connection For use with power base LUBpp LU2Bpp Item Reference LU9BN11L LU9MRL
17
LUB + LUL C08 + LU9BN11L
566988
17 18
Weight kg 0.050 0.450
5 6 7 8 9 10
b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL may be used.
Cables for connection to the bus

Description Length m 0.3 1.0 3 5
Item
Reference
Weight kg 0.045 0.065 0.125 1.500
16
Standard
Cables equipped with SUB-D connectors
18
LU2B + LUL C08 + LU9MRL
Reel of cable
50 100
14 14 14 14 11 11 14 14 14 14 11 11
TSXCANCADD03 TSXCANCADD1 TSXCANCADD3 TSXCANCADD5 TSXCANCA50 TSXCANCA100
UL approved
Cables equipped with SUB-D connectors 0.3 1 3 5 Reel of cable 50 100
TSXCANCBDD03 TSXCANCBDD1 TSXCANCBDD3 TSXCANCBDD5 TSXCANCB50 TSXCANCB100
0.045 0.065 0.125 1.500
Separate components
Description Elbowed connector Straight connector Junction box Weight kg TSXCANKCDF90T TSXCANKCDF180T TSXCANTDM4 Reference
1/87
Presentation

DeviceNet communication module and pre-wired coil connection components
1
567225
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10
When used in conjunction with the power base and control unit, communication module LULC09 allows TeSysU starter-controllers and controllers to be controlled via DeviceNet. Communication module LULC09 is of the slave type and uses the TeSys U systems internal registers which can be accessed via DeviceNet. Module LULC09 has a configurable 24 V (0.5 A) discrete output and two configurable discrete inputs.
Presentation
Connections
Serial bus topology
8 7 6
11
63 starter-controllers max. with modules LULC09
1 LED indicating module status 2 Fault signalling LED 3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1, OA3 and LO1 and 24 V bus 4 DeviceNet connector for bus link 5 c 24 V supply connection 6 Discrete input 7 Discrete input 8 Discrete output 9 Outputs for starter-controller commands (nonreversing and reversing) 10 Pin for connection to control unit (advanced or multifunction)
c 24 V 12
13 14
13 14
13 14
11 12 13 14
Industrial PLC: Industrial Programmable Controller equipped with a DeviceNet Master. Connection and power distribution box for supply to DeviceNet communication modules. Starter-controller. DeviceNet communication module LUL C09.
1/88
Presentation (continued), references

1

Information carried by the bus Depends on the type of control unit used with module LUL C09.
567228
Compatibility of DeviceNet LULC09 communication module with c 24 V control units

Information accessible via DeviceNet LULC09 in conjunction with: LUCB/C/DppBL LUCMppBL LUCAppBL Standard Advanced Multifunction control unit control unit control unit
1 2 3 4 5
Weight kg 0.050 0.450
LUL C09
Starter status (ready, running, fault) Start and Stop commands Thermal overload alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions Log function Monitoring function Alarms (overcurrent, ...) Functions performed
567226
OA3 OA1 COM
References
V Can_L S Can_H
Description
V+
Item
Reference LULC09
DeviceNet communication module
14
Weight kg 0.108

Description Pre-wired coil connection For use with power base LUBpp LU2Bpppp Reference LU9BN11L LU9MRL
LO1 LI1 LI2
+ c 24 V + c 24 V
c 24 V
6 7 8 9 10
b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block. When this reverser block and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL may be used.
Supply
Connection of power supplies
The 24 V supply to DeviceNet LULC09 modules is provided via the (V+ , V-) terminals. The 24 V supply for the inputs/outputs must be provided separately from the supply to the LULC09 modules. The 24 V Aux terminal is for supply to the LUCM control unit or the LUTM controller.
1/89
Compatibility


1
567122
Compatibility of DeviceNet communication module LULC09 with starter-controller LUB12/LUB32 Maximum 1 or or 2

power ratings 50/60 Hz 400/415 V Power base Standard control unit Advanced control unit Multifunction control unit
3
DeviceNet module
4
Pre-wired coil connection, nonreversing
2 3
Nonreversing kW 0.09 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB32
Class 10
Class 10
Class 20
Classes 530 LUCM6XBL LULC09 LU9BN11L
LUCA6XBL
LUCB6XBL LUCD6XBL
0.25
LUCA1XBL
LUCB1XBL LUCD1XBL
LUCM1XBL
LULC09
LU9BN11L
1.5
LUCA05BL
LUCB05BL LUCD05BL
LUCM05BL
LULC09
LU9BN11L
4
LUB + LUCpppBL + LUL C09 + LU9BN11L 5.5
LUCA12BL
LUCB12BL LUCD12BL
LUCM12BL
LULC09
LU9BN11L
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
7.5
LUCA18BL
LUCB18BL LUCD18BL
LUCM18BL
LULC09
LU9BN11L
15
LUB32
LUCA32BL
LUCB32BL LUCD32BL
LUCM32BL
LULC09
LU9BN11L
Note: DeviceNet communication module LUL C09 is compatible with LUTM controllers.
1/90
Compatibility (continued)


5
567123
Compatibility of DeviceNet communication module LULC09 with starter-controller LU2B12 / LU2B32 Maximum 5 or or 2
power ratings 50/60 Hz 400/415 V Power base Reversing Standard control unit Class 10 LUCA6XBL Advanced control unit Class 10 Class 20 Multifunction control unit Classes 530 LUCM6XBL
3
DeviceNet module
6
Pre-wired coil connection, reversing
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
kW 0.09
LU2B12BL or LU2B32BL or LU2B12BL LU2B32BL LU2B12BL or LU2B32BL LU2B12BL or LU2B32BL LU2B32BL
LUCB6XBL LUCD6XBL
LULC09
LU9MRL
0.25
LUCA1XBL
LUCB1XBL LUCD1XBL
LUCM1XBL
LULC09
LU9MRL
1.5
LUCA05BL
LUCB05BL LUCD05BL
LUCM05BL
LULC09
LU9MRL
6
LU2B + LUCpppBL + LUL C09 + LU9MRL
5.5
LUCA12BL
LUCB12BL LUCD12BL
LUCM12BL
LULC09
LU9MRL
7.5
LUCA18BL
LUCB18BL LUCD18BL
LUCM18BL
LULC09
LU9MRL
15
LU2B32BL
LUCA32BL
LUCB32BL LUCD32BL
LUCM32BL
LULC09
LU9MRL
Note: DeviceNet communication module LUL C09 is compatible with LUTM controllers.
1/91
Presentation

Advantys STB communication module and pre-wired coil connection components
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Communication module LUL C15 allows direct connection of TeSys U startercontrollers and controllers on an Advantys STB island, between two segments or at the end of a segment. In the latter case, the segment must be equipped with an EOS (End of segment) extension module STBXBE1100. The starter-controller will then be able to make use of the services provided by Advantys STB: self-addressing, autobaud, fallback positions. When used in conjunction with an LUCpppBL or LUCpT1BL control unit, module LUL C15 provides control and command of the starter-controller and of the controller. For local control requirements, the module is equipped with a configurable, c24V, 0.5 A discrete output and two configurable discrete inputs.
Presentation
Connections
10 11
8 7 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
13
14
Two-colour LED indicating module status Fault signalling LED LED indicating that c 24 V supply is ON Bus connectors c 24 V supply connection Discrete input Discrete input Discrete output Outputs for starter commands
12 13 14 12 13 14 12 17 13 14 + 16 17
15 16
18 13 14 12
10 Advantys STB island (NIM: Network Interface Module + I/O modules). 11 Extension module (EOS/End of segment) STBXBE1100. 12 Bus connecting cable LU9RCDpp, elbowed/straight, for connection of the first TeSys U 13 Starter-controller. 14 Communication module LUL C15. 15 Connector for connection of product either by wire link or using coil connection modules 16 Line end adapter LU9RFL15. 17 Bus connection cable LU9RDDpp, straight/straight, for connections between LUL C15 modules. 18 Beginning of segment (BOS). Connection of power supply for the outputs A c 24 V supply must be connected to module LUL C15 for outputs OA1, OA3 and LO1. Information carried by the bus Depends on the type of control unit used.
Control unit Standard Advanced Multifunction Starter status (ready, running, fault) Start and Stop commands Thermal overload alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions "Log" function "Monitoring" function Alarms (overcurrent, ...) Functions performed For more detailed information, please refer to User's Manual LU9 CD1, see page opposite. LU9BN11L or LU9MRL. communication module.
Compatibility of Advantys STB communication module with control units
LUCAppBL / BppBL / C ppBL / D ppBL All versions marketed after 2T04081 (1) LUCMppBL All versions u V3.2 LUCMT1BL All versions u V3.2 (1) This date code is made up as follows: 2T or 2C: factory code. 04,05,06 and so on: year of manufacture. 08: week. 1: 1st day of the week.
1/92
References


Advantys STB communication module and pre-wired coil connection components
The maximum number of starter-controllers and controllers that can be connected to an Advantys STB island depends on the Network Interface Module (NIM) used and the associated control units.
NIM (Network Interface Module) CANopen Standard Basic DeviceNet Standard Basic Profibus DP Standard Basic Interbus Standard Basic Fipio Standard Modbus plus Standard Ethernet Standard Number of starter-controllers LUCAppBL LUCBppBL LUCMppBL LUCCppBL LUCD ppBL 17 17 15 12 12 12 18 18 16 12 12 12 9 8 8 9 8 8 2 2 1 2 2 1 4 4 4 17 17 15 32 32 32 Number of controllers LUCBpp LUCDpp LUCMpp 15 12 16 12 8 8 1 1 4 15 32
Possible architectures
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
References
Description Advantys STB communication module Line end adapter Item Reference LULC15 14 LU9RFL15 16 End of segment (EOS) STBXBE1100 11 STBXBE1300 Beginning of segment (BOS) 18 Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors. Weight kg 0.108 0.012
14
By pre-wired connector or wire link. b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection. The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is recommended.
Description For use with power base LUBpp LU2Bpp Item Reference LU9BN11L LU9MRL
19
LUB + LUL C15 + LU9BN11L Pre-wired coil connection
19 20
Weight kg 0.050 0.450
b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL may be used.
Cables
Description
14
Cables fitted with connectors, one straight and one elbowed Cables fitted with two straight connectors
Length m 0.3 1 3 5 0.3 1 3
Item
Reference LU9RCD03 LU9RCD10 LU9RCD30 LU9RCD50 LU9RDD03 LU9RDD10 LU9RDD30
20
LU2B + LUL C15 + LU9MRL
12 12 12 12 17 17
Weight kg 0.045 0.065 0.125 1.500 0.045 0.065 0.125
Note: User manuals are available on the website www.schneider-electric.com.
1/93
Presentation


Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil connection components
1
566970
LULC031 1
510624
LULC033 1
Communication modules LULC031 and LUL C033 enable the TeSys U startercontroller to be connected to the Modbus network. They must have a c 24 V supply and must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit, LUCpppBL. They incorporate a 0.5 A, c 24 V discrete output for local command requirements. The module LUL C033 also has two configurable discrete inputs.
Presentation
2
6 3 5 2 6 35 4 2
Series type connection

Architecture
Star topology
Bus topology
10
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6
Module status signalling LED 24 V supply connection RJ45 connector for RS485 Modbus link 2 discrete inputs 1 discrete output Outputs for starter commands
12
8 7
8 7
8 7
9
8 7
To PLC
11
11 12
Communication module LULC031 or LULC033 Pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11C Connection cable VW3A8306Rpp with one RJ45 connector at each end Modbus hub LU9GC3 with channel connections to PLC and to starter-controller with RJ45 connectors 11 T-junction VW3A8306TFpp 12 Line terminator VW3A8306R Information carried by the bus Depends on the type of control unit used.
Control unit Starter status (ready, running, fault) Start and Stop commands Thermal overload alarm Remote reset via the bus Indication of motor load Fault signalling and differentiation Remote programming and monitoring of all functions Log function Monitoring function Alarms (overcurrent, ...) Functions performed Standard Advanced Multifunction
7 8 9 10
For more detailed information, please refer to Users Manual LU9CD1, see page opposite.
Compatibility of Modbus communication modules

With starter-controllers and controllers
Starter-controllers and controllers LUB pp / LU2Bp2 LUTM ppBL Possible combinations. LUL C031 LUL C033
1/94
References


Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil connection components
Compatibility of Modbus communication modules (continued)

With power bases
Control unit software versions LUCA ppBL LUCB ppBL, LUCC ppBL and LUCD ppBL LUCM ppBL V1.04 V1.05 V1.06 V1.10 (1) LUL C031 V2.3 (1) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LUL C031 V2.3 (1) No No LUL C033 V2.2 (1) Yes Yes No Yes No Yes LUL C033 V2.1 (1) Yes Yes
1 2 3 4 5
With base controllers, version 1.200 (1)

Control unit software versions LUCB TppBL and LUCD TppBL LUCM TppBL (1) And higher versions Combinations not permitted.
511527
V2.11 (1)
References
Description Modbus communication modules Item Reference LULC031 7 LULC033 7 Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors. Weight kg 0.080 0.080

7 8
LUB + LUL C03p + LU9B
Description Pre-wired coil connection For use with power base LUBpp LU2Bpp Item Reference LU9BN11C LU9MRC Weight kg 0.045 0.030
566967
b Wire link: Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface. This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC may be used.
8 13
6 7 8 9 10
Connection of communication modules on the serial bus

Achieved either by means of a Modbus hub or using T-junctions.
Description Modbus hub 8 slaves Cables fitted with 2 x RJ45 connectors Length m 0.3 1 3 0.3 1 RS 485 line terminator Item Reference LU9GC3 VW3A8306R03 VW3A8306R10 VW3A8306R30 VW3A8306TF03 VW3A8306TF10 VW3A8306R Weight kg 0.260 0.045 0.065 0.125 0.032 0.032 0.012
10 9 9 9 11 11 12
13
LU2B + LUL C03p + LU9M
T-junctions (1)

Application On CD-Rom Language Multi-language (3) Reference LU9CD1 Weight kg 0.022
(1) Fitted with 2 x RJ45 female connectors (bus side) and a 0.3 m or 1 m length cable supplied with an RJ45 male connector (station side). (2) The CD-Rom contains users manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway programming software. (3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
1/95
Presentation, description, setting-up

Communication gateways LUFP
0

Presentation
1 2 3 4 5 6
2
524177
Communication gateways LUFP allow connection between the Modbus serial link and Fipio, ProfibusDP or DeviceNet field buses. After configuration, these gateways manage information which can be accessed by the Modbus serial link and make this information available for read/write functions (command, monitoring, configuration and adjustment) on the field buses. An LUFP communication gateway consists of a box which can be clipped onto a 35mm omega rail, allowing connection of up to 8 Slaves connected on the Modbus serial link. Example of architecture
Configuration of gateway by PC TeSys U starter-controllers
LUFP
Fipio Profibus DP DeviceNet
(1) Modbus
ATS 48 ATV 312
Description
Front panel of the product 1 LED indicating: - communication status of the Modbus serial links, - gateway status, - communication status of the Fipio, ProfibusDP or DeviceNet bus. 2 Connectors for connection to Fipio, ProfibusDP or DeviceNet buses.
7 8 9 10
Characteristics, references: page 1/97 Dimensions: page 1/97
Underside of product
561512
3 RJ45 connector for connection of the Modbus serial link 4 RJ45 connector for link to a PC 5 c 24 V power supply 3 4 5
For the Fipio bus, software set-up of the gateway is performed using either PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software or ABC Configurator software. For the ProfibusDP and DeviceNet buses, software set-up is performed using ABCConfigurator. This software is included in the TeSysU users manual.
(1) Connection kit for PowerSuite software workshop (see page 1/76).
Software set-up
Schemes: page 1/120
1/96
Characteristics, references, dimensions

Characteristics
Bus type Environment Ambient air temperature Degree of protection Electromagnetic compatibility Conforming to IEC 60664 Around the device

Communication gateways LUFP
0
Emission Immunity Number of Modbus slaves which can be connected Connection Modbus To a PC Field bus V mA mA
Supply Consumption Indication/diagnostics Services
Max. Typical Profile Command Monitoring Configuration and adjustment
Fipio ProfibusDP DeviceNet Degree of pollution: 2 + 5+ 50 IP 20 Conforming to IEC 50081-2: 1993 Conforming to IEC 61000-6-2: 1999 y8 By RJ45 connector conforming to Schneider Electric RS485 standard By RJ45 connector, with PowerSuite connection kit By SUBD9 female By 5-way removable By SUBD9 female connector screw connector connector External supply, c 24 10 % 280 100 By LED on front panel FEDC32 or FEDC32P 256 configurable words 26 configurable words (1) 122 configurable words 256 configurable words 26 configurable words (1) 122 configurable words By gateway mini messaging facility (PKW)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
References
Description Communication gateways For use with TeSysU starter-controllers, Altistart48, Altivar31, Altivar312 For use with Modbus Length m 3 0.3 1 3 With bus/ serial link Fipio/Modbus ProfibusDP/Modbus DeviceNet/Modbus Reference LUFP1 LUFP7 LUFP9 Weight kg 0.245 0.245 0.245
Connection accessories
822631
Description Connection cables TSXFPACC12
Connectors 1 RJ45 type connector and one end with stripped wires 2 RJ45 type connectors 2 RJ45 type connectors 2 RJ45 type connectors 1 SUB-D 9 male connector 1 SUB-D 9 male connector 1 SUB-D 9 male connector
Weight kg VW3 A8 306 D30 0.150 VW3 A8 306 R03 VW3 A8 306 R10 VW3 A8 306 R30 TSX FP ACC12 490 NAD 911 04 490 NAD 911 03 0.050 0.050 0.150 0.040
Reference
822713
Connectors
Fipio Profibus mid line Profibus line end
490NAD91103
Documentation
Description Users manual for TeSysU range (2) Medium CD-Rom Language Multilingual: English, French, German, Italian, Spanish Reference LU9 CD1 Weight kg 0.022
Dimensions
= 120
9
27
(1) If the gateway is configured using PL7 and not ABC Configurator, the I/O capacity is limited to a total of 26 words. (2) This CD-Rom contains users manuals for AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules, multifunction control units and gateways, as well as for the gateway programming software, ABC Configurator.
75
10
Presentation, description: page 1/96
Setting-up: page 1/96
Schemes: page 1/120
1/97
Characteristics

Environment
1 2 3 4 5 6
Product certifications
Conforming to standards Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, overvoltage category III, degree of pollution: 3 Conforming to UL508, CSA C22-2 n14 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 appendix N V V kV V
UL, CSA, CCC, GOST, ASEFA. ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LROS. ATEX. IEC/EN 60947-6-2, CSA C22-2 N 14, Type E UL 508 type E: with phase barrier LU9 SP0 690 600 6 Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400 Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 400 IP 40 IP 20 IP 20
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Safety separation of circuits SELV
Degree of protection Front panel outside connection Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone (protection against Front panel and wired terminals direct finger contact) Other faces Protective treatment Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 Storage Operation
Ambient air temperature around the device
Maximum operating altitude Operating positions In relation to normal vertical mounting plane
TH Cycles 12 h 48 C - 40+ 85 C Power bases and standard and advanced control units: - 25 + 70. (At temperatures above 60C and up to 70C, for starter-controller LUB32, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products). Power bases and multifunction control units: - 25+ 60. (At temperatures above 45 C, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products. At temperatures above 55 C and up to 60 C, leave a gap of 20 mm between products.) m 2000
30
90 90
30
Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12 C C V2 960 (parts supporting live components) 650 Cadmium and silicone-free, recyclable Power poles open: 10 gn Power poles closed: 15 gn Power poles open: 2 gn Power poles closed: 4 gn (2) In open air: 8 - Level 3 On contact: 8 - Level 4 10 - Level 3 All circuits except for serial link: 4 - Level 4 Serial link: 2 - Level 3 Common mode Serial mode 2 1 Not applicable 10 Class A
7 8 9 10
Environmental restrictions Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Resistance to electrostatic discharge Immunity to radiated highfrequency disturbance Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to dissipated shock waves
Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 kV kV V/m kV kV
Immunity to conducted high-frequency disturbance Radiated emission and conducted
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Uc a 24240 V, kV Uc c 48220 V Uc = 24 V c Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 V Conforming to CISPR 11 and EN 55011
(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction. (2) 2 gn with Advantys STB or CANopen communication modules.
References : pages 1/62 to 1/78
Schemes : pages 1/114 to 1/125
1/98
Characteristics

Power bases and control units
Power base, control unit or reverser block type
Power circuit connection characteristics

Connection to 4 mm screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
LUB 12 + LUCA or LUCB or LUCC or LUCD
LUB 32 + LUCA or LUCB or LUCC or LUCD
LUB 12 + LUCM
LUB 32 + LUCM
LU2M LU6M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Control circuit connection characteristics

1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors
2.510 2.510 1.56 1.56 16 16 16 16 110 110 16 16 Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver: 6 mm 1.92.5 1.92.5
2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5
2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5
2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque Rated voltage of control circuit Voltage limits Operation
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m V V V V V V V V V V V mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA W ms ms ms
Control circuit characteristics

a 50/60 Hz c c 24 V (1) a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V Closing Opening
0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 Philips n 1 or flat screwdriver: 5 mm 0.81.2 0.81.2 24240 24240 24220 24220 2027 2027 2026.5 2026.5 a 38.572. c 38.593 a 88264 a 88264 c 88242 c 88242 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 29 29 55 55 130 220 140 220 280 280 280 280 60 80 70 90 35 45 35 25 2 3 24 V: 70; 48 V: 60; u 72 V: 50 35 35 3 3 At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms 15 15 3600 3600 3 3 Yes Yes 1 padlock with 6.9 mm shank 12 32 q y 70C: 12A q y 70C: 32A q y 70C: 12A q y 70C: 32A 690 (3) 690 (3) 4060 4060 3 6 9 12 18 25 32 0.1 0.3 0.6 1.1 2.4 4.6 7.5
0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.81.2 24 2028 14.5 150 70 1.7 75 35 3 15 3600 3 Yes
0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.81.2 24 2028 14.5 200 75 1.8 65 35 3 15 3600 3 Yes
0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.81.2 120 2360 2300 1000 120 (2) (2) (2)
Drop-out
Typical consumption I max while closing
I rms sealed
Heat dissipation Operating time
Resistance to micro-breaks Resistance to voltage dips IEC/EN 61000-4-11 Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour
Main pole characteristics
Number of poles Possible Isolation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Padlocking Rated thermal current Category AC-41 Rated operational current To IEC/ EN 60947-6-2 Category AC-43 (Ue y 440V) Rated operational voltage Frequency limits Of the operating current Power dissipated Operational current in the power circuits Power dissipated in all three poles Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit Total breaking time Thermal limit
V Hz A W
12 32 q y 55C: 12A q y 55C: 32A q y 55C: 12A q y 55C: 32A 690 (3) 690 (3) 4060 4060
With Isc max on 440 V
V 230 440 500 690 kA 50 50 10 4 ms 2 2 2 kAs 90 120 90 120 (1) Voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %. (2) No consumption sealed. (3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9SP0.
1/99
Characteristics

Reversing power bases and auxiliary contacts
Specific characteristics of power bases LU2B and reverser blocks LU2M or LU6M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Duration of inrush phase Maximum operating time
General characteristics of auxiliary contacts

Conventional For ambient temperature q < 70 C thermal current (Ith) Frequency of the operational current U min Minimum switching capacityl = 10-8 I min Short-circuit Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 protection Short-time rating Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms Insulation resistance Non-overlap time Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts Linked contacts Mirror contact Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
a 50/60 Hz ms c ms ms Without change of direction With change of direction ms A Hz V mA A A A A mW ms
25 15 75 150 5 Up to 400 17 5 gG fuse: 4 30 40 50 10 2 (on energisation and on de-energisation)
Specific characteristics of auxiliary contacts built-into the power base

Each power base has 1 N/O contact and 1 N/C contact which are mechanically linked The N/C contact fitted in each power base reliably represents the state of the power contacts (safety scheme) Up to a 690; c 250 690 600
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 voltage (Ui) Conforming to UL, CSA
Specific characteristics of auxiliary contacts in modules LUF N, of auxiliary contacts LUA1 and of reverser blocks LU2M and LU6M
V V V Up to a 250; c 250 250 250
V V V
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation Conforming to IEC/EN60947-5-1 voltage (Ui) Conforming to UL, CSA Rated operational power of contacts Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j = 0.4) V VA VA VA 24 60 16 4 48 120 32 8 115 280 80 20 230 560 160 40 400 960 280 70 440 600 1050 1440 300 80 420 100
d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W 24 120 70 25 48 90 50 18 125 75 38 14 250 68 33 12
1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles

10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
Millions of operating cycles
10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 250 V
24 V 48 V 125 V
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
0,1 0,1
0,2
0,3 0,4
0,6 0,8 1 0,5 0,7 0,9
6 8 10 5 7 9 Current broken in A
0,1 0,1
0,2
0,3 0,4
0,6 0,8 1 0,5 0,7 0,9
3 4 6 8 10 5 7 9 Current broken in A
1/100
Characteristics

Control units
Characteristics of standard control units LUCA

Protection Overload protection Motor type Conforming to standard Tripping class conforming to UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Frequency limits of the operational current Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping threshold Tripping tolerance 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14 10 Hz C 4060 - 25+ 70 Yes 14.2 x Ir (setting current) 20 %
1 2
Short-circuit protection
Characteristics of advanced control units LUCB, LUCC and LUCD

Control unit type Protection Motor type Conforming to standard Overload protection Tripping class conforming to UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Frequency limits of the operational current Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping threshold Tripping tolerance LUCB 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14 10 Hz C 4060 - 25+ 70 Yes 14.2 x Ir max. 20 % LUCC Single-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14 10 4060 - 25+ 55 14.2 x Ir max. 20 % LUCD 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14 20 4060 - 25+ 70 Yes 14.2 x Ir max. 20 %
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics of multifunction control units LUCM

Protection Overload protection Motor type Conforming to standard Tripping class conforming to UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Frequency limits of the operational current Temperature compensation Physical interface Connections Protocol Maximum transmission speed Maximum return time Type Language version Precision Resolution External type Heat dissipation Parameters can be set: single-phase or 3-phase IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 (selectable) Hz C 5060 - 25+ 55 RS 485 multi-drop RJ45 on front panel Modbus RTU 19 200 (self-configuration up to this value) 200 LCD, 2 lines of 12 characters Multilanguage (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish) 5% 1 % of Ir c 24, with maximum ripple of 10 %. 0.8
Communication interface for terminal on enclosure door Display
bit/s ms
Auxiliary supply
V W
Configuration table for protection devices and alarms on multifunction control units LUCM
Tripping Alarm Factory setting Factory setting Overcurrent Overload Earth fault Phase imbalance Torque limitation No-load running Long starting time Activated (1) Activated (1) Activated Activated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Activated Activated Activated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Adjustment of tripping Adjustment of time before Adjustment of alarm threshold tripping threshold Range Default value Range Default value Range Default value 317 Ir 0.532 A (2) 0.25 Ir min 1030 % 18 Ir 0.31 Ir 18 Ir 14.2 Ir min 0.3 Ir min 10 % 2 Ir 0.5 Ir Ir Class: 530 0.11.2 s 0.220 s 130 s 1200 s 1200 s 5 0.1 s 5s 5s 10 s 10 s 10100 % of 85 % the thermal state 0.25 Ir min 0.3 Ir min 1030 % 10 % 18 Ir 2 Ir 0.31 Ir 0.5 Ir 18 Ir Ir
Configuration of additional functions on multifunction control units LUCM

Factory setting Manual 120 s 3-phase motor Self-cooled English Average current
Reset Time before reset Type of load Language Display
Setting range Manual, automatic or remote 11000 s 3-phase motor, single-phase motor Self-cooled, force cooled English, French, German, Italian, Spanish Average current, thermal state of motor, current in phase 1 / 2 / 3, earth leakage current, phase imbalance, cause of last 5 faults (1) This function cannot be deactivated. (2) The setting range depends on the rating of the control unit used.

References : pages 1/62 to 1/78 Dimensions : pages 1/112 and 1/113 Schemes : pages 1/114 to 1/125
1/101
Characteristics

Limiter-disconnector, current limiter, thermal overload alarm function module and thermal overload fault signalling modules
Characteristics of limiter-disconnector LUA LB1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Conventional thermal current (Ith) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Operating threshold Breaking capacity Mounting Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque I rms
V A kA V kA
690 32 50 440 690 130 70 Directly on the upstream terminals of the starter-controller
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
1.510 1.5...6 110 16 1...6 1...6 Phillips n2 or flat screwdriver 6 mm 1.92.5
Characteristics of current limiter LA9 LB920

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Conventional thermal current (Ith) conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1 Operating threshold Breaking capacity Mounting Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque V A I rms A V kA 690 63 1000 440 100 Separate
690 35
1.525 1.5...10 1.525 2.510 1.516 1.54 Phillips n2 or flat screwdriver 6 mm 2.2
Characteristics of thermal overload alarm function modules LUF W10

Activation threshold Hysteresis between activation and switching off Display Supply Type Discrete output characteristics AC-15 DC-13 A Conventional thermal current (Ith) For ambient temperature q < 70 C Short-circuit protection Conforming to A IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Module type Fault signalling External power supply Module consumption Discrete outputs Type AC-15 DC-13 For ambient temperature q < 70 C Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Conductor c.s.a. Length A A mm2 m Fixed at 88% of the thermal tripping state 5% By LED on front panel Powered by the control unit N/O contact 230 V max; 400 VA 100 000 operating cycles 24 V; 50 W 100 000 operating cycles 2 gG fuse: 2
Characteristics of thermal overload fault signalling and reset modules

V mA LUF DH11 LUF DA01 By LED on front panel a/c 24 240 7 at c 24 1.1 at a 240 1 N/C 1 N/C+ 1 N/O 230 V max; 400 VA 100 000 operating cycles 24 V; 50 W 100 000 operating cycles 2 gG fuse: 2 0.2 min 500 (R = 50 W , L = 52.8 mH, Cp = 93 pF) LUF DA10
1 N/O
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Short-circuit protection Reset input
1/102
Characteristics

Function modules and communication modules
Characteristics of motor load indication function module LUF V2

Analogue output Signal delivered Load impedance Minimum Maximum Typical Precision Precision Resolution kW W W 4 - 20 mA Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 2 for LUCB and LUCD Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 3 for LUCC 500 100 6% 10 % 1 % of Ir External c 24 V
1 2
Signal characteristics with advanced control unit Signal characteristics with multifunction control unit Supply
Characteristics of AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51

Module type Product certification AS-Interface profile Ambient air temperature Cycle time Addressing AS-Interface supply Current consumption ASILUF C5 AS-Interface V2.1 n 52901 7.D.F.0 Operation - 25+ 70 5 31 slaves 29.5...31.5 Normal operation: 25 Fault condition: 30 200 ASILUF C51 AS-Interface V2.1 n 52303 7.A.7.E 10 62 slaves
C ms V mA mA mA V
3 4 5 6
On the AS-Interface bus On 24 V supply for the outputs
Auxiliary supply Number of outputs Switching capacity of the solid state outputs Indication/diagnostics
c 24 30 % 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation 0.5 A/24 V (outputs protected against short-circuits) By 2 LEDs on front panel
Characteristics of Modbus communication module LULC03p

Module type Physical interface Connections Protocol Maximum transmission speed Maximum return time Addressing Ambient air temperature Discrete inputs LUL C031 RS 485 multi-drop RJ45 on front panel Modbus RTU 19 200 (self-configuration up to this value) 30 By switches: from 0...31 Operation - 25+ 55 c 24 (positive logic) 7 10 ( 30 %) 10 ( 30 %) Resistive LUL C033
bit/s ms C V mA V mA ms ms
Number Supply Input current Nominal input values Voltage Current Response time Change to state 1 Change to state 0 Input type Number Supply Max. current gI fuse
2 (to be assigned according to the configuration) c 24 7
7 8 9 10
Solid state outputs Protection Switching capacity Indication/diagnostics
V mA A
3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation c 24 500 1 0.5 A/24 V By 3 LEDs on front panel
1/103
Characteristics (continued)

Characteristics of CANopen, Profibus DP and DeviceNet communication modules
1 2
Communication module Services Conformity class Standard Profile
Profibus DP LULC07 NA Profibus DP LVSG V1.0 MS (Motor Starter) and MMS (Motor Management Starter) Profibus DP 1125 9-way SUB-D male 9600 Kbits/s12 Mbits/s 2 shielded twisted pairs V A A C 2028 1.5 (max) 2 Operation -25+55
CANopen LULC08 S 20 (Schneider Electric) CIADS-301 V4.02 DR 303-2
DeviceNet LULC09 NA IEC 62026-1, overvoltage category III, degree of pollution: 3 ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association) MS (Motor Starter) CAN 2.0A (2B passive) 063 Open Style connector 125500kbaud
Protocol Address Structure Physical interface Binary rate Cables Supply for the discrete outputs and control c 24 V Current consumption Protection by gl fuse
CAN 2.0A (2B passive) 0127 (by switches) 9-way SUB-D female 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500 and 1000 Kbits/s (by switches)
3 4 5
Discrete outputs
Ambient air temperature Logic inputs Number Supply Input current Nominal input values Voltage Current Response time Change to state 1 Change to state 0 Input type Number Max. current Short-circuit protection Switching capacity
V mA V mA ms ms
2 (to be assigned according to the configuration) c 24 7 c 24 (positive logic) 7 10 ( 30%) 10 ( 30%) Resistive 3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation 500 Yes 0.5 A / c 24 V By 3 LEDs on front panel
mA
6 7 8 9
Indication/diagnostics
Characteristics of Advantys STB communication module LUL C15

Physical interface Connections Protocol Transmission speed Addressing Supply for the c 24 V discrete outputs Current consumption and control Protection by gl fuse Ambient air temperature Discrete inputs Number Supply Input current Nominal input values Voltage Current Response time Change to state 1 Change to state 0 Input type CAN Fire Wire CAN 2.0 and CAN 2.B (passive mode) kbit/s 800 Self-addressing V 2028 A 1.5 (max) A 2 C Operation - 25+ 55 2 ( to be assigned according to configuration) c 24 7 c 24 (positive logic) 7 10 ( 30%) 10 ( 30%) Resistive 3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation 500 Yes 0.5 A / c 24 V By 3 LEDs on front panel
V mA V mA ms ms
10
Number Max. current Short-circuit protection Switching capacity Indication/diagnostics
Discrete outputs
mA
1/104
Characteristics(continued)

Connection characteristics
Module type LUFW10, LUFDH11, LUFDA01 and LUFDA10 Pitch 1 conductor 2 identical conductors Flexible cable Without with cable end insulated ferrule With insulated ferrule 1 conductor 2 identical conductors 1 conductor 2 identical conductors (Use a double cable end) 1 conductor 2 identical conductors Conductor size Tightening torque Flat screwdriver Module type 1 conductor N.m mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 5.08 0.21.5 0.21 0.251.5 0.251 0.251.5 0.51 0.21.5 0.21 AWG24 AWG16 0.50.6 3.5 LULC031, LULC033, LULC08 and LULC15 Pitch 1 conductor 2 identical conductors Flexible cable Without with cable end insulated ferrule With insulated ferrule 1 conductor 2 identical conductors 1 conductor 2 identical conductors (Use a double cable end) 1 conductor 2 identical conductors Conductor size Tightening torque Flat screwdriver 1 conductor N.m mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG26 AWG16 0.200.25 2.5 LUF V2 ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51 Inputs and 24 V auxiliary supply 5.08 0.21.5 0.21 0.251.5 0.251 0.251.5 0.51 0.21.5 0.21 AWG24 AWG16 0.50.6 3.5 LUL C09 Inputs and 24 V auxiliary supply 3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.75 0.141 0.140.5 AWG26 AWG16 0.200.25 2.5 Connection on the bus 5 (Open Style) DeviceNet 0.22.5 0.51.5 0.252.5 0.251 0.252.5 0.51.5 0.22.5 0.140.5 AWG24 AWG16 0.50.6 3.5 Outputs 3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG26 AWG16 0.200.25 2.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Connectors Flexible cable without cable end
3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG26 AWG16 0.200.25 2.5 LUFC00
Solid cable without cable end
Connectors Flexible cable without cable end
3.81 0.141 0.140.75 0.251 0.250.34 0.250.5 0.5 0.141 0.140.5 AWG26 AWG16 0.200.25 2.5
1/105
Curves


Tripping curves for control units LUCA, LUCB, LUCD

Time (s)
1 2 3
Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %.

1000
100
2 3
10
4
0,1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 20 30 x the setting current (Ir)
5 6 7
1 LUCD, 3 poles from cold state, class 20. 2 LUCA, LUCB, 3 poles from cold state, class 10. 3 LUCA, LUCB, LUCD, 3 poles from hot state.
Tripping curves for control units LUCC

Time (s)
1000
100
2
10
8 9 10
0,1
10
12
14
20 30 x the setting current (Ir)
1 LUCC, single-phase, cold state. 2 LUCC, single-phase, hot state.
1/106
Curves (continued)


Tripping curves for control units LUCM

Cold state curves
10000

Time (s)
1 2 3 4 5
1000
100
10
Class 30 Class 25 Class 20 Class 15 Class 10 Class 5
0,1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 18 20 30 15 17 19 x the setting current (Ir)
6 7 8 9 10
1/107
Curves (continued)


Tripping curves for control units LUCM
1 2 3 4
Hot state curves

10000
Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %

Time (s)
1000
100
10
5
0,1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 16 18 20 30 15 17 19 x the setting current (Ir)
6 7 8 9 10
1/108
Curves (continued)


Current limitation on short-circuit

Ue = 460 V
peak current (kA)
100
1
1
10
2 3
2 3 4
0,1 0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6 0,8 1
8 10
20
30
40 60 80 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
1 Maximum peak current 2 32 A power base 3 12 A power base
Thermal limit on short-circuit

Ue = 460 V
Sum of Idt (As) 103
5 6
1000
100
7 8 9 10
10
1 0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6 0,8 1
8 10
20
30
1 32 A power base 2 12 A power base
1/109
Selection

LUB 12
10 8 6 5 4 3 2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 0,8 0,6 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40 Current broken in A
Ue y 440 V

Use in category AC-43

LUB 12 LUB 32
LUB 32
Ue = 690 V
LUB 12 LUB 32
6 5 4 3 2
10 8
10 8 6 5 4 3 2
1 0,8 0,6 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40 Current broken in A
1 0,8 0,6 0,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40 21 Current broken in A
0,55
0,75
2,2
5,5
1,5
7,5 15 15
230 V
kW
0,55
0,75
1,5
2,2
5,5
7,5
11
400 V
kW
0,55
0,75
2,2
5,5
1,5
7,5
11
440 V
kW
1/110
Selection

Ue y 440 V


LUB 12 LUB 32
Ue = 690 V
LUB 12 LUB 32
1 2 3
0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
1 0,8
1 0,8 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02
0,01 1 2 3 5 10 20 30 40 50 66 100 200 60 80 170 Current broken in A
0,01 1 2 3 5 10 20 30 200 50 60 100 40 54 80 126 Current broken in A
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1/111
Dimensions

Dimensions
1 2
Starter-controllers
LUB: non-reversing Rail mounting X1 126 X2 73 163167 154 126 Screw fixing 30 4 (2) LU2B: reversing Rail mounting Screw fixing 29 4 (2)
a (1)
X1
45
X2
135 (1) a
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
With Modbus module With Advantys STB, CANopen, Profibus DP or DeviceNet modules Minimum electrical clearance: X1 = 50 mm for Ue = 440 V and 70 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V, X2 = 0
135 147
45
Reverser block for mounting separately from power base

Rail mounting Screw fixing
115
113
45
113
36
Sets of busbars and plug-in power sockets

GV2G445 and GV2G454 GV2Gppp with terminal block GV1G09 GV2G245 and G254
18
a l
104
GV1 G09 38
95
120/125
233237 I 89 98 I 134 152
224
GV2G245 (2 x 45) GV2G254 (2 x 54) I GV2G445 (2 x 45) GV2G454 (2 x 54) 179 206 P 45 54 GV2G554 260 GV2G345 and G354 l
a Number of tap-offs GV2G445 (2 x 45) GV2G454 (2 x 54) AK5JB144 5 224 260 6 269 314 7 314 368 8 359 422 GV2G345 (2 x 45) GV2G354 (2 x 54) AK5PC13, PC33, PC33L 45,5 79 438 452 (1) Depth with communication module. (2) Retractable fixing lugs.
45 30
82
38
35,5
81
1/112
Dimensions (continued), mounting

Limiter-disconnector LUALB1 Disconnector LUALB10
Current limiter LA9LB920
1 2 3 4
93
2M4
146
103 51
154
a (1)
45
a
6 53,5
With Modbus module With Advantys STB, CANopen, Profibus DP or DeviceNet modules
135 147
Door interlock mechanisms

LU9APN21, LU9 APN22, LU9 APN24 Door cut-out
115
3,5
16
43,5 (1)
LU9 APNpp LU9 APNpp + GV APK12
16
60
237,4
0,5...4
22
= 48
48
a Mini 191 300
Maxi 300 483
5 6 7
43
= = 79,5
(1) For IP65 only. ASI TERV2
Addressing consoles
XZMC11
209
195
80
30
84
35
Splitter boxes
LU9GC3 (Modbus) LU9G02 and LU9G03 Rail mounting Screw fixing 4 (2) LU9GC7 (ProfibusDP) Rail mounting Screw fixing 4 (2)
8 9 10
163167
128
45
128
30
65
45
65
30
(1) Depth with communication module. (2) Retractable fixing lugs.
163167
154
170
1/113
Schemes

Starter-controllers, 12 or 32 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
4/T2
13/NO
14/NO
21/NC
Control Unit
22/NC
2
2/T1
Control Unit
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
6/T3
A1
A2
5/L3
With standard, advanced or multifunction control unit

Non-reversing Non-reversing
Pre-wired
3 4
With control unit LUCC or LUCM

Connection of a single-phase motor
1 L1 5 L2
Reverser
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
81
84
13/NO
14/NO
21/NC
Control Unit
22/NC
Control terminal block
LU2B
U 2
V 6
A1
A2
A3
B3
A1
B1
5
LU2M
Reverser blocks
LU6M
Control terminal blocks
S3
6 7 8 9 10
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
S1
S2
S1
S2
LU6M
Reverser Block
A3
B3
A1
B1
Reverser
With pre-wired connector LU9MRC

S1 S2 S3
LU6M 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 LU9M RC Pre-wired coil 81 84 A3 B3 A1 B1 A2 82
Reverser Block
Basic scheme
A2 13 21
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
14
22
LU2M
A1
A2
S3
A2
S2
S1
S3
LU6M
(1)
B3 Reverse A3 Reverse B1 Forward A1 Forward
S1 Start next stage S2 Electrical interlocking S3 Maintaining contact B1 Maintain forward running B3 Maintain reverse running A1 Pulse forward running A2 Common A3 Pulse reverse running (1) Electronically operated bistable electromagnet.
Add-on contact blocks

LUA1 C11
17/NO 95/NC
LUA1 C20
LUA8E20
57 I O 67
Add-on contact modules

LUFN20
33/NO 43/NO 34/NO 44/NO
LUFN11
44/NO 32/NC
A2
LUFN02
31/NC 41/NC 32/NC 42/NC
18/NO 96/NC
17/NO 97/NO
18/NO 98/NO
43/NO 31/NC
58
1/114
68
82
Schemes (continued)

Control units
Standard control units LUCA
Basic scheme
1 2 3 4 5 6 LUCA Sensor L1 Sensor L2 Sensor L3 Supply and Detection of start sequence A1 A2 Thermal overload memory Supply and Detection of start sequence A1 A2 Therm. overload memory Test Interface module 7 8 9 10 11 12
Advanced control units LUCB, LUCC, LUCD

Basic schemehd
1 2 3 4 5 6 LUCp
1 2 3 4 5 6
Sensor L1 Sensor L2 Sensor L3
Power Base Interface
Control A.S.I.C.
tr
Control A.S.I.C.
tr
1 and 2 Trips 3 and 4 Electromagnet 5 Power base rating 6 N/C
1 and 2 Trips 3 and 4 Electromagnet 5 Power base rating 6 N/C 7 Earth 8 Thermal status/Set 9 Reset mode/Reset 10 (lm/Ir) 11 Vc2 12 Vc1
Multifunction control units LUCM

LUCM 24 V Aux
Multifunction Control Unit D(B) D(A) +5V 0V 4 5 7 6 8 1 2 3
Basic scheme
4 5 6 LUCM Display and Parameter Entry
ESC ENT
Sensor L1 Sensor L2 Sensor L3
7 8 9 10
Control A.S.I.C.
RS485 Supply and detection of start sequence Thermal overload memory Supply A1 A2 Interface module 7 8 9 10 11 12 24 V Aux
D(B) D(A) +5V 0V
4 5 RJ45 7 8
1 and 2 Trips 3 and 4 Electromagnet 5 Power base rating 6 N/C 7 Earth 8 N/C 9 Earth 10 (lm/Ir) 11 Rx/Tx 12 Vc1
1/115
Schemes (continued)

Function modules
1 2 3
Alarm
Indication of motor load LUF V2

4-20 mA output
LUF W10
LUFW 10 07
Alarms Module 08
LUFV 2 4...20 mA
Analogue output Module 24 V Aux 24 V Aux NC
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit
LUFW 10 Input interface LED Supply Input interface P - Analogue/Digital converter Supply
LUFV 2
4 5
Relais bistable
Isolation Digital/Analogue converter
07
08
Voltage/Current converter
4...20 mA
100 W < load < 500 W c 30 V max and 40 mA min
Communication modules ASILUFC5 and ASILUFC51
6 7 8 9 10
Without pre-wired coil connection
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 Com OA1 OA3
AS-Interface Module AS-i
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil
With pre-wired coil connection LU9MRC
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 LU9M RC Pre-wired coil
Basic scheme
ASILUF C5 or DEL Ready-Fault-Pole ASILUF C51
Output interface Com OA1 OA3
A2SI AS-i
1/116
Schemes (continued)

Communication modules (continued)

Modbus communication module LULC031
Modbus communication module LULC033

1
Modbus Module COM D(B) D(A) 0V
LUL C031 Com Com OA1 OA3 LO1 24 V Aux
Modbus Module D(B) D(A) 0V
LUL C033 Com OA1 OA3 LO1 LI1 LI2 24 V c 24 V Aux
4 5 8 6
4 5 8 6
2 3 4
With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11C
With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11C
LUL C031 Com LO1 LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil 24 V Aux
LUL C033 LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil LO1 LI1 LI2 24 V c 24 V Aux
Modbus Module COM D(B) D(A) 0V 4 5 8 6 D(B) D(A) 0V
4 5 8 6
LUL C031 Com LO1 24 V Aux LU9M RC Pre-wired coil
LUL C033 LO1 LI1 LU9M RC Pre-wired coil LI2 24 V c 24 V Aux
Modbus Module COM
4 5 8
4 5 8
5 6 7 8 9 10
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit LUL C031
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller x6 Input interface Control unit interface Ready-Fault-Pole D(B) RS485 D(A) 0V 4 5 Modbus RJ45 8 AL1 AL2 Output interface Com OA1 OA3 LO1 I/O interface LI1 LI2 24 V c 24 V Aux RS485 LED Address LUL C033 Controller interface Ready-Fault-Pole D(B) D(A) 0V 4 5 Modbus RJ45 8
LED
Address
AL1 Output interface Com Com OA1 OA3 LO1 24 V
Supply
Supply
AL2
24 V Aux
COM
1/117
Schemes (continued)

1 2 3 4 5 6
Profibus DP communication module LUL C07
CANopen communication module LUL C08

LUL C07 Com OA3 OA1 LO1 LI1 LI2
Profibus DP Module Bus
Canopen Module Bus
With pre-wired coil connection LU9BN11LC
LUL C07 LO1 LI1 LU9B N11L Pre-wired coil LI2
Canopen Module Bus
LUL C07 LO1 LI1 LI2 LU9M RL Pre-wired coil
LUL C08 LO1 LI1 LU9M RL Pre-wired coil LI2
Canopen Module Bus
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller x6 LUL C07 Control unit interface LED Address Controller interface Ready-Fault-Pole
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller x6 LUL C08 Control unit interface LED Address Controller interface Ready-Fault-Pole
AL1 I/O interface Com OA3 OA1 LO1 LI1 LI2
Supply
AL1 AL2 OA3 OA1 Com I/O interface LO1 LI1 LI2
Supply
AL2
7 8 9 10
DeviceNet communication module LUL C09

Without pre-wired coil connection Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit LUL C09 Com OA3 OA1 LO1 LI1 LI2 DeviceNet Module Bus Control unit interface LED Address Controller interface Ready-Fault-Pole Controller x6 LUL C09
DeviceNet Module Bus I/O interface 24 V c OA3 OA1 Com LO1 LI1 LI2 AL1 Supply
AL2
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL
DeviceNet Module Bus
1/118
Schemes (continued)


Advantys STB communication module LUL C15
Parallel wiring modules

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Advantys STB Module Bus
LUF C00 Com OA1 OA3
Parallel bus Module Link // RJ45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
In Out
Advantys STB Module Bus In Out
LUF C00 LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil
Advantys STB Module Bus In Out
LUF C00 LU9M RC Pre-wired coil
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller x6 LUL C15 Control unit interface LED Address Controller interface
Basic scheme
LUF C00 ReayFaultPole Com OA3 OA1 RJ45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ready-Fault-Pole OUT IN AL1 Supply
I/O interface OA3 OA1 Com LO1 LI1 LI2
AL2
1 Forward running 2 Reverse running 3 Output common 4 Selector in position 5 Pole state 6 Reserved 7 Fault 8 Input common
Profibus DP power supply module LU9GC7

LU9 GC7 IN OUT
Filter
24 V Aux.
1/119
Schemes (continued)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Wiring hub and splitter boxes
Modbus hub LU9GC3

X1 N/C N/C N/C D (B) D (A) + RJ45 N/C N/C 0V X2 RJ45 X3 RJ45 X4 RJ45 X5 RJ45 X6 RJ45 X7 RJ45 X8 RJ45 Shielding LU9 GC3
Parallel wiring splitter box LU9G02

X1 Forward running Reverse running Output common N/C Pole state RJ45 N/C Fault +24 V Aux X2 X9 N/C N/C N/C D (B) RJ45 D (A) + N/C 24 V (1) 0V RJ45 LU9 G02
Parallel wiring splitter box LU9G03

X1 Forward running Reverse running Output common N/C Pole state RJ45 + 24 V Fault + 24 V Aux X2 RJ45 LU9 G03
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
X9 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
X3 RJ45 X4 RJ45
(2)
X3 RJ45 X4 RJ45
(2)
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ45
RJ45
X6 RJ45
(3)
Colours of TSXCDPppp connection cable wires (4)

1 White 2 Brown 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 Grey 6 Pink 7 Blue 8 Red 9 Black 10 Violet 11 Grey-pink 12 Red-blue 13 White-green 14 Brown-green 15 White-yellow 16 Yellow-brown 17 White-grey 18 Grey-brown 19 White-pink 20 Pink-brown
X6 RJ45
(3)
X7 RJ45 X8 RJ45
X7 RJ45 X8 RJ45
Shielding
D (B)
D (A) +
Shielding
24 V Aux Outputs Inputs Com Com
24 V Aux Outputs Inputs Com Com DeviceNet - Modbus Gateway X2 DeviceNet 1 2 3 4 5 X1 D(B) D(A) 0V 4 5 8
0V
8 9 10
(1) Not connected on connectors X1 to X8. Only present on RJ45 IN and OUT connectors. (2) 20-way HE10 input connector. (3) 20-way HE10 output connector. (4) Wire colours and corresponding HE10 connector pin numbers.
Gateways
LUF P1
0V
LUF P7
LUF P9
LUF P1 24 V Aux X2 Fip I/O
Fip I/O - Modbus Gateway D(B) D(A) 0V X1
LUF P7 24 V Aux
Profibus - Modbus Gateway X2 Profibus 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X1 D(B) D(A) 0v
LUF P9 24 V Aux
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 5 8
4 5 8
1/120
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
X10
X5 Forward running N/C Commun des sorties N/C Pole state RJ45 N/C Fault + 24 V Aux
X5 X10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 X10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Forward running X1 Forward running X2 Forward running X3 Forward running X4 Forward running X5 Forward running X6 Forward running X7 Forward running X8 Reverse running X1 Reverse running X2 Reverse running X3 Reverse running X4 N/C N/C N/C N/C + c 24 V Com + c 24 V Com
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Fault X1 Fault X2 Fault X3 Fault X4 Fault X5 Fault X6 Fault X7 Fault X8 Pole state X1 Pole state X2 Pole state X3 Pole state X4 Pole state X5 Pole state X6 Pole state X7 Pole state X8 + 24 V Aux Com + 24 V Aux Com
X9
Fault X1 Fault X2 Fault X3 Fault X4 Fault X5 Fault X6 Fault X7 Fault X8 Pole state X1 Pole state X2 Pole state X3 Pole state X4 Pole state X5 Pole state X6 Pole state X7 Pole state X8 + 24 V Aux Com + 24 V Aux Com
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Forward running X1 Forward running X2 Forward running X3 Forward running X4 Forward running X5 Forward running X6 Forward running X7 Forward running X8 Reverse running X1 Reverse running X2 Reverse running X3 Reverse running X4 Reverse running X5 Reverse running X6 Reverse running X7 Reverse running X8 + c 24 V Com + c 24 V Com
Schemes (continued)

Data profile under AS-Interface

Control unit present in the product Status Commands D0 D1 D0 D1 Ready (available) Poles closed (running) Start - forward running Start - reverse running Standard LUCA Advanced LUCB, CC, CD Multifunction LUCM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Main registers accessible with Modbus, CANopen, AdvantysSTB, Profibus DP and DeviceNet communication modules.
For other registers and for further information, please consult the User's Manual Communication variables on the website www.schneider-electric.com Control unit present in the product Standard Advanced Multifunction Marking Register 0Register 99 WordsBits Commercial reference, serial number, software version Log Register 100Register 450 WordsBits Fault log, Operating log, Log of last 5 trips Status Register 451Register 464 WordsBits Alarm signalling (bits), Fault signalling (bits) Values Register 465Register 473 Words Irms phase 1, phase 2, phase 3. Motor load, thermal status Earth leakage current. Phase imbalance and phase failure Register 474Register 599 WordsBits Reserved Configuration Register 600Register 699 WordsBits Protection and alarm thresholds, fallback mode and reset mode Commands Register 700Register 714 WordsBits Commands Status and values Register 452 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 3 Word Word Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Value 0 Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Value 5 Commands Register 700 Register 704 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 615 Short-circuit fault Overcurrent fault Thermal overload fault Ready (available) Poles closed Fault Alarms Tripped ("TRIP" position) Fault acknowledgement allowed Reserved Motor running Motor current % (bit 0) Motor current % (bit 1) Motor current % (bit 2) Motor current % (bit 3) Motor current % (bit 4) Motor current % (bit 5) Reserved Motor starting Thermal overload alarm Thermal status value Motor load value (Im/Ir) Manual reset on thermal overload fault Remote reset on thermal overload fault Automatic reset on thermal overload fault Fallback mode validation Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged Outputs OA1 and OA3 forced to 0 Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged, signalling existence of communication failure Outputs OA1 forced to 1 and OA3 unchanged Outputs OA3 forced to 1 and OA1 unchanged LO1 output command OA1 output command OA3 output command Reserved Fault acknowledgement Reserved Trip test Reserved
Register 455
Register 461 Register 465 Register 466 Configuration Register 602
Register 682
Data accessible
1/121
Basic schemes

Non-reversing
Non-reversing starter-controllers LUB
1 2
1/L1
3/L2 V1 4/T2
M 3a
Control Unit
U1 2/T1
3 4 5
2-wire control via 2-position switch

A1
Start Stop
W1 6/T3
5/L3
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact

Connection of a motor load indicator module LUFV 2

A2
A1
A2
LUFV 2 4...20 mA
24 V Aux
Analogue output Module 24 V Aux
13
14
NC
Connection of thermal overload fault signalling modules LUF DA10

Automatic reset Remote reset
V1
6 7
V1
Reversed
07
08
07
24230 V
LUF DA10
Automatic or remote reset
LUF DA10 Automatic or remote reset
08
X1
X2
Z1
Z2
X1
A2
A1
A2
A1
S2
QF1
QF1
8 9 10
S1
X2
Z1
Z2
24230 V
S1

LUL C031
Control via Modbus communication module LULC031

Modbus Module
Modbus Module
LUL C033
D(B) D(A) GND
Com
Com
Com
OA1
OA3
OA1
OA3
LO1
LO1
LI1
4 5 8 6
LI2
COM
S1
Modbus
A2 A1
S2 Modbus
A2
A1
1/122
D(B) D(A) GND

4 5 8 6
24 V Aux
24 V 24 V c Aux
Basic schemes (continued)

Non-reversing
Non-reversing starter controllers LUB (continued)

Control by communication modules ASILUFC5 and ASILUFC51

Without pre-wired coil connection With local control
1
AS-Interface Module
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51

Com OA1 OA3
AS-Interface Module

Com OA1 OA3
AS-Interface
AS-Interface
2 3 4 5 6 7
A2
A1
A2
A1
Adjustment
AS-Interface line Normal
AS-Interface line
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
Without pre-wired coil connection With local control
AS-i Module

LU9B N11C Pre wired coil
AS-Interface Module

Com OA1 OA3
AS-Interface Module
AS-Interface
AS-Interface
AS-Interface line
AS-Interface line
A2
A1
Adjustment
Without pre-wired coil connection With multifunction control unit LUCM
or ASILUF C51
AS-Interface Module
Normal
8
AS-Interface line
9
Multifunction Control Unit 24 V Aux
10
1/123

Reversing
Reversing starter-controllers LUB
1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LU2B
LU2B
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
A3
B3
A1
B1
2 3 4 5 6
Start forward running Control Unit Stop forward running and reverse running Stop forward running
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
forward running Stop reverse running
Start reverse running
U1 2/T1
V1 4/T2
M 3

With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC With multifunction control unit LUCM
W1 6/T3
Stop reverse running
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact and limit switches
ASILUF C5 or ASILUFC51
LU9M RC Pre wired coil
AS-Interface Module
LU2B
AS-Interface
A3 B3 A1 B1 A2
AS-Interface line
Stop Limit switch forward running forward running
Start forward running
LUCM
24 V Aux
Multifunction Control Unit
7 8 9 10
D(B) D(A) GND
Stop forward running and reverse running
Stop Limit switch reverse running reverse running
4 5 8 6 Bus Modbus RS 485

Without pre-wired coil connection With running direction pilot lights and limit switches
LU2B
Com
OA1
OA3
ASILUF C5/C51 AS-Interface Module AS-Interface
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
AS-Interface line
53
54
81
84 82
1/124
A2

Reversing
Reversing starter controllers LU2B (continued) Control via Modbus communication module LULC031
Without pre-wired coil connection. With local control

Without pre-wired coil connection. With local control
1
D(B) D(A) GND
LU2B
A3 B3 A1
Com
Com
Com
OA1
OA3
OA1
OA3
LO1
LO1 LI1
24 V Aux
D(B) D(A) GND
LUL C031
Modbus Module
LU2B
A3 B3 A1
LULC 033
LI2
24 V c
Modbus Module 24 V Aux COM
4 5 8 6
4 5 8 6
2 3 4 5 6 7
B1 A2
B1
Modbus
A2
Modbus
Adjustment
Adjustment
Normal
Start forward running Start reverse running
Reversing starter-controllers LUB + LU6M

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Control Unit
2/T1
4/T2
1/L1
3/L2
U1 2/T1
4/T2
M 3

A1 13 21 14 22 A2
W1 6/T3
V1
5/L3
6/T3
Normal
Start forward running
A1
A2
8 9 10
21
22
S1
S2 B3
S1
S2
S3
LU6M
Stop forward running and reverse Stop Start running forward running forward running S5 S6 S8
Reverser Block
LU6M
A3
A1
S3
Reverser Block
B1
A3
B3
A1
B1
Stop Start reverse running reverse running S7 S9
A2
forward running Stop reverse running
A2
1/125
Presentation
Soft starters for asynchronous motors

Altistart U01 and TeSys U

536566
Presentation
1 The Altistart U01 is a soft start/soft stop unit for asynchronous motors. It is designed primarily for combinations with TeSys U controller-starters. When combined with a TeSys U 1 controller by means of a connector 2 , the AltistartU01 3 is a power option which provides the Soft start/soft stop function. The result is a unique, innovative motor starter.
1 2 3
Using the Altistart U01 starter enhances the starting performance of asynchronous motors by allowing them to start gradually, smoothly and in a controlled manner. It prevents mechanical shocks, which lead to wear and tear, and limits the amount of maintenance work and production downtime. The Altistart U01 limits the starting torque and current peaks on starting, on machines which do not require a high starting torque. The Altistart U01 is designed for the following simple applications: b Conveyors b Conveyor belts b Pumps b Fans b Compressors b Automatic doors and gates b Small cranes b Belt-driven machines, etc. The Altistart U01 is compact and easy to install. It complies with standards IEC/EN 60947-4-2, carries UL, CSA, C-Tick, CCC certifications and e marking. b ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units v Control two phases of the motor power supply to limit the starting current and for deceleration v Internal bypass relay v Motor power ratings ranging from 0.75 kW to 15 kW v Motor supply voltages ranging from 200 V to 480 V, 50/60 Hz. An external power supply is required for controlling the starter.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: pages 1/128 and 1/129 References: page 1/130
4 5 6 7 3 8
Description
b Altistart U01 soft start/soft stop units are equipped with: v A potentiometer for setting the starting time 6 v A potentiometer for setting the deceleration time 8 v A potentiometer for adjusting the start voltage threshold according to the motor load 7 v 1 green LED 4 to indicate that the unit is switched on v 1 yellow LED 5 to indicate that the motor is powered at nominal voltage, if it is connected to the starter v A connector 9: - 2 logic inputs for Run/Stop commands - 1 logic input for the BOOST function - 1 logic output to indicate the end of starting - 1 relay output to indicate the starter has a power supply fault or the motor has reached a standstill at the end of the deceleration stage
Dimensions: page 1/131
Schemes: pages 1/132 to 1/135
1/126
Presentation (continued)


Description of a TeSys U controller-starter

Please consult the TeSys U starters - open version catalogue.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ATSU01N2pppLT soft start unit functions

b 2-wire control The run and stop commands are controlled by a single logic input. State 1 of logic input LI2 controls starting and state 0 controls stopping.
Altistart U01 control terminals LI1 LI2 + 24 V
Wiring diagram for 2-wire control
b 3-wire control The run and stop commands are controlled by 2 different logic inputs. Stopping is achieved when logic input LI1 opens (state 0). The pulse on input LI2 is stored until input LI1 opens.
Altistart U01 control terminals
+ 24 V
LI1
LI2
Wiring diagram for 3-wire control
b Starting time Controlling the starting time means that the time of the voltage ramp applied to the motor can be adjusted to obtain a gradual starting time, dependent on the motor load. b Voltage boost function via logic input Activating the BOOST logic input enables the function for supplying a starting overtorque capable of overcoming any mechanical friction. When the input is at state 1, the function is active (input connected to the + 24 V) and the starter applies a fixed voltage to the motor for a limited time before starting.
U 100% Un Voltage ramp
50% Un Initial voltage
200 ms
Application of a voltage boost equal to 100% of the nominal motor voltage
b End of starting v Application function for logic output LO1 ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units are equipped with an open collector logic output LO, which indicates the end of starting when the motor has reached nominal speed.
8 9 10
1/127
Characteristics


Environmental characteristics
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Type of starter Conformity to standards Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Conducted and radiated emissions Harmonics EMC immunity Electrostatic discharge Immunity to radiated radioelectrical interference Immunity to electrical transients Voltage/current impulse Conducted and radiated emissions Immunity to conducted interference caused by radioelectrical fields Damped oscillating waves e marking Product certifications Degree of protection Degree of pollution Vibration resistance Shock resistance Relative humidity Ambient temperature around the unit
ATSU01N2ppLT Altistart U01 electronic starters have been developed to conform to the strictest international standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial control devices (IEC, EN), in particular standard IEC/EN 60947-4-2. CISPR 11 level B, IEC 60947-4-2, level B IEC 1000-3-2, IEC 1000-3-4 EN 50082-2, EN 50082-1 IEC 61000-4-2 level 3 IEC 61000-4-3 level 3 IEC 61000-4-4 level 4 IEC 61000-4-5 level 3 IEC 61000-4-6 level 3 IEC 61000-4-11 IEC 61000-4-12 level 3 The starters carry e marking in accordance with the European low voltage directives IEC/EN 60947-4-2. UL, CSA, C-Tick and CCC IP 20 2 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-2 1.5 mm peak to peak from 3 to 13 Hz, 1 gn from 13 to 150 Hz, conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 15 gn for 11 ms conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 595% without condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC 60068-2-3 -25+70 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-2 -10+40 without derating, up to 50C with current derating of 2% per C above 40C 1000 without derating (above this, derate the current by 2.2% per additional 100 m)
10 10
Storage Operation
Maximum operating altitude Operating position Maximum permanent angle in relation to the normal vertical mounting position
C C m
Electrical characteristics
Type of starter Category of use Conforming to IEC 60947-4-2 3-phase a voltage Rated operating voltage Frequency Output voltage Control supply voltage Rated operating current Adjustable starting time Adjustable deceleration time Starting torque Type of starter ATSU Control power supply consumption Power dissipated At full load at end of starting In transient state at 5 times the rated operating current Type of starter Use I Starting time Starting time Maximum number of cycles per hour
Full voltage state or starter at standstill
V Hz
A s s %
W W
ATSU01N2ppLT Ac-53b 200 -10% to 480 +10% 50 -5% to 60 +5% Maximum 3-phase voltage equal to line supply voltage 24 V c, 100 mA 10% 6...32 1...10 1...10 30.... 80% of DOL motor starting torque 01N206LT 01N209LT 01N212LT 01N222LT 01N232LT 24 V c, 100 mA 24 V c, 65 mA 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 222.5 322.5 61.5 91.5 121.5 ATSU01N206LT to ATSU01N222LT ATSU01N232LT 1 50 5 10 10 5
1 100
5 20
10 10
t Operating cycle
1/128

Electrical characteristics (continued)

Logic input power supply (electrically isolated between power and control) + 24 V, COM Logic inputs LI1, LI2, BOOST Stop, run and boost on start-up functions Logic output LO1 End of starting signal Relay output R1A R1C 24 V 10 % Isolated Max. current 100 mA Logic inputs with impedance 27kW; 24 V power supply (U max 40 V) Max. current 8 mA State 0 if U < 5 V and I < 0.2 mA State 1 if U > 13 V and I > 0.5 mA Open collector logic output: External 24 V power supply (minimum 6 V, maximum 30 V) Max. current 200 mA Normally open (N/O) contact Minimum switching capacity: 10 mA for 6 V c Maximum switching capacity on inductive load (cos j = 0.5 and L/R = 20 ms): 2 A for 250 V a or 30 V c (AC-15) Maximum operating voltage 440 V Starter powered up Nominal voltage reached
1 2 3 4 5 6
LED signalling
Green LED Yellow LED
Power circuit
Connections (maximum connection capacity and tightening torque)

Connection to 4 mm screw clamps 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 1.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5 8 AWG 10 AWG 10 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 10 AWG
Flexible wire without cable end Flexible wire with cable end Rigid wire Tightening torque
Control circuit
Flexible wire without cable end Flexible wire with cable end Rigid wire Tightening torque 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
Screw connector 0.52.5 0.51.5 0.51.5 0.51.5 0.52.5 0.51 0.5 14 AWG 16 AWG 16 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 17 AWG
Torque characteristics (typical curves)

T 3 Tn 2 Tn Tn
U 0,85 U 0,6 U
Tr
The diagram opposite shows the torque/speed characteristic of a cage motor in relation to the supply voltage. The torque varies in line with the square of the voltage at a fixed frequency. The gradual increase in the voltage prevents the instantaneous current peak on power-up.
7 8 9 10
0,25
0,5
0,75
N/Ns
1/129
References


Soft start/soft stop units for 0.75 to 15 kW motors

DF531714
1 2 3
(can be combined with the TeSys U starter)

Motor Motor power (1) 230 V 230 V kW HP 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 ATSU01N222LT 7.5 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 Starter Nominal current A 6 9 12 22 32 ATSU01N206LT ATSU01N209LT ATSU01N212LT ATSU01N222LT ATSU01N232LT Reference Weight kg 0.340 0.340 0.340 0.490 0.490
3-phase supply voltage: 200480 V 50/60 Hz

1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20
400 V kW
460 V HP
4
DF510362
1
LUBp2BL
Accessorie
Description Power connector between ATSU01N2ppLT and TeSys U Used for starter ATSU01N2ppLT Reference VW3 G4104 Weight kg 0.020
5 6
3
LUCM ppBL
Numerous possibilities for combinations and options are offered. Please consult the TeSys U Starters-open version specialist catalogue. Motor power Voltage 230 V 400 V kW/HP kW 1.5 0.75/1 1.1/1.5 2.2/3 1.5/2 4 2.2/3 3/ 5.5 4/5 7.5 5.5/7.5 11 7.5/10 15 Soft starter 460 V HP 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 TeSys U Power base
TeSys U starter and soft start unit combinations
Control unit (2)
7 8
ATSU 01N2ppLT
ATSU01N206LT ATSU01N206LT ATSU01N209LT ATSU01N209LT ATSU01N212LT ATSU01N212LT ATSU01N222LT ATSU01N222LT ATSU01N232LT
LUB12 LUB12 LUB12 LUB12 LUB12 LUB32 LUB32 LUB32 LUB32
LUCp05BL LUCp12BL LUCp12BL LUCp12BL LUCp12BL LUCp18BL LUCp18BL LUCp32BL LUCp32BL
Example of a starter-motor combination with: 1 non-reversing power base for DOL starting (LUBp2BL) 2 control unit (LUCMppBL) 3 power connector (VW3G4104) 4 Altistart U01soft start/soft stop unit (ATSU01N2ppLT)
(1) Standard motor power ratings, HP power ratings indicated according to standard UL508. (2) Depending on the configuration of the chosen TeSys U starter, replace the p with A for standard, B for expandable, and M for multifunction.
9 10
Presentation: pages 1/126 and 1/127 Characteristics: pages 1/128 and 1/129 Dimensions: page 1/131 Schemes: pages 1/132 to 1/135
1/130
Dimensions


TeSys U combination (non-reversing power base) and ATSU01N206LT to ATSU01N212LT

Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail with VW3G4104 connector
TeSys U combination (non-reversing or reversing power base) and ATSU01N206LT to ATSU01N212LT

Side by side mounting
45
135
1 2 3 4
99
72,2 154
284
150
TeSys U combination (non-reversing power base) and ATSU01N222LT to ATSU01N232LT

Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail with VW3G4104 connector
TeSys U combination (non-reversing or reversing power base) and ATSU01N222LT to ATSU01N232LT

Side by side mounting
124
45
135
99
5 6
72,2
314
170
154
7 8 9 10
References: page 1/130 Schemes: pages 1/132 to 1/135
VW3G4104 connector
20
44,8
46,6
Presentation: pages 1/126 and 1/127 Characteristics: pages 1/128 and 1/129
28
1/131
Schemes

For 0.75 to 15 kW motors
ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
QF1
5/L3
QF1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Power wiring
Power wiring with reversing unit
TeSys U
CU
CU
TeSysU
TeSysU
TeSys U with reversing unit
2/T1
4/T2
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
6/T3
A1
2/T1
4/T2 3/L2
ATSU 01N2ppLT
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
1/L1
5/L3
6/T3
A1
M1 3
ATSU 01N2ppLT
2/T1 4/T2
M1 3
Compatible components (For full references refer to our catalogue: Motor starter solutions - Control and protection components) Code A1 QF1 CU Description Soft start/soft stop unit TeSys U controller-starter TeSys U control unit
Presentation: pages 1/126 and 1/127
6/T3
1/132
Schemes (continued)

Automatic 2-wire control

Without deceleration
ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued)

With and without deceleration
A1
1
A1
c 24 V
ATSU 01N2ppLT
BOOST
c 24 V
LUA1 C20
R1C
+ 24 V
BOOST
+ 24 V
LUA1 C20
18 COM R1C R1A LI1 LI2
ATSU 01N2ppLT
COM R1A LO1
17
LO1
18
17
S1
S1
Stop Run
2 3 4
LI1
A1
QF1
S2
A1
A2
Functional diagrams
Power supply voltage Green LED Logic input LI2 Pushbutton S1 Logic output LO1 Yellow LED
Stop Run
QF1
A2
Power supply voltage Green LED Logic input LI2 Pushbutton S2 Pushbutton S1 Logic output LO1
U1
U1
10 s t1
Yellow LED Motor voltage
10 s t1 t2
LI2
Motor voltage
5 6
Automatic 3-wire control

Without deceleration With deceleration
A1
c 24 V
17
BOOST
+ 24 V
BOOST
LUA1 C20
18 R1A
LUA1 C20
18
LO1
+ 24 V
COM
17
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R1C LI1 LI2
c 24 V
A1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
COM R1C R1A LI1 LI2 LO1
S1 S2
A1
14
13
13
S2
A2
A1
QF1
14
QF1
QF1 S1
7 8 9
t
QF1
Functional diagrams
Power supply voltage Green LED Pushbutton S1 Pushbutton S2 Logic input LI2 Logic output LO1 Yellow LED Motor voltage Logic output LO1 Power supply voltage
500 ms
Green LED Logic input LI2 Pushbutton S2 Logic input LI1 Pushbutton S1
U1
10 s t1
Yellow LED Motor voltage
A2
10 s t1
A1: Soft start/soft stop unit S1, S2: XB4B or XB5B pushbuttons QF1: TeSys U controller-starter t1: Acceleration time can be controlled by a potentiometer t2: Deceleration time can be controlled by a potentiometer U1: Starting time can be controlled by a potentiometer Presentation: pages 1/126 and 1/127 Characteristics: pages 1/128 and 1/129
10

References: page 1/130 Dimensions: page 1/131
1/133
Schemes (continued)

ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued)
1 2
Automatic 3-wire control, with reversing unit

Without deceleration
QF1
With deceleration
A1
QF1
A1
LU2B p2BL
R1A A3 B3 A1 B1 A2
ATSU 01N2ppLT
LI2 + 24 V BOOST LO1 COM R1C LI1
LU2B p2BL
R1A A3 B3 A1 B1 A2
ATSU 01N2ppLT
R1C BOOST COM
+ 24 V
Run direction 2
Run direction 1 S1
S2
Run direction 2 S2
Run direction 1 S1
3 4 5 6 7
Stop S3
17
17
Stop S3
LUA1 C20
18
LUA1 C20
c 24 V
c 24 V
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit A1: Soft start/soft stop unit S1, S2, S3: XB4B or XB5B pushbuttons S3: minimum depression time 500 ms
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit A1: Soft start/soft stop unit S1, S2, S3: XB4B or XB5B pushbuttons
Boost on starting and end of starting signal

A1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
+ 24 V
BOOST
COM
R1C
R1A
LI1
LI2
To PLC
A1: Soft start/soft stop unit
8 9 10
Presentation: pages 1/126 and 1/127 Characteristics: pages 1/128 and 1/129 References: page 1/130 Dimensions: page 1/131
1/134
LO1
18
LO1
LI1
LI2
Schemes (continued)

ATSU01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued) Automatic control with Modbus communication module, with and without deceleration
Without reversing unit
A1 A1
With reversing unit

A1 A1
1
LUL C031
BOOST COM OA1 LO1 COM OA3 LO1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
BOOST
LUL C031
LO1 COM
Modbus Module
D(B) D(A) Gnd R1A
ATSU 01N2ppLT
Modbus Module
c 24 V 24 V Aux.
D(B) D(A) Gnd
+ 24 V
COM
LU9B N11C Pre-wired coil
R1C
R1A
LO1
R1C
LI1
LI1
LI2
LI2
c 24 V 24 V Aux.
+ 24 V
COM
4 5 8
4 5 8
13
2 3
+
c 24 V
14
c 24 V
QF1
LU2B p2BL
A3 B3 A1 B1 A2
Function Register Bit Powering down TeSys U and ATSU 704 0 Automatic control without deceleration Run 700 0 Stop 704 0 Automatic control with deceleration Run 700 0 700 0 Soft stop
Value 0
1 0 1 0
Function Register Bit Value Powering up TeSys U and ATSU Forward 704 0 1 Reverse 704 1 1 Powering down TeSys U and ATSU Forward 704 0 0 Reverse 704 1 0 Automatic control without deceleration Run 700 0 1 704 0 0 Stop forward Stop reverse 704 1 0 Automatic control with deceleration (forward or reverse) Run 700 0 1 700 0 0 Soft stop A1: Soft start/soft stop unit QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit With reversing unit
4 5 6
A1
Automatic control with AS-Interface communication module, without deceleration

Without reversing unit
A1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
BOOST
ATSU 01N2ppLT
BOOST
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
7 8
COM
COM
R1C
LO1
R1C
R1A
R1A
13
QF1
c 24 V AS-Interface LU9B N11C + Pre-wired coil +
14
ASI LUFC5
LU2B p2BL
COM OA1 OA3 A3 B3 A1 B1
ASI LUFC5
A2
c 24 V AS-Interface
+
c 24 V
LO1
LI1
LI2
LI1
LI2
+
c 24 V
Function Bit Value Power-up and automatic control without deceleration Run D0 1 Stop D0 0
Function Bit Value Power-up and automatic control without deceleration Run forward D0 1 Stop D0 0 1 Run reverse D1 Stop D1 0 A1: Soft start/soft stop unit QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit References: page 1/130 Dimensions: page 1/131
9 10
1/135
Presentation, description, references

Magnetic control unit for the protection of variable speed controllers and soft start units
1 2
S1 (mm2 / AWG)
When installed upstream of a variable speed controller or soft start unit, control unit LUCLpp, used in conjunction with an LUB12 or LUB32 power base, provides: v isolation, v short-circuit protection of the motor starter. (variable speed controller-based or soft start unit-based motor starters).
Presentation
Note: control unit LUCL, when used in conjunction with power base LUB 12 or LUB32, conforms to standard IEC 60947-2.
S2 (mm2 / AWG) LUB pp LUCLpp
3
Altivar or Altistart
Installation regulations When the length of the cable between the TeSysU starter and the variable speed controller is more than 1.5 m, the c.s.a. of the cable between the variable speed controller and the TeSysU starter (S2) must be equal to the c.s.a. of the cable upstream of TeSysU (S1).
4
568027
Description
1 2 3 1 Extraction and locking handle 2 Sealing of locking handle 3 Dial for magnetic adjustment of motor In 4 Locking of settings by sealing the transparent cover
5 6 7
References
Description
Line current of the variable speed controller or soft start unit A 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832
Reference
Weight kg
(1)
LUCLX6pp LUCL1Xpp LUCL05pp LUCL12pp LUCL18pp LUCL32pp 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135
Magnetic control unit
(1) Standard control circuit voltage: Volts 24 BL (2), (3) B 4872 ES (4) 110240 FU (5)
8 9 10
c a c or a
(2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module. (3) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %. (4) c: 4872 V, a: 48 V. (5) c: 110220 V, a: 110240 V.
1/136
Selection

Magnetic control unit for the protection of variable speed controllers and soft start stop units
Control unit and associated power base selection

Functions provided Maximum motor power ratings 50/60 Hz < 400/415 V KW 500 V KW 2.2 5.5 9 15 690 V KW 3 9 15 18.5
Power base reference
Control unit reference
Line current
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A LUB12 or LUB32 LUB 12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB12 or LUB32 LUB32 LUB32 LUCLX6pp LUCL1Xpp LUCL05pp LUCL12pp LUCL18pp LUCL32pp 0.150.6 0.351.4 1.255 312 4.518 832
b Short-circuit protection b Manual reset
0.09 0.25 1.5 5.5 7.5 15
Control units Thermal overload protection Over current protection Short-circuit protection Protection against phase loss Protection against phase imbalance Earth fault protection (equipment protection only) Tripping class Motor type Thermal overload test function Overtorque No-load running Long starting time Reset method Manual Automatic or remote
Standard LUCA
Advanced LUCB LUCC LUCD LUCL
Multifunction LUCM 3 to 17 x the setting current
14.2 x the setting current 14.2 x the max. current
10 3-phase
10 Single-phase
20 3-phase
530 Single-phase and 3-phase
Parameters can be set With function module, or parameters can be set via the bus with a communication module (see page 1/70). Parameters can be set Parameters can be set via the bus with a communication module (see page 1/70).
Integrated function
Function provided with accessory
Compatibility
Compatibility of control unit LUCLpp with The starter-controller The starter The controller Add-on contact blocks with fault signalling and auxiliary contacts Yes No No Yes
References
Functions
LUB12/LUB32 Starter-controller (magnetic protection) LUS12/LUS32 Starter without either magnetic or thermal overload protection) LUT M LUA1C11 LUA1C20 LUF N20 LUF N11 LUF N02 Controller (without thermal overload protection) Add-on contact blocks with fault signalling (1 N/O + 1 N/C) Add-on contact blocks with fault signalling (2 N/O) Auxiliary contacts (2 N/O) Auxiliary contacts (1 N/O + 1 N/C) Auxiliary contacts (2 N/C)
Yes
ASILUFC5 and AS-Interface communication modules ASILUFC51 LUF C00 LUL C07 LULC08 LUL C09 LULC15 LUL C031 LUL C033 Parallel wiring module Profibus DP communication module (1 output/2 inputs) CANopen communication module (1 output/2 inputs) DeviceNet communication module (1 output/2 inputs) Advantys STB communication module (1 output/2 inputs) Modbus communication module (1 output) Modbus communication module (1 output/2 inputs) Alarm function module Thermal overload signalling module with manual reset Thermal overload signalling module with automatic or remote reset (1 N/C) Thermal overload signalling module with automatic or remote reset (1 N/O) Motor load indication module
Function modules
No
LUF W10 LUF DH11 LUF DA01 LUF DA10 LUF V2
1/137
Characteristics

Characteristics of magnetic control unit LUCL
1 2 3 4 5
Protection
Motor type Conforming to standard
3-phase When used in conjunction with an LUB 12 or LUB 32 power base, magnetic control unit LUCL conforms to standard IEC 60947-2. 14.2 x In (max. setting current) 20 %
Tripping threshold Tripping tolerance
Product certifications Conforming to standards Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Safety separation of circuits SELV Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, overvoltage category III, degree of pollution: 3 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 appendix N V kV V
Environment
CE When used in conjunction an LUB power base, control unit LUCL conforms to standard 60947-2. 690 6 Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400 Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 40 IP 40 IP 20 IP 20 TH Cycles 12 48 - 40+ 85 Power bases and standard and advanced control units: - 25 + 70. (At temperatures above 60 C and up to 70 C, for Ie = 32 A, leave a minimum gap of 9mm between products). Power bases and multifunction control units: - 25+ 60. (At temperatures above 45 C, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products. At temperatures above 55 C up to 60 C, leave a gap of 20 mm between products.) C C
Front panel outside connection Degree of protection Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone (protection against Front panel and wired terminals direct finger contact) Other faces Protective treatment Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 Conforming to/EN 60068-2-30 Ambient air temperature around the device Storage Operation Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 h
Maximum operating altitude Operating positions In relation to normal vertical mounting plane
2000
6 7 8 9 10
Flame resistance
Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12 C C
V2 960 (parts supporting live components) 650 Cadmium and silicone-free, recyclable Power poles open: 10 gn Power poles closed: 15 gn Power poles open: 2 gn Power poles closed: 4 gn (2) kV kV V/m kV kV In open air: 8 - Level 3 On contact: 8 - Level 4 10 - Level 3 All circuits except for serial link: 4 - Level 4 Serial link: 2 - Level 3 Common mode kV 2 Not applicable V 10 Serial mode 1
Environmental restrictions Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Resistance to electrostatic discharge Immunity to radiated highfrequency disturbance Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to dissipated shock waves Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Uc a 24240 V, Uc c 48220 V Uc = 24 V c Immunity to conducted high-frequency disturbance Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6
(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction. (2) 2 gn with Advantys STB or CANopen communication modules.
1/138
Characteristics
TeSys U starter-controllers Power bases and LUCL magnetic control unit
Power base and control unit type
LUB12 + LUCL
LUB32 + LUCL

Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Flexible cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver: 6 mm 1.92.5 2.510 1.56 16 16 110 16 1.92.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Flexible cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque Rated control circuit voltage Voltage limits Operation 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m a 50/60 Hz c c 24 V (1) a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V c 110240 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V c 24 V a 24 V a or c 4872 V a 110240 V, c 110220 V Closing Opening IEC/EN 61000-4-11 In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour V V V V V V V V V V V mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA W ms ms ms 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver: 5 mm 0.81.2 24240 24220 2027 2026.5 a 38.572. c 38.593 a 88264 c 88242 14.5 14.5 29 55 130 140 280 280 60 70 35 35 2 24 V: 70; 48 V: 60; u 72 V: 50 35 3 At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms 15 3600 3 Yes 1 padlock with 6.9 mm shank 12 y 70 C: 12 A y 70 C: 12 A 690 (3) 4060 3 6 0.1 0.3 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.341.5 0.341.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 0.81.2 24240 24220 2027 2026.5 a 38.572. c 38.593 a 88264 c 88242 14.5 14.5 29 55 220 220 280 280 80 90 45 25 3 24 V: 70; 48 V: 60; u 72 V: 50 35 3 15 3600 3 Yes 1 padlock with 6.9 mm shank 32 y 70 C: 32 A y 70 C: 32 A 690 (3) 4060 9 0.6 12 1.1 18 2.4 25 4.6 32 7.5
Drop-out
Typical consumption I max while closing
I rms sealed
Heat dissipation Operating time Resistance to micro-breaks Resistance to voltage dips Mechanical durability Maximum operating rate Number of poles Isolation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Rated thermal current Rated operational current (Ue y 440 V) Rated operational voltage Frequency limits Power dissipated in the power circuits

Possible Padlocking A Conforming to IEC/ EN 60947-2 Category AC-41 Category AC-43 V Hz A W
Of the operating current Operational current Power dissipated in all three poles Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit
Total breaking time Thermal limit
With Isc max on 440 V
V 230 440 500 600 kA 50 50 10 4 ms 2 2 2 kA2s 90 (1) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %. (2) No consumption sealed. (3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9SP0.
120
1/139
Combinations

Coordination
1 2
526112 526113
The standard defines tests at different levels of current; the purpose of these tests is to place the equipment in extreme conditions. The standard defines 2 types of coordination, according to the condition of the components after testing: type 1 and type 2 Type 1 coordination requires that in a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must not be able to resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts. The product combinations given below provide type 1 coordination .
Soft start-soft stop unit/TeSys U starter controller combination with magnetic protection
TeSys U / Altistart 48: type 1 coordination
Power 400 V (kW) TeSys U references (protection + power switching) LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 LUB32 + LUCL32 LUB32 + LUCL32 Soft start unit reference Class 10 ATS48D17 ATS48D22 ATS48D32 Class 20 ATS48D17 ATS48D22 ATS48D32 ATS48D38
3 4
5.5
7.5 11 15
Variable speed controller/TeSys U starter controller combination with magnetic protection

TeSys U / Altivar 21 UL Type 1/IP 20: type 1 coordination
526112 526114
5 6 7
Power 400 V (kW) 0.75
TeSys U references (protection + power switching) LUB12 + LUCL05
Variable speed controller reference ATV21H075N4 ATV21HU15N4
2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15
LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV21HU22N4 ATV21HU30N4 ATV21HU40N4 ATV21HU55N4 ATV21HU75N4 ATV21HD11N4 ATV21HD15N4
TeSys U / Altivar 21 IP 54: type 1 coordination

526112 526115
Power 400 V (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.2 3
TeSys U references (protection + power switching) LUB12 + LUCL05 LUB12 + LUCL12 or LUCL05 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 LUB32 + LUCL32
Variable speed controller reference ATV21W075N4/N4C ATV21WU15N4/N4C ATV21WU22N4/N4C ATV21WU30N4/N4C ATV21WU40N4/N4C ATV21WU55N4/N4C ATV21WU75N4/N4C ATV21WD11N4/N4C ATV21WD15N4/N4C
8 9 10
4 5.5 7.5 11 15
1/140
Combinations

526112
526116

Power 400 V (kW) 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 TeSys U references (protection + power switching) LUB12 + LUCL05 LUB12 + LUCL05 LUB12 + LUCL05 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB32 + LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 LUB32 + LUCL32
Variable speed controller/TeSys U starter controller combination with magnetic protection (continued)
Variable speed controller reference ATV31H037N4 ATV31H055N4 ATV31H075N4 ATV31HU11N4 ATV31HU15N4 ATV31HU22N4 ATV31HU30N4 ATV31HU40N4 ATV31HU55N4 ATV31HU75N4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
526112
526117

Power 400V (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 TeSys U references (protection + power switching) LUB12 + LUCL05 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB32 + LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 LUB32 + LUCL32 Variable speed controller reference ATV61H075N4 ATV61HU15N4 ATV61HU22N4 ATV61HU30N4 ATV61HU40N4 ATV61HU55N4 ATV61HU75N4
526112
526118

Power 400V (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 TeSys U references (protection + power switching) LUB12 + LUCL05 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB12 + LUCL12 LUB32 + LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL18 LUB32 + LUCL32 Variable speed controller reference ATV71H075N4 ATV71HU15N4 ATV71HU22N4 ATV71HU30N4 ATV71HU40N4 ATV71HU55N4
1/141
General

1

526454
integral 63 contactor breakers combine all the functions of a power switching assembly up to 63 A in a single compact device, with performance equivalent to that of the best separate specialist devices. They conform to the main standards currently in force, in particular IEC60947-1, IEC60947-2, IEC60947-3, IEC60947-4-1 and IEC60947-6-2 (welding of power poles impossible), as well as to international approvals UL, CSA, and the European directives. The integral range ensures reliability of operation up to 63 A. In addition to safety of operation, integral has numerous other functions: increased protection, communication, remote control, fault identification, isolation, padlocking.
Integral 63: a high performance concept for reliability of operation
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
References: pages 1/162 to 1/173 Dimensions, schemes: pages 1/176 to 1/179
526324
Functions performed by integral 63 units

The equipment in a power switching circuit must perform 4 main functions: b power switching, b isolation, b overload protection, b short-circuit protection. These functions are traditionally performed by separate devices which must be combined to form a motor starter assembly, the most common being: v fuses + contactor + thermal overload relay, v circuit breaker + contactor + thermal overload relay.
Power switching
Contactor (for automatic and remote control)
b Operational power for use in category AC-43: v up to 30 kW at 400/415 V 50 Hz, v up to 33 kW at 440/415 V 50 Hz. b Electrical life in number of operating cycles, in category AC-43, at 415 V and at rated power: 1.2 million. b Mechanical life in number of operating cycles: 5 million.

526325
Reversing pairs
Two 3-pole contactors, horizontally mounted: b mechanically interlocked. Can be fitted with the same protection modules as integral 63 contactor breaker.
1/142
General (continued)

Functions performed by integral 63 units (continued)

Isolation
Isolation conforming to IEC 60947
integral 63 contactor breakers provide isolation and padlocking functions conforming to standards IEC 60947. In addition, integral 63 LD4 contactor breakers and LD5 reversing contactor breakers incorporate specific poles for control testing and padlocking. Overload protection
534529
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Thermal-magnetic protection module (for protection against overload and overcurrent)
A range of interchangeable modules allows the equipment to be adapted to suit: b the rated operational current (rating and settings), b the application: v motors, v frequent starting motors, v distribution circuits. Short-circuit protection

526327
High breaking capacity current limiting circuit breaker
For short-circuit protection. High breaking capacity with short-circuit limited by ultra-fast tripping. Possibility of increasing the breaking capacity of the integral unit by adding a current limiter (LA9 LB920). The current limiter is fitted upstream of the integral unit. Several integral units may be fitted downstream of the current limiter (Ith = 63 A, Ie = 32 A).
Signalling and attachments

These devices provide comprehensive local signalling: b pole position indicator, b different signalling for overload and short-circuit. They also allow dialogue with the automated control system by means of numerous add-on blocks: b auxiliary contact and signalling blocks, b remote electrical reset device, b undervoltage and shunt trips, b control circuit switching, b etc.
526328
Simple fixing and cabling methods

integral 63 contractor breakers and reversing contactor breakers fit onto 75 mm 7 rails using a separate mounting plate. integral units can also be mounted on: b panels, b pre-slotted mounting plates type AM1 P, b 2 x 35 mm 7 rails using sliding clip nuts, b CMD prefabricated plug-in busbar trunking (providing an economical assembly, combining safety and simplicity of use), b AK5 panel busbar systems.
9 10
Dimensions, schemes: pages 1/176 to 1/179
1/143
Terminology

Terminology
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Altitude The rarefied atmosphere at high altitude reduces the dielectric strength of the air and hence the rated operational voltage of the contactor breaker. It also reduces the cooling effect of the air and hence the rated operational current of the contactor breaker (unless the temperature drops at the same time). No derating is necessary up to 3000 m. Derating factors to be applied above this altitude for main pole operational voltage and current (a.c. supply) are as follows:
Altitude Rated operational voltage Rated operational current 3500 m 0.90 0.92 4000 m 0.80 0.90 4500 m 0.70 0.88 5000 m 0.60 0.86
Ambient air temperature The temperature of the air surrounding the device, measured near to the device. The operating characteristics are given: b with no restriction for temperatures between - 5 and + 55 C. b with restrictions, if necessary, for temperatures between - 50 and + 70 C. Rated operational current (Ie) This is defined taking into account the rated operational voltage, operating rate and duty, utilisation category and air temperature around the device. Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) (1) The current Ith which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a minimum of 8 hours without its temperature rise exceeding the limits given in the standards. Short time rating The current which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a short time, after a period of no load, without dangerous overheating. Rated operational voltage (Ue) This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current, determines the use of the contactor breaker or starter, and on which the corresponding tests and the utilisation category are based. For 3-phase circuits, it is expressed as the voltage between phases. Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational voltage Ue is less than or equal to the rated insulation voltage Ui. Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics are based. For a.c. applications, the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form (less than 5% total harmonic distortion). Rated insulation voltage (Ui) This is the voltage value used to define the insulation characteristics of a device and referred to in dielectric tests determining leakage paths and creepage distances. As the specifications are not identical for all standards, the rated values given for each of them are not necessarily the same. Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) This is the highest peak value of an impulse voltage, of prescribed form and polarity, which the device is able to withstand without failure under specified test conditions, and to which isolation clearance values are referred. The rated impulse withstand voltage of a device must be equal to or higher than the values stated for the transient overvoltages appearing in the circuit in which the device is fitted.
Note: these definitions are based on extracts from standard IEC 60947. (1) Conventional free air thermal current, conforming to IEC standards.
1/144
Terminology (continued)

Rated operational power (expressed in kW) The rated power of the standard motor which can be switched by the contactor breaker, at the stated operational voltage. Rated breaking capacity (Iq) (1) This is the current value which the contactor breaker can break in accordance with the breaking conditions specified in the IEC standard. Rated making capacity (1) This is the current value which the contactor breaker can make in accordance with the making conditions specified in the IEC standard.
t
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
On-load factor (m) This is the ratio between the time the current flows (t) and the duration of the cycle (T):
t m = -T
T
Cycle duration: duration of current flow + time at zero current. Pole impedance The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components between the input terminal and the output terminal. The impedance comprises a resistive component (R) and an inductive component X=Lw). The total impedance therefore depends on the frequency and is normally given for 50 Hz. The average value is given for the pole at its rated operational current. Electrical durability This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts can perform without maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilisation category, the rated operational current and the rated operational voltage. Mechanical durability This is the average number of no-load operating cycles (i.e. with zero current flow through the main poles) which the contactor breaker can perform without mechanical failure. Coordination The coordination of protection devices involves combining, in a selective way, a short-circuit protection device (fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers) with a contactor and an overload protection device. Its objective is to break any abnormal current, in plenty of time, without any danger to personnel, whilst providing adequate protection of the equipment against an overload or short-circuit current.
Type 1 - IEC 60947-4-1
In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to personnel or installations and may not be able to resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts.
Type 2 - IEC 60947-4-1
In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must be able to resume operation. The risk of contact welding is permissible if they can be easily separated.
Total, ensuring reliability of operation - IEC 60947-6-2
In the event of a short-circuit, no damage or risk of welding is permissible on the equipment constituting the motor starter. Operation can be resumed without any maintenance.
Note: these definitions are based on extracts from standard IEC 60947. (1) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into account the maximum asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak asymmetrical current which may be twice the rms symmetrical component.
1/145

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The standard utilisation categories define the current values which the contactor breaker must be able to make or break. These values depend on: b the type of load being switched: squirrel cage or slip ring motor, resistors, b the conditions under which making or breaking takes place: motor stalled, starting or running, reversing, plugging.
Definition
Reminder of standards IEC 60947
b b b b b b
Standards for contactor breakers
IEC 60947-1: general rules, IEC 60947-2: circuit breakers, IEC 60947-3: isolating devices, IEC 60947-4-1: contactors and motor starters, IEC 60947-5-1: control and signalling units, IEC 60947-6-2: control and protection devices,
IEC 60947-4-1 Standard IEC 60947-4-1: covers contactors and electromechanical motor starters. It concerns: b types of equipment with main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose rated operational voltage does not exceed 1000 V for a.c. applications or 1500 V for d.c. applications, b contactors used in conjunction with overload and/or short-circuit protection devices, b motor starters used in conjunction with separate short-circuit protection devices and/or with separate short-circuit protection devices and built-in overload protection devices, b contactors and combination motor starters which incorporate their own shortcircuit protection device. IEC 60947-6-2 Standard IEC 60947-6: covers multi-function equipment. It concerns connection, power switching and protection devices (or equipment) with main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose rated operational voltage is less than or equal to 1000 V for a.c. applications, or 1500 V for d.c. applications. Such devices are designed to perform both the power switching function and the protection of remotely controlled circuits function; they can also perform other functions, such as isolation. After short-circuit (Isc) tests, the products must be able to make and break the currents corresponding to the specified utilisation categories, and to the number of operating cycles specified in the standard, without failing. This series of tests is completed by temperature rise tests. Standard IEC 947-6-2 specifies that, in the event of a short-circuit, no damage or risk of contact welding is permissible on the devices constituting the motor starter. The integral contactor breaker, through its design, ensures reliability of operation. After eliminating the fault, operation can be resumed instantly without any maintenance work on the product, other than resetting. Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-1
This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or greater than 0.95 (cos j y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
Application examples: heating, distribution. Category AC-2
This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors. b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated current of the motor. b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to the mains supply voltage.
Category AC-3
This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking while motor running. b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7 times the rated current of the motor. b On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage. Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors (lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).
1/146

Standards for contactor breakers (continued)

Utilisation categories for a.c. applications (continued)
Category AC-4
This category covers starting, plug braking and inching of squirrel cage motors. On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5 to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy industry. Category AC-41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or greater than 0.95 (cos j y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
Application examples: heating, distribution. Category AC-42
This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors. b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated current of the motor. b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to the mains supply voltage.
Category AC-43
This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking while motor running; inching or occasional reversing of limited duration are permissible if the number of operating cycles does not exceed 5 per minute, or 10 within a 10 minute period. b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7 times the rated current of the motor. b On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage. Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.). Category AC-44
This category covers applications with plug braking and inching of squirrel cage or slip ring motors. On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5 to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy industry.
Tripping classes of protection modules The creation of thermal tripping classes allows better adaptation of the thermal protection to suit different motor and application technologies (short or long starting times). Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60947-6-2.
Class Tripping time at 7.2 Ir (1)
IEC 60947-5 Standard IEC 60947-5-1: covers switching devices and components for control circuits. It concerns electromechanical devices for control circuits. Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-14 (2)
Standards for auxiliary contacts
10 A 210 s
10 410 s
20 620 s
30 930 s
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors and relays. Category AC-15 (2)
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the electromagnet closed is greater than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors.
Utilisation categories for d.c. applications

Category DC-13 (3)
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads for which the time taken to reach 95 % of the steady state current (T = 0.95) is equal to 6 times the power P drawn by the load (with P y 50 W). Application example: switching the operating coil of contactor breakers.
(1) Ir = protection module setting current. (2) Replaces category AC-11. (3) Replaces category DC-11. References: pages 1/162 to 1/173 Dimensions, schemes: pages 1/176 to 1/179
1/147
Equipment selection for starters

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 References: pages 1/162 to 1/173
When designing an installation, it is essential to take into account precise criteria for determining the conductor c.s.a. and selecting equipment. In particular: b permissible currents for the conductors, b maximum voltage drops, b short-circuit protection, b protection against indirect contact. The latter three criteria must be taken into account when selecting the integral unit. The principle behind the rules described below is, on the whole, common to all European publications. However, the calculations and values concerning protection against indirect contact are based on French standard NF C 15-100, and it is up to the user to check the regulations in force in the country concerned. To achieve this, the thermal setting value Irth selected must be greater than the current drawn IB and less than or equal to the permissible current Iz in the cable to be protected. IB < Irth y Iz Breaking capacity rule Check that the breaking capacity (BC) of the integral unit is equal to or greater than the prospective short-circuit current (Isc max) at the point where it is to be installed. BC u Isc max Breaking time rule 2 conditions must be fulfilled: b The short-circuit current at the end of the circuit, Isc min, must be greater than or equal to the minimum current required for magnetic tripping of the device, b The short-circuit current at the start of the circuit, Isc max, must be such that: I2oto = permissible thermal stress limit for the circuit, I2sc max tm y I2oto tm = operating time of the integral unit or of the short-circuit protection device. These 2 checks need only be made when modules with a low rating are used. Example: for a 6.3/10 A module, a cable c.s.a. u 2.5 mm2 is required to withstand Isc max = 50 kA. TN multiple earthed neutral scheme
A
Cable protection against overload
Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes
PEN
B'
C'
TNC scheme
b Neutral is connected to earth. b The earths are connected to neutral. b Any phase/earth insulation fault causes a short-circuit. b As contact voltage is dangerous, breaking must occur at the first fault. b The PE conductor and the neutral conductor may be: v combined (TNC scheme), v separate (TNS scheme).
Dimensions, schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179
1/148
Equipment selection for starters

Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes (continued) b Protection against indirect contact (TN schemes), for dead shorts only, requires that the following 2 conditions be fulfilled simultaneously: v The fault current Id must be greater than or equal to the minimum current required for magnetic tripping of the integral unit, i.e. 1.12 Irth max. c = coefficient taking into account the upstream part of the Uo Id = c.q.___ fault loop impedance assumed to be equal to 0.8, unless Zb otherwise indicated. q = coefficient dependent on the earth connection scheme and equal to 1 in the TN scheme. Uo = phase-neutral voltage in volts. Zb = fault loop impedance in mW/m such that: Zb R (fault loop resistance). L = length of the fault loop equal to twice the length Lc of the L Lc circuit. R = r __ = 2 r ___ S S S = Sph, c.s.a of the phase conductors = SPE = c.s.a. of the protective conductors. r = resistivity of the copper = 0.0225. = ratio between the magnetic tripping current and the maximum setting current of the instantaneous thermal tripping device.
v The contact voltage (UL) for a dead short is at most equal to the value determined by the safety curve for the operating time tm of the integral unit in its magnetic tripping zone. This condition is generally fulfilled for power supplies of 230/415 V. (In fact, for UL = 50 V, a tm y 500 ms would be required and for UL = 25 V, a tm y 110ms would be required). The first condition allows us to calculate the maximum length of the circuit to provide protection against indirect contact in the TN scheme. For the TN scheme: c.q.Uo.Sph L y __________ 2r.1. Irth 0.8 x Uo x Sph i.e. L max = _______________________ 2 x 0.0225 x 1.2 Irth max
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Maximum length of 230/415 V circuits with TN scheme

C.s.a. mm2 1.5 2.5 Irth max. A 10 16 10 16 25 32 16 25 32 40 25 32 40 50 32 40 50 63 32 40 50 63 32 40 50 63 =3 m 180 112 298 186 118 92 296 190 148 118 284 222 178 142 370 296 236 188 590 472 378 300 922 738 590 468 =6 m 90 56 149 93 59 46 148 95 74 59 142 111 89 71 185 148 118 94 295 236 189 150 461 369 295 234 = 12 m 45 28 75 47 32 23 74 48 37 30 71 56 45 36 93 74 59 47 148 118 95 75 281 185 148 117 = 15 m 36 22 60 37 60
10
16
25

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 References: pages 1/162 to 1/173
1/149
Selection according to utilisation category and required electrical durability

Selection for a temperature q y 40 C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rated operational voltage integral 63
220/240
400/415
440 63
480/525 63
600/690 63
Rated operational currents (according to the rated operational voltage)

A 63 63
Rated operational powers (for standard motors)

integral 63 kW 15 33 33 37 55
Electrical durability
Control and protection of motors at Ue y 415 V
b in utilisation categories AC2, AC3 conforming to IEC 60947-4-1, b in utilisation categories AC2, AC3 conforming to IEC 60947-6-2.
Millions of operating cycles 20
10 8 6 5 4 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01 1 1,5
(63 A)
2 3 45 79 20 6 8 10
40 60 80 150 200 63 100160 300 Current broken in A
1 Not having previously broken a short-circuit current 2 Having broken a short-circuit current 10 times at 30 Ie (most common values of short-circuit current during operation)

Current breaking limit
AC-3 AC-43
AC-2 AC-42
9 10
General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 References: pages 1/162 to 1/173 Dimensions, schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179
1/150
Selection according to utilisation category and required electrical durability

a.c. supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-3, AC-41, AC-43

Rated operational currents (according to ambient temperature)
integral 63 With cable c.s.a. 16 mm2 A q y 40 C 63 q y 55 C 55 q y 70 C 50
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
a.c. supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-41

Maximum operating rates in operating cycles/hour
On-load factor 85 % Operation at Ie max 1200 On-load factor 25 % Operation at Ie max 1800
integral 63
Operating cycles/h
Operation at 0.5 Ie 2400
Electrical durability Ue y 415 V

Millions of operating cycles 20
10 8 6 5 4 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
(63 A)
63 80 100 60 Current broken in A
40
Note: for use in category AC-44, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
General : pages 1/142 to 1/147
1/151
Characteristics
Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Type
integral 63
A V 3 63 690 1.2 million operating cycles 5 million operating cycles 3600 operating cycles/hour 600 operating cycles/hour
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-3 Rated operational voltage (Ue) In AC-3 at 400 V Electrical durability Mechanical durability at Uc a Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature y 55 C c with converter
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC: 158-1, 204-1, 204-2, 364, 947-1/2 and 4 UTE: NF C 63-110, C 63-120, C 63-130, C 63-650, C 79-100, C 20-040 VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660 BS: 5424, 4752, 4941 NEN, NBN ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA, DEMKO, DNV, GL NEMKO, NKK, VE, RINA, SCC, SETI, UL, USSR, LROS TH - 20+ 60 - 40+ 80 - 25+ 50 - 25+ 70 Energised state: 3 gn De-energised state: 3 gn Energised state: 8 gn De-energised state: 8 gn IP 20B Protection against direct finger contact Conforming to IEC60295-2-1, NFC20-455 and decree of 22-12-81 (JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982) Conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-072 3000 From main axis (left-right tilt)
Product certifications Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device a
Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration Shock resistance Permissible acceleration Degree of protection Flame resistance Maximum operating altitude Operating positions (without derating)
Operation Storage c Operation (1) Storage 5100 Hz
C C C C
Impulse duration: 11 ms Conforming to IEC 60144 & 60529 Conforming to VDE 0106
Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Voltage limits at q y 55 C Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50Hz a 60Hz c with converter Operation Drop-out a Inrush Sealed c (1) Inrush Sealed a 50/60 Hz c with converter C O C O V V V 24660 24600 24, 48, 110 0.851.1 Uc 0.250.7 Uc 375 (50 Hz), 450 (60 Hz) 25 (50 Hz or 60 Hz) 300 for 50 ms 8 8 (50 Hz), 11 (60 Hz) 1235 720 2540 1525
Heat dissipation Operating time (2) at 20 C and at Uc
VA VA W W W ms ms ms ms
(1) With converter. (2) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151
Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179
1/152
Characteristics
Type
Pole characteristics
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency limits of the operational current Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Heat dissipation in the power circuits of the contactor breaker and its protection module Rated making capacity I rms I peak Rated breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2
integral 63 q y 40 C A Hz 63 4060 8 690 25 4.4
1
32 5 40 5.8 50 7 63 9
Conforming to IEC 60947-4 kV Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V Operational current A W Power per pole, hot state Conforming to IEC 60947-4 A Conforming to IEC 60947-2 kA Operational voltage Value of cos j Cycle P1 (O-t-CO) Icu (1) Cycle P2 (O-t CO-t-CO) Ics (1) Icu = Ics V
2 3 4 5
12 or 15 x Ith (above this value. the breaker trips) 105 380/415 0.25 50 50 50 440 0.25 50 50 50 480/525 0.25 35 35 30 600/690 0.5 10 10 10
conforming to IEC 60947-6-2 ensuring reliability of operation Total breaking time Electrical durability in AC-3 at Ie max and at 415V after 1 cycle O-CO-r-CO at Isc Thermal limit Cabling
220/240 0.25 kA rms 50 kA rms 50 kA rms 50 ms kA 4 3 1 300 x 103 Maximum c.s.a. 1 x 50 or 2 x 35 2 x 25 1 x 50 6 LB1LD03P Standard motors NFC63-650 3 3 690 1363 10/1345/63 - 20+ 60 With
Prospective rms short-circuit current at terminals of a new device Millions of operating cycles With Isc max. at 415 V, 50 Hz Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable
10 0.9
25 0.6
35 0.5
50 0.2
A2s
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
Minimum c.s.a. 1x6 1x6 1x6
Tightening torque Module type Protection
Characteristics of thermal-magnetic or magnetic only protection modules

Conforming to standards Number of poles Number of protected poles Rated operational voltage Max. continuous current Setting range (Irth min./Irth max.) Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping class Instantaneous trip current setting range Tripping tolerance LB1LD03M Standard motors NFC63-650 3 3 690 1363 10/1345/63 20+ 60 With LB6LD03M Frequent starting NFC63-650 3 3 690 1363 20+ 60 Without LB1LD03L Distribution circuits NFC63-120 3 3 690 1363 10/1345/63 20+ 60 Without 36 Irth max 20 %
6 7 8 9 10
Thermal protection
V A A C
Magnetic protection conforming to IEC 60947-1/2/4/6-2
Characteristics of versions without control test function, with padlocking facility

Conforming to standards Rated operational voltage Mechanical durability Padlocking Conforming to standards Rated operational voltage Mechanical durability Padlocking V Operating cycles IEC 60947 690 10000 By 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, 8mm shank
20 20 Fixed at 15 Irth max 612 Irth max (usual 612 Irth max setting 910 Irth maxi) 20 % 20 % 20 %
Characteristics of versions with control test function and padlocking facility

Operating cycles IEC 60947, NFC63-130, VDE0660, VDE0113 V 690 10000 1, 2 or 3 padlocks, shank 8mm max and 5mm min. When flush mounting, interlocking of the enclosure or cabinet door is possible. (1) O: breaking short-circuit current (open), t: time CO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (closed-open)
1/153

Add-on current limiter and auxiliary contacts
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1Lpp
1 2 3 4 5
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Switching capacity Rated a category operational AC-15 (1) power Making capacity Rated c category operational DC-13 (2) power Making capacity Cabling
Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 With U u 17 V and I u 10 mA Voltage 1 million operating cycles 1.5 million operating cycles a category AC-15 Voltage 1 million operating cycles 1.5 million operating cycles c category DC-13
A V mVA V VA VA VA V W W W mm2
6 690 600 48 110/127 300 500 160 300 1500 3500 24 48 120 90 70 50 800 700 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1
220/240 600 330 6000 110 75 38 400
380/415 520 300 7500 220 68 33 260
440 500 280 7000 440 61 28 220
Isolating auxiliary contacts LA1LC03p

Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947 and NFC63-130 Cabling a.c. supply d.c. supply A V V mm2 6 690 125 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 1.5 or 1 x 2.5
Signalling contacts LA1LC001

Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Operational power for 200 000 operating cycles a Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Voltage Resistive load Lamp load (3) Inductive load (4) Motor (5) Voltage Resistive load Lamp load (3) Inductive load (4) Motor (5) A V V VA VA VA VA V W W W W mm2 3 250 24 48 100 100 50 50 75 75 75 75 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5 Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1 110/127 600 90 875 160 110/125 50 6 50 6 220 750 125 500 200 200 50 7.5 50 7.5
6 7 8 9 10
Cabling
(1) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4). (2) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, the time constant increasing with the load. (3) Lamp load: peak current = 10 times the rated current. (4) Inductive load: cos j 0.4 for a.c. operation; time constant 7 ms for d.c. operation. (5) Motor: peak current = 6 times the rated current.
1/154
Characteristics

Interface modules and converters
Type Used for control of the integral 32 Ambient air temperature around the device Storage Operation Isolation Cabling Min. Max. Operating limits Protection Module or converter type
Interface modules By a programmable controller, with a.c. control of the electromagnet
Converters By a programmable controller, with d.c. control of the electromagnet Control on d.c. supply
1 2
080FD
C C kV mm2 mm2
- 25+ 70 - 25+ 50 rms voltage between inputs and outputs: 2.5 1x1 2 x 2.5 0.85...10.1 Uc Against reverse polarity (by diode) and against overvoltage LA1LC 580BD
- 25+ 70 - 25+ 50 Common negative terminal 1x1 2 x 2.5 0.8...1.1 Uc (2) Against reverse polarity (by diode) and against overvoltage LA1LC 080BD

Schemes
580ED
180BD
080ED
3
A1 A2
LA1LCp580pD
LA1Lp180BD
A1
LA1Lp080BD LA1Lp080ED
A1
LA1Lp080FD
+ E1
E2
Indication of input state Input signals Voltage (logic side) Current State 0 guaranteed State 1 guaranteed Supply voltage For U For I For U By LED c 48 c 24 (E1-E2) (E1-E2) 30 20 < 2.4 <2 > 20.4 < 4.8 <2 > 40.8
+ E1
E2
E1
A1 A2
(0V)
E1
A2
(0V) E3 A2 E2
E2
V mA V mA V V
c 524 c 24 (E1-E2) (E1-E2) 1524V 50 8.55V < 2.5 < 2.4 <2 <2 >4 > 20.4
c 48 (E1-E2) 25 < 4.8 <2 >4
c 524 c 24 (1) c 48 (1) (E1-E2) (E3-E2) (E3-E2) 1524V 20 10 8.55V < 2.5 <7 < 14 <2 <5 < 2.5 >4 > 14 > 28 c 48 (2) (E1-E2)
4 5 6
c 110 (2) (E1-E2)
c 24 (1) c 48 (1) (E3-E2) (E3-E2) 20 10 <7 <5 > 14 c 24 (2) (E1-E2) <14 < 2.5 > 28 c 48 (2) (E1-E2) c 110 (2) (E1-E2)
a a a a a a c 24240 24240 24240 24240 24240 24240 24 (2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (E1-E2)
VA VA W Sealed 50/60Hz VA c W ms Operating time Pull-in at 20 C Drop-out ms and at Uc Electrical durability in millions of operating cycles Average Inrush 50Hz consumption 60Hz c 5 160 185 12 1530 2235 160 185 12 1530 2235 160 185 12 1035 830 375 450 25 2040 2545 375 450 25 2040 2545 375 450 25 1045 830 1 250 4 30 15 250 4 30 15 250 4 30 15 300 8 35 20 300 8 35 20 300 8 35 20
7 8 9 10
(1) For direct control by external contact: connect E1-E3. (2) Warning: for supply from rectified a.c., the 2 following conditions must be met: the power supply must exceed 300 VA and the maximum ripple must be y14%.
1/155
Characteristics
Tripping and reset devices, coil suppressor module
Environment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Conforming to standards Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device
Storage Operation Permissible for operation at Uc
C C C
IEC 60337-1 TH - 40+ 80 - 25+ 55 - 25+ 70 Conforming to VDE0106
Protection against direct finger contact
Tripping devices
Uc Uc Inrush Sealed LA1LC070p, LC072p 0.81.1 0.350.7 8 4 LA1LC071p 0.71.1 8 4 10
Type Pull-in voltage Drop-out voltage Average consumption Minimum pulse time
VA VA ms
Reset devices
Type Consumption Duration of a reset cycle Minimum pulse duration VA s s LA1LC052p 9 9 0.5
Suppressor module LA9D09982

Type of protection Connection scheme Operational voltage V RC (resistor-capacitor)
y 250
1/156
Characteristics
Breaking capacity of integral 63 contactor breakers, according to the operational voltage and protection module fitted.
Breaking capacity
Protection module Reference Irth min A 10 LBpLD03p16 LBpLD03p21 LBpLD03p22 LBpLD03p53 LBpLD03p55 LBpLD03p57 LBpLD03p61 13 18 23 28 35 45 Operational voltage 220/240V 400/415V 440V max A 13 18 25 32 40 50 63 kA kA kA 500V kA 600/690V kA 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
u130 u130 u130 u130 u130 u130 u130
u130 u130 u130 50 50 50 50
u130 u130 50
u130 u130
35 35 30 30 30
50 50 50 50
1/157
Selection of protection module according to the tripping characteristics
1 2 3 4
Motor protection (normal starting)

Time
By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03P (1)

300 min 100 min 10 13 18
23 28 35 45 63 25 32 40 50 irth P16 P21 P22 P53 P55 P57 P61
10 min 40 s 1 min
10 s
1s 195 375 270 0,1 s 600 480 750 945
5 6 7 8
0,01 s 6 10 15 20 30 40 54 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000 Current in A
By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03M (1)

Time
300 min 100 min 10 13 18
23 28 35 45 63 25 32 40 50 irth M16 M21 M22 M53 M55 M57 M61
Thermal zone
10 min
1 min
10 s
Magnetic zone
1s
78
156 108 190
240 300 380
480 600 760
0,1 s
150 216
9
0,01 s 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000 Current in A
10
General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151
(1) Thermal protection: the average operating times shown in the above curves are for an ambient air temperature of 20 C, without prior current flow (cold state). The average operating times after prolonged current flow (hot state) can be calculated by applying the coefficient 0.5.
1/158
Motor protection (frequent starting)

By magnetic modules LB6 LD03M
Time
1 2 3
78 156 108 190 150 216 240 300 380 480 600 760
300 min 100 min
Thermal zone
10 min
1 min
10 s
Magnetic zone
1s
0,1 s
4
1000 2000
Current in A
0,01 s 6 10 20 40 60 80 100 110 200 400 600
Distribution circuit protection
5 6
By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03L

Time
300 min 100 min
25 32 40 50 18 23 28 35 45 63 irth L22 L53 L55 L57 L61
10 min
7 8
1 min
10 s
1s
75
95
0,1 s
150 190 120 240 150 300 190 380
9
0,01 s 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000 Current in A
10
General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 Selection : pages 1/148 to 1/151 References : pages 1/162 to 1/173 Dimensions and schemes : pages 1/176 to 1/179
1/159
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3-phase 400/415V, 50Hz Current limitation on short-circuit

Maximum peak current in kA
Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit
100 80 60 40
= 0, 3
0,
25
20
=
0,
1 (1)
10 8 6 4 3 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,1

c os =
0,
0,2
0,4 0,3
4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 18 to 25A up to 45 to 63A
Maximum thermal limit on short-circuit

Thermal limit I2t in kA2s in the short-circuit protection zone
1000 800 600 400
200
(1)
100 80 60 40
20
10
8 10
15 20
50 100 200 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 18 to 25A up to 45 to 63A
(1) LB1LD03p22 to LD06p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.
1/160

3-phase 480/500V, 50Hz Current limitation on short-circuit

Maximum peak current in kA
Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit (continued)
1
= = 0, 3 0, 25
100 80 60 40 20
=
5 0,
1 (1)
2 3 4
10 8 6 4 3 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,1

c os
0,
0,2
0,4 0,3
6 8 10 15 20
35 50
100
200
Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 18 to 25A up to 45 to 63A Current limitation on short-circuit

Thermal limit I2t in kA2s in the short-circuit protection zone
5 6
1 (1)
1000 800 600 400
200
100 80 60 40
7 8
1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 35 50 100 200 Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
20
10
1 18 to 25A up to 45 to 63A
(1) LB1LD03p22 to LD03p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.
9 10
1/161
References

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63 for control and protection of motors
(for customer assembly)
1 2
LD1LD030p
Without control test function, with padlocking facility

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60Hz in AC-43 220V 400V 240V 415V 440V 500V 660V kW kW kW kW kW Black knob 15 30 33 37 55 33
3-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)

Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding the control circuit voltage code (2) for Ue y 415V A 63 kA 50 LD1LD030p Weight
kg 3.700
With control test function and padlocking facility

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60Hz in AC-43 220V 400V 240V 415V 440V 500V 660V kW kW kW kW kW Black knob (CNOMO, VDE0113) 15 30 33 37 55 33 Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding the control circuit voltage code (2) for Ue y 415V A 63 kA 50 LD4LD130p Weight
3 4 5 6 7
LD5LC030p
kg 3.800
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 15 30 33 37 55 63 50 33
LD4LD030p
3.800

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60Hz in AC-43 220V 400V 240V 415V 440V 500V 660V kW kW kW kW kW Black knob (CNOMO, VDE0113) 15 30 33 37 55 33
3-pole reversing contactor breakers without protection module (1)

Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding the control circuit voltage code (2) for Ue y 415V A 63 kA 50 LD5LD130p Weight
kg 7.600
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 15 30 33 37 55 63 50 33
LD5LD030p
7.600
(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately, see page opposite. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 480 500 400 50Hz B D E F M M U Q N N S 60Hz BC BD CC CE ED K FD FC LC MC MC UX Q
600 S
660 Y
8 9 10
c (4)
(3) Variant: UL508 type E approved version (SPCD) at 347/600V; to order, add suffix H5 to the reference. Example: LD1LD030MH5. (4) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression devices (2 converters for reversing contactor breakers).
Characteristics : pages 1/152 to 1/161
1/162
References

Contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers integral 63 for control and protection of motors
(for customer assembly)
Thermal-magnetic protection modules (compensated and differential for normal starting motors) (1)
Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63
Thermal Magnetic setting range protection (Irth min to Irth max) 600V 690V kW 10 15 18.5 22 33 45 55 Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220V 400V 480V 240V 415V 440V 525V kW kW kW kW 5.5 7.5 3 5.5 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 9 11 15 22 25 33 9 11 15 22 25 33 11 15 18.5 25 33 40 Reference Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LB1LD03Mpp
A 1013 1318 1825 2332 2840 3550 4563
LB1LD03P16 LB1LD03P21 LB1LD03P22 LB1LD03P53 LB1LD03P55 LB1LD03P57 LB1LD03P61
kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220V 400V 480V 240V 415V 440V 525V kW kW kW kW 5.5 7.5 3 5.5 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 9 11 22 22 25 33 9 11 22 22 25 33 11 15 25 25 33 40 Thermal Magnetic setting range protection (Irth min to Irth max) 600V 690V kW 10 15 18.5 33 33 45 55 Reference Weight
A 1013 1318 1825 2332 2840 3550 4563
A 78156 108216 150300 190380 240480 300600 380760
LB1LD03M16 LB1LD03M21 LB1LD03M22 LB1LD03M53 LB1LD03M55 LB1LD03M57 LB1LD03M61
kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780
Magnetic only protection modules (for frequent starting motors)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-43 220V 400V 480V 240V 415V 440V 525V kW kW kW kW 5.5 7.5 3 5.5 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 9 11 22 22 25 33 9 11 22 22 25 33 11 15 25 25 33 40 Magnetic protection 600V 690V kW 10 15 18.5 33 33 45 55 Reference Weight
LB6LD03Mpp
A 78156 108216 150300 190380 240480 300600 380760
LB6LD03M16 LB6LD03M21 LB6LD03M22 LB6LD03M53 LB6LD03M55 LB6LD03M57 LB6LD03M61
kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780
8 9 10
(1) Protection modules UL and CSA approved.
1/163
Selection

Contactor breakers integral 63
for control and protection of resistive circuits in category AC-1
Selecting the type of contactor breaker and protection module
1 2
Neutral point connection Neutral connection TNC (neutral and PE combined)
Type of circuit 3-pole + PEN
Equipment scheme
Combination contactor breaker + protection module LD1LD030p + LB1LD03Lpp LD4LD130p + LB1LD03Lpp LD4LD030p + LB1LD03Lpp
PEN
Note: the PEN conductor must not be isolated, Neutral point Type of connection circuit
Equipment scheme
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Neutral connection
TNS 3-pole (neutral and PE separated)
Combination contactor breaker + protection module LD1LC030p + LB1LC03Lpp LD4LC130p + LB1LC03Lpp LD4LC030p + LB1LC03Lpp
Note: all live conductors must be isolated. Neutral protection optional.
1/164
References

for control and protection of resistive circuits in category AC-1
Without control test function, with padlocking facility

Rated thermal current I th qy40C A Black knob 63 Maximum operational current AC-1 qy40C A 63

Maximum Breaking Number operational capacity (Iq) of poles voltage for Ue y 415V V kA 690 50 3 Basic reference. To be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
kg LD1LC030p 3.700

Maximum Rated Maximum operational thermal operational current I th current AC-1 voltage qy40C qy40C A A V Black knob (CNOMO. VDE0113) 63 63 690 Breaking Number capacity (Iq) of poles for Ue y 415V kA 50 3 Basic reference. To be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Weight
kg LD4LD130p 3.800
LD1LD030p
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO. VDE0113) Emergency Stop 63 63 690 50 3 LD4LD030p
3.800
Protection modules (for customer assembly)

Thermal-magnetic (compensated)
Thermal setting range (Irth min./Irth max.) A 1013 1318 1825 LB1LD03Lpp 2332 2840 3550 4563 Magnetic setting range (36 Irth max) A 3978 54108 75150 95190 120240 150300 190380 Number of poles Number of protected poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Reference Weight kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
LB1LD03L16 LB1LD03L21 LB1LD03L22 LB1LD03L53 LB1LD03L55 LB1LD03L57 LB1LD03L61
(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 400 50Hz B D E F M M U Q N N 60Hz BC CC CE K FC LC MC MC UX c (3) BD ED FD (3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with a converter, including coil suppression device.
480 Q
500 S
600 S
660 Y
1/165
1 2
O AUT
TRIP. +
O O
3 4 5
T RESE
O AUT
TRIP. +
6 7 8 9
O AUT
TRIP. +
T RESE
O O
T RESE
10
1/166
References

Add-on blocks
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP20) (1)

For use on Type and number of blocks per unit Composition Reference Weight kg
1 2
N/O N/C C/O LD1, LD4 1 block of 6 contacts comprising: b 3 signalling contacts or LD5 contactor state Mounted on RH side b 1 signalling contact control knob in any position other than Auto b 1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit b 1 signalling contact tripped 1 block of 5 contacts comprising: b 3 signalling contacts contactor state b 1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit b 1 signalling contact tripped 1 block of 4 contacts comprising: b 3 signalling contacts contactor state b 1 signalling contact tripped, selectable by the user 1 block of 3 signalling contacts contactor state LD4 1 control circuit isolating block Mounted (1 or 2 blocks per unit) on LH side LD5 1 block of 3 signalling contacts Mounted contactor state on LH side 1 control circuit isolating block comprising 2 contacts 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LA1LC025 0.170 LA1LC012 0.220 LA1LC010 0.280
3 4
2 1
1 1
2 1 2 2
1 1
LA1LC020 LA1LC030 LA1LB021 LA1LC031
0.100 0.035 0.100 0.100
5 6 7 8 9 10
Signalling contact block (IP10) (1)

For use on LD1, LD4 or LD5 Type and number of blocks per unit 1 block comprising 1 signalling contact contactor state Mounted on LH or RH side Composition Reference Weight kg 0.035 N/O N/C C/O 1 LA1LC001
(1) UL and CSA approved.
1/167
1 2
AUTO
TRIP. +
Off O
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RESE
1/168
References

Accessories
Electrical tripping and reset devices

For use on LD1, LD4 or LD5 fitted with an LA1LC010 or LA1LC012 block LD1, LD4 or LD5 fitted with an LA1LC010 or LA1LC012 add-on block Type and number of devices per unit 1 undervoltage trip Time delay 0.2s Instantaneous or 1 shunt trip 1 remote electrical reset device Instantaneous 24V 50/60Hz 42V 50Hz 48V 50/60Hz 100/127V 50/60Hz 200/240V 50/60Hz Basic reference. To be completed by adding the control voltage code (1) LA1LC070p LA1LC072p LA1LC071p LA1LC052B LA1LC052E LA1LC052F LA1LC052M Weight kg 0.150 0.150 0.150 0.320 0.320 0.320 0.320
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office). Volts 24 48 110 120 220/230 240 380/400 50Hz B E F M U Q F M M Q 60Hz B E F
415 N
440 N N
1/169
1 2
O AUT
TRIP. +
O O
3 4 5 6 7
T RESE
AUTO
TRIP. +
8 9 10
T RESE
AUTO
TRIP. +
Off O
RESE
1/170
References

Accessories and spare parts
Interface modules (1)

Mounting Type Control voltage c V 524 24 48 Operational voltage 50/60Hz V 24240 24240 24240 Reference Weight kg 0.110 0.110 0.110
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
On top of the integral unit
Solid state Relay output
LA1LD180BD LA1LD580BD LA1LD580ED
Replacement coils and voltage converters (1)

For c control circuit operation
Mounting For use on integral Operational voltage c (2) V 24 (4) Consumption Inrush Sealed W 300 W 8 Description Reference (3) Weight kg 0.300 0.150 0.300 0.150 0.300 0.150
On top of the integral unit
LDpLDpppBD
Coil Converter
LX1LD0249 LA1LD080BD LX1LD0489 LA1LD080ED LX1LD01109 LA1LD080FD
LDpLDpppED
48 (4)
300
Coil Converter
LDpLDpppFD
110
300
Coil Converter
Suppressor module
Mounting Type Operational voltage 50/60Hz V y 250 Reference Weight kg 0.010
Clip-on
RC circuit (Resistor-Capacitor) (5)
LA9D09982
(1) For reversing contactor breakers, order 2 interface modules or 2 voltage converters. (2) When used on rectified single-phase or 3-phase supply, the peak to peak ripple voltage must be equal to or less than 0.14 of the average voltage. Operating limits 0.8 to 1.1 Uc for an ambient temperature y 40 C. (3) It is essential that the voltage converter be associated with the specific coil indicated. (4) 24 V and 48 V converters can be operated by Low level input. In this case, the control circuit voltage must be the same as the supply voltage (24 or 48 V). (5) An RC circuit provides effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
1/171
References

Accessories
Protection accessories
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Description Power terminal protection shroud Sealing cover
For use on Upstream power terminals (L1, L2, L3) Protection module
Sold in lots of 5 1
Unit reference LA9LD701 LA1LC090
Weight kg 0.050 0.010
Mounting accessories
Description LA1LC090 Mounting plate For use on LD1, LD4, LD5 Mounting on 1 x 75 mm 7 rail or 2 x 32 mm 4 rails Reference LA9LD010 Weight kg 0.450
Door interlock mechanisms (IP54)

Type Adjustable from 0 to 185mm with extension (control knob mounted on plate or door) For use on LD1 Colour of knob Red Black LD4, LD5 Red Black Unit reference LA9LC330 LA9LC331 LA9LC530 LA9LC531 Weight kg 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400
LA9LD010
1/172
References

Coils (replacement parts)
a.c. operation
Rated control circuit voltages Uc 50Hz Uc 60Hz V V 24 24 42 48 LX1LDppp 110 127 220/230 240 380/400 415/440 500 660 36 48 110 115/120 220 230/240 440 460/480 575/600 Inductance Voltage Average code (1) resistance at of closed 20 C 10% circuit W 0.213 0.323 0.503 0.845 0.987 1.26 4.88 5.89 6.48 9.80 19.82 23.24 30.51 37.66 80.46 93.63 116.46 152.18 290.80 H 0.045 0.071 0.106 0.19 0.22 0.29 1 1.18 1.48 2.13 4.2 4.5 6.7 7.9 16.7 20 23.7 31 60 BC B CC CE D E K FC F G LC MC M U UX Q N S Y Reference Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LX1LD020 LX1LD024 LX1LD030 LX1LD040 LX1LD042 LX1LD048 LX1LD090 LX1LD100 LX1LD110 LX1LD127 LX1LD180 LX1LD190 LX1LD220 LX1LD240 LX1LD360 LX1LD380 LX1LD415 LX1LD500 LX1LD660
kg 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300
Consumption at 50Hz: inrush (cos j: 0.55) 350 to 400VA; sealed (cos j: 0.28) 20 to 30VA. Consumption at 60Hz: inrush (cos j: 0.55) 420 to 500VA; sealed (cos j: 0.30) 24 to 36VA.
d.c. operation
The integral63 can operate on a d.c. supply when fitted with a special coil and corresponding voltage converter: see page 1/171. (1) Coil voltage reference code, used to complete the basic reference when ordering an integral unit.
1/173
Operation

Auxiliary contact states according to the positions of the control knob
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
LD1
LD4
A1
A2
A1
A2
1 2
Auxiliary contact actuators

Auto
+0
U U U
LA1 LC010
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LC012 LA1 LC025 LA1 LC001
98 41
LA1 LC020
13 23 31 14 24 32
13 23 31 14 24 32
LA1 LC030
(53) 63 (54) 64
53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54 53 54
08
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
98
13 23 31
Contact open Contact closed
96
ou
05 14 24 32 15 95 14 24 32 95 05 14 24 32 95
LD1
3 4
Off + control test function
LD4
13 23 31 14 24 32 16 18 15 0608 05 96 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 08 05 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 96 98 95 95 41 42
Off
13 23 31 14 24 32 16 18 15 0608 05 96 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 08 05 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 96 98 95 95 41 42 13 23 31 14 24 32
On, contactor open

AUTO AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
0608 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 98 95 95
95
42
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
5
On, contactor closed
AUTO AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
0608 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 98 95 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
6 7 8 9 10
Off after overload

TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
0608 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 98 95 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
Tripped on overload
TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
0608 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 98 95 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
Tripped on short-circuit
TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
0608 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 98 95 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
Off after short-circuit

TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
0608 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 98 95 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
Manual reset
TRIP. + TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
0608 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 98 95 95
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
RESET
RESET

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 Characteristics : pages 1/148 to 1/161 References : pages 1/162 to 1/173 Dimensions : pages 1/176 and 1/177
1/174
Operation

Auxiliary contact states according to the positions of the control knob
Reversing contactor breakers integral 63
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
LD5
Auxiliary contact actuators

Auto
+0
U U U
ou
1
LA1 LC021
13 23 31
A1
A2
A2
A1
LA1 LC010
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LC012 LA1 LC025 LA1 LC020
98 13 23 31
LA1 LC001
41
LA1 LC031
53 63
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13 23 31
96 98
13 23 31
06 08
13 23 31
16 18
08
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
98
96 95
14 24 32
14 24 32
95
14 24 32
95
14 24 32
05
42
14 24 32
13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32 13 23 31 14 24 32
05
Contact closed Off + control test function
15
95
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
Off
13 23 31 14 24 32 16 18 15 06 08 05 96 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 08 05 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 96 95 98 95 13 23 31 14 24 32 41 42 53 63 54 64
On, reversing contactor open

AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
On, closed
AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
On, closed
AUTO
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
Tripped on overload
TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
Off after overload

TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
Tripped on short-circuit TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
Off after short-circuit TRIP. +
54 64
53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64 53 63 54 64
Contact open
ou
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
53 63 54 64
9 10
Manual reset
TRIP. +
13 23 31 14 24 32
16 18 15
06 08 05
96 98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
08 05
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
96 95
98 95
13 23 31 14 24 32
41 42
13 23 31 14 24 32
53 63 54 64
RESET

General : pages 1/142 to 1/147 Characteristics : pages 1/148 to 1/161 References : pages 1/162 to 1/173 Dimensions : pages 1/176 and 1/177
1/175

Integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers
Contactor breakers integral63
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Control circuit: a.c. LDpLDp30 + LBpLD03
Control circuit: d.c. LDpLDp30 + LBpLD03 + LA1LD080 LA1 LD080
121,5
243
45 210
128,5
250
121,5
100,5
121,5
16,5
158,5 192
= 90
= 90
Reversing contactor breakers integral63

LD5LDp30 + LBpLD03M
Current limiter
LA9LB920
2M4
153,5
129,5
146
275
121,5
210
45
100,5
6 53,5
51
160,5 194
59
63 181
59
Add-on blocks
For mounting on contactor breakers integral 63 LA1LC012 LA1LC001 LA1LC010 LA1LC07p LA1 LC010 LA1 LC001 LA1 LC012 13 11 LA1 LC070 LA1 LC071 LA1 LC072 26 51 12 9 9 12 LA1LC052 LA1LC020 LA1LC030 (1 ou 2) LA1LC025 LALC001
16,5
148
45
103 115
16,5
146
= 28 =
146 158,5 192
= 28 =
100,5
45 210
104,5
97,5
LA1 LC001 LA1 LC025 11
8 9 10
For mounting on reversing contactor breakers integral 63 LA1LC021, LC025 LA1LC001

LA1 LC001 LA1 LC021 LA1 LC025 LA1 LC031 LA1 LC021
LA1LC031
LA1LC012 LA1LC001 LA1 LC001 LA1 LC012
LA1LC010 LA1LC07pp
LA1LC052p
LA1LC020
LA1 LC010 LA1 LC070 LA1 LC071 LA1 LC072

13 11 12 26
13
11
26
51
12
General: pages 1/142 to 1/147
Schemes: pages 1/178 and 1/179
1/176
Mounting (continued)

Mounting
On 75 mm 6 rail, with mounting plate LA9LD010
137,5
On 32 mm 4 rails, at 220 mm centres
On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1P
1 2 3 4
266
220
210
128,5
DZ5 ME9
33
G 75
4xM5
15
AF1 EA5
a LD1 LD4 LD5 266 266 282
b 137,5 137,5 153,5
c 192 192 194
G 28 28 63 LD1 LD4 LD5
c 192 192 194
G 28 28 63 LD1 LD4 LD5
c 192 192 194
G 28 28 63
With mounting plate LA9LD010 SOn 32 mm 4 rails, at 120 mm centres

LA9 LD010 DZ5 ME5 G
120
110
c
40
G 78 78 94
68
LD1 LD4 LD5
192 192 194
210
LA9 LD010
210
31
5
Minimum electrical clearance
Flush mounting (contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers)
4 (1) a (3) LD1 LD030 LD4 LDp30 LD5 LDp30 LA1 LC010 LA1 LC012 a 90 90 181 a1 13 13 a2 51 51
6 7
==
46
a1 a2
1 (2)
LA1 LC012 + LA1 LC052p (1) Maximum door thickness for interlocking by LD4 and LD5. (2) Centre of operating handle. (3) Fixing centre.
30
LA1 LC010 + LA1 LC052p
30
Adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC33p and LA9 LC53p

For mounting on LD4 LDp30 and LD5 LDp30 Door drillings
8 9 10
105
105
275
105
243
105
105
= = 54
54
207357 (LD4) 209359 (LD5)
= 28 = = 90 = 59 63 181
45 59
= = 54
65
1/177
Schemes

Contactor breakers integral 63 with protection module LBp
1 2 3
Reversing contactor breakers integral 63 with protection module LBp

LD5 LDp30 + LB1 LD03M ou LD03P
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 6/T3 6/T3 LA1 LC001 41 42 95 96 32 31 A2 2/T1 2/T1 LA1 LC025 13 23 14 95 98 24 4/T2 4/T2 A1
5/L3
LD1 LD030 + LB1 LD03p

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LD4 LDp30 + LB1 LD03p

1/L1 3/L2
A1
A2
A1
A2
Q1
Q1
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
2/T1
4/T2
5 6 7 8 9 10
Add-on blocks
For contactor breakers LD4 Mounted on LH side
LA1 LC030 (64) (63) 54 53 53 Isolator
6/T3
LB6 LD03M
6/T3
LB6 LD03M
For contactor breakers LD1 or LD4 and reversing contactor breakers LD5 Mounted on RH side
Breaker LA1 LC010 13 23 31 LA1 LC012 13 23 31 LA1 LC020 13 23 31 32
14
24
32
14
14
24
54
96
98
06
08
For reversing contactor breakers LD5 Mounted on LH side
16
41
13
23
31
Control knob position
42
14
24
LA1 LC031 53 63
54
64
32
Isolator
Dimensions, mounting: pages 1/176 and 1/177
1/178
15
18
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC021
Auto
+0
05
05
08
Short-circuit signalling
95
95
98
1 or 2 LA1LC030
Trip signallingt
32
24
A2
A1
Schemes (continued)

Tripping devices (1) for LD1, LD4, LD5

LA1 LC071
C1
Remote electrical reset devices (1) for LD1 to LD5

LA1 LC052p
LA1 LC070, LC072

D1
U< C2 D2
TRIP + Triping device RESET

B4 B2 B3
Reset device
M B1
The use of instantaneous auxiliary contact block LA1LC020 prevents the use of tripping devices or electrical reset devices
1 2 3
(1) For contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers already fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 instantaneous auxiliary contact block.
Interface modules
LA1 LD180
A1
LA1 LD580
A1
+ E1
E2
A2
+ E1
E2
A2
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Voltage converter LA1 LD080 (supply with contactor breakers for c control circuit operation)
Switching by control contact 24 or 48 V Switching by Low level input 24 or 48 V
E1 E3 E2 A2
Supply
+
(0V)
A1
+
(0V)
E1
A1
E2
A2
Low level input
Dimensions, mounting: pages 1/176 and 1/177
1/179
1
2
2 6 1 7
DB400244
2 3 4 5
60 mm
6 7 8 9
5
DB400245
60 mm
1 6
10
4
1/180
Description
TeSys starters and bare devices

Plates for mounting on 60 mm busbar
DB400246
The TeSys mounting plate system for busbars simplifies the installation of motor feeder components used in your electrical installations. Power distribution is performed by a busbar. The mounting plates are fitted directly on this busbar, by snap-on mounting, thus implementing electrical connection. This system offers numerous benefits: b space saving in cabinets b fast, safe and reliable electrical and mechanical connection b easy connection b protection for users against electric shocks by direct contacts (IP20) by using covers b equipment flexibility and modularity b increased equipment availability: easier maintenance b power supply without drilling (connectors) from 1.5 to 120 mm2. The 3P and 4P busbar The busbar interaxis is 60 mm. Depending on the cross section of the bars, the busbar can withstand a maximum current of 630 A. Note: The bars forming the busbar are not part of the TeSys LA9Z offer. They are not supplied by us. Their selection depends on the maximum current needed for your installation (see next page). Support for 3P and 4P busbar (1) These are available in 2 versions: three-pole and four-pole. For applications having to comply with the UL standard, use the LA9ZX01508 support (3P only). The mounting plates (2) These allow mounting of the power feeder components consisting of: b a GV2 motor circuit breaker, mounted alone or in conjunction with a TeSys K or TeSys D contactor b a GV3 motor circuit breaker, mounted alone or in conjunction with a TeSys D contactor b a TeSys U starter-controller b a TeSys GV7 motor circuit breaker b an LD63 integral contactor-circuit breaker b a NSX100-250 or NSX400-630 A circuit breaker. Accessories Accessories complete the offer: b covers (3) for 5 and 10 mm bars b end covers (4) b a base plate (5) b 1P connectors (6) b 3P connectors on mounting plate (7) b a spring terminal 3P connection module (8).
Description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DB400247
Installation examples.
1/181
Curves

Plates for mounting on busbars
Short-circuit withstand capability
Determining the spacing between busbar supports (1)

Peak current Ipk (kA)
1 2 3
DB401392
Spacing between busbar supports (mm)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(1) Depending on the short-circuit current.
1/182
Curves

Plates for mounting on busbars
Short-circuit withstand capability
Load resistance of busbar assemblies

For an ambient temperature of 35 C and a busbar temperature of 65 C Cross section Permissible current mm2 A 12 x 5 200 15 x 5 250 20 x 5 320 25 x 5 400 30 x 5 450 12 x 10 360 20 x 10 520 30 x 10 630
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
In the event of changes in climatic conditions, the following curve indicates the correction factor K2 to be applied.
Factor K2 2,2
2,1 2,0 1,9 1,8 1,7 1,6 1,5 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1 1,0 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 Busbar temperature (C) C 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
Example: In normal operating conditions, a tinned busbar of 30 x 10 can permanently withstand 630 A. For a load of 800 A, the correction factor K2 to be applied will be 1.3 ( 800 A ). As a result, the temperature rise in the busbars will reach 82.5 C. 630 A
Ambient temperature
DF569559
1/183
References

Busbar support
DB400390
DB400258
IEC busbar supports and accessories
1 2
Sale Unit in ind. reference Q. 10 10 10 10 LA9ZX01495 LA9ZX01573 LA9ZX01485 LA9ZX01131
3-pole 4-pole
For 12, 15, 20, 25, 30 x 5/10 mm2 busbars End covers for 3-pole busbar support For 12, 15, 20, 25, 30 x 5/10 mm2 busbars End covers for 4-pole busbar support (5 left, 5 right)
LA9ZX01573
DB400239 DB400242
LA9ZX01495
3 4
LA9ZX01131
DB400390
UL busbar supports and accessories
Sale Unit in ind. reference Q. 10 2 10 LA9ZX01508 LA9ZX01515 LA9ZX01573
3-pole
For 12, 20, 30 x 5/10 mm busbars Base plate 240 x 700 End covers for busbar support
LA9ZX01485
DB400241
5 6
Other accessories
Sale Unit in ind. reference Q. 10 10 LA9ZX01244 LA9ZX01245
Covers, length 1 m For 12-30 x 5 mm2 busbars For 12-30 x 10 mm2 busbars LA9ZX01573 LA9ZX01508
7
Conformity with
General characteristics
C Hz mm A C K V V mm kA A2s mm
IEC 61439-2, UL508 IP20 with cover LA9ZX01244 or LA9ZX01245 120 50/60 12 x 5 200 35 1 690 LA9ZX01508 (UL) 12 x 5 35 1 x 108 4x6 12 x 10 35 4 x 108 LA9ZX01495 and LA9ZX01485 (IEC) 12 x 5 30 1 x 108 4x5 12 x 10 35 11 x 108 20 x 10 35 11 x 108 30 x 5 45 30 x 10 55 15 x 5 250 45 0.75 20 x 5 320 50 0.65 25 x 5 400 60 0.35 30 x 5 450 60 0.35 12 x 10 360 40 0.9 20 x 10 520 55 0.55 30 x 10 630 60 0.35
8 9 10
Degree of protection Thermal resistance Rated current frequency Rated operating current Depending on type of busbars and at 35 C K-factor to be applied depending on ambient temperature
Rated insulation voltage Rated operating voltage Peak permissible rated current With busbar support Bar dimensions Rated current
690 as per IEC 60947-1 and NF C 20-040
Maximum thermal stress Support fastening by screws
6.2 x 108 24.8 x 108
1/184
References

Choice of mounting plates
DB400234
DB400235
For TeSys GV2 motor circuit breakers

Operating current AC-3 440 V 25 A 32 A Protection by motor circuit breaker GV2ME GV2P GV2LE GV2ME GV2P GV2LE GV2ME GV2P GV2LE GV2ME GV2P GV2LE For contactor
Mounting Sale Unit plate Ixh in ind. reference Q. 45 x 200 45 x 200 4 4 LA9ZA32621 LA9ZA32434
Mounting plate, 1-way

LC1D LC1K LP4K06-K12 LC1D
1 2 3 4
LA9ZA32621
DB400233 DB400232
LA9ZA32434
Mounting plate, 2-way (3)

25 A 32 A LC1D LC1K LP4K06-K12 LC1D 90 x 200 90 x 200 2 2 LA9ZA32622 LA9ZA32623
LA9ZA32622
DB400237 DB400236
LA9ZA32623
Operating current AC-3 440 V 32 A Protection by power base
Mounting Sale Unit plate Ixh in ind. reference Q. 45 x 200 4 LA9ZA32427

LUB12, LUB32
5 6

32 A LA9ZA32427 LUB12, LUB32 45 x 260 4 LA9ZA32428
LA9ZA32428
DB400231 DB400230
Pour disjoncteurs-moteurs TeSys GV3

Operating current AC-3 440 V 63 A Protection by power base For contactor
Mounting Sale Unit plate Ixh in ind. reference Q. 54 x 200 54 x 260 4 4 LA9ZA32624 LA9ZA32625
Mounting plate, 1-way (1)

GV3P GV3P LA9ZA32624 LC1D40A65 A
7 8 9 10
Mounting plate, 2-way (1) (2)

63 A LA9ZA32625 GV3P LC1D40A65 A 117 x 260 4 LA9ZA32626
DB400229
(1) Contactor-circuit breaker combination without additional part. (2) Use the LAD 9R3 kit for the execution of changeover contactors. (3) Use the LAD 9R1 or LAD 9R1V kit for the execution of changeover contactors.
LA9ZA32626
Note: the mounting plate rails can be shifted vertically in 1.25 mm increments.
1/185
References

Choice of mounting plates
DB400228
For TeSys integral contactor-circuit breakers

Operating current AC-3 440 V 63 A Protection by contactor-circuit breaker Mounting plate Ixh
1 2
Sale in Unit ind. Q. reference

LD1, LD4LD 108 x 260 1 LA9ZA32627
For TeSys GV7 motor circuit breakers

LA9ZA32627
3 4 5
LV432623
DB4003887 DB400388
Operating current AC-3 440 V 80 A
Protection by contactor-circuit breaker
Mounting plate Ixh
Sale in Unit ind. Q. reference

GV7 104 x 190 1 LV429372
For Compact NSX circuit breakers

Operating current AC-3 440 V 100-250 A 400-630 A
Mounting plate Ixh
Sale in Unit ind. Q. reference 1 1 1 1 LV429372 LV429373 LV432623 LV432624
Mounting plate for 3P circuit breakers 104 x 190 Mounting plate for 4P circuit breakers 139 x 251 Mounting plate for 3P circuit breakers 139 x 270 Mounting plate for 4P circuit breakers 184 x 284
6 7 8
Characteristics of busbar mounting plates

Type of mounting plate LV432624 LA9ZA32621 LA9ZA32622
LA9ZA32427 LA9ZA32428 LA9ZA32434 LA9ZA32623
LA9ZA32624 LA9ZA32625 LA9ZA32626 LA9ZA32627
9 10
Degree of protection as per IEC 60529 Conductor cross section (colour: black) Type of conductor insulating material Permissible current Rated insulation voltage Peak rated current Maximum thermal stress
IP mm2 PVC A V kA A 2s
20 4 AWG 12 105 C 25 6 2 x 105 32 6 2 x 105 63 10 3 x 105 6 AWG 10 10 AWG 8
690 as per IEC 60947-1 and NF C 20-040
1/186
References

Terminals, connection module
DB400227
Terminals
One-pole for flat bars, 5 mm2 3P cover, width 84 mm
I max 270 A Capacity 4-35 mm2 400 A Capacity 16-70 mm2
Sale in ind. Q. 50 25 10
Unit reference LA9ZX01285 LA9ZX01287 LA9ZX01413
1 2
LA9ZX01285
DB400243
LA9ZX01287
DB400226
Terminals on mounting plate

I max 3P, on mounting plate + cover, for 12 x 5 to 30 x 10 busbars 440 A Capacity 35-120 mm2
Sale in ind. Q. 1
Unit reference LA9ZX01243
3 4
LA9ZX01243
DB400240
Connection module
3P, spring terminal connection + cover, for busbars of 12 x 5 to 30 x 10
I max 80 A Capacity 1.5-16 mm
Sale in ind. Q. 8
Unit reference LA9ZX01563
5 6
LA9ZX01563
Connection by connectors
LA9ZX01285 270 A maxi Min. Max. 35 35 35
LA9ZX01287 400 A maxi Min. 16 16 Max. 70 70
LA9ZX01243 440 A Min. 35 35 ... x 5-10 Max. 120 120
LA9ZX01563 4A Min. 1.5 1.5 1.5 ... x 5-10 80 A Max. 16 16 16
Flexible wire with end-piece Multi-strand wire Rigid wire Tightening torque
mm2 4 mm2 4 mm2 4 N.m
7 8 9 10
... x 5 Supplied without cover
... x 10 Supplied without cover
1/187
Selection guide
Installation system
TeSys Quickfit for motor starter components

Components with spring terminals
Functions
1 2 3 4
Assembly and connection of motor starter components with spring terminals, without using tools Power circuit pre-wiring components Control-command pre-wiring components for TeSys motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME
Product type
For contactors
TeSys D (9 to 25 A) Direct and reversing Limited to 60 A (Ith) Limited to 8 starters (1) 1 Direct Yes No Reversing Yes No
5 6 7 8 9 10
Type of starter Coil control Use with motor starters Number of motor starters Type of connection or bus Number of channels References Pages
LAD3p
1/195
LAD9AP3pp
1/197
(1) With TeSys circuit-breakers GV2ME and upstream terminal block LAD3B1.
1/188
Communication with the processing part Control-command pre-wiring components for TeSys motor circuit-breakers GV3P Splitter box Parallel interface module, with Advantys STB network interface module
1 2 3 4
TeSys D (40 to 65 A) Direct Yes Reversing Yes
8 starters per splitter box HE 10 16 inputs/12 outputs
4 starters per module Modbus Plus, Fipio, CANopen, Ethernet, TCP/IP, Profibus DP, INTERBUS, DeviceNet
5 6 7 8 9 10
LU9G02
1/197
STBEPI2145
1/197
1/189
Presentation
Installation system

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Description : pages 1/192 and 1/193 Characteristics : pages 1/198 and 1/199
TeSys Quickfit is a modular system which standardises and simplifies setting up of motor starters with its pre-wired control and power circuits. Installation of a motor starter is therefore quick, simple, safe and flexible. In addition, this system: b enables the motor starter to be customised at a later date, b reduces maintenance time and b optimises panel space by reducing the number of terminals and intermediate interfaces and the amount of ducting.
System for motor starters with spring terminals

Motor starters with TeSys GV2 ME circuit-breakers
b From 0 to 18 A max., b TeSys GV2ME circuit-breakers combined with LC1D contactors from 9 to 25 A (spring terminal version), b Quickfit pre-wired power and control connections. Motor starters with TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers b From 9 to 65 A max., b TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers combined with LC1D contactors from 40 to 65 A (spring terminal version), b Quickfit pre-wired control connections only, b For pre-wired power connections, use busbar sets from the TeSys d 40 to 65 A contactor range (see page 5/85). This range comprises pre-wiring components for: b the power circuits, b the control circuits.
Power circuit pre-wiring components (motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers only)
Motor starter with GV2 ME circuit-breakers
b a power circuit connection kit comprising, for each starter, a plate for mounting the contactor and the circuit-breaker and two power connection modules, b a power splitter box for 2 or 4 starters, b an upstream terminal block for a power supply up to 60 A (16mm2), b an outgoing terminal block for connection of the motor power supply cables and the earth cables (6 mm2). Note: with GV3 circuit-breakers, no accessories are required for pre-wiring of the power circuit. The GV3 Ppp outgoing terminal block can be removed. This circuit-breaker is also sold with only one terminal block (reference: GV3 Ppp1).
Control circuit pre-wiring components (motor starters with TeSys GV2 and GV3 circuit-breakers)
Motor starter with GV3P circuit-breakers
b a control circuit connection module which plugs directly into the contactor and the circuit-breaker on each starter. This module incorporates status and control data for this motor starter. b a parallel wiring module which concentrates the data of each motor starter: v HE10 connector, for centralised applications. Data is transmitted to the PLC via the Advantys Telefast pre-wired system. v STB, designed for decentralised automation architectures. This module is suitable for use in an Advantys STB configuration for connection to the PLC via a field bus.
Schemes : pages 1/202 and 1/203
1/190
Installation system

HE10 connection
Control/command
1
1 3
1 Automation platform 2 Connection cable TSXCDPpp or ABFH20pp 3 Splitter box LU9 G02
2 2
Connection on bus using Advantys STB (1) Configuration example (for motor starter applications only):
Power supply module Module STBPDT 3100 Connection base STBXBA 2200 Terminal block STBXTB 1130 Parallel interface module (2) Module STBEPI 2145 Connection base STB XBA 3000 Network interface module (3) CANopen STBNCO 1010 (4) Fipio STBNFP 2210 Ethernet TCP/IP STBNIP 2210 InterBus STBNIB 1010 (4) Profibus DP STBNDP 1010 (4) DeviceNet STBNDN1010 (4) Modbus Plus STBNMP 2210 Terminal block STBWTS 2120
2 3 4 5 6 7
4 Network interface module 5 Supply module 6 Parallel interface module
6 5 4 TeSys Quickfit LAD 9AP3 pp used with modules APP1Cpp
7 TeSys Quickfit module 8 Adapter plate APP2CX 9 Splitter box LU9G02 for 8 direct motor starters, with channel connections on the APP1C module side by two HE 10 connectors (20-way) and on theTeSys Quickfit side, by RJ45 connectors 10 Connection cable APP2AH40H060
9 10
8 9 10
The motor starter is connected to an APP1Cp module 7 using an adapter plate APP 2CX 8 and a connection cable APP2AH40H060 10. Information is available on the module for each motor starter: b 1 output: motor control, b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status.
(1) Please consult our catalogue "Advantys STB I/O. The open solution". (2) For 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters. (3) Reference to be selected according to the network used. (4) Optimised version.
Description : pages 1/192 and 1/193
1/191
Description
Installation system

Power components
(only for motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers) Power kits LAD 3p Each motor starter requires a power kit which consists of a plate 1 and two Quickfit technology power connection modules 2. The plate is used for mounting TeSys D contactors 3 (9 to 25 A, direct or reversing, with spring terminals and fitted with a.c. or d.c. coil) and the GV2ME circuit-breaker 4 only. This plate is mounted on two 35 mm 7 rails or is screwed onto a base plate. The two power connection modules 2a and 2b are identical, whatever the rating of the contactor up to 18 A. The upper power connection module 2a connects the power between the splitter box and the circuit-breaker. The lower power connection module 2b connects the power between the circuitbreaker and the contactor. Splitter boxes LAD 32p Splitter boxes 5 are available for 2 or 4 starters. They can be combined to create motor starters up to 60 A per power supply. A reversing starter occupies a width equivalent to that of 2 direct starters. Direct supply of power to the splitter boxes is possible up to 25 A (4 mm2). Upstream terminal block LAD 3B1 The upstream terminal block 6 performs two functions: b power supply up to 60 A (16 mm2), b power supply between two connected splitter boxes. The upstream terminal block connects to the splitter box using Quickfit technology. It is positioned on the splitter box or straddling two splitter boxes and takes up a width equivalent to two motor starters. Outgoing terminal block LAD 331 The outgoing terminal block 7 performs two functions: b connection of the motor power supply cables up to 6 mm2, b connection of the motor earth cables. In addition, the terminal block enables quick connection and disconnection for maintenance, avoiding the risk of phase reversal. The outgoing terminal block connects to the downstream spring terminals on the contactor, using Quickfit technology.
1 2
4
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Presentation: pages 1/190 and 1/191 Characteristics: pages 1/198 and 1/199
2a
2b 3
Dimensions: pages 1/200 and 1/201
1/192
Description (continued)
Installation system

Control circuit connection modules LAD 9 AP3 pp The control circuit connection module 1 plugs directly into the control terminals on the contactor and on the TeSys GV2 ME or TeSys GV3 P motor circuit-breaker, in the location provided for the front-mounting block. It is compatible with all contactor ratings up to 18 A for TeSys GV2ME and 65A for TeSys GV3P. Mechanical locking 2 of the system onto the top of the contactor ensures a perfect connection, whatever the operating conditions (vibrations, knocks, etc.). These modules are available in 4 versions: for direct or reversing starter, with or without contactor coil interface relay. The coil control can be a.c. or d.c., up to a 250 V and c 130 V. The version without relay is designed to control the contactor coils with no interface, at 24 V d.c. The version with relay has a connector for connecting the contactor power supply. Module LAD9AP3pp incorporates, in its lower part, several external connectors: 3 RJ45 connector, for connecting the automation system. 4 2-way connector, for connecting the contactor power supply (only on versions with relay). 5 2-way connector, for connecting an external contact in series with the contactor coil (supplied complete with shunt)
2 3 4 5
Control/command components
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Parallel wiring modules The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect motor starters which incorporate TeSys Quickfit technology to the processing unit (PLC) quickly and without any need for tools. The parallel wiring module provides the status and command information for each motor starter. Control connection modules LAD9AP3pp are connected to the parallel wiring modules using RJ45 cables LU9Rpp 6, which are available in different lengths. The following information is available for each motor starter: b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status, b 1 output: contactor coil control. A direct motor starter uses one RJ45 channel. A reversing motor starter uses two RJ45 channels.
Note: for motor starters built using TeSys GV3 circuit-breakers and TeSysD contactors, the Quickfit pre-wired system allows the contactor to be mounted below the circuit-breaker or mounting of the two devices side by side. Parallel wiring module LU9 G02
This module 7 enables connection of up to 8 direct or 4 reversing motor starters directly to the I/O modules of PLCs. It is used with the Advantys Telefast pre-wiring system (1). This splitter box is optimised for use with card TSX DMZ28DTK.
Dedicated parallel interface module STBEPI2145 (2)
This module enables 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters to be connected via the Advantys STB distributed I/O solution. With STB network interface modules, motor starters can be connected to the following communication networks: Modbus Plus, FIPIO, CANopen, Ethernet TCP/IP, ProfibusDP, INTERBUS and DeviceNet.
(1) Please consult our catalogue Power supplies, splitter boxes and interfaces. (2) Please consult our catalogue "Advantys STB I/O. The open solution".
1/193
1
LAD 3B1
2
LAD 352 GV2 MEpp3
3 4
Power circuit pre-wiring components Direct starter
LC1 Dpp3
LAD 331
5 6 7 8
LC2 Dpp3
9 10
Power circuit pre-wiring components Reversing starter
1/194
References
Installation system

Power circuit pre-wiring components (only for motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers)
Description Maximum connection c.s.a. Application Sold in lots of Reference Upstream terminal block LAD3B1 Description Power splitter box, 60 A 16 mm2 (1) Extension by LAD32p Power supply of 1 or 2 power splitter boxes Number of starters 2 4 Description LAD 324 Composition 1 LAD3B1 Reference LAD 322 LAD 324 Reference
Weight kg 0.212
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Weight kg 0.120 0.240 Weight kg 0.078
Direct starter
Power connection kit 1 plate LAD 311 for GV2 ME and 2 power connection modules LAD341 LAD 352
Reversing starter
To build a reversing starter, order 2 kits LAD352 Description Outgoing terminal block Description Plate for mounting a GV2 ME circuit-breaker and a contactor Power connection module Maximum connection c.s.a. 6 mm2 Application Connection of motor cables No. of starters 1 1 Sold in lots of 10 Sold in lots of 10 10 Reference LAD 331 Unit reference LAD 311 LAD 341 Weight kg 0.050 Weight kg 0.042 0.018
LAD 352
(1) Cables with one end pre-crimped are available to allow fast connection. References: 1 set of 3 x 6 mm 2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B061, length 2 m: LAD 3B062 and length 3 m: LAD 3B063), 1 set of 3 x 10 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B101, length 2 m: LAD 3B102 and length 3 m: LAD 3B103), 1 set of 3 x 16 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B161, length 2 m: LAD 3B162 and length 3 m: LAD 3B163). LAD 331
1/195
STB EPI 2145
LAD 32p
1
GV2 MEpp3
2
LC1 Dpp3 LC2 Dpp3
3 4 5 6
GV3 Ppp
LU9 G02 LAD 9AP3D1 LAD 9AP3D2
7
LC1 DppA3
LC2 DppA3
8 9 10
Note: Circuit-breakers TeSys GV3P and contactors LC1 D40A3 to D65A3 can be mounted side by side, using a set of S-shape busbars (GV3 S).
1/196
Installation system

Control-command pre-wiring components

Description TeSys D coil voltage Control connection modules a 12... 250 V or c 5...130 V c 24 V
Type of coil control relay Electromechanical
Type of starter Direct Reversing
Reference LAD9AP31 LAD9AP32 LAD9AP3D1 LAD9AP3D2
Weight kg 0.150 0.200 0.140 0.190
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Without relay
Direct Reversing
Parallel wiring modules (c 24 V)

Description LAD 9AP3p Splitter box Description Advantys STB parallel interface module Connectors PLC side 2 x HE 10 20-way Connectors PLC side Motor starter side 4 x RJ45 Motor starter side 8 x RJ45
Reference LU9G02 Reference STBEPI2145
Weight kg 0.260 Weight kg 0.165
Connection cables
Connectors 2 x RJ45 connectors
Between the control connection module and the splitter box LU9G02 or STBEPI2145
Length m 0.3 1 3 LU9 R03 LU9 R10 LU9 R30 Reference Weight kg 0.045 0.065 0.125
Between splitter box LU9G02 and the PLC

Type of connection PLC side HE 10 20-way Splitter box side AWG HE 10 20-way 22 mm2 0.324 m 0.5 1 2 3 5 28 0.080 1 2 3 Bare wires HE 10 20-way 22 0.324 3 5 TSX CDP 053 TSX CDP 103 TSX CDP 203 TSX CDP 303 TSX CDP 503 ABFH20H100 ABFH20H200 ABFH20H300 TSX CDP 301 TSX CDP 501 kg 0.085 0.150 0.280 0.410 0.670 0.080 0.140 0.210 0.400 0.660 Gauge C.s.a. Length Reference Weight
Separate components
Description Spring terminal connections for: b the external contact b the auxiliary power supply Self-stripping connector for: b the external contact b the auxiliary power supply Connecting cable between module APP1Cp and splitter box LU9 G02 ( length: 0.6 m)
Characteristics 2-way, 5 mm pitch Wire c.s.a.: 0.22.5 mm 2-way, 5 mm pitch Wire c.s.a.: 0.75 mm Connectors: 1 x HE 10, 30-way 2 x HE 10, 20-way
Sold in lots of 10
Unit reference APE 1PRE21
Weight kg 0.020
16
APE 1PAD21
0.020
APP 2AH40H060
0.400
1/197
Characteristics
Installation system

Type of control connection module
1 2 3 4 5 6
General environment
Standard Certifications Degree of protection Resistance to incandescent wire Shock resistance Vibration resistance Resistance to electrostatic discharge Resistance to radiated fields Immunity to fast transient currents Surge withstand Immunity to radioelectric fields Ambient air temperature
LAD9AP3pp IEC 60439-1 UL, CSA IP 40 (mounted assembly) 960 11 ms and 15 gn (half sine wave) 2100 Hz : 4 and 3100 Hz: 0.7 Level 3 10 (261000 MHz) Level 3 2 in common mode, 0.6 in differential mode Wave form: 1.2/50 s - 8/20 s 10 (0.15...80 MHz) - 5+ 60 - 5+ 40 - 40+ 70 > 30 3 On 2 x 35 mm rails or with 2 x 5.5 mm screws on plate for GV2 ME 3 16 25 25 2 1.5 2.5 2.5
Conforming to IEC 60529 Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1
Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 gn and BV/LR Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 Operation in floor-standing enclosure Operation in wall-mounted enclosure Storage For inserting cables and heat dissipation V/m
kV V C C C mm
Space required around mounted assembly Degree of pollution Assembly fixing (with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers only) Suitable wire c.s.a.
Voltage supply Number of wires for power Flexible cable with cable end Flexible cable without cable end Solid cable Voltage supply Number of wires for contactor Flexible cable coil control with cable end (max) Flexible cable without cable end (max) Solid cable (max)
mm mm mm mm mm mm
3-phase power circuit characteristics

Per power supply Per sub-base GV2 operating limit Maximum current per starter Insulation voltage Operational voltage U imp Rated operational frequency Rated short-circuit current conditional Isc at 415 V Permissible short-time rating Icw Maximum current Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to IEC 60439-1 A A A V V kV Hz kA kA 60 (single power supply to one or more sub-bases or splitter boxes) 60 80 % of Imax at 60 C ambient temperature (see table on opposite page) 18 (with an empty slot between two starters) 750 690 6 50-60 50 9.1 (for 70 ms)
7 8 9 10
Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to IEC 60439-1

V V V a 12250 (with interface relay) c 524 (without interface relay) c 5130 (with interface relay)
Contactor coil control voltage
Presentation : pages 1/190 and 1/191
Description : page 1/197
1/198
Installation system

Table of GV2 circuit-breaker current limitation at 60C ambient temperature with TeSys Quickfit
Circuit-breaker reference GV2 ME06 GV2 ME07 GV2 ME08 GV2 ME10 GV2 ME14 GV2 ME16 GV2 ME20 GV2 ME21 GV2 ratings (1) 1 - 1.6 A 1.6 - 2.5 A 2.5 - 4 A 4 - 6.3 A 6 - 10 A 9 - 14 A 13 - 18 A 17 - 23 A Maximum current of GV2 with TeSys Quickfit 1.28 A 2A 3.2 A 5A 8A 11.2 A 14.4 A 18 A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Electromechanical relay characteristics

Type of control connection module LAD9AP31, LAD9AP32 V V V V mA mA W ms c 24 c 19.2 c 2.4 c 30 15 1 0.36 5
Characteristics of the electromechanical relay control circuit (PLC side)

Rated voltage at Us Energisation threshold at 40 C Drop-out voltage at 20 C Maximum operational voltage Maximum current at Us Drop-out current at 20 C Maximum power dissipated at Us Supply failure
Characteristics of the electromechanical relay output circuit

Type of contact Maximum switching voltage Frequency of the operating current Maximum current of the contact V V Hz A 1F a 250 c 130 50/60 4
Other characteristics of the electromechanical relay

Maximum operating time at Us (including bounce) Between coil energisation and closing of the contact Between coil de-energisation and opening of the contact No load At Ie In millions of operating cycles ms ms Hz Hz 10 5 10 0.5 20
Maximum operating ratet Mechanical life
Dielectric strength Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Primary/secondary rated insulation voltage Maximum current 24 V - DC13 for 500 000 operations 230 V - AC15
V 1000 (50/60 Hz) - 1 mn kV 2.5 V 300 A 0.6 A 0.9 (1) Thermal trip setting range.
1/199
Dimensions
Installation system

Dimensions
1 2 3
Mounted assembly, with TeSys GV2ME circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors

120
5 2 4 3
255
4 5 6 7 8
1
6
110 135
1 Circuit-breaker and contactor support plate 2 Power connection module 3 Power splitter box 4 Control splitter box 5 Upstream terminal block 6 Outgoing terminal block (1) 2 starters: 90 mm, 4 starters: 180 mm, 8 starters: 360 mm.
(1)
Mounted assembly with TeSys GV3P circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors (LC1D40A3 LC1D65A3)
Vertical mounting Side by side mounting
119
285
2 1
2
1 1
231
141
119
9
141 55 55
10
1 Control splitter box 2 Set of GV3 G264 busbars 3 Set of S-shape busbars GV3S
1/200
138
Installation system

Dimensions
Parallel wiring modules

Splitter box LU9 G02 75 47 Parallel wiring module Advantys STB EPI 2145 5 70
1 2
56
42 155 120 35
35
3
28,1 (1) (1)Dimension to be multiplied by the number of STB EPI 2145 modules present in the configuration. 10
Schemes
Splitter box LU9 G02
X1 Control contact NC Output common NC Contactor status RJ45 NC Circuit-breaker status Input common X2 LU9 G02
4
Colours of TSXCDPppp connection cable wires (4)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
X9
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ45 X3
(2)
RJ45 X4
RJ45 X5
RJ45
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Control contact NC Output common NC Contactor status NC Circuit-breaker status Input common
Fault X1 Fault X2 Fault X3 Fault X4 Fault X5 Fault X6 Fault X7 Fault X8 Pole status X1 Pole status X2 Pole status X3 Pole status X4 Pole status X5 Pole status X6 Pole status X7 Pole status X8 + 24 V Aux - 24 V Aux + 24 V Aux - 24 V Aux
5 6 7 8 9 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 White 2 Brown 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 Grey 6 Pink 7 Blue 8 Red 9 Black 10 Violet 11 Grey-pink 12 Red-blue 13 White-green 14 Brown-green 15 White-yellow 16 Yellow-brown 17 White-grey 18 Grey-brown 19 White-pink 20 Pink-brown
X10
Control X1 Control X2 Control X3 Control X4 Control X5 Control X6 Control X7 Control X8 Not used with TeSys Quickfit NC NC NC NC + c 24 V - c 24 V + c 24 V - c 24 V
X6
RJ45
(3)
X7
RJ45 X8
RJ45 c 24 V
24 V Aux Inputs
Outputs
(2) 20-way HE10 input connector. (3) 20-way HE10 output connector. (4) Wire colours and corresponding HE10 connector pin numbers. Characteristics : pages 1/198 and 1/199 References : pages 1/195 to 1/197
Com
Com
1/201
Schemes (continued)
Installation system

Wiring schemes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
With relay
LAD9AP31
LAD9AP32
13
23
13
Q1
Q1
14
24
14
21
13
21
24
23
KM1
(1)
13
KM1
13
21
KM2
14
22
22
14
KA1 (2)
14
KA1 (2)
Ph
22
(1)
(1)
KA2 (2)
Ph
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shunt 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shunt 1
Ph
Shunt 2
Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker. (1) Contactor coil. (2) Interface relay.
1/202
Schemes (continued)
Installation system

Without relay
LAD9AP3D1
Wiring schemes (continued)

LAD9AP3D2
1
13
Q1
13
23
Q1
14
24
14
24
23
2 3 4
Shunt 2
21
13
13
21
KM1
14
22
14
22
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shunt 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Shunt 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker. (1) Contactor coil.
14
22
(1)
KM1
13
21
(1)
KM2
(1)
5 6 7 8 9 10
Presentation : pages 1/190 and 1/191 Description : page 1/197 Characteristics : pages 1/198 and 1/199 References : pages 1/195 to 1/197 Schemes : pages 1/202 and 1/203
1/203
1 2 3
5 1
4 5 6
8 10 11
12
6 9
7 8 9 10
10 AK5-ASS-3-Q 15 12 14
6 7 13
1/204
Presentation
Power distribution in control panels

Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5
The assembly of automated control and distribution panels requires the use of products that are not only safe but also simple and quick to mount and cable. The AK5 pre-assembled busbar system meets all these criteria by incorporating prefabricated components which cater for 3 principal functions:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Carrying of electric current

By the pre-assembled 4-pole busbar system 1, 160 A at 35 C. 4-pole busbar systems can be used for 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common. The busbar systems are available in 6 lengths: 344, 452, 560, 668, 992, 1100 mm. An incoming supply terminal block 2 is located at the extreme left of the busbar system. "Knock-out" partitions allow connection of the power supply from above or below to connectors 3 which are protected by a removable cover 4. Upstream protection of the busbar system is shown on page 1/206.
Current distribution
Tap-off units 5 (factory assembled) are available in 4 versions: b 2-pole, b 3-pole, b 4-pole (3-phase + Neutral), b 4-pole (3-phase + Common). The tap-offs clip onto the busbar system with instantaneous mechanical and electrical connection to the busbars. 2 ratings are available: 16 and 32 A. The tap-off units ensure not only rapid mounting, but also a neat appearance for the power distribution system and complete safety when accessing under live circuit conditions.
Component mounting
Component mounting plates with incorporated tap-off allow mounting of and supply of power to components. They are available in 25 A or 50 A ratings. These mounting plates clip onto the mounting rail 11, which also supports the busbar system, and at the same time make electrical connection via the incorporated tapoff. 2 types of mounting plate are available: b single plates 6 (height 105 mm), with bolt-on 35 mm wide 7 rail 7, which may be bolted on in one of two positions, allowing height adjustment of 10 mm. b double plates 8 and 14 (height 190 mm), with two bolt-on, 35 mm wide 7 rails 9 mounted on 100 mm fixing centres; each rail may be bolted on in one of 4 positions, allowing height adjustment in 10 mm steps. These plates are supplied with connectors 12 to allow wiring between control and protection devices. Single mounting plates enable the following types of distribution: b 2-pole (Ph + N) and (Ph + Ph) b 3-pole, b 4-pole (3 Ph + N or 3 Ph + common). Double mounting plates enable the following types of distribution: 2-pole (Ph + N, Ph + Ph), 3-pole or 4-pole (3Ph+N and 3Ph + common). Extension plates 10 can be bolted onto single and double mounting plates to enable mounting of wider components. Using a side stop 15 in conjunction with these extension plates also supports the AK5 JB busbar system when used vertically. A control terminal block 13 comprising a support plate bolted onto the single or double mounting plates and a 10-pole plug-in block, enables connection of the control circuit wires (c.s.a. 1.5 mm2 max).

References: pages 1/210 and 1/211
Mounting possibilities: pages 1/208 and 1/209
1/205
Characteristics

Busbar system characteristics
1 2 3 4
Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Against access to live parts
IEC 60439 UL, CSA, DNV, LROS IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529
Flame resistance
Conforming to IEC 60695 Conforming to standard UL 94
850 (incandescent wire) V0 4 a
Number of conductors Supply current Rated operational frequency Rated operational current
AK5JB14p
Hz Ambient temperature 35 C A
50 or 60 160
Coefficient K to be applied according to the ambient temperature
35
40
45
50
55
60
0.96
0.92
0.88
0.83
0.78
Rated insulation voltage
Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to UL and CSA
V V
690 600 Off-load plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched on 400 480 Plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched off 690 600 25
5 6
Operational voltage Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to UL, CSA V V
Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Maximum permissible peak current
V V kA
7 8 9 10
Maximum let-through energy Upstream short-circuit (1) and overload protection Type of protection
A 2s
1 x 10 7 Schneider Electric circuit-breaker NS 160 H NS 160 H 160 70 Fuses aM 160 100 gF 160 100
Rating Prospective short-circuit current Operational current Cabling Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable Tightening torque Mounting position Horizontal or vertical (2)
A kA
160 36
160 Maximum c.s.a.
160
160 Minimum c.s.a. 2.5 2.5
160
mm2 mm2 Nm
70 70 10
Fixing with screws provided (1) For conditions where conditional short-circuit current exceeds 25 kA. (2) Using side stop AK5BT01 on mounting plates AK5PA.

Prsentation : pages 1/205
Mounting possibilities: pages 1/208 and 1/209
1/206

Tap-off characteristics
Type AK5 PC12 Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Polarity IEC 60439 UL, LROS, CSA, DNV Against access to live parts: IP XXB conforming to IEC 529 Phase + Neutral Conductor c.s.a. (UL cables) mm2 2 x 2.5 Phase + Phase 2 x 2.5 3 x 2.5 3-phase 3-phase + Neutral 4 x 2.5 3-phase + Common 3 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 Phase + Neutral 2x4 Phase + Phase 2x4 3x4 3-phase 3-phase + Neutral 4x4 3-phase + Common 3x4 1 x 1.5 AK5 PC12PH AK5 PC13 AK5 PC14 AK5 PC131 AK5 PC32L AK5 AK5 PC33L AK5 PC34 PC34L AK5 PC331 PC32LPH PC33
1 2 3 4 5
Conductor colours
Black Blue (Neutral)
Black
Black
Black White
Black
Black
Black White (Common)
Permissible current
16
16
16
16
16 10 (Common)
32
32
32
32
32 10 (Common)
Rated insulation voltage Rated peak current Maximum let-through energy Type of conductor insulation
V kA A 2s
690 conforming to IEC 60439-1 6 100 000 PVC 105 C 200000
Tap-off characteristics
Type AK5 PA211N1 PA211N2 PA211N3 PA212N1 PA212N2 PA212N3 IEC 60439 UL, LROS, CSA, DNV Against access to live parts: IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529 Phase + Neutral mm2 2x4 Phase + Phase 2x4 3-phase 3-phase + Neutral 4x4 3-phase + Common 3x4 1 x 1.5 25 10 (Common) 3-phase 3-phase + Neutral 2 x (4 x 4) 3-phase + Common 2 x (3 x 4) 1 x 1.5 50 10 (Common) AK5 PA211PH12 PA211PH13 PA211PH23 PA212PH12 PA212PH13 PA212PH23 AK5 PA231 PA232 PA232S AK5 PA241 PA242 AK5 PA2311 PA2312 PA2312S AK5 PA532 AK5 PA542 AK5 PA5312
6 7 8 9 10
Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Polarity
Conductor c.s.a. (UL cables) Permissible current Rated insulation voltage Rated peak current Maximum let-through energy Type of conductor insulation
3x4
2 x (3 x 4)
A V kA A 2s
25
25
25
25
50
50
690 conforming to IEC 60439-1 6 200 000 PVC 105 C
Type
Characteristics of mounting rails AM1DL201 and AM1DL2017 Omega 7 (width 75 mm, depth 15 mm)
2 mm sheet steel Galvanized
Material Surface treatment
1/207
Mounting (equipment possibilities)

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system
1 2
Note: if the equipment is wider than the mounting plate, an extension plate can be used to increase the width of the support plate. AK5 PA211N1 PA211N2 PA211N3 54 105 3 25 A Ph + N Minimum centres with 60 mm ducting AK5 AK5 PA231 PA241 PA2311 (1) 54 105 3 25 A 3-pole 54 105 3 25 A AK5 PA212N1 PA212N2 PA212N3 54 190 3 25 A AK5 PA212PH12 PA213PH13 PA212PH23 54 190 3 25 A AK5 AK5 PA232 PA242 PA2312 (1) 54 190 3 25 A 3-pole 54 190 4 25 A 3-pole +N AK5 PA232S PA2312S (1) 108 190 6 25 A 3-pole AK5 AK5 PA532 PA542 PA5312 (1) 108 190 6 50 A 3-pole 108 190 6 50 A 3-pole +N
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(1) 3-pole + common Width in mm Mounting plate incorporating Height in mm tap-off No. of 18 mm pitches Thermal current Application Motor starter type
Ph + Ph 3-pole Ph + N +N Number of points used on the busbar system
Fuses, contactors and thermal overload relay

LS1D25 170 LS1D25 + LA8D254 170 LS1 D25 + LC1 -D09 to D25 and overload relay up to LR2 D1322 320 LS1D25 + LC1D09 to D25 (with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + 320 overload relay up to LR2 D1322 LS1D25 + LC2D09 to D18 (with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + overload relay up to LR2D1322 LS1D25 + LC2D25 with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + overload relay up to LR2D1322 4 4 5 4 4
Fuses, reversing contactors + thermal overload relay

320 320 6 7
Optimal breaker switch

GK2CF03 to CF22 GK2CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks GK2AX GK3EF40 GK3 EF40 + 4 blocks GK2 AX GK2CF03 to CF21 + LC1D09 to D18 + overload relay up to LR2 D1322 GK2CF03 to CF22 + LC1D09 to D25 + overload relay up to LR2 D1322 GK2CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks GK2-AX + LC1 D09 to D18 with 1 block LA8 D + overload relay up to LR2 D1322 GK2CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks GK2 AX + LC1 D09 to D18 with 1 block LA8 D + overload relay up to LR2 D1322 GK2CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks GK2 AX + LC2D25 with 1 block LA8 D + overload relay up to LR2 D1322 170 170 270 270 3 5 6 6
Optimal breaker switch + contactor + thermal overload relay

320 320 320 3 4 5
Optimal breaker switch + reversing contactor + thermal overload relay

320 6
320
1/208
Mounting (equipment possibilities)

(continued)

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system
1 2
AK5 PA211N1 PA211N2 PA211N3 54 105 3 25 A Ph + N AK5 AK5 AK5 PA241 PA212N1 PA212PH12 PA212N2 PA213PH13 PA212N3 PA212PH23 54 54 54 105 190 190 3 3 3 25 A 25 A 25 A 3-pole Ph + N Ph + Ph +N Number of points used on the busbar system AK5 PA231 PA2311 (1) 54 105 3 25 A 3-pole AK5PA 232 PA2312 (1) 54 190 3 25 A 3-pole AK5 AK5 PA242 PA232S PA2312S (1) 54 108 190 190 4 6 25 A 25 A 3-pole 3-pole +N AK PA532 PA5312 (1) 108 190 6 50 A 3-pole AK5 PA542 108 190 6 50 A 3-pole +N
Note 1: if the equipment is wider than the mounting plate, an extension plate can be used to increase the width of the support plate. Note 2: for upstream protection, see page 13230/4 (1) 3-pole + common Mounting Width in mm plate Height in mm incorporating No. of 18 mm pitches tap-off Thermal current Application Motor starter type Minimum centres with 60 mm ducting 170 270
3 4
Motor circuit-breaker (type 1 coordination)

GV2p06 to p22 GV3M01 to M40 3 6
Motor circuit-breaker + contactor

GV2p06 to p16 + LC1 D09 or D12 with 1 add-on block LA8 D 270 GV2p06 to p20 + LC1D09 270 to D18 GV2p06 to p22 + LC1 D09 or D12 with 1 add-on block LA8 D 270 GV3M01 to M40 with GV1App + LC1D09 to D32 270 270 4 3
5 6 7 8 9 10
7 8
GV3M01 to M40 + LC1D09 to D32 with 1 add-on block LA8D
Motor circuit-breaker + reversing contactor

270 270 6 7
GV2p06 to p20 + LC2-D09 to D18 with or without add-on block LA8 D GV2p22 with 1 add-on block LA8-D LD1LB030 + LB1LB03Ppp (integral 18) LD1 LB030 with 2 add-on blocks LA1 -LB + LB1 LB30P (integral 18) LD1 LB030 with 4 add-on blocks LA1 LB + LB1 LB03P (integral 18) LD1 LC030 + LB1 LC03M (integral 32) LD1 LC030 + LB1 LC03M (integral 32) with 1 add-on block LA1 LC and 1 reset device LA1 LC052p LD1 LC030 with 2 add-on blocks LA1 LB + LB1 LC03M (integral 32) LD5LB130 + LB1LB03Ppp LD5 LB130 with 3 add-on blocks LA1 LB + LB1 LB03P 2369p 2370p 2371p and 2372p
Integral contactor breaker + protection module

270 270 270 270 270 3 4 6 6 7
270
Reversing contactor breaker integral 18 + protection module

270 270 170 170 170 2 3 4 2 2 3 4 6 8 3 3 4
Schneider Electric C 60 circuit-breaker for circuit protection
1/209
References

Busbar systems
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
AK5PC14 AK5PC12 AK5JB1pp
The busbar system can be screw-mounted onto any type of support. However. if it is to be used in conjunction with component mounting plates incorporating a tap-off, it is essential that it is mounted on the AM1DL201 rail. When mounting tap-offs, the rated operational current of the busbar system should be taken into account: 160 A at 35 C. Number of Number of Length Suitable for Reference Weight conductors tap-offs at mounting in 18 mm intervals enclosure width mm mm kg 4 (1) 0.700 12 344 600 AK5JB143 18 24 30 48 54 452 560 668 992 1100 800 800 800 1200 1200 AK5JB144 AK5JB145 AK5JB146 AK5JB149 AK5JB1410 0.900 1.100 1.300 1.900 2.100
Omega rail, width 75 mm

This rail is designed to accommodate the busbar system when it is used with AK5 PA mounting plates incorporating tapoffs. It supportsthe busbar system. The plates simply clip onto the rail. Material and surface treatment 2 mm sheet steel Depth mm 15 Length mm 2000 (4) Sold in lots of 6 Unit reference AM1 DL201 Weight kg 3.000
Removable power sockets

Use Number of points used on the busbar system Thermal current A Single-phase + Neutral 2-phase 1 16 32 1 16 32 3-phase 2 16 32 Cable lengths mm 200 1000 200 1000 200 250 1000 3-phase + Neutral 2 16 32 200 250 1000 3-phase + common 2 16 10 (common) 32 10 (common) 200 6 (2) 6 (2) 6 (3) 6 (3) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 AK5PC12 AK5PC32L AK5PC12PH AK5PC32LPH AK5PC13 AK5PC33 AK5PC33L AK5PC14 AK5PC34 AK5PC34L AK5PC131 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight kg 0.035 0.040 0.035 0.040 0.040 0.045 0.060 0.045 0.050 0.065 0.045
8 9 10
AK5GF1
250
AK5PC331
0.050
Accessories
Description
Maximum no. C.s.a. mm2 Sold in Unit of connections lots of reference 20 AK5GF1 Cable guide 4 2.5 or 4 (1) 4-pole: 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common. (2) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (N + L1), 2 sockets (N + L2). 2 sockets (N + L3). (3) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (L1 + L2), 2 sockets (L1 + L3). 2 sockets (L2 + L3). (4) Cut and drill to suit use.
Weight kg 0.300
Mounting possibilities : pages 1/208 and 1/209
1/210

Single plate (height 105 mm)

Use Single-phase + neutral
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off

No. of 18mm Phase points used on the busbar system 3 Ph1+N Ph2+N Ph3+N Ph1+Ph2 Ph1+Ph3 Ph2+Ph3 Thermal currentA 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Number of 6 rails for component support 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reference AK5PA211N1 AK5PA211N2 AK5PA211N3 AK5PA211PH12 AK5PA211PH13 AK5PA211PH23 AK5PA231 AK5PA2311 AK5PA241 Weight kg 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.140 0.145 0.145
1 2 3
2-phase
AK5PA231
3-phase 3 3-phase + common 3 3-phase + neutral 3
Double plate (height 190 mm)

Prefabricated 25 A connectors are supplied for connecting the 2 protection and control devices. Single-phase + neutral 2-phase 3 Ph1+N Ph2+N Ph3+N Ph1+Ph2 Ph1+Ph3 Ph2+Ph3 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 50 25 25 (10 common) 25 (10 common) 50 (10 common) 50 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 AK5PA212N1 AK5PA212N2 AK5PA212N3 AK5PA212PH12 AK5PA212PH13 AK5PA212PH23 AK5PA232 AK5PA232S AK5PA532 AK5PA242 AK5PA2312 AK5PA2312S AK5PA5312 AK5PA542 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.230 0.600 0.700 0.230 0.235 0.610 0.710 0.715
3-phase
3 6
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AK5PA232
3-phase + neutral 3 3-phase + common 3 6
3-phase + neutral
Extension plates
These plates bolt onto the equipment support plates, after having removed them from the rails, to be able to mount wider components. Use Number of tap-offs Reference Weight at 18 mm intervals kg For mounting Single 4 AK5PE17 0.100 plates incor0.150 Double 4 AK5PE27 porating tap-off
Side stop (AK5JB mounted vertically)

Use For extension plate AK5BT01 Sold in lots of 50 Unit reference AK5BT01 Weight kg 0.005
Control terminal blocks

Thermal current A 10-pole terminal blocks, for screwing onto plate AK5 PAppp 10 Description Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference AK5SB1 Weight kg 0.065
10-pole front connecting plug-in terminal blocks which can be clipped onto 1 6 4 rails Fixed part 10 10 AB1 DV10235U Moving part 10 10 AB1 DVM10235U
0.047 0.021
Accessories
AK5SB1 Description Strips of clip-in markers 10 identical numbers, signs or capital letters per strip Marking 09 + AZ Sold in lots of 25 25 25 25 Unit reference AB1Rp (1) AB1 R12 AB1 R13 AB1Gp (1) Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050
(1) Replace the p in the selected reference with the number or letter required. Example: AB1R1 or AB1GA.
Mounting possibilities : pages 1/208 and 1/209
1/211
Dimensions

Busbar systems
1 2
AK5JBppp
82
79
3
81 45
30
AK5 JB143 JB144 JB145 JB146 JB149 JB1410
a 344 452 560 668 992 1100
G 330 438 546 654 978 1086
No. of 18 mm points
4
Busbar feed units
AK5JBppp
G a
12 18 24 30 48 54
Installation of AK5JBppp busbar systems Connection Flexible cable with or without cable end 1 x 2.5 2 x 2.5 Flexible bar Flexible bar 9x4 + 1 x 2.5 9x4 + 1 x 35 2 x (9 x 4) 1 x 70 (1) 2 x 35 C.s.a. in mm2 min max
5 6 7
Removable power sockets 16 and 32 A
AK5PC12p. AK5PC32Lp
+ flexible cable with or without cable end
(1) Maximum c.s.a. or connection of conductor without cable end.
Mounting plates incorporating tap-offs, 25 A

AK5PA2p1. AK5PA2311. AK5PA211pppp
Single width extension plates

AK5PE17
45,5
8
38 17,5
9 10
AK5PCp3. AK5PC33L AK5PCp4. AK5PC34L AK5PCp31
53 (1)
53 (1)
45,5
105
38
35,5
15
46
54
10
15 7
71
Note: It is recommended that the power sockets or the removable plates are connected as close as possible to the busbar feed unit. (1) Can be fixed at 43 mm Presentation : page 1/205 Characteristics : pages 1/206 and 1/207 References : pages 1/210 and 1/211 Mounting possibilities : pages 1/208 and 1/209
1/212
10
105
Dimensions
(continued)


AK5PA232. AK5PA2312. AK5PA242
Double extension plate

AK5PE27
1
53 (1)
53 (1)
2
190
10 100 190
40
100
10
3
10
15
46
54
15 7
71
4 5 6 7 8 9

AK5PA232S. AK5PA2312S AK5PA532. AK5PA5312. AK5PA542
Side stop
AK5BT01

AK5SB1
15,5
4,2 22
0,8
20
7
(1) Can be fixed at 43 mm Presentation : page 1/205 Characteristics : pages 1/206 and 1/207 References : pages 1/210 and 1/211 Mounting possibilities : pages 1/208 and 1/209
10
1/213
Contents
2 - TeSys motor starters: enclosed version
1 2
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors

b Pre-assembled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/4 b Assembled by the user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/5 b Add-on modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/6 b VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/10
Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

b TeSys GV2 ME v Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/12 v Assembly of a safety enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/14 b TeSys GV3 PC.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/13
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
D.O.L. starters for motor control

b 0.55 to 30 kW v With manual control and with magnetic circuit-breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/18 b 2.2 to 45 kW v Without isolating device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/20 v With isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/24 b 0.25 to 7.5 kW v With 3-phase thermal overload relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/28 b 0.37 to 5.5 kW v With thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/30
Star-delta starters for motor control

b 5.5 to 132 kW v Without isolating device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/32 b 7.5 to 75 kW v With isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/36 b 90 to 375 kW v Without isolating device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/42
D.O.L. starters for control in category AC-1

b Without isolating device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/44 b With isolating device .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/48
2/0
integral 63 contactor breaker and reversing contactor breaker

b Enclosures and door interlock mechanisms for customer assembly . . . . page 2/52 b For control and protection of motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/56 b For control and protection of resistive circuits in category AC-1.. . . . . . . page 2/58 b Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/59
1 2
Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use in a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE
b Non-reversing starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/62 b Reversing starters .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/64
Enclosed D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/72 b TeSys LF3 P and LF4 P .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/84 b TeSys LF3 M and LF4 M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/89
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2/1
General selection guide
TeSys enclosed starters
Applications
D.O.L. starters
1 2 3 4
Type
Standard starters
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors in AC-3 400/415 V
437 kW
0.0645 kW
0.5530 kW
0.375.5 kW
0.2545 kW
Starters Manual Auto
Isolation Switch
5
Protection
Circuit-breaker Fuse carrier
Short-circuit
p p
p p
p p
6
Communication References
Overload
7 8 9 10
Non-reversing
VpF VCFN VpFX
GV2 ME GV3 CE
GV2 LC GV NGC
LE1 GVME
LE1 M LE1 D LE2 K LE2 D
Reversing
Pages
2/4 and 2/5
2/12 and 2/13
2/18
2/30
2/20, 2/21 and 2/28
2/2
Soft starters
Starters for safety applications
Starters for use on AS-Interface line
Standard star-delta starters
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2.245 kW
0.0611 kW
0.069 kW
0.069 kW
0.065.5 kW
5.5132 kW
7.575 kW
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
LE4 K LE4 D LE8 K LE8 D LE2 D

2/24 and 2/25
GV2 ME
LG1 K LG1 D
LG7 K LG7 D LJ7 K LG8 K LJ8 K
LF3P LF3M LF4P LF4M
LE3K LE3D LE3F
LE6D LE3D
2/14 and 2/15
2/63
2/62, 2/63, 2/68 and 2/69
2/84 and 2/85
2/32, 2/33 and 2/42
2/36 and 2/37
2/3
References
Enclosed starters
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors, pre-assembled
1 2 3 4
VCF3GE
580545
Enclosed switch disconnectors for high performance applications

b b b b b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 10 to 140 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC60204. Marking on operator O Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not included). IP 65 degree of protection enclosures, sealable and lockable. Cover lockable in position I (ON) up to 63 A rating.
3-pole main and Emergency Stop switch disconnectors (1)

VCF0GE Operator Handle lthe Front plate Dimensions mm Yellow 60 x 60 A 10 16 20 25 32 50 63 100 140 Power AC-23 at 400V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 Incorporated switch body V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 Possible attachments (2) Reference Weight
Red, standard, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8 shank)
2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1
VCF02GE VCF01GE VCF0GE VCF1GE VCF2GE VCF3GE VCF4GE VCF5GEN VCF6GEN
kg 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.930 0.930 2.190 2.190
580546
Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8 shanks)
Yellow 90 x 90
3-pole main switch disconnectors (1)

Black, standard, padlockable with up to3padlocks (4to8 shank) Black 60 x 60 10 16 20 25 32 50 63 100 140 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 VBF02GE VBF01GE VBF0GE VBF1GE VBF2GE VBF3GE VBF4GE VBF5GEN VBF6GEN 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.930 0.930 2.190 2.190
569394
5 6 7 8 9 10
Black, long, padlockable with up to 3padlocks (4to8 shank)
Black 90 x 90
Enclosed switch disconnectors for standard applications

b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 10 to 32 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1. b Degree of protection IP 55.
VCF5GEN
3-pole main and Emergency Stop switch disconnectors (1)

Operator Handle
580548
lthe Front plate Dimensions mm Yellow 60 x 60 A 10 16 20 25 32
Power AC-23 at 400V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15
Incorporated switch body VN12 VN20 V0 V1 V2
Possible attachments (2)
Reference
Weight
Red padlockable, either by 1 (8 shank) or by3padlocks (6 shank)
2 2 0 0 0
VCFN12GE VCFN20GE VCFN25GE VCFN32GE VCFN40GE
(2) (2)
kg 0.422 0.422 0.512 0.512 0.512
(1) For characteristics of switch disconnectors, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) For VCF and VBF enclosures, see page 2/6. For VCFN enclosures, see page 2/7.
VCFN12GE
Schemes: page 2/9
2/4
References
Enclosed starters
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors, assembled by the user
580549
Empty enclosures
For switch body
IP 65 enclosure with red padlockable handle operator and yellow front plate (for mounting a main or Emergency Stop switch disconnector)
lthe A 1032 1032 50 Possible attachments (1) Reference Weight kg 0.340 0.660 0.660
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VN12, VN20 V02V2 V02V2 VBFXGE2 V3
2 4 3
VCFXGE1 VCFXGE4 VCFXGE2
IP 65 enclosure with black padlockable handle and black front plate (for mounting a main switch disconnector)
VN12, VN20 V02V2 V02V2 V3 1032 1032 50 2 4 3 VBFXGE1 VBFXGE4 VBFXGE2 0.340 0.660 0.660
Switch bodies for standard applications (2)

Description 3-pole switch disconnectors Rating A 10 16 Reference VN12 VN20 Weight kg 0.110 0.110
Switch bodies for high performance applications (2)

Description
580550
3-pole switch disconnectors
Rating A 10 16 20 25 32
Reference V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4
Weight kg 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
V0
50 63 (1) See pages 2/6 and 2/7. (2) For characteristics of switch disconnectors, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes: page 2/9
2/5
References
Enclosed starters
Add-on modules
580589
Add-on modules for enclosures VCF and VBF

Description Main pole module (mountedinenclosure) Rating A 10 16 20 25 32 50 63 10 to 32 50 and 63 100 and 140 10 to 32 50 and 63 100 and 140 Type of contacts N/O + N/C (1) N/O + N/O Reference VZ02 VZ01 VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 VZ11 VZ12 VZ13 VZ14 VZ15 VZ16 Reference VZ7 VZ20 Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.100 0.100 0.050 0.100 0.250 0.050 0.100 0.250 Weight kg 0.050 0.050
1 2
580595
VZ0
580594
VZ11 Neutral pole modules with early make and late break contacts Earthing modules
3
VZ15 VZ20
580596
Description Auxiliary contact block modules with 2 auxiliary contacts
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Schemes : page 2/9
Maximum number of add-on modules that can be fitted on a switch body

1 add-on module on each side of the switch body
VZ7 or VZ20 or VZ11 or VZ12 or VZ14 or VZ15 or VZ0p/VZ0 to VZ4 + V4 + to + + V0 + + V0p + VZ7 or VZ20 or VZ11 or VZ12 or VZ14 or VZ15 or + VZ0p/VZ0 to VZ4
2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body

VZ0p VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 + + + + + + VZ0p + VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 + + + + + V0p V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 + VZ0p + + + + + + VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 + + + + + VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 or or or or or or VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 or or or or or or VZ11 VZ11 VZ11 VZ11 VZ12 VZ12 or or or or or or VZ14 VZ14 VZ14 VZ14 VZ15 VZ15
Note: The add-on modules mounted next to the switch body are main pole modules. Maximum of 3 main pole modules per switch body. (1) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts
2/6
Enclosed starters
Add-on modules
580597
Add-on modules for enclosures VCFN12GE and 20GE

Description Main pole modules Rating A 10 16 Neutral pole module withearly make and late break contacts Earthing module Description Auxiliary contact block modules 10 and 16 10 and 16 Type of contacts 1 N/O latemakecontact 1 N/C earlybreakcontact Reference VZN12 VZN20 VZN11 VZN14 Reference VZN05 VZN06 Weight kg 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.016 Weight kg 0.020 0.020
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VZN11
580598
VZN14

VZN12 or VZN20 + + VZN12 or VZN20 or VN12 or VN20 VZN11 or VZN05 or VZN06 or VZN05 or VZN06 VZN14
580599
or VZN05
Schemes : page 2/9
2/7
Dimensions
Enclosed starters
Dimensions
1 2
VCFN12GE to VCFN40GE
106
131
90
82,5
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable glands: 2 x 16 P top and bottom.
VCF or VBF02GE to 4GE VCFX or VBFXGE1 to GE4
c c1
= a
VpF02GE to VpF2GE, VpFXGE1 (1) VpF3GE and VpF4GE (2) VpFXGE2 and VpFXGE4 (2) (1) Cable glands: 2 x 16 P top and bottom. (2) Cable glands: 2 x 16/21/29 P top and bottom .
a 90 150 150
b
b 146 170 170
c 85 106 106
c1 131 152 152
H 130 164 164
VCF or VBF5GEN and 6GEN

4x4,2
= 268,5
128 190,5
218,5 241
10
References: pages 2/4 and 2/5 Schemes: page 2/9
2/8
291
Schemes
Enclosed starters
Schemes
Switch disconnectors
Enclosed or switch bodies
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Main pole module
Neutral pole module
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2/T1
4/T2
Auxiliary contact blocks

VZ7
13 21
6/T3
VZ20
13 23
VZN05
13
VZN06
21 22
14
14
22
24
14
2/9
References
Enclosed starters
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards
569396
1 2 3
VC3GUN
569398
b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 25 to 140 A, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1, IEC60204, UL 508 and CSA22.2 n 14. b Marking on operator O b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not included). b NEMA type 1 and type 12 enclosures, IP 65 degree of protection, sealable and lockable.
VC1GUN
569397
Enclosed switch disconnectors for high performance applications
3-pole main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors (1)

Operator Handle Front plate Dimensions Rating IEC (Ith) UL 600 V mm Red, standard, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8) Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8) Yellow 60 x 60 A 32 40 63 80 125 175 A 20 25 45 63 100 115 Standard power ratings of UL motors 240 V 480 V 600 V HP 5 5 10 15 25 30 HP 10 10 20 30 50 50 HP 10 15 30 40 50 60 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 2 2 2 2 1 1 VC1GUN VC2GUN VC3GUN VC4GUN VC5GUN VC6GUN kg 0.500 0.500 0.930 0.930 2.190 2.190 Incorporated switch body Possible attachments Reference Weight
Yellow 90 x 90
4 5
VC5GUN
Add-on modules for VC enclosure

Description Rating A Main pole module (mounted in enclosure) 25 32 50 63 10 to 32 50 and 63 100 and 140 10 to 32 50 and 63 100 and 140 Type of contacts N/O + N/C (2) N/O + N/O
Reference Weight kg VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 VZ11 VZ12 VZ13 VZ14 VZ15 VZ16 0.050 0.050 0.100 0.100 0.050 0.100 0.250 0.050 0.100 0.250
Neutral pole module with early make and late break contacts
569401
6 7
569400
Earthing modules
Description Auxiliary contact block modules with 2 auxiliary contacts
Reference Weight kg VZ7 VZ20 0.050 0.050
VZ11
VZ15

569402
8 9 10
VZ7 or VZ20 or VZ11 or VZ12 or VZ20 VZ14 or VZ15 or VZ1 to VZ4
+ V1 + to + V4 +
VZ7 or VZ20 or
VZ11 or VZ12 or
VZ14 or VZ15 or
VZ1 to VZ4
(1) For characteristics of switch disconnectors, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts.
2/10
Dimensions, schemes
Enclosed starters
VARIO enclosed switch disconnectors for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards
Dimensions
VC1GUN and VC2GUN

Fixing (rear view)
1
141
164
2 3 4 5 6
268,5
87 132,1
121
98
4x4,2
VC3GUN and VC4GUN

Fixing (rear view)
193
87 132,1
164
141
VC5GUN and VC6GUN

Fixing (rear view)
291
170 4x4,2
7
128 190,5 241 218,5 4x4,2
Schemes
8 9
Enclosed switch disconnectors or switch bodies
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Main pole module
Neutral pole module
2/T1
4/T2
Auxiliary contact block modules

VZ7
13 21
6/T3
VZ20
13 23
10
14
14
22
24
2/11
References
Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME and accessories, for customer assembly
1 2
500277_1
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 3/48, 3/56 and 3/63. Starters consisting of a GV2ME motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to standard IEC 60947-4-1.
GV2 Ithe in enclosure (A) ME ME ME 01 02 03 0.16 0.25 0.4 ME ME 04 05 0.63 1 ME 06 1.6 ME 07 2.5 ME 08 4 ME 10 6.3 ME 14 9 ME 16 13 ME 20 17 ME 21 21 ME 22 23
References
Enclosures for thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2ME

Type Degree of protection Possible no. of Reference side mounting auxiliary contact blocks on GV2ME LH side RH side 1 1 GV2MC01 1 1 GV2MC02 or GV2MCK04 (1) IP 55 for 1 temperature < + 5 C IP 41 (front face) IP 41 (reduced flush mounting) IP 55 (front face) IP 55 (reduced flush mounting) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GV2MC03 GV2MP01 GV2MP03 GV2MP02 GV2MP04 Weight kg 0.290 0.300 0.420 0.300 0.115 0.115 0.130 0.130
3
GV2MC
500280_1
4 5
Surface mounting, double insulated with protective conductor. Sealable cover
IP 41 IP55
Flush mounting, with protective conductor
GV2MP
500278_1
Front plate
Description Reference IP 55 GV2CP21
6 7
GV2-MP
For direct control, through a panel, of a chassis mounted GV2ME
Weight kg 0.800
Accessories common to all enclosures (to be ordered separately)

GV2CP21 Description Padlocking device (2) for GV2ME operator (padlocking is only possible in the O position)
500279_1
Sold in lots of 1 to 3 padlocks 1 4 to 8 mm
Unit reference GV2V01
Weight kg 0.075
GV2-CP
8 9 10
GV2K011
Mushroom head Emergency stop pushbutton 40 mm, red
Spring return (2) Latching (2) IP55
1 Key release, key 1 n 455 Turn to release 1 1
GV2K011 GV2K021 GV2K031 GV2K04 (3) GV2E01
0.052 0.160 0.115 0.120 0.012
Sealing kit
For enclosures and front plate
IP55 for temperature between +5C and +40C IP55 for temperature between -20C and +40C
10
GV2-K011
10
GV2E02
0.012
Neutral terminal Partition
100 50
AB1VV635UBL AB1AC6BL
0.015 0.003
2/12
References dimensions
Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3P (for customer assembly)
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3P For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 3/48 and 3/59. GV3P40: operational current in enclosure limited to 30 A. Starters consisting of a GV3P motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to standards IEC/EN 60947-4-1 and IEC/EN 60947-2. Metal enclosures fitted with a padlockable rotary handle (1), for thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV3P, up to 30 A
Composition (2) Type Degree of Reference protection of enclosure IP55 GV3PC01 IK09 Weight kg 2.000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
b Metal enclosure, b Black handleLU9AP11 Padlocking in ON/OFF position b Circuit-breaker/handle adapter b Metal enclosure, b Red handleLU9AP12 Padlocking in OFF position b Circuit-breaker/handle adapter
Surface mounting
Surface mounting
IP55 IK09
GV3PC02
2.000
(1) For special applications a GV3L magnetic motor circuit-breaker can be fitted in this type of enclosure. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Components for customer assembly. Circuit-breaker to be ordered separately.
Dimensions
7,7
312
150 203,5
181
52,5 52,5
97,5
97,5
2/13
References

Assembly of a safety enclosure
Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME and accessories
1 2 3
GV2MC
For motor circuit-breakers and accessories: see pages 3/48, 3/55 and 3/57. Starters consisting of a GV2ME motor circuit-breaker in an enclosure conform to standard IEC60947-4-1.
GV2 ME 01 ME 02 ME 03 ME 04 ME 05 ME 06 1.6 ME 07 2.5 ME 08 4 ME 10 6.3 ME 14 9 ME 16 13 ME 20 17 ME 21 21 ME 22 23
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME
Ithe in 0.16 0.25 0.4 enclosure (A)

500277_1
0.63 1
Enclosures for thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2ME

Type Degree of protection Reference Possible number of side-mounting auxiliary contact blocks on GV2ME RH side 1 GV2MC01 1 GV2MC02 or GV2MCK04 (1) 1 GV2MC03 Weight kg 0.290 0.300 0.420 0.300
4 5 6
GV2K011
LH side Surface IP 41 1 mounting, double IP 55 1 insulated with protective conductor. Sealable cover 1 IP 55 for temperature < + 5 C
Accessories common to all enclosures (to be ordered separately)

Description Padlocking devices (2) for GV2ME operator (padlocking is only possible in the O position)
500279_1
Sold in Unit lots of reference 1 to 3 padlocks 4 1 to 8mm GV2V01
Weight kg 0.075
Mushroom Spring return (2) head Emergency Latching (2) stop IP 55 pushbutton 40mm, red
1 Key release, key n 1 455 Turn to release 1 1
GV2K011 GV2K021 GV2K031 GV2K04 (3) GV2E01
0.052 0.160 0.115 0.120 0.012
Sealing kit
For enclosures and front plate
10 IP 55 for temperature between +5C and +40C IP 55 for 10 temperature between -20C and +40C
7 8 9 10
GV2E02
0.012
GV2-K011
Neutral terminal Partition
100 50
AB1VV635UBL AB1AC6BL
0.015 0.003
(1) Enclosure GV2MCK04 is fitted with a GV2K04 mushroom head Emergency stop pushbutton as standard. (2) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit. To be fitted with enclosure GV2Mp01. (3) Padlockable in Off position using 4 to 8 mm shank padlocks.
2/14

Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME and accessories

(conforming to standards IEC 60974-4-1, IEC 60204 and IEC 60292)
Type of product Enclosure Circuit-breaker Undervoltage trip or INRS trip (1) Page Opposite 3/46 3/55 Reference GV2MCpp GV2MEpp GV2Apppp or GV2AXppp Mushroom head Emergency stop pushbutton 40mm, red Opposite GV2K021 or GV2K031
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
or GV2K04 (1) Safety device for dangerous machines conforming to INRS and VDE 0113.
2/15
Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME
Dimensions
1 2 3 4
Surface mounting enclosure GV2 MC0p

(1)
= 147
84
93
(1) 4 knock-outs for 16 mm plastic cable gland or 16 mm conduit. Surface mounting enclosure GV2 MCK04
(1)
= 147
84 145,5
93
(1) 4 knock-outs for 16 mm plastic cable gland or 16 mm conduit.
6 7 8
Mounting
GV2 MP0p
Flush mounting enclosures GV2MP0p (panel cut-out)

GV2 MP01, MP02 GV2 MP03, MP04 Front plate GV2CP21
71
9,5
130
130
=
=
127
140
21
= 117 133
11,5
1...6 12 a
a 86
93,5 106,5
71 93
6,5
1...4 12
76 93
7,5
9 10
GV2 MP01, MP02 MP03, MP04
2/16
118
133
62
Schemes
Enclosed thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME
Schemes
GV2MEpp
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
1 2
2/T1
4/T2
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

GVAE1
11
or
6/T3
GVAE11
21
GVAE20
3 4
13
13
13 14
12
14
14
22
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts

GVAD0110 GVAD0101 GVAD1010 GVAD1001
53
95
95
51
97
24
53
23
97 98
98
96
96
52
54

GVAN11
(61) 31 43 (73)
54
Short-circuit signalling contacts

GVAM11
GVAN20
(63) 33 43 (73)
52
51
(62) 32
44 (74)
(64) 34
44 (74)
6 7 8 9
Voltage trips
GVAUppp GVASppp GVAXppp
D1 D2
D1
D2
C2
C1
E1
Wiring diagram for undervoltage trip used on potentially dangerous machines, conforming to INRS
10 AgG max
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
D1
D2
E2
05
08 06
E2
10
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
E1
2/17
Characteristics, references
D.O.L. starters with manual control, with magnetic circuit-breaker, 0.55 to 30 kW
Characteristics (1)
1 2
533740
Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Operational voltage Ue Material
IEC 60947-4, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947 GV2 LC: IP 547 GV NGC: IP 407 GV2 LC: 690 V GV NGC: 500 V Polycarbonate (2)
References
Control by black rotary handle, padlockable in Off position (up to 3 padlocks with 8 shank, to be ordered separately)
Rating In Breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2 220/ 400/ 440 V 230 V 415 V kA kA kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 500 V kA 100 100 100 100 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 15 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 13 In 13 In 13 In 13 In 13 In 13 In 13 In 12 In 12 In 12 In 12 In 12 In Reference Weight
3
GV2 LC02pp
A 1.6 2.5 4
GV2 LC0206 (3) GV2 LC0207 (3) GV2 LC0208 (3) GV2 LC0210 (3) GV2 LC0214 (3) GV2 LC0216 (3) GV2 LC0220 (3) GV NGC0225 GV NGC0232 GV NGC0240 GV NGC0250 GV NGC0263
kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 2.450 2.450 2.450 2.450 2.450
4 5 6 7 8
526148
6.3 10 14 18 25 32 40 50 GV NGC02pp 63
GV2 LC02pp
526149
Variants
Starters with control by red rotary handle on yellow background

Add the letter R to the references selected above. Example: GV2 LC0206 becomes GV2 LC0206R.
526148
Enclosure without circuit-breaker, with rotary handle mounted on cover

Description Black rotary handle Rating A 1.618 2563 1.618 2563 Reference GV2 LC02 GV NGC02 GV2 LC02R GV NGC02R Weight kg 0.300 0.550 0.300 0.550
9
GV2 LC02
Red rotary handle on yellow background
10
(1) Circuit-breaker characteristics: GV2 L: see pages 3/14 and 3/15. NG 125L: product marketed under the Schneider Electric brand, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) The following can be fitted by the customer: a GVAD or GVAM auxiliary contact block on the LH side and a GVAp trip on the RH side. Schemes : page 2/19
2/18
Dimensions, scheme
D.O.L. starters with manual control, with magnetic circuit-breaker, 0.55 to 30 kW
Dimensions
GV2 LC0206LC0220
=
GV NGC0225NGC0263
=
1 2
65
150
166
348
120 173
= 88
330
3 4
=
167 237
= 186,3
Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands

Enclosure type GV2 LC GV NGC At top ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 At bottom ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40
5 6 7 8 9 10
Scheme
3/L2 4/T2 1/L1 5/L3 6/T3
2/T1
2/19

2
D.O.L. starters for motor control (1)

2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device
Characteristics
1 2 3 4 5 6
526423
Conforming to standards Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material
IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947 IP 659: LE2 K IP 657: LEp D09D35 IP 557: LEp D405D955 Operation: - 5+ 40 C Same as that of the contactors Polycarbonate (2): LE2 K and LEp D09D35 Sheet steel: LEp D405D955
References
Non-reversing starters
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 230 V 400 V 690 V kW kW kW kW kW kW 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 5.5 11 11 11 15 15 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 11 18.5 22 22 22 30 15 22 25 30 30 33 18.5 30 37 37 37 37 22 37 45 45 55 45 25 45 45 45 55 45 Maximum Basic reference, current to be completed by adding I the the voltage code (3) up to A 9 12 18 25 35 40 50 65 80 95 LE1 D09pp LE1 D12pp LE1 D18pp LE1 D25pp LE1 D35pp LE1 D405pp LE1 D505pp LE1 D655pp LE1 D805pp LE1 D955pp Weight
LE1 D12pp
kg 0.920 0.920 1.015 1.015 4.320 4.820 4.850 4.850 5.140 5.440
Reversing starters
1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 25 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 2.2 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 37 45 45 3 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 30 37 45 45 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 22 30 37 55 55 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 30 33 37 45 45 6 9 9 12 18 25 35 40 50 65 80 95 LE2 K065pp LE2 K095pp LE2 D09pp (4) LE2 D09pp LE2 D12pp LE2 D18pp LE2 D25pp LE2 D35pp LE2 D405pp LE2 D505pp LE2 D655pp LE2 D805pp LE2 D955pp 1.080 1.080 2.100 2.100 2.100 2.410 2.570 4.100 5.270 5.470 5.470 6.700 7.000
526424
LE2 D12pp
7 8 9 10
Dimensions : page 2/22 Schemes : page 2/23
(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately, see pages 6/20 and 6/23. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 a 50/60 Hz LE2 K B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 LE1, LE2 D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (4) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
2/20
D.O.L. starters for motor control (1) 2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device
526425
Standard versions comprise: b For non-reversing starters: v 1 green Start button I, v 1 red Stop/Reset button O.
LE1 D12ppA04
Description
1 2 3
Suffix to be added to the starter reference (2) A04 A11
b For reversing starters: v LE2 K: - 1 Start button A, - 1 Start button E, - 1 red Stop/Reset button. v LE2 D09D35: - 1 2-position spring return selector switch I-II, - 1 red Stop/Reset button O, v LE2 D405D955: - 1 blue Reset button R.
526426
LE1 D12ppA05
Variants (pre-assembled)
Description No pushbuttons on cover Application LE1 D09D955 LE2 D09D955 LE2 D405D955
526427
1 green Start button I 1 green Start button II 1 red Stop/Reset button O 1 blue Reset button R LE1 D12ppA09 1 3-position stay put selector switch (I-O-II) (I: Automatic Start; O: Stop; II: Manual Start) 1 blue Reset button R 1 2-position stay put selector switch O-I (O: Stop; I: Manual Start) 1 blue Reset button R LE1 D12ppA13 1 3-position selector switch O-I spring return to centre position (I: Manual start; O: Stop, stay put) 1 blue Reset button R 1 neutral terminal Fitted as standard on LE1 and LE2D09 to D35, LE1 and LE2D405 to D955 starters ordered with 222 V (M7), 230 V (P7) or 240 V (U7) control supply Mounting of an LC1D09 or D12 contactor in an enclosure identical to LE1D18 (3) Description Start pushbutton latching device for stay put operation (Start-Stop) (1) See previous page. (2) Example: LE1 D09F7A04. (3) See dimensions page 2/22.
4 5 6
LE1 D09D955 LE2 K06 and K09 LE2 D09D35 LE1 D09D35
A05
A09
526428
LE1 D09D35
A13
LE1 D09D35
A35
526429
LE1 D405D955 LE2 K06 and K09 LE2 D405D955
A59
7 8
Weight kg 0.060
LE1 D12ppA35
Accessory (for customer assembly)
LE1D09 LE1D12 Application LE1 D405D955
Reference LA9 D09907
9
Possible combinations of 2 variants. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Other versions
10
Schemes : page 2/23
2/21
Dimensions
D.O.L. starters for motor control 2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device
Dimensions
1 2 3 4 5
LE1 D09 and D12
LE1 D09 and D12ppT LE1 D18D35 and LE2 D09D35

=
LE1 D405D655
166
150
201
c1
= = 88
c1
= = 101
183
312
c1
105 181
Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05 Variant A09 Variant A13 Variant A35
c1 128.5 135 128.5 135 135 135
Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05 Variant A09 Variant A13 Variant A35
c1 LE1 D 153.5 145 153.5 160 160 160
LE2 D 160 145 153.5
Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05
c1 161 150 161
LE2 K06 and K09

19 120
146
165
84 175
6 7
LE1 D805, LE1 D955 and LE2 D405D655

=
150
LE2 D805 and D955

=
307
165
287
c1
225 367
c1
165 257
8 9 10
Standard version Variant A04 Variant A05 Variant A11
c1 LE1 D 176 165 176
LE2 D 176 165 176
c1 194 190 194

Type of enclosure LE1 D09 and D12 LE1 D18D35 and LE2 D09D35 LE2 D405 LE1 D405D655, LE2 D505 and D655 LE1 or LE2 D805 and D955 LE2 K References : pages 2/20 and 2/21 Schemes : page 2/23 At top PG 1 x 13 and 1 x 21 1 x 13 and 1 x 29 1 x 13 and 1 x 36 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 ISO 2 x 20 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 1 x 20 and 1 x 25 1 x 20 and 1 x 32 1 x 20 and 1 x 40 4 x 20 At bottom PG 2 x 13 or 2 x 16 2 x 16 or 2 x 21 1 x 13 and 2 x 21 1 x 13 and 2 x 29 1 x 13 and 2 x 36 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 ISO 2 x 20 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 1 x 20 and 2 x 25 1 x 20 and 2 x 32 1 x 20 and 2 x 40 4 x 20
2/22
195
195
Schemes
D.O.L. starters for motor control 2.2 to 45 kW, without isolating device
Schemes
L1 L2
LE1 D09D955
L3
LE1 D09D955
A
Variant A04 or A05

A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
KM1
O
14
KM1
2221 13
KM1
O Remote control
A1
KM1
B
KM1
A2
LE2 K06, K09

L1 L2 L3
LE2 K06, K09

A
Variant A05
A
R
O
KM1
KM2
Remote control
KM1
KM2
KM2
KM1
A1
KM2
KM1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
LE2 D09D955
L1 L2 L3
LE2 D09D35
A
LE2 D405D955, LE2 D09D955 with variants A04 or A05

A R
I S1
KM1 KM2
II
O Remote control
22
21
ll
KM1
KM2
KM2
KM1
A2
KM1
KM2
KM1
A1
A2
KM2
A1
KM2
A1
KM1
A1
KM2
A1
KM1
A1
8
KM2
KM1
A2 A2
KM2
B
KM1
A2 A2
Connections 220 V, 230 V, 240 V
LE2 K, LE1 and LE2 D09 and D12 LE1 and LE2 D18D955 All products LE1 and LE2 D09D35 LE2 K, LE1 and LE2 D405 and D955
A L3 L3 L3
B Neutral Neutral terminal L1
9 10
380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V Other voltages
Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Direct connection
References : pages 2/20 and 2/21
2/23
D.O.L. starters for motor control (1) 2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device
Characteristics
1 2 3 4
511547
IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947 IP 659: LEp K IP 657: LEp D09D35 IP 557: LEp D406D806 Operation: - 5+ 40 C Same as that of the contactors Polycarbonate (2): LEp K and LEp D09D35 Sheet steel: LEp D406D806
References
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 230 V 400 V 690 V kW 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 kW 2.2 4 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 kW 2.2 4 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 37 45 kW 3 4 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 30 37 45 kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 22 30 37 55 kW 18.5 30 33 37 45 Maximum Fuses to be fitted current by the customer I the Size Type aM up to A 6 9 9 12 18 25 35 40 50 65 80 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 A 10 12 or 12 16 20 25 32 40 63 80 80 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) Weight
LE4 D12pp
5
526430
LE4 K065pp LE4 K095pp LE4 D09pp (4) LE4 D09pp LE4 D12pp LE4 D18pp LE4 D25pp LE4 D35pp LE4 D406pp LE4 D506pp LE4 D656pp LE4 D806pp (5)
kg 1.450 1.450 1.960 1.960 1.960 2.200 2.200 5.190 5.770 6.440 6.670 7.100
Reversing starters
1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 2.2 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 37 45 3 4 5.5 9 11 15 22 30 37 45 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 22 30 37 55 18.5 30 33 37 45 6 9 9 12 18 25 35 40 50 65 80 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 10 12 or 12 16 20 25 32 40 63 80 80 LE8 K065pp LE8 K095pp LE8 D09pp (4) LE8 D09pp LE8 D12pp LE8 D18pp LE8 D25pp LE8 D35pp LE2 D406pp LE2 D506pp LE2 D656pp LE2 D806pp 1.600 1.600 3.550 3.550 3.550 3.700 4.670 5.800 14.170 14.700 14.770 16.000
6 7 8 9 10
Dimensions: page 2/26 LE8 D12pp
(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately, see pages 6/20 and 6/23. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 a 50/60 Hz LEp K B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 LEp D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (4) Selection according to dimensions and the number of operating cycles, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (5) Supplied with 3 cable entries.
Schemes: page 2/27
2/24
D.O.L. starters for motor control (1) 2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device
526431
Description
Standard versions comprise: b For non-reversing starters: v LE4 K and LE4 D09D656 - 1 green Start button I, - 1 red Stop/Reset button O. v LE4 D806 - no pushbuttons on cover
LE4 D12ppA04
1 2 3
Control circuit None + 1 additional pole + 1 circuit-breaker GB2 CB08
b For reversing starters: v LE8 K : - 1 Start button A, - 1 Start button E, - 1 red Stop/Reset button. v LE8 D09D35 : - 1 2-position spring return selector switch I-II, - 1 red Stop/Reset button O, v LE2 D406 to D806: - no pushbuttons on cover.
Protection LE4 and LE8 K LE4 and LE8 D09D25 LE4 and LE2 D35D806 Power circuit 1 3-pole isolating device 1 3-pole isolating device 1 3-pole isolating device
4 5 6
526432
Description No pushbuttons on cover Application LE4 D09D656 LE8 D09D35 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (2) A04
LE4 D12ppA05
1 green Start button I 1 green Start button II 1 red Stop/Reset button O
LE2 D406D806
A11
1 blue Reset button R
LE4 D09D806 LE8 K06 and K09 LE8 D09D35 LE2 D406D806 LE4 K06 and K09 LE4 D09D806 LE8 K06 and K09 LE8 D09D35 LE2 D406D806
A05
1 neutral terminal Fitted as standard on LE4 D18D806, LE8 D18D35 and LE4 D406D806 starters ordered with 220 V (M7), 230 V (P7) or 240 V (U7) control supply
A59
7 8 9
Accessory (for customer assembly)

Description Start pushbutton latching device for stay put operation (Start-Stop) Application LE4 D406D656 Reference LA9 D09907 Weight kg 0.060
(1) See previous page (2) Example: LE4 D09F7A04.
Other versions
10
Dimensions: page 2/26 Schemes: page 2/27
2/25
Dimensions

D.O.L. starters for motor control 2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device
Dimensions
2 3 4 5
165
150
348
19 20 120 c1
84 175
(1)
186
Standard version Variant A05 (1) For LE8 only
c1 LE4 K 146
LE8 K 146 139
c1 LE4 D 175.5 167 175.5
LE8 D 182 167 175.5
LE4 D406D656
LE2 D406D806, LE4 D806

= a-75 = 31
c1
330
LE4 K06 and K09, LE8 K06 and K09

31
LE4 D09D35, LE8 D09D35
31
287
195
400 (1)
342,5
350
6 7
4xM8x25
=
c1
225 367
= 31
202 c1 a-50 a a+57,5
325
c1 LE2 D 218 218
c1 201 190 201
8 9 10
a LE2 D406, D506, D656 300 LE2 D806 400 LE4 D806 400 (1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs. At top PG 1 x 13 and 1 x 21 1 x 13 and 1 x 29 1 x 13 and 1 x 36 2 x 13 and 2 x 16
LE4 D 218 218 218

Type of enclosure LE4 and LE8 D09D35 LE2 D09D35 LE2 D406 and LE4 D406 LE1 D506D656, LE4 D506 and D656 LE2 D806 and LE4 D806 LE4 K and LE8 K ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 1 x 20 and 1 x 25 1 x 20 and 1 x 32 1 x 20 and 1 x 40 4 x 20 At bottom PG 1 x 13 and 2 x 21 1 x 13 and 2 x 29 1 x 13 and 2 x 36 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 1 x 20 and 2 x 25 1 x 20 and 2 x 32 1 x 20 and 2 x 40 4 x 20
Schemes : page 2/27
2/26
Schemes

D.O.L. starters for motor control 2.2 to 45 kW, with isolating device
Schemes
LE4 K06, K09 LE4 D09D806

L1 L2 L3
LE4 K06, K09

A
LE4 D09D35
LE4 D406D656
LE4 D806, LE4 D09D656 with variant A04 or A05

A
1 2
A Q1 Q1
I KM1
A F1 Q1
Q1
F1
Q1
O
O
18
KM1
I
Remote control
KM1
KM1
17
13 22 A2 14
KM1
A2
A1
KM1
A1
21
KM1 B
KM1
KM1
A2
LE8 K06, K09

L1 L2 L3
LE8 K06, K09

A Q1
Variant A05
A
A1
3 4
A1
A2
Q1
O
Remote control
KM1
KM2
KM1 KM2
KM2
KM2
A1
KM1
5
KM2
KM1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
LE8 D09LE2 D806

L1 L2 L3
A2
KM1
KM2
KM1
A1
LE8 D09D35
A Q1 Q1
LE2 D406D806
A
6 7
F1
Q1
Q1
I
2 KM1 KM2
II
14
S1 KM2
O Remote control ll
22 21
13
KM1
KM1 KM2
A1
KM2
KM2
8
A1
KM2
A1
KM1
A1
KM1 KM2
KM1
A2 A2
KM1
A2
A2
LE4 and LE8 K, LE4 and LE8 D09 and D12 LE4 D18D806, LE8 D18D35 and LE2 D406D806 All products LE4 and LE8 D09D35 LE4 and LE2 D406D806
A L3 L3 L3
9 10
References : pages 2/24 et 2/25
2/27

2
D.O.L. starters for motor control 0.25 to 7.5 kW with 3-phase thermal overload relay with 3 protected phases
Characteristics (1)
1 2 3 4 5
533789
IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947 IP 65 Operation: - 5 to + 40 C Same as for the TeSys K contactors Self-extinguishing ABS
References
511548
Non-reversing starters Starter LE1M, combined with short-circuit protection components, provides type 1 or type 2 coordination, depending on the type of devices used.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 240 V 380 V 415 V 230 V 400 V kW kW kW kW 0.12 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 2.2 3 4 0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 Setting range of thermal overload relay LR2K (2) A 0.540.8 0.81.2 1.21.8 1.82.6 2.63.7 3.75.5 5.58 811.5 1014 1216 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) LE1 M35pp05 LE1 M35pp06 LE1 M35pp07 LE1 M35pp08 LE1 M35pp10 LE1 M35pp12 LE1 M35pp14 LE1 M35pp16 LE1 M35pp21 LE1 M35pp22 Weight
kg 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600 0.600
LE1 M35pppp
3 3.7
6 7 8 9 10
Description
b v v v v v
The standard version comprises: 1 TeSys contactor LC1Kpp, 1 TeSys thermal overload relay LR2K, 1 green Start button I, 1 red Stop/Reset button O/R, 1 yellow operating indicator.
Variant
b Control may be pulsed or maintained. b An earth terminal and a neutral terminal are provided on the bottom of the enclosure. b For safey applications, see enclosed starters: GV2MC, LG1K, LG1D, LG7K, LG7D, LJ7K, LG8K and LJ8 K. Starter without thermal overload relay LR2 K Delete the last 2 digits of the starter references selected above. Example: LE1 M35pp
Description Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) LC1 KppA80 Weight kg 0.180
Replacement part
Contactor
(1) For characteristics of TeSys K contactor, see pages 5/10 and 5/13. For characteristics of TeSys thermal overload relay LR2K, see pages 6/10 to 6/11. (2) Thermal overload relay fitted as standard. (3) The contactor coil is pre-wired between 2 phases of the power circuit. The codes indicated below therefore correspond to the power circuit voltage. Volts 24 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 a 50/60 Hz Code B7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Example: 380/400 V 3-phase supply, 4 kW motor: LE1 M35Q716. Dimensions : page 2/29 Schemes : page 2/29
2/28
Dimensions, schemes

2
D.O.L. starters for motor control 0.25 to 7.5 kW with 3-phase thermal overload relay with 3 protected phases
Dimensions
LE1 M35 (1)
108
78
1 2
130 (5"1/8)
160
3 4
ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25

Enclosure type LE1 M At top PG 2 x 13 to 2 x 21 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 At bottom PG 2 x 13 to 2 x 21
(1) Can be mounted on machine panel or frame. Knock-outs for 4 x 13 P cable glands.
Schemes
LE1 M35
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
L1 L2 L3
Choice of type of control built into the product

Control by latching pushbuttons
A
5 6 7 8 9 10
Control by spring return pushbuttons

A
1 3 5 I
13
KM1
13
I I
13
A1
KM1
14
95
O/R
A2 96
2 4
14 A2
Reset/OR
O/R
A1
T1 T2 T3
Connection 220 V, 230 V, 240 V 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V Other voltages
A L3 L3 Terminal 1
A1
KM1
H1
KM1
A2
96
95
KM1
H1
14
B Neutral L1 Terminal 2
2/29

2
D.O.L. starters for motor control, 0.37 to 5.5 kW with thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor
Characteristics
1 2 3 4
IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102 and EN 60947 IP 55 Operation: - 5 to + 40 C Same as for the TeSys K contactors Polycarbonate (1) Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 230 V 400/ 440 V 500 V 690 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW 0.18 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.75 0.25 0.55 0.55 0.55 1.1 0.75 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 Setting range of thermal trips A 11.6 Fixed magnetic tripping current 13 Irth A 22.5 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Weight
References
526440
LE1 GVME06Kpp
kg 1.210
533798
1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914
33.5 51 78 138 170
LE1 GVME07Kpp LE1 GVME08Kpp LE1 GVME10Kpp LE1 GVME14Kpp LE1 GVME16Kpp
1.210 1.210 1.210 1.210 1.210
LE1 GVMEppKpp
2.2 3
5
526441
Variants
Description Neutral terminal Suffix to be added Weight to the starter reference (3) kg A59 Reference LE1 GVMEK Weight kg 0.740
6
LE1 GVMEK
Description Enclosure without starter, with sealing kit fitted (references of combination motor starters for customer assembly, see pages 1/6 and 1/7) Description Sold in lots of 1 1 Key release, key n 455 Turn to release 1 1 1 10
Accessories (to be ordered separately)
7 8 9 10
Padlocking device (4) for GV2 ME operator (padlocking is only possible in the O position) Mushroom Spring return (4) head Stop pushbutton Latching (4) 40 mm, IP 55 red Sealing kit
1 to 3 padlocks 4 to 8 mm
Unit reference GV2 V01 GV2 K011 GV2 K021 GV2 K031 GV2 K04 (5) GV2 E01
Weight kg 0.075 0.052 0.160 0.115 0.120 0.012
IP 55 for temperature between +5C and +40C IP 55 for 10 GV2 E02 0.012 temperature between -20C and +40C (1) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (2) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 a 50/60 Hz Item B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (3) Example: LE1 GVME06KF7A59. (4) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit. (5) Padlockable in position O using 4 to 8 mm shank padlocks.
2/30
Dimensions, schemes

2
D.O.L. starters for motor control, 0.37 to 5.5 kW with thermal magnetic circuit-breaker and contactor
Dimensions
LE1 GVMEK
1
183 201
2
= 101 =
86 94

Enclosure type LE1GV At top ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 At bottom ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25
3 4
A
Schemes
LE1 GVMEK
L1 L2 L3
Q1
Q1
5
KM1
External control
KM1
KM1
A2
A1
6 7 8 9 10
Connections 220 V, 230 V, 240 V 380 V, 400 V, 415 V, 440 V Other voltages
A L3 L3 Terminal 1
B Neutral L1 Terminal 2
2/31

2
Star-delta starters 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device (1)
Characteristics
1 2 3
526435
IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947 IP 659: LE3 K IP 657: LE3 D09D35 IP 557: LE3 D405D150 Operation: - 5 to + 40 C Same as that of the contactors Polycarbonate (2): LE3 K and LE3 D09D35 Sheet steel: LE3 D405D150
References
Maximum operating rate: LE3 K: 12 starts/hour and LE3-D: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds. LE3 D: an LAD S2 timer imposes a delay of 40 ms 15 ms on the delta contactor at the moment of changeover to ensure that the star contactor has sufficient breaking time.
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Mains voltage - delta connection 220 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V kW kW kW kW 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 or Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) LE3 K065pp LE3 K095pp LE3 D09pp (4) LE3 D12pp LE3 D18pp LE3 D35pp LE3 D405pp LE3 D505pp LE3 D805pp LE3 D115pp LE3 D150pp Weight
4 5
LE3 D12pp
kg 1.460 1.460 3.650 3.650 3.750 5.160 8.160 8.150 14.000 24.500 24.500
5.5 11 15 18.5
11 18.5 30 37 55 75 110 132
11 22 30 37 59 75 110 132
11 22 30 37 59 75 110 147
6 7 8 9 10
30 37 63 75
(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/20 and 6/23. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) Standard control circuit voltages. Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 a 50/60 Hz LE3 K B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 LE3 D B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (4) Selection according to dimensions and the number of operating cycles, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
2/32
Star-delta starters 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device
526436
The standard version comprises: b LE3 K and LE3 D09D35: v 1 green Start button I, v 1 red Stop/Reset button O. b LE3 D405D150: v no pushbuttons on cover.
Description
1 2
Application LE3 D09D35 LE3 D405D150 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (1) A04 A06
Description LE3 D12ppA04 No pushbuttons on cover 1 green Start button I 1 red Stop/Reset button O 1 blue Reset button R
526437
3 4 5
LE3 D09D805
A05
1 neutral terminal Fitted as standard on starters LE3 D115 and D150 Mechanical interlock Fitted as standard on starters LE3 K and LE3 D09D35 LE3 D12ppA05 (1) Example: LE3D09F7A04
LE3 K065 and K095 A59 LE3 D09D805
LE3 D405 to D150
A64
Other versions
6 7 8 9 10
Schemes : page 2/35
2/33
Dimensions
Dimensions
2 3 4 5 6 7
165
150
348
146
84 175
186
c1 175.5 167 175.5
LE3 D405 and D505
LE3 D805D150
= a - 75 =
c1
330
LE3 K065, K095

19 120
LE3 D09D35
287
195
b + 57,5
c1
225 367
=
=
c1 c1 + 15,5
b - 50
b (1)
a - 50 a a + 57,5
b - 75
b 400 600 600 LE3 Standard version Variant A05 Variant A06 c1 D805 202 218 218
c1 190 194 194
LE3 a D805 400 D1155 500 D1505 500 (1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs. At top PG 1 x 29 1 x 36 1 x 36 2 x 13 and 2 x 16
D115, D150 252 268
8 9 10

Type of enclosure LE3 D09D35 LE3 D405 LE3 D505 LE3 D805 LE3 K ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 1 x 32 1 x 40 1 x 40 4 x 20 At bottom PG 1 x 29, 2 x 13 and 2 x 21 1 x 36, 2 x 13 and 2 x 29 2 x 13 and 3 x 36 2 x 13 and 2 x 16 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 1 x 32, 2 x 20 and 2 x 25 1 x 40, 2 x 20 and 2 x 32 2 x 20 and 3 x 40 4 x 20
Schemes : page 2/35
2/34
Schemes
Schemes
L1 L2
LE3 K065 and K095

L3
A
W1 U1 V1
1
O I
KM2
KM3
KM1
KM2 KM1
W1
U1
V1
KM3
KM1
2
KM2
W2
U2
V2
T
A1 A1 A1 A1
W2
U2
V2
T
A2
KM1
A2 A2
KM3
A2
3
LE3 D405D805
A
LE3 D09D805
L1 L2 L3
LE3 D09D35
A
U1
V1
W1
O
KM2 KM3 KM1
KM2 KM1
W2
U2
V2
18
17
U1
V1
W1
KM2
KM3
A1 A1
W2
A1
A1
A1
U2
V2
KM1
A2
KM2
A2
KM3
A2
KM1
A2
KM2
A2
KM3
A2
A1
Note: in accordance with current installation regulations, short-circuit protection must be provided by fuses or a circuit-breaker.
LE3 D115 and D150

L1 L2 L3
U1
18
17
KM2
KM3
KM1
V1
W1
Remote control l
KM1 KM1 KM2 KM3
KM2
W2
U2
V2
W1
U1
V1
KM1
KM2
A1 A1
KA1
A1
W2
U2
V2
F2
B
KM1
A2
A1
KM2
A2
KA1
A2
KM3
A2
LD09 and D12 LE3D18 to D150 All products LE3D09D35 LE3K and LE3D405D150
A L3 L3 L3
Y
KM2
4
Remote control I
KM2
KM1
KM2 KM3
KM2 KM1
5 6 7 8 9 10
KM1
2/35
Star-delta starters (1) 7.5 to 75 kW with isolating device
Characteristics
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-102, EN 60947 IP 657: LE6 D09D18 IP 557: LE3 D326D806 Operation: - 5 to + 40 C Same as that of the contactors Polycarbonate (2): LE6 D Sheet steel: LE3 D
References
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds. An LA2 DS2 timer imposes a delay of 40 ms 15 ms on the delta contactor at the moment of changeover to ensure that the star contactor has sufficient breaking time.
Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors. Mains voltage - Delta connection 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 400 V kW kW kW kW 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 5.5 11 15 18.5 11 18.5 30 37 55 75 11 22 30 37 59 75 11 22 30 37 59 75 Fuses to be fitted Basic reference, by the customer to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) Size Type aM A 20 25 40 63 80 125 160 Weight
511549
10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 0
LE6 D09pp LE6 D12pp LE6 D18pp LE3 D326pp LE3 D406pp LE3 D506pp LE3 D806pp
kg 3.900 3.900 4.850 7.650 16.900 17.000 27.500
LE6 D12pp
30 37
(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/20 and 6/23. (2) Avoid placing this material in contact with harsh substances (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) Standard control circuit voltages. 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 Volts 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 Other voltages: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes: page 2/39
2/36

Star-delta starters 7.5 to 75 kW, with isolating device
526438
The standard version comprises: b LE6 D09D18: v 1 green Start button I, v 1 red Stop/Reset button O. b LE3 D326D806: v no pushbuttons on cover
Protection LE6 D09 and D12 LE6 D18LE3 D806 LE6 D12ppA04 Power circuit 1 3-pole isolating device 1 3-pole isolating device Control circuit + 1 additional pole + 1 circuit-breaker GB2 CB08
Description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Description No pushbuttons on cover Application LE6 D09D18 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (1) A04
526439
1 green Start button I 1 red Stop/Reset button O 1 blue Reset button R
LE3 D326D806
A06
LE6 D09LE3 D806
A05
1 neutral terminal
LE6 D09LE3 D806
A59
LE6 D12ppA05
Mechanical interlock Fitted as standard on starters LE6 D09D18 (1) Example: LE6 D09F7A04.
LE3 D326D806
A64
Schemes: page 2/39
2/37
Dimensions
Dimensions
1 2 3 4 5
LE6 D09D18
LE3 D326
=
348
330
367
c1
= 186
c1 175.5 167 175.5
31
190
195 287
= 31
LE3 D406D806
= a-75 = 31
b+57,5
b (1)
b-50
6
c1
4xM8x25
=
a-50 a a+57,5
(1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs.
b-75
7 8 9 10
LE3 D406, D506 D806
a 400 500
b 500 700
=
c1 218 269

Type of enclosure LE6 D09D18 LE3 D326 LE3 D406 LE3 D506 LE3 D806 At top PG 1 x 21 1 x 29 1 x 36 1 x 36 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 1 x 32 1 x 32 1 x 40 1 x 40 At bottom PG 2 x 13, 2 x 16 and 1 x 21 2 x 13, 2 x 21 and 1 x 29 2 x 13, 2 x 29 and 1 x 36 2 x 13 and 3 x 36 ISO 2 x 20 or 2 x 25 or 2 x 32 or 2 x 40 2 x 20, 2 x 25 and 1 x 32 2 x 20, 2 x 25 and 1 x 32 1 x 40, 2 x 20 and 2 x 32 2 x 20 and 3 x 40
Schemes : page 2/39
2/38
225
Schemes
Schemes
3/L2 1/L1
LE6 D09D18
5/L3
A Q1 Q1
1 2 3
A2 A1
KM3
Q1
2 4 6
4 V1
U1
W1
O
3 3 5 5 3 1 1 1 5
KM2
2 4
KM3
6 6 2 4 2 4
KM1
l
W2 V2
KM2
U2
KM1
U1 V1 W1
KM2
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end)
KM2 KM1
KM3
W2
U2
V2
A1
KM1
KM2
A2
A2
A1
4 5 6
KM2 KM1
LE3 D326D806
3/L2 5/L3
1/L1
A F1 Q1
Q1
U1
V1
W1
KM2
KM3
KM1
W2
U2
V2
13 22
KM2
S1 Remote control
14
KM1 KM2 KM3
U1
V1
W1
A2
A2
A2
21
KM1
KM2
KM3
7 8 9 10
W2
U2
V2
A1
A1
LE6 D09 and D12 LE6 D18LE3 D806 All products LE6 D09D18 LE3 D326D806
A L3 L3 L3
A1
2/39
References
Replacement parts for starters without isolating device
500118_1
Heads for Start and Stop/Reset pushbuttons

Description Flush, green I (1) For use on LE1 D09...D35 Unit reference ZB5 AA331 Weight kg 0.018
1 2 3
ZB5 AA331
Projecting, red O (1)
LE1 D09...D35
ZB5 AL432
0.019
500120_1
Adaptation kit for head ZB5AL432
LE1 D09 and D12
LAD 9091
0.002
LE1 D18...D35
LAD 91810
0.003
ZB5 AL432
Heads for Reset pushbuttons

Flush, blue R(2) LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AA0 0.022
500117_1
4
Adaptation kit for head ZB5AA0 + ZBA639 LE1 D09 and D12
+ZBA 639 (3)
0.001
LAD 9092
0.002
5 6
500119_1
LE1 or LE2 D18...D35 LAD 9091 LE3, LE6, LE4 or LE8 D09...D35
LAD 91810
0.003
LAD 9T4
0.004
Heads for selector switches

3-position stay put ZB5 ADp LE1 D09...D35 ZB5 AD3 0.024
2-position stay put
LE1 D09...D35
ZB5 AD2
0.024
7 8 9 10
500121_1
3-position spring return to centre
LE1 D09...D35
ZB5 AD5
0.024
Contact blocks
1 N/O spring return ZEN L1111 1 N/C spring return LE1 D09...D35 ZEN L1121 0.010 LE1 D09...D35 ZEN L1111 0.010
500122_1
Mounting for contact block
LE1 D09 and D12
LAD 90909
0.008
LEp D18...D35 (4)
LAD 91809
0.014
ZEN-L1111
LAD 91809 (1) Remember to order adaptation kit LAD 9091 or LAD 91810, depending on size. (2) Remember to order adaptation kit LAD 9092. (3) Sold in lots of 10. (4) LE1, LE2, LE3, LE4, LE6 or LE8.
2/40
Replacement parts for starters without isolating device
511551
Empty enclosures for D.O.L. starters without isolating device

Designed for use with LE1 D09 and D12 Head(s) mounted on cover Without Reference DE1 DS1A04 Weight kg 0.300
1 2 3
1 flush blue head R
DE1 DS1A05
0.300
DE1 DS1A04
511552
1 flush green head I 1 projecting red head O
DE1 DS1
0.300
4
1 flush blue head R 1 switch DE1 DS1A13 0.300
DE1 DS1A05
5
LE1 D18...D35 Without DE1 DS2A04 0.500
511553
6
1 flush blue head R DE1 DS2A05 0.500
7 8 9 10
DE1 DS1 1 flush green head I 1 projecting red head O DE1 DS2 0.500
511554
1 flush blue head R 1 switch
DE1 DS2A13
0.500
DE1 DS1A13
2/41
References
Star-delta starters (1) 90 to 375 kW, without isolating device
533866
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Standard power ratings of squirrel cage motors Mains voltage - delta connection 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V kW kW kW kW 90 160 160 185 100 110 200 220 280 315 200 220 280 355 220 250 315 375 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) (3) LE3 F185pp LE3 F225pp LE3 F265pp LE3 F330pp LE3 F400pp Weight
Star-delta starters
kg 31.400 33.000 50.800 80.000 82.000
533867
160 185
Specifications
Enclosure No pushbuttons on cover Connections LE3 Fppppp LE3 F185F400 Metal, degree of protection IP 559 LE3 F185F400 LE3 F185F400 Pre-wired power and control circuit connections
Description 1 green Start button I 1 red Stop/Reset button O For use on LE3 F185F400 Suffix to be added to the starter reference(4) A06
(1) Overload protection must be provided by a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35. (2) Standard control circuit voltages. 48 110 220/230 230 240 380/400 400 415 Volts 50/60 Hz E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 For other voltages, see pages 5/130 to 5/137. (3) LC1 F185 and F225: contactors fitted with LX9 F coils, LC1 F265F400: contactors fitted with LX1 F coils. (4) Example: LE3 F185M7A06.
Other versions
Schemes : page 2/43
2/42
Dimensions, schemes
Star-delta starters 90 to 375 kW, without isolating device
Dimensions
LE3 Fppp
= a-75 =
1
=
b+57,5
b (1)
b-50
4xM8x25
b-75
2 3 4 5
c c1
a-50 a a+57,5
LE3 a b (1) F185, F225 600 700 F265 700 900 F330, F400 800 1000 (1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs.
c 303 303 403
c1 319 319 419
Knock-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands Type of enclosure At top LE3 F185, F225 2 x 48 P LE3 F265400
At bottom 2 x 13 P and 4 x 48 P
Schemes
LE3 Fppp
L1 L2 L3
F1 KM3:5 F1
21 96
95
4 V1
U1
W1
O
Remote control
6
KM2
53 54 53
W2
U2
V2
l
14
13
KM2
KM3
KM1
22
KM1
U1 V1 W1
KM1
62
55
54 (14)
7
KA1
14 13
(13)
KM2
61 56
KM2
68
67
61
KM3
A1 62 A1 A1 A1
8
KM2 KA1
A2 A2
W2
U2
V2
A2
KM3:1
A2
F2
KM1
KM3
Note: in accordance with current installation regulations, each starter must be provided with short-circuit protection by fuses or a circuit-breaker.
9 10
2/43
References
Equipment for control in utilisation category AC-1(1) (2), without isolating device
References
1 2
LE1 D123
511550
Operational Minimum current c.s.a. of up to phase conductors A 16 17.5 24 32 mm2 2.5 1.5 2.5 6 10 10 16 16 25 35
Fuses to be fitted separately aM A 20 25 63 80 100 gG A 16 32 50 63 100
For use with relay LR2 D or kit LA9 D (to be ordered separately) LA9 D1275 (4) LR2 D1321 (3) LR2 D1322 (3) LA9 D0975 (4) LR2 D3359 (3) LR2 D3363 (3) LR2 D3365 (3)
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) LE1 D123pp LE1 D123pp LE1 D255pp LE1 D255pp LE1 D405ppA04 (5) LE1 D405pp LE1 D655ppA04 (5) LE1 D655pp LE1 D805pp LE1 D805ppA04 (5)
Weight
kg 0.920 0.920 1.015 1.015 4.820 4.820 4.850 4.850 5.140 5.140
3
526421
50 57 63 76 90
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
100 LE1 D405
Specifications
Enclosure LE1 D12 LE1 D25 LE1 D40...D80 Control (2 pushbuttons mounted on enclosure cover) No pushbuttons on cover Connections LE1 D12D80 LE1 DpppppA04 LE1 D12D80 Pre-wired control circuit connections Double insulated, degree of protection IP 659 Double insulated, degree of protection IP 557 Metal, degree of protection IP 559 1 green Start button I 1 red Stop/Reset button O
(1) 3-phase 220/230 V, 240 V, 380/400 V or 415 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100. (2) Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz 220/230 V (code M7) or 380/400 V (code Q7). (3) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only. (4) As protection is provided by type gG fuses only, the Stop function normally provided by the thermal overload relay (where aM type fuses are used) can be obtained by means of kit LA9 Dpp75. (5) Equipment supplied without pushbuttons; external Start-Stop station required.
Schemes : page 2/47
2/44
Equipment for control in utilisation category AC-1(1) (2), without isolating device
Description No pushbuttons on cover Application LE1 D12 and D25 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (3) A04
1 2 3 4
LE1 D12D80
A05
1 green Start button I and 1 red Stop button O with 1 N/C contact (for distribution circuits without thermal overload relay) 1 2-position selector switch O-I (O: Stop; I: Manual Start) 1 blue Reset button R Knock-outs for 4 x 16 mm plastic cable glands (instead of 4 x 13 mm plastic glands) 1 neutral terminal (for 3-phase + N circuits)
LE1 D12 and D25
A07
LE1 D12
A13
LE1 D12
A20
LE1 D12D80
A59
Accessories (for customer assembly)

Description Start pushbutton latching device for stay put operation (Start-Stop) Kits to provide Stop function without thermal overload relay fitted For use on LE1 D25D65 Reference LA9 D09907 Weight kg 0.060
LE1 D12 LE1 D25
LA9 D1275 LA9 D0975 LA9 D931 LA9 D941
0.040 0.020 0.040 0.025
5 6 7 8 9 10
Miniature control circuit fuse holder size 5 x 20, 4 A/250 V Fuse supplied
LE1 D12 LE1 D25
Pilot light with neon bulb, red lens and locking ring
110 V 220 V 380, 415 V
LE1 D12 and D25 LE1 D12 and D25 LE1 D12 and D25
LA9 D924 LA9 D925 LA9 D926
0.020 0.020 0.020
1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts, please consult your Regional Sales Office
LE1 D12 D80
LA1 DNpp
0.030
(1) 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100. (2) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only. Example: LE1 D123M7A04.
. Other versions Possible combinations of 2 variants. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes : page 2/47
2/45
Dimensions
Enclosed starters
D.O.L. starters and equipment, without isolating device
Dimensions
1 2 3 4
LE1 D123
LE1 D255
=
166
150
140
88
142
101
LE1 D405, D655

=
LE1 D805
= 307
120
= =
135
185
165
312
195
150
105 181
165 c1
165 257
5 6 7 8 9 10
161 (1)
(1) 150 for LE1 DpppppA04 (without pushbuttons).

Type of enclosure LE1 D123 LE1 D255 LE1 D405 and LE1 D655 LE1 D805 At top 2 x 13 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 29 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 36 P At bottom 2 x 13 P 2 x 16 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 29 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 36 P
Schemes : page 2/47
2/46
165
Schemes
Enclosed starters
D.O.L. starters and equipment, without isolating device
Schemes
D.O.L. starters and equipment for control in category AC-1

LE1 D123D805, LE1 DpppppA04
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LE1 D123
KM1/5
1
O
KM1
96
95
KM1
13
KM1
KM1/1
A2
A1
13
2 3 4
KM1
LE1 D255D805
KM1/5
LE1 DpppppA04, LE1 DpppppA05

KM1/5
95
Remote control
18
14
13 22
KM1
17
13
21 96
96
95
14
14
14
KM1
N KM1/1
KM1
A2
A1
KM1/1
A2
13
A1
14
5 6 7 8 9 10
2/47
References
Equipment for control in utilisation category AC-1 (1) (3), with isolating device
526419
References
Operational current up to A 16 Minimum c.s.a. of phase conductors mm2 2.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 16 25 35 Fuses to be fitted by the customer Size Type aM gG A A 10 x 38 16 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 20 25 50 80 100 20 40 63 100 For use with relay LR2 D or kit LA9 D (to be ordered separately) LA9 D0975 (4) LR2 D1321 (3) LA9 D0975 (4) LR2 D1322 (3) LR2 D3357 (3) LR2 D3363 (3) LR2 D3365 (3) Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) LE4 D126pp LE4 D126pp LE4 D256pp LE4 D256pp LE4 D406ppA04 (5) LE4 D406pp LE4 D656ppA04 (5) LE4 D656pp LE4 D806pp (5) LE4 D806pp (5) Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
kg 1.960 1.960 2.200 2.200 5.770 5.770 6.670 6.670 7.100 7.100
17.5 LE4 D126 20 22

526420
40 45 63 LE4 D406 76 90 100
Specifications
Enclosure LE4 D12 and D25 LE4 D40D80 Control (2 pushbuttons mounted on enclosure cover) LE4 D12D65 Double insulated, degree of protection IP 557 Metal, degree of protection IP 559 1 green Start button I 1 red Stop/Reset button O LE4 Dppppp A04 LE4 D80 LE4 D12 and D25 LE4 D40D80 Connections LE4 D12D80 1 3-pole isolator + 1 additional pole 1 3-pole isolator and 1 circuit breaker GB2 CB08 Pre-wired power and control circuit connections
No pushbuttons on cover Isolating device with external operator
(1) 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100. (2) Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz 220/230 V (code M7) or 380/400 V (code Q7). (3) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only. (4) As protection is provided by type gG fuses only, the Stop function normally provided by the thermal overload relay (where aM type fuses are used) can be obtained by means of kit LA9 D0975. (5) Equipment supplied without pushbuttons; external Start-Stop station required.
Schemes : page 2/51
2/48
Equipment for control in utilisation category AC-1 (1) (2), with isolating device
Description No pushbuttons on cover For use on LE4 D12 and D25 Suffix to be added to the starter reference(3) A04
1 2 3
LE4 D12D80
A05
1 green Start button I and 1 red Stop button O with 1 N/C contact (for distribution circuits without thermal overload relay) 1 neutral terminal (for 3-phase + N circuits)
LE4 D12 and D25
A07
LE4 D12D80
A59
Accessories (for customer assembly)

Description Start button latching device for stay put operation (Start-Stop) Kit to provide Stop function without thermal overload relay fitted Miniature control circuit fuse holder size 5 x 20, 4 A/250 V Fuse supplied Pilot light with neon bulb, red lens and locking ring 110 V 220 V 380, 415 V For use on LE4 D12D65 Reference LA9 D09907 Weight kg 0.060
LE4 D12 and D25
LA9 D0975
0.020
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LE4 D12 and D25
LA9 D941
0.025
LE4 D12 and D25 LE4 D12 and D25 LE4 D12 and D25
LA9 D924 LA9 D925 LA9 D926
0.020 0.020 0.020
1 front-mounting block of 2 auxiliary contacts, please consult your Regional Sales Office
LE4 D12D80
LA1 DNpp
0.030
(1) 3-phase 220/230 V or 380/400 V 50/60 Hz. 3-core or 3 Ph + N (unprotected neutral) insulated PVC cable, fixed to walls, ceilings, in cable racks or ducting, laid singly, ambient temperature y 35 C, conforming to NF C 15-100. (2) Order the required LR2 D thermal overload relay separately, for use on balanced circuits only. (3) Example: LE4 D126M7A04.
Other versions
Schemes : page 2/51
2/49
Dimensions
Enclosed starters
D.O.L. starters and equipment, with isolating device
Dimensions
1 2
LE4 D126, D256

=
LE4 D406, D656
280
260
= 122
c c1 (1)
G a
= 31
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
c1
31
LE4 D126 D256
c 132 144
c1 139 151
(1) c1 = c for LE4 DpppppA04 (without pushbuttons).
LE4 D806
= a-75 = 31
b+57,5
b (1)
b-50
4xM8x25
c c1
a-50 a a+57,5
(1) + 14 mm with blanking plugs.

Type of enclosure LE4 D126 LE4 D256 LE4 D406 LE4 D656 LE4 D806 At top 2 x 13 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 16 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 21 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 29 P 1 x 13 P and 1 x 36 P At bottom 2 x 13 P 2 x 16 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 21 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 29 P 1 x 13 P and 2 x 36 P
Schemes : page 2/51
2/50
b-75
Schemes
Enclosed starters
D.O.L. starters and equipment, with isolating device
Schemes
D.O.L. starters and equipment for control in category AC-1

LE4 D126D806, LE4 DpppppA04
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LE4 D126 and D256

Q1/2 0 Q1 9 Q1
1 2 3 4 5
KM1
14
13 14
KM1
18
KM1
17
KM1
LE4 D406 and D656

Q1/2
13
Q1/6
LE4 D806, LE4 DpppppA04 and DpppppA05

Q1/2 13 F1 Q1
95
Remote control
A2
14
F1
Q1
14
A1
13
14
96
95
14
Q1
13
95
18
14
l
17
KM1
13
A1
A2
13
22
96
21
96
N Q1/6
KM1
A2
N Q1/1
KM1
A1
6 7 8 9 10
2/51
References
integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers, for customer assembly
Empty metal enclosure
Type of enclosure Degree of protection IP 54 with drillings for door interlock mechanism (interlock not supplied), for customer assembly (1)
526411
1 2 3
DE1LT315
For use on integral
Reference DE1LT315
Weight kg 3.510
LD1LD or LD4LD
Door interlock mechanisms (IP 54)

Type For use on enclosure DE1LT315 (LD1) Non-adjustable
Colour of knob Red Black
Reference LA9LC320 LA9LC321 LA9LC520 LA9LC521
Weight
kg
0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
DE1LT315 (LD4)
Red Black
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(1) Enclosures supplied with drillings and fitted with removable blanking plugs, for addition of cable glands (to be ordered separately): for number and diameters, see page 2/53.
2/52
Dimensions, mounting of accessories
integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers, for customer assembly
Empty metal enclosure, degree of protection IP 54
1 2
367
69
190
192 287
225
Number of blanked-off cable entries for addition of cable glands

At top 1 1 bottom 2 2 Cable min. 10 24 max. 12 30 For cable gland N 13 36 Type 13M 36M
3 4 5
105 275
Non-adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9LC33p and LA9LC53p

For mounting on LD4 LDp30 and LD5 LDp30 LD4LDp30 (1) LD5LDp30
105
243
6 7 8 9 10
65
105
54
172 (LD4) 174 (LD5)
= 28 = = = 90
105
45 59 63 181 59
Door drillings
= = 54 (1) Thickness: 5 mm max.
= = 54
105
2/53
Characteristics
Enclosed starters
1 2 3 4 5 6
Type Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Electrical durability, AC-43 at 415 V Mechanical durability at Uc a Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature c With converter y 55 C
A V
integral 63 3 63 in AC-3 690 1.2 million operating cycles 5 million operating cycles 3600 operating cycles/hour 600 operating cycles/hour
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC: 60947-1, 60047-2, 60947-3, 60947-4-1, 60947-6-2 VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660 BS: 5424, 4752, 4941 NEN, NBN ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA, DEMKO, DNV, GL, NEMKO, NKK, VE, RINA, SCC, SETI, UL, USSR, LROS, PTB, SEMKO a c (1) Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration Shock resistance Permissible acceleration Degree of protection Flame resistance Maximum operating altitude Operating positions (without derating) Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane m 5100 Hz Impulse duration: 11 ms Conforming to IEC 144 and 529 Conforming to VDE 0106 Operation Storage Operation Storage C C C C TH - 20+ 60 - 40+ 80 - 25+ 50 - 25+ 70 Energised state: 3 gn De-energised state: 3 gn Energised state: 8 gn De-energised state: 8 gn IP 20B Protection against direct finger contact Conforming to IEC 60295-2-1, NF C 20-455 and the requirement of 22-12-81 (JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982) and conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-072 3000
Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device
From main axis (left-right tilt)
7 8 9 10
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Voltage limits at q y 55 C Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc
Heat dissipation Operating time (2) at 20 C and at Uc
a 50 Hz a 60 Hz c With converter Operating Drop-out a Inrush Sealed c (1) Inrush Sealed a 50 Hz a C 50/60 Hz O c (1) C O
V V V
VA VA W W W ms ms ms ms
24660 24600 24, 48, 110 0.851.1 Uc 0.250.7 Uc 375 (50 Hz), 450 (60 Hz) 25 (50 or 60 Hz) 300 for 50 ms 8 8 (50 Hz) 11 (60 Hz) 1235 720 2540 1525
(1) With converter. (2) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
Schemes : page 2/61
2/54
Enclosed starters
Type Rated thermal current (Ith) Frequency limits of the operational current Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Heat dissipation in the power circuits of the contactor breaker and its protection module Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 q y 40 C A Hz Conforming to IEC 60947-4 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Operational current Power per pole, hot state kV V A W integral 63 63 4060 8 690 25 4.4
1 2 3 4 5
LB1 LD03L Distribution circuits
32 5
40 5.8
50 7
63 9
I rms conforming to IEC 60947-4 A I peak conforming to IEC 60947-2 kA Operational voltage V Value of cos j Icu (O-t CO) Ics (O-t-CO-t-CO) Icu = Ics (O-t-CO-t-rCO)
12 or 15 x Ith (1) 105 220/ 240 380/ 415
440
480/ 525
600/ 690
Conforming to IEC 60947-6-2 ensuring continuity of service
0.25 kA rms 50 kA rms 50 kA rms 50 O t CO rCO ms A 2s
0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5 50 40 35 10 50 40 35 10 50 50 30 10 : breaking short-circuit current (open) : time : closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (closed-open) (manual) : closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (remote control)
Total breaking time Thermal stress limit Cabling
With Isc max. at 415 V, 50 Hz
Tightening torque
Flexible cable without cable end mm2 Flexible cable with cable end mm2 Solid cable mm2 N.m
4 300 x 103 Maximum c.s.a. 1 x 50 or 2 x 35 2 x 25 1 x 50 6
Minimum c.s.a. 1x6 1x6 1x6
Characteristics of thermal-magnetic or magnetic only protection modules

Module type Protection Standard motors, frequent starting, distribution circuits Conforming to standards Number of poles Number of protected poles Rated operational voltage Maximum continuous current Setting range (Irth min./Irth max.) Temperature compensation Protection against phase imbalance Tripping class Instantaneous trip current setting range Tripping tolerance LB1 LD03P Standard motors LB1 LD03M Standard motors LB6 LD03P Frequent starting
Thermal protection
V A A C
IEC 60947-4 type 2 (Iq = 50 kA) and NF C 63-650 63-650 3 3 3 3 690 690 1363 1363 10/13... 45/63 10/13... 45/63 - 20+ 60 With 20 Fixed at 15 20 %
6 7 8 9 10
63-650 3 3 690 1363
63-120 3 3 690 1363 10/13... 45/63
With 20 612 (2)
Without 612
Without 36
Magnetic protection conforming to IEC 60947-1/2/4/6-2
Irth max.
Characteristics of versions with control test function and padlocking facility

Conforming to standards Rated operational voltage Mechanical durability Padlocking V Operating cycles IEC 60947, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, VDE 0113 690 10 000 1, 2 or 3 padlocks (shank 8 mm max. and 5 mm min.). When flush mounting, interlocking of the enclosure or cabinet door is possible.
(1) Above this value, the breaker trips. (2) Usual setting range 910 Irth max.
Schemes : page 2/61
2/55
References
Enclosed starters
integral 63 contactor breakers for control and protection of motors
526404

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW Operational current Breaking capacity (Iq) for Ue y 415 V kA Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Weight
1 2
kg

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 15 30 33 33 37 55 63 50 LD4 LD030p 3.800
LD4 LD030p
526405
3 4
3-pole reversing contactor breakers without protection module (1)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-43 220 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW Operational current Breaking capacity (Iq) for Ue y 415 V kA Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Weight
kg

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 15 LD5 LD030p (1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately, see page opposite. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380/ 400 415 440 480 500 50 Hz 60 Hz B BC BD CC D E CE ED F K FD FC M LC M MC U MC Q N N UX Q S 30 33 33 37 55 63 50 LD5 LD030p 7.600
5 6 7 8 9 10
600 S
660 Y
c (3)
(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression devices (2 converters for reversing contactor breakers).
Schemes : page 2/61
2/56
References
Enclosed starters
integral 63 contactor breakers
Motor protection modules (for customer assembly)
533936
Thermal-magnetic protection, compensated and differential for normal starting motors

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 400 V 440 V 480/ 600/ 240 V 415 V 525 V 690 V kW kW kW kW kW Thermal setting range (Irth min. to Irth max.) A 10...13 13...18 18...25 23...32 28...40 35...50 45...63 10...13 13...18 18...25 23...32 28...40 35...50 45...63 Reference Magnetic setting range (6...12 Irth max) A 78...156 108...216 150...300 190...380 240...480 300...600 380...760 LB1 LD03P16 LB1 LD03P21 LB1 LD03P22 LB1 LD03P53 LB1 LD03P55 LB1 LD03P57 LB1 LD03P61 LB1 LD03M16 LB1 LD03M21 LB1 LD03M22 LB1 LD03M53 LB1 LD03M55 LB1 LD03M57 LB1 LD03M61 Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LB1 LD03Mpp
kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780
Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max

3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
533936
5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33
5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33
7.5 11 15 18.5 25 33 40 7.5 11 15 18.5 25 33 40
10 15 18.5 22 33 45 55 10 15 18.5 22 33 45 55
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max
Magnetic only protection, for frequent starting motors

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 400 V 440 V 480/ 600/ 240 V 415 V 525 V 690 V kW kW kW kW kW 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33 5.5 9 11 15 22 25 33 7.5 11 15 18.5 25 33 40 10 15 18.5 22 33 45 55 Thermal setting range (Irth min. to Irth max.) A Reference Magnetic setting range (6...12 Irth max) A 78...156 108...216 150...300 190...380 240...480 300...600 380...760 LB6 LD03M16 LB6 LD03M21 LB6 LD03M22 LB6 LD03M53 LB6 LD03M55 LB6 LD03M57 LB6 LD03M61 Weight
LB6 LD03Mpp
kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max
Schemes : page 2/61
2/57
References
Enclosed starters
integral 63 contactor breakers for control and protection of resistive circuits in category AC-1
3 and 4-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Rated thermal current Ith q y 40 C A
Maximum operational current AC-1 q y 40 C A
Maximum operational voltage V
Breaking capacity Iq for Ue y 415 V kA
Number of poles
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (2)
Weight
kg

Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop 63 63 690 50 3 LD4 LD030p 3.800
Protection modules (for customer assembly)

Thermal-magnetic (compensated)
Thermal setting range (Irth min. to Irth max.) A 10...13 13...18 LB1 LD03Lpp 18...25 23...32 28...40 35...50 45...63 Magnetic setting range (3...6 Irth max) A 39...78 54...108 75...150 95...190 120...240 150...300 190...380 Number of poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Number of protected poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Reference Weight kg 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780
533937
LB1 LD03L16 LB1 LD03L21 LB1 LD03L22 LB1 LD03L53 LB1 LD03L55 LB1 LD03L57 LB1 LD03L61
(1) For the unit to function, it must be fitted with a protection module, to be ordered separately. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 50 Hz 60 Hz c (3) 24 B BC BD 36 CC 42 D 48 E CE ED 110 F K FD 120 FC 220 M LC 230 M MC 240 U MC 380/ 400 Q 415 N 440 N UX 480 Q 500 S 600 S 660 Y
(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with a converter, including coil suppression device.
Schemes : page 2/61
2/58
References
Enclosed starters
integral 63 contactor breakers
Auxiliary contact blocks and accessories
526407
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP 20)

For use on Type and number of blocks per unit Composition Reference Weight
1 2
LD4 or LD5 Mounted on RH side integral + LA1 LC030
1 block of 6 instantaneous contacts comprising: 3 signalling contacts contactor state 1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit 1 signalling contact tripped 1 signalling contact control knob in any position other than Auto 1 block of 5 instantaneous contacts comprising: 3 signalling contacts contactor state 1 signalling contact tripped 1 signalling contact tripped on short-circuit
LA1 LC010 2 1 1 1 1 LA1 LC012 2 1 1 1
kg 0.280
0.220
3
Reference Weight
526408
Isolating blocks
For use on Type and number of blocks per unit Composition
4
1 LA1 LC030 kg 0.035
LD4 Mounted on LH side integral + LA1 LC010 + LA1 LC070p LD5 Mounted on LH side
1 control circuit isolating block (1 or 2 blocks per unit) 1 control circuit isolating block
LA1 LC031
0.100
5 6 7
Electrical tripping devices

For use on Type and number of blocks per unit Function Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (1) Weight
LD4 or LD5 fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 add-on block
526409
1 undervoltage trip
Time delay LA1 LC070p 0.2 s Instantaneous LA1 LC072p Instantaneous LA1 LC071p
kg 0.150 0.150 0.150
or 1 shunt trip
Remote electrical reset devices

For use on LD4 or LD5 fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 add-on block integral + LA1 LC012 + LA1 LC052p Type and number of blocks per unit 1 remote electrical reset block Control voltage 24 V 50/60 Hz 42 V 50 Hz 48 V 50/60 Hz 100/127 V 50/60 Hz 200/240V 50/60 Hz Reference LA1 LC052B LA1 LC052E LA1 LC052F LA1 LC052M Weight kg 0.320 0.320 0.320 0.320
8 9 10
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 48 110 120 220/230 240 380/ 400 50 Hz B E F M U Q 60 Hz B E F F M M Q
415 N
440 N N
Schemes : page 2/61
2/59
References, dimensions

integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers Enclosures
References
1 2 3
Dimensions
Metal enclosure DE1LT315
Empty metal enclosure

Type of enclosure For use on Reference DE1LT315 Weight
kg
Degree of protection IP54 (1) LD4LD130p with drillings for door interlock LD4LD030p mechanism (interlock not supplied). For customer assembly
3,510
Door interlock mechanism (IP54)

Type Non-adjustable For use on enclosure DE1LT315 Colour of knob Red Reference LA9LC520 Weight
kg
0,200
(1) Enclosure supplied with drillings and fitted with removable blanking plugs, for addition of cable glands (te be ordered separately): for number and diameters, see below.
4
367 225 =
5
69 190 = 195 287 =
Number of blanked-off cable entries

= At Top 1 1 Bottom 2 2 Cable min. 10 24 max. 12 30 For cable gland N 13 36 Type 13M 36M
6 7
Non-adjustable door interlock mechanism LA9LC52p

integral 63, for mounting on LD4 LD030 and LD5 LD030 LD4LD030 (2) LD5LD030
105
243
65
105
8 9 10
54
172 (LD4) 174 (LD5)
= 28 = = = 90
105
45 59 63 181 59
Door drillings
= = 54
(2) thickness 5 mm max. Schemes : page 2/61
2/60
= = 54
105
105 275
schemes

integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers Enclosures
Contactor breakers with protection module LBp

LD4 LD030 + LB1 LD03p
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Reversing contactor breakers with protection module LBp

LD5 LD030 + LB1 LD03M or LD03P
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
Q1
2 3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
LB6 LD03M
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
LB6 LD03M
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
6/T3
4 5 6 7 8
Add-on blocks
Mounted on LH side Mounted on LH side
LA1 LC030 (64) (63) 54 53 53 Isolator
For contactor breaker LD4 and reversing contactor breaker LD5 Mounted on RH side
Breaker LA1 LC010 13 23 31 LA1 LC012 13 23 31 LA1 LC020 13 23 31 LA1 LC025 13 23 31 LA1 LC001 41 42
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
14
24
54
96
98
98
1 or 2 LA1LC030
Trip signalling
32
98
95
95
95
Mounted on LH side
LA1 LC031 53 63 Isolator
06
08
16
Control knob position signalling
Tripping devices (1) for LD4, LD5 LA1LC071

C1
Remote electrical reset devices (1) for LD4, LD5 LA1LC052p

Aut o Tri p+ RES ET
B4 B2 B3
LA1LC070, LC072
D1
U< C2 D2
15
18
Auto
+0
54
64
05
B1
05
08
95
For reversing contactor breaker LD5
96
32
9 10
(1) For contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers already fitted with an LA1 LC010 or LA1 LC012 instantaneous auxiliary contact block.
References, dimensions : page 2/60
2/61
References
Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE (1)
Non-reversing starters (with pushbutton control of isolation)
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220/ 400/ 230 V 415 V kW kW 0.06 Circuit-breaker Setting range of thermal trips A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 Dust & damp protected starter Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) (3) LG7 K06pp02 LG7 K06pp03 LG7 K06pp04 LG7 K06pp05 LG7 K06pp06 LG7 K06pp07 LG7 K06pp08 LG7 K06pp10 LG7 K09pp14 LG7 D12pp16 LG7 D18pp20 LG7 D18pp21 Weight
1 2 3
526414
440 V kW 0.06 0.12 0.18 0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 3 4 5.5 9 9
kg 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.450 1.600 1.630 1.630
LG7 K06
0.06 0.12 0.25 0.37
0.09 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 9
526415
0.75 1.1 1.5 3 4 LG7 D12 with padlocking facility fitted as standard 4
6 7 8 9 10
Specifications Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation fitted as standard as from LG7 K09, b lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (3), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases. For other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer.
Variants (pre-assembled) See page 2/65.

(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
LG7 K
Volts a 12 50/60 Hz Code J7 24 B7 36 C7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 127 FC7 220/ 230 M7 230 P7 230/ 240 U7 380/ 400 Q7 400 V7 400/ 415 N7 440 R7 500 S7 660/ 690 Y7
LG7 D
Volts a 24 50/60 Hz Code B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 220/ 230 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380/ 400 Q7 400 V7 415 N7 440 R7
(3) LG7 K06: the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LG7 K09, D12, D18: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Other versions
Starters for voltages other than those indicated above. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes : page 2/67
2/62
Non-reversing starters (with rotary operator for control of isolation) Enclosure cannot be opened when energised in position I.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220/ 400/ 230 V 415 V kW kW 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.75 1.1 1.5 3 4 4 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 9 Circuit-breaker Setting range of thermal trips A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 Dust & damp protected starter Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) LG1 K065pp02 LG1 K065pp03 LG1 K065pp04 LG1 K065pp05 LG1 K065pp06 LG1 K065pp07 LG1 K065pp08 LG1 K065pp10 LG1 K095pp14 LG1 D122pp16 LG1 D182pp20 LG1 D182pp21 Weight
526416
1 2 3 4
440 V kW 0.06 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.55 1.1 1.5 3 4 5.5 9 9
LG1 K
kg 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 1.120 1.270 1.290 1.290
Specifications Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation, b lockable Emergency Stop (red/yellow switch disconnector), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases. For other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer.
6 7 8 9 10
See page 2/65.
(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
LG1 K
Volts a 12 50/60 Hz Code J7 24 B7 36 C7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 127 FC7 220/ 230 M7 230 P7 230/ 240 U7 380/ 400 Q7 400 V7 400/ 415 N7 440 R7 500 S7 660/ 690 Y7
LG1 D
Volts a 24 50/60 Hz Code B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 220/ 230 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380/ 400 Q7 400 V7 415 N7 440 R7
Other versions
Schemes : page 2/67
2/63
526417
Reversing starters (with pushbutton control of isolation)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220/ 400/ 230 V 415 V kW kW 0.06 LG8 K06 0.06 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.55 1.1 1.5 3 4 5.5 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LG8 K06pp03 LG8 K06pp04 LG8 K06pp05 LG8 K06pp06 LG8 K06pp07 LG8 K06pp08 LG8 K06pp10 LG8 K09pp14 LG8 K12pp16 1.640 1.640 1.640 1.640 1.640 1.640 1.640 1.640 1.640 Circuit-breaker Setting range of thermal trips A 0.160.25 Dust & damp protected starter Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) (3) LG8 K06pp02 Weight
1 2 3 4
440 V kW 0.06
kg 1.640
0.75 1.1 1.5 3
526418
LG8 K09 with padlocking facility fitted as standard
6 7 8 9 10
Specifications of reversing starters Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation fitted as standard as from LG8 K09, b Emergency stop (3), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b control by selector switch 1-2, position non maintained, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. For supply voltages between 380 and 415 V (codes Q7, V7 or N7) the control circuit is pre-wired between phases. For other supply voltages, the control circuit must be wired by the customer.
Variants (pre-assembled) See page 2/65.

(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts a 12 24 36 42 48 110 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 660/ 50/60 Hz 230 240 400 415 690 Code J7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FC7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 Y7 (3) LG8 K06: the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LG8 K09: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Other versions
Starters for higher power ratings. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes : page 2/67
2/64
Variants
Description With Emergency Stop No control pushbuttons With Emergency Stop 2 pushbuttons with arrows A and E (latching) 1 Stop button O Without Emergency Stop 2 pushbuttons with arrows A and E (non latching) Without Emergency Stop With Emergency Stop, mushroom head Application LG1, LG7, LG8 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (2) A04
1 2 3 4
LG8 K06
A10
LG8
A14
LG1
A37
Without Emergency Stop (when the Emergency Stop is on the machine) With padlocking facility (fitted as standard as from LG1 K09 or LG7 K09) 1 neutral terminal Fitted as standard on starters ordered for use on 240 V (U7) supply Short-circuit signalling block
LG7, LG8
A39
LG1 K06, LG7 K06 LG1, LG7, LG8
A29 A59
LG7
A12
Vacuum valve for compressor
LG7 D
A40
Without circuit-breaker
LG1, LG7, LG8
(3)
Possible combinations of variants for the selected starter type (4)

Starter type LG1 K LG7 K06 LG7 K09 LG7 D12 LG8 K06 A04 A10 A12 A14 A29 A37 (5) A39 A40 A59
6 7 8
LG8 K09
Combination possible
Combination not possible
(1) Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. (2) Example: LG7 D12M716A04. (3) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LG1 K065pp08 becomes LG1 K065pp. (4) Example: LG8 K095ppA04A39A59. (5) LG1 K06: the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LG1 K09, D12, D18: the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/415 V 50 Hz. For a 60 Hz supply, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
9 10
2/65
Dimensions
Safety control and protection solutions
Enclosed D.O.L. starters for motor control for use on a machine subject to the application of Machinery Directive 98/37/CE
Starters without isolator
1 2
LG1 K06, K09 LG1 D12, D18
LG7 K06, K09, D12, D18 LG8 K06, K09, K12

120 (1)
(2)
150
150 165
120
84 175
146 (2) 177 (1)
84 175
3 4
165
(1) Emergency Stop for starters < 3 kW (2) Emergency Stop for starters u 3 kW (3) Only for LG7

Type of enclosure LG1 K and LG1 D LG7 K and LG7 D LG8 K At top 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P At bottom 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P
6 7 8 9 10
References : pages 2/62 to 2/65 Schemes : page 2/67
2/66
165
(3)
Schemes

2
D.O.L. starters
L3 L2
LG1 K06, K09, D12, D18

L1
380/400 V, code Q7 or 400/415 V, code N7 220/230 V, code M7

Ph
LG1 K06, K09, D12, D18
1 2 3 4
Q1
2 T3
4 T2
6 T1
KM1/1
13
KM1
S1
14
5 5
1 1
3 3
S2
U1 2
V1 4
W1 6
KM1 KM1/5 N
LG7 K06
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LG7 K09, D12, D18
A1
A2
KM1
12
11
14
13
Q2
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3

D1 D2
LG7 K06, K09, D12, D18
Q1
Ph KM1/1
Q1
13
KM1
S1
14
F1
E1 E2
KM1
2 4 6
U1 2 V1 4 W1 6
W1
U1
V1
KM1 KM1/5 N
A1
A2
12
KM1
S2
11
14
13
6 7 8
21 12 11
KM1
Reversing starters
LG8 K06
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
LG8 K09, K12

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
D1
Q1
Q1
D2

Ph KM2/5
LG8 K06, K09, K12
E1
E2
S1
KM2
21
KM1
KM2
S2
54
14
14
KM1
S2
KM2
A1 53
A1 53
54
10
13
02
13
KM1
KM2
9 10
22
A2
KM2/1 N
Schemes : page 2/66
2/67
A2
KM1
KM2
22
References
Non-reversing starters with integral transformer
511544
1 2 3 4
LJ7 K
Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. Starters pre-wired for operation on a 3-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz supply
Dust and damp protected starter Reference (1) LJ7 K06Q702 LJ7 K06Q703 LJ7 K06Q704 LJ7 K06Q705 LJ7 K06Q706 LJ7 K06Q707 LJ7 K06Q708 LJ7 K06Q710 LJ7 K09Q714 Weight
(with pushbutton control of isolator function) Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker motors 50 Hz in category AC-3 Setting range of thermal trips 380/400 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610
kg 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270 2.270
6 7 8 9 10
Specifications Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation fitted as standard on LJ7 K09, b lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (2), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O, b terminal allowing connection of a volt-free contact, if required, in the control circuit, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. Integral transformer: 400/24 V, 25 VA.
Variants (3)
Description With Emergency Stop No control pushbuttons Without Emergency Stop LJ7 (when the Emergency Stop is on the machine) With padlocking facility LJ7 K06 (fitted as standard on LJ7 K09) Without circuit-breaker LJ7 For use on LJ7 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (4) A04 A39 A29 (5)
(1) In the reference, the voltage code Q7 (380/400 V) indicates the power supply voltage to which the starter will be connected, it being assumed that the contactor has a a 24 V coil (see control circuit scheme). (2) LJ7 K06 (P y 3 kW at 400 V): the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LJ7 K09 (P > 3 kW at 400 V): the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip GV AX385, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/400 V 50 Hz. (3) Possible combination of variants A04, A29 and A39 on starters LJ7 K06. Example: LJ7 K06Q702A04A29A39. Possible combination of variants A04 and A39 on starters LJ7 K09Q714A04A39. (4) Example: LJ7 K06Q702A04. (5) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LJ7 K06Q702 becomes LJ7 K06Q7.
Other versions
Schemes : page 2/71
2/68
511545
Compliance with a harmonised European standard assumes conformity with the corresponding directive, provided that installation, building in and/or assembly of the starter is carried out correctly by the machine manufacturer. Harmonised European standards: EN 60947 and EN 60439. Conformity to international standards: IEC 60947 and IEC 60439. Starters pre-wired for operation on a 3-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz supply
Dust and damp protected starter Reference (1) LJ8 K06Q702 LJ8 K06Q703 LJ8 K06Q704 LJ8 K06Q705 LJ8 K06Q706 LJ8 K06Q707 LJ8 K06Q708 LJ8 K06Q710 LJ8 K09Q714 Weight
Reversing starters with integral transformer
1 2 3 4
LJ8 K
(with pushbutton control of isolator function) Standard power ratings of 3-phase Circuit-breaker motors 50 Hz in category AC-3 Setting range of thermal trips 380/400 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 A 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610
kg 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650 2.650
Specifications Functions performed by the starter: b isolation, b locking of isolation fitted as standard on LJ8 K09, b lockable Emergency Stop (1/4 turn) (2), b short-circuit protection, b overload protection, b pushbutton control: 1 white Start button I and 1 black Stop button O, b terminal allowing connection of a volt-free contact, if required, in the control circuit, b degree of protection of enclosure: IP 657, double insulated. Switching back on of power supply after tripping must be by a deliberate action. A GV2 SNpp indicator light may be added (to be assembled by customer), please consult your Regional Sales Office. Integral transformer: 400/24 V, 25 VA.
6 7 8 9 10
Variants (3)
Description With Emergency Stop No control pushbuttons Without Emergency Stop (when the Emergency Stop is on the With padlocking facility (fitted as standard on LJ8 K09) Without circuit-breaker For use on LJ8 LJ8 LJ8 K06 LJ8 Suffix to be added to the starter reference (4) A04 A39 A29 (5)
(1) In the reference, the voltage code Q7 (380/400 V) indicates the power supply voltage to which the starter will be connected, it being assumed that the contactor has a a 24 V coil (see control circuit scheme). (2) LJ8 K06 (P y 3 kW at 400 V): the mushroom head type Emergency Stop acts mechanically on the circuit-breaker. LJ8 K09 (P > 3 kW at 400 V): the Emergency Stop function is performed by an undervoltage trip GV AX385, acting on the circuit-breaker. This circuit-breaker is always supplied pre-wired for use on 380/400 V 50 Hz. (3) Possible combination of variants A04, A29 and A39 on starters LJ8 K06. Example: LJ8 K06Q702A04A29A39. Possible combination of variants A04 and A39 on starters LJ8 K09. Example : LJ8 K09Q714A04A39. (4) Example: LJ8 K06Q702A04. (5) Delete the last 2 digits of the selected starter reference. Example: LJ8 K06Q702 becomes LJ8 K06Q7.
Other versions
Schemes : page 2/71
2/69
Dimensions
Enclosed starters
Dimensions
1 2
LJ7 K06, LJ8 K06

120
150
177
84 175
3 4
LJ7 K09, LJ8 K09

120
150
146
84 175
Cut-outs or blanking plugs for cable glands at the top and at the bottom 2 x 13 P and 2 x 16 P.
6 7 8 9 10
References : pages 2/68 and 2/69 Schemes : page 2/71
2/70
165
165
Schemes
Enclosed starters
Schemes
LJ7 K06
LJ7 K09
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3
1
KM1/1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
F1
KM1/1
F1
4A
1
4A
D1
D2
Q1
Q1
T1
X1
X1
13 1
13
13 1
T1
2
14 13
5 6
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
11 14
KM1
KM1
F1
E1
U1 2
V1 4
W1 6
U1 2
V1 4
W1 6
KM1/5
KM1/5
S2
E2
S2
11 14
400/24 V 25 VA
5 6
KM1 S1
400/24 V 25 VA
KM1 S1
14
KM1
M 3
3 4
A1 12
KM1
A2
Reversing starters
LJ8 K06
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
2
F1
21
12
Q1
KM2/5
S1
11
KM2
KM1
22
23
KM1
KM2
400/24 V S2 25 VA
54
24
53
14
KM1
S2
KM2
54
10
02
13
22
T1
21
A2
A1 12
KM2/1
6
KM2
A1
KM1
A2
A2
A1
53
LJ8 K09
2
7
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 D1 D2
F1
KM2/5
S1
Q1
12
11
21
KM2
KM1
E1
E2
22
23
KM1
KM2
400/24 V S2 25 VA
54
54
10
02 S2
13
22
T1
21
8 9
KM2
24
53
14
KM1
KM2
KM2/1
A1
KM1
A2
A2
A1
53
10
2/71
Selection guide
D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system
Applications
1 2 3
Composition
4
Degree of protection
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker Low consumption contactor or contactor pair Electronic control device
IP 54
5 6 7 8 9 10
Enclosure
Insulated (plastic)
Operator
Rotary knob
Sensor connection
With
With and local/line control
Contactors
Non-reversing Reversing
LF3Pppp LF4Pppp
2/84 and 2/85
LF3PpppA79 LF4PpppA79
Pages
2/72
1 2 3 4
Metal Insulated (plastic)
Pushbuttons
5
With
With
LF3MPppp LF4MPppp
LF3MPpppA79 LF4MPpppA79
LF3Mppp LF4Mppp
LF3MpppA79 LF4MpppA79
6 7 8 9 10
2/73
Presentation
Presentation
1 2 3 4 5
Decentralised control of motors using enclosed starters which communicate on ASInterface, drastically reduces setting-up times, thereby increasing the availability of machines. In order to cater for different environments, these starters are sub-divided according to: b the different power connection methods: cable gland or Harting plug-in connectors, b the local/AS-Interface remote operating modes, b the type of enclosure: insulated (plastic) or metal.
Decentralisation of machine starters

These enclosed starters which communicate on AS-Interface are pre-assembled and ready-to-use with a minimum of cabling. They are designed for building decentralised electrical installations: i.e. the starters are installed as near as possible to the motors they are to control. The decentralisation of the starters provides obvious advantages regarding power distribution to machines not grouped together, for example: motors driving a conveyor system. Traditional installation
Equipment floor-standing enclosure
Distribution circuit circuit-breaker Programmable controller with its inputs/outputs
6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: pages 2/80 to 2/83 References: pages 2/84 and 2/85
Contactor + thermal overload relay
Decentralised installation
Distribution enclosure
AS-Interface
Power
M
Distribution circuit circuit-breaker Programmable controller AS-Interface starters
Power is distributed either by prefabricated trunking or by cable. These starters incorporate all the functions necessary for the management of motors (control, protection, isolation, etc.), and comprise: - a thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker, - a low consumption contactor (non reversing) or contactor pair (reversing), - an I/O module ASI 20MTpp. Designed primarily for use with 3-phase a.c. motors, they can nevertheless be used with single-phase or d.c. motors. In these applications, the 3 phases of the internal circuit-breaker should be wired in series (each phase sensing the same current) in order to avoid tripping due to an assumed phase failure.
Connections: pages 2/94 and 2/95
2/74
Description
Connection by cable gland

1 2 3
DF526362
4
DF526363
1 2 3
1 2 3 13 4
5 6 7
11
10 9
11
10
Product diagnostics via 3 LEDs. Input state. Output state. Knock-out for cable gland (not included for any power extension or output control relay cabling). 12 5 Disconnect rotary control knob. Indicates Trip when switch-disconnector tripped. 6 6 Local/AS-Interface key switch (variant A79). 7 7 For variant A79: 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter (LF4). Function: - position 1 = forward running, - position 0 = Stop, - position 2 = reverse running. Pushbutton for non-reversing starter (LF3). Function: Pulsed operation. 8 Cable gland for power supply cable. 9 M12 female connector for cable connection to a sensor (supplied with protective cap). 10 M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (1) and auxiliary supply. 11 Cable gland for motor cabling. 12 Reset pushbutton. 13 Stop pushbutton.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Connection by plug-in connectors(variant A74)

1 2 3 8 4
DF526364
5
DF526367
1 2 3 8 4 13 14
12 11
9 10
12 11
9 10
Product diagnostics via 3 LEDs. Input state. Output state. Knock-out for cable gland (not included for output control relay cabling). Male connector for incoming power supply to motor starter (2). Disconnect rotary control knob. Indicates Trip when switch-disconnector tripped. 7 Female connector for power supply to the next motor starter (2). 8 Local/AS-Interface key switch. 9 For variant A79: 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter (LF4). Function: - position 1 = forward running, - position 0 = Stop, - position 2 = reverse running. Pushbutton: for non-reversing starters (LF3). Function: Pulsed operation. 10 Female connector for power supply to motor (2). 11 M12 female connector for cable connection to a sensor (supplied with protective cap). 12 M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface (1) and auxiliary supply. 13 Stop pushbutton. 14 Reset pushbutton.
(1) Extension cables: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) HARTING plug-in connector to be fitted to cable (not included, see page 2/95).
1 2 3 4 5 6
Characteristics: pages 2/80 to 2/83
2/75
Functions
Auxiliary supply
1 2
AS-Interface Control-command and contactor supply Auxiliary supply Contactor supply Contactor supply
Power supply
3 4
DF526368
A c 24 V supply is necessary for LF3 and LF4 starters. Prospective current consumptions are listed on page 2/83.
Motor command-control
The functions provided by this range of starters are: - motor control and status monitoring via AS-Interface, - D.O.L. starting (non-reversing or reversing), - overload protection of the motor, - short-circuit protection of the motor and its power supply cabling. Starters with rotary control knob These starters provide the following functions: - load break switch-disconnector with padlockable control knob, - IP 54 degree of protection, double insulation. Opening of the enclosure is mechanically inhibited whilst the starter is switched on or whilst in the off position and padlocked.
5 6
DF526365
The rotary control knob has 3 positions: 0: switch-disconnector opened manually, I: switch-disconnector closed, Trip: switch-disconnector tripped. Starters with pushbutton control These starters provide the following functions: - pushbutton resetting of the protection device, - pushbutton stop control, - IP 54 degree of protection, double insulation.
7 8 9 10
2/76
Local control
Stop and reset functions are possible from the front of the enclosure. The stop command is achieved by actuating the internal circuit-breaker, which provides the switch-disconnector function. Depending on the type of starter, stopping is controlled by either: - a rotary control knob, or - a stop pushbutton (black). In the event of an overload, resetting of the internal thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker is possible after the motor has cooled down. Depending on the type of starter, resetting is controlled by either: - a rotary control knob, or - a reset pushbutton (blue).
DF526369
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Integral local/AS-Interface control (variant A79) This starter variant is fitted with a 2-position local/AS-Interface switch which, depending on the position of the switch, allows the following functions: b AS-Interface: the PLC controls the motor starter. b Local: local Start/Stop commands override instructions from the PLC. b 3-position, spring return to zero selector switch for reversing starter (LF4). Function: - position 1 = forward running, - position 0 = Stop, - position 2 = reverse running. b Pushbutton for non-reversing starter (LF3) . Function: - Pulsed operation. Control via a control station
AS-Interface Message 2 Message 1
Power supply
It is possible to achieve manual local start control from pushbutton control stations connected to AS-Interface. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. Actuation of a pushbutton is transmitted to the programmable controller (message 1) which passes it on to the starter (message2).
8 9 10
2/77
Local signalling
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Indication of all the operating states (diagnostic, inputs and outputs) is visible without having to open the enclosure (transparent window in the enclosure cover).
Safety
The starter features continual self-checking to ensure correct operation. External safety functions are not processed by the starter. Emergency stop and machine safety wiring must follow standard safety practice and be hard-wired, using electromechanical devices in the approved way. These functions must not be handled by communication bus systems (EN 60204 9.2.5.4). Protection against unexpected restarting, after an accidental power supply failure, must be provided by a safety device separate from the starter. The starter control (rotary knob or pushbutton) does not provide the Emergency Stop function if the machine is fitted with other actuators. The control operators on the starter are therefore coloured black, in accordance with standard EN 60204 10.2.1. Starters with rotary control knob may be padlocked in the ON position, since this control does not provide an Emergency Stop function.
Assume fallback condition

When communication is interrupted, the starter is no longer controlled by the PLC. The fallback condition of the starter is motor stopped (outputs at 0).
Output control relay

This relay incorporates a C/O contact, which may be used to control an indicator lamp, solenoid valve, etc. (250 V, 5 A), via AS-Interface.
AS-Interface
2/78
Starters with sensors connected (1)

Two 3-wire PNP sensors (50 mA max) or 2-wire limit switches can be connected directly to the starter. The information supplied by the sensor/limit switch is fed back via the AS-Interface line. (1) For "Reflex Stop" function, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2/79
Characteristics
Environment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Starter type Conforming to standards
LF3,LF4 IEC 60204-1, EN 60204-1, IEC 60439-1, IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 (1) Standard version TC IP 54 Storage Operation Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane C C m -40+80 -5+40 2000
Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature around the device conforming to IEC 60439-1 Maximum operating altitude Operating position without derating
30
30
90
90
Flame resistance of equipment Shock resistance (1/2 sine wave, 11ms) conforming to IEC60068-2-27 Vibration resistance 5150Hz conforming to IEC60068-2-6 Safe separation of circuits Immunity to non-dissipating shock wave (Uimp) Material and colour of enclosure base Material and colour of enclosure cover Resistance to chemical agents
Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Contactor open Contactor closed Contactor open Contactor closed Conforming to VDE 0106 and IEC 60536 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Insulated enclosures Metal enclosures Insulated enclosures Metal enclosures Insulated enclosures
960 10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V
kV
6: power 2.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor Polycarbonate impregnated with 20 % glass fibre, black throughout Sheet steel RAL 9001 Polycarbonate impregnated with 20% glass fibre, RAL 9001 throughout Sheet steel RAL 9001 Avoid allowing this material to come into contact with: strong bases (certain detergents), aromatic hydrocarbons, alcohol, chlorine solvents, ketones.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Immunity to electrostatic discharge Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to dissipated shock wave Immunity to conducted radio-frequency interference Immunity to radiated radio-frequency interference Radio-conducted and radio-radiated rejection Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 ENV 50 141 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 ENV 50 140 and ENV 50 204 (GSM) ENV 55 011/CISPR11 (G1) kV kV kV 8: in open air (level 3) 4: in indirect mode (level 2) 2: power, AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor (level 3) 4/2: power (level 4) 2/0.5: power, AS-Interface, 24 V and sensor (level 2) V/m V/m 10 10 Class B (1) Only for metal enclosures with letter U at the end of the reference. Certification pending.
Functions : pages 2/76 to 2/79
2/80
Cabling
Starter type Power supply cabling Screw clamp terminals Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque (1) Cable Gland (Pg16) Motor cabling Screw clamp terminals Clamping capacity mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m mm LF3 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1.7 10 Min. Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque (1) Cable Gland (Pg16) Output control relay cabling Clamping capacity mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m mm 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 0.8 10 Min. Terminal block Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque (2) Cable gland mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.7 8 10 Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 1.7 15 Max. 2x4 2x4 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 0.8 15 Max. 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.7 13 15 LF4 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1.7 10 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 0.8 10 Min. 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.7 8 10 Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 1.7 15 Max. 1x4 1x4 1 x 2.5 0.8 15 Max. 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.7 13 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Clamping capacity Pg 13 mm Pg 16 mm
Pole electrical characteristics

Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-2 (circuit-breaker) Conforming to 947-4-1 (motor starter) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated operational frequency Breaking capacity (Ics and Icu) Sensitivity to phase failure Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to IEC 60947 V V Hz A AC-3 415 415 50/60 > 100 > 100 Yes
Conforming to 230/240 V kA IEC60947-2 400/415 V kA Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 7-2-1-5-2 C.O.: closing, opening For AC-3 duty Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour In millions of operating cycles In category AC-3 at 8.5 A C.O. C.O. C.O./h
Circuit-breaker characteristics (manual operation)

Mechanical durability Electrical durability Duty class Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability Electrical durability 100000 100000 25 3600 30 800000 5
Circuit-breaker characteristics (automatic operation)
Other characteristics
Starters with rotary control knob Starters with pushbutton control Non-reversing starters Reversing starters Circuit-breaker type GV2P Circuit-breaker type GV2ME LF3, LF4 only Contactor LP4K0901BW3 (3) Reversing contactor LP5K0901BW3 (4) See pages 3/8 to 3/11 See pages 3/8 to 3/11 See pages 5/10 to 5/13 See pages 5/10 to 5/13 (1) Philips n 2 or flat screwdriver 5.5. (2) Flat screwdriver 3.5. (3) LP4 K1201BW3 for circuit-breaker ratings 00 and 16. (4) LP5 K1201BW3 for circuit-breaker ratings 00 and 16.
2/81
Tess enclosed starters
Sensor inputs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Starter type Cabling Nominal input values Voltage Maximum current available per sensor Sensor supply (including ripple) Input voltage range At state 1 At state 0 Maximum number of sensors Proximity sensor compatibility Isolation with respect to the AS-Interface line Input type Voltage Current Voltage Current V mA V V mA V mA
LF3,LF4 M12 c 24 50 1930 c > 11 >6 c<5 <2 2 2-wire/3-wire Yes Resistive for PNP type sensor
Output control relay

Operating voltage limit Thermal current at 40 C (Ith) Service life on an a 24 V load Resistive Millions of operating cycles load AC-12 Inductive Millions of operating cycles load AC-14 Service life on a c 24 V load Resistive Millions of operating cycles load DC-12 Resistive Millions of operating cycles load DC-3 Response time Contact type Built-in protection Against overload and short-circuits Against a.c. or d.c. inductive overloads Isolation rms voltage between output and earth or between output and internal logic V Latching Unlatching ms ms a.c. supply d.c. supply V V A 250 30 5 0.1 (1) in 5 A current, 1 (2) in 1 A current. 0.5 (2) in 1 A current, 1 (2) in 0.5 A current, 5 (3) in 0.25 A current. 0.1 (1) in 5 A current, 0.2 (1) in 2 A current. 0.5 (2) in 1 A current, > 1 (3) in 0.25 A current. < 10 < 15 C/O None, a quick-blow fuse must be fitted Protected against overvoltages generated by switching the coils of preactuators 1500, 50/60 Hz for 60 s > 1000
Insulation resistance between mW output terminals and AS-Interface
(1) 0.2 of an operation (C/O) per second. (2) 0.5 of an operation (C/O) per second. (3) 1 operation (C/O) per second.
2/82
Tess enclosed starters
Consumption
Starter type Product configured for supply from an auxiliary c 24 V supply LF3 Current consumption From the AS-Interface line (1) De-energised 20 mA Inrush Sealed Per sensor Relays From the auxiliary c 24 V supply 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 0 110 mA 30 mA LF4 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
1 2 3
Sensor consumption (50 mA max) + 10 mA (signal = 1)
De-energised 0 Inrush Energised 110 mA 30 mA
Data exchange characteristics

AS-Interface profile Data bits (commands) Bit value Command D0 (O) Command D1 (O) Command D2 (O) Command D3 (O) Data bits (status) Bit value Status D0 (I) Status D1 (I) Status D2 (I) Status D3 (I) 7.D.F.F (standard addressing 7.A.7.0 (extended addressing A/B) =0 Stop - forward running Stop - reverse running Deactivation of control relay Not Used =0 Not ready or fault Stopped Sensor 1 signal absent (3) Sensor 2 signal absent (4) =1 Start - forward running Start - reverse running (2) Activation of control relay Not Used =1 Ready Running Sensor 1 signal present (3) Sensor 2 signal present (4)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(1) 30 mA maximum + sensor consumption. (2) Only on LF4. (3) Sensor 1 or circuit-breaker fault signal, depending on configuration. (4) Sensor 1 or sensor 2 signal or control/local mode, depending on configuration.
2/83
D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system LF3 P and LF4 P
Characteristics
1 2
DF526356
Conforming to standards Degree of protection Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material Conforming to IEC 60529 Operation
IEC 60204-1, 60439-1, 60947-4-1, EN 60204-1, 60947-4-1 UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 (1) IP 54 - 5 to + 40 C Same as that of the contactors LFpP: polycarbonate (2). LFpMP: sheet steel Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220/230 V kW 400/415 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 Circuit-breaker adjustment range of thermal trips A Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LF3P00D (4) LF3P02D LF3P03D LF3P04D LF3P05D LF3P06D LF3P07D LF3P08D LF3P10D LF3P14D LF3P16D LF3P00E (4) LF3P02E LF3P03E LF3P04E LF3P05E LF3P06E LF3P07E LF3P08E LF3P10E LF3P14E LF3P16E Starter Ref. with standard addressing Ref. with extended addressing Weight kg 1.020 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350 1.350
Starters in insulated (plastic) enclosure
Non-reversing starters with rotary control knob, with black handle on blue background (3)
0.06 0.09 0.12
3 4 5 6
LF3PppD
0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3
DF526357
Reversing starters with rotary control knob, with black handle on blue background (3)
0.06 0.09 0.12 LF4PppDA79A74 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LF4P00D (4) LF4P02D LF4P03D LF4P04D LF4P05D LF4P06D LF4P07D LF4P08D LF4P10D LF4P14D LF4P16D LF4P00E (4) LF4P02E LF4P03E LF4P04E LF4P05E LF4P06E LF4P07E LF4P08E LF4P10E LF4P14E LF4P16E 1.020 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600 1.600
7 8 9 10
LF4MPppDA74A79 Dimensions: pages 2/88 to 2/90
Starters in metal enclosures

b To order a metal enclosure, add a letter M after LF3 or LF4, in the references selected above. Example: LF3P02D becomes LF3MP02D. b To order a metal enclosure that conforms to standards UL 508 and CSA C22-2 n 14, add a letter M after LF3 or LF4 and a letter U at the end of the references selected above. Example: LF3P02D becomes LF3MP02DU.
Description
DF526358
For mounting on Insulated or metal enclosure Insulated enclosure Metal enclosure
Suffix to be added to the starter reference (5) A74 A79 A79
With HARTING connectors (6) With local/AS-Interface control With local/AS-Interface control
(1) Only for metal enclosures with letter U at the end of the reference. Certification pending. (2) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (3) On metal enclosures only, to order an Emergency Stop rotary control knob with red handle on yellow background, add the letter R to the end of the reference. Example: LF3MP02DR. (4) Supplied without GV2 P motor circuit-breaker. (5) Example: LF3P02DA79A74. (6) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately, see page 2/95). Schemes: pages 2/91 to 2/93
2/84
D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system LF3 M and LF4 M
Characteristics
Conforming to standards Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature Operating positions Material Operation IEC 60204-1, 60439-1, 60947-4-1, EN 60204-1, 60947-4-1 UL 508, CSA C22-2 n 14 IP 54 - 5 to + 40 C Same as that of the contactors LFpM: polycarbonate (1). Circuit-.breaker adjustment range of thermal trips A Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LF3M00D (2) LF3M00E (2) LF3M02D LF3M03D LF3M04D LF3M05D LF3M06D LF3M07D LF3M08D LF3M10D LF3M14D LF3M16D LF3M02E LF3M03E LF3M04E LF3M05E LF3M06E LF3M07E LF3M08E LF3M10E LF3M14E LF3M16E Starter Ref. with standard addressing Ref. with extended addressing Weight kg 1.000 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Starters in insulated (plastic) enclosure

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220/230 V kW
DF526359
400/415 V kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5
Non-reversing starters with pushbutton control

0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3
LF3MppD
DF526360
Reversing starters with pushbutton control

0.06 0.09 0.12 Without 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 LF4M00D (2) LF4M00E (2) LF4M02D LF4M03D LF4M04D LF4M05D LF4M06D LF4M07D LF4M08D LF4M10D LF4M14D LF4M16D LF4M02E LF4M03E LF4M04E LF4M05E LF4M06E LF4M07E LF4M08E LF4M10E LF4M14E LF4M16D 1.000 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550 1.550
LF3MppDA79
0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3
Description With HARTING connectors (4) With local/AS-Interface control For mounting on Insulated enclosure Insulated enclosure Suffix to be added to the starter reference (3) A74 A79
(1) Avoid allowing the material to come into contact with strong bases (detergents, chlorine solvents, ketones, alcohol, aromatic hydrocarbons). (2) Supplied without GV2 ME motor circuit-breaker. (3) Example: LF3M02DA79A74. (4) Connectors to be fitted to cables (to be ordered separately, see page 2/95).
9 10
Dimensions: pages 2/88 to 2/90
2/85
Insulated enclosures LF3 and LF4
1 2 3
Power extension (daisy-chaining)
Terminal
LA9 LFF
LA9 LFF
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFC
4
Metal enclosures LF3 and LF4
LA9 LFT
5 6 7 8 9 10
LA9 LFM
LA9 LFMM
LA9 LFFM40
2/86
Presentation In order to reduce setting-up times and to simplify maintenance, variant A74 LF starters are fitted with Harting plug-in connectors. These starters are designed to allow 2 types of connection topology.
Connection using tap links This configuration avoids having to switch off the power supply when replacing or adding one or more starters. Although machine availability is increased, a larger number of power connections is required: 4 per starter.
Accessories for insulated enclosures with variant A74
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LF
LF
Connection using power extension (daisychaining)
LF
LF
The number of power connections per starter is halved, but continuity of service is no longer assured if any of the upstream starters are disconnected or removed. With this type of installation, special precautions must be taken because removal of a starter at the head of the power supply line de-energises all the remaining starters on that line. For safety reasons therefore, starters must not be removed under load (prohibited by standard EN60204 above 3kW/400V).
The 2 connection kits and accessories shown below have been designed to facilitate setting up of power extension configurations by the user.
Connection kit (depending on enclosure application)

Enclosure Capacity application mm2 Power extension (daisychaining) Terminal 3-pole 1.5 or 2.5 3-pole 1.5 or 2.5 1 female connector Enclosures 2 male connectors and LF3 and LF4 corresponding power sockets (1) 1 female connector 1 male connector 1 blanking plug and corresponding power sockets (1) Enclosures LF3 and LF4 LA9LFC Kit contents For Reference mounting on Weight kg 0.150
LA9LFT
0.110
Crimping contacts
Type Male Capacity mm2 1.5 2.5 Female 1.5 2.5 Sold in lots of 100 100 100 100 Unit reference LA9LFM15 LA9LFM25 LA9LFF15 LA9LFF25 Weight kg 0.120 0.120 0.160 0.150
Accessories for metal enclosures with variant A74

Connection kits
For connector Input Kit contents For Reference mounting on Metal enclosures LF3, LF4 Metal enclosures LF3, LF4 LA9LFFM40 Weight kg 1 metal cover 2 size 16 cable glands 1 blanking plug 1 female power socket (3P + earth) 4 female crimping contacts (2) 1 metal cover 1 size 16 cable gland 1 female power socket (3P+ earth) (1) Capacity mm2 Male 1.5 2.5 Thermal current A 10 10 0.260
Output to motor
LA9LFMM
0.060
Crimping contacts
Type Voltage Sold in lots of V 400 400 100 100 LA9LFM15 LA9LFM25 Unit reference Weight kg 0.120 0.120
10
(1) Crimping contacts to be ordered separately. (2) For flexible cable, 4 mm2 maximum, Ith: 16 A, Us: 400 V.
2/87
Dimensions
D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system LF3P and LF4 P
Non-reversing and reversing starters with rotary control knob
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
With cable glands LFpPppp
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) LFpPpppA74
175 120 4x5,3
175 84
47
150
(1)
(2)
With cable glands Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFpPpppA79
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFpPpppA79A74
175 120 4x5,3
175 84
47
150
(1)
(2)
Knock-outs for cable gland From above 2 x Pg16 and 2 x Pg13 From below 2 x Pg16 (cable glands supplied) (1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface and auxiliary 24 V supply. (2) M12 female connector for connection to sensor.
2/88
18
165
18
165
D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system LF3M and LF4 M
Non-reversing and reversing starters with pushbutton control

With cable glands LFpMppp With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) LFpMpppA74
140 120 4x5,3
175 84
140 120 4x5,3
175 84
47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
150
30
150 165
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
With cable glands Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFpMpppA79
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFpMpppA79A74
165 120 4x5,3
175 84
47
150
(1) (2)
Knock-outs for cable gland From above 2 x Pg16 and 2 x Pg13 From below 2 x Pg16 (cable glands supplied) (1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface and auxiliary 24 V supply. (2) M12 female connector for connection to sensor. References: page 2/85 Schemes: pages 2/91 to 2/93
2/89
18
165
18
165
D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system LF3MP and LF4 MP
Non-reversing and reversing starters with rotary control knob
1 2
With cable glands LFpMPppp
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) LFpMPpppA74
179 125 7
219 175
8,5
179 125 7
219 175
8,5
60
199
230
245
199
230 230
3
13 (1) (2)
13
(1)
(2)
4 5
With cable glands Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFpMPpppA79
With HARTING plug-in connectors (A74) Incorporating sensor and local/AS-Interface control variant (A79) LFpMPpppA79A74
179 125 7
219 175
179 125
219
8,5
60
8,5
175
199
199
230
6 7 8 9 10
13
(1)
(2)
245
13
(1)
(2)
Knock-outs for cable Standard enclosure Enclosure with variant gland A74 From above 3 x Pg16 1 x Pg16 From below 2 x Pg16 1 x Pg16 (1) M12 male connector for connection to AS-Interface and auxiliary 24 V supply. (2) M12 female connector for connection to sensor.
2/90
245
245
Schemes
Non-reversing starters LF3

AS Interface I1 I2 Input I3 J21A 1 KM GV ready GV Flt. 2 3 I4 J21B 1 2 3 +S-S Output Q1 -KA1 A (bus) M (local) Q2 Q3 Aux+ AuxASi+ ASi-
1 2 3
-KM1 -KA1 GV ready -KO3
5 PR3
PR5 4 1 2 3 -KO3 J2 NO COM O3 250 VAC / 5 A NC +24 V 0V ASi+ ASi-
Black White Brown Blue
4 5 6 7
Sensor 2 Sensor 1
Insulated enclosure with variant A79 or metal enclosure with variant A79
Reversing starters LF4

AS Interface I1 -KM1 1 -KM2 GV ready GV Flt. I 0 II 2 I2 Input I3 J21A 3 I4 J21B 1 2 3 +S-S Q1 -KA1 A (bus) M (local) Q2 Q3 Aux+ AuxASi+ ASiBlack White Brown Blue -KM2 GV -KO3 ready PR5 4 1 2 3 -KO3 J2 NO Sensor 2 Sensor 1 COM O3 250 VAC / 5 A NC +24 V 0V ASi+ ASiOutput
-KM1 -KA1
8 9 10
5 PR3
Insulated enclosure with variant A79 or metal enclosure with variant A79
2/91
Recommended application TeSys enclosed starters D.O.L. starters for AS-Interface cabling system schemes
Non-reversing and reversing starters with 2 sensors, an auxiliary supply and a control relay
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
References: pages 2/84 and 2/85 Dimensions: pages 2/88 to 2/90
AS-Interface line
2/92
Recommended application schemes

(continued)
Connections on enclosure
M12 male connector for AS-Interface and c 24 V auxiliary supply
24 V 4 3 AS-i
1 2
AS-i +
0V
Sensor M12 female connector Limit switch

3 4
2-wire PNP type sensor

3 4
3-wire PNP type sensor

3
Sensor 1
Sensor 1
1
Sensor 1
2
Sensor 2
+ +
Sensor 2
+ +
Sensor 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2/93
Connections
Starters in enclosures with cable glands
1
2
2 3
M
4
8
5
7 6
1 Junction box
6 7 8 9 10
2 Incoming power 3 Power extension 4 FTXCY1212: splitter block 5 XZCR1511040Ap: extension 6 XZCB1pp02: flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply 7 XZCG01403D: tap link for two cables 8 XZCB1pp01: flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface
2/94
Connections (continued)
Starters in insulated enclosures with HARTING type plug-in power connectors

3 1
2
M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Incoming power Power extension Control relay (example: illuminated indicator bank FTXCY1212: splitter block XZCR1511040Ap: extension XZCB1pp02: flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply XZCG01403D: tap link for two cables XZCB1pp01: flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Configuration of HARTING connectors to be fitted on cables (to be ordered separately)

4
Number and HARTING reference for incoming power female connector Straight cover 1 x 09-20-003-0420 1 x 09-12-005-3001 3 x 09-33-000-6202 for power extension and motor connection male connectors 2 x 09-20-003-0420 2 x 09-12-005-3101 8 x 09-33-000-6102 1 x 09-20-003-5408
8 5
Male insert 6-way, 400 V Female insert 6-way, 400 V
Male contacts 2.5 mm2 Female contacts 2.5 mm2
Plug for the last socket
Starters in metal enclosures with HARTING type plug-in power connectors

2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Incoming power Control relay (example: illuminated indicator bank FTXCY1212: splitter block XZCR1511040Ap: extension XZCB1pp02p: flat cable (black) for auxiliary supply XZCG1403D: tap link for two cables XZCB1pp01p: flat cable (yellow) for AS-Interface
Configuration of HARTING connectors to be fitted on cables (to be ordered separately)

Number and HARTING reference for incoming power female connector Straight cover 1 x 09-30-006-442 (1) 1 x 09-30-006-443 (2) 1 x 09-33-006-2702 3 x 09-33-000-6207 for power extension and motor connection male connectors 2 x 09-20-003-1440 2 x 09-12-005-3101 5 x 09-33-000-6102
7 4
Male insert 6-way, 400 V Female insert 6-way, 400 V Male contacts 2.5 mm2
Female contacts 2.5 mm2 (1) PG21. (2) PG29.
2/95
Presentation
D.O.L. starters
LA9Z modules for AS-Interface cabling system
1 2 3
AS-I PWR
AS-Interface modules LA9Z32810 and LA9Z32811 allow motor starters to be monitored and controlled by AS-Interface. These products are in addition to the ASInterface enclosed starter range, LF1 and LF2, LF7 and LF8. The module sizes offered are: 2 inputs/1 output or 4 inputs/2 outputs. These products can be mounted in two ways: b on 5 rail, b on LA9Zppp adapters for use with busbar systems.
565188 565189
Presentation
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: page 2/98 References: page 2/99
AS-I PWR
Inputs/outputs are connected to a built-in, flexible terminal type connector, so reducing installation time. The AS-Interface line is connected to the module by the yellow connector. The external c 24 V supply to the module outputs is connected to the black connector. With this supply method, it is possible to make the output states subject to external safety conditions (Emergency stop, safety overtravel, etc.).
Dimensions, scheme : pages 2/100 and 2/101
2/96
D.O.L. starters
The various module sizes allow control of: - non-reversing starters, - reversing starters, - 2-speed starters for motors with separate windings. The outputs, supplied by the separate auxiliary voltage, can simultaneously switch a current of 0.5 A at c 24 V and can therefore switch the following contactors: - LP1, LP4K06 to K12, - LC1D09 to D32.
Fields of application
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Composition
565190
AS-Interface module 1 AS-Interface green/red LED indicator: - red: no communication with the Master. The outputs are switched off, - green: communication OK, outputs OK, - red/yellow flashing: module has no address (assign an address between 1 and 31), - off: no power supply to AS-Interface. 2 Green PWR LED: - LED on: auxiliary power supply ON, - LED off: auxiliary power supply OFF.
1
AS-I PWR
Characteristics: page 2/98
2/97
Characteristics
D.O.L. starters
General system environment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Interface type Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Flame resistance Resistance to external mechanical impact Vibration resistance Immunity to non-dissipating shockwave (Uimp) Immunity to electrostatic discharge Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to dissipated shock wave Immunity to conducted radio-frequency interference Immunity to radiated radio-frequency interference Radio-conducted and radio-radiated rejection AS-Interface supply Cabling c.s.a., AS-Interface Cabling c.s.a., 24 V Cabling c.s.a., input/output
Conforming to IEC 60539 Storage, conforming to IEC 60539 Operation Without derating Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 1/2 sine wave, 11ms conforming to IEC60068-2-6 5150 Hz conforming to 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4 level 4 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 ENV 50 141 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 ENV 50 140 and ENV 50 204 (GSM) ENV 55 011/CISPR (G1)
C C m C
LA9Z32810 AS-Interface N 18701 TH IP 20 -40+85 -10+55 2000 960 15 gn 2 gn
LA9Z32811 AS-Interface N 18601
kV kV kV kV V/m V/m
2.5: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs 8: in open air (level 3) 4: in indirect mode (level 2) 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs 2: AS-Interface, 24 V and on inputs/outputs 10 10 Class A
Flexible cable Flexible cable Flexible cage terminal and flexible cable
V mm2 mm2 mm2 mA m A A
29.5-31.6 2 x 0.50.75 2 x 0.50.75 0.082.5; AWG2812 7 100 % 0.4 0.5 2 100 % Yes Yes 3F 2 inputs/1 output 812 0 Off Not used Not used Not used Absent Absent Not used Not used Not used 7F 4 inputs/2 outputs 812 0 Off Off
Input current Coincidence of inputs Maximum length of wires to switching components Maximum current of outputs c 13/14, (24 V) Thermal current Ith Coincidence of outputs Short-circuit protection By flywheel diode Outputs switched off Watchdog in event of interference on the AS-Interface line AS-Interface profile Number of I/O Current consumption On AS-Interface On/OFF Data bits Status Command D0 (O) D1 (O) D2 (O) D3 (O) Status D0 (I) D1 (I) D2 (I) D3 (I) Parameters P0P3
mA Out 1 Out 2 Out 3 Out 4 In 1 In 2 In 3 In 4
1 On
1 On On
Present Present
Absent Absent Absent Absent
Present Present Present Present
2/98
References
D.O.L. starters
AS-Interface modules (1) (2)

No. of Number channels of inputs 3 6 2 4 Number Output of outputs voltage V 1 c 24 2 c 24 Current Reference per output A 0.5 LA9Z32810 0.5 LA9Z32811 Weight kg 0.070 0.070
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Accessories
Description Busbar system mm 40 or 60 Width mm 45 54 40 45 54 60 45 54 Reference Weight kg 0.044 0.051 0.091 0.098 0.085 0.092
Modules without electrical connection, for use with all LA9Zpp adapters
LA9Z32744 LA9Z32745 LA9Z32740 LA9Z32741 LA9Z32742 LA9Z32743
Module with PE + N polarity and 5-way connector
Replacement connectors and adapter cable

Description Colour Insulation Displacement Yellow Connector (IDC) for AS-Interface Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) for auxiliary supply Description Black Sold in lots of 5 5 Unit reference LA9Z32825 LA9Z32826 Weight kg 0.100 0.100
Cable length m 0.5
Reference
Weight kg 0.070
Adapter cable for connection to addressing terminal XZMC11
XZMG12
(1) Users Manual to be ordered separately, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Supplied with connectors LA9Z32825 and LA9Z32826.
2/99
D.O.L. starters
2
Dimensions
1 2
LA9 Z3281p
86
45
3 4
Mounting on modules
LA9 Z32742, LA9 Z32743
60 mm busbar system
LA9 Z32740, LA9 Z32741

40 mm busbar system Common front face view
65
69,5
40
80
80
120
5 6 7 8 9
LA9 Z32745 Z32744
135,5
125,5
115
30 a
LA9 Z32740, Z32742 Z32741, Z32743
a 45 54
LA9 Z32745
40 or 60 mm busbar system
LA9 Z32744
Common front face view
80
40
135,5 125,5
80
a 54 45
10
2/100
Schemes
D.O.L. starters
Schemes
1 motor
D.O.L. starter, non-reversing

2 motors
1
LA9 Z32811
IN2 X3, 2 IN3 X3, 3 IN4 X3, 4 IN + X3, 5 M X3, 6 OUT1 X3, 7 OUT2 X3, 8
LA9 Z32810
IN1 X3, 1 IN2 X3, 2 IN + X3, 3 M X4, 4 OUT1 X4, 2
IN1 X3, 1
KM
KM
KM1
KM2
Q1
Q2
Q1
Q2
2 3 4
KM1
KM2
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2 4/T2 V
Q1
Q2
KM
KM1
KM2
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 6/T3 W
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
5/L3
M1
M2
5 6 7 8 9 10
D.O.L. starter, reversing

LA9 Z32811
IN1 X3, 1 IN2 X3, 2 IN3 X3, 3 IN4 X3, 4 IN + X3, 5 M X3, 6 OUT1 X3, 7 OUT2 X3, 8
KM1
KM2
KM2 KM1
KM1 KM2
1/L1
3/L2
KM1
5/L3
KM2
2/T1
4/T2 V
6/T3
2/101
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3/0
Contents
3 - TeSys protection components: motor circuit-breakers
TeSys GV thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2 b Presentation. page 3/6 b Characteristics page 3/8 b References page 3/46 b Dimensions, mounting page 3/70 b Schemes page 3/82
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TeSys GV magnetic motor circuit-breakers

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/4 b Characteristics page 3/14 b References page 3/52 b Dimensions, mounting page 3/84 b Schemes page 3/89
TeSys GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit breakers for the protection of control circuits, solenoid and transformers
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/90 b Presentation. page 3/92 b Characteristics page 3/93 b References page 3/96 b Dimensions page 3/97 b Schemes page 3/97
3/1
Selection guide
TeSys protection components

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers
Applications
Protection of motors against short-circuits and overloads
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Tripping threshold on short-circuit
13 In
Standard motor power ratings in AC-3, 415 V
Up to 15 kW
Up to 30 kW
37 kW
Operational current at 415 V
0.132 A
965 A
5680 A
Breaking capacity at 415 V (Icu) to IEC 60947-2
10100 kA
35100 kA
50100 kA
15 kA
Door interlock mechanism
Without
With
With
Without
Circuit-breaker type
GV2 ME
3/47 and 3/48
GV2 P
3/49
GV3P
3/49
GV3 ME80
3/49
Pages
3/2
Protection of motors with high current peak on starting
1 2 3
20 In
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
7.5110 kW
Up to 11 kW
12220 A
0.2523 A
35 and 36 kA
70 kA
15100 kA
With
With
GV7 RE
3/49
GV7 RS
GV2 RT
3/50 and 3/51
3/3
Selection guide

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers
Applications
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Protection of motors Magnetic circuit-breakers provide short-circuit protection. They must be combined with thermal overload relays to provide motor overload protection.
13 In
Standard motor power ratings in AC-3, 415 V
Up to 15 kW
Operational current at 415 V
0.432 A
Breaking capacity at 415 V (Icu) to IEC 60947-2
10100 kA
35100 kA
Door interlock mechanism
With
GV2 LE
GV2 L
Pages
3/52
3/53
3/4
1 2 3 4 5
35.7150 kA 45.7150 kA
614 In
813 In
6.312.5 In
Up to 30 kW
37 kW
0.37250 kW
2565 A
80 A
1.5500 A
50100 kA
35 kA
25.7 and 150 kA
With
With
With
GV3L
GK3 EF80
NS 80
NS 100 to NS 250
NS 400 and NS 630
6 7 8 9 10
3/53
3/53
Please consult the Schneider Electric catalogue - Low Voltage Distribution
3/5
Presentation

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2, GV3 and GV7
526134
526135
1 2 3 4
1 2 4
GV2 ME with screw clamp terminals
1 2 4
GV2 ME with spring terminals connections
GV2 ME, GV2 P, GV3 ME, GV3P and GV7 R motor circuit-breakers are 3-pole thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers specifically designed for the control and protection of motors, conforming to standards IEC 60947-2 and IEC 60947-4-1. Connection GV2 GV2ME and GV2P circuit-breakers are designed for connection by screw clamp terminals. Circuit-breaker GV2ME can be supplied with lugs or spring terminal connections. Spring terminal connections ensure secure, permanent and durable clamping that is resistant to harsh environments, vibration and impact and are even more effective when conductors without cable ends are used. Each connection can take two independent conductors. GV3 GV3 circuit-breakers feature connection by BTR screws (hexagon socket head), tightened using a n 4 Allen key. This type of connection uses the EverLink system with creep compensation (1) (Schneider Electric patent). This technique makes it possible to achieve accurate and durable tightening torque, in order to avoid cable creep. GV3 circuit-breakers are also available with connection by lugs. This type of connection meets the requirements of certain Asian markets and is suitable for applications subject to strong vibration, such as railway transport. GV7 GV7 circuit-breakers: with connection by screw clamp terminals (for bars and lugs) and by clip-on connectors. Operation Control is manual and local when the motor circuit-breaker is used on its own. Control is automatic and remote when it is associated with a contactor. Pushbutton control. Energisation is controlled manually by operating the Start button I 1. De-energisation is controlled manually by operating the Stop button O 2, or automatically by the thermal-magnetic protection elements or by a voltage trip attachment.
GV2 P, GV3P and GV7R GV2 ME and GV3 ME80
Presentation
526136
1 3 2 4
GV3 P
526137
5 6
1 3 2 4
GV2 P
526138
7 8
b Control by rotary knob: for GV2P and GV3P b Control by rocker lever: for GV7R. Energisation is controlled manually by moving the knob or rocker lever to position I 1. De-energisation is controlled manually by moving the knob or rocker lever to position O 2. De-energisation due to a fault automatically places the knob or rocker lever in the Trip position 3. Re-energisation is possible only after having returned the knob or rocker lever to position O.
(1) Creep: normal crushing phenomenon of copper conductors, that is accentuated over time.
1 3 2

GV7 R
9 10
Characteristics: pages 3/8 to 3/45 References: pages 3/46 to 3/69 Dimensions and schemes: pages 3/70 to 3/89
3/6

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2, GV3 and GV7
Protection of motors and personnel Motor protection is provided by the thermal-magnetic protection elements incorporated in the motor circuit-breaker. The magnetic elements (short-circuit protection) have a non-adjustable tripping threshold, which is equal to 13 times the maximum setting current of the thermal trips. The thermal elements (overload protection) include automatic compensation for ambient temperature variations. The rated operational current of the motor is displayed by means of a graduated knob 4. Personnel protection is also provided. All live parts are protected against direct finger contact from the front panel. The addition of an undervoltage trip allows the circuit-breaker to be de-energised in the event of an undervoltage condition. The user is therefore protected against sudden starting of the machine when normal voltage is restored, since the Start button I has to be pressed to restart the motor. With the addition of a shunt trip, de-energisation of the unit can be remotely controlled. The operators on both open-mounted and enclosed motor circuit-breakers can be locked in the Stop position O by up to 4 padlocks. Because they are suitable for isolation, these circuit-breakers, in the open position, provide an adequate isolation distance and indicate the actual position of the moving contacts by the position of the operators. Special features These motor circuit-breakers are easily installed in any configuration thanks to their universal fixing arrangement: screw fixing or clip-on mounting on symmetrical, asymmetrical or combination rails.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Dimensions and schemes: pages 3/70 to 3/89
3/7
Characteristics


1 2
Circuit-breaker type Conforming to standards
Environment
GV2 ME GV2 P IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, EN 60204, UL 508, CSA C 22.2 n 14-05, NF C 63-650, 63-120, 79-130, VDE 0113, 0660
GV3P IEC/EN 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, UL 508 type E, CSA C 22.2 n 14-05 type E
GV3 ME80 IEC/EN, NF EN, BSEN, DIN EN 60947-2, 60947-4-1
3
Protective treatment Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 Open mounted In enclosure
UL, CSA, CCC, CEBEC, GOST, TSE, BV, GL, LROS , DNV, PTB, EZU, SETI, RINA, ATEX TH IP 20 GV2 Mp01: IP41 GV2 Mp02: IP55 30 gn -11 ms
UL (1), CSA, PTB, EZU, GOST, TSE, DNV, LROS, GL, BV, RINA, CCC, ATEX
UL, CSA, CCC, GOST, ATEX, BV, GL, DNV, RINA, LROS (pending)
UL, CSA, LROS
GV7 R IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, EN 60947-1, 60947-2, EN 60947-4-1, NF C 63-650, NF C 63-120, 79-130, VDE 0113, 0660 UL, DNV, CCC
TH IP 20
TC IP 20
4
Shock resistance Vibration resistance
GV3 CE01: GV3 PC01 and GV3 PC02: IP55 IP55 22 gn - 20 ms 2.5 gn (025 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 40 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 40 960 3000 0.5
TC IP 405 with terminal shrouds
Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Storage Operation C C C C C C m J
5 6 7 8 9 10
Ambient air temperature
Open mounted In enclosure Temperature compensation Open mounted In enclosure Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Maximum operating altitude Suitable for isolation Conforming to IEC 60947-1 7-1-6 Resistance to mechanical impact
Sensitivity to phase failure Circuit-breaker type Utilisation category
On: 15 gn -11ms Off: 30 gn -11ms 5 gn (5150 Hz) 4 gn (5300 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 40+ 80 - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 60 (2) - 20+ 40 - 20+ 40 - 20+ 40 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 60 - 20+ 40 - 20+ 40 - 20+ 40 960 960 2000 3000 Yes Yes 0.5 0.5 10 IK 04 IK 09 (in enclosure) Yes, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 7-2-1-5-2 GV2 ME GV2 P A AC-3 690 690 600 50/60 6 2.5 100 000 GV2 RT GV3 P A AC-3 690 690 600 50/60 6 8 50 000 GV3 ME80 A AC-3 690 690 600 (B600) 50/60 6 8 30 000
15 gn -11 ms 2.5 gn (25 Hz) - 55+ 95 - 25 + 70 - 25 + 55 (3) 960 2000 Yes 0.5
Technical characteristics
Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Rated operational voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-2 (Ue) Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-2 (Ui) Rated voltage Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, UL 508 Rated operational Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 frequency UL, CSA Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC 60947-2 voltage (U imp) Total power dissipated per pole Mechanical durability (C.O.: Close, Open) Electrical durability 440 V In/2 for AC-3 duty 440 V In Duty class (maximum operating rate) Maximum conventional Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 rated thermal current (Ith) Rated duty Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1
V V V Hz kV W C.O. C.O. C.O. C.O./h A
GV7 Rp20... Rp100 A AC-3 690 750 600 50/60 8 5 50 000
GV7 Rp150
GV7 Rp220
8.7 40 000
14.5 20 000
100 000 30 000 50 000 40 000 20 000 50 000 30 000 20 000 10 000 25 25 25 25 0.16 0.16 13 80 12 150 220 0.40 32 23 65 100 32 Continuous duty (1) UL 508 type E for GV2 PppH7 (2) Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space, or side mounting addon contact blocks. Side by side mounting is possible up to 40 C. (3) For operation up to 70 C, please consult your Regional Sales Office. Schemes: pages 3/78 and 3/79
3/8

Mounting characteristics
Operating position Without derating, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane (1)
90 90
90 90
1 2 3
Connection characteristics
Bare cables
Connection to screw clamp terminals or spring terminals
Circuit-breaker type Connection to screw clamp terminals (2) Solid cable (Max. number of conductors x c.s.a.) Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Connection to spring terminals Number of conductors x c.s.a. Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m mm2 mm2
GV2 ME Min. 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1 1.7 2 x 1 (3)
Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 1.7 2x6
GV2 P Min. 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1 1.7
Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 1.7
GV3 P Min. 2x1 2x1 2x1 5
Max. 1 x 25 and 1 x 35 1 x 25 and 1 x 35 1 x 25 and 1 x 35 5: 25 mm2 8: 35 mm2
GV3 ME80 Min. Max. 1 x 2.5 1 x 35 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 5 2 x 16 2 x 16 5
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2 x 1.5 (3) 2 x 4
Connection by bars or lugs

Bars or lugs
6
d
e
Circuit-breaker type Pitch Without spreaders With spreaders Bars or cables with lugs e L L d Screws Tightening torque Bare cables (copper or aluminium) with connectors Height (h) C.s.a. Tightening torque N.m mm mm2 N.m mm mm mm mm mm mm
L
GV3Ppp6 17.5 y6 y 13.5 y 16.5 y 10 M6 6
L
GV7 Rp20...Rp100 35 45 y6 y 25 y 10 M6 10 20 1.5...95 15
L'
GV7 Rp150 35 45 y6 y 25 y 10 M8 15 20 1.5...95 15 GV7 Rp220 35 45 y6 y 25 y 10 M8 15 20 1.5...185 15
GV2MEpp6 13.5 y6 y 9.5 y 9.5 y 10 M4 1.7
(1) When mounting on a vertical rail, fit a stop to prevent any slippage. (2) For motor circuit-breakers GV3 P: BTR hexagon socket head screws, EverLink system. Require use of an insulated Allen key, in compliance with local electrical wiring regulations. (3) For cross-sections 1 to 1.5 mm2, the use of an LA9 D99 cable end reducer is recommended. References: pages 3/47 to 3/51 Dimensions: pages 3/70 to 3/77 Schemes: pages 3/78 and 3/79
3/9
Characteristics
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME and GV2 P
Breaking capacity of GV2 ME and GV2 P
1 2 3 4
Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 230/240 V Icu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V Icu Ics % (1)
A kA
GV2 ME 01 07 08 to 06 0.1 2.5 4 to 1.6 g g g g g g
10
14
16 14 g g
20 18 g g
6.3 10 g g g g
21 & 22 23 & 25 50
32 32 50
GV2 P 01 07 08 to 06 0.1 2.5 4 to 1.6 g g g g g
10
14
16 14 g g
20 18 g g
6.3 10 g g g g
21 & 22 23 & 25 g g
32 32 g g
100 100 g 15 40 6 50 4 75 3 75 80 10 50 6 50 4 75 3 75 g g
kA
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
15 50 8
15 50 8 50 6 75 3 75
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
50 50 20 75 10 75 4
50 50 20 75 10 75 4
50 50 20 75 10 75 4
kA
g g
g g
g g
50
15
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
50 75 42
100 100 50 50 10 6
kA
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
50
100 100 75 3 75 3 75 3 75
100 75 6 6
kA
g g
3 75 g
3 75
g g
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g
5 6
Associated fuses (if required) if Isc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2
230/240 V
aM gG
A A A A A A A A A A
g g
g g g
g g g
80 g
g g g
g g
100 100 g 80 80 g
400/415 V
aM gG
g g g g g 63 g g g g g g g g 50 g g g 63 g g g 50 g g g 63 g 16 g 20 25 32 32 40 50 63 50 63 32 40 80 50 63 50 63 40 50
63
g g
g g
g g
g g
g g
100 100 100 125 125 125 63 80 80
80 100 100 g 50 63 50 63 40 50 63 80 50 63 40 50 63 80 50 63 40 50 g g
440 V
aM gG
g g
g g
g g
g g
50 63 50 63 50 63
80 100 100 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63
7 8 9 10
500 V
aM gG
g g
g g
g g
g g
50 63 40 50
690 V
aM gG
g g
20 25
25 32
40 50
g > 100 kA. (1) As % of Icu.
Schemes: pages 3/78
3/10
Breaking capacity of GV2ME and GV2P (used in association with current limiter GV1 L3)
Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 230/240 V Icu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 230/240 V Icu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V (3) Circuit-breaker type Rating Cable protection against thermal stress in the event of short-circuit (PVC insulated copper cables) Minimum c.s.a. protected at 40 C at Isc max. 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 46 mm2 A Icu = Ics kA kA kA kA A kA kA kA kA A kA GV2 ME 01 to 06 07 0.1 to 2.5 1.6 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 08 4 g g g g g g g g 10 6.3 g g g g g g g g 14 10 g g g g g g 50 100 16 14 g g 100 50 50 75 42 100 20 18 g g 100 50 20 75 10 75 21 23 g g 100 40 20 75 10 75 22 25 g g 100 40 20 75 10 75 32 32 g g 100 40 20 75 10 75
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GV2 P 01 to 06 07 0.1 to 2.5 1.6 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 50
08 4 g g g g g g g g 50
10 6.3 g g g g g g g g 50
14 10 g g g g g g 100 50 50
16 14 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50
20 18 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50
21 23 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50
22 25 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50
32 32 g g g g 100 50 100 50 50
GV2 ME 01 to 06 07 0.1 2.5 to 1.6 p p p p p p p p
08 4 p p p p
10 6.3
14 10
16 14
20 18
21 23
22 25
32 32
y 10 kA y 6 kA
(2)
(2) (2) p p
(2) (2) p p
(2) (2) p p
(2) (2) (2) p
y 20 kA y 10 kA (2) p p p p p p
g > 100 kA p Cable c.s.a. protected (1) As % of Icu (2) Cable c.s.a. not protected (3) With limiter LA9 LB920
Schemes: pages 3/78
3/11
Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3P and GV3ME80
Breaking capacity of GV3P and GV3ME80
1 2 3 4
Motor circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 230/240 V Icu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V Icu Ics % (1) Associated fuses, if required if lsc > breaking capacity Icu 230/240 V aM gG A A A A A A A A A A kA kA kA kA A kA
GV3 P 13 13 100 100 100 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 63 80 63 80 50 63 18 18 100 100 100 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 80 100 63 80 50 63 25 25 100 100 100 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 125 160 63 80 50 63 32 32 100 100 100 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 125 160 63 80 50 63 40 40 100 100 50 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g 125 160 125 160 80 100 63 80 50 50 100 100 50 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g 125 160 125 160 80 100 63 80 65 65 100 100 50 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g 125 160 125 160 80 100 63 80
GV3 ME80 80 100 100 15 50 10 60 4 100 2 100 g g 315 400 315 400 200 250 200 250
5 6 7 8 9 10
415 V
aM gG
440 V
aM gG
500 V
aM gG
690 V
aM gG
g Fuse not required: breaking capacity Icn > Isc. (1) As % of Icu.
3/12
Characteristics
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R
Breaking capacity of GV7R

Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 230/240 V lcu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V Icu Ics % (1) Cable protection against thermal stress in the event of short-circuit (PVC insulated copper cables) Minimum c.s.a. protected at 40 C at Isc max. 4 mm2 6 mm2 1050 mm2 kA kA kA kA A kA GV7 RE20RE100 RS20RS100 RE150 90150 85 100 35 100 35 100 30 100 8 100 RS150 90150 100 100 70 100 65 100 50 100 10 100 RE220 132220 85 100 35 100 35 100 30 100 8 100 RS220 132220 100 100 70 100 65 100 50 100 10 100 1220 to 60100 85 100 36 100 36 100 18 100 8 100 y 6 kA p p 100 100 70 100 65 100 50 100 10 100 y 6 kA y 25 kA p
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(2) (2) p
(2) (2) p
(2) (2) p
(2) (2) p
(1) As % of Icu. p Cable c.s.a. protected. (2) Cable c.s.a. not protected.
3/13
Characteristics

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 LE and GV2 L
Environment
1 2 3 4
Circuit-breaker type Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Shock resistance Vibration resistance Ambient air temperature Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Storage Operation Flame resistance Maximum operating altitude Operating position Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 C C C m
GV2 LE GV2 L IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, EN 60204, NF C 63-650, NF C63-120, 79-130, VDE 0113, 0660. CSA, CCC CSA, CCC, BV, DNV, GL, LROS, RINA TH 30 gn 5 gn (5 to 150 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 960 2000 TH 30 gn 5 gn (5 to 150 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 960 2000
Connection (Max. number of conductors x c.s.a)
Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
Min. 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1 1.7 Yes
Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4
Min. 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1 1.7 Yes 0.5
Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4
5
Tightening torque Suitable for isolation
Conforming to IEC 60947-1 7-1-6 J
6 7 8 9 10
Resistance to mechanical impact
0.5
Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated operational frequency Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V V Hz kV W C.O. C.O. C.O./h A AC-3 690 690 50/60 6 1.8 100 000 100 000 40 Continuous duty A AC-3 690 690 50/60 6 1.8 100 000 100 000 40 Continuous duty
Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) Total power dissipated per pole Mechanical durability For AC-3 duty (C.O.: Closing, Opening) Electrical durability for AC-3/415V duty (C.O.: Closing, Opening) Duty class (maximum operating rate) Rated duty Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1
Schemes: page 3/87
3/14

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 LE and GV2 L
Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 230/240 V Icu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V Icu Ics % (1) Associated fuses (if required) if Isc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2 amendment 1 230/240 V aM gG 400/415 V aM gG 440 V aM gG 500 V aM gG 690 V aM gG Cable protection against thermal stress in the event of short-circuit (PVC insulated copper cables) Minimum c.s.a. protected at 40 C and at Isc max. 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 46 mm2
A kA
GV2 LE 03 07 08 10 14 to 06 0.4 2.5 4 6.3 10 to 1.6 g g g g g g g g g g g g g 3 g g g g g g g 3 g g g 50 g g g 15
16 20 22 14 18 25 g g g g 50
32 32 50
GV2 L 03 06 08 to & 05 07 0.4 1.6 4 to to 1 2.5 g g g g g g g g g g 4 g g g g g g g 4
10
14
16 14 g g 50 50 20 75 10
20 18 g g 50 50 20 75 10 75 4
22 25 50
32 32 50
6.3 10 g g g g g g g g 4 g g g g 20 75 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
100 100 g 10 50 6 50 4 75 3 75 80 g g g g g g g g g
100 100 50 50 20 75 10 75 4 50 50 20 75 10 75 4
kA
g g
15 15 15 50 50 40 8 8 6
kA
g g
100 100 50 50 50 50 10 6 6 4
kA
g g
100 100 75 75 75 3 3 75 g g g g 50 63 50 63 32 40 3 3 3
100 75 4 4
kA
g g
75 75 75 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 50 63 50 63
75 75 75 g g g g 80
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 g g g g g g g g 20 25 p p p p g g g g g g g g 25 32 p p p p g g g g g g g g 40 50 g g g g 50 63 50 63 40 50 g g g g 100 100 125 125
A A A A A A A A A A kA kA
g g g g g g g g g g p p p p
100 100 g 80 g
63 63 80
80 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 63 80 80 80
80 80 100 100 g 50 50 63 63 63 80 50 50 50 63 63 63 40 40 40 50 50 50 63 80 50 63 40 50 g g g g g g
80 100 100 100 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63 50 63
16 25 32 20 32 40 p p p p p p p p
y10 y 6 (2) (2) (2) (2) p y20 y 10 (2) (2) (2) (2) p p p p p p p p p p p (2) p p p
y10 y 6 (2) (2) (2) (2) y20 y10 (2) (2) (2) (2) p p p p p p p p p p (2) p
g > 100 kA p Cable c.s.a. protected (1) As % of Icu (2) Cable c.s.a. not protected
Schemes: page 3/87
3/15
Characteristics

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3L and GK3EF80
Environment
1 2 3 4
Circuit-breaker type Conforming to standards Protective treatment Degree of protection Shock resistance Vibration resistance Flame resistance Ambient air temperature Conforming to IEC 60529 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Storage Operation Maximum operating altitude Operating position Without derating, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane (2)
GV3 L IEC/EN 60947-1, 60947-2 TH IP 20 On : 15 gn -11 ms Off : 30 gn -11 ms 4 gn (5300 Hz) C C C m 960 - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 (1) 3000
GK3 EF80 IEC 60947-2, EN 60204 TC IP 20 22 gn -20 ms 2.5 gn (025 Hz) 960 - 40+ 80 - 20+ 70 open mounted 3000 Any position
Connection (Max. number of conductors x c.s.a)
Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
Min. 2x1 2x1 2x1 5 Yes
5
Tightening torque Suitable for isolation conforming to IEC 60947-1 7-1-6
Max. 1 x 25 1 x 35 1 x 25 1 x 35 1 x 25 1 x 35 5 : 25 mm2 8 : 35 mm2
Min. 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 or 2 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 or 2 x 2.5 5 Yes
Max. 1 x35 1 x 25 or 2 x 16 1 x 25 or 2 x 16
6 7 8 9 10
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated operational frequency Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V kV V Hz C.O. C.O. C.O./h 690 6 690 50/60 50000 50000 25 14 I max A 750 10 690 5060 1500 20000 40 3363 A
Electrical durability for AC-3/415V duty (C.O.: Close - Open) Mechanical durability (C.O.: Closing, Opening) Maximum operating rate Operating threshold of magnetic trips Utilisation category Conforming to IEC 60947-2
(1) Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting add-on contact blocks. Side by side mounting is possible up to 40 C. (2) When mounting on a vertical rail, fit a stop to prevent any slippage.
Schemes: page 3/87
3/16

Breaking capacity of GV3L and GK3EF80

Type Breaking capacity of the circuitbreaker only or of the circuitbreaker combined with a thermal overload relay 230/240 V Icu Ics % (1) 400/415 V Icu Ics % (1) 440 V Icu Ics % (1) 500 V Icu Ics % (1) 690 V Icu Ics % (1) Associated fuses (if required) for use with circuit-breaker only or circuit-breaker combined with a thermal overload relay if lsc > breaking capacity 230/240 V aM gG 415 V aM gG 440 V aM gG 500 V aM gG 690 V aM gG Use of circuit-breakers without fuses Cable c.s.a. Isc (rms) 3-phase, incoming (Ue = 415 V) 50 kA 45 kA 40 kA 37 kA mm2 m m m m A A A A A A A A A A kA kA kA kA kA GV3L25 100 100 100 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 63 80 63 80 50 63 GV3L32 100 100 100 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 80 100 63 80 50 63 GV3L40 100 100 50 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 125 160 63 80 50 63 GV3L50 100 100 50 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g g g 125 160 63 80 50 63 GV3L65 100 100 50 100 50 100 12 50 6 50 g g 125 160 125 160 80 100 63 80 GK3 EF80 50 40 35 25 25 30 15 30 6 50 200 315 200 250 160 250 160 200 125 160
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Minimum cable length (in metres) limiting the maximum short-circuit current to 35 kA maximum, so enabling breakers GK3 EF80 to be used without fuses y 25 5 5 5 5 35 6 5 5 5 50 8 7 5 5 70 10 8 5 5 95 13 10 8 5 120 15 12 9 5
g Fuse not required: breaking capacity Icn > Isc. (1) As % of Icu
Schemes: page 3/87
3/17
Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2, GV3P and GV3L
Auxiliary contacts
Type of contacts
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Instantaneous auxiliary GV AN, GV AD Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14 and UL 508 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14 and UL 508 V V A A C.O. 690 600 6 5 100 000 AC-15/100 000 C.O. V VA kVA A 48
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) (associated insulation coordination) Conventional thermal current (Ith)
Fault signalling GV AD, GV AM11 (1) 690 300 2.5 1 1000 AC-14/1000 C.O. 48 48
Instantaneous auxiliary GV AE 250 (690 in relation to main circuit) 300 2.5 1 100 000 AC-15/100 000 C.O. 48 60 110 230 127 240 120 120 1.27 2.4 0.5
Mechanical durability (C.O.: Close - Open) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1. a.c. operation Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power, normal conditions Occasional breaking and making capacities, abnormal conditions Rated operational current (Ie) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1. d.c. operation Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power, normal conditions Occasional breaking and making capacities, abnormal conditions Rated operational current (Ie) Low power switching reliability of contact Minimum operational conditions d.c. operation Short-circuit protection Cabling, screw clamp terminals Number of conductors Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque
110 230 380 440 500 690 24 127 240 415 300 500 720 850 650 500 400 36 3 6 7 4.5 13 3.3 15 2.2 13 1.5 12 1 9 0.6
110 230 24 127 240 72 72 48
0.22 0.3 1.5 1
0.45 0.45 0.48 0.6 0.5 0.3 2
1.25 1
DC-13/100 000 C.O. V W W A 24 110 240 (2) 140 240 180 140 120 240 360 240 210 180 6 5 3 1.3 0.5 48 60
DC-13/1000 C.O. 24 24 48 15 60 9 50
DC-13/100 000 C.O. 24 24 48 15 60 9 50
100 50 1 0.3
100 50 1 0.3
0.15
0.15
V mA
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
GV AE: Number of failures for n million operating cycles (17 V-5 mA): = 10-6 17 5 By GB2 CBpp circuit-breaker (rating according to operational current for Ue y 415 V) or by gG fuse 10 A max 1 2 12.5 12.5 0.752.5 0.752.5 0.751.5 0.751.5 1.4 max 1.4 max GV AN only 0.752.5
GB2 CB06 or gG fuse 10 A max
Cabling, spring terminal connections GV2 Power pole GV AN20 GV AN11 GV AE1 GV AE20 GV AE11 GV AD10pp GV AD11pp F F F O F O F F F O F O
Flexible cable without cable end Operation of instantaneous auxiliary contacts 0 1
mm2
0.752.5
0.751.5 Operation of fault signalling contacts
GV3P, GV3L Power pole GV AN20 GV AN11 GV AE1 GV AE20 GV AE11 GV AD10pp F F F O F O F F F O F O O
1 GV AM11 Change of state following tripping on shortcircuit. GV AD10pp and GV AD01pp Change of state following tripping on shortcircuit, overload or undervoltage.
Contact open Contact Close
GV AED101 F GV AED011
(1) For application example of fault signalling contact and short-circuit signalling contact, see page 3/82. (2) Add an RC circuit type LA4 D to the load terminals, see page 5/81.
3/18
Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3ME80
Auxiliary contacts
Type of contacts Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts GV3 A01A07 690 600 (B600) 6 5 (B600) 100 000 48 110 220 380 127 240 415 AC-11/100 000 C.O. 350 500 4 6 24 12 4.5 48 800 20 3.5 60 850 20 2.2 110 440 500 690
Fault signalling contacts GV3 A08 and A09 690 600 (B600) 6 5 (B600) 1000 48 110 220 380 127 240 415 AC-11/1000 C.O. 800 12 3.5 60 850 15 2.2 110 440 500 690
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith)
Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, V UL 508 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 A Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, A UL 508 C.O. Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power V
1 2
Mechanical durability (C.O.: Close - Open) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 a.c. operation
VA Occasional breaking and making capacities Operational current (Ie) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 d.c. operation Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power kVA A V
700 15 1.5 220
700 15 1.5
400 10 0.6
240 460 2.4 5 24 8 3.6 48
450 12 1 220
450 12 1
200 8 0.3
3 4 5 6
DC-11/100 000 C.O. W 180 240 240 360 6 5 180 240 3 140 210 1.3 120 180 0.5
DC-11/1000 C.O. 120 120 180 180 5 2.5 90 135 1.5 70 105 0.7 60 90 0.3
Occasional breaking and making capacities Operational current (Ie) Short-circuit protection Connection Number of conductors Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Contact operation GV3 Power pole GV3 A01, A07 GV3 A02 GV3 A03 GV3 A05 GV3 A06 O F F F O F F F F F F O
Contact open Contact Close
W A
By GB2 CB08 circuit-breaker or gG fuse, 6A max 1 mm2 mm2 mm2 1 12.5 0.752.5 0.752.5 2 12.5 0.752.5 0.751.5 GV3 A08 and A09 change state following tripping on short-circuit or overload
7 8

9 10
Schemes: page 3/79
3/19
Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7
Auxiliary contacts
Auxiliary contact characteristics
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Type of contacts Rated insulation voltage(Ui) (associated insulation coordination) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Mechanical durability (C.O.: Close - Open) Operational current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 a.c. operation
Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
V A C.O.
GV7 AE11 690 6 50 000 AC-12 or AC-15. 50 000 C.O. 24 48 110 230/ 380/ 440 240 415 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 4 3 3
GV7 AB11 690 6 50 000 AC-12 or AC-15. 50 000 C.O. 24 48 110 230/ 380/ 440 240 415 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 3 2.5 2.5
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated operational current (Ie)
V AC-12 AC-15 A A
690 6 0.1
690 5 0.1
Operational current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 d.c. operation
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated operational current (Ie)
V DC-12 DC-14 A A V mA
DC-12 or DC-14. 50 000 C.O. 24 48 110 2.5 1 17 5 2.5 0.2 0.8 0.5
250 0.3
DC-12 or DC-14. 50 000 C.O. 24 48 110 2 2 0.1 0.5 0.25
250
0.03 0.5 12 5
Minimum operational conditions d.c. operation
Short-circuit protection Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end mm2 mm2 mm2
By GB2 CBpp circuit-breaker (rating according to operational current for Ue y 415 V) or gG fuse, 10 A max. 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor 1 x 1.5 conductor
Schemes: page 3/79
3/20
Characteristics

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GK3EF80
Auxiliary contacts
Characteristics of Start-Stop and fault signalling contacts

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 a.c. operation (C.O.: Close - Open) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V V A 500 500 6 AC-15. 20 000 C.O. 48 110/127 360 4000 6 500 12 000 4.5
1
220/240 800 20 000 3.5 380/415 850 20 000 2.2 440 700 15 000 1.5 500 700 15 000 1.5
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power
V VA
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Occasional breaking and making VA capacities Rated operational current (Ie) A Operational power and current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 d.c. operation (C.O.: Close - Open)
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Operational power Occasional breaking and making capacities Rated operational current (Ie)
V W W A
DC-13. 1000 C.O. 24 48 180 240 6 240 280 5
60 180 240 3
110 140 210 1.3
220 120 180 0.5
Short-circuit protection Cabling
Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
By GB2 CB08 circuit-breaker or gG fuse, 6A max 1 x 14 conductor 1 x 2.5 conductor 1 x 12.5 conductor or 2 x 12.5 conductors 0.8
Tightening torque
3/21
Characteristics

Electric trips
Characteristics of electric trips
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Circuit-breaker type Type of trip Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Conforming to IEC 60947-1
GV2 ME, GV2 P GV3P, GV3L GV AU GV AS 690 690 600 0.85 1.1Un 0.7 0.35 Un 12 8 3.5 1.1 600 0.7 1.1Un 0.75 0.2 Un 14 10.5 5 1.6
GV2ME only GV AX (1) 500 0.85 1.1 Un 0.7 0.35 Un 12 8 3.5 1.1
GV3 ME80 GV3 B 690 GV3 D 690
GV7 R GV7 AU 690 GV7 AS 690 600 0.7 1.1 Un 0.2 0.75 Ue
Operational voltage Drop-out voltage Inrush consumption
Conforming to CSA C22-2 n 14, V UL 508 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V V a c VA W VA W
600 (B600) 600 (B600) 600 0.81.1 Un 0.70.35 Un 12 7 7 2.5 0.85 1.1 Un 0.35 0.7 Ue < 10 <5 <5 <5
Sealed consumption
a c
Operating time
Conforming to IEC 60947-1 ms
From the moment the voltage reaches its operational value until opening of the circuitbreaker. 1015 10 15 < 50 100 % 100 % 1 or 2 12.5 0.752.5 0.752.5 1.2 100 % 1 1.5 1.5 1 1.2
On-load factor Cabling Number of conductors Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Mechanical durability (C.O.: Close - Open) mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m C.O.
2 or 4 12.5 0.752.5 0.751.5 1.4 max
30 000 (GV2 ME and GV2 P) 50 % of the mechanical durability of the 10 000 (GV3 P and GV3 L) circuitbreaker (1) Wiring scheme of undervoltage trip for dangerous machines (conforming to INRS) on GV2 ME only, see page 3/82.
3/22
Characteristics

Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 and GV3
Accessories
Characteristics of 3-pole busbars GV2 Gppp and GV3Gp64

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Permissible peak current (I peak) Permissible thermal limit (I2t) Degree of protection Terminal block Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60439-1 V A kA kA2s Conforming to IEC 60529 GV2Gppp 690 63 11 104 IP 20 Yes GV3Gp64 690 115 20 300 IP 20
1 2 3 4 5
Characteristics of terminal blocks GV2 G05 and GV1 G09 (for GV2ME and GV2 P)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Degree of protection Connection Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60439-1 Conforming to IEC 60529 Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Flexible or solid cable AWG Tightening torque Connector Screw clamp terminals N.m N.m mm
2
V A
690 63 IP 20 1 x 1.5 to 25 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 6 conductors 1 x 1.5 to 16 conductor or 2 x 2.5 to 4 conductors 1 x 1.5 to 10 conductor or 2 x 1.5 to 2 conductors 1 AWG 4 2.2 1.7
mm2 mm
2
Characteristics of current limiters (GV2 ME and GV2 P)

Type Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated operational current (Ie) Operating threshold Connection Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V A A rms current A GV1 L3 690 63 32 1500 (non adjustable threshold) 1 conductor 1.525 1.525 1.516 2.2 2 conductors 1.510 2.510 1.5 4 LA9 LB920 690 63 32 1000 (non adjustable threshold) 1 conductor 1.525 1.525 1.516 2 conductors 1.510 1.510 1.5 4
6 7 8 9 10
3/23
Curves

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV2 ME and GV2 P

Time (s)
Average operating times at 20 C related to multiples of the setting current

10 000
1000
100
1
10
2 3
0,1
0,01
0,001
1,5
10
100
x the setting current (Ir)
1 3 poles from cold state 2 2 poles from cold state 3 3 poles from hot state
Schemes: page 3/76
3/24
Curves (continued)

Dynamic stress
Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 ME and GV2 P (3-phase 400/415 V)
I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V

Limited peak current (kA)
100
0.
=0 .25
2 3 4 5 6
10
0. 8
0.7
0.
7 8
0.
9
= co s 0.9 5
10
11
0,1 0,1
10
15 (12)
100 Prospective Isc (kA)
1 Maximum peak current 2 24 -32 A 3 20 -25 A 4 17 -23 A 5 13 -18 A 6 9 -14 A 7 6 -10 A 8 4 -6.3 A 9 2.5 -4 A 10 1.6 -2.5 A 11 1 -1.6 A 12 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 ME (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings)
Schemes: page 3/76
3/25
Curves (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 ME

Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)
Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone
100 1
2 3 4 5 6 7
10
9
1
10
0,1
0,01 0,1
10
1 24 -32 A 2 20 -25 A 3 17 -23 A 4 13 -18 A 5 9 -14 A 6 6 -10 A 7 4 -6.3 A 8 2.5 -4 A 9 1.6 -2.5 A 10 1 -1.6 A
Schemes: page 3/76
3/26
Curves (continued)

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 P
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 P

Sum of I2dt (kA2s)
100
1 2 3 4 5 6
10
3
7
8
1
0,1
0,01 0,1
10
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24 -32 A 20 -25 A 17 -23 A 13 -18 A 9 -14 A 6 -10 A 4 -6.3 A 2.5 -4 A 1.6 -2.5 A 1 -1.6 A
Schemes: page 3/76
3/27
Curves

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 P and GV3ME80
Thermal-magnetic tripping curves

Time (s)

10 000
4a
1000
4b
100
3a
10
3b 1a 2a 2b 1b
0,1
0,01
0,001
10
100
1a 3 poles from cold state (Ir mini.) : GV3P 1b 3 poles from cold state (Ir maxi.) : GV3P 2a 2 poles from cold state (Ir mini.) : GV3ME80 2b 2 poles from cold state (Ir maxi.) : GV3ME80 3a 3 poles from hot state (Ir mini.) : GV3P 3b 3 poles from hot state (Ir maxi.) : GV3P 4a 3 poles from hot state (Ir mini.) : GV3ME80 4b 3 poles from hot state (Ir maxi.) : GV3ME80
Schemes: page 3/77
3/28
Curves (continued)

Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 400/415 V)

Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Limited peak current (kA) 100
=0 .25
1 2
0. 5
3
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
0.
0.
0.7
10
=
15
0. 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Maximum peak current 56 -80 A 48 -65 A 37 -50 A 30 -40 A 23 -32 A 17 -25 A 12 -18 A 9 -13 A
Schemes: page 3/77
3/29
Curves (continued)

Maximum thermal limit on short-circuit

Sum of I2dt (kA2s) 1000
3
100
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10
10
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
56-80 A (GV3ME80) 48-65 A (GV3P65) 37-50 A (GV3P50) 30-40 A (GV3P40) 23-32 A (GV3P32) 17-25 A (GV3P25) 12-18 A (GV3P18) 9-13 A (GV3P13)
Schemes: page 3/77
3/30
Curves

Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV7 R

Time (s) 10 000

5000 2000 1000 500
200 100 50 20 10 5 2 1 0,5
1 2
3
0,2 0,1 0,05 0,02 0,01 0,005 0,002 0,001
1 1,12
10
20
30
40 50
70
100
1 Cold state curve 2 Cold state curve 3 1214 Ir In the event of total phase failure, tripping occurs after 4 s 20 %
Schemes: page 3/77
3/31
Curves (continued)

Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 400/415 V)

Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc)
For GV7 RE only
1 GV7 RE220 2 GV7 RE150 3 GV7 RE100
100 80 70 60
50 40 30
20
1 2
10 8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
For GV7 RS only
1 GV7 RS220 2 GV7 RS150 3 GV7 RS100
100 80 70 60 50 40 30
20
1 2
10 8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
Schemes: page 3/77
3/32
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit
Thermal limit (3-phase 400/415 V)
Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc)

For GV7 RE only
Sum of I2dt (A2s)
10
1 GV7 RE220 2 GV7 RE150 3 GV7 RE100
5x10 3x10
2x106
10
3
1 2 3
5x105 3x10 2x10

5
10
5x10 3x10 2x10
4 4
10
20
30
40
For GV7 RS only

Sum of I2dt (A2s)
10
1 GV7 RS220 2 GV7 RS150 3 GV7 RS100
5x106 3x10 2x10

6 6
10
1
5x105 3x10 2x10
5
2 3
10
5x104 3x10
4
2x104 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100 Prospective Isc (kA)
Schemes: page 3/77
3/33
Curves (continued)

Current limitation on short-circuit (3-phase 690 V)

Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc)
For GV7 RE only
50 40
1 GV7 RE220 2 GV7 RE150 and GV7 RE100
30
20
1 2
10
8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 20 Prospective Isc (kA)
For GV7 RS only

50 40
1 GV7 RS220 2 GV7 RS150 and GV7 RS100
30
20
1 2
10
8 7 6 5 4 2 3 4 5 6 10 20 Prospective Isc (kA)
Schemes: page 3/77
3/34
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit on short-circuit (3-phase 690 V)

Thermal limit Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc)
For GV7 RE only
Sum of I2dt (A2s)
6
3x10
1 GV7 RE220 2 GV7 RE150 and GV7 RE100
2x10
10
3
1 2
5x10
3x10
2x10
10
10
For GV7 RS only

Sum of I2dt (A2s)
6
3x10
1 GV7 RS220 2 GV7 RS150 and GV7 RS100
2x10
10
5x10
1 2
3x10
2x105
10
10
Schemes: page 3/77
3/35
Curves

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 RT
Thermal-magnetic tripping curves for GV2 RT

Time (s)
10 000
1000
100
3
10
2 1
0,1
0,01
0,001
10
100 k x Ir
Schemes: page 3/76
3/36
Curves

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L and GV2 LE
Tripping curves for GV2 L or LE combined with thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K
Time (s)
10 000
1000
100
3
1 2 3
10
0,1
0,01
0,001
10
100 x the setting current (Ir)
Schemes: page 3/85
3/37
Curves (continued)

Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE only (3-phase 400/415 V)
Dynamic stress I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
100
1
= 0.2 5
0. 5
3
10
= 0. 7
0. 8
0. 3
2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9
0.9
10
0,1 0,1
co
=0
.95
10
15
100
Prospective Isc (kA)
11
1 Maximum peak current 2 32 A 3 25 A 4 18 A 5 14 A 6 10 A 7 6.3 A 8 4 A 9 2.5 A 10 1.6 A 11 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 LE (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings).
Schemes: page 3/85
3/38
Curves (continued)

Dynamic stress
Current limitation on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE + thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K (3-phase 400/415 V)

100
1
=0 .25
0.
2 3
0. 5
10
4 5
0.
0.7
6 7
0.
8
0.9 co s = 5
10
0,1 0,1
10
15
100
11
1 Maximum peak current 2 32 A 3 25 A 4 18 A 5 14 A 6 10 A 7 6.3 A 8 4 A 9 2.5 A 10 1.6 A 11 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 LE (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings).
Schemes: page 3/85
3/39
Curves (continued)

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 LE
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 LE only

Thermal limit in kA2s in the magnetic operating zone Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)
100
2 3 4 5 6
10
8
1
0,1
0,01 0,1
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
32 A 25 A 18 A 14 A 10 A 6.3 A 4A 2.5 A 1.6 A
Schemes: page 3/85
3/40
Curves (continued)

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L
Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 L only

Sum of I2dt (kA2s)
100
1 2 3 4 5 6
10
0,1
0,01 0,1
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
25 A and 32 A 18 A 14 A 10 A 6.3 A 4A 2.5 A 1.6 A
Schemes: page 3/85
3/41
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV2 L and GV2 LE + thermal overload relay LRD or LR2 K
Sum of I2dt (kA2s)
100
2 1 3 4 5 6
10
8
1
0,1
10
0,01 0,1
10
15
1 32 A (GV2 LE32) 2 25 A and 32 A (GV2 L32) 3 18 A 4 14 A 5 10 A 6 6.3 A 7 4 A 8 2.5 A 9 1.6 A 10 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short-circuit of GV2 LE (14, 18, 23 and 25 A ratings).
Dimensions: pages 3/84
Schemes: page 3/85
3/42
Curves

Tripping curves for GV3L and GK3EF80 combined with thermal overload relay LRD 33
Average operating time at 20 C without prior current flow
Time (s)
10 000
1000
100
A 1 2 3
10
0,1
0,01
0,001
10
100 x the setting current (Ir)
1 3 poles from cold state 2 2 poles from cold state 3 3 poles from hot state A Thermal overload relay protection zone B GK3EF80 and GV3L protection zone
Schemes: page 3/85
3/43
Curves (continued)

Dynamic stress
Current limitation on short-circuit for GV3L and GK3EF80 (3-phase 400/415 V)

50
3
10
3 4 5
6 7
10
100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Maximum peak current GK3EF80 GV3L65 GV3L50 GV3L40 GV3L32 GV3L25
Schemes: page 3/85
3/44
Curves (continued)

Thermal limit on short-circuit for GV3L and GK3EF80

Thermal limit in A2s Sum of I2dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V
Sum of I2dt (A2s)
1000
2 3 4 5 6 1
100
10
1 1 10 100
1 2 3 4 5 6
GK3EF80 GV3L65 GV3L50 GV3L40 GV3L32 GV3L25
Schemes: page 3/85
3/45
References

526134
Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 15 kW/400 V, with screw clamp terminals

GV2 ME with pushbutton control
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V 690 V P Icu Ics P Icu Ics (1) P Icu (1) kW kA % kW kA % kW kA GV2 ME10 0.06 0.09 g g 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 g g g g g g g g g g 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 116 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416 GV2ME02 GV2ME03 GV2ME04 GV2ME05 GV2ME06 GV2ME07 GV2ME08 GV2ME10 GV2ME14 GV2ME16 GV2ME20 GV2ME21 GV2ME22 (3) GV2ME32 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 Setting range of thermal trips Ics (1) (2) % A 0.10.16 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 1.5 Reference Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GV2ME01
kg 0.260
0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
g g g
g g g
0.37 g 0.55 g 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 g g 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
g g g
g g g
g g 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
g g g
g g g
g g 50 10 10 6 6 4 4
g g 100 100 100 75 75 75 75 75
g g 15 15 15 15 10
g g 50 50 40 40 50
18.5 3 22 3
18.5 4
To order thermal magnetic circuit-breakers with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of reference selected above. Example: GV2ME08 becomes GV2ME086. Thermal magnetic circuit-breakers GV2ME with built-in auxiliary contact block With instantaneous auxiliary contact block (composition, see page 3/55): b GV AE1, add suffix AE1TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2 ME01AE1TQ. b GV AE11, add suffix AE11TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2 ME01AE11TQ. b GV AN11, add suffix AN11TQ to the motor circuit-breaker reference selected above. Example: GV2 ME01AN11TQ. These circuit-breakers with built-in contact block are sold in lots of 20 units in a single pack.
(1) As % of Icu. (2) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob. (3) Maximum rating which can be mounted in enclosures GV2 MC or MP, please consult your Regional Sales Office. g > 100 kA.
Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 15 kW/400 V, with lugs
Schemes: page 3/76
3/46

526135
Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 11 kW, with spring terminal connections

GV2 ME (1) with pushbutton control
400/415 V P kW 0.06 GV2 MEpp3 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 11 Icu kA g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 15 15 15 15 15 Ics (2) % g g g g g g g g g g g g g g 50 50 40 40 40 500 V P kW 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 Icu kA g g g g g g g 50 10 10 6 6 4 4 Ics (2) % g g g g g g g 100 100 100 75 75 75 75 Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 Setting range of thermal trips (3) A 0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 1.5 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 Reference Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GV2 ME013 GV2 ME023 GV2 ME033 GV2 ME043 GV2 ME053 GV2 ME063 GV2 ME073 GV2 ME083 GV2 ME103 GV2 ME143 GV2 ME163 GV2 ME203 GV2 ME213 GV2 ME223
kg 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.260 0.260
Contact blocks
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Mounting Front LH side Maximum number 1 2 Type of contacts N/O + N/C N/O + N/O N/O + N/C N/O + N/O Sold in lots of 10 10 1 1 Unit reference GV AE113 GV AE203 GV AN113 GV AN203 Weight kg 0.030 0.030 0.060 0.060
Accessory
Description Cable end reducer LA9 D99 (1) For connection of conductors from 1 to 1.5 mm2, the use of an LA9D99 cable end reducer is recommended. (2) Maximum rating which can be mounted in enclosures GV2 MC or MP, please consult your Regional Sales Office (3) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob. g > 100 kA. Application For connection of conductors from 1 to 1.5 mm2 Sold in lots of 20 Unit reference LA9 D99 Weight kg
Schemes: page 3/76
3/47
References

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 P, GV3 P and GV3ME80
526137
Motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 30 kW / 400V

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V 690 V P Icu Ics P Icu Ics P Icu (1) (1) kW kA % kW kA % kW kA Setting range of thermal trips (2) A Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A Reference Weight
1 2 3 4
GV2P: control by rotary knob

g g g g g 50 42 10 10 10 10 g g g g g 100 75 75 75 75 75
Ics (1) %
kg
GV2P10
Screw clamp terminals g 0.06 g g 0.09 g g 0.12 g g 0.18 g g 0.25 g g 0.37 g 0.37 g 0.55 g 0.55 g 0.75 g 1.1 g 1.1 g 1.5 g 2.2 g 3 g g 3 5 g 5.5 g 7.5 7.5 50 50 9 9 50 50 11 11 50 50 15 15 35 50 18.5
0.37 0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 22
g g g 8 8 6 6 6 6 4 4 4
g g g 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
0.10.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 2025 2432
1.5 2.4 5 8 13 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 170 223 327 327 416
GV2 P01 GV2 P02 GV2 P03 GV2 P04 GV2 P05 GV2 P06 GV2 P07 GV2 P08 GV2 P10 GV2 P14 GV2 P16 GV2 P20 GV2 P21 GV2 P22 GV2 P32
0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350
526139
GV3P: control by rotary knob
5 6 7 8
GV3 P651
526140
Connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors (3) 5.5 100 100 7.5 12 50 11 6 50 9 12 50 15 6 50 7.5 100 100 11 100 100 15 12 50 18.5 6 50 18.5 12 50 22 6 50 15 100 100 22 12 50 37 6 50 18.5 50 100 30 12 50 45 6 50 22 50 100 45 12 50 55 6 50 30 50 100
913 1218 1725 2332 3040 3750 4865
182 252 350 448 560 700 910
GV3P13 GV3P18 GV3P25 GV3P32 GV3P40 GV3P50 GV3P65
0.960 0.960 0.960 0.960 0.960 0.960 0.960
GV3 P65
To assemble a GV3 P13 to P65 circuit-breaker with an LC1 D40A to D65A contactor, it is possible to use the circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block. To order this product, add the digit1 to the end of the references selected above. Example: GV3 P65 becomes GV3 P651.
Connection by lugs
Connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors, for assembly with a contactor
To order thermal magnetic circuit-breakers with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of reference selected above. Example: GV3P18 becomes GV3P186. GV3ME80: pushbutton control, screw clamp terminals
37 15 50 45 4 100 55 2 100 5680 GV3 ME80 (4) 0.700
9 10
GV2 (5) To obtain a GV2P motor circuit-breaker, UL 508 type E, combine: b a circuit-breaker GV2PppH7 (except 32 A), b and a Large Spacing adapter GV2GH7. GV3 (6) To obtain a motor-circuit-breaker GV3P, UL 508 type E, use the following with the circuit-breaker: b a Large Spacing cover GV3G66, b a short-circuit signalling contact GVAM11. GV3 with connection by lugs (6) To obtain a motor-circuit-breaker GV3P, UL 508 type E, with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of reference selected above and use the following with the circuit-breaker: b two IP20 covers LAD96570, b a short-circuit signalling contact GVAM11.
(1) As % of Icu. (2) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob. (3) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. Require use of an insulated Allen key, in compliance with local wiring regulations. (4) Recommended for use in association with a contactor. (5) Accessory: see page 3/67. (6) Accessories: see page 3/57. g > 100 kA. Dimensions: pages 3/70 to 3/73
Motor circuit-breakers up to 50 hp / 600 V, UL 508 type E
3/48
References

526138
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV7 R with screw clamp terminals

Control by rocker lever
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V 500 V P Icu Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1) kW kA % kW kA % 7.5 36 100 9 18 100 9 36 100 11 18 100 GV7 RE40 7.5 9 9 11 70 70 36 36 70 70 36 70 36 70 36 70 36 70 35 35 70 70 35 35 70 70 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 9 11 11 15 11 15 18.5 22 18.5 30 30 45 55 45 55 75 90 75 90 110 132 160 110 132 160 50 50 18 18 50 50 18 18 50 18 50 18 18 50 50 18 50 30 30 50 50 30 30 30 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Setting range of thermal trips A 1220 1220 1525 1525 2540 2540 3050 3050 4880 4880 60100 60100 90150 90150 132220 132220 Reference Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
660/690 V P Icu kW kA 11 8 15 8 11 15 15 18.5 15 18.5 22 22 30 30 55 55 75 75 90 110 90 110 160 200 160 200 10 10 8 8 10 10 8 10 8 10 8 10 8 10 8 8 10 10 8 8 10 10
Ics (1) % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
GV7 RE20 GV7 RS20 GV7 RE25 GV7 RS25 GV7 RE40 GV7 RS40 GV7 RE50 GV7 RS50 GV7 RE80 GV7 RS80 GV7 RE100 GV7 RS100 GV7 RE150 GV7 RS150 GV7 RE220 GV7 RS220
kg 2.010 2.010 2.010 2.010 2.010 2.010 2.015 2.015 2.040 2.040 2.040 2.040 2.020 2.020 2.350 2.350
526141
9 11 18.5 18.5 22 22 GV7 RS220 37 37 45 45 55 75 55 75 90 110 90 110
(1) As % of lcu
Schemes: page 3/77
3/49
References

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 RT
526142
For motors with high current peak on starting

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220/ 400/ 440 V 500 V 690 V 230 V 415 V kW kW kW kW kW 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.12 GV2 RT 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 7.5 9 11 0.37 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 Setting range of thermal trips (1) A 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 1723 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 8 13 22 33 51 78 138 200 280 400 400 Reference Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GV2 RT03 GV2 RT04 GV2 RT05 GV2 RT06 GV2 RT07 GV2 RT08 GV2 RT10 GV2 RT14 GV2 RT16 GV2 RT20 GV2 RT21
kg 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350
0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 4 5.5
(1) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob.
Schemes: page 3/76
3/50

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 RT
526142
For primaries of 3-phase transformers

Standard power ratings 230/240 V 400/415 V 440 V kW kW kW 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 10 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 10 500 V kW 0.63 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 10 12.5 690 V kW 1 1.6 2 2.5 4 5 6.3 10 12.5 10 Setting range of thermal trips (1) A 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46.3 610 914 1318 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 8 13 22 33 51 78 138 200 280 400 Reference Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GV2 RT03 GV2 RT04 GV2 RT05 GV2 RT06 GV2 RT07 GV2 RT08 GV2 RT10 GV2 RT14 GV2 RT16 GV2 RT20
kg 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350 0.350
GV2 RT
Accessory (2)
Description Padlockable external operator (IP 54) black handle, blue legend plate Reference GV2 AP03 Weight kg 0.280
(1) The thermal trip setting must be within the range marked on the graduated knob. (2) Other accessories such as mounting, cabling and marking accessories are identical to those used for GV2 ME motor circuitbreakers, see page 3/57.
Schemes: page 3/76
3/51
References

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 LE
526144
Magnetic motor circuit-breakers from 0.06 to 15 kW

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P Icu 500 V Ics (1) P kW Icu kA 690 V Ics (1) P kW Icu kA Ics (1) A 0.4 0.4 0.63 0.63 1 1 1 1 1.6 1.6 2.5 2.5 4 4 6.3 10 10 10 14 14 18 25 25 32 A 5 5 8 8 13 13 13 13 Magnetic protection rating
1 2
GV2L: control by rocker lever, connection by screw clamp terminals

Tripping current Id 20 % Use in Reference association with thermal overload relay LR2 K0302 GV2 LE03 LR2 K0304 GV2 LE03 LR2 K0304 GV2 LE04 LR2 K0305 GV2 LE04 LR2 K0305 GV2 LE05 LR2 K0306 GV2 LE05 LR2 K0306 GV2 LE05 LR2 K0306 GV2 LE05 LR2 K0307 GV2 LE06 LR2 K0307 GV2 LE06 LR2 K0308 GV2 LE07 LR2 K0308 GV2 LE07 LR2 K0310 GV2 LE08 LR2 K0312 GV2 LE08 LR2 K0312 GV2 LE10 LR2 K0314 GV2 LE14 LR2 K0316 GV2 LE14 LRD 14 LRD 16 GV2 LE14 GV2 LE16 Weight
kW kA 0.06 g 0.09 g GV2 LE10 0.12 g 0.18 g
g g g g g g g g g g g g g 50 50 40 40 50
g g g g g g 100 100 100 75 75 75 75 75
g g g g 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
kg 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330
0.37 g
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0.55 g
0.25 g
0.75 g 1.1 1.5 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 g 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
0.37 g 0.55 g
0.37 g 0.55 g 0.75 g 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 g g g 50 10 10 6 6 4 4
22.5 22.5 33.5 33.5 51 51 78 138 138 138 170 170 223 327 327 416
0.75 g 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 g g g g g 15 15 15 15 10
LR2 K0321 GV2 LE16 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 22 LRD 32 GV2 LE20 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE22 GV2 LE32
18.5 3 22 3
18.5 4
(1) As % of Icu. g > 100 kA.
Schemes: page 3/85
3/52
References

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L, GV3 L and GK3EF80
Motor circuit-breakers from 0.09 to 30 kW

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P Icu 500 V Ics (1) P Icu 690 V Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1)
526145
GV2L: Control by rotary knob, connection by screw clamp terminals

Magnetic protection rating Tripping current Id 20 % Use in Reference association with thermal overload relay (class 10 A) LRD 03 LRD 04 LRD 04 LRD 05 LRD 05 LRD 06 LRD 05 LRD 06 LRD 06 LRD 07 LRD 08 LRD 08 LRD 08 LRD 10 LRD 12 LRD 14 LRD 14 LRD 16 LRD 16 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 22 LRD 32 GV2 L03 GV2 L04 GV2 L04 GV2 L05 GV2 L05 GV2 L05 GV2 L05 GV2 L06 GV2 L06 GV2 L07 GV2 L08 GV2 L08 GV2 L08 GV2 L10 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L16 GV2 L16 GV2 L20 GV2 L22 GV2 L22 GV2 L32 Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6
GV2 L10
kW 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15
kA g g g g g g g g g g 50 50 50 50 35
g g g g g g g g g g 50 50 50 50 50
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 3 4 7.5 9 11 15 18.5
kA g g g g g g 10 10 10 10 10 10
g g g g g g 100 75 75 75 75 75
kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22
kA g g g g 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
g g g g 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
A 0.4 0.63 0.63 1 1 1 1 1.6 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 10 14 14 18 25 25 32
A 5 8 8 13 13 13 13 22.5 22.5 33.5 51 78 138 138 170 170 223 327 327 416
kg 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330 0.330
526146
GV3 L65
GV3L: control by rotary knob, connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P Icu 500 V Ics (1) P kW 15 Icu kA 12 690 V Ics (1) P Icu Ics (1) A 25 32 40 50 65 A 350 448 560 700 910 Magnetic protection rating Tripping current Id 20 % Use in Reference association with thermal overload relay (class 10 A) LRD325 LRD332 LRD340 LRD350 LRD365 GV3L25 GV3 L32 GV3 L40 GV3 L50 GV3 L65 Weight
kW kA 11 100 15 100
100 100 100 100 100
50 50 50 50 50
kW kA 18.5 6 22 37 45 55 6 6 6 6
50 50 50 50 50
kg 0.960 0.960 0.960 0.960 0.960
18.5 12 22 30 37 12 12 12
18.5 50 22 30
526147
7 8 9 10
50 50
Connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors, for assembly with a contactor
To assemble a GV3 L25 to L65 circuit-breaker with an LC1 D40A to D65A contactor, it is possible to use the circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block. To order this product, add the digit1 to the end of the references selected above. Example: GV3 L65 becomes GV3 L651.
Connection by lugs
To order these circuit-breakers with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of reference selected above. Example: GV3L32 becomes GV3L326. GK3: control by rotary knob, connection by screw clamp terminals
37 35 25 55 15 30 80 1040 LRD 3363 GK3 EF80 0.795
GK3EF80
(1) As % of Icu. Associated current limiter or fuses, where required. See characteristics page 3/17. g > 100 kA.
Dimensions: page 3/84 and 3/85
Schemes: page 3/85
3/53
1 2 3
GV2 ME GV2 AK00 GV1 L3
GV AX
4
GV AM11
GV AD
5 6
GV AM11 GV2 P
GV AU
7 8 9 10
GV AN GV AN GV2 L
GV AS
GV AE11, GV AE20
GV AE1 GV2 LE GV AE1
3/54
References

Add-on blocks and accessories
Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuitbreakers GV2 with screw clamp connections
Contact blocks
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Mounting Front (1) Maximum number 1 Type of contacts N/O or N/C (2) N/O + N/C N/O + N/O N/O + N/C N/O + N/O N/O (fault) + N/O + N/C N/C (fault) + N/O + N/C C/O common point Sold in lots of 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit reference GV AE1 GV AE11 GV AE20 GV AN11 GV AN20 GV AD1010 GV AD1001 GV AD0110 GV AD0101 GV AM11 Weight kg 0.015 0.020 0.020 0.050 0.050 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.045
Side (LH) Fault signalling contact + instantaneous auxiliary contact Short-circuit signalling contact Side (3) (LH)
2 1
Side (LH)
Electric trips
Mounting Voltage Reference Weight kg 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105
Undervoltage or shunt trips (4)

Side (1 block on RH side of circuit-breaker) 24 V 48 V 100 V 100110 V 110115 V 120127 V 127 V 200 V 200220 V 220240 V 380400 V 415440 V 415 V 440 V 480 V 500 V 600 V 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz GV Ap025 GV Ap026 GV Ap055 GV Ap056 GV Ap107 GV Ap107 GV Ap115 GV Ap116 GV Ap125 GV Ap115 GV Ap207 GV Ap207 GV Ap225 GV Ap226 GV Ap385 GV Ap386 GV Ap415 GV Ap416 GV Ap385 GV Ap415 GV Ap505 GV Ap505
Undervoltage trip, INRS (can only be mounted on GV2 ME) Safety device for dangerous machines conforming to INRS and VDE 0113
Side (1 block on RH side of circuit-breaker GV2 ME) 110115 V 127 V 220240 V 380400 V 415440 V 440 V Mounting Front (1) At top (GV2 ME and GV2 P) Independent 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz Maximum number 1 1 1 GV AX115 GV AX116 GV AX115 GV AX225 GV AX226 GV AX385 GV AX386 GV AX415 GV AX385 Reference GV2 AK00 (6) GV1 L3 LA9 LB920 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 Weight kg 0.150 0.130 0.320

Description Visible isolation block (5) Limiters
LA9 LB920
(1) Mounting of a GV AE contact block or a GV2 AK00 visible isolation block on GV2 P and GV2 L. (2) Choice of N/C or N/O contact operation, depending on which way round the reversible block is mounted. (3) The GV AD is always mounted next to the circuit-breaker. (4) To order an undervoltage trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with a U, example: GV AU025. To order a shunt trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with an S, example: GV AS025. (5) Visible isolation of the 3 poles upstream of circuit-breaker GV2 P and GV2 L. Visible isolation block GV2 AK00 cannot be used with motor circuit-breakers GV2P32 and GV2L32 (Ith max = 25 A). (6) Ie Max = 32 A. Dimensions, schemes: pages 3/70 to 3/89
3/55
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3/56
References
Thermal-magnetic and magnetic motor circuitbreakers GV2 with screw clamp connections Accessories
Accessories
Description Adapter plates Application For mounting a GV2 ME or GV2 LE by screw fixing For mounting a GV2 ME or GV2 P and contactor LC1D09D38 with front faces aligned Height compensation plate Combination blocks 7,5 mm Between GV2 and contactor LC1 K or LP1 K Between GV2 and contactor LC1 D09D38 Between GV2 mounted on LAD 311 and contactor LC1 D09D38 Motor starter adapter plate Description Sets of 3-pole 63 A busbars With 3-pole connection for mounting a GV2 and a contactor LC1 D09D25 Application 2 tap-offs Sold in lots of 10 1 10 10 10 10 1 Pitch mm 45 54 72 3 tap-offs 4 tap-offs 45 54 45 54 72 5 tap-offs Description Protective end cover Terminal block for supply to one or more GV2 G busbar sets Cover for terminal block Flexible 3-pole connection for connecting a GV2 to a contactor LC1-D09D25 Set of connections upstream/downstream Large Spacing adapter UL 508 type E Clip-in marker holders (supplied with each circuit-breaker) Application For unused busbar outlets Connection from the top Can be fitted with current limiter GV1 L3 (GV2 ME and GV2 P) For mounting in modular panels Centre distance between mounting rails: 100120 mm For connecting GV2 ME to a printed circuit board For GV2PppH7 (except 32 A) For GV2 P, GV2 L, GV2 LE and GV2 RT (8 x 22 mm) 54 Sold in lots of 5 1 1 10 10 10 1 100 GV2 G245 GV2 G254 GV2 G272 GV2 G345 GV2 G354 GV2 G445 GV2 G454 GV2 G472 GV2 G554 Unit reference GV1 G10 GV1 G09 GV2 G05 LA9 E07 GV1 G02 GV2 GA01 GV2GH7 LA9 D92 Unit reference GV2 AF02 LAD 311 GV1 F03 GV2 AF01 GV2 AF3 GV2 AF4 GK2 AF01 Reference Weight kg 0.021 0.040 0.003 0.020 0.016 0.016 0.120 Weight kg 0.036 0.038 0.042 0.058 0.060 0.077 0.085 0.094 0.100 Weight kg 0.005 0.040 0.115 0.005 0.013 0.045 0.040 0.001
3/57
1 2 3 4 5 6
6 Allows a circuit-breaker or a starter-controller installed in back of an enclosure to be operated from the front of the enclosure. A rotary handle can be black or red/yellow, IP54 or IP65. It includes a function for locking the circuit breaker or the starter in the O (Off) or I (On) position (depending of the type of rotary handle) by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 4 to 8 mm. The extended shaft must be adjusted to use in different size enclosures. The IP54 rotary handle is fixed with a nut ( 22) to make easier the assembling. The new Laser Square tool brings the accuracy to align the circuit breaker and the rotary handle.
Extended Rotary Handle
Description 1 Kit handle + mounting system 2 Universal handle 3 Shaft 4 Bracket 5 Shaft support plate for deep enclosure 6 Retrofit accessory 7 Laser Square accessory 3 2 Kit handle + mounting system
Description For GV2 P/L
Padlockable external operators for GV2P and GV2L
Item Reference Black handle, front plate, with trip status, IP 54 Red handle, front plate, with trip status, IP 54 1 1 GV2 APN01 GV2 APN02 GV2 APN04 GV2 AP03
Weight kg 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.280
Red handle, front plate, without trip status, IP 65 1 For GV2 LE Padlocking in On and Off position Black handle, blue front plate, IP 54 Black handle, IP 54 Red handle, IP 54 Red handle, IP 65 -
Universal handle
For GV2 P/L 2 2 2 3 4 Depth u 250 mm 5 6 7 GV APB54 GV APR54 GV APR65 GV APA1 GV APH02 GV APK11 GV APP1 GV APL01 GV APSFR GV APSEN GV APSDE GV APSES GV APSCN GV APSPT GV APSRU GV APSIT Reference GV2 V03 Weight kg 0.092 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.110 0.300 0.030 0.100 0.160
7 8
7
Shaft
For GV2 P/L L = 315 mm
Bracket
For GV2 P/L
Shaft support plate for deep enclosure

For GV2 P/L For GV2 P/L
Retrofit accessory Laser Square accessory

For GV2 P/L
Sticker
Sold in lots of
For French For English For German For Spanish For Chinese For Portuguese 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 -
9 10
Warning label
For Russian For Italian
Padlocking device
Description For all GV2 device For use with up to 4 padlocks, 6 mm shank max. (padlocks not included)
3/58
3/59
1
GV3 G264 GV3 G364
2 3
GV AM11
4 5 6
GV3 P
GV AM11
GV AE113, GV AE203, GV AED 1013, GV AED 0113
GV3 L GV AE11, GV AE20,
7 8 9
GV3 APN02
GV AED 101, GV AED 011
GV AE1 GV AE1
10
GV2 V03
3/60
References
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3P and GV3L

Contact blocks
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Mounting Front Maximum Type of number contacts 1 N/O or N/C (1) N/O + N/C N/O + N/O 2 N/O + N/C N/O + N/O 1 N/O (fault) + N/O N/O (fault) + N/C N/O (fault) + N/O 1 + N/C N/C (fault) + N/O + N/C 1 C/O common point Sold in lots of 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit reference GV AE1 GV AE11 (2) GV AE20 (2) GV AN11 (2) GV AN20 (2) GVAED101 (2) GVAED011 (2) GV AD1010 GV AD1001 GV AD0110 GV AD0101 GV AM11 Weight kg 0.015 0.020 0.020 0.050 0.050 0.020 0.020 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.045
Side (LH) Fault signalling contact + instantaneous auxiliary contact GV3G66 Front Side (3) (LH)
Short-circuit signalling contact
Side (LH)
Electric trips - undervotlage or shunt (4)

Mounting Side (1 block on RH side of circuit-breaker) Voltage 24 V 48 V 100 100110 V 110115 V LAD96575 120127 V 127 V 200 V 200220 V 220240 V 380400 V 415440 V 415 V 440 V 480 V 500 V 600 V 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz Reference GV Ap025 GV Ap026 GV Ap055 GV Ap056 GV Ap107 GV Ap107 GV Ap115 GV Ap116 GV Ap125 GV Ap115 GV Ap207 GV Ap207 GV Ap225 GV Ap226 GV Ap385 GV Ap386 GV Ap415 GV Ap416 GV Ap385 GV Ap415 GV Ap505 GV Ap505 Reference GV3Ppp and GV3Lpp GV3Ppp and GV3Lpp GV3Ppp GV3Ppp6 and GV3Lpp6 GV3Ppp6 and GV3Lpp6 GV3Ppp and GV3Lpp GV3 Ppp and GV3Lpp GV3Ppp6 and GV3Lpp6 GV3G264 GV3G364 GV3G66 LAD96570 LAD 96575 LAD ALLEN4 (5) GV2V03 LAD 7X3 Weight kg 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 0.105 Weight kg 0.150 0.250 0.020 0.021 0.010 0.026 0.092 0.150
LAD96570
LAD7X3
Accessories
Description Sets of 3-pole 2 tap-off 115 A busbars 3 tap-off Pitch: 64 mm Cover Large Spacing UL 508 type E (Only one cover required on supply side) IP20 cover (Two covers required per breaker) IP 20 cover for use when mounted with circuit-breakers Size 4 Allen key, insulated, 1000 V Padlocking device for use with up to 4 padlocks (not supplied) 6 mm shank max. Retrofit plate Replacement of GV3 ME with GV3 Ppp or GV2 Ppp for screw fixing
(1) Choice of N/C or N/O contact operation, depending on which way round the reversible block is mounted. (2) Contact blocks available in version with spring terminal connections. Add a figure 3 at the end of the references selected above. Example: GVAED101 becomes GVAED1013. (3) The GV ADpp is always mounted next to the circuit-breaker. (4) To order an undervoltage trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with a U, example: GV AU025. To order a shunt trip: replace the dot (p) in the reference with an S, example: GV AS025. (5) Sold in lots of 5.
3/61
References
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3P and GV3L

1 2 3 4
3
Allows a circuit-breaker or a starter-controller installed in back of an enclosure to be operated from the front of the enclosure. A rotary handle can be black or red/yellow, IP54 or IP65. It includes a function for locking the circuit breaker or the starter in the O (Off) or I (On) position (depending of the type of rotary handle) by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 4 to 8 mm. The extended shaft must be adjusted to use in different size enclosures. The IP54 rotary handle is fixed with a nut ( 22) to make easier the assembling. The new Laser Square tool brings the accurency to align the circuit breaker and the rotary handle.
Extended Rotary Handle
Description 1 Kit handle + mounting system 2 Universal handle 3 Shaft 4 Bracket 5 Shaft support plate for deep enclosure 6 Retrofit accessory 7 Laser Square accessory Kit handle + mounting system
Description For GV3 P/L
Padlockable external operators for GV3 and GV3L
Item Reference Black handle, front plate, with trip status, IP 54 Red handle, front plate, with trip status, IP 54 1 1 GV3 APN01 GV3 APN02 GV3 APN04 GV APB54 GV APR54 GV APR65 GV APA1 GV APH03 GV APK12 GV APP1 GV APL01 GV APSFR GV APSEN GV APSDE GV APSES GV APSCN GV APSPT GV APSRU GV APSIT
Weight kg 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.110 0.300 0.030 0.100 0.160
2
For GV3 P/L
Red handle, front plate, without trip status, IP 65 1
Universal handle
5
5
Black handle, IP 54 Red handle, IP 54 Red handle, IP 65
2 2 2 3 4
Shaft
For GV3 P/L L = 315 mm
Bracket
6 7 8 9 10
For GV3 P/L
Shaft support plate for deep enclosure

For GV3 P/L For GV3 P/L Depth u 300 mm 5 6 7
Retrofit accessory Laser Square accessory

For GV3 P/L
Sticker
Warning label For French For English For German For Spanish
Sold in lots of
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 -
For Chinese For Portuguese For Russian For Italian
3/62
3/63
1 2 3
GV3 A01...A07
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GV3 A08 GV3 A09
3/64
References

Motor circuit-breakers GV3 ME80 and GK3EF80
For thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3ME80

Contact blocks
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (1 per circuit-breaker) Type of standard early break contacts N/C + N/O N/O + N/O N/C + N/O + N/O N/O + N/O + N/O N/O + N/O + 2 volt-free terminals N/C + N/O + 2 volt-free terminals N/C N/O Reference GV3 A01 GV3 A02 GV3 A03 GV3 A05 GV3 A06 GV3 A07 GV3 A08 GV3 A09 Weight kg 0,060 0.060 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.030 0.030
Fault signalling contacts (1)
Electric trips
Description Udervoltage trips (1) Voltages 50 Hz 110, 120, 127 V 220, 240 V 380, 415 V 110, 120, 127 V 220, 240 V 380, 415 V Reference 60 Hz 120, 127 V 277 V 440 V, 480 V 120, 127 V 277 V 440 V, 480 V GV3 B11 GV3 B22 GV3 B38 GV3 D11 GV3 D22 GV3 D38 Weight kg 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070
Shunt trips (1)
Accessory
Description Padlocking device, for locking the Start button (on open-mounted product) Sold in lots of 5 Unit reference GV1 V02 Weight kg 0.010
For magnetic circuit-breaker GK3 EF80

Contact blocks
Description Auxiliary contact blocks for On-Off signalling and control circuit test function (1 or 2 blocks per device) mounted on RH side of GK3 EF80 Instantaneous fault signalling contact blocks (1 or 2 blocks per device) mounted on LH side of GK3 EF80 Number of poles N/O N/O + N/O N/C + N/O N/O N/O + N/O N/C + N/O Reference GK2 AX10 GK2 AX20 GK2 AX50 GK2 AX12 GK2 AX22 GK2 AX52 Weight kg 0.025 0.031 0.031 0.025 0.031 0.031
Accessories
Description Padlocking device for padlocking the operator, using up to 3 padlocks (padlocks to be ordered separately) External operator for mounting on enclosure door. Red 40 knob on yellow plate, padlockable in position O (with up to 3 padlocks). Door locked when knob in position I, and when knob padlocked in position O. Reference GK3 AV01 Weight kg 0.020
GK3 AP03
0.300
(1) 1 voltage trip OR 1 fault signalling contact to be fitted inside the motor circuit-breaker.
Other versions
24 to 690 V, 50 or 60 Hz voltage trips for circuit-breakers GV3 ME80. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
3/65
1 2
3 4
3 4
GV7 RE, RS
GV7 AE11, AB11
5
GV7 AU, AS
6 7 8 9 10
3/66
References

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R with screw clamp connections
These allow remote indication of the circuit-breaker contact states. They can be used for signalling, electrical locking, relaying, etc. They are available in two versions: standard and low level. They include a terminal block and the auxiliary circuits leave the circuit-breaker through a hole provided for this purpose. They perform the following functions, depending on where they are located in the circuit-breaker:
Location 1 and/or 4 2 Function C/O contact Trip indication Application Indicates the position of the circuit-breaker poles Indicates that the circuit-breaker has tripped due to an overload, a short-circuit, a differential fault or the operation of a voltage trip (undervoltage or shunt trip), or of the push to trip test button. It resets when the circuit-breaker is reset. Indicates that the circuit-breaker has tripped due to an overload, a short-circuit or a differential fault. It resets when the circuit-breaker is reset. Reference GV7 AE11 GV7 AB11 Weight kg 0.015 0.015
Add-on auxiliary contacts
Electrical fault indication
Type Standard Low level
These make it possible to: b either differentiate a thermal fault from a magnetic fault, b or open the contactor only in the event of a thermal fault.
Voltage a 24...48 and c 2472 V z 110240 V Reference GV7 AD111 (1) GV7 AD112 (1) Weight kg 0.100 0.100
Fault discrimination devices
These allow the circuit-breaker to be tripped via an electrical control signal. b Undervoltage trip GV7 AU v Trips the circuit-breaker when the control voltage drops below the tripping threshold, which is between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage. v Circuit-breaker closing is only possible if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated voltage. Circuit-breaker tripping by a GV7 AU trip meets the requirements of IEC 60947-2. b Shunt trip GV7 AS Trips the circuit-breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 times the rated voltage. b Operation (GV7 AU or GV7 AS) v When the circuit-breaker has been tripped by a GV7 AU or AS, it must be reset either locally or by remote control. (For remote control, please consult your Regional Sales Office). v Tripping has priority over manual closing: if a tripping instruction is present, manual action does not result in closing, even temporarily, of the contacts. v Durability: 50 % of the mechanical durability of the circuit-breaker.
Type Undervoltage trip Voltage 48 V, 50/60 Hz 110130 V, 50/60 Hz 200240 V, 50/60 Hz 380440 V, 50/60 Hz 525 V, 50 Hz 48 V, 50/60 Hz 110130 V, 50/60 Hz 200240 V, 50/60 Hz 380440 V, 50/60 Hz 525 V, 50 Hz Reference GV7 AU055 (1) GV7 AU107 (1) GV7 AU207 (1) GV7 AU387 (1) GV7 AU525 (1) GV7 AS055 (1) GV7 AS107 (1) GV7 AS207 (1) GV7 AS387 (1) GV7 AS525 (1) Weight kg 0.105 0.110 0.110 0.105 0.100 0.105 0.110 0.110 0.105 0.100
Electric trips
Shunt trip
(1) For mounting of a GV7 AD or a GV7 AU or AS.
Characteristics: pages 3/18, 3/22 and 3/23
Schemes: page 3/79
3/67
1
ON ON
OFF
2
OFF
ON
GV7 AP04
O
GV7 AP01, AP02
3 4 5
GV7 RE, RS GV7 AP03
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
GV7 AP05
GV7 AC04 GV7 AC01
6
GV7 V01
7 8 9
GV7 AC03
GV7 RE, RS
GV7 AC04
GV7 AC01
10
3/68
References

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7 R with screw clamp connections
Accessories
Cabling accessories
Description Clip-on connectors for GV7 R Application Up to 150 A, 1.595 mm2 Up to 220 A, 1.5185 mm2 For use on contactors LC1 F115F185 Sold in lots of 3 3 1 1 2 2 1 Unit reference GV7 AC021 GV7 AC022 GV7 AC03 GV7 AC01 GV7 AC04 GV7 AC05 GV7 AC06 GV7 AC07 GV7 AC08 Weight kg 0.300 0.350 0.180 0.125 0.075 0.075 0.550 0.550 0.550
+ +
Spreader 3-pole (1) Terminal shields IP 405 (1) Phase barriers Insulating screens Kits for combination with contactor(2)
To increase the pitch to 45 mm Supplied with sealing accessory Safety accessories used when fitting of shields is impossible Ensure insulation between the connections and the backplate Allowing link between the circuit-breaker and the contactor. The cover provides protection against direct finger contact
GV7AC07
LC1 F225 and F265 1 LC1 D115 and D150 1
GV7AC08
Replaces the circuit-breaker front cover; secured by screws. It includes a device for locking the circuit-breaker in the O (Off) position by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not included). A conversion accessory allows the direct rotary handle to be mounted on the enclosure door. In this case, the door cannot be opened if the circuit-breaker is in the ON position. Circuit-breaker closing is inhibited if the enclosure door is open.
Description Direct rotary handle Type Black handle, black legend plate Red handle, yellow legend plate Adapter plate (3) Four mounting direct rotary handle on enclosure door Degree of protection IP 40 IP 40 IP 43 Reference GV7 AP03 GV7 AP04 GV7 AP05 Weight kg 0.205 0.205 0.100
Direct rotary handle
Allows a circuit-breaker installed in the back of an enclosure to be operated from the front of the enclosure. It comprises: b a unit which screws onto the front cover of the circuit-breaker, b an assembly (handle and front plate) to be fitted on the enclosure door, b an extension shaft which must be adjusted (distance between the mounting surface and the door: 185 mm minimum, 600mm maximum). It includes a device for locking the circuit-breaker in the O (Off) position by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not included). This prevents the enclosure door from being opened.
Description Extended rotary handle Type Black handle, black legend plate Red handle, yellow legend plate Degree of protection IP 55 IP 55 Reference GV7 AP01 GV7 AP02 Weight kg 0.775 0.775
Extended rotary handle
Allows circuit-breakers not fitted with a rotary handle to be locked in the O (Off) position by means of up to 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not included).
Description Locking device Application For circuit-breaker not fitted with a rotary handle Reference GV7 V01 Weight kg 0.100
Locking device
(1) Terminal shields cannot be used together with spreaders. (2) The kit comprises links, a protective shield and a depth adjustable metal bracket for the breaker. (3) This conversion accessory makes it impossible to open the door if the device is closed and prevents the device from being closed if the door is open.
Schemes: page 3/79
3/69
Dimensions
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME and GV2P
Dimensions
1 2
GV2 ME

GV AX

GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS, AX

Block GV AD, AM, AN Block GV AU, AS, AX
GV AE

X1
11
67,2
15
10
15,7
X1
46
44,5
45
16
9,3
9,3 81(1)
18
3 4 5
b GV2 MEpp 89 GV2 MEpp3 101 (1) Maximum X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 690 V
GV2 P

GV AD, AM, AN, AU, AS

Block GV AD, AM, AN Block GV AU, AS
GV2 AK00
14
98
32
X1
89
45
15
X2
26
50 82
44,5
61
9,3
9,3 81(1)
18
44,5
6 7 8 9 10
(1) Maximum X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 415 V, or 80 mm for Ue = 440 V, or 120 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V X2 = 40 mm
GV2 GH7
70
15
44,5
3/70
Mounting, dimensions
Mounting
GV2 ME
On 35 mm 5 rail On panel with adapter plate GV2 AF02 On pre-slotted plate AM1 PA AF1 EA4 On rails DZ5 MB201
1 2 3
4,2
15
35
50/60
50/60
50
80
35
35 GV2 AF02
DZ5 ME8 DZ5 MB201
c = 78.5 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5) c = 86 on AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)
GV2 P
On rail AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15) Panel mounted On pre-slotted plate AM1 PA Adapter plate GK2 AF01
60
45 AF1 EA4
35 5
4
105 5
44,5
55
44,5
45
5 6
135
84
84
106
13,5
13,5
24
9,5
35
54
Dimensions
GV2 AF01

GV2 AF3
Combination GV2 ME + TeSys d contactor

Combination GV2 ME + TeSys k contactor
Combination GV2 P + TeSys d contactor

152
7
b
79
45
8
c1 c 45
c1 c d1 d
GV2 P + b c1 c d1 d LC1 D09 D18 176.4 100.1 105.6 95 100.5
45
GV2 ME + b c1 c
LC1 D09 D18 176.4 94.1 99.6
LC1 D25 and D32 186.8 100.4 105.9
LC1 D25 and D32 186.8 106.4 111.9 95 100.5
9 10
3/71
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Dimensions (continued) GV2 AF4 + LAD 311

Combination GV2 ME + TeSys d contactor

Combination GV2 P + TeSys d contactor

125 3
125 3
234
c1 c d1 d
GV2 ME + b c1 c d1 d LC1 D09D18 176.4 103.1 135.6 107 112.5
45
c1 c
45
LC1 D25 and D32 186.8 136.4 141.9 107 112.5
GV2 P + b c1 c
LC1 D09D18 176.4 136.5 141.6
b 234
LC1 D25 and D32 186.8 142.4 147.9
GV2 ME + GV1 L3 (current limiter)

X1
7.5 mm height compensation plate GV1 F03

39
40
13
129
35
77
44,5
X1 = 10 mm for Ue = 230 V or 30 mm for 230 V < Ue y 690 V
3/72
X1
45
89

Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2P
Mounting
Mounting of external operator GV2 APN01, GV2 APN02 or GV2 APN04 for motor circuit-breakers GV2 P
Door cut-out
1
16 43,5 (1)
3,5
16
60
22
2 3
0,5...4 43 a 6 5,2 = =
(1) For IP65 only.
= 48
Mounting of external operator GV APH02 for motor circuit-breakers GV2 P

Door cut-out
3,5
16
43,5 (1)
48
173,4
60
22
0,5...4
= 48
48
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
16
43
= 64,1
(1) For IP65 only.
GV2 APNpp GV2 APNpp + GV APH02 GV2 APNpp + GV APK11 GV2 APNpp + GV APH02 + GV APK11
a Mini 140 250 -
Maxi 250 434 -
b Mini 151 250
Maxi 250 445
3/73
GV2ME, GV2P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sets of busbars GV2 G445, GV2 G454, GV2 G472, with terminal block GV2 G05
a 3
18
63
45
l 179 206 260 p 45 54 72 a 5 224 260 332
GV2G445 (4 x 45 mm) GV2G454 (4 x 54 mm) GV2 G472 (4 x 72 mm)
Number of tap-offs GV2 G445 GV2 G454 GV2 G472
6 269 314 404
7 314 368 476
8 359 422 548
Sets of busbars GV2 Gppp with terminal block GV1 G09

GV1 G09
38
Sets of busbars GV2 G245, GV2 G254, GV2 G272

GV2 G245 (2 x 45 mm) GV2 G254 (2 x 54 mm) GV2 G272 (2 x 72 mm)
l 89 98 116
Sets of busbars GV2 G554

260
Sets of busbars GV2 G345 and GV2 G354

GV2 G345 (3 x 45 mm) GV2 G354 (3 x 54 mm)
l 134 152
9 10
3/74
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2RT
GV2RT

Dimensions
X1
12,5
66
1
45 =
89
2 3
12,3
X1: Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue < 690 V
Mounting
Mounting of external operator GV2 AP03
X1
7,5
16
44
44,5
4
133282 6 = =
65
53
1,5...5
13
5
On pre-slotted plate AM1 PA On rails DZ5 MB
On 35 mm 7 rail
On panel with adapter plate GV2 AF02
4,2
44,5
AF1 EA4
15
35
6
50 60
DZ5 ME8
15
50/60
44,5
84,5
35
35
GV2 AF02
50/60
DZ5 MB201
7 8 9 10
GV2 A
c = 80 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5) c = 88 on AM1 DE200, ED200 (35 x 15)
3/75

GV3P
1 2
Dimensions
(1)
X1
(2)
68
64
132
X1
136
55
18
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X1 = Electrical clearance (ISC max) 40 mm for Ue y 500 V, 50 mm for Ue y 690 V
(1) Blocks GVANpp , GVADpp and GVAM11 (2) Blocks GV3 AUpp and GV3ASpp
Note: Leave a gap of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting add-on contact blocks. Horizontal mounting is possible up to 40 C
Mounting
Mounting with TeSys contactor LC1D40AD65A Side by side mounting with TeSys contactor LC1 D40AD65A (S-shape busbar system GV3 S)
231
136 120
119
136
55
Mounting on rail AM1 DE200 or AM1 ED201
Panel mounting, using M4 screws
68
144
64
136
37,5
3x4
Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1 PA
136
18,7 18,7
AF1 EA4
3/76
137,5
137,5
138

GV3P (continued) Busbar systems

Set of busbars GV3G264 Set of busbars GV3G364
119
183
1 2
16
Note: Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting add-on contact blocks. Horizontal mounting is possible up to 40 C.
16
Mounting
Mounting of external operator GV3 APN01, GV3 APN02 or GV3 APN04 for motor circuit-breakers GV3 P
Door cut-out
3
3,5 16 43,5 (1)
4 5 6
16
=
= = 48
16 43,5 (1)
60
22
0,5...4 43 a = 60
(1) For IP65 only.
Mounting of external operator GV APH03 for motor circuit-breakers GV3 P

Door cut-out
3,5
48
16
213,4
7 8 9
60
22
= 48
0,5...4 43 b = 73,8 =
(1) For IP65 only.
GV3 APNpp GV3 APNpp + GV APK12 GV3 APNpp + GV APH03 GV3 APNpp + GV APH03 + GV APK12
a Mini 189 300 -
Maxi 300 481 -
b Mini 200 300
Maxi 300 492
48
10
3/77
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3ME80
1 2
Dimensions
4,5 17,3
GV3ME80
X1
20 =
100110
120
70
45
(1)
113
X1
22
77,5
5,5
21,2 61,2
70,4
3 4
(1) Blocks GV3A01A07.
Mounting
Mounting on rail AM1 DE200 or AM1 ED201
Panel mounting, using M4 screws 61,2 =
Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1 PA
100110
122,5
113
20 20 21,2
113
20
AF1 EA4
5 6 7 8 9 10
3/78
100110
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV7R
GV7R

Dimensions
35 = =

1 2 3 4 5 6

161
81 86 111 (1)
(1) 126 for GV7 Rp220.
= 105
Motor circuit-breakers with terminal shields or phase barriers GV7 R + GV7 AC01 or AC04
(2) Phase barriers: GV7 AC04 (3) Terminal shields: GV7 AC01
Combination of GV7 R and TeSys contactor LC1 F with kit GV7 AC0p

x2
125
a b c GV7 R + LC1 F115 or 119 334 181 F150 + GV7 AC06 GV7 R + LC1 F185 + 119 338 188 GV7 AC06 GV7 R + LC1 F225 + 131 358 188 GV7 AC07 GV7 R + LC1 F265 + 131 364 215 GV7 AC07 Minimum distance between 2 circuit-breakers mounted side by side = 0
7
x1
x1
8
x1 0 5 10 20 x2 30 35 35 35
Painted or insulated metal plate, insulation or insulated bar Bare U y 440 V metal 440 V < U < 600 V plate U u 600 V
x2
9 10
3/79
GV7R
1 2
Panel mounting

Mounting on 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB201

DZ5 ME5
135
35
35
35
125
15
35
3 4 5
Flush-mounting
1 circuit-breaker GV7 R n circuit-breakers GV7 R side by side
47
125
76
108
=
G 85 85 85 85 85 H 120 120 120 120 120
29
88
== 29
83
= 108
Combination of GV7 R and TeSys contactor LC1 F with kit GV7 AC0p

6 7 8 9 10
GV7 R + LC1 F115 + GV7 AC06 GV7 R + LC1 F150 + GV7 AC06 GV7 R + LC1 F185 + GV7 AC06 GV7 R + LC1 F225 + GV7 AC07 GV7 R + LC1 F265 + GV7 AC07
E 44 46 48 57 60
3/80
108
GV7R

Spreaders GV7 AC03

114 45 45
Connection

Smooth terminals
Connectors
1
Z
10,5
Z
19
41
30
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
70
GV7 Rp40Rp150 GV7 Rp220
Direct rotary handle GV7 AP03, GV7 AP04

Flush-mounting
45
73
47
I 0
121 155
55 91
36
28
89
= 97
Direct rotary handle GV7 AP03 or GV7 AP04 with conversion accessory GV7 AP05
Front face cut-out
9,25
Enclosure viewed from top
120
59
41
100
125 2
69 120
51
= 100
e = 1 to 3 max
Extended rotary handle GV7 AP01, GV7 AP02

9,25 60 I
9
0 60 l = 75 =
l : 185 min, 600 max The shaft of the extended rotary handle GV7 AP01 or GV7 AP02 must be cut to length: l 126 mm.
75
Door cut-outs require a minimum distance between the centre of the circuit-breaker and the door hinge point D u 100 + (h x 5)
29
76
70
a 19.5 21.5
3/81
Schemes
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2ME, GV2P, GV3P and GV2RT
Schemes
1/L1 3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2 4/T2
2
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
3 4
Front mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

GV AE1
13
or
Front mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts
GV AED101
97 23
GV AE11
13 21
11
GV AE20
13 23
GV AED011
97 21
98
98
12
14
14
22
14
Side mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts
GV AD0110 GV AD0101
95 51
24
GV AD1010
97 53
24
GV AD1001
97 51
5 6 7 8 9 10
95
53
98
96
96
54
52
98

GV AN11
(61) 31 43 (73)

GV AM11
08 06
GV AN20
(63) 33 43 (73)
(62) 32
44 (74)
(64) 34
44 (74)
Voltage trips
GV AUppp
D1
Current limiter
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
GV ASppp
D1
GV AXppp
D1 D2
GV1 L3
D2
D2
E1
Use of fault signalling contact and short-circuit signalling contact

GV AM11 GV AD10pp
E2
Connection of undervoltage trip for dangerous machines (conforming to INRS) on GV2 ME only

10Agl max
1/L1
05
3/L2
54
5/L3
D1
D2
Trip signalling N/C or N/O Start-Stop contact
E2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
E1
3/82
52
22
6/T3
5/L3
GV2 MEpp and GV2 RT

GV2 Ppp

GV3 Ppp

Schemes
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3ME80 and GV7R
Schemes
GV3 ME80
1/L1
Motor circuit-breakers
3/L2 5/L3

23
13
21
13
23
14
24
32
14
24
34
14
24
14
22
14
24
34
13
24
14
32
31
13
23
31
13
23
33
13
23
33
GV3 A01
GV3 A02
GV3 A03
GV3 A05
GV3 A06
GV3 A07
1 2
2/T1
Fault signalling contacts

GV3 A08
95
4/T2
6/T3
Voltage trips
D1 C1
GV3 A09
97
GV3 B
GV3 D
3 4
Location 4 C/O contact
24 22
D2
Motor circuit-breakers
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3
96
98
Add-on auxiliary contacts according to their location (1)

GV7 AE11, GV7 AB11 Location 1 Location 2 C/O contact Trip indication
14 12
GV7 R
C2

92 94
Location 3 Electrical fault indication

84 82
5 6 7 8
11
91
81
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A self-adhesive label, supplied with the contact, can be affixed to the front face of the circuitbreaker to allow personalised marking according to the function of the contact or contacts. (1) See pages 3/20 and 3/61. GV7 ASppp
C1
Electric trips
GV7 AUppp
D1
GV7 AD111, AD112

97
50 ms
D4
C2
Recommended application schemes GV7 AD111, AD112

Fault indication
97
Contactor opening on overload

97
98
KA1
14
13
50 ms
50 ms
Reset
98
98
21
21
Reset
KA1
A1 22 A1 B1
24
9 10
23
A2
Associated components KA1: CA2 KN or CAD N
Associated components KA1: CAD + LAD 6K10 or RHK KM1: LC1 D or LC1 F
A2
KA1
Overload fault
KA1
KM1
3/83

GV2 L
1 2
Dimensions
X1

GV2 AK00
14 98
32
89
45
X2
26 15
50 82
44,5
61
9,3
9,3 81 (1)
(1) Maximum
18
44,5
3 4
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 415 V, or 80 mm for Ue = 440 V, or 120 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V. X2 = 40 mm.
Mounting
On rail AM1 DE200, AM1ED200 (35 x 15) Panel mounted On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA
Adapter plate GK2 AF01
AF1 EA4
35 5 55
5,5 45
35 1055 135
44,5
84
84
5 6 7 8 9 10
44,5
106
13,5
13,5
24
45
9,5
54
7.5 mm height compensation plate GV1 F03

39
13
35
GV2 LE
Dimensions
X1

GV AE
15
10
89
12,5
66
X1
7,5
16
44
44,5
45
9,3
9,3 81 (1)
18
X1 Electrical clearance = 40 mm for Ue y 690 V.
(1) Maximum On pre-slotted plate AM1 PA On rails DZ5 MB201
Mounting
On 35 mm 7 rail On panel with adapter plate GV2 AF02
44,5
AF1 EA4
50/60
15
35
44,5
50/60
c
c = 80 on AM1 DP200 (35 x 7.5) and 88 on AM1DE200, ED200 (35 x15)
84,5
4,2 35
35
GV2 AF02
DZ5 ME8 DZ5 MB201
3/84
50 60

Mounting
Mounting of external operator GV2 APN01, GV2 APN02 or GV2 APN04 for motor circuit-breakers GV2 L
Door cut-out
1
16 43,5 (1)
= 48
3,5
6
60
16
22
0,5...4 43 a 6 5,2 = =
(1) For IP65 only. Door cut-out
2 3
= 48
Mounting of external operator GV APH02 for motor circuit-breakers GV2 L
3,5
6
16
43,5 (1)
16
173,4
= 48
60
22
0,5...4
4 5 6
= 48
b = 64,1
a Mini 140 250 Maxi 250 434 b Mini 151 250 Maxi 250 445
43
=
(1) For IP65 only.
GV2 APNpp GV2 APNpp + GV APH02 GV2 APNpp + GV APK11 GV2 APNpp + GV APH02 + GV APK11
Mounting of external operator GV2 AP03 for GV2 LE

Door cut-out
65
45
7
54
1,5...5 53 135284 44,5
= 54
8 9 10
3/85

GV2 L and GV2 LE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Sets of busbars GV2 G445, GV2 G454, GV2 G472, with terminal block GV2 G05
GV1 G09 38
a 3 l
18
63
45
l 179 206 260 a 5 224 260 332
p 45 54 72
Number of tap-offs GV2 G445 GV2 G454 GV2 G472
6 269 314 404
7 314 368 476
8 359 422 548
Sets of busbars for GV2L and GV2LE

GV1 G09
30
Sets of busbars GV2 Gppp with term. block GV1 G09
Sets of busbars GV2 G245, GV2 G254, GV2 GR272

l
I 89 98 116
Set of busbars GV2 G554

260
Sets of busbars GV2 G345 and GV2 G354

l
GV2 G345 (3 x 45 mm) GV2 G354 (3 x 54 mm)
I 134 152
10
3/86

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 L
GV3L
Dimensions
(1)
1
X1
(2)
68
2
9 18 (1) Blocks GVANpp , GVADpp and GVAM11 (2) Blocks GV3 AUpp and GV3ASpp
X1
136
64
55
132
Note: Leave a space of 9 mm between 2 circuit-breakers: either an empty space or side-mounting add-on contact blocks. Side by side mounting is possible up to 40 C.
3 4 5 6
Mounting
Mounting with Tesys contactor LC1D40AD65A and relay LR3D313365 Side by side mounting with Tesys contactor LC1D40AD65A (S-shape busbar system GV3 S)
115
185
299
136
119
136
55 Panel mounting, using M4 screws
Mounting on rail AM1DE200 or AM1ED201
70
195
7
137,5
144
64
68
136
37,5
3x4
8 9 10
Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1PA
Set of busbars GV3G264
Set of busbars GV3G364
119
183
16
AF1 EA4 137,5
136
18,7 18,7
16
3/87

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV3 L and GK3 EF80
Mounting
1 2 3 4
Mounting of external operator GV3 APN01, GV3 APN02 or GV3 APN04 for motor circuit-breakers GV3 L
Door cut-out
3,5
6
16
43,5 (1)
16
60
22
=
0,5...4 43 a = 60 =
(1) For IP65 only. Door cut-out
= 48
Mounting of external operator GV APH03 for motor circuit-breakers GV3 L
3,5
6
16
43,5 (1)
213,4
16
60
22
5
0,5...4 43 b = 73,8
a Mini 189 300 b Mini 200 300
= 48
(1) For IP65 only.
6 7 8
120 GV3 APNpp GV3 APNpp + GV APK12 GV3 APNpp + GV APH03 GV3 APNpp + GV APH03 + GV APK12
Maxi 300 481 -
Maxi 300 492
GK3EF80
X1 105 38 28
GK3EF80 + 4 GK2AX
10
3/88
X1
45
80
15
70
4,5
Number of GK2AX 0 1 2 66 74.8 83.5
3 92.5
4 101
48
48
Schemes

Magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2 L, GV2 LE, GV3 L and GK3 EF80
Magnetic motor circuit-breakers

GV2 Lpp
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
GV2 LEpp
3/L2 5/L3 1/L1
GV3 Lpp
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
GK3 EF80
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
2/T1
Accessories
GV AE1
OR
Front mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts

GV AE11
13 21
11
GV AE20
13 23
GVAED101 and GVAED011
13
4/T2
6/T3
97 98
97
14
22
14
14
12
24
23
98
Side mounting add-on contact blocks Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and fault signalling contacts
GV AD0110 GV AD0101 GV AD1010 GV AD1001
95
53
95
51
97
53
97
96
96
54
52
98
54
98

GV AN11
(61) 31 43 (73)

GV AM11
08 06
GV AN20
(63) 33 43 (73)
(62) 32
44 (74)
(64) 34
44 (74)
Voltage trips
GV AUppp
D1
GV ASppp
C1
D2
Start-Stop signalling contact blocks

GK2 AX10
13
C2
GK2 AX20
13 23
GK2 AX50
13 21
05
52
51
24
22
21
8 9 10
14
14
14
Fault signalling contact blocks

GK2 AX12
97
GK2 AX22
97 07
24
GK2 AX52
97 98 05 06
98
98
08
22
3/89
Selection guide
Protection components
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2 for the protection of control circuits, solenoid valves and transformers
Protection of industrial equipment control circuits and of single-phase loads
Applications
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Breaking capacity (Icu) conforming to IEC 60947-2 50 kA at 415 V 1.550 kA at 415 V 1.550 kA at 250 V
57 In
1216 In
Operational current
0.5 and 1 A
0.520 A
Maximum operational voltage
415 V
250 V
Number of poles
1 + neutral
8 9 10
Device type
GB2 CS
GB2 CB
GB2 CD
Pages
3/97
3/96
3/96
3/90
Protection of transformers
Single-phase y 5000 VA/415 V Primary Secondary
3-phase y 10 kVA/415 V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
About 20 In
0.2523 A
415 V
690 V
1 + neutral
1.550 kA at 415 V
1.550 kA at 250 V
15100 kA at 415 V
GB2 DB
GB2 DB
GB2 CD
GV2 RT
8 9 10
3/96
3/96
3/96
3/51
3/91
Presentation, selection
Thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers TeSys GB2 for the protection of industrial equipment control circuits
Presentation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 3/93 to 3/95 References : pages 3/96 and 3/97
GB2 thermal-magnetic circuit-breakers protect and isolate the control circuits of industrial equipment with contactor coils, transformers. They protect and isolate single-phase auxiliary circuits such as solenoid valves, electro-brakes, battery chargers, supplied from the control circuit voltage. GB2 CB, GB2 CD, GB2 DB 12 ratings are available, from 0.5 to 20 A, in single-pole (GB2 CB), single-pole + neutral (GB2 CD) and 2-pole (GB2 DB) versions. They have a magnetic tripping threshold set at between 12 and 16 In to withstand the current peaks generated by many industrial components. GB2 CS 2 ratings are available, 0.5 and 1 A, in single-pole version. The magnetic tripping threshold is set between 5 and 7 In. Functions, installation Clip-on fixing onto all types of 35 mm 5 rails, on 4 rails and on Telequick mounting plates. Upstream and downstream marking by means of AB1 clip-in markers. Clear indication of I and O positions on the operator. Tamper-proof device which requires no special maintenance (fixed magnetic and thermal tripping thresholds). Single-phase transformers. Magnetising peak: 20 In. Operation of magnetic trips: 13 In.
Power VA 40 63 100 160 250 400 630 1000 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000
Selection for the protection of circuits supplied by transformers
Primary (1) 220/240 V 380/415 V GB2 DB05 GB2 DB05 GB2 DB05 GB2 DB06 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB08 GB2 DB10 GB2 DB14 GB2 DB20 GB2 DB21 GB2 DB22 GB2 DB22 GB2 DB05 GB2 DB05 GB2 DB06 GB2 DB06 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB08 GB2 DB09 GB2 DB14 GB2 DB14 GB2 DB20 GB2 DB20 GB2 DB21 GB2 DB22
Secondary 24 V 48 V GB2 CD07 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD08 GB2 CD10 GB2 CD14 GB2 CD16 GB2 CD22 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD09 GB2 CD12 GB2 CD14 GB2 CD21
110 V GB2 CD05 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD08 GB2 CD09 GB2 CD12 GB2 CD16 GB2 CD22
220 V GB2 CD05 GB2 CD05 GB2 CD05 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD08 GB2 CD10 GB2 CD14 GB2 CD16 GB2 CD20 GB2 CD21 GB2 CD22
(1) If the breaking capacity of the GB2 is insufficient, use a GV2 RT with 2 poles connected in series, see page 3/51.
Schemes : page 3/97
3/92
Characteristics
GB2 CB GB2 CD GB2 DB GB2 CS
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Shock resistance Vibration resistance Ambient air temperature around the device Flame resistance Maximum operating altitude Operating position
Conforming to IEC 60529 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Storage Operation Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1
C C C m
IEC 60947-1, 947-2, EN 60947-1, 60947-2 CSA, NEMKO, UL NEMKO, UL TC IP 20 22 gn for 20 ms 5 gn (5110 Hz) - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 960 3000
1 2 3
In relation to normal vertical mounting plane
GB2 CB,CD, CS Cabling Solid cable Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque mm2 mm2 N.m Minimum c.s.a. 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.75 1.2
GB2 DB Maximum c.s.a. 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 4 or 2 x 2.5
4
A 415 (1) 50/60 4 1.9 8000 + 40 0.90 + 50 0.85 57 In + 60 0.80
Utilisation category Rated operational voltage (Ue) Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to CSA C22-2 Nr 14 and UL 1077 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 Conforming to IEC 60947-2 V V Hz kV W C.O. C A 415 (1) 277 50/60 4 2 8000 - 20 - 10 0 A 250 50/60 4 2 8000 + 10 + 20 1 A 415 277 50/60 4 2 8000 + 30 0.95 1216 In
5 6 7 8 9 10
Rated operational frequency Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) Total power dissipated per pole Mechanical and C.O.: Closing - Opening electrical durability Operational current According to the permissible correction coefficient ambient temperature (a or c) Correction coefficient Tripping threshold Of the magnetic trips
1.2 1.15 1216 In
1.1 1.05 1216 In
(1) One GB2 circuit-breaker on each live conductor.
Tripping curves
Average operating time at 20 C without prior current flow (cold state) GB2 CB, GB2 CD, GB2 DB GB2 CS
120 60 20 10 5 2 1 20 10 5 2 1 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 2 1 1,05 2 3 4 5 6 8 1,5 10 100 x In
120 60 20 10 5 2 1 20 10 5 2 1 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 2 1
Minutes
Seconds
Milliseconds
Milliseconds
Seconds
Minutes
1,05 2 3 4 5 6 8 1,5 10
100 x In
Presentation, selection : page 3/92
Schemes : page 3/97
3/93
GB2 CB05 CB06 CB07 CB08 CB09 CB10 CB12 CB14 CB16 CB20 CB21 CB22 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 0.5 50 100 50 25 50 25 g g g g g g 50 50 50 25 50 25 g g g g g g 15 50 15 25 15 25 20 25 16 25 16 25 10 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20 32 6 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20 32 3 75 2 75 2 75 40 50 32 40 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 40 50 32 40 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63
1 2
Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz 110 V Icu Ics % (1) Icu Ics % (1) Icu Ics % (1) aM gG aM gG aM gG
A kA
230/240 V
kA
400/415 V
kA
Associated fuses, if required if Isc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2
110 V
A A A A A A
3
230/240 V
400/415 V
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz 110 V Icu Ics % (1) Icu Ics % (1) aM gG aM gG
A kA
GB2 CD05 CD06 CD07 CD08 CD09 CD10 CD12 CD14 CD16 CD20 CD21 CD22 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 0.5 1 2 50 100 50 25 g g g g 50 50 50 25 g g g g 15 50 15 25 20 25 16 25 10 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 6 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 3 75 2 75 40 50 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 40 50 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63
230/ 240 V
kA
Associated fuses, if required if lsc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2
110 V
A A A A
230/240 V
Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz 110 V lcu Ics % (1) lcu Ics % (1) lcu Ics % (1) aM gG aM gG aM gG A kA
GB2 DB05 DB06 DB07 DB08 DB09 DB10 DB12 DB14 DB16 DB20 DB21 DB22 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 0.5 1 2 50 100 50 25 50 25 g g g g g g 50 50 50 25 50 25 g g g g g g 15 50 15 25 15 25 20 25 16 25 16 25 10 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20 32 6 50 3 50 3 50 25 32 20 32 20 32 3 75 2 75 2 75 40 50 32 40 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 40 50 32 40 32 40 3 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 50 63 40 50 40 50 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 75 63 80 50 63 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 1.5 1.5 63 80 50 63 50 63 2 75 1.5 75 75 75 63 80 50 63 50 63
230/240 V
kA
400/415 V
kA
Associated fuses, if required if lsc > breaking capacity Icu conforming to IEC 60947-2
110 V
A A A A A A
230/240 V
400/415 V
(1) As % of Icu. g Fuse not required. Breaking capacity Icu > lsc.
Schemes : page 3/97
3/94
GB2 pp05 pp06 pp07 pp08 pp09 pp10 pp12 pp14 pp16 pp20 pp21 pp22 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 GB2 CS05 0.5 50 100 50 25 50 25 1.5 1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 110 31 39 52 78 130 200 110 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 110 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 230 365 460 610 910 1520 2400 230 230 290 390 580 970 1500 230 46 60 80 120 190 310 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 10 10 10 12 12 12 16 16 16 20 20 20
Circuit-breaker type Breaking capacity (lcu) conforming to IEC 60947-2 c Operational current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 c DC-12 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V kA kA A A A A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DC-13
Circuit-breaker type Rating Breaking capacity conforming to IEC 60947-2 a 50/60 Hz 110 V lcu lcs % (1) A kA
CS06 1 50 100 50 25 50 25 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 48 6 8 10 15 26 41 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 48 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 110 85 110 145 220 360 580 110 56 70 95 140 230 375 110 13 17 22 34 56 90 230 230 290 380 570 950 1500 230 230 290 380 570 950 1500 230 100 130 170 250 420 680
230/240 V lcu lcs % (1) 400/415 V lcu (2) lcs % (1) Breaking capacity (lcu) conforming to IEC 60947-2 c Operational current conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 c DC-12 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V
kA
kA
kA kA A A A A V m m m m m m V m m m m m m V m m m m m m
DC-13
Maximum permissible line length for star-delta starting (length of cable containing 2 or more conductors)
With contactors LCp D09 D18
Operational voltage C.s.a. 060 mm2 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2
With contactors LCp D25D32
Operational voltage C.s.a. 0.60 mm2 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2
With contactors LCp D40D80
Operational voltage C.s.a. 0.60 mm2 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2
(1) As % of Icu. (2) One GB2 CS circuit-breaker on each live conductor. (3) Use relays.
References : page 3/96 and 3/97
Schemes : page 3/97
3/95
References
Circuit-breakers with magnetic tripping threshold: 12 to 16 In
Single-pole
Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 6.6 14 26 40 52 66 83 108 138 165 220 270 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight kg 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
1 2 3
534268
GB2 CBpp
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
GB2 CB05 GB2 CB06 GB2 CB07 GB2 CB08 GB2 CB09 GB2 CB10 GB2 CB12 GB2 CB14 GB2 CB16 GB2 CB20 GB2 CB21 GB2 CB22
534269
Single-pole + neutral
Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 6.6 14 26 40 52 66 83 108 138 165 220 270 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight kg 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070
4 5
GB2 CDpp
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
GB2 CD05 GB2 CD06 GB2 CD07 GB2 CD08 GB2 CD09 GB2 CD10 GB2 CD12 GB2 CD14 GB2 CD16 GB2 CD20 GB2 CD21 GB2 CD22
6 7 8 9 10
534270
2-pole
Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-1. Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 6.6 14 26 40 50 66 83 108 138 165 220 270 Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight kg 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115
GB2 DBpp
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
GB2 DB05 GB2 DB06 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB08 GB2 DB09 GB2 DB10 GB2 DB12 GB2 DB14 GB2 DB16 GB2 DB20 GB2 DB21 GB2 DB22
Schemes : page 3/97
3/96
References (continued), dimensions, schemes
Circuit-breakers with magnetic tripping threshold: 5 to 7 In

Single-pole
Conventional rated thermal current Ith (1) A 0.5 Magnetic tripping current Id 20 % A 3.3 Sold in lots of Unit reference
534271
Weight kg 0.055
1 2
GB2 CS05
GB2 CS06
0.055
GB2 CSpp (1) Conforming to IEC 60947-1.
3
Description Busbar set for supply to 10 GB2 DB or 20 GB2 CB or GB2 CS with 2 connectors Supply connector Sold in lots of 1 Unit reference GB2 G210 Weight kg 0.100
Accessories for circuit-breakers GB2-CB, DB and CS
4 5
10
GB2 G01
Dimensions

GB2 CBpp, GB2 CDpp, GB2 CSpp
GB2 DBpp

74
82 82 75 79 67
15
85 85 78 82 70
30
74
6 7 8
Marking: up to twelve AB1 R clip-in markers.
Schemes
GB2 CBpp

1/L1
GB2 CDpp
3/L2 (13)
GB2 DBpp

1/L1 3/L2
GB2 CSpp

1/L1
1/L1
9 10
4/T2 (14)
2/T1
2/T1
2/T1

Presentation, selection : page 3/92 Characteristics : pages 3/93 to 3/95
4/T2
2/T1
3/97
Contents
4 - TeSys protection components: fuse protection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors for standard applications

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/4 b Complete units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/8 b Switch bodies and add-on modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/9 b Operators and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/11 and page 4/17 b Dimensions, mounting and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/22
VARIO switch disconnectors for high performance applications

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/4 b Complete units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/12 b Switch bodies, add-on modules and auxiliary contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/14 b Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/17 b Dimensions, mounting and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/24
TeSys DF fuse carriers for the protection of control circuits or transformers

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/26 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/28 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/29 b Dimensions, mounting and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/31 b Fuse carriers for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/32
TeSys GK1 fuse carriers for motor protection

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/27 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/35 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/36 b Operators and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/37 b Dimensions, mounting and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/40
4/0
TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses for motor or variable speed drive protection

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/42 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/46 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/53 b Operators and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/60 b Dimensions, mounting and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/62 b Switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/68
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cartridge fuses for protection of equipment with current peaks

b Type aM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/73 b Type gG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/75
4/1
Selection guide
Mini-VARIO and VARIO switch disconnectors
Applications
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Mini-Vario and Vario rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for onload making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive and inductive circuits where frequent operation is required. They can also be used for direct switching of motors in utilisation categories AC-3 and DC-3 specific to motors. Vario switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible breaking (since the handle cannot indicate the open position unless all the contacts are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance) and it is possible to padlock the handles in the open position.
Switch type
Mini-VARIO for standard applications VARIO for high performance applications
Thermal current Operational current AC-23 A at 400 Volts
12 A 8.1 A
20 A 11 A
12 A 8.1 A
20 A 11 A
25 A 14.5 A
Number of poles Number of auxiliary contacts
35 1 or 2
36 14
Switch fixing From the front From the back
Screw fixing, 1 or 4 holes Fixing: 1 x 22.5 hole or 4 x 5.5 screws Clip-on mounting on 7 rail Clip-on mounting on 7 rail or screw fixing
Reversible terminal blocks
Yes
Door mounting, direct operator Mounting at back of enclosure, indirect operator with door interlock
Yes Yes
Enclosure reference Product reference
VpDN12 VCFN12GE
2/4 and 4/8
VpDN20 VCFN20GE
VpD02 VpF02 VpF02GE

4/12 and 4/13
VpD01 VpF01 VpF01GE
VpD0 VpF0 VpF0GE
Pages
4/2
Mini-Vario and Vario rotary switch disconnectors from 12 to 175 A are suitable for on-load making and breaking of resistive or mixed resistive and inductive circuits where frequent operation is required. They can also be used for direct switching of motors in utilisation categories AC-3 and DC-3 specific to motors. Vario switch disconnectors are suitable for isolator applications with fully visible breaking (since the handle cannot indicate the open position unless all the contacts are actually open and separated by the appropriate isolating distance) and it is possible to padlock the handles in the open position.
1 2 3 4
VARIO for high performance applications
32 A 21.8 A
40 A 29 A
63 A 41.5 A
80 A 57 A
125 A 68.5 A
175 A 83 A
5 6
36 14
3 + N + PE
Screw fixing, 1 or 4 holes Fixing: 1 x 22.5 hole or 4 x 5.5 screws Clip-on mounting on 7 rail or screw fixing
Fixing 4 x 5.5 screws Screw fixing
Yes
7 8 9 10
Yes Yes
VpD1 VpF1 VpF1GE

2/4, 4/8 and 4/13
VpD2 VpF2 VpF2GE
VpF3 VpF3GE
VpF4 VpF4GE
VpF5 VpF5GE
VpF6 VpF6GE
4/3
Characteristics

Characteristics
1 2 3 4
Environment
Switch type (bare type) Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection with protection shroud Ambient air temperature Flame resistance Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms conforming to IEC60068-2-27 Vibration resistance 10150 Hz conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 C C gn gn
VN12 V02 VZN12 VZ02 IEC 60947-3 UL, CSA, GL TC
VN20 VZN20
V01 VZ01
V0 VZ0
VVD0 VVE0
V1 VZ1
VVD1 VVE1
IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529 - 20+ 50 960 conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 15 5 30 1 15 30
Electrical characteristics, a.c. operation

Switch type (bare type) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conventional thermal currents in free air (lth) and rated uninterrupted (lu) Conventional thermal current in enclosure (lthe) Rated operational power and current AC-21A/22A AC-23A 230690 V 230 V 240 V 400 V 415 V 500 V V kV A A A A/kW A/kW A/kW A/kW A/kW A/kW kW kW kW kW VN12 VZN12 690 6 12 10 12 10.6/3 10.6/3 8.1/4 8.1/4 8.9/5.5 8.6/7.5 1.5 3 4 4 30 A/ 400V A/ 400V 120 120 300 1 10 200 200 140 0.5 6 20 300 1 10 25 35 250 320 250 384 5.5 V02 VZ02 VN20 VZN20 V01 VZ01 V0 VZ0 VVD0 VVE0 V1 VZ1 VVD1 VVE1
6 20 16 20 14/4 14/4 11/5.5 11/5.5 11.9/7.5 12.3/11 3 4 5.5
8 25 20 25 19.7/5.5 19.9/5.5 14.5/7.5 14/7.5 16.7/11 17.5/15 4 5.5 7.5 7.5 11 7.5 18.9/5.5 21.8/11 21/11 32 25 32
6 7 8
Intermittent duty class
690 V Rated operational power AC -3 230/240 V 400/415 V 500 V 690 V
9 10
Characteristics Rated making capacity in normal operating AC-21A/22A/23A (I rms) conditions Rated breaking capacity AC-21A/22A/23A (I rms) Short-circuit characteristics Permissible rms short time rating (Icw) Rated making capacity under short-circuit conditions (Icm) I peak Rated conditional short-circuit current (I rms) with aM/gG fuses
A/ 140 400V/1s kA/ 400V kA/ 400V A 0.5 6 12
4/4
V2 VZ2 IEC 60947-3 UL, CSA, GL TC
VVD2 VVE2
V3 VZ3
VVD3 VVE3
V4 VZ4
VVD4 VVE4
V5
V6
VZ7 VZ20 IEC 60947-5
VZN05 VZN06
1 2 3 4
IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529 - 20+ 50 960 conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 30 1
V2 VZ2 690 8 40 32 40 25.8/7.5 24.8/7.5 29/15 28/15 28.5/18.5 17.5/15 5.5 11 15 11 30 400 320 480 1 10 50
VVD2 VVE2
V3 VZ3
VVD3 VVE3
V4 VZ4
VVD4 VVE4
V5
V6
VZ7 VZ20
VZN05 VZN06
6 63 50 63 50.3/15 48.2/15 41.5/22 40/22 44/30 25/22 11 18.5 22 18.5 80 63 80 61.2/18.5 58.5/18.5 57/30 55/30 54/37 33/30 15 22 30 125 100 125 71.9/22 68/22 68.5/37 66/37 64.5/45 42/37 22 30 37 30 175 140 160 96.6/30 92.7/30 83/45 80/45 79/55 49/45 30 37 45 37 12 10 le/AC-15 6A 6A 4A 4A 2A 1A 630 500 756 2.1 800 640 960 1250 1000 1500 2.8 1750 1400 2100 1 63 80 125 200 16 1.6 6 4
6 7 8 9 10
4/5

Characteristics
1 2 3 4
Electrical characteristics, d.c. operation

Switch type (bare type) Rated 24 V operational current DC-1 (L/R = 1ms) 48 V 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 3 contacts A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A VN12 VZN12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 1.5 8 12 1.5 7 10 0.6 3 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 10 12 12 1.5 3 12 0.4 1.4 1 0.3 0.4 1.2 V02 VZ02 VN20 VZN20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 2 10 20 2 8 14 0.7 4 10 20 20 20 20 20 20 14 20 20 2 4 20 0.5 1.5 2 0.4 0.6 2.4 V01 VZ01 V0 VZ0 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 9 12 25 2.5 10 16 0.8 6 12 25 25 25 25 25 25 16 25 25 2.5 5 25 0.5 1.5 3 0.5 0.8 1.6 VVD0 VVE0 V1 VZ1 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 10 16 32 3 12 20 1 8 16 32 32 32 32 32 32 20 32 32 3 6 32 0.8 2 4 0.8 1 2 VVD1 VVE1
60 V
110 V
220 V
250 V
24 V Rated operational current DC-2toDC-5 (L/R=1ms) 48 V
60 V
6
110 V
7 8 9 10
220 V
250 V
Switch type (bare type) Mechanical durability (millions of operating cycles) Electrical durability in cat. AC-21 (millions of operating cycles) Electrical durability in cat. DC-1 to 5 (operating cycles) Suitable for isolation Cabling Flexible cable + cable end Solid cable Tightening torque mm2 mm2 N.m VN12 VZN12 0.05 0.05 30 000 Yes 4 4 0.7 6 10 2.1 4 4 0.7 6 10 2.1 V02 VZ02 0.1 0.1 VN20 VZN20 0.05 0.05 V01 VZ01 0.1 0.1 V0 VZ0 VVD0 VVE0 V1 VZ1 VVD1 VVE1
4/6
V2 VZ2 40 40 40 40 40 40 35 40 40 12 20 40 4 14 25 2 12 20 40 40 40 40 40 40 25 40 40 5 8 40 1 3 7 1 2 6
VVD2 VVE2
V3 VZ3 63 63 63 63 63 63 40 63 63 20 63 63 6 25 30 4 20 30 63 63 63 63 63 63 40 63 63 6 10 50 1.5 4 10 1.2 3 8
VVD3 VVE3
V4 VZ4 80 80 80 80 80 80 50 80 80 25 80 80 8 30 40 5 25 40 80 80 80 80 80 80 50 80 80 8 20 63 2 6 15 1.5 6 10
VVD4 VVE4
V5 125 125 125 125 125 125 60 125 125 30 125 125 12 40 80 3 30 50 125 125 125 125 125 125 60 125 125 10 22 70 2.2 7 16 1.6 7 12
V6 175 175 175 175 175 175 70 175 175 12 175 175 15 50 100 10 40 61 175 175 175 175 175 175 70 175 175 12 24 80 2.4 8 13 1.8 8 14
VZ7 VZ20 8 (le/DC-11) 8 (le/DC-11) 4 (le/DC-11) 2 (le/DC-11) 1 (le/DC-11) 0.8 (le/DC-11)
VZN05 VZN06
1 2 3 4
6 7 8 9 10
V2 VZ2 0.1 0.1 30 000 Yes 6 10 2.1
VVD2 VVE2
V3 VZ3 0.03 0.03
VVD3 VVE3
V4 VZ4
VVD4 VVE4
V5
V6
VZ7 VZ20 0.1 0.1 (AC-15) 30 000 (DC-11)
VZN05 VZN06 0.05 0.05
16 25 4
70 95 22.6
2 x 0.751.5 2 x 12.5 0.7
4/7
References

Complete units
b b b b
1 2 3
VCDN20
3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 to 20 A Marking on operator . Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied). Degree of protection IP65.
Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for door mounting

Operator Handle Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8)
511156
lth Front plate Fixing mm mm Yellow 22.5 60 x 60 A 12 20
Reference
Weight kg 0.177 0.177
VCDN12 VCDN20
Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for mounting at back of an enclosure (1)
Operator Handle Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8) lth Front plate Fixing mm mm Yellow 22.5 60 x 60 A 12 20 Reference Weight kg 0.334 0.334
4
511157
VCCDN12 VCCDN20
Main switch disconnectors for door mounting
5 6 7
VBDN20 VCCDN20
Operator Handle Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8)
lth Front plate Fixing mm mm Black 22.5 60 x 60 A 12 20
Reference
Weight kg 0.177 0.177
VBDN12 VBDN20
(1) Switches supplied with a shaft extension VZN17 and a door interlock plate KZ32 (see page 4/11).
511158
8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/6 Dimensions : pages 4/22 and 4/23 Schemes : page 4/23
4/8

Switch bodies, add-on modules

812801
Switch bodies
Description 3-pole switch disconnectors Rating A 12 20 Reference VN12 VN20 Weight kg 0.110 0.110
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
VN20
Add-on modules
Description Main pole modules Rating A 12 20 Neutral pole module with early make and late break contacts 12 and 20 Reference VZN12 VZN20 VZN11 Weight kg 0.020 0.020 0.020
580586
VZN11
Earthing module Auxiliary contact block modules
12 and 20 1 N/O late make contact 1 N/C early break contact
VZN14 VZN05 VZN06
0.016 0.020 0.020 0.004
580587
Input terminal protection shrouds
For add-on pole modules or VZN26 auxiliary contact block modules (single-pole shroud) For switch bodies (3-pole shroud) VZN08
VZN14
0.007
580588

VZN12 or VZN20 + VN12 or VZN05 VZN05 or VZN06 or VN20 + VZN12 or VZN20 or VZN11 or VZN05 or VZN06 + VZN14
812806
812805
VZN26
VZN08
10
4/9
1
KCC1YZ
2
VZNpp VN12, VN20
VZN14 VZNpp
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VZN17, VZN30
KCD1PZ
KZ32, KZ83
KAD1PZ
4/10
References

Operators and accessories
b Degree of protection IP65. b Marking on operator . b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied). b Operator fixing by 1 22.5 hole; for other operators see pages 4/17 and 4/19. b For other accessories and empty enclosures, see pages 4/20, 4/21 and 2/5.
1 2 3
Operators for main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors

Handle Front plate mm Yellow 45 x 45
Reference KCC1YZ
Red, padlockable with 1 padlock (4to6) Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8)
Weight kg 0.050
Yellow 60 x 60
KCD1PZ
0.084
Operators for main switch disconnectors

Handle Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks (4to8) Front plate mm Black 60 x 60 Reference KAD1PZ Weight kg 0.084
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Accessories for door interlocking

Description Front plate mm
For rear fixing switch disconnectors mounted at the back of an enclosure, in addition to a direct operator
Distance enclosure back/door mm 300330 Sold in Unit lots of reference Weight kg 0.100
Shaft extensions
VZN17
400430
VZN30
0.130
Door interlock plate
45 x 45 or 60x 60 45 x 45 or 60x 60
KZ32
0.170
Plate for door mounting
KZ83
0.205
Schemes : page 4/23
4/11
References

Complete units
b b b b
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/6 Dimensions : pages 4/24 and 4/25
511161 511160
3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 to 175 A Marking on operator . Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied). Degree of protection IP65.
511159
Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for door mounting

Handle VCF0 Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Front plate mm Yellow 60 x 60 Fixing 22.5 Rating A 12 20 25 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 80 125 175 Reference VCD02 VCD01 VCD0 VCD1 VCD2 VCF02 VCF01 VCF0 VCF1 VCF2 VCF3 VCF4 VCF5 VCF6 Weight kg 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.560 0.560 1.200 1.200
4 screws
Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
Yellow 90 x 90
4 screws
VCF5
Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors for mounting at back of an enclosure (1)
Handle Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Front plate mm Yellow 60 x 60 Fixing 22.5 Rating A 12 20 25 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 80 125 175 Reference VCCD02 VCCD01 VCCD0 VCCD1 VCCD2 VCCF02 VCCF01 VCCF0 VCCF1 VCCF2 VCCF3 VCCF4 VCCF5 VCCF6 Weight kg 0.392 0.392 0.392 0.392 0.392 0.527 0.527 0.527 0.527 0.527 0.440 0.680 1.320 1.320
4 screws
Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) VCCF0
Yellow 90 x 90
4 screws
(1) Unit supplied with a shaft extension VZN17 and a door interlock plate KZ32 or KZ74 (see page 4/20).
Schemes : page 4/25
4/12

Complete units
b 3-pole rotary switch disconnectors, 12 to 175 A b Marking on operator . b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied). b Degree of protection IP65.
Handle
511162
1
Reference VBD02 VBD01 VBD0 VBD1 VBD2 VBF02 VBF01 VBF0 VBF1 VBF2 VBF3 VBF4 VBF5 VBF6 Weight kg 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.560 0.560 1.200 1.200
Main switch disconnectors for door mounting

Front plate mm Black 60 x 60 Fixing 22.5 Rating A 12 20 25 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 80 125 175
Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 screws
VBD0
Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
511163
Black 90 x 90
4 screws
Main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors

Handle Red, padlockable with 1 padlock ( 4 to 6) Front plate mm Yellow 45 x 45 Rating A 25 32 40 63 80
For mounting in an enclosure or for modular distribution boards

Reference VVE0 VVE1 VVE2 VVE3 VVE4 Weight kg 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.530 0.530
VBF4
580534
Main switch disconnectors

Handle Black, not padlockable Front plate mm Black 45 x 45
For mounting in an enclosure or for modular distribution boards

Rating A 25 32 40 63 80 Reference VVD0 VVD1 VVD2 VVD3 VVD4 Weight kg 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.560 0.560
VVE1
Schemes : page 4/25
4/13

Switch bodies, add-on modules, auxiliary contacts (forcustomerassembly)
580535
Switch bodies
Description 3-pole switch disconnectors (1) Rating A 12 20 25 Reference V02 V01 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 Weight kg 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.500 0.500 0.900 0.900
1 2 3 4 5 6
32 V0 40 63 80
580536
125 175
Add-on modules
Description Main pole modules Rating A 12 20 25 V5 32 40 63
580537 580538
Reference VZ02 VZ01 VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 VZ11 VZ12 VZ13 VZ14 VZ15 VZ16
Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.100 0.100 0.050 0.100 0.250 0.050 0.100 0.250
80 Neutral pole modules with early make and late break contacts (1) 12 to 40 63 to 80 125 and 175
VZ0
VZ11
Earthing modules
12 to 40 63 and 80 125 and 175
7
580539 580540

Description Type N/O + N/C (2) N/O + N/O Reference VZ7 VZ20 Auxiliary contact block modules with 2 auxiliary contacts Weight kg 0.050 0.050
8
VZ15 VZ20
(1) Protection shrouds are available if required: see page 4/20. (2) Late make N/O, early break N/C contacts
9 10
4/14

Switch bodies, add-on modules, auxiliary contacts (forcustomerassembly)
VZ7 or VZ20 or VZ11 or VZ12 or VZ14 or VZ15 or VZ0p/VZ0 to VZ4 + + V4 + + V0 to + + + V0p + VZ7 or VZ20 or VZ11 or VZ12 or VZ14 or VZ15 or VZ0p/VZ0 to VZ4 VZ7 or VZ20 or VZ13 or VZ16 + + + + or + + V5 + + VZ7 or VZ20 or VZ13 or VZ16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V6
2 add-on modules on each side of the switch body

VZ0p VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 + + + + + + VZ0p + VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 + + + + + V0p V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 + VZ0p + + + + + + VZ0 VZ1 VZ2 VZ3 VZ4 + + + + + VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 VZ7 or or or or or or VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 VZ20 or or or or or or VZ11 VZ11 VZ11 VZ11 VZ12 VZ12 or or or or or or VZ14 VZ14 VZ14 VZ14 VZ15 VZ15
Nota : The add-on modules mounted next to the switch body are main pole modules. Maximum of 3 main pole modules per switch body.
Schemes : page 4/25
4/15
1
KAp1BZ
2 3
VN12, VN20 V02V2 KCp1YZ VZN17, VZN30
KCp1LZ
KZ32, KZ83 KDp1PZ V3, V4 KCp1PZ KAp1PZ
KBp1PZ
4
VZ18, VZ31 KAF2PZ
5
KZ81 V5, V6
KCF2PZ
6 7 8
KBF2PZ VZ18, VZ31 KDF2PZ
KZ74
KBF3PZ
KDF3PZ
9
KCF3PZ
KAF3PZ
10
503798
4/16
References
Operators, handles and front plates
(forcustomerassembly)
b Marking on operator . b Padlockable operating handle (padlocks not supplied). b Degree of protection IP65.
Handles and front plates for main and Emergency stop switch disconnectors
Operator Handle Reference Front plate Dimensions mm Yellow 45 x 45 Fixing 22.5 4 screws Yellow 60 x 60 22.5 4 screws KCC1YZ KCE1YZ KCD1PZ KCF1PZ kg 0.050 0.040 0.082 0.075 Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
For switch body VN12, VN20 V02V2
Red, padlockable with 1 padlock ( 4 to 6) Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
V3 and V4
Red, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Red, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
Yellow 60 x 60
4 screws
KCF2PZ
0.070
V5 and V6
Yellow 90 x 90
4 screws
KCF3PZ (1)
0.160
Handles and front plates for main switch disconnectors

For switch body VN12, VN20 V02V2 Operator Handle Reference Front plate Dimensions mm Black 60 x 60 Fixing 22.5 4 screws KAD1PZ KAF1PZ kg 0.082 0.075 Weight
Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Black, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8) Black, long, padlockable with up to 3 padlocks ( 4 to 8)
V3 and V4
Black 60 x 60
4 screws
KAF2PZ
0.070
V5 and V6
Black 90 x 90
4 screws
KAF3PZ (1)
0.160
(1) For door mounting of 63 and 80 A switch disconnectors, adapter plate KZ106 must be ordered separately (see page 4/20).
Dimensions : pages 4/22 to 4/25
4/17
1
KAp1BZ
2 3
VN12, VN20 V02V2 KCp1YZ VZN17, VZN30
KCp1LZ
KZ32, KZ83 KDp1PZ V3, V4 KAp1PZ KCp1PZ
KBp1PZ
4
VZ18, VZ31
KAF2PZ
5
KZ81 V5, V6
KCF2PZ
6 7
KBF2PZ VZ18, VZ31 KDF2PZ
KZ74
8
KBF3PZ KDF3PZ
9
KCF3PZ
KAF3PZ
10
503799
4/18
Operators, handles and front plates
(forcustomerassembly)
b Marking on operator . b Degree of protection IP65.
Handles and front plates for Emergency stop switch disconnectors

For switch body Operator Handle Reference Front plate Dimensions mm Yellow 45 x 45 Fixing 22.5 4 screws Yellow 60 x 60 22.5 4 screws KCC1LZ KCE1LZ KDD1PZ KDF1PZ KDF2PZ kg 0.050 0.040 0.082 0.075 0.070 Weight
1 2 3 4
Weight kg 0.050 0.040 0.055 0.045 0.070
VN12, VN20 V02V2
Red, not padlockable
V3 and V4
Red, long, not padlockable Red, long, not padlockable
Yellow 60 x 60 Yellow 90 x 90
4 screws
V5 and V6
4 screws
KDF3PZ (1)
0.160
Handles and front plates for switch disconnectors

For switch body VN12, VN20 V02V2 Operator Handle Reference Front plate Dimensions mm Black 45 x 45 Fixing 22.5 4 screws Black 60 x 60 22.5 4 screws V3 and V4 Black, not padlockable Black, not padlockable Black 60 x 60 Black 90 x 90 4 screws KAC1BZ KAE1BZ KBD1PZ KBF1PZ KBF2PZ
Black, not padlockable
5 6 7 8 9 10
V5 and V6
4 screws
KBF3PZ (1)
0.160
(1) For door mounting of 63 and 80 A switch disconnectors, adapter plate KZ106 must be ordered separately (see next page).
4/19
Accessories
Input terminal protection shrouds
580583
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Description For switch bodies (3-pole shroud)
For use on V02V2 V3 and V4
Reference VZ8 VZ9 VZ10 VZ26 VZ27 VZ28 VZ29
Weight kg 0.015 0.020 0.060 0.005 0.007 0.020 0.005
VZ8 For add-on pole modules (single-pole shroud)

580584
V5 and V6 VZ02VZ2, VZ11, VZ14 VZ3, VZ4, VZ12, VZ15 VZ13, VZ16
VZ26
For contact blocks with 2 auxiliary contacts
Components for door interlocking

Description For use on
For rear fixing switch disconnectors mounted at the back of an enclosure, in addition to a direct operator
Distance enc. Sold in back/door lots of mm 1 VN12, VN20 300330 V02V2 400430 1 V02V2
580526
Unit reference VZN17 (1) VZN30 (1) VZ17 VZ30 VZ18 VZ31 VZ18 VZ31 KZ32 KZ74 Unit reference KZ83 KZ81 KZ106
Weight kg 0.100 0.130 0.075 0.125 0.170 0.215 0.170 0.215 0.177 0.020 Weight kg 0.205 0.010 0.075
Shaft extensions
300330 400430
1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 Sold in lots of 5 5 5
V3 and V4
300320 400420
VZ18 V5 and V6
330350 430450
580585
Door interlock plates
VN12, VN20 V02V2 V3V6 Front plate dimensions mm VN12, VN20 45 x 45 or V02V2 60 x 60 V3V6 V3 and V4 60 x 60 or 90 x 90 90 x 90 For use on
Description
KZ32
Plates for door mounting of handles with 4 screw fixing Adapter plate for switch disconnectors
8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 4/4 to 4/6 Dimensions : pages 4/22 to 4/25 KZ81
580527
(1) Can be used with V02 to V2 switches.
4/20
Accessories
Accessories for operators
Description For use on Front plate dimensions mm 45 x 45 60 x 60 90 x 90 Legend holders without legend plate Front plate 45 x 45 60 x 60 90 x 90 Silver coloured blank legend plates for engraving by customer KZ14 KZ16 KZ101 45 x 45 60 x 60 60 x 60 90 x 90 Sold in lots of 5 5 5 20 10 5 20 10 5 5 5 5 5 5
Unit reference KZ13 KZ15 KZ103 KZ14 KZ16 KZ101 KZ76 KZ77 KZ100 KZ65 KZ66 KZ62 KZ67 Z01
Weight kg 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.020 0.010 0.005 0.037 0.033 0.033 0.064 0.050
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Legend Front plate holder with silver coloured blank legend plate
812783
KZ15
580528
KZ67
Seals
VN12, VN20 V02V2 V3 and V4 V3V6
Tightening tool
For operators with 22.5 fixing
812785
Z01
4/21
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors, 12and20A
Dimensions
1 2
Switch bodies VN12, VN20 Add-on modules VZN12, VZN20 Add-on modules VZN11, VZN14 VZN05 and VZN06
46,5
45,5
62
48 56
39
12
39
12
3 4
Mounting
Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door

VN12, VN20 Single hole fixing
1,5...5
22,5
44 74,5
6 7
VN12, VN20 4 screw fixing 45 x 45 front plate 60 x 60 front plate
1,5...5
13
12,7
36
44
62,5
36
48
8 9 10
Characteristics : page 4/4 References : page 4/14 Schemes : page 4/23
4/22
48
45,5
Mounting (continued), schemes
Mini-VARIO switch disconnectors, 12and20A
VN12, VN20 Single hole fixing
Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure with shaft extension VZN17 or VZN30 (clip-on mounting on 6 rail)
4 screw fixing
1 2
1,5...5
1,5...5
3 4
Shaft extension
VN12, VN20
VZN17 VZN30
Distance (e) enclosure back/door mm 300330 400430
Schemes
Switch body VN12, VN20
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Main pole module VZN12, VZN20
Neutral pole module VZN11
Auxiliary contact blocks VZN05

13
VZN06
21 22
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
14
6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics : page 4/4 References : page 4/14
4/23

VARIO switch disconnectors,12to 175A
Dimensions
1 2 3 4
Switch bodies V0p, V0 to V2 Switch bodies V3 to V6
60
55
=
74
G a
Add-on modules VZ02 to VZ4 and VZ11 to VZ16
a V3, V4 60 V5, V6 90 Add-on modules VZ7, VZ20
b 83 125
=
c 65 90
G 48 68
H 48 68
5.5 5.5
48,5
20
VZ02 and VZ01, VZ0 to VZ2, VZ11, VZ14 VZ3, VZ4, VZ12, VZ15 VZ13, VZ16
a 16 20 30
b 74 83 125
c 35 46 63
Mounting
Switch disconnector mounted on enclosure door
6 7
Single hole fixing V0p, V0 to V2
4 screw fixing V0p, V0 to V4
65
4 screw fixing 4 screw fixing 45 x 45 front plate 60 x 60 front plate V0p, V0 to V2 V0p, V0 to V4
1,5...5
12,7
1,5...5
1,5...5
22,5
44 72
36
36
48
44
c
c 60 65
37
8 9
V0p, V0 to V2 V3, V4 V5 and V6. 4 screw fixing
90 x 90 front plate
1,5...5
94
10
65
Characteristics : page 4/4 References : pages 4/14 Schemes : page 4/25
68
90
4/24
68
48
Mounting (continued), schemes
VARIO switch disconnectors, 12to175A
Switch disconnector mounted at back of enclosure

4 screw fixing V0p, V0 to V2 with shaft extension VZ17 or VZ30 (clip-on mounting on 6 rail possible for V0p to V2) Single hole fixing V3 to V4 with shaft extension VZ18orVZ31 V5 and V6 with shaft extension VZ18 or VZ31
1 2
1,5...5
1,5...5
1,5...5
94
30
100
60
3 4
Shaft extension
V02 and V01 V0toV2 V3 and V4
VZ17 VZ30 VZ18 VZ31
Distance (e) enc.back/door mm 300330 400430 300320 400420
Shaft extension V5 and V6 VZ18 VZ31
2 x 4.2 2 x 4.2 2x5 2x5
15 15 20 20
Distance (e) enc. back/door mm 300350 430450
Switch disconnectors for modular distribution boards

VVp 0 to VVp2 VVp 3 to VVp4
45 74
5,5 68 106
45
110
5,5 72
60
45 83
6 7 8 9 10
Schemes
V02 and V01 V0 to V6
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
Switch body
Main pole module

VZ02 and VZ01 VZ0 to VZ4
Neutral pole module

VZ11 to VZ13

VZ7 VZ20
13
21
13 14
14
22
2/T1
4/T2
Characteristics : page 4/4
6/T3
References : pages 4/14
24
23
4/25
Selection guide
Fuse protection

Applications
Protection of control circuits or transformers
1 2 3
Breaking under load
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Fuse type
NF C or DIN
Cartridge fuses
1125 A
Device type
Fuse carriers
References
DF
4/29
Pages
4/26

Protection of motors Protection of motors or variable speed drives
1 2 3
Yes, only if combined with a contactor
Yes
NF C or DIN
NF C, DIN, BS or UL
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1125 A
11250 A
Fuse carriers
Switch-disconnector-fuses
LS1 and GK1

4/36
GS
4/42
4/27
Characteristics
Fuse carriers

Fuse carrier type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Environment characteristics
Conforming to standards Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature Conforming to IEC 60529 Storage For operation, with derating (1) Operating positions Flame resistance Without derating Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 C C C
DF8
DF10
DF14
DF22
IEC 60947-3, UL 512, CSA 22-2 n 39 TH IP 20 - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 23 in relation to normal mounting plane 960
Fuse size Rated insulation voltage (Ui) with tubular links, a.c. or D.C. supply Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conventional thermal current (Ith) for ambient air temperature y 40 C (1) With tubular links With aM cartridge fuses With gG cartridge fuses Rated conditional short-circuit current Conforming to IEC 60947-3 400 V 500 V 690 V Peak withstand current (dynamic stress) Conforming to IEC 60269-1 With tubular links Cabling (number of conductors x c.s.a.) Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque mm V kV 8.5 x 31.5 500 6 10 x 38 690 6 14 x 51 690 8 22 x 58 690 8
A A A
25 25 25
32 32 32
50 50 50
125 125 100
kA kA kA kA mm2 mm2 mm2 Nm
20 11 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 2.2 Max. 1 x 16 2x6 1 x 10 2x6 1 x 10 2x6
120 120 15 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 Max. 1 x 16 2x6 1 x 10 2x6 1 x 10 2x6
120 120 80 15 Min. 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 3.5 Max. 1 x 25 2 x 10 1 x 25 2 x 10 1 x 25 2 x 10
120 120 80 19 Min. 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 4 Max. 1 x 35 2 x 25 1 x 35 2 x 16 1 x 35 2 x 16
Characteristics of early break and signalling contacts DF14 AM and DF22 AM

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) a.c. supply Conventional thermal current (Ith) for ambient air temperature y 40 C (1) Rated operational current Category AC-15 Category DC-13 Definition of rated characteristics Low load operating characteristics Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Minimum voltage Minimum current Cabling V mA V A 250 5 24 V 4 3 B300 10 30 Faston connectors (1) For use in an installation with ambient temperature > 20 C, apply a derating coefficient: Maximum temperature 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C Max. relative humidity 95 % 90 % 80 % 50 % 50 % 1 0.95 0.9 0.8 0.7 Current derating coefficient 48 V 4 1 127 V 3 0.2 240 V 2.5 0.1
A A
Substitution: page 4/30
Schemes: page 4/31
4/28
References
DF221NV
Fuse carriers

Fuse carriers (1)
Conventional thermal current (Ith) A 25 Size of cartridge fuse or link mm 8.5 x 31.5 Composition Sold Unit in reference lots of 1P N 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P N 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P N 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P N 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 12 12 6 6 4 3 12 12 6 6 4 3 6 6 3 3 2 1 6 6 3 3 2 1 DF8 1 DF10 N DF8 1N DF8 2 DF8 3 DF8 3N DF10 1 DF10 N DF10 1N DF10 2 DF10 3 DF10 3N DF14 1 DF14 N DF14 1N DF14 2 DF14 3C (3) DF14 3NC (3) DF22 1 DF22 N DF22 1N DF22 2 DF22 3C (3) DF22 3NC (3) Weight
kg 0.061 0.071 0.132 0.122 0.183 0.254 0.061 0.071 0.132 0.122 0.183 0.254 0.140 0.150 0.290 0.280 0.420 0.570 0.218 0.238 0.456 0.436 0.654 0.892
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
106786
106788
DF101
106793
DF103N
32
10 x 38
106795
50
14 x 51
DF141
DF143NC
106823
106825
125
22 x 58
DF221
DF223NC
Fuse carriers with blown fuse indicators (neon)

Conventional thermal current (Ith) A 25 Size of cartridge fuse or link mm 8.5 x 31.5
(1) (4)
Weight kg 0.064 0.135 0.125 0.186 0.257 0.064 0.135 0.125 0.186 0.257 0.143 0.293 0.283 0.423 0.573 0.221 0.459 0.439 0.657 0.895
Composition Sold Unit in reference lots of 1P 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 1P 1 P + N (2) 2P 3P 3 P + N (2) 12 6 6 4 3 12 6 6 4 3 6 3 3 2 1 6 3 3 2 1 DF8 1V DF8 1NV DF8 2V DF8 3V DF8 3NV DF10 1V DF10 1NV DF10 2V DF10 3V DF10 3NV DF14 1V DF14 1NV DF14 2V DF14 3VC (3) DF14 3NVC (3) DF22 1V DF22 1NV DF22 2V DF22 3VC (3) DF22 3NVC (3)
106791
DF101NV
106792
DF103V
32
10 x 38
106834
106822
50
14 x 51
DF141NV
106834 106835
DF143VC 125 22 x 58
DF221NV
DF223VC
(1) Each pole can be marked. A clip-in marker holder is provided for this purpose. Clip-in markers type AB1 Rp or AB1 Gp can also be used. (2) N: neutral pole fitted with a locked tubular link as standard. (3) A letter C in the reference indicates that the fuse carrier can be fitted with auxiliary early break, blown fuse signalling and fuse present signalling contacts. (4) Operational voltage of the blown fuse indicator: 110 V...690 V.

Characteristics: page 4/28 Substitution: page 4/30 Dimensions: page 4/31 Schemes: page 4/31
4/29
References (continued), substitution
4
Fuse carriers

Accessories
106836
1 2
Auxiliary early break and blown fuse signalling contacts (1)

Fuse carriers Size of cartridge to be equipped fuse or link 14 x 51 DF14 (3 P or 3 P + N) DF22 (3 P or 3 P + N) Fuse carriers to be assembled DF8 DF10 DF14 DF22 22 X 58 Number of contacts 1 2 1 2 Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 Unit reference DF14 AM1 DF14 AM2 DF22 AM1 DF22 AM2 Unit reference DF10 AP DF14 AP DF22 AP Weight kg 0.025 0.029 0.032 0.035 Weight kg 0.001 0.003 0.003
DF14 AMp
Fuse carrier assembly kits (2)

Size of cartridge fuse or link 8.5 x 31.5 10 x 38 14 x 51 22 x 58 Composition Sold in lots of 1 pin, 2clips 1 pin, 3clips 1 pin, 3clips Marking 09 AZ 12 10 10
3 4
Detail of assembly clip and pin mounting
524196
Marking accessories
Description Composition Clip-in markers Strip of 10 identical numbers or letters Sold in lots of 25 25 Unit reference AB1 Rp (3) AB1 Gp (3) Weight kg 0.002 0.002
Substitution
Fuse carriers
Old range Reference DF6 AB08 DF6 AB10 DF6 N10 GK1 CC GK1 CD GK1 CF GK1 CH GK1 DC GK1 DD GK1 DF GK1 DH GK1 EB GK1 EN GK1 EC GK1 ED GK1 EF GK1 EH GK1 FB GK1 FN GK1 FC GK1 FD GK1 FF GK1 FH Old range Reference GK1 AP2 GK1 AP3 Size of cartridge fuse or link 8.5 x 31.5 10 x 38 8.5 x 31.5 or 10 x 38 8.5 x 31.5 8.5 x 31.5 8.5 x 31.5 8.5 x 31.5 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58
Composition 1P 1P 1N 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N 1P 1N 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N 1P 1N 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N
5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: page 4/28 Dimensions: page 4/31
New range Reference w/o indicator DF8 1 DF10 1 DF10 N DF8 1N DF8 2 DF8 3 DF8 3N DF10 1N DF10 2 DF10 3 DF10 3N DF14 1 DF14 N DF14 1N DF14 2 DF14 3C DF14 3NC DF22 1 DF22 N DF22 1N DF22 2 DF22 3C DF22 3NC
Reference with indicator DF8 1V DF10 1V DF8 1NV DF8 2V DF8 3V DF8 3NV DF10 1NV DF10 2V DF10 3V DF10 3NV DF14 1V DF14 1NV DF14 2V DF14 3VC DF14 3NVC DF22 1V DF22 1NV DF22 2V DF22 3CV DF22 3NVC
Fuse carrier assembly kits

New range Size of cartridge fuse or link Reference DF10 AP 8.5 x 31.5 or 10 x 38 DF10 AP 8.5 x 31.5 or 10 x 38 14 x 51 DF14 AP DF10 AP 8.5 x 31.5 or 10 x 38 GK1 AP4 22 x 58 DF22 AP 14 x 51 DF14 AP GK1 AP5 GK1 AP6 14 x 51 DF14 AP 22 x 58 DF22 AP 22 x 58 DF22 AP GK1 AP9 (1) These auxiliary contacts provide the following functions: early break, blown fuse signalling (if the fuse carrier is fitted with striker fuses) and fuse present signalling. (2) 1 pin and 2 clips are required to assemble two DF8 or DF10 fuse carriers together. 1 pin and 3 clips are required to assemble two DF14 or DF22 fuse carriers together. (3) When ordering, replace the p in the reference with the number or letter required. Example: AB1-R1 or AB1-GA. Schemes: page 4/31
4/30
Dimensions, schemes
4
Fuse carriers

Dimensions
Modular fuse carriers 25 A and 32 A

Mounting on 35 mm 5 rail DF81 and DF81V DF101 and DF101V DF10N DF81N and DF81NV DF82 and DF82V DF101N and DF101NV DF102 and DF102V DF83 and DF83V DF103 and DF103V DF83N and DF83NV DF103N and DF103NV
1 2
58
40,5
83
45
64
Modular fuse carriers 50 A

Mounting on 35 mm 5 rail DF141 and DF141V DF14N DF141N and DF141NV DF142 and DF142V DF143C and DF143VC DF143NC and DF143NVC
5,5
47
17,5
2x17,5
3x17,5
4x17,5
3 4 5
70
48,5
3,8
50,5 76,5
107
45
1,5x17,5
3x17,5
4,5x17,5
6x17,5

Mounting on 35 mm 5 rail DF221 and DF221V DF22N DF221N and DF221NV DF222 and DF222V DF223C and DF223VC DF223NC and DF223NVC
6 7
70
51
126,5
50,5 76,5
2x17,5
45
4x17,5
6x17,5
8x17,5
Schemes
DFp 1P
8
DFp N DFp 1P + N
N 1
Modular fuse carriers

DFp 2P
1 3
DFp 3P
1 3 5
DFp 3P + N
1 3 5
9 10
Substitution: page 4/30
4/31
Characteristics
Fuse carriers for the North American market, conforming to standards UL and CSA,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Fuse carrier type
DFCC IEC 60947-3, UL 512, CSA 22-2 n 39 TH
Conforming to standards Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature Conforming to IEC 60529 Storage For operation, with derating (1) Operating positions Flame resistance Without derating Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 C C C
IP 20 - 40+ 80 - 20+ 60 23 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane 960
Fuse carrier type Fuse size Rated insulation voltage (Ui) with tubular links, a.c. supply Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conventional thermal current (Ith) for ambient air temperature y 40 C (1) With tubular links With aM cartridge fuses With gG cartridge fuses Short-circuit current withstand With UL 248-4 Class CC fuses Conforming to UL 512 at 600 V Cabling (number of conductors x c.s.a.) Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque mm2 mm2 mm2 Nm kA A A A V kV
DFCC Class CC 600 6
30 30 30
200 Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5 2.2 Max. 1 x 16 2x6 1 x 10 2x6 1 x 10 2x6
(1) For use in an installation with ambient temperature > 20 C, apply a derating coefficient: Maximum temperature Max. relative humidity Current derating coefficient 20 C 95 % 1 30 C 90 % 0.95 40 C 80 % 0.9 50 C 50 % 0.8 60 C 50 % 0.7
Schemes: page 4/33
4/32
References, dimensions, schemes

References
106786
Fuse carriers for the North American market, conforming to standards UL and CSA,
Fuse carriers (1)

Conventional thermal current (Ith) A 30 Class CC 1P 2P 3P 12 12 6 DFCC 1 DFCC 2 DFCC 3 Size of cartridge fuse or link Composition Sold Unit in reference lots of Weight kg 0.061 0.122 0.183
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DFCC1
106792
Fuse carriers with blown fuse indicators (neon) (1), (2)

Conventional thermal current (Ith) A 30 DFCC3V Class CC 1P 2P 3P 12 6 6 DFCC 1V DFCC 2V DFCC 3V Size of cartridge fuse or link Composition Sold Unit in reference lots of Weight kg 0.064 0.125 0.186
524196
Fuse carrier assembly kits (3)

Fuse carriers to be assembled DFCC Size of cartridge fuse or link Class CC Composition Sold Unit in reference lots of 1 pin, 2clips Marking 12 DF10 AP Weight kg 0.001
Marking accessories
Description Clip-in markers Composition Sold Unit in reference lots of 25 25 AB1 Rp (4) AB1 Gp (4) Weight kg 0.002 0.002
Strip of 10 identical 09 numbers or letter AZ
Detail of assembly clip and pin mounting
(1) Each pole can be marked. A clip-in marker holder is provided for this purpose. Clip-in markers type AB1 Rp or AB1 Gp can also be used. (2) Operational voltage of the blown fuse indicator: 110 V...690 V. (3) 1 pin and 2 clips are required to assemble two DFCC fuse carriers together. (4) When ordering, replace the p in the reference with the number or letter required. Example: AB1 R1 or AB1 GA.
Dimensions

Mounting on 35 mm 5 rail DFCC1 and DFCC 1V DFCC2 and DFCC2V DFCC3 and DFCC3V
58
40,5
64
Schemes
DFCC 1P
5,5
47
83
45
17,5
2x17,5
3x17,5
Modular fuse carriers

DFCC2P
1 3
DFCC 3P
1 3 5
9 10
4/33
Selection
Fuse carriers
1 2 3 4 5
The fuse carrier performs two basic functions: b it isolates the downstream circuit by means of a visible break and wide opening contacts, b it holds the cartridge fuses designed to protect the installation against shortcircuits. The type of cartridge fuse needed to protect the circuit must be determined before selecting the fuse carrier.
Operation: safety
Cartridge fuse selection (type, rating, size)

Type
Application Solution b Motor protection. b Transformer protection. b aM type fuses. These fuses are designed to withstand high current peaks of a very short duration. They must be combined with a thermal overload relay coupled with a contactor. b Lighting circuit protection. b Supply line protection. b Furnace protection. b gG type fuses, which are more widely used but whose limiting capacity is weaker than that of aM type fuses.
Application Solution
Rating
gG fuses aM fuses See standard NF C 15-100. Table 53 A paragraph 532-2-1 and table 52 C paragraph 5231. Motors Motors Cartridge fuses 3 x 220 V 3 x 400 V type aM P in P in Size Rating kW A kW A A 9 32 15 28.5 10 x 38 32 11 39 22 44 14 x 51 50 75 37 73 22 x 58 80 22 103 55 105 22 x 58 125 30
Fuse carrier
LS1 D32 GK1 EK GK1 FK GK1 FK
Size
6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics : page 4/35 References : pages 4/36 and 4/37 Dimensions : page 4/40 Application Solution Application Solution
Use the fuse characteristics table opposite to select the correct fuse size according to: b the nominal current of the circuit to be protected, b the operational voltage.
Fuse carrier selection

Isolation of a circuit for safety reasons only. The fuse carrier may be fitted with links. The maximum permissible current is indicated in the pole characteristics table opposite. Isolation of a circuit and its protection against short-circuits. Select a fuse carrier according to: b the type of cartridge fuse required, b the maximum permissible current in the fuse carrier poles (see pole characteristics table opposite). If the operational current is greater than the maximum permissible current in the poles of the fuse carrier corresponding to the cartridge fuse size selected, select the fuse carrier the next size up. The safety provided by using a fuse carrier can be increased by adding a padlocking device with up to three padlocks.
The fuse carrier conforms to utilisation category AC-21A/22A of standard IEC609473. It is therefore recommended that the fuse carrier early break auxiliary contacts always be inserted in the coil circuit of the contactor with which it is in series. If the fuse carrier is not associated with a contactor, it is essential to ensure that it will be operated off-load.
Recommendations for use
Schemes : page 4/41
4/34
Characteristics
Fuse carriers
Fuse carrier type
Environment
Conforming to standards NF EN 60947-3 IEC 60947-3 Product certifications Protective treatment Ambient air temperature for operation with links without derating Maximum tilt in relation to normal vertical mounting plane C
LS1 D32 p p BV, UR TH - 50+ 70 23
LS1 D323
GK1 Ep p p TC - 50+ 70 23
GK1 Fp p p TC - 50+ 70 23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Fuse size Rated operational voltage with links. a.c. supply Maximum continuous current at ambient temperature y 40 C (1) (Min. cable /Ie) With tubular links With aM fuses With gG fuses V
10 x 38 690
10 x 38 690
14 x 51 690
22 x 58 690
Early break contact characteristics

Rated operational voltage Conventional thermal current
mm2/A 6/32 or 4/25 or 2.5/16 mm2/A 6/32 or 4/22 or 2.5/20 mm2/A 4/25 or 2.5/20 or 1.5/16 V A a 250. c 60 2.5
4/25 or 2.5/16 4/25 or 2.5/20 2.5/20 or 1.5/16
10/50 or 6/40 10/50 or 6/35 10/40 or 6/32
35/125 or 25/100 35/125 or 25/100 25/100 or 16/80
a 250. c 60 2.5
a 500. c 440 6
a 500. c 220 6
Cartridge fuse characteristics

Fuse size Type aM a 400 V a 500 V a 660 V a 400 V a 500 V a 660 V A A A A A A W 10 x 38 32 (2) 20 25 (2) 25 3 10 x 38 25 20 25 25 3 14 x 51 50 40 25 40 40 25 8.5 22 x 58 125 80 50 100 80 50 18
Type gG
Maximum power dissipated by fuse
Cabling
Connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

Number and c.s.a. of conductors Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Connection Tightening torque Nm mm2 mm2 mm2 Min. 2x1 2 x 1.5 2x1 Max. 2x6 2x6 2x4 Min. Max. Min. 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 1 x 2.5 Connector 2 Max. 1 x 25 1 x 25 1 x 16 Min. 1 x 16 1 x 16 1 x 16 Connector 2 Max. 1 x 70 1 x 50 1 x 25
Screw clamp terminals 1.7
8 9 10
Connection by spring terminals

Number and c.s.a. of conductors Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. 2 x 1 (3) 2 x 4 2 x 1.5 2x4 (3) (1) For use in an installation with ambient temperature > 55 C, apply a derating coefficient equivalent to mm2 mm2 (2) These values are for fuse carriers mounted side by side with a gap of 10mm between them or mounted with sets of busbars GV2 p54. If mounted side by side without a gap, use the following fuse sizes: aM fuse: 25 A and gG fuse: 20 A. (3) For cross-sections 1 to 1.5 mm2, the use of an LA9 D99 cable end reducer is recommended. Min. Max.
Selection : page 4/34
Schemes : page 4/41
4/35
References
Fuse carriers
526399
3-pole basic blocks

Rating Cartridge fuse size 10 x 38 Number of early break contacts (1) (4) Single-phase protection device (2) Without Reference (3) Weight kg 0.270
1 2
LS1D323
526400

25 A LS1D323

32 A 50 A 10 x 38 14 x 51 (4) 1 Without Without With 2 Without With 125 A 22 x 58 1 Without With 2 Without With LS1D32 GK1EK GK1EV GK1ES GK1EW GK1FK GK1FV GK1FS GK1FW 0.300 0.430 0.470 0.470 0.510 0.860 0.900 0.900 0.940
3 4
LS1D32
526401
4-pole basic blocks

32 A 50 A

10 x 38 14 x 51 (4) 1 Without Without With 2 Without With LS1D32 + LA8D324 (5) GK1EM GK1EY GK1ET GK1EX GK1FM GK1FY GK1FT GK1FX 0.300 0.570 0.600 0.610 0.650 1.090 1.130 1.130 1.160
5 6
GK1FK
125 A
22 x 58
Without With
526400
500505_1
Without With
7 8 9 10
Selection : page 4/34 LS1D32 + LA8D324
Fuse carriers for the North American market

25 and 30 A basic blocks: please consult your Regional Sales Office. (1) With 1 or 2 early break contacts to be inserted in the contactor control circuit. (2) Fuse carriers with single-phase protection device must be fitted with striker fuses. (3) LS1D: clips directly onto a 35 mm 5 rail or screw fixing. GK1: clips directly onto a 35 mm 5 rail or Telequick mounting plate. (4) Addition of add-on contact block, see page 4/37. (5) Can be mounted on left-hand or right-hand side of the basic block.
Schemes : page 4/41
4/36
References
Fuse carriers
Operators and accessories

Description Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (early break contacts) For use on LS1D32 Mounting Front Maximum number 1 Type of contacts N/O + N/C N/O + N/O LS1D323 Front 1 N/O + N/C N/O + N/O Sold in lots of 10 10 10 10 Unit reference GVAE11 GVAE20 GVAE113 GVAE203 Weight kg 0.020 0.020 0.030 0.030
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Operators
For fuse carrier Rating Number of poles 3 or 4 For mounting on Right-hand side Left-hand side
526402
Reference
Weight kg 0.300 0.300
Side handles
125 A GK1AP07 GK1AP08
Front handles (1)

32 - 50 - 125 A GK1FK + GK1AP07 Fitted as standard
External handles
32 A 3 or 4 Right-hand side Left-hand side 50 A 3 or 4 Right-hand side Left-hand side 125 A 3 or 4 Right-hand side Left-hand side LS1D32005 (2) LS1D32006 GK1AP05 GK1AP06 GK1AP07 GK1AP08 0.200 0.200 0.180 0.180 0.300 0.300
Padlocking devices (3)

For fuse carrier Rating 32 A 50 A Reference Number of poles 3 or 4 3 Single-phase protection device Without Without With 4 Without With Weight kg 0.100 0.110 0.110 0.070
integral GK1AV07 GK1AV08 GK1AV08 GK1AV09
Links
Tubular links
For fuse carrier Rating 32 A 50 A 125 A Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 Sold in lots of 10 10 10 Unit reference DK1CB92 (4) DK1EB92 (5) DK1FA92 (5) Weight kg 0.007 0.012 0.020
(1) Fitted as standard on 32, 50 and 125 A fuse carriers type GK1. (2) Reference LS1D32005 replaces reference DK1FB005. (3) For the 125 A rating, use side handles GK1AP07 or GK1AP08. (4) For use on a neutral circuit, the tubular link can be interlocked with special device LA8D25906 (sold in lots of 10). (5) 50 and 125 A fuse carriers type GK1 are fitted with an interlocked neutral tubular link as standard.
Schemes : page 4/41
4/37
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4/38
References
Accessories
Accessories for LS1D32 (screw clamp terminals)

Description Plate for mounting Combination blocks Application LS1D32 and contactor LC1D09...D38 with front faces aligned Between LS1D32 and contactor LC1K or LP1K Between LS1D32 and contactor LC1D09...D38 Between LS1D32 mounted on LAD311 and contactor LC1D09...D38 Application 2 tap-offs Sold in lots of 1 10 10 10 Unit reference LAD311 GV2AF01 GV2AF3 GV2AF4 Weight kg 0.040 0.020 0.016 0.016
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Description Sets of 3-pole 63 A busbars
Pitch mm 45 54 72
Reference GV2G245 GV2G254 GV2G272 GV2G345 GV2G354 GV2G445 GV2G454 GV2G472 GV2G554 Unit reference GV1G10 GV1G09 LA9E07 GV2V03
Weight kg 0.036 0.038 0.042 0.058 0.060 0.077 0.085 0.094 0.100 Weight kg 0.005 0.040 0.005 0.092
3 tap-offs
45 54
4 tap-offs
45 54 72
5 tap-offs Description Protective end cover Terminal block Connection from the top Cover for terminal block Padlocking device Application
54 Sold in lots of 5 1
Accessories for LS1D323 (spring terminals)

Description Plate for mounting Description Power splitter box, 63 A Application
For unused busbar outlets For supply to one or more GV2G busbar sets For mounting in modular panels 10 1 For use with up to 4 padlocks (not supplied) 6 mm shank max
Reference LAD311 Reference LAD322 LAD323 LAD324 Reference LAD352
LS1D323 and contactor LC1D09...D38 with front faces aligned Extension by LAD32p Number of starters 2 3 4
Weight kg 0.040 Weight kg 0.120 0.180 0.240 Weight kg 0.078
Description Assembly and power connection kit for LS1D323 and LC1D093...D323 Description Maximum capacity 16 mm2
Kit contents 1 LAD311 plate for mounting LS1D323 2 LAD341 power connection modules - between LS1D323 and power splitter box - between LS1D323 and contactor Application Power supply to 1 or 2 power splitter boxes Connection of motor cables For connection of conductors from 1 to 1.5 mm2 Sold in lots of 1 1 20
Upstream terminal block Downstream 16 mm2 terminal block Cable end reducer
Unit reference LAD3B1 LAD331 LAD99
Weight kg 0.212 0.050
4/39
4
Fuse carriers

LS1 D32
LS1 D32 + LA8 D324

Panel mounting Mounting on rail AM1DP200 Mounting of 4th pole On left-hand side On right-hand side
1 2
Mounting on rail AM1 DP200
14,2
87
89
84
22,5 51,5 38,5 68,3
45
2x5 22,5
40 57
89
17,5
45
45
17,5
3 4
GK1 EK, EM, ES, ET, EV, EW, EX, EY

Mounting on rail AM1 DP200 Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1P
GK1 E + GK1 AV (padlocking device)
40,5
95
29,5
20,5
45
45 82
a1 7,5 a 7,5
7,5
45 82
53 98
45
4,5
4,5
GK1 EK EM ES ET EV EW EX EY
6 7 8 9 10
a 3P 106 115
4P 141 132
a1 3P 88 97
4P 114 123
15 15
70
a: with single-phase protection device. a1: without single-phase protection device.
External operator GK1 AP05 right-hand, GK1 AP06 left-hand Panel cut-out 5
70
8 13 110 f
f 29114 29114
30
GK1 Fp + GK1 AP07 (internal right-hand control) Mounting on rail AM1 DE or ED

47 4
External operator, RH or LH side GK1 EK, EM, ES, ET GK1 EV, EW, EX, EY Mounting on pre-slotted plate AM1PA a AF1 EA4
GK1 Fp
44 82
6 15
7,5
a1 a
55 35
(1)
44 82
(1) Padlocking device (up to 3 padlocks)
a a1
Internal or external control GK1 AP07 RH, AP08LH Panel cut-out (for external control)
100/110
a 3P 4P 70 105
a1 3P 4P 96 131
120
= = 12,5
FK FM FS FT FV FW FX FY Selection : page 4/34
4P 186 171 Characteristics : page 4/35
4P 156 171
55
GK1
a 3P 136 151
a1 3P 121 136
== 8,5
==
55
8 25 110
f 35114 35114
30 f

External operator, RH or LH side GK1 FK, FM, FS, FT GK1 FV, FW, FX, FY Schemes : page 4/41
4/40
87
Schemes
Fuse carriers

Fuse carriers without single-phase protection device

3-pole LS1 D32, D323
1 3 5
13
23
13
21
14
24
14
22
14
13
LS1 D32, D323 + GV AE11p
LS1 D32, D323 + GV AE20p

1 3 5
GK1 EK
1 3 5
1 2 3 4 5
12 14 22 24 21 11
13
23
GK1 ES
1 3 5
GK1 FK
1 3 5
GK1 FS
1 3 5
4-pole LS1 D32 + LA8 D324

1 3 5 6 7
12
14
22
24
12
14
24
14
21
11
11
13
13
23
3-pole + Neutral GK1 EM

N 1 3 5
GK1 ET
N 1 3 5
GK1 FM
N 1 3 5
GK1 FT
N 1 3 5
12
14
14
14
24
11
12
14
11 22
24
Fuse carriers with single-phase protection device

3-pole GK1 EV
1 3 5
13
13
23
GK1 EW
1 3 5
GK1 FV
1 3 5
GK1 FW
1 3 5
14
14
24
96
96
98
96
98
12
96
98
14
11
95
95
95
95
98
21
13
13
23
3-pole + Neutral GK1 EY

N 1 3 5
6 7 8 9 10
GK1 EX
N 1 3 5 6
14
14
96
98
96
95
GK1 FY
N 1 3 5
GK1 FX
N 1 3 5
95
98
12
14
24
22
24
12
14
96
98
96
98
11
95
95
Schemes : page 4/40
21
11
4/41
Selection guide
TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses, 32 to 1250 A
Applications
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses provide on-load breaking and making, safe isolation and They are used, in particular, on the incoming supply to control panels, for protecting and switching They provide simultaneous disconnection, together with all the other associated functions such as Their compact design means that they can also be fitted in small automation system equipment to
Fuse type
NF C or DIN
Rated thermal current (Ith)
32A
50A
63A
100A
125A
160A
250A
400A
630A
1250A
Number of poles
3 or 3 + Nc 10 x 38
3 or 4
Fuse size
14 x 51
T00C
22 x 58
22 x 58 T00
T0 T00
T1
T2
T3
T4
External operator, padlockable and lockable Direct operator, padlockable
Front and RH side LH side Front RH side Front
Rated operational voltage (Ue)
690V
Rated operational current (Ie) at 400 V, AC-23 A
32A
50A
63A
100A
125A
160A
250A
400A
630A
1000A
Rated making capacity at 400 V, AC-23B Rated breaking capacity at 400 V, AC-23B Rated conditional short-circuit current at 400 V, with gG (gI) fuses Switch-disconnector-fuse type references
320A 256A 100kA
500A 400A 100kA
630A 500A 100kA
1000A 800A 100kA
1250A 1000A 100kA
1600A 1280A 100kA
2500A 2000A 100kA
4000A 3200A 50kA
6300A 10 000A 5040A 8000A 100kA 100kA
GS1 DD
GSp F
GSp G
GSp J
GSp GSp K L or KK or LL
GSp N
GSp QQ
GS2 S
GS2 V
Pages
4/53
4/42
overcurrent protection. off main circuits (including Emergency stop). padlocking and interlocking. provide the same disconnect and protection functions on the incoming supply of equipment, generators or starters, including motors.
1 2 3
BS
32A
32A
63A
100A
160A
200A
250A
315A
400A
630A
800A
1250A
3 or 3 + Nc A1
3 or 4
4
A2-A3 A4 y 31 mm A4 B1-B2 B1-B2 B1B3 B1B3 B1B4 C1-C2 C1C3 D1
A1
Front and RH side Front Front
5 6 7 8 9 10
690 V
32A
32A
63A
100A
160A
200A
250A
315A
400A
630A
800A
1000A
320A 256A 80kA
320A 256A 80kA
630A 500A 80kA
1000A 800A 80kA
1600A 1280A 80kA
2000A 1600A 80kA
2500A 2000A 80kA
3150A 2520A 80kA
4000A 3200A 80kA
6300A 5040A 80kA
8000A 6400A 80kA
10 000A 8000A 80kA
GS1 DDB
GS2 DB
GS2 GB
GS2 JB
GS2 LB or LLB
GS2 MMB
GS2 NB
GS2 PPB
GS2 QQB
GS2 SB
GS2 TB
GS2 VB
4/55
4/43
Presentation
Switch-disconnector-fuses 32 to 1250 A, TeSys GS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: pages 4/46 to 4/50 References: pages 4/53 to 4/57
TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses provide on-load breaking or making, safe isolation and overcurrent protection of all low voltage electrical circuits. They are used, in particular, on the incoming supply to control panels, for protecting and switching off main circuits (including Emergency stop). Their compact design means that they can also be fitted in small automation system equipment to provide the same disconnect and protection functions on the incoming supply of equipment, generators or motor starters. Conforming to standard IEC 60947-3, TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses are available for use with: b NFC or DIN fuses, b BS fuses. A range for use with UL fuses, specifically for the North-American market and meeting the requirements of standards UL98 and CSA 22.2 Nr.4, is also available. The TeSys GS range includes sturdy and compact handles. These handles are easy to install and operate and are available in the following options: b Direct operator. b External front and RH side-mounted operator. b External LH side-mounted operator. b Padlockable with up to 3 padlocks. The door is locked when the handle is padlocked. b Locking by means of a key-operated lock (option). b With door interlock in the closed position. When in the Closed position, the door can be opened by means of a tool to be used only by authorised personnel. Locking is automatically re-established when the door is closed. b Black/Grey or Yellow/Red for the Emergency stop function. b IP 65 or IP 55. This range is completed by auxiliary contacts: b Two auxiliary early break and O and I position signalling contacts, configurable and common to all ratings. b Auxiliary contacts GS1 AN, which are suitable for isolation. Reversibility of these contacts to convert an N/C contact into an N/O contact and vice versa. b Control circuit test facility, off-load, with auxiliary contacts GS1AM110, GS1AM101 or GS1 ANT, used in conjunction with handles GS2 AHT. b Auxiliary blown fuse signalling contacts.
GS2 S3 + handle GS2AH550
Presentation
GS1 DD3
GS2 N3 + handle GS2 AH540
Breaking b Quick break and quick tripping mechanism, independent of the fuses. C Opening and closing independent of operator speed. C On-load making and breaking of resistive, inductive or mixed resistive and inductive circuits. C Quality and durability of mechanical and electrical lives.
Functions
C Durable performance in severe duty applications. C Direct control of motors.
b Utilisation categories AC-23/690 V and DC-23/440 V.
Schemes: page 4/67
4/44
Switch-disconnector-fuses 32 to 1250 A, TeSys GS
Functions (continued) Isolation b Upstream and downstream breaking of fuses for all ratings C Double break isolation of the power circuit and safe replacement of fuses. C Total isolation of power and control circuits to ensure safety of persons and equipment. C Control circuit isolation.
b GS1 AN auxiliary contacts.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
b Contacts forced open in the event of welding. C Fully visible break. Open position cannot be indicated unless all contacts are actually open. C Safe opening and clear indication of Open state of switch-disconnector.
C Visible break (630 to 1250 A ratings).
b Visible isolation distance between the open contacts.
Protection b Addition of gG (gl) fuses. b C Overload and short-circuit protection of distribution circuits and power switching circuits without significant current peak.
relays. C Short-circuit protection of motors and equipment. b Addition of quick-blow fuses.
C Type 2 coordination (Iq > 50 kA) for motor starters consisting of fuses, contactors,
b Addition of aM fuses (associated with thermal overload relays).
C Protection of electronic variable speed controllers and soft starters.

b Blown fuse detection device. C Protection against single-phasing.
switch-disconnector-fuse to withstand this maximum capacity. C Use in installations where very high short-circuit currents can develop. Handles with padlocking facility, with door interlock. Handle locking by means of a key-operated lock (option). Door interlock in Closed position. Operator shafts padlockable with door open. Fuse covers fitted as standard on all ratings. C Protection against accidental contact. C Protection of persons. b b b b b b IP 20 protection with terminal shrouds
C Equivalence between the breaking capacity of the fuses and the ability of the
b Conditional short-circuit withstand voltage of 100 kA for all ratings.
Information and testing b Up to 12 auxiliary contacts. C Early break, Open and Closed position signalling, and blown fuse signalling. C Use in automation systems. b Control circuit test facility, off-load, by using auxiliary contacts GS1AM110, GS1AM101 or GS1ANT in conjunction with handles GS2AHT. In the Test position, the enclosure door can be opened.
Schemes: page 4/67
4/45
Characteristics
TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses, 32 to 1250 A, for use with NF C or DIN fuses
Type
GS1DD
GSpF
GSpG
GSpJ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Switch-disconnector-fuse characteristics
Environment
Conforming to standards Switch-disconnector-fuses Circuit-breakers Product certifications Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature around the device On front panel with terminal shield Storage Operation Flame resistance conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Body Fuse cover C C C C IEC 60947-3 IEC 60269-1 and 2 ASEFA/LOVAG, LROS (pending) IP 20 - 40+ 80 - 20+ 70 960 960 850
Conventional thermal current (Ith) for ambient temperature y 40 C Fuse size Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-23A/B (1) a 400 V a 500 V a 690 V Cat. DC-23A/B (1) Rated operational power Cat. AC-23A/B (1) c 440 V (2) a 400 V a 500 V a 690 V Rated conditional short-circuit current I rms at a 400 V with protection by gG (gl) fuses Rating of associated fuses Peak value of permissible current (dynamic short-circuit withstand) Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity Mechanical durability Electrical durability Cabling Conforming to IEC 60269-1 a 400 V V kV A A A A kW kW kW kA A kA A A A 32 10 x 38 800 8 32 32 32 20 15 18.5 25 100 32 5.5 320 256 20 000 1500/300 mm2 mm N.m 2.5/16 3 50 14 x 51 750 8 50 50 50 40 25 33 45 100 50 7.6 500 400 10 000 1500/300 6/25 3.2 63 T00C 750 8 63 63 63 40 30 40 55 100 63 10.6 630 500 10 000 1500/300 10/25 3.2 100 22 x 58 750 8 100 100 100 (3) 100 51 63 90 100 100 20 1000 800 10 000 1500/300 25/95 20 12
I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B Number of operating cycles Number of operating cycles cat. AC/DC-23A/B (1) Cable (c.s.a. min/max) Bars (max width)
Tightening torque
(1) Category A: frequent operating cycles, category B: infrequent operating cycles (2) 2 poles in series per phase. (3) With terminal covers. (4) Poles not juxtaposed.
Schemes: page 4/67
4/46
GSpK
GSpKK
GSpLL
GSpL
GSpN
GSpQQ
GS2S
GS2V
IEC 60947-3 IEC 60269-1 and 2 ASEFA/LOVAG, LROS (pending) IP 20 - 40+ 80 - 20+ 70 960 850
1 2 3
125 T00 750 8 125 125 100 (3) 100 63 90 80 100 125 20 1250 1000 10 000 1000/200 35/95 20 12 160 T00 750 8 160 160 125 (3) 125 80 110 110 100 (50) 125 (160) 22.7 1600 1280 10 000 1000/200 50/95 20 12 160 T0 750 8 160 160 125 (3) 125 80 110 110 100 160 20 1600 1280 10 000 1000/200 50/95 20 12 250 T1 750 8 250 250 250 (3) 200 132 160 220 100 250 32.5 2500 2000 10 000 1000/200 95/240 32 25 400 T2 800 8 400 315 250/315 200/315 (4) 220 220 220/295 50 400 40 4000 3200 10 000 1000/200 185/240 45 25 630 T3 1000 12 630 500 315/400 400/630 (4) 355 355 295/400 100 630 70 6300 5040 8000 1000/200 2 x 150 / 2 x 300 63 44 1250 T4 1000 12 1000 800 630 1000 560 560 400/475 100 1250 90 10 000 8000 5000 500/100 / 4 x 185 80 44
125 22 x 58 750 8 125 125 100 (3) 100 63 90 80 100 125 20 1250 1000 10 000 1000/200 35/95 20 12
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Schemes: page 4/67
4/47
Characteristics
TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses, 32 to 1250 A, for use with BS fuses
Type
GS1DDB
GS2DB
GS2GB
GS2JB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Environment
Conforming to standards Switch-disconnector-fuses Circuit-breakers Product certifications Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature around the device On Front panel, with terminal shield Storage Operation Flame resistance conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Body Fuse cover C C C C IEC 60947-3 IEC 60269-1 and 2 ASEFA/LOVAG, LROS (pending) IP 20
- 40+ 80 - 20+ 70 960 850
Conventional thermal current (Ith) for ambient temperature y 40 C Fuse size Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-23A/B (1) a 400 V a 500 V a 690 V Cat. DC-23A/B (1) Rated operational power Cat. AC-23A/B (1) c 440 V (2) a 400 V a 500 V a 690 V Rated conditional short-circuit current I rms at a 400 V with protection by gG (gl) fuses Rating of associated fuses Peak value of permissible current (dynamic short-circuit withstand) Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity Mechanical durability Electrical durability Cabling Conforming to IEC 60269-1 a 400 V V kV A A A A kW kW kW kA A kA A A A 32 A1 800 8 32 32 32 20 15 18.5 25 80 32 5.5 320 256 20 000 1500/300 mm2 mm N.m 2.5/16 3 32 A1 750 8 32 32 32 20 15 18.5 25 80 32 9 320 256 10 000 1500/300 6/25 3.2 63 A2-A3 750 8 63 63 63 40 30 40 55 80 63 10.6 630 500 10 000 1500/300 10/25 3.2 100 A4 y 31 mm 750 8 100 100 100 (4) 100 51 63 90 80 100 20 1000 800 10 000 1500/300 25/95 20 12
I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B Number of operating cycles Number of operating cycles cat. AC/DC-23A/B (1) Cable (c.s.a. min/max) Bars (max width)
Tightening torque
(1) Category A: frequent operating cycles, category B: infrequent operating cycles (2) 2 poles in series per phase. (3) Fit switch-disconnector-fuses GS2 LB with B1 or B2 fuses and GS2 LLB with A4 fuses. (4) With terminal covers. (5) Poles not juxtaposed.
Schemes: page 4/67
4/48
GS2LB or LLB (3) GS2MMB
GS2NB
GS2PPB
GS2QQB
GS2SB
GS2TB
GS2VB
IEC 60947-3 IEC 60269-1 and 2 ASEFA/LOVAG, LROS (pending) IP 20
1 2 3
200 B1-B2 750 8 200 200 200/160 (4) 200 100 140 150/185 80 200 32.5 2000 1600 10 000 1000/200 95/240 32 25 250 B1B3 750 8 250 250 250 (4) 200 132 160 220 80 250 32.5 2500 2000 10 000 1000/200 95/240 32 25 315 B1B3 800 8 315 315 250/315 (4) 200 150 220 220/295 80 315 40 3150 2520 10 000 1000/200 185/240 45 25 400 B1B4 800 8 400 315 250/315 200/315 (5) 220 220 220/295 80 400 40 4000 3200 10 000 1000/200 185/240 45 25 630 C1-C2 1000 12 630 500 315/400 400/630 (5) 355 355 295/400 80 630 70 6300 5040 8000 1000/200 2 x 150 / 2 x 300 63 44 800 C1C3 1000 12 800 630 630 800 450 450 400 80 800 80 8000 6400 8000 500/100 2 x 185 / 2 x 300 63 44 1250 D1 1000 12 1000 800 630 1000 560 560 400/475 80 1250 90 10 000 8000 5000 500/100 / 4 x 185 80 44
- 40+ 80 - 20+ 70 960 850
160 A4. B1-B2 (3) 750 8 160 160 125 (4) 125 80 110 110 80 160 22.7 1600 1280 10 000 1000/200 50/95 20 12
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Schemes: page 4/67
4/49
Characteristics
Auxiliary contacts for TeSys GS switch-disconnector-fuses, 32 to 1250 A, for use with NF C or DIN fuses
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Conventional thermal current (Ith) for ambient temperature y 40 C
GS1 AMp11, GS1 AM1 and GS1 AM2 early break and signalling contact characteristics
A 16 A A 127 V: 5; 230 V: 4 ; 400 /415 V : 3 ; 440 V : 2 24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4 Mechanical: 1 000 000 Electrical: cat. AC-15: 30 000 A mm 6 max Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-15 Cat. DC-13 Durability Number of operating cycles
Fuse protection Cabling
gG
GS1 AN and GS1 ANT signalling contact characteristics

A 20 A A 127 V: 12; 230 V: 10; 400/415 V: 8; 440 V: 6 48 V: 4; 110 V: 1.2; 220 V: 1 Mechanical: 30 000 Electrical: cat. AC-15: 30 000 A mm2 16 max Min: 1.5; max: 10
gG Cable (c.s.a. min/max)
GS1 AM110 and GS1 AM101 early break and signalling contact characteristics
A 10 A A 120 V: 6; 240 V: 3; 400 V: 1.8; 480 V: 1.5 24 V: 2.8; 48 V: 1.4; 125 V: 0.55; 250 V: 0.27; 400 V: 0.15 Mechanical: 5 000 000 Electrical: cat. AC-15: 1 000 000 mm2 Min: 1 x 0.22; max: 2 x 2.5
Cabling
Cable (c.s.a. min/max)
GSp AF "blown fuse" signalling contact characteristics

A 16 A A 230 V: 4; 400 V: 3 24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4 Mechanical: 30 000 Electrical: cat. AC-15: 30 000 mm Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35
Cabling
References: pages 4/55
Schemes: page 4/67
4/50
Characteristics
GS1 AMp11, GS1 AM1 and GS1 AM2 early break and signalling contact characteristics
A 16 A A 127 V: 5; 230 V: 4; 400/415 V: 3; 440 V: 2 24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4 Mechanical: 1 000 000 Electrical: cat. AC-15: 30 000 A mm 6 max Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
gG
GS1 AN and GS1 ANT signalling contact characteristics

A 20 A A 127 V: 12; 230 V: 10; 400/415 V: 8; 440 V: 6 48 V: 4; 110 V: 1.2; 220 V: 1 Mechanical: 30 000 Electrical: cat. AC-15: 30 000 A mm2 16 max Min: 1.5; max: 10
gG Cable (c.s.a. min/max)
GS1 AM110 and GS1 AM101 early break and signalling contact characteristics
A 10 A A 120 V: 6; 240 V: 3; 400 V: 1.8; 480 V: 1.5 24 V: 2.8; 48 V: 1.4; 125 V: 0.55; 250 V: 0.27; 400 V: 0.15 Mechanical: 5 000 000 Electrical: cat. AC-15: 1 000 000 mm2 Min: 1 x 0.22; max: 2 x 2.5
Cabling
Cable (c.s.a. min/max)
GSp AF "blown fuse" signalling contact characteristics

A 16 A A 230 V: 4; 400 V: 3 24 V: 12; 48 V: 2; 110 V: 0.6; 220 V: 0.4 Mechanical: 30 000 Electrical: cat. AC-15: 30 000 mm Faston connectors: 1 x 6.35
Cabling
References: pages 4/55
Schemes: page 4/67
4/51
GS1 AF1, AF2p, AF3p, AF4p
1 2 3 4 5 6
GS1 AN22
GS1 AF
GS1 APp
GS1 AN11
50400 A - External operator
7
GS1 AMp
GS2 AE2p
8
GS2 AE2p
9 10
GS2 AH220 GS2 AH240
GS2 AH51p GS2 AH53p
GS1 APp
4/52
References
532783
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with NF C or DIN fuses

Switch rating A Fuse size Number of poles Reference
Weight kg
For external front-mounted and RH side-mounted operators

32 GS1 DD3 50 63
568664
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 x 38 14 x 51 Size 00C (2) 22 x 58 22 x 58 Size 00
3 3 + Nc (1) 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
GS1DD3 GS1DD4 GS2F3 GS2F4 GS2G3 GS2G4 GS2J3 GS2J4 GS2K3 GS2K4 GS2KK3 GS2KK4 GS2LL3 GS2LL4 GS2L3 GS2L4 GS2N3 GS2N4 GS2QQ3 GS2QQ4 GS2S3 GS2S4 GS2V3 GS2V4
0.460 0.500 0.800 1.000 1.000 1.300 1.500 2.000 1.500 2.000 1.500 2.000 1.800 2.300 1.800 2.300 3.200 4.500 4.800 6.100 16.000 20.000 25.000 30.000
100 125
GS2 F3
160
Size 00 Size 0
568665
250 400 630 1250 GS2 N3
Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4
For external LH side-mounted operators

32 10 x 38 14 x 51 Size 00C (2) 22 x 58 22 x 58 Size 00 160 Size 00 Size 0 250 400 630 1250 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 3 3 + Nc (1) 50 63 100 125 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 1) Nc = Switched neutral. 2) Compact fuses for German market. GS1DD3 GS1DD4 GS2FG3 GS2FG4 GS2GG3 GS2GG4 GS2JG3 GS2JG4 GS2KG3 GS2KG4 GS2KKG3 GS2KKG4 GS2LLG3 GS2LLG4 GS2LG3 GS2LG4 GS2NG3 GS2NG4 GS2QQG3 GS2QQG4 GS2SG3 GS2SG4 GS2VG3 GS2VG4 0.460 0.500 0.800 1.000 1.000 1.300 1.500 2.000 1.500 2.000 1.500 2.000 1.800 2.300 1.800 2.300 3.200 4.500 4.800 6.100 16.000 20.000 25.000 30.000
568666
GS2 L4
General : pages 4/44 and 4/45
Schemes : page 4/67
4/53
GS1 AF1, AF2p, AF3p, AF4p
1 2 3 4 5
GS1 AN11
GS1 AF
GS1 APp GS1 AM1 GS1 AM2
50400 A - Direct operator
6 7 8
GS1 AN22
9
GS1 APp GS1 AH01 GS1 AH02
10
4/54
568667
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with NF C or DIN fuses

Switch rating A Fuse size Type of operator Number of poles Reference
Weight kg
For direct operator

32 10 x 38 Front 3 3 + Nc (1) GS1 JD3 50 14 x 51 RH side 3 4 63 Size 00C (2) RH side 3 4
510761
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GS1DD3 GS1DD4 GS1FD3 GS1FD4 GS1GD3 GS1GD4 GS1JD3 GS1JD4 GS1KD3 GS1KD4 GS1KKD3 GS1KKD4 GS1LLD3 GS1LLD4 GS1LD3 GS1LD4 GS1ND3 GS1ND4 GS1QQD3 GS1QQD4 GS2S3 GS2S4 GS2V3 GS2V4
0.460 0.500 0.800 1.000 1.000 1.300 1.500 2.000 1.500 2.000 1.500 2.000 1.800 2.300 1.800 2.300 3.200 4.500 4.800 6.100 16.000 20.000 25.000 30.000
100
22 x 58
RH side
3 4
125
22 x 58
RH side
3 4
Size 00
RH side
3 4
GS2 S3 with handle GS2AHp50 or GS2AHp60
160
Size 00
RH side
3 4
Size 0
RH side
3 4
250
Size 1
RH side
3 4
400
Size 2
RH side
3 4
630
Size 3
Front
3 4
1250
Size 4
Front
3 4
1) Nc = Switched neutral. 2) Compact fuses for German market.
Schemes : page 4/67
4/55
32 A - Direct or external operator
1 2 3 4
GS2 AH51p
GS2 AE8p
GS1 AH103
5 6 7
GS1 AMp GS1 AD10
8
GS1 AMp11 GS2 AE8p
9 10
GS2 AH220
4/56
510961
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with BS fuses

Switch rating A Fuse size Number of poles
Reference
Weight kg
For external front-mounted and RH or LH side-mounted operator For direct front-mounted operator
32 GS1DDB3 A1 3 3 + Nc (1) GS1DDB3 GS1DDB4 0.500 0.540
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
For external front-mounted and RH side-mounted operators (2)

32 A1 3 4
510967
GS2DB3 GS2DB4 GS2GB3 GS2GB4 GS2JB3 GS2JB4 GS2LLB3 GS2LLB4 GS2LB3 GS2LB4 GS2MMB3 GS2MMB4 GS2NB3 GS2NB4 GS2PPB3 GS2PPB4 GS2QQB3 GS2QQB4 GS2SB3 (2) GS2SB4 (2) GS2TB3 (2) GS2TB4 (2) GS2VB3 (2) GS2VB4 (2)
0.800 1.000 1.000 1.300 1.500 2.000 1.800 2.300 1.800 2.300 3.200 4.500 3.200 4.500 4.800 6.100 4.800 6.100 16.000 20.000 17.000 21.500 25.000 30.000
63
A2-A3
3 4
100
A4 y 31 mm
3 4
160
A4
3 4
GS2GB3
B1-B2
3 4
200
B1-B2
3 4
250
B1B3
3 4
315
B1B3
3 4
400
B1B4
3 4
630
C 1-C2
3 4
800
C 1C3
3 4
1250
D1
3 4
(1) Nc: switched neutral. (2) 630, 800 and 1250 A switch-disconnector-fuses can also be fitted with a direct front-mounted operator.
Schemes : page 4/67
4/57
GS2 AF6p, AF7p
1 2
GS1 AF
GS2 APp
3
6301250 A - External operator
4 5 6 7
GS1 AN22
GS1 AN11
GS2 AE5p GS1 AMp
GS2 AE5p
8
GS2 AH260
9
GS2 AH550 GS2 AH570
10
GS2 APp
4/58
References
Auxiliary contacts
568473
Auxiliary early break and/or O, I and Test position signalling contacts (1) (2) (3)
Switch rating A 321250 1 N/O 1 N/C Switch rating GS1 AM1pp A Contact type External, front or side-mounted (4) External, front or side-mounted (4) Type of operator GS1AM110 GS1AM101 Reference Contact type Type of operator Reference
Weight kg 0.200 0.200 Weight kg
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Auxiliary O, I and Test position signalling contacts (3) (5)

Auxiliary O and I position signalling contacts
501250 1 N/C + 1 N/O External, front or RH side-mounted Direct External, LH side 2 N/C + 2 N/O External, front or RH side-mounted Direct External, LH side
568476
GS1AN11 GS1AN11G GS1AN22 GS1AN22G GS1ANT11 GS1ANT22 Reference GS1AM111 GS1AM211 GS1AM1 GS1AM2
0.132 0.131 0.238 0.252 0.153 0.258 Weight kg 0.080 0.080 0.023 0.035 Weight kg 0.025 0.033 0.037 0.036 0.030 0.038 0.032 0.046 0.100 0.080 0.045 0.015
Auxiliary O, I and Test position signalling contacts (3)

50400 GS1 ANppp 1 N/C + 1 N/O 2 N/C + 2 N/O Switch rating
568474
External, front side-mounted External, front side-mounted Type of operator Direct, RH side Direct, RH side Fuse size Number of poles
Auxiliary early break and O and I position signalling contacts

Contact type 1 C/O 2 C/O 1 C/O 2 C/O
A 32 50400
Auxiliary blown fuse signalling contacts for use with NF C and DIN fuses (6)
Contact type GS1 AMp11 1st C/O Switch rating A 50 100 and 125 160
568475
Reference
14 x 51 22 x 58 Size 0 Size 1 and Size 2 Size 3 Size 4
3 or 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 or 4
GS1AF1 GS1AF23 GS1AF24 GS1AF33 GS1AF34 GS1AF43 GS1AF44 GS2AF63 GS2AF64 GS2AF73 GS2AF74 GS1AF
250 and 400 630 1250 2nd C/O GS1 AMp 501250
(1) For 32 A switch-disconnector-fuses, these auxiliary contacts allow: - O and I position signalling, - early break and O and I position signalling, - O, I and Test position signalling, - Test position signalling. For 50 to 400 A switch-disconnector-fuses, they allow: - early break, - O and I position signalling, - O, I and Test position signalling, - Test position signalling. For 630 and 1250 A switch-disconnector-fuses, they allow: - early break and O and I position signalling, (2) Maximum number of auxiliary contacts: Switch rating A 32 50160 200400 6301250 Standard 4 4 8 8 With additional bracket 4+4 4+4 8+4 8 Reference of additional bracket GS1AD10 GS2AD20 GS2AD20
(3) The Test position allows testing of the control circuits off-load. Auxiliary contacts GS1AM110, GS1AM101 and GS1ANTpp only allow the text function with external handles GS2 AHTppp. (4) These auxiliary contacts can also be used with 630, 800 and 1250 A switch-disconnector-fuses fitted with a direct frontmounted operator. (5) Reversible add-on attachments for converting an N/C contact to an N/O contact and vice versa. (6) For striker fuses (BS fuses are not available with striker).
Schemes : page 4/67
4/59
References
Handles for external operators
538656
Handles for external operator

Switch rating A
1
GS2 AHp10 GS2 AHp20
Handle colour
Reference
Weight kg
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable and lockable in position O (1) Door interlock in I position (2)
3263 Black/Grey Red/Yellow 100400
538655
IP 65 IP55 IP 65 IP 65 IP55 IP 65 IP65 IP65 IP65 IP65
GS2AH510 GS2AH515 GS2AH520 GS2AH530 GS2AH535 GS2AH540 GS2AH550 GS2AH560 GS2AH570 GS2AH580
0.200 0.200 0.200 0.240 0.240 0.240 0.280 0.280 0.390 0.390
2 3
Black/Grey Red/Yellow
630 and 800 1250
Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow
Handles for front-mounted external operators with test facility (3), padlockable and lockable in "O" position (1). Door interlock in I position (2)
GS2 AHp30 GS2 AHp40 3263 100400
538654
Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow
IP 65 IP65 IP65 IP65
GS2AHT510 GS2AHT520 GS2AHT530 GS2AHT540
0.200 0.200 0.240 0.240
4 5 6
Handles for external RH side-mounted operators, padockable and lockable in "O" position (1)
3263 Black/Grey Red/Yellow 100400 Black/Grey Red/Yellow 6301250 Black/Grey Red/Yellow IP 65 IP55 IP65 IP65 IP55 IP65 IP65 IP65 GS2AH210 GS2AH215 GS2AH220 GS2AH230 GS2AH235 GS2AH240 GS2AH250 GS2AH260 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.240 0.240 0.240 0.280 0.280
Handles for external LH side-mounted operators, padockable and lockable in "O" position (1)
3263 GS2 AHp50 GS2 AHp60 100400 6301250 Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow
538653
IP 65 IP65 IP65 IP65 IP65 IP65
GS2AH310 GS2AH320 GS2AH330 GS2AH340 GS2AH350 GS2AH360
0.200 0.200 0.240 0.240 0.280 0.280
Black/Grey Red/Yellow
7 8 9 10
Shafts for external operators

Switch rating A 32 mm 200 320 400 50400 200 320 400 6301250 200 320 400
Shaft length
Shaft cross section mm 5x5 5x5 5x5 10 x 10 10 x 10 10 x 10 12 x 12 12 x 12 12 x 12
Reference GS2AE82 GS2AE8 GS2AE81 GS2AE22 GS2AE2 GS2AE21 GS2AE52 GS2AE5 GS2AE51
Weight kg 0.100 0.125 0.150 0.160 0.280 0.320 0.240 0.380 0.420
(1) Lockable with device GS2AX1, to be ordered separately. (2) Door interlock override by means of a tool. (3) The Test facility allows testing of the control circuits off-load, by using auxiliary contacts GS1AM110, GS1AM101 or GS1ANTpp. In the Test position, the enclosure door can be opened. GS2 AHp70 GS2 AHp80
4/60
References
Handles for external operators Accessories
Switch rating A
568668
Type of operator
Handle colour
Reference
Weight kg
Handles for direct operators, padlockable

32 50 and 63 100400 630 and 800 1250 GS1 AH01 Front RH side RH side Front Front Black Black Black Black Black GS1AH103 GS1AH01 GS1AH02 GS2AH104 GS2AH105 0.060 0.060 0.100 0.480 0.600
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Terminal protection shrouds for upstream or downstream connector plates

Switch rating A 50 and 63 100160 3 or 4 3 4 200400 630800 1250 3 4 3 4 3 4 (1) GS1AP33 GS1AP34 GS1AP43 GS1AP44 GS2AP63 GS2AP64 GS2AP83 GS2AP84 Reference (3) GS1AV1 GS1AV2 GS1AV33 GS1AV34 GS1AV53 GS1AV54 GS1AV73 GS1AV74 Reference (4) GS1AW33 GS1AW34 GS1AW43 GS1AW44 Reference GS2AX1 Number of poles Reference
Weight kg 0.073 0.180 0.240 0.280 0.520 0.780 0.680 0.840 Weight kg 0.012 0.040 0.026 0.010 0.026 0.010 0.027 0.033 Weight kg 0.179 0.357 0.236 0.480 Weight kg 0.200
568669
Devices for locking fuse covers in "I" position (2)

Switch rating Fuse size A 50 63 100160 GS1 AH02 160 250 400 14 x 51 Size 00C 22 x 58, Size 00 Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Number of poles
Cage terminals for connection of bare cables (without lug)

Switch rating A 50 and 63 100160 200250 3 or 4 3 4 3 4 Number of poles
External handle locking device

Switch rating A 321250 Device for RONIS EL11AP key lock (lock to be ordered separately). Description
Height compensation plate for external handles

Switch rating A 321250 Description Allows a new GS2pp handle to be fitted on existing cut-outs IP 65
Reference GS2AH001
Weight kg 0.020
Flat mounting kit

Switch rating A 50400
Description The kit, for use with a front-mounted external handle, includes: b a 200 mm shaft, cross section 10 x 10 mm, b an adapter plate
Reference GS2 ADL2
Weight kg 0.300
(1) For these ratings, the switch-disconnector-fuses are fitted with terminal covers as standard. (2) For NF C and DIN switch-disconnector-fuses fitted with right-hand mounted direct operator. (3) For this rating, switch-disconnector-fuses are fitted with a cover locking device as standard. (4) For these ratings, switch-disconnector-fuses are fitted with cage terminals as standard.
4/61
Dimensions
GS1DD (32 A)
1 2 3 4
Direct front-mounted operator

GS1DD 112 44 19 6,5 5,2 96 37,5 15 35 14 GS1DDB 112 44 19 6,5 96 37,5 15 14 79,5 5,2 45 98 65 98 83 8,5 2x5 Door cut-out 102 min. (1) 35 37,5 15 78 I 70 49 Test 90 37 65 O GS1DDB 44 102 min. (1) 35 37,5 15 78 I 49 Test 90 (1) With 1 or 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp: 130 mm. (2) With 3 or 4 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp: 155 mm. O 37 65 Door cut-out 40 4x7 28 Door cut-out I 70 19 6,5 96 36 min. 44 90 78 28 4x7 70 37 Door cut-out I 70 19 6,5 96 36 min. 44 90 78 28 4x7 70 References: pages 4/53 to 4/57 Schemes: page 4/67 37 40 40 14 40 4x7 28 O 49 O 49
65
8,5
79,5 21,5 21,5
45
98
2x5 17
External front-mounted operator

GS1DD 44
5 6 7 8 9 10
External RH side-mounted operator

GS1DD
70
49
14
52,5 GS1DDB
49
52,5 Presentation: pages 4/44 and 4/45 Characteristics: pages 4/46 to 4/48
4/62
GS1pp (50400A)
Direct RH side-mounted operator

GS1FD (50A), GD (63A), JD (100A), KD, KKD (125A), LD, LLD (160A), ND (250A) and QQD (400A) c L (4) I K(2) (1) J G1 G Q (5)
1 2
70
b1
(3)
R1 R 31 c1 c2
b2
P a1 a P P1
3 4
GS1 FD GD JD, KD KKD, LLD LD ND QQD 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
a 118 145 133 165 150 186 150 186 192 242 253 313 271 337
a1 108 144 108 144 136 172 180 240 192 258
b 118 118 118 118 162 162 162 162 162 162 195 195 205 205
b1 268 268 268 268 268 268 345 345 355 355
b2 159 159 141 141 174 174 185 185 200 200
c 87 87
c1 134 134
c2 145 145 193 193 229 229 251 251 260 260
G 27 27 32 32 36 36 36 36 50 50 60 60 66 66
G1 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4
H 106 106 106 106 127 127 127 127 140 140 162 162 172 172
J 31 31 36 36 40 40 40 40 54 54 64 64 70 70
K 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6
L 44 44 44 44 44 44 65 65 65 65
M 141 141 141 141 141 141 166 166 175 175
P 27 27 32 32 36 36 36 36 50 50 60 60 66 66
P1 33.5 33.5 36 36 38 38 38 38 45 45 81 81 86 86
Q 20 20 20 20 20 20 32 32 50 50
R 19.5 19.5 19.5 19.5 19.5 19.5 19.5 19.5 20 20
R1 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3
8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 11 11 11 11
116.5 134 116.5 134 116 116 173 173
5 6 7 8 9 10
126.5 173 126.5 173 136.5 173 136.5 173 146 146 149 149 173 173 173 173
(1) Terminal cover. (2) Mounting on 5 rail only for GS1 FD and GS1 GD (50 and 63 A). (3) Protective screen, lockable in I position. (4) 1 or 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AFpp. (5) 1 or 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AMp.
Schemes: page 4/67
4/63
GS2pp (50400A)
1 2
External front and RH side-mounted operator

GS2DB (32 A), F (50A), G, GB, JB (63A), J (100A), K, KK (125A), L, LL, LB, LLB (160A), MMB (200 A), N, NB (250A), PPB (315 A), QQ and QQB (400A) E min. c 31 b2 (4) (3) P2 (2) 20 min. 230 max. 45 (1) J G1 G a J1 Q J2
P1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Presentation: pages 4/44 and 4/45 Characteristics: pages 4/46 to 4/48
b1
M2 M1
P2
P2 45 c1 GS2 F, DB 3P 4P G, GB 3P 4P J, JB, 3P K 4P KK, LL 3P 4P a 121 148 136 168 148 184 148 184 190 240 234 294 252 318 b 118 118 118 118 162 162 162 162 162 162 195 195 205 205 b1 268 268 268 268 268 268 345 345 355 355 b2 70 70 70 70 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 b3 85 85 159 159 141 141 141 141 174 174 185 185 200 200 c 87 (5) 87 (5) c1 153 153 E min. G 100 (5) 27 100 (5) 27 125 125 135 135 135 135 145 145 154 154 157 157 32 32 36 36 36 36 50 50 60 60 66 66 G1 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 H 106 106 106 106 127 127 127 127 140 140 162 162 172 172 J 31 31 36 36 40 40 40 40 54 54 64 64 70 70 J1 45 45 50 50 54 54 54 54 64 64 86 86 91 91 J2 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 25 25 25 25 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 P3 P P
b3
M 141 141 141 141 141 141 166 166 175 175
M1 15 15 15 15 41 41 41 41 41 41 52 52 54 54
M2 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 17 17
P 27 27 32 32 36 36 36 36 50 50 60 60
P1 59 59 59 59 62 62 62 62 62 62 84 84 84 84
b2 P2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 P3
Q 12 12 12 12
8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 11 11 11 11
116.5 (6) 145 116.5 (6) 145 116 (6) 116 (6) 187 187
19.5 20 19.5 20 19.5 20 19.5 20 19.5 20 19.5 20 19.5 32 19.5 32 20 20 50 50
126.5 (6) 193 126.5 (6) 193 136.5 136.5 146 146 149 149 229 229 251 251 260 260
L, LB, 3P LLB 4P MMB, 3P NB, N 4P PPB, 3P QQB, 4P QQ
14.5 66 14.5 66
(1) Terminal cover. (2) Rear access connector plates (option). (3) 1 to 8 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp. (4) 1 or 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AFpp. (5) 1 auxiliary contact GS1 AM1pp: + 23.5 mm, 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp: + 47 mm. (6) 132 mm with 2 auxiliary contacts GS1 AM1pp. Door cut-out For external front-mounted operator 40 4x7 28 I Test 37 90 O 65 40 37 For external RH side-mounted operator 78 28 4x7
90 O I
78
Schemes: page 4/67
4/64
GS2pp (6301250A)
Direct front-mounted operator

GS2S, SB (630A), TB (800 A), V and VB (1250A) E min. c 155 G Q R a 34
1 2 3
250 260 (3) 471 300
79,5 235,5
11
(1) 22 7 188 7 90
4
13 9
85,5
7 (2) 59 c1
235,5
5
Q 51 51 77 77 R 65 65 88 88
GS2 S, SB, TB V, VB 3P 4P 3P 4P
a 364 458 442 562
b 300 300 355 355
c 250 250 289 289
c1 380 380 295 295
E min. 265 265 304 304
G 284 378 362 482
P 94 94 120 120
6 7 8
(1) Handle GS2AH104 for GS2S, GS2SB and GS2TB. (2) Terminal cover. (3) Rear access connector plates (GS2V and GS2VB). Handle GS2AH105 for GS2V and GS2VB (direct front-mounted operator) Connector plates for GS2V and GS2VB
40 13 77 25 20 165 330
103
28
165
9 10
Schemes: page 4/67
4/65
GS2pp (6301250A) (continued)
1 2 3
External front and RH side-mounted operator

GS2S, SB (630A), TB (800 A), V and VB (1250A) E min.
210 34
15 min.
22
61
210
4 5
61
GS2 S, SB, TB Handle GS2 AH570 or GS2 AH580 for GS2V and GS2VB (external front-mounted operator) V, VB 3P 4P 3P 4P
b 297 297 350 350
E min. 265 265 304 304
6
165 350
7
165
90 O
8 9 10
60
39
Door cut-out For external front-mounted operator 40 4x7 78 28 I 28 4x7 90 For external RH side-mounted operator I 78
37
90 O 37
40 Schemes: page 4/67
4/66
Dimensions, schemes
Dimensions with auxiliary contacts

GS1 AM111, GS1 AM211 18
GS1 AM110, GS1 AM101
1 2
98
24
24
65
Schemes
3-pole GS
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
3
4-pole GS
32 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 7/L3
32 to 1250 A
50 to 1250 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 7/L3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
8/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3 22 22
Auxiliary contacts
GS1 AM110 1 N/O
p3
GS1 AM101 1 N/C

p1
GS1 AM111 and GS1 AM1 1 C/O

12 14
GS1 AM211 and GS1 AM2 2 C/O

12 14 24 21 24 21
p2
11
p4
GS1 ANpp 1 N/C + 1 N/O

13 21
GS1 AFp 2 N/C + 2 N/O

13 21 33 41
1 C/O
2 4
2 C/O
12 14
14
22
14
22
34
42
11
11
8/T3
4/67
References
Switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards, 30 to 800 A, TeSys GS
All TeSysGS switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market are certified UL98 and CSA 22.2 N 4.
1 2
538735
Compact switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with UL fuses

Switch rating A Fuse size Number of poles Reference
Weight kg
For front-mounted external operators For front-mounted direct operators

30 GS1 DU3 CC J 3 3 GS1DDU3 GS1DU3 0.600 0.672
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with UL fuses
3
510979
Switch rating A
Fuse size
Number of poles
Reference
Weight kg
For front-mounted external operators (1)

30 CC J 60 100 200 GS2MU3 400 600 800 J J J J J L 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 GS2EEU3 GS2EU3 GS2GU3 GS2JU3 GS2MU3 GS2QU3 GS2SU3 GS2TU3 1.400 2.100 2.217 2.761 4.166 5.400 29.000 20.860
4 5
510959
Switch-disconnector-fuse switch bodies for use with UL fuses, with handle for direct operator
Switch rating A Fuse size Number of poles Type of operator
6 7 8 9 10
Reference
Weight kg
For direct operator

30 CC CC GS1EERU30 2 3 RH side-mounted GS1AH01 RH side-mounted GS1AH01 GS1EERU20 GS1EERU30 0.991 1.218
(1) 630 and 800 A switch-disconnector-fuses can also be fitted with a front-mounted direct operator.
4/68
Switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards, 30 to 800 A, TeSys GS. Auxiliary contacts
Contact type 1 N/O 1N/C Type of operator Reference Weight kg External, front or side-mounted External, front or side-mounted External, front or side-mounted (4) External, front or side-mounted (4) GS1AM110 GS1AM101 GS1AM110 GS1AM101 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
568473
Auxiliary early break and/or O, I and Test position signalling contacts (1), (2), (3)
Switch rating A 30 Compact
1 2 3 4 5
GS1 AM1pp
30800
1 N/O 1 N/C
Auxiliary O, I and Test position signalling contacts (3), (5)

Switch rating A
568476
Contact type
Type of operator
Reference
Weight kg
Auxiliary O and I position signalling contacts

30800 1 N/C + 1 N/O 2 N/C + 2 N/O External, front or RH side-mounted Direct External, front or RH side-mounted Direct External, front-mounted External, front-mounted GS1AN11 GS1AN22 0.132 0.238
Auxiliary O, I and Test position signalling contacts (3)

30400 1 N/C + 1 N/O 2 N/C + 2 N/O GS1 ANppp GS1ANT11 GS1ANT22 0.153 0.258
(1) For 30 A switch-disconnector-fuses, these auxiliary contacts allow: - early break and O and I position signalling, - O and I position signalling, - O, I and Test position signalling, - Test position signalling. For 30 to 400 A switch-disconnector-fuses, they allow: - early break, - O and I position signalling, - O, I and Test position signalling, - Test position signalling. For 600 and 800 A switch-disconnector-fuses, they allow: - early break and O and I position signalling, (2) Maximum number of auxiliary contacts: Switch rating A 30 Compact CC J 30100 200 and 400 600 and 800 Standard 4 2 4 8 8 With additional bracket 4+4 2+4 4+4 8+4 8 Reference of additional bracket GS1AD10 GS1AD10 GS2AD20 GS2AD20
6 7 8 9 10
(3) The Test position allows testing of the control circuits off-load. Auxiliary contacts GS1AM110, GS1AM101 and GS1ANTpp only allow the test function with external handles GS2 AHTppp. (4) These auxiliary contacts can also be used with 600 and 800 A switch-disconnector-fuses fitted with a front-mounted direct operator.
4/69
References
Switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards, 30 to 800 A, TeSys GS. Handles, accessories
Switch rating A Protection index Nema Handle colour Reference Weight kg
1
GS2 AHp10 GS2 AHp20
538656
Handles for front-mounted external operators, padlockable Door interlock in I position (1)
30 Compact 1, 3R, 12 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12
538655
Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow
GS2AH110 GS2AH120 GS2AH410 GS2AH420 GS2AH130 GS2AH140 GS2AH430 GS2AH440 GS2AH150 GS2AH160
0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.240 0.240 0.240 0.240 0.280 0.280
2 3
30400
1, 3R, 12 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12
600 and 800
1, 3R, 12
GS2 AHp30 GS2 AHp40
Handles for front-mounted external operators with Test facility (2), padlockable Door interlock in I position (1)
30 Compact 1, 3R, 12 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 30400 1, 3R, 12 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 Black/Grey Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow Noir/Gris Red/Yellow Black/Grey Red/Yellow GS2AHT110 GS2AHT120 GS2AHT410 GS2AHT420 GS2AHT130 GS2AHT140 GS2AHT430 GS2AHT440 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.240 0.240 0.240 0.240 0.240
5 6 7 8 9 10
538654
Shafts for external operators

Switch rating A 30 Compact mm 200 320 400 GS2 AHp50 GS2 AHp60 30400 200 320 400 600 and 800 200 320 400
Shaft length
Shaft cross section mm 5x5 5x5 5x5 10 x 10 10 x 10 10 x 10 12 x 12 12 x 12 12 x 12
Reference
Weight kg
GS2AE82 GS2AE8 GS2AE81 GS2AE22 GS2AE2 GS2AE21 GS2AE52 GS2AE5 GS2AE51
0.100 0.125 0.150 0.160 0.280 0.320 0.240 0.380 0.420
(1) Door interlock override by means of a tool. (2) The Test position allows testing of the control circuits off-load, by using auxiliary contacts GS1AM110. GS1AM101 or GS1ANTpp. In the Test position, the enclosure door can be opened.
4/70
Switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards, 30 to 800 A, TeSys GS. Handles, accessories
Type of operator Handle colour Reference Weight kg Front-mounted Front-mounted Black Black GS2AH106 GS2AH107 0.040 0.480
Handles for direct operators

Switch rating A
568668
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Handles for direct operators, padlockable

30 Compact 600 and 800
Terminal protection shrouds for upstream or downstream connector plates

GS1 AH01 Switch rating A 30 Compact 3060
568669
Number of poles
Reference
Weight kg
3 3 3 3 3 3
(1) (1) GS1AP33 GS1AP43 GS1APU53 GS2AP63
0.073 0.240 0.060 0.520
100 200 400 600 and 800
Height compensation plate for external handles

Switch rating A 30 Compact 30400 Allows a new GS2pp handle to be fitted in existing cut-outs Description
Reference
Weight kg
GS2AH001
0.020
GS1 AH02
(1) For these ratings, the switch-disconnector-fuses are fitted with terminal covers as standard.
4/71
Characteristics
Switch-disconnector-fuses for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA, 30 to 800 A, TeSys GS
GS1DDU3 GS1DU3 GS2EEU3 GS2EU3
Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Environment
Conforming to standards Switch-disconnector-fuses Circuit-breakers Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 Ambient air temperature around the device With terminal covers Storage Operation Flame resistance conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Body Fuse cover C C C C UL 489, CSA 22.2 n5, IEC 60947-3 IEC 60969-1 and 2 IP 20 - 40+ 80 - 20+ 70 960 960 960 850 UL 98, CSA 22.2 n4, IEC 60947-3
Conventional thermal current (Ith) for ambient temperature y 40 C Fuse size Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated operational current (Ie) Cat. AC-23A/B (1) a 400 V a 500 V a 690 V Rated operational power Cat. AC-23A/B (1) a 400 V a 500 V a 690 V Prospective short-circuit current withstand Peak value of permissible current (dynamic shortcircuit withstand) Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity Mechanical durability Electrical durability Cabling Conforming to UL 98 / UL 489 at a 600 V Conforming to IEC60269-1 a 400 V V kV A A A kW kW kW kA kA A A A 30 CC 800 8 32 32 32 15 18.5 25 100 5.5 300 240 10000 1500/300 mm2 mm N.m 2.5 16 3 30 J 800 8 32 32 32 15 18.5 25 100 5.5 300 240 10000 1500/300 2.5 32 3 30 CC 750 8 32 32 32 15 18.5 25 200 7.6 300 240 10000 1500/300 6 25 5.5 30 J 750 8 32 32 32 15 18.5 25 200 17.6 300 240 10000 1500/300 6 50 6.5
I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B I rms at 400 V Cat. AC-23B Number of operating cycles Number of operating cycles Cat. AC/DC-23A/B (1) Cable (c.s.a. min/max) Bars (max width)
Tightening torque
(1) Category A: frequent operating cycles, category B: infrequent operating cycles.
9 10
4/72
GS2GU3
GS2JU3
GS2MU3
GS2QU3
GS2SU3
GS2TU3
UL 98, CSA 22.2 n4, IEC 60947-3 IEC 60269-1 and 2 IP 20 - 40+ 80 - 20+ 70 960 850
1 2 3
100 J 750 8 100 100 100 51 63 90 200 22 1000 800 10000 1500/300 25 20 10 200 J 750 8 200 200 200 100 140 185 200 32 2000 1600 8000 1000/200 95 32 18 400 J 800 8 400 315 250 220 220 220 200 36 4000 3200 6000 1000/200 185 45 35 600 J 1000 12 630 630 630 355 450 600 200 80 6000 4800 5000 1000/200 2 x 150 100 35 800 L 1000 12 800 630 630 450 560 600 200 80 8000 6400 5000 500/100 100 35
60 J 750 8 63 63 63 30 40 55 200 17.6 600 480 10000 1500/300 6 50 6.5
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4/73
References

Cartridge fuses type aM
For protection of equipment with current peaks
Fuse type
1
812889
Maximum rated voltage V a 400
Rating
Sold in lots of
Cylindrical 8.5 x 31.5 DF2 CAppp
2 3 4
A 1 2 4 6 8 10 0.16 0.25 0.50 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 0.25 0.50 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 4 6 8 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Fuses without striker Unit Weight reference kg DF2 BA0100 0.010 DF2 BA0200 0.010 DF2 BA0400 0.010 DF2 BA0600 0.010 DF2 BA0800 0.010 DF2 BA1000 0.010 DF2 CA001 DF2 CA002 DF2 CA005 DF2 CA01 DF2 CA02 DF2 CA04 DF2 CA06 DF2 CA08 DF2 CA10 DF2 CA12 DF2 CA16 DF2 CA20 DF2 CA25 DF2 CA32 DF2 EA002 DF2 EA005 DF2 EA01 DF2 EA02 DF2 EA04 DF2 EA06 DF2 EA08 DF2 EA10 DF2 EA12 DF2 EA16 DF2 EA20 DF2 EA25 DF2 EA32 DF2 EA40 DF2 EA50 DF2 FA04 DF2 FA06 DF2 FA08 DF2 FA10 DF2 FA16 DF2 FA20 DF2 FA25 DF2 FA32 DF2 FA40 DF2 FA50 DF2 FA63 DF2 FA80 DF2 FA100 DF2 FA125 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Fuses with striker Unit Weight reference kg DF3 EA02 DF3 EA04 DF3 EA06 DF3 EA08 DF3 EA10 DF3 EA12 DF3 EA16 DF3 EA20 DF3 EA25 DF3 EA32 DF3 EA40 DF3 EA50 DF3 FA04 DF3 FA06 DF3 FA08 DF3 FA10 DF3 FA16 DF3 FA20 DF3 FA25 DF3 FA32 DF3 FA40 DF3 FA50 DF3 FA63 DF3 FA80 DF3 FA100 DF3 FA125 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Cylindrical 10 x 38
a 500
812888
DF2 EAppp
a 400
Cylindrical 14 x 51
a 690
5 6
812890
a 500 DF3 EApp
812887
7
DF2 FApp
a 400 Cylindrical 22 x 58 a 690
8
812891
a 500
9
DF3 FApp
a 400
10
4/74

Cartridge fuses type aM
For protection of equipment with current peaks
Fuse type
Rating
Sold in lots of
533330
Blade size 00
DF2 GApppp
A 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 160 200 250 315 250 315 400 500 400 500 630 630 800 1000 1250
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1
Fuses without striker Unit Weight reference kg DF2 FGA16 0.160 0.160 DF2 FGA20 DF2 FGA25 0.160 DF2 FGA32 0.160 DF2 FGA40 0.160 DF2 FGA50 0.160 DF2 FGA63 0.160 DF2 FGA80 0.160 DF2 FGA100 0.160 DF2 FGA125 DF2 GA1051 DF2 GA1061 DF2 GA1081 DF2 GA1101 DF2 GA1121 DF2 GA1161 DF2 GA1201 DF2 HA1161 DF2 HA1201 DF2 HA1251 DF2 HA1311 DF2 JA1251 DF2 JA1311 DF2 JA1401 DF2 JA1501 DF2 KA1401 DF2 KA1501 DF2 KA1631 DF2 LA1631 DF2 LA1801 DF2 LA1101 DF2 LA1251 0.160 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.850 0.850 0.850 1.900 1.900 1.900 1.900
Fuses with striker Unit Weight reference kg DF4 GA1121 DF4 GA1161 DF4 GA1201 DF4 HA1201 DF4 HA1251 DF4 HA1311 DF4 JA1311 DF4 JA1401 DF4 JA1501 DF4 KA1501 DF4 KA1631 DF4 LA1631 DF4 LA1801 DF4 LA1101 DF4 LA1251 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.850 0.850 1.900 1.900 1.900 1.900
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
a 400 Blade size 0 a 500
533331
DF4 GApppp
Blade size 1
a 500
Blade size 2
a 500
533332
Blade size 3
a 500
Blade size 4
a 500
DF2 JApppp
a 400
4/75
References

Cartridge fuses type gG
For protection of circuits without significant current peaks
Fuse type
1
812897
Rating
Sold in lots of
Cylindrical 8.5 x 31.5 DF2 CNpp
2
812896
A 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 10 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Fuses without striker Unit Weight reference kg DF2 BN0100 0.010 DF2 BN0200 0.010 DF2 BN0400 0.010 DF2 BN0600 0.010 DF2 BN0800 0.010 DF2 BN1000 0.010 DF2 BN1200 0.010 DF2 BN1600 0.010 DF2 BN2000 0.010 DF2 CN02 DF2 CN04 DF2 CN06 DF2 CN08 DF2 CN10 DF2 CN12 DF2 CN16 DF2 CN20 DF2 CN25 DF2 CN32 DF2 EN04 DF2 EN06 DF2 EN10 DF2 EN16 DF2 EN20 DF2 EN25 DF2 EN32 DF2 EN40 DF2 EN50 DF2 FN10 DF2 FN20 DF2 FN25 DF2 FN32 DF2 FN40 DF2 FN50 DF2 FN63 DF2 FN80 DF2 FN100 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Fuses with striker Unit Weight reference kg DF3 EN04 DF3 EN06 DF3 EN10 DF3 EN16 DF3 EN20 DF3 EN25 DF3 EN32 DF3 EN40 DF3 FN10 DF3 FN20 DF3 FN25 DF3 FN32 DF3 FN40 DF3 FN50 DF3 FN63 DF3 FN80 DF3 FN100 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
3 4 5 6
812899 812895 812898
DF2 ENpp
Cylindrical 10 x 38
a 500
a 400 DF3 ENpp Cylindrical 14 x 51 a 500
DF2 FNpp Cylindrical 22 x 58
a 400 a 690
7 8 9 10
a 500 DF3 FNpp
4/76

Cartridge fuses type gG
For protection of circuits without significant current peaks
Fuse type
Rating
Sold in lots of
Blade size 00
DF2 GNpppp
A 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 50 63 80 100 125 160 160 200 250 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1
Fuses without striker Unit Weight reference kg DF2 FGN10 0.160 DF2 FGN16 0.160 DF2 FGN20 0.160 DF2 FGN25 0.160 DF2 FGN32 0.160 DF2 FGN40 0.160 DF2 FGN50 0.160 DF2 FGN63 0.160 DF2 FGN80 0.160 DF2 FGN100 0.160 DF2 FGN125 0.160 DF2 FGN160 0.160 DF2 GN1051 DF2 GN1061 DF2 GN1081 DF2 GN1101 DF2 GN1121 DF2 GN1161 DF2 HN1161 DF2 HN1201 DF2 HN1251 DF2 JN1251 DF2 JN1311 DF2 JN1401 DF2 KN1501 DF2 KN1631 DF2 LN1801 DF2 LN1101 DF2 LN1251 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.230 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.850 0.850 1.900 1.900 1.900
Fuses with striker Unit Weight reference kg DF4 GN1121 DF4 GN1161 DF4 HN1201 DF4 HN1251 DF4 JN1311 DF4 JN1401 DF4 KN1501 DF4 KN1631 DF4 LN1801 DF4 LN1101 DF4 LN1251 0.230 0.230 0.400 0.400 0.560 0.560 0.850 0.850 1.900 1.900 1.900
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
533333
533334
Blade size 0
a 500
DF4 GNpppp Blade size 1 a 500
Blade size 2
533335
a500
Blade size 3 Blade size 4 DF2 JNpppp
a 500
a 500
4/77
Contents
5 - TeSys contactors and reversing contactors
b Contactors: definitions and comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/2
1 2
b Tests according to standard utilisation categories conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and 5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/4 b Current of asynchronous squirrel cage motors at nominal load . . . . . . . . page 5/5 TeSys contactors selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/6
TeSys K contactors and reversing contactors

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/8 b Contactors v 6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4 . . . . . . . . . page 5/14 v 6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/15 v 20 A in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/17 b Reversing contactors v 6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4 . . . . . . . . . page 5/18 v 6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/19 v 20 A in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/20 b Auxiliary contact blocks, suppressor modules and accessories . . . . . . . page 5/23
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TeSys LC1 SK and LP1 SK mini-contactors

b For motor control in categories AC-3 and AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/34 b Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks and suppressor modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/35
TeSys LC1 SKGC mini-contactors

b For use in modular panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/42 b Suppressor modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/43
TeSys D contactors and reversing contactors

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/46 b Contactors for motor control v v v v Up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . From 25 to 200 A, in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . From 20 to 200 A, for the North American market, conforming to UL and CSA standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/62 page 5/63 page 1/64 page 5/71
b Reversing contactors for motor control v Up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/72 v Up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/73 v From 20 to 200 A, in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/74 b Components parts for assembling reversing contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/76 b Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks and suppressor modules . . . . . . page 5/79 b Coils for TeSys D contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/86
TeSys contactors for switching 3-phase capacitor banks

b Contactors used for power factor correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/102
5/0
TeSys F contactors and reversing contactors

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/104 b Contactors for motor control v 115 to 800 A, in category AC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/114 v 200 to 2100 A, in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/115 b Reversing contactors v v v v 115 to 265 A, in category AC-3, customer assembly .. . . . . . . . . . . . 200 to 350 A, in category AC-1, customer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components for assembling reversing contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instantaneous contact blocks and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/116 page 5/117 page 5/118 page 5/123
1 2
b Coils for TeSys F contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/130
High power changeover contactor pairs for distribution

b For customer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/153
Capacitive delayed opening devices

b For TeSys D contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/156 b For TeSys F contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/157
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TeSys FG shockproof contactors

b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/158 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/166 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/174 b Dimensions and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/180
TeSys LC1 B contactors

b 750 to 1800 A, in category AC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/184 b 800 to 2750 A, in category AC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/185 b Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/186 b Replacement coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/188
Variable composition contactors

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/226 b CV1 B from 80 to 1000 A and CV3 B from 80 to 500 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/228
3-pole vacuum contactors and reversing contactors

b LC1 V and CV2 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/232
Magnetic latching contactors

b CR1 F and CR1 B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/242
Modular equipment
Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/268 b TeSys GC standard contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/278 b TeSys GF impulse relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/286 b TeSys GY dual tariff contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/292
5/1
General
TeSys contactors

Definitions and comments
1 2
Altitude
Definitions
The rarefied atmosphere at high altitude reduces the dielectric strength of the air and hence the rated operational voltage of the contactor. It also reduces the cooling effect of the air and hence the rated operational current of the contactor (unless the temperature drops at the same time). No derating is necessary up to 3000 m. Derating factors to be applied above this altitude for main pole operational voltage and current (a.c. supply) are as follows. Altitude 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m 5000 m 0.80 0.70 0.60 Rated operetional voltage 0.90 0.86 Rated operational current 0.92 0.90 0.88
Ambient air temperature
The temperature of the air surrounding the device, measured near to the device. The operating characteristics are given: - with no restriction for temperatures between - 5 and + 55 C, - with restrictions, if necessary, for temperatures between - 50 and + 70 C. This is defined taking into account the rated operational voltage, operating rate and duty, utilisation category and ambient temperature around the device. The current which a closed contactor can sustain for a minimum of 8 hours without its temperature rise exceeding the limits given in the standards. The current which a closed contactor can sustain for a short time after a period of no load, without dangerous overheating. This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current, determines the use of the contactor or starter, and on which the corresponding tests and the utilisation category are based. For 3-phase circuits it is expressed as the voltage between phases. Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational voltage Ue is less than or equal to the rated insulation voltage Ui. The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics are based. For a.c. applications, the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form (less than 5% total harmonic distortion). This is the voltage value used to define the insulation characteristics of a device and referred to in dielectric tests determining leakage paths and creepage distances. As the specifications are not identical for all standards, the rated value given for each of them is not necessarily the same. The peak value of a voltage surge which the device is able to withstand without breaking down. The rated power of the standard motor which can be switched by the contactor, at the stated operational voltage. This is the current value which the contactor can break in accordance with the breaking conditions specified in the IEC standard. This is the current value which the contactor can make in accordance with the making conditions specified in the IEC standard. This is the ratio between the time the current flows (t) and the duration of the cycle (T) Cycle duration: duration of current flow + time at zero current
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Rated operational current (Ie) Rated conventional thermal current (Ith) (1) Permissible short time rating Rated operational voltage (Ue)
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated operational power (expressed in kW) Rated breaking capacity (2) Rated making capacity (2) On-load factor (m)
Pole impedance
The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components between the input terminal and the output terminal. The impedance comprises a resistive component (R) and an inductive component (X = Lw). The total impedance therefore depends on the frequency and is normally given for 50 Hz. This average value is given for the pole at its rated operational current. This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts can perform without maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilisation category, the rated operational current and the rated operational voltage. This is the average number of no-load operating cycles (i.e. with zero current flow through the main poles) which the contactor can perform without mechanical failure.
Mechanical durability
(1) Conventional thermal current, in free air, conforming to IEC standards. (2) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into account the maximum asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak asymmetrical current which may be twice the rms symmetrical component. Note : these definitions are extracted from standard IEC 60947-1.
5/2
General
TeSys contactors

Definitions and comments
The standard utilisation categories define the current values which the contactor must be able to make or break. These values depend on: - the type of load being switched: squirrel cage or slip ring motor, resistors, - the conditions under which making or breaking takes place: motor stalled, starting or running, reversing, plugging. a.c. applications
Category AC-1 This category applies to all types of a.c. load with a power factor equal to or greater than 0.95 (cos j u 0.95). Application examples: heating, distribution. Category AC-2 This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors. v On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated current of the motor. v On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to the mains supply voltage. This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking during normal running of the motor. v On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7 times the rated current of the motor. v On opening, it breaks the rated current drawn by the motor; at this point, the voltage at the contactor terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage. Breaking is light. Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc... . This category covers applications with plugging and inching of squirrel cage and slip ring motors. The contactor closes at a current peak which may be as high as 5 or 7 times the rated motor current. On opening it breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage. Breaking is severe Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, cranes and hoists, metallurgy industry.
Contactor utilisation categories conforming to IEC 60947-4-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Category AC-3
Category AC-4
d.c. applications
Category DC-1 Category DC-3 This category applies to all types of d.c. load with a time constant (L/R) of less than or equal to1ms. This category applies to starting, counter-current braking and inching of shunt motors. Time constant y 2 ms. v On closing, the contactor makes the starting current, which is about 2.5 times the rated motor current. v On opening, the contactor must be able to break 2.5 times the starting current at a voltage which is less than or equal to the mains voltage. The slower the motor speed, and therefore the lower its back e.m.f., the higher this voltage. Breaking is difficult. This category applies to starting, counter-current braking and inching of series wound motors. Time constant y 7.5 ms. On closing, the contactor makes a starting current peak which may be as high as 2.5 times the rated motor current. On opening, the contactor breaks this same current at a voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Category DC-5
Utilisation categories for auxiliary contacts & control relays conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
a.c. applications
Category AC-14 (1) This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA. Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors and relays. Category AC-15 (1) This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn with the electromagnet closed is more than 72 VA. Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors.
d.c. applications
Category DC-13 (2) This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads for which the time taken to reach 95% of the steady state current (T = 0.95) is equal to 6 times the power P drawn by the load (with P y 50 W). Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors without economy resistor. (1) Replaces category AC-11. (2) Replaces category DC-13.
5/3
General
Technical information
Tests according to standard utilisation categories conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and 5-1
based on rated operational current Ie and rated operational voltage Ue
Contactors
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Electrical durability: making and breaking conditions
Occasional duty: making and breaking conditions Making I U 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue Breaking I U 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue
a.c. supply
Typical applications Resistors, non inductive or slightly inductive loads Motors Slip ring motors: starting, breaking. Squirrel cage motors: starting, breaking whilst motor running. Squirrel cage motors: starting, reversing, inching Utilisation category AC-1 Making I U Ie Ue cos j 0.95 Breaking I U Ie Ue cos j 0.95 cos j 0.8 cos j 0.8
AC-2 AC-3 Ie y (1) Ie > (2) AC-4 Ie y (1) Ie > (2)
2.5 Ie
Ue
0.65
2.5 Ie
Ue
0.65
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
0.65
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
0.65
6 Ie 6 Ie
Ue Ue
0.65 0.35
1 Ie 1 Ie
0.17 Ue 0.17 Ue
0.65 0.35
10 Ie 10 Ie
1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue
0.45 0.35
8 Ie 8 Ie
1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue
0.45 0.35
6 Ie 6 Ie
Ue Ue
0.65 0.35
6 Ie 6 Ie
Ue Ue
0.65 0.35
12 Ie 12 Ie
1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue
0.45 0.35
10 Ie 10 Ie
1.05 Ue 1.05 Ue
0.45 0.35
d.c. supply
Typical applications Resistors, non inductive or slightly inductive loads Shunt wound motors: starting, reversing, inching Series wound motors: starting, reversing, inching Utilisation category DC-1 DC-3 Making I U Ie Ue 2.5 Ie Ue L/R (ms) 1 2 Breaking I U Ie Ue 2.5 Ie Ue L/R (ms) 1 2 Making I U 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue 4 Ie 1.05 Ue L/R (ms) 1 2.5 Breaking I U 1.5 Ie 1.05 Ue 4 Ie 1.05 Ue L/R (ms) 1 2.5
DC-5
2.5 Ie
Ue
7.5
2.5 Ie
Ue
7.5
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
15
4 Ie
1.05 Ue
15
Control relays and auxiliary contacts

Electrical durability: making and breaking conditions Occasional duty: making and breaking conditions Making I U 6 Ie 10 Ie 1.1 Ue 1.1 Ue Breaking I U 6 Ie 10 Ie 1.1 Ue 1.1 Ue
a.c. supply
Typical applications Electromagnets y 72 VA > 72 VA Utilisation category AC-14 AC-15 Making I U 10 Ie Ue cos j 0.7 Breaking I U Ie Ue cos j 0.4 cos j 0.7 0.3 cos j 0.7 0.3
d.c. supply
Typical applications Electromagnets Utilisation category DC-13 Making I U Ie Ue L/R (ms) 6 P (3) Breaking I U Ie Ue L/R (ms) 6 P (3) Making I U 1.1 Ie 1.1 Ue L/R (ms) 6 P (3) Breaking I U 1.1 Ie 1.1 Ue L/R (ms) 6 P (3)
(1) Ie y 17 A for electrical durability, Ie y 100 A for occasional duty. (2) Ie > 17 A for electrical durability, Ie > 100 A for occasional duty. (3) The value 6 P (in watts) is based on practical observations and is considered to represent the majority of d.c. magnetic loads up to the maximum limit of P = 50 W i.e. 6 P = 300 ms = L/R. Above this, the loads are made up of smaller loads in parallel. The value 300 ms is therefore a maximum limit whatever the value of current drawn.
5/4
General

Current of asynchronous squirrel cage motors at nominal load
3-phase 4-pole motors

Rated operational power (1)
Current values for power in kW

Indicative rated operational current values at: 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
Current values for power in hp

Rated operational power (2) hp 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 3 5 7 1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Indicative rated operational current values at: 110 120 V A 4.4 6.4 8.4 12 13.6 19.2 30.4 44 56 84 108 136 160 208 260 200 V A 2.5 3.7 4.8 6.9 7.8 11 17.5 25.3 32.2 48.3 62.1 78.2 92 120 150 177 221 285 359 414 552 208 V A 2.4 3.5 4.6 6.6 7.5 10.6 16.7 24.2 30.8 46.2 59.4 74.8 88 114 143 169 211 273 343 396 528 220 240 V A 2.2 3.2 4.2 6 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 42 54 68 80 104 130 154 192 248 312 360 480 604 722 828 954 1030 1180 380 415 V A 1.3 1.8 2.3 3.3 4.3 6.1 9.7 14 18 27 34 44 51 66 83 103 128 165 208 240 320 403 482 560 636 786 440 480 V A 1.1 1.6 2.1 3 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77 96 124 156 180 240 302 361 414 477 515 590 550 600 V A 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 27 32 41 52 62 77 99 125 144 192 242 289 336 382 412 472
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
kW A A A A 0.06 0.35 0.2 0.16 0.12 0.09 0.52 0.3 0.24 0.17 0.12 0.7 0.44 0.32 0.23 0.35 0.18 1 0.6 0.48 0.25 1.5 0.85 0.68 0.49 0.37 1.9 1.1 0.88 0.64 0.55 2.6 1.5 1.2 0.87 1.1 0.75 3.3 1.9 1.5 1.1 4.7 2.7 2.2 1.6 1.5 6.3 3.6 2.9 2.1 4.9 3.9 2.8 2.2 8.5 3 11.3 6.5 5.2 3.8 4.9 4 15 8.5 6.8 5.5 20 11.5 9.2 6.7 7.5 27 15.5 12.4 8.9 11 38 22 17.6 12.8 15 51 29 23 17 18.5 61 35 28 21 22 72 41 33 24 30 96 55 44 32 37 115 66 53 39 45 140 80 64 47 55 169 97 78 57 75 230 132 106 77 90 278 160 128 93 110 340 195 156 113 132 400 230 184 134 160 487 280 224 162 200 609 350 280 203 250 748 430 344 250 315 940 540 432 313 355 1061 610 488 354 400 1200 690 552 400 500 1478 850 680 493 560 1652 950 760 551 630 1844 1060 848 615 710 2070 1190 952 690 800 2340 1346 1076 780 900 2640 1518 1214 880 1000 2910 1673 1339 970 (1) Values conforming to standard IEC 60072-1 (at 50 Hz). (2) Values conforming to standard UL 508 (at 60 Hz).
Nota : These values are given as a guide. They may vary depending on the type of motor, its polarity and the manufacturer.
5/5
Selection guide
TeSys contactors
Applications
Equipment based on standard contactors
1 2 3 4 5 6
Pages
Equipment requiring low consumption contactors which can be switched directly from solid state outputs
Rated operational current
AC-3 AC-1
6A 12 A
6..0.16 A 20 A
9150 A 25200 A
115800 A 2002100 A
7501800 A 8002750 A
6...12 A 20 A
925 A 2040 A
Rated operational voltage
690 V
690 V
690 V
1000 V
1000 V
690 V
690 V
Number of poles
2 or 3
3 or 4
3 or 4
2, 3 or 4
14
3 or 4
Contactor type references
LC1 SKLP1 SK
5/8 and 5/9
LC1 KLC7 KLP1 K
LC1 D
LC1 F
LC1 B
LP4 K
LC1 D
5/46 and 5/47
5/104 and 5/105
5/15
5/48 and 5/49
7 8 9 10
5/6
Equipment requiring magnetic latching contactors
Motors, resistive circuits, rotor short-circuiting devices, electro lifting magnets, hoisting, mines, c motors, high operating rates. Variable composition bar mounted contactors.
Induction heating, heating of metal or of a metal part in a channel or crucible furnace by induction of a. c. currents.Contactors for induction heating applications.
Applications conforming to NATO specifications and references. Shockproof contactors
1 2 3 4 5 6
1501800 A 2502750 A
80...1800 A 802750 A
8016 300 A
12630 A 25850 A
1000 V
a 1000 V c 440 or 1500 V 16
3000 V
690 V or 1000 V
14
18
3 or 4
CR1 F CR1 B
CVp
CEp CSp
LC1 DpG LP1 DpG LC1 FGppp
5/250 to 5/259
5/226 and 5/227
Please consult your Regional Sales Office
8 9 10
5/7
Selection guide
TeSys contactors
From 6 to 16 A

Applications
Simple automation systems
1 2 3 4 5
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks
Ie max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) Ie AC-1 (q y 40 C)
6A 12 A
6A
690 V
Number of poles
2 or 3
Rated operational power in category AC-3
220/240 V 380/400 V 415/440 V 500 V 660/690 V 1000 V
1.1 kW 2.2 kW 2.2 kW
1.5 kW 2.2 kW 2.2/3 kW 3 kW 3 kW
Front Side
Up to 2 N/C or N/O
Up to 4 N/C or N/O 1 N/C
6
Associated manual-auto thermal overload relays
Front time delay Front dust and damp protected
Class 10 A Class 20 A
0.1116 A
7 8
Suppressor modules a c
Varistor or diode
Varistor, diode + Zener diode or RC circuit
LC1 SK LP1 SK
5/34 and 5/35
LC1 or LC7 K06 LP1 K06 LC2 or LC8 K06 LP2 K06
5/14 to 5/17 5/18 to 5/21
Reversing contactor with mechanical interlock type references
a c
9 10
Pages
Contactors Reversing contactors
5/8
1 2 3
9A 20 A
12 A
16 A
3 or 4
2.2 kW 4 kW 4 kW 4 kW 4 kW
3 kW 5.5 kW 5.5 kW 4 kW 4 kW
3 kW 7.5 kW 7.5 kW 5.5 kW 4 kW
4 5 6 7
LC1 or LC7 K09 LP1 K09

LC1 or LC7 K12 LP1 K12 LC2 or LC8 K12 LP2 K12
LC1 K16 LC2 K16
8 9 10
LC2 or LC8 K09 LP2 K09
5/9
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Conforming to standards Product certifications Operating positions LCp and LPp K06 to K12
IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424 UL, CSA Vertical axis Horizontal axis
90 9 0
180 180
Without derating Connection Screw clamp terminals Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.34 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.75 2 x 2.8 or 1 x 6.35 4 mm x 35 microns N.m 0.8
Without derating Max. 2x4 2x4
Spring terminals
Faston connectors Solder pins for printed circuit board Tightening torque Terminal referencing
Solid conductor Flexible conductor without cable end Flexible conductor with cable end Solid conductor Flexible conductor without cable end Clip With locating device between power and control circuits Philips head n 2 and 6
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm
1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5
90
0 90 9
Possible positions for LCp K only. Contactor pull-in voltage: 0.85 Uc Max. to IEC 60947 1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
90
Conforming to standards EN 50005 and EN 50012 Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947 (Ui) Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C Conforming to BS 5424, NF C 20-040 Conforming to CSA 22-2 n 14, UL 508 Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Vibration resistance 5 ... 300 Hz Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60068 (DIN 50016) Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Without derating Contactor open Contactor closed Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to NF F 16-101 and 16-102 Contactor open Contactor closed Safe separation of circuits Conforming to VDE 0106 and IEC 60536
Up to 5 contacts, depending on model V V V V kV 690 750 690 600 8 TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct finger contact C C m - 50+ 80 - 25+ 50 2000 2 gn 4 gn Self-extinguishing materials V1 Conforming to requirement 2 On X axis: 6 gn On Y and Z axes: 10 gn On X axis: 10 gn On Y and Z axes: 15 gn SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V
Shock resistance (1/2 sine wave, 11 ms)
5/10
TeSys contactors

Type LCp or LPp Conventional thermal For ambient temperature current (Ith) y 50 C Rated operational frequency Frequency limits of the operational current Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated making capacity I rms conforming to NF C 63110 and IEC60947 Rated breaking capacity I rms conforming 220/230 V to NF C 63110 380/400 V and IEC60947 415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V Permissible short time rating In free air for a 1s time t from cold 5 s state (q y 50 C) 10 s 30 s 1 min 3 min u 15 min A Hz Hz V A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A mW A A K06 20 50/60 Up to 400 690 110 110 110 110 110 80 70 90 85 80 60 45 40 20 25 3 20 16 for Ue only On-load factor 300 operating cycles/hour 120 operating cycles/hour 30 operating cycles/hour 90% 13 15 19 60% 15 18 20 30% 18 19 20 K09 K12 K16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1200 50 %
110 110 110 110 110 80 70 90 85 80 60 45 40 20
144 110 80 70 115 105 100 75 55 50 25
160 110 80 70 115 105 100 75 55 50 25
gG fuse U y 440 V (aM fuse) Average impedance per pole At Ith and 50 Hz Use in category AC-1 Maximum rated operational resistive circuits, heating, current for a temperature y50 C lighting (Ue y 440 V) Maximum rated operational current for a temperature y70 C Rated operational current limits in relation to the on-load factor and operating frequency
A A A
Increase in rated operational current by paralleling of poles
Apply the following coefficients to the above currents; these coefficients take into account an often unbalanced distribution of current between the poles 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.60 3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25 4 poles in parallel: K = 2.80 kW kW kW kW kW kW kW 0.37 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 3 3 Op. cycles/h Power 0.55 1.1 2.2 4 4 4 4 3 5.5 5.5/4 (480) 4 4 600 100 % 4 7.5 5.5/4 (480) 4 4 900 75 %
Use in category AC-3 squirrel cage motors
Operational power according to the voltage. Voltage 50 or 60Hz
115 V single-ph. 220 V single-ph. 220/230 V 3-ph. 380/415 V 3-ph. 440/480 V 3-ph. 500/600 V 3-ph. 660/690 V 3-ph.
Maximum operating rate (in operating cycles/hour in relation to % of rated power)
8 9 10
5/11
TeSys contactors

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits (y 50 C) single voltage coil Operation Drop-out Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc Inrush Sealed Heat dissipation Operating time at 20 C and at Uc Between coil energisation and: - opening of the N/C contacts - closing of the N/O contacts Between coil de-energisation and: - opening of the N/O contacts - closing of the N/C contacts Maximum immunity to microbreaks Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour Mechanical durability at Uc 50/60 Hz coil In millions of operating cycles c coil Wide range coil, Low consumption
LC1 LC2 a 12690 (1) 0.81.15 Uc (2) u 0.20 Uc 30 VA 4.5 VA
LC7 LC8 a 24240 (1) 0.851.1 Uc u 0.10 Uc 3 VA 3 VA 3
LP1 LP2 c 12250 (1) 0.81.15 Uc u 0.10 Uc 3W 3W 3
LP4 LP5 c 12120 0.71.30 Uc u 0.10 Uc 1.8 W 1.8 W 1.8
1.3
ms ms ms ms ms
515 1020 1020 1525 2 3600 10
2535 3040 30 40 2 3600 10
2535 3040 10 15 2 3600 10
2535 3040 1020 1525 2 3600 30
(1) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4KE1FC (50129V) or LA4KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/24. (2) LC1K16: 0.851.15 Uc.
5/12
TeSys contactors

Auxiliary contact characteristics of contactors and instantaneous contact blocks

Number of auxiliary contacts On LCpK or LPpK 3-pole On LA1K V V V V V A Hz U min (DIN 19 240) I min Conforming to IEC 60947 and VDE 0660, gG fuse Conforming to I rms IEC 60947 Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms V mA A A A A A MW 1 2 or 4 690 690 690 750 600 10 Up to 400 17 5 10 110 80 90 110 > 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
12 24 48 110 220 440 600 V
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to BS 5424 Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to VDE 0110 group C Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14 For ambient temperature y50C
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency of the operational current Minimum switching capacity Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Short-time rating
Insulation resistance Non-overlap distance
LA1K: linked contacts mm 0.5 (see schemes pages 5/27 and 5/29) conforming to INRS, BIA and CNA specifications d.c. supply, category DC-13 Operational power of contacts a.c. supply, category AC-15 conforming to IEC 60947 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4). increasing with the load. V VA VA VA VA 24 48 17 7 1000 48 96 34 14 2050 110/ 127 240 86 36 5000 220/ 380/ 600/ 230 400 440 690 440 800 880 1200 158 288 317 500 66 120 132 200 10 000 14 000 13 000 9000 V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 52 28 8 300 440 51 26 7 230 600 50 25 6 200
1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity
Power broken in VA
Power broken in W
1 Breaking limit of contacts valid 16 000 for: 10 000 - maximum of 50 operating 8000 cycles at 10 s intervals 6000 5000 (power broken = making 4000 current x cos j 0.7). 3000 2 Electrical durability of contacts 2000 for: - 1 million operating cycles (2a) 1000 - 3 million operating cycles (2b) 800 - 10 million operating cycles (2c). 600 500 3 Breaking limit of contacts valid 400 300 for: 200 - maximum of 20 operating cycles at 10 s intervals with current 100 passing for 0.5 s per operating 80 cycle. 60 4 Thermal limit. 40
1000 700 500 300 250 200 100 80 60 50 40 30 20
200 140 100
2a 2b
2a
50
2c
2b 2c
20
24 48 110 120 220 380 500 440 690 V
10 8 6
10
References : page 5/23 Dimensions : pages 5/26 and 5/28 Schemes : pages 5/27 and 5/29
5/13
References
TeSys contactors
Control circuit: a.c.
Contactors for motor control, 6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4

Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/194 to 5/197 and 5/200 to 5/203. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/23 to 5/25.
1 2 3 4
511137
3-pole contactors for standard applications

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 230 V 380 V 415 V kW 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 440/500 V 660/690 V kW 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) Rated operational current in category AC-3 440 V up to A 6 9 12 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Instantaneous auxiliary contacts
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) (2)
Weight
LC1 K0910pp
kW 1.5
kg LC1 K0610pp LC1 K0601pp LC1 K0910pp LC1 K0901pp LC1 K1210pp LC1 K1201pp LC1 K1610pp LC1 K1601pp 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180
Screw clamp connections
511138
2.2 3 4
Spring terminal connections
For 6 to 12 A ratings only, in the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 K0610pp becomes LC1 K06103pp. LC1 K09103pp
Faston connectors, 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8

For 6 to 16 A ratings, in the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 K0610pp becomes LC1 K06107pp.
511139
Solder pins for printed circuit boards

For 6 to 16 A ratings, in the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 K0610pp becomes LC1 K06105pp.
5 6
511140
3-pole silent contactors

Recommended for use in areas sensitive to noise, high interference mains supplies, etc. Coil with rectifier incorporated, suppressor fitted as standard.

LC1 K09107pp 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 6 9 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC7 K0610pp LC7 K0601pp LC7 K0910pp LC7 K0901pp LC7 K1210pp LC7 K1201pp 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225
7 8 9 10
LC7 K0910pp
511141
In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LC7 K0610pp becomes LC7 K06107pp.

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LC7 K0610pp becomes LC7 K06105pp. (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): a.c. supply Contactors LC1 K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 (2) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240 50/60 Hz J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690 50/60 Hz W7 UE7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72. Contactors LC7 K (0.851.1 Uc) Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7 (2) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4 KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4 KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/24.
LC1 K09105pp
Selection : pages 5/194 and 5/197
Schemes : page 5/27
5/14
References
TeSys contactors
Contactors for motor control, 6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4

Control circuit: d.c. or low consumption
Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/194 to 5/197 and 5/200 to 5/203. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/23 to 5/25.
511137
3-pole contactors, d.c. supply

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 230 V 380 V 415 V kW 2.2 4 5.5 440/500 V 660/690 V kW 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440)
1
Weight
Rated operational current in category AC-3 440 V up to A 6 9 12
LP1 K0910pp
kW 1.5
kg 1 1 1 1 1 1 LP1 K0610pp LP1 K0601pp LP1 K0910pp LP1 K0901pp LP1 K1210pp LP1 K1201pp 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225
2 3 4 5
511138
2.2 3
In the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code. Example: LP1 K0610pp becomes LP1 K06103pp.

LP1 K09103pp In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LP1 K0610pp becomes LP1 K06107pp.

511139
3-pole low consumption contactors

Compatible with programmable controller outputs. LED indicator incorporated (except models LP4 KppppFW3 and LP4 KppppGW3). Wide range coil (0.71.30 Uc), suppressor fitted as standard, consumption 1.8 W.

1.5 LP1 K09107pp 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 6 9 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 LP4 K0610pp LP4 K0601pp LP4 K0910pp LP4 K0901pp LP4 K1210pp LP4 K1201pp 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235
6 7 8
511140

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LP4 K0610pp becomes LP4 K06107pp. LP1 K09105pp

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LP4 K0610pp becomes LP4 K06105pp. (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): d.c. supply (contactors LP1 K: 0.81.15 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 (2) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD PD QD LD MD Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3
230 240 250 MPD MUD UD
511141
Low consumption (contactors LP4 K: 0.7130 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 48 72 110 120 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3 (2) For LP1 K only, when connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the contactor coil, select a 20 V coil (a control circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop. LP4 K0910pp
9 10
Schemes : page 5/27
5/15
References
TeSys contactors
Contactors for control in category AC-1, 20 A
511137
1 2
Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/198 and 5/199. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/23 to 5/25.
3 or 4-pole contactors for standard applications (1)

Non-inductive loads Category AC-1 Maximum current at q y 50 C A Number of poles
Instantaneous Basic reference, auxiliary contacts to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) (3)
Weight
kg 3 3 2 1 1 LC1 K0910pp or LC1 K1210pp LC1 K0901pp or LC1 K1201pp LC1 K09004pp or LC1 K12004pp LC1 K09008pp 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180 0.180

LC1 K09004pp 20
511138
3 4
4 2

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 K0910pp becomes LC1 K09107pp. LC1 K09103pp

511139
5 6
3 or 4-pole silent contactors (1)


20 3 3 4 LC1 K09107pp 2 2 1 1 LC7 K0910pp or LC7 K1210pp LC7 K0901pp or LC7 K1201pp LC7 K09004pp or LC7 K12004pp LC7 K09008pp 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225
7
511141

8
LC1 K09004pp
9 10
(1) Selection between 9 and 12 A ratings according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve on page 5/198. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): a.c. supply Contactors LC1 K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 (3) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240 50/60 Hz J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690 50/60 Hz W7 UE7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72. Contactors LC7 K (0.81.1 Uc) Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7 (3) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4 KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4 KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/24.
Schemes : page 5/27
5/16
References
TeSys contactors
Contactors for control in category AC-1, 20 A

Contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/198 and 5/199. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/23 to 5/25.
511142
3 and 4-pole contactors, d.c. supply (1)

Non-inductive loads Category AC-1 Maximum current at q y 50 C A Number of poles
1
Weight
kg 3 3 4 2 1 1 LP1 K0910pp or LP1 K1210pp LP1 K0901pp or LP1 K1201pp LP1 K09004pp or LP1 K12004pp LP1 K09008pp 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225 0.225

20 LC1 K09004pp
2 3 4 5
511143

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LP1 K0910pp becomes LP1 K09107pp. LC1 K09103pp

511144
3 or 4-pole low consumption contactors (1)


20 3 3 LC1 K09105pp 4 2 2 1 1 LP4 K0910ppp or LP4 K1210ppp LP4 K0901ppp or LP4 K1201ppp LP4 K09004ppp or LP4 K12004ppp LP4 K09008ppp 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235
6 7 8 9 10

511141


In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LP4 K0910pp becomes LP4 K09105pp. (1) Selection between 9 and 12 A ratings according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve on page 5/24. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): d.c. supply (contactors LP1 K: 0.81.15 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24 (3) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD PD QD LD MD MPD MUD UD Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3. Low consumption (contactors LP4 K: 0.7130 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3 (3) For LP1 K only, when connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the contactor coil, select a 20 V coil (a control circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.
LC1 K09004pp
Schemes : page 5/27
5/17
References
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control, 6 to 16 A in category AC-3 and 6 to 12 A in category AC-4
1 2 3
511148 511147
Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/194 to 5/197 and 5/200 to 5/203. Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/23 to 5/25.
3-pole reversing contactors for standard applications

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 Rated operational current in category AC-3 440V up to
InstanBasic reference, taneous to be completed by adding auxiliary the voltage code (1) (2) contacts per contactor
Weight
220 V 230 V kW LC2 K0910pp 1.5 2.2 3 4
380 V 415 V kW
440/500 V 660/690 V kW

2.2 4 5.5 7.5 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440)
A 6 9 12 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC2 K0610pp LC2 K0601pp LC2 K0910pp LC2 K0901pp LC2 K1210pp LC2 K1201pp LC2 K1610pp LC2 K1601pp
kg 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390
4
LC2 K09105pp

For 6 to 12 A ratings only, in the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code. Example: LC2K0610pp becomes LC2K06103pp.
5 6 7 8 9 10
For 6 to 16 A ratings, in the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LC2K0610pp becomes LC2K06107pp.

3-pole silent reversing contactors


1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 6 9 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC8 K0610pp LC8 K0601pp LC8 K0910pp LC8 K0901pp LC8 K1210pp LC8 K1201pp 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LC8K0610pp becomes LC8K06107pp.

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LC8K0610pp becomes LC8K06105pp. (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): a.c. supply Reversing contactors LC2K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 (2) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240 50/60 Hz J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690 50/60 Hz W7 UE7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72 Reversing contactors LC8K (0.81.1 Uc) Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7 (2) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4KE1FC (50129V) or LA4KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/24.
Schemes : page 5/29
5/18
References
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control, 6 to 12 A in categories AC-3 and AC-4

Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/194 to 5/197 and 5/200 to 5/203. Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. Pre-wired power circuit connections as standard on screw clamp versions. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/23 to 5/25.
1
Weight
3-pole reversing contactors, d.c. supply

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 Rated operational current in category AC-3 440V up to A 6 9 12 1 1 1
InstanBasic reference, taneous to be completed by adding auxiliary the voltage code (1) (2) contacts per contactor
2
kg
220 V 230 V kW
380 V 415 V kW
440/500 V 660/690 V kW

1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440)
1 1 1
LP2 K0610pp LP2 K0601pp LP2 K0910pp LP2 K0901pp LP2 K1210pp LP2 K1201pp
0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480
3 4 5 6

In the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code. Example: LP2K0610pp becomes LP2K06103pp.

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LC2K0610pp becomes LC2K06107pp.

3-pole low consumption reversing contactors

Compatible with programmable controller outputs. LED indicator incorporated (except models LP5-KppppFW3 and LP5-KppppGW3). Wide range coil (0.71.30 Uc), suppressor fitted as standard, consumption 1.8 W.

1.5 2.2 3 2.2 4 5.5 3 4 4 (> 440) 5.5 (440) 6 9 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 LP5 K0610pp LP5 K0601pp LP5 K0910pp LP5 K0901pp LP5 K1210pp LP5 K1201pp 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490

In the references selected above, insert a figure 3 before the voltage code. Example: LP5K0610pp becomes LP5K06103pp.
7 8 9 10

In the references selected above, insert a figure 7 before the voltage code. Example: LP5 K0610pp becomes LP5K06107pp.

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LP5 K0610pp becomes LP5K06105pp. (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): d.c. supply Reversing contactors LP2K (0.81.15 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 (3) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD PD QD LD MD Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3.
230 240 250 MPD MUD UD
Low consumption Reversing contactors LP5K (0.71.30 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 48 72 110 120 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3 (2) For LP2K only, when connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the contactor coil, select a 20 V coil (a control circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop. Selection : pages 5/194 to 5/203 Characteristics : pages 5/10 to 5/13 Dimensions : page 5/28 Schemes : page 5/29
5/19
References
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for control in category AC-1, 20 A
1
511150
Warning: reversing contactors LC2 K0910pp and LC2 K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation as standard. Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/198 and 5/199. Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/23 to 5/25.
3 or 4-pole reversing contactors for standard applications (1)

Non-inductive loads Category AC-1 Maximum current at q y 50 C Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts per contactor
2
LC2 K0910pp
Weight
kg 3 3 4 1 or 1 or or LC2 K0910pp LC2 K1210pp LC2 K0901pp LC2 K1201pp LC2 K09004pp LC2 K12004pp 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.390 0.380 0.380
3
511151
20
4
LC2 K09105pp

5 6 7 8 9 10

3 or 4-pole silent reversing contactors (1)

511152

20 3 3 4 1 or 1 or or LC8 K0910pp LC8 K1210pp LC8 K0901pp LC8 K1201pp LC8 K09004pp LC8 K12004pp 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.470 0.470

LC2 K09004pp

In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LC8 K0910pp becomes LC8 K09105pp. (1) Selection between 9 and 12 A ratings according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve on page 5/198. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): a.c. supply Reversing contactors LC2 K (0.81.15 Uc) (0.851.1 Uc) Volts 12 20 24 (3) 36 42 48 110 115 120 127 200/208 220/230 230 230/240 50/60 Hz J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 FC7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Volts 256 277 380/400 400 400/415 440 480 500 575 600 660/690 50/60 Hz W7 UE7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 T7 S7 SC7 X7 Y7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72. Reversing contactors LC8 K (0.81.1 Uc) Volts 24 42 48 110 115 220 230/240 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 U7 (3) For mains supplies with a high level of interference (voltage surge > 800 V), use a suppressor module LA4 KE1FC (50129 V) or LA4 KE1UG (130250 V), see page 5/24.
Schemes : page 5/29
5/20
References
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for control in category AC-1, 20 A
Warning: reversing contactors LP2 K0910pp and LP2 K0901pp are pre-wired for reverse motor operation as standard. Reversing contactor selection according to utilisation category, see pages 5/198 and 5/199. Integral mechanical interlock. It is essential to link the contacts of the electrical interlock. Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position. Add-on auxiliary contact blocks and accessories, see pages 5/23 to 5/25.
1 2
kg
3 or 4-pole reversing contactors, d.c. supply (1)

Non-inductive loads Category AC-1 Maximum current at q y 50 C Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts per contactor
Weight

20 3 3 4 1 or 1 or or LP2 K0910pp LP2 K1210pp LP2 K0901pp LP2 K1201pp LP2 K09004pp LP2 K12004pp 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480 0.480
3 4 5 6



3 or 4-pole low consumption reversing contactors (1)


20 3 3 4 1 or 1 or or LP5 K0910ppp LP5 K1210ppp LP5 K0901ppp LP5 K1201ppp LP5 K09004ppp LP5 K12004ppp 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490 0.490

7 8 9 10


In the references selected above, insert a figure 5 before the voltage code. Example: LP5 K0910pp becomes LP5 K09105pp. (1) Selection between 9 and 12 A ratings according to number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve on page 5/198. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): d.c. supply (reversing contactors LP2 K: 0.81.15 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24 (3) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 155 174 200 220 230 240 250 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD PD QD LD MD MPD MUD UD Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3. Low consumption (reversing contactors LP5 K: 0.7130 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3 (3) For LP2 K only, when connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the contactor coil, select a 20 V coil (a control circuit voltage code Z7, c control circuit voltage code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop. Selection : pages 5/198 and 5/199 Characteristics : pages 5/10 to 5/13 Dimensions : page 5/28 Schemes : page 5/29
5/21
1 2
LC1, LC7, LP1 K LP4
3 4 5 6 7
LC1, LP1 K LP4
LC1, LC7, LP1 K
LP4
8 9 10
LC1, LC7, LP1 K
5/22
References
TeSys contactors
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks

Connection For use on contactors
Recommended for standard applications. Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor
Composition Reference Weight kg Screw clamp terminals All products with screw clamp terminals 2 1 All products with screw clamp terminals 4 except low consumption 3 2 1 All products with spring terminals 2 1 All products with spring terminals 4 except low consumption 3 2 1 All products with Faston connectors 2 1 All products with Faston connectors 4 except low consumption 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 3 4 LA1 KN20 LA1 KN02 LA1 KN11 LA1 KN40 LA1 KN31 LA1 KN22 LA1 KN13 LA1 KN04 LA1 KN203 LA1 KN023 LA1 KN113 LA1 KN403 LA1 KN313 LA1 KN223 LA1 KN133 LA1 KN043 LA1 KN207 LA1 KN027 LA1 KN117 LA1 KN407 LA1 KN317 LA1 KN227 LA1 KN137 LA1 KN047 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Spring terminals
With terminal referencing to standard EN 50012. Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor
Screw clamp terminals with referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 All 3-pole + N/O products with screw clamp terminals except LP4 and LP5 K12 All 3-pole + N/O products with screw clamp terminals except LP4 or LP5 K06, K09 and K12 All 4-pole products with screw clamp terminals except LP4 or LP5 K12 All 4-pole products with screw clamp terminals except LP4 or LP5 K09 and K12 1 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 LA1 KN02M LA1 KN11M LA1 KN31M LA1 KN22M LA1 KN13M LA1 KN11P LA1 KN22P 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Electronic time delay auxiliary contact blocks

Relay output with common point changeover contact, a or c 240 V, 2 A maximum. Control voltage 0.851.1 Uc. Maximum switching capacity 250 VA or 150 W. Operating temperature -10+ 60 C. Reset time: 1.5 s during the time delay period, 0.5 s after the time delay period.
Clip-on front mounting, 1 block per contactor

Voltage Type Timing range Composition Reference Weight
V a or c 2448 a 110240
s On-delay 130 On-delay 130
1 1
LA2 KT2E LA2 KT2U
kg 0.040 0.040
9 10
5/23
References
TeSys contactors


Suppressor modules incorporating LED indicator
References
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
565018
Mounting and connection
Type
For voltages a and c 1224 V a and c 3248 V a and c 50129 V a and c 130250 V
Sold in lots of 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Unit reference LA4KE1B LA4KE1E LA4KE1FC LA4KE1UG LA4KC1B LA4KC1E LA4KA1U
Weight kg 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
Clip-on fixing on the front Varistor (1) of contactors LC1 and LP1, with locating device. No tools required.
LA4 Kppp
Diode + Zener diode (2) c 1224 V c 3248 V RC (3) a 110250 V
(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. Polarised component. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (3) Protection by limiting the transient voltage to 3 Uc max. and limitation of the oscillating frequency. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
5/24
References
TeSys contactors
Accessories
565019
Mounting and marking accessories

Description Mounting plates (1) Application For fixing on 1 4 rail For fixing on 2 4 rails Marker holder Clip-in markers Clip-on 4 maximum per contactor Clip-on 110/120 mm fixing centres Onto front of contactor Strips of 10 identical numbers 09 Strips of 10 identical letters AZ Sold in lots of 1 10 100 25 25 Unit reference LA9D973 DX1AP25 LA9D90 AB1Pp (2) AB1Gp (2) Weight kg 0.025 0.065 0.001 0.002 0.002
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DX1AP25
565020
Description Paralleling links Application For 2 poles For 4 poles Set of 6 power connections Set of 4 power connections For 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs With screw clamps With screw clamps For contactors with screw clamp terminals For contactors with screw clamp terminals Sold in lots of 4 2 100 Unit preference LA9E01 LA9E02 LA9K0969 Weight kg 0.010 0.015 0.010
100
LA9K0970
0.010
LA9E01 (1) Order 1 mounting plate for fixing a contactor and 2 mounting plates for fixing a reversing contactor. (2) Complete the reference by replacing the dot with the required character.
5/25
TeSys contactors
5
TeSys K contactors
Contactors
1 2
LC1 K, LC7 K, LP1 K, LP4 K On panel
On mounting rail AM1DP200 or AM1DE200 (7 35 mm)
LA1 K
=
4x4
58
50
58
35
57
35 45
57
45
3 4
LA9 D973 On one asymmetrical rail DZ5MB with clip-on mounting plates
DX1 AP25
DZ5 ME5
5
120
57
21
35 45
5 6 7 8
57
On printed circuit board
27
45
8,65
= = =
A1
58
50
10x1,6
45
A2
Electronic time delay contact blocks

LA2 KT On contactor
53
LA2 KT
38
38
38 57
9 10
Suppressor modules
LA4 Kp On contactor LC1 K or LP1 K
25
27
22
6 22 57
Schemes : page 5/27
5/26
58
58
110
50
Schemes
TeSys contactors
TeSys K reversing contactors
3-pole contactors
3 P + N/O
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 7/L4
With integral suppression device

LC7 K 3 P + N/C
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 21/NC
LP4 K
1 2 3
A1
A2
A1
A2
T1/2
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T4/8
T2/4
T3/6
22
A2
4-pole contactors
4P
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 7/L4 A1

LC7 K 2 P N/O + 2 P N/C
R1 R3 1 A1 3
LP4 K
A2
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T4/8
A2
R2
R4
A2
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1 K

LA1 KN20, KN207, KN203 2 N/O
53/NO 63/NO
A2
+A1
A1
A2
+A1
A1
LA1 KN02, KN027, KN023 2 N/C

51/NC 61/NC
LA1 KN11, KN117, KN113 1 N/O + 1 N/C

53/NO 61/NC
4 5 6 7 8
LA4 KE
52
54
64
62
LA1 KN40, KN407, KN403 4 N/O

53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
LA1 KN31, KN317, KN313 3 N/O + 1 N/C

53/NO 73/NO 83/NO 61/NC
54
LA1 KN22, KN227, KN223 2 N/O + 2 N/C

53/NO 83/NO 61/NC 71/NC
62
LA1 KN13, KN137, KN133 1 N/O + 3 N/C

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
LA1 KN04, KN047, KN043 4 N/C

51/NC 61/NC 71/NC 72
42 41/NC
52
62
54
84
54
62
72
84
62
74
84
54
62
72
54
64
Terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012

LA1 KN02M 2 N/C
21/NC 31/NC
74
LA1 KN11M 1 N/O + 1 N/C

33/NO 21/NC
LA1 KN31M 3 N/O + 1 N/C

33/NO 43/NO 53/NO 21/NC
LA1 KN22M 2 N/O + 2 N/C

43/NO 53/NO 21/NC 31/NC
82
LA1 KN13M 1 N/O + 3 N/C

53/NO 54 21/NC 31/NC
22
22
32
34
22
32
44
54
22
22
34
44
LA1 KN11P 1 N/O + 1 N/C

13/NO 21/NC
LA1 KN22P 2 N/O + 2 N/C

13/NO 43/NO 21/NC 31/NC
14
22
14
32

LA2 KT 1 C/O
A1
16 18
Suppressor modules
LA4 KC
22
44
54
32
82
81/NC
9
+
A2
15
10
Characteristics : pages 5/10 to 5/13 References : pages 5/14 to 5/17 Dimensions : page 5/26
5/27
TeSys contactors
5

Reversing contactors
1 2
LC2 K, LC8 K, LP2 K, LP5 K On panel
On mounting rail AM1DP200 or AM1DE200 (7 35 mm)
LA1 K
8x4
58
35
57
80 90
58
50
57
90
3 4
2 x LA9 D973 2 x DX1 AP25 On one asymmetrical mounting rail DZ5MB with 2 clip-on mounting plates LA9D973 or on 2 mounting plates DX1AP25.
DZ5 ME5
5
57
21
35 90
5 6 7 8
57
On printed circuit board for reversing contactors or 2 contactors mounted side by side
27
120
90
8,65
===
===
8,65
A1
58
A1
50
A2
A2
45
45
20x1,6

LA2 KT On reversing contactors
53
LA2 KT
27
38
38
38 57
9 10
Suppressor modules
LA4 Kp On reversing contactors LC2 K or LP2 K
25
22
6
22 57
Schemes : page 5/29
5/28
58
58
110
50
Schemes
TeSys contactors
3-pole reversing contactors

With screw clamp connections 3 P + N/O 3 P + N/C

LC8 K LP5 K
1 2
5/L3
3/L2
3/L2
3/L2
5/L3
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
1/L1
1/L1
13/NO
13/NO
21/NC
1/L1
5/L3
A1
A1
A1
21/NC
A2
A2
A2
T3/6
T3/6
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
A2
14
14
22
22
A1
A1
With Faston connectors or solder pins (printed circuit board) 3 P + N/O 3 P + N/C
3/L2 5/L3 3/L2
5/L3
A2
A2
+A1
1/L1
1/L1
13/NO
1/L1
13/NO
21/NC
1/L1
5/L3
5/L3
3/L2
3/L2
A1
21/NC
3
A2 A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
14
14
22
T3/6
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
22
4-pole reversing contactors

With screw clamp connections 4P
1N 1/L1 1/L2 1/L3 2/L1 2/L2 2/L3 2N
Integral suppression device

With Faston connectors or solder pins (printed circuit board) 4P LC8 K LP5 K
4 5 6
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
A1
A2
L1
L2
L3
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1K

Terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 LA1 KN20, KN207, KN203 2 N/O
53/NO 63/NO
LA1 KN02, KN027, KN023 2 N/C

51/NC 61/NC
LA1 KN11, KN117, KN113 1 N/O + 1 N/C

53/NO 61/NC
LA KN02M 2 N/C
21/NC 31/NC
LA1 KN11M 1 N/O + 1 N/C

33/NO 21/NC
LA1 KN11P 1 N/O + 1 N/C

13/NO 21/NC
A2
+A1
A1
7 8 9 10
52
62
54
64
22
32
62
22
LA1 KN40, KN407, KN403 4 N/O

53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
LA1 KN31, KN317, KN313 3 N/O + 1 N/C

53/NO 73/NO 83/NO 61/NC
54
LA1 KN22, KN227, KN223 2 N/O + 2 N/C

53/NO 83/NO 61/NC 71/NC
LA KN13, KN137, KN133 LA1 KN04, KN047, KN043 1 N/O + 3 N/C 4 N/C
53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
51/NC 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
52
62
34
72
54
84
54
62
72
54
64
74
84
62
74
84
54
62
72

LA2 KT 1 C/O
A1
16 18
Suppressor modules
LA4 KC LA4 KE
A2
15
+
Characteristics : pages 5/10 to 5/13 References : pages 5/18 to 5/21 Dimensions : page 5/28
82
82
14
22
5/29
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Mini-contactors TeSys LC1SK and LP1SK
Environment
1 2 3 4
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to standards Approvals Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device
Conforming to 60947, VDE 0110 grC,BS 5424, CSA 22-2 n 14, UL508
690
IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424 UL, CSA Conforming to IEC 60068 (DIN 50015) Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation C C m TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct finger contact - 50+ 70 - 20+ 50 2000 Vertical axis Horizontal axis
Maximum operating altitude Operating position
Without derating
Without derating
Without derating Max 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5 1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5
5 6 7 8 9 10
Cabling, screw clamp terminals Solid conductor Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Terminal referencing Pozidriv n 1 head mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
Min 1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5 1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35 0.8 Conforming to standards En 50005
Schemes: page 5/37
5/30
TeSys contactors

Conventional thermal current For ambient temperature (Ith) y 55 C Rated operational frequency Frequency limits of the operational current Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity (for Ue y 400 V) Short time rating Short-circuit protection Average impedance per pole I rms conforming to NF C 63-110 and IEC 60947 Conforming to NF C 63-110 and IEC60947 (I rms) In free air for a time t from cold state (q y 55 C) gl fuse U y 440 V At Ith and 50 Hz A Hz Hz V A A A A mW 12 50/60 Up to 400 690 66 52 50 16 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid up to 1200 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 52 28 8 300 440 51 26 7 230
Maximum rated operational current For a temperature AC-3 (1) y 55 C (Ue y 400 V) AC-1 Utilisation in category AC-1 resistive circuits, heating, lighting (Ue y 440 V) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Increase in operational current by paralleling of poles
A A A
6 12 20
Auxiliary contact characteristics of add-on blocks

Up to Conforming to IEC 60947, BS5424, VDE 0110 group C, CSA C 22-2 n 14 V V 690 690
Conventional thermal current For ambiant temperature (Ith) y 55 C Frequency of operational current Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947 and VDE 0660, gl fuse
A Hz A
10 Up to 400 10
Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC 60947

a.c. supply, category AC-15 Electrical durability (valid up to 3600 operating cycles per hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the breaking current (cos j 0.4). 110/ 220/ 380/ V 24 48 127 230 400 440 VA 48 96 240 440 800 880 VA 17 34 86 158 288 317 VA 7 14 36 66 120 132 VA 1000 2050 5000 10000 14000 13000 (1) For LC1 contactors.
8 9 10
Schemes: page 5/37
5/31
TeSys contactors
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits (q y 50 C) For operation For drop-out Average coil consumption at 20 C and at Uc Inrush Sealed Heat dissipation Operating time at 20 C and at Uc Between coil opening of the N/C contacts energisation and closing of the N/O contacts Between coil deenergisation and opening of the N/O contacts closing of the N/C contacts Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour 50/60 Hz coil c coil
LC1SK06 a 24400 0.851.1 Uc u 0.20 Uc 16 VA 4.2 VA
LP1SK06 c 1272 0.851.1 Uc u 0.10 Uc 2.2 W 2.2 W 2.2
1.4
ms ms ms ms
816 714 68 810 1200 10
1018 812 46 68 1200 10
Schemes: page 5/37
5/32
Contactor selection guide according to required electrical durability

Use in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)
TeSys contactors
5
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1,5 1,2 1 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 30 40 Current broken in A
220/380/415 V 500 V 220/230 V 380/400 V 415 V
2,5 2 1,1 1,1
3 2,5 3
4 1,1 1,5 1,5
5 4 2,2 2,2
6 5 1,5 3 3
7 6
9 7
A A
0,55 0,75
2,2 kW 4 kW 4 kW
only up to 415 V
Current broken in A
Control of resistive circuits (cos j u 0.95). The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load.
10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2 0,15 0,1
9 10
References: pages 5/34 and 5/35 Dimensions: page 5/36 Schemes: page 5/37
5/33
References
TeSys contactors
Mini-contactors TeSys LC1 SK and LP1 SK
1
511131
b Width of contactor 27 mm. b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail. b Screw clamp terminals.
Mini-contactors for motor in category AC-3

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 (1) 220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 415 V 690 V kW 1.1 LC1 SK06 kW 2.2 kW 2.2 Rated operational voltage in AC-3 up to 400 V Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Weight
2 3 4
511132
A 6
LC1 SK0600pp
kg 0.132
Mini-contactors for motor in category AC-1

Non inductive loads maximum current (q y 55 C) utilisation category AC-1 Control circuit supply Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) Weight
A 12
a.c. d.c.
2 2
LC1 SK0600pp LP1 SK0600pp
kg 0.132 0.132
Add-on block with 1 power pole (for 3-phase circuits)

For use on contactor Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Reference Weight kg
5
LA1 SK10 LC1 SK06 clip-on front mounting 1 1 1 1 LA1 SK10 LA1 SK01 0.022 0.022
6 7 8 9 10
Nota : Auxiliary contact blocks and coil suppressor module, see next page. (1) For use in AC-3 category and 3-phase circuits, an LA1 SKpp auxiliary contact block should be ordered separately for mounting on the contactor. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (variable delivery times, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Mini-contactors LC1 SK
Volts a 50/60 Hz Code 24 B7 12 JD 48 E7 24 BD 110 F7 36 CD 120 G7 48 ED 220 M7 72 SD 230 P7 240 U7 380 Q7 400 V7
Mini-contactors LP1 SK
Volts c Code
Schemes: page 5/37
5/34
References
TeSys contactors
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and coil suppressor modules
511133

Clip-on front mounting
For use on contactor Maximum number of blocks per contactor 1 Composition Reference Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC1SK06 LA1SK11
2 1
2 1
LA1SK20 LA1SK02 LA1SK11
kg 0.022 0.022 0.022
Coil suppressor modules

511134
Clip-on fixing and electrical connection on right-hand side, without use oftools
For use on contactors Type For voltages Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight kg 0.003
LA4SKp1p
LC1SK06 and Varistor (1) LP1SK06
a and c 10 LA4SKE1E 24 V48 V a and c 10 LA4SKE1U 0.003 110 V250 V Diode (2) c 10 LA4SKC1U 0.003 24 V250 V (1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
Schemes: page 5/37
5/35
TeSys contactors
Dimensions
1 2
Mini-contactors
LC1 and LP1SK06
84,5 55,5 27
LA1 SK (1)
LA4 SK
3,5
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(1) Only on LC1SK06.
Mounting
Mini-contactors
LC1 and LP1SK06 On mounting rail AM1DP200 or AM1DE200 (7 35 mm)
55,5
27
56
56
Schemes: page 5/37
5/36
Schemes
TeSys contactors
Schemes
2-pole mini-contactors
LC1 and LP1SK06
1/L1 3/L2
1 2
1 pole + 1 N/C aux. LA1SK01
21/NC 5/L3
A2
A1
T1/2
Add-on power pole block

1 pole + 1 N/O aux. LA1SK10
13/NO 5/L3
T2/4
3 4
1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1SK11
33/NO 41/NC
14
T3/6

2 N/O LA1SK20
33/NO 43/NO
2 N/C LA1SK02
31/NC 41/NC
T3/6
22
5 6 7 8 9 10
34
32
34
44
42
Schemes: page 5/37
42
5/37
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Mini-contactors TeSys LC1 SKGC, for use in modular panels
Environment
1 2 3 4
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection
Conforming to IEC 60947, VDE 0110 gr C, BS 5424, CSA 22-2 n 14, UL 508
690 IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424 UL, CSA
Conforming to IEC 60068 (DIN 50015) Conforming to VDE 0106
TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct finger contact
Ambient air temperature around the device Storage Operation Maximum operating altitude Operating position Without derating
C C m
- 50+ 70 - 20+ 50 2000 Vertical axis Horizontal axis
Without derating Cabling, connectors Min. 1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5 1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35 0.8
Without derating Max. 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5 1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5
5
Tightening torque Terminal referencing
Solid conductor Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Pozidriv n 1 head
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
Conforming to standards En 50005
6 7 8 9 10
References : pages 5/42 and 5/43 Dimensions : page 5/44 Schemes : page 5/45
5/38
TeSys contactors
Mini-contactor type Conventional For ambient temperature y 55 C thermal current (Ith) Rated operational frequency Frequency limit of the operational current Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity (for Ue y 400V) Permissible short time rating Short-circuit protection Average impedance per pole Maximum rated operational current A Hz Hz V I rms conforming to NF C 63-110 and IEC60947 Conforming to NF C 63-110 and IEC 60947 (I rms) In free air for a time t from cold state (q y 55 C) gl fuse U y 440 V At Ith and 50 Hz For temperature y 55 C AC-3 (Ue y 400 V) AC-1 A A A A mW A A A LC1 SKGC2 20 50/60 up to 400 690 50 40 40 20 4 5 20 32 85 68 60 20 4 9 20 32 LC1 SKGC3 and LC1 SKGC4 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Use in category AC-1 resistive circuits, heating, lighting (Ue y 440 V) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Increase in rated operational current by paralleling of 2poles
Auxiliary contact characteristics of mini-contactors

Up to Conforming to IEC 60947, BS 5424, VDE0110 group C, CSA C 22-2 n 14 For ambient temperature y 55 C V V A Hz 690 690 10 Up to 400
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Frequency of the operational current Short-circuit protection
Conforming to IEC 60947 and A 10 VDE 0660, gl fuse Operational power of contacts a.c. supply, category AC-15 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating conforming to IEC 60947 cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10times the power broken (cos j 0.4). V 24 48 17 7 1000 48 96 34 14 2050 110/ 127 240 86 36 5000 220/ 230 440 158 66 10000 380/ 400 800 288 120 14000 440 880 317 132 13000
d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 52 28 8 300 440 51 26 7 230
VA VA VA VA
Schemes : page 5/45
5/39
TeSys contactors

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Mini-contactor type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits (q y 55 C) Operation For drop-out
LC1 SKGC2 a 24400
LC1 SKGC3 and LC1 SKGC4
0.851.1 Uc 0.20 Uc VA VA W 16 4.2 1.4 23 4.9 1.5
Average coil consumption at 20 C and at Uc Inrush Sealed Heat dissipation Operating time at 20 C and at Uc Between coil opening of the N/C contacts energisation and closing of the N/O contacts Between coil de-energisation and Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability at Uc in millions of operating cycles opening of the N/O contacts closing of the N/C contacts In operating cycles per hour 50/60 Hz coil
ms ms ms ms
816 714 68 810 1200 10
Schemes : page 5/45
5/40
Contactor selection according to required electrical durability

TeSys contactors
5

Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current of the motor.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 30 40 Current broken in A
1
2 1,5 1,2 1 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 220/380/415 V 500 V 220/230 V 380/400 V 415 V 2 2,5 2 1,1 1,1 3 2,5
4 3 1,1 1,5 1,5
5 4 2,2 2,2
6 5 1,5 3 3
7 6
9 7
A A
0,55 0,75
2,2 kW 4 kW 4 kW
Current broken in A
1 LC1 SKGC2 2 LC1 SKGC3 and SKGC4 - - - - - only up to 415 V

Control of resistive circuits (cos j u 0.95). The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load.
10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2 0,15 0,1
9 10
Schemes : page 5/45
5/41
References
TeSys contactors
1
511135
b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or fixing by four 4 screws, except for LC1 SKGC200. b Connection by connectors. b Mini-contactor fitted with transparent, sealable protective cover to prevent front face access.
Mini-contactors, width 27 mm
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 415 V 690 V kW kW kW Rated operational current in AC-3 up to 400 V A 5 Non inductive No. of poles loads category AC-1 maximum current q y 50 C A 20 2 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Weight
2 3 4
LC1 SKGC400 LC1 SKGC200
511136
LC1 SKGC200pp
kg 0.132
Mini-contactors, width 45 mm
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 415 V 690 V kW 1.1 kW 4 kW 4 Rated operational current in AC-3 up to 400 V A 9 Non inductive No. of poles loads category AC-1 maximum current q y 50 C A 20 3 1 Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Weight
LC1 SKGC310pp
kg 0.175
LC1 SKGC301pp
0.175
5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 5/38 to 5/41 Dimensions : page 5/44 Schemes : page 5/45
LC1 SKGC400pp
0.175
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office) Volts a 50/60 Hz Code 24 B7 48 E7 110 F7 120 G7 220 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380 Q7 400 V7
5/42
References
TeSys contactors
Suppressor modules
511134
Suppressor modules
For use on contactors LA4 SKp1p LC1 SKGC
Connection without need for tools by clipping onto right-hand side of contactor
Type Varistor (1) For voltages a and c 2448 V Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference LA4 SKE1E Weight kg 0.003
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
a and c 110250 V
10
LA4 SKE1U
0.003
Diode (2)
c 24250 V
10
LA4 SKC1U
0.003
(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
Schemes : page 5/45
5/43
TeSys contactors
5
Dimensions
Mounting
27
On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm) 55,5 27
1 2
Mini-contactors LC1 SKGC2 55,5
LA4 SK
3,5
3 4
Dimensions
Mini-contactors LC1 SKGC3 and SKGC4 56 45
56
Mounting
On panel On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm) 56 45
48-50
58
56
LA4 SK
5 6 7 8 9 10
34-35
Schemes : page 5/45
5/44
58
Schemes
TeSys contactors
LC1 SKGC2
1/L1 A1 3/L2
1 2
A2
T1/2
LC1 SKGC310
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13/NO A1
T2/4
LC1 SKGC301
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21/NC
3 4 5
A2
A2
A1
14
T1/2
T2/4
LC1 SKGC400
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 A1 7/L4
A2
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
T4/8
T3/6
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
22
6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 5/38 to 5/41 References : pages 5/42 and 5/43 Schemes : page 5/45
5/45
Selection guide
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
Applications
All types of control system
1 2
Rated operational current le max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) le AC-1 (q y 60 C) 9A 20/25 A 12 A 18 A 25/32 A 25 A 25/40 A 32 A 50 A 38 A
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
690 V on a and c
Number of poles
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
Rated operational power in AC-3
220/240 V 380/400 V 415/440 V 500 V 660/690 V 1000 V
2.2 kW 4 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW 5.5 kW
3 kW 5.5 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 7.5 kW
4 kW 7.5 kW 9 kW 10 kW 10 kW
5.5 kW 11 kW 11 kW 15 kW 15 kW
7.5 kW 15 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW
9 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW
Auxiliary contacts
1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range comprising up to 4 N/C or N/O instantaneous, up to 1 N/O + 1 N/C time delay and up to 2 N/O or 2 N/C protected contacts and 2 screen continuity terminals. Class 10 A Class 20 0.1010 A 2.510 A 0.1013 A 2.513 A 0.1018 A 2.518 A 0.1032 A 2.532 A 0.1038 A 0.1038 A
Thermal overload relays manual-auto compatible
Suppressor modules (c and low consumption contactors are fitted with a built-in bidirectional peak limiting diode suppressior as standard) Interfaces
Varistor Diode RC circuit Bidirectional peak limiting diode Relay output Relay interface with manual override switch
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
a or c coils, 3 pole a or c coils, 4 pole
LC1 D09 LC1 DT20/ LC1 D098
LC1 D12 LC1 DT25/ LC1 D128 LC2 D12 LC2 D12 LC2 DT25 LC2 DT25
LC1 D32
LC1 D38
Reversing contactor type references
a coils, 3 pole c coils, 3 pole a coils, 4 pole c coils, 4 pole
LC2 D09 LC2 D09 LC2 DT20 LC2 DT20
LC2 D32 LC2 D32
LC2 D38 LC2 D38
Pages
5/62 to 5/67 5/72 to 5/75
10
5/46
1 2
40 A 60 A 50 A 80 A 65 A 80 A 125 A 95 A 115 A 200 A 150 A
690 V a or c
1000 V on a, 690 V on c
3
3 4 3
11 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 22 kW 30 kW
15 kW 22 kW 25/30 kW 30 kW 33 kW
18.5 kW 30 kW 37 kW 37 kW 37 kW
22 kW 37 kW 45 kW 55 kW 45 kW 45 kW
25 kW 45 kW 45 kW 55 kW 45 kW 45 kW
30 kW 55 kW 59 kW 75 kW 80 kW 75 kW
40 kW 75 kW 80 kW 90 kW 100 kW 90 kW
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range comprising up to 4 N/C or N/O instantaneous, up to 1 N/O + 1 N/C time delay and up to 2 N/O or 2 N/C protected contacts and 2 screen continuity terminals.
940 A 940 A
950 A 950 A
965 A 965 A
17104 A 1780 A
17104 A
60150 A 60150 A
60150 A 60150 A
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
LC1 D40A LC1 DT60A
LC1 D50A
LC1 D65A LC1 DT80A
LC1 D80 LC1 D80
LC1 D95
LC1 D115 LC1 D115
LC1 D150
LC2 D40A LC2 D40A
LC2 D50A LC2 D50A
LC2 D65A LC2 D65A
LC2 D80 LC2 D80
LC2 D95
LC2 D115 LC2 D115
LC2 D150
5/62 to 5/67 5/72 to 5/75
5/47
Selection guide
TeSys contactors
TeSys D low consumption contactors
Applications
Automation systems
1 2
Rated operational current le max AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) le AC-1 (q y 60 C) 9A 20/25 A 12 A 20/25 A 18 A 25/32 A
3 4 5
690 V
Number of poles
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
Rated operational power in AC-3
220/240 V 380/400 V 415/440 V 500 V 660/690 V
2.2 kW 4 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW 5.5 kW
3 kW 5.5 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 7.5 kW
4 kW 7.5 kW 9 kW 10 kW 10 kW
Coil consumption
2.4 W (100 mA - 24 V) 0.71.25 Uc
6 7 8 9 10
Operating ranges
Operating time at 20 C and at Uc
Closing Opening
70 ms 25 ms
1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range, comprising up to 2 N/C or 2 N/O instantaneous standard contacts Built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode
Interference suppression
Contactor type
3-pole 4-pole
LC1 D09 LC1 DT20/D098 LC2 D09 LC2 DT20

5/62 to 5/67 5/72 to 5/75
Reversing contactor type
3-pole 4-pole
Pages
(1) With low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83). (2) With 2 low consumption kits LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).
5/48
1 2
25 A 25/40 A 32 A 50 A 38 A 50 A 40 A 60 A 50 A 65 A 80 A
690 V
690 V
3
3 3
3 or 4
5.5 kW 11 kW 11 kW 15 kW 15 kW
7.5 kW 15 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW
9 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW
11 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW 22 kW 30 kW
15 kW 22 kW 25/30 kW 30 kW 33 kW
18.5 kW 30 kW 37 kW 37 kW 37 kW
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2.4 W (100 mA - 24 V) 0.71.25 Uc
0.6 W (25 mA - 24 V) for relay LA4 DFB + the power consumed by the contactor coil
70 ms 25 ms
1 N/C and 1 N/O instantaneous contacts incorporated in the contactors, with add-on blocks common to the whole range, comprising up to 2 N/C or 2 N/O instantaneous standard contacts Built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode

5/62 to 5/67 5/72 to 5/75
LC1 D32
LC1 D38
LC1 D40A (1)
LC1 D50A (1) LC2 D50A (2)
LC1 D65A (1) LC2 D65A (2)
LC2 D32
LC2 D38
LC2 D40A (2)
5/49
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
Contactor type
LC1
1 2 3 4 5 6
D09D18 DT20 and DT25 V V kV 690 600 6
D25D38 DT32 and DT40
D40AD65A DT60A and DT80A
D80D95
D115 and D150
Environment
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1, overvoltage category III, degree of pollution: 3 Conforming to UL, CSA
1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection (2) (front face only)
Conforming to IEC 60947
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n14. UL, CSA (1), CCC, GOST GL, DNV, RINA, BV, LROS (LROS pending for contactors LC1 D40A to D65A) Conforming to VDE 0106 and IEC 60529 Power circuit connections Coil connection Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X TH C C C m - 60+ 80 - 5+ 60 - 40+ 70, for operation at Uc 3000 a/c a c
Conforming to IEC 60068-2-30 Storage Operation Permissible
Maximum operating altitude Operating positions (3)
Without derating Without derating in the following positions
180
Positions that are not permissible
For c contactors LC1 D09 to LC1 D65A.
7
Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 C V1 850 10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn 4 gn 4 gn 3 gn 4 gn 8 gn 15 gn 10 gn 15 gn 8 gn 10 gn 6 gn 15 gn
8 9 10
Shock resistance (4) 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms
Contactor open Contactor closed
Vibration resistance (4) 5300 Hz
Contactor open Contactor closed
(1) Contactor LC1 D95 with d.c. coil is not UL/CSA certified. (2) Protection provided for the cabling c.s.a.'s indicated on the next page and for connection by cable. (3) When mounting on a vertical rail, use a stop. (4) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction (coil energised at Ue).
5/50
90
90
180
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
Contactor type
LC1
D09 D18 and D12 (3P) DT20 and DT25
D25 (3P)
D32
D38
D18 and D25 (4P) DT32 and DT40
D40A to D80 D65A and D95 DT60A and DT80A (1)
D115 and D150
1 2 3 4 5
Power circuit connections

Tightening Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Screwdriver Hexagonal key Tightening torque
Screw clamp terminal connections

Screw clamp terminals 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors Philips Flat screwdriver N.m mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 1.56 2.510 1.56 2.510 16 14 110 1.56 Connector 2 inputs 2.510 2.510 2.510 2.510 2.516 2.516 N 2 6 1.8 Screw clamp terminals 135 Connector 1 input 450 Connector 2 inputs 10120 10120 + 1050 10120 10120 + 1050 10120 10120 + 1050 4 12
125 425 and 135 135 450 125 416 and 135 135 450 125 425 and 135 4 6 8 4
1.56 1.510 1.56 2.510 N 2 6 1.7 N 2 6 2.5
5: 9 y 25 mm2 8: 35 mm2
Spring terminal connections (2)

Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 2.5 4 (4: DT25) 2.5 (except DT25) mm mm Philips Flat screwdriver Key for hexagonal headed screw Tightening torque N.m 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 4 4 4 4 4 10

Bar c.s.a. Lug external of screw Screwdriver 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 10 M4 N 2 6 2.5 10 M4 N 2 6 2.5 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.8 16.5 M6 10 6 3 x 16 17 M6 8 10 9 5 x 25 25 M8 13 12
6 7 8 9 10
Control circuit connections

Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Screwdriver Tightening torque
Connection by cable (tightening via screw clamps)

1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors Philips Flat screwdriver N.m mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 14 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 14 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 14 14 12.5 12.5 14 14 N 2 6 1.7 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 N 2 6 1.2
12.5 12.5
Spring terminal connections (2)

Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 0.752.5 0.752.5

Lug external of screw Screwdriver Tightening torque Philips Flat screwdriver N.m mm mm 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.7 8 M3.5 N 2 6 1.2
(1) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85). (2) If cable ends are used, choose the next size down (example: for 2.5 mm2, use 1.5 mm2) and square crimp the cable ends using a special tool.
5/51
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
Contactor type
LC1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
D09 (3P) A A V Hz A A A A A A A 9 25 (1) 690 25400 25 (1) 250 250 210 105 61 30 25 20
DT20 D098
D12 (3P) 12
DT25 D128
D18 (3P) 18
DT32 D188
D25 (3P) 25
DT40 D258
Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue y 440 V) Frequency limits Conventional thermal current (Ith)
In AC-3, q y 60 C In AC-1, q y 60 C Up to Of the operational current q y 60 C Conforming to IEC 60947 For 1 s For 10 s For 1 min For 10 min Without thermal overload relay, gG fuse
20
25 (1) 690 25400
25
32 (1) 690 25400
32
40 (1) 690 25400
40
Rated operational voltage (Ue)
20
25 (1) 250 250 210 105 61 30 40 25
25
32 (1) 300 300 240 145 84 40 50 35
32
40 (1) 450 450 380 240 120 50 63 40
40
Rated making capacity (440 V) Permissible short time rating No current flowing for preceding 15 minutes with q y 40 C
Rated breaking capacity (440 V) Conforming to IEC 60947
Fuse protection against short-circuits (U y 690 V)
type 1 A type 2 A A mW W W
With thermal overload relay Average impedance per pole Power dissipation per pole for the above operational currents At Ith and 50 Hz AC-3 AC-1
See pages 6/20 and 6/21, for aM or gG fuse ratings corresponding to the associated thermal overload relay 2.5 0.20 1.56 2.5 0.36 1.56 2.5 0.8 2.5 2 1.25 3.2
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits 50 or 60 Hz coils 50/60 Hz coils
Control circuit characteristics, a.c. supply

50/60 Hz Operation Drop-out Operation Drop-out
12690 0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and 0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 60 C 0.30.6 Uc at 60 C
Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc
a 50 Hz Inrush
50 Hz coil Cos j 50/60 Hz coil
VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA W ms ms
0.75 70 0.3 7 0.75 70 0.3 7.5 23 1222 419 15 3600
Sealed
a 60 Hz Inrush
Sealed
Heat dissipation
50/60 Hz Closing "C" Opening "O" 50 or 60 Hz coil 50/60 Hz coil on 50 Hz In operating cycles per hour
8 9 10
Operating time (2) Mechanical durability in millions of operating cycles Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature y 60 C
(1) Versions with spring terminal connections: 16 A for LC1 D093 and LC1 D123 (20 A possible with 2 x 2.5 mm2 in parallel), 25 A for LC1 D183 to LC1 D323 (32 A possible for LC1 D183 connected with 2 x 4 mm2 cables in parallel; 40 A possible for LC1 D253 and LC1D323 connected with 2 x 4 mm2 in parallel). (2) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to closure of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
5/52
D32
D38
D40A
DT60A
D50A
D65A
DT80A
D80
D95
D115
D150
32 50 (1) 690 25400 50 550 550 430 260 138 60 63 63
38 50 690 25400 50 550 550 430 310 150 60 63 63
40 60 690 25400 60 800 800 720 320 165 72 80 80
60 690 25400 60 800 800 720 320 165 72 80 80
50 80 690 25400 80 900 900 810 400 208 84 100 100
65 80 690 25400 80 1000 1000 900 520 260 110 125 125
80 690 25400 80 1000 1000 900 520 260 110 125 125
80 125 1000 25400 125 1100 1100 990 640 320 135 200 160
95 125 1000 25400 125 1100 1100 1100 800 400 135 200 160
115 200 1000 25400 200 1260 1100 1100 950 550 250 250 200
150 200 1000 25400 200 1660 1400 1400 1200 580 250 315 250
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
See pages 6/20 and 6/21 for aM or gG fuse ratings corresponding to the associated thermal overload relay 2 2 5 2 3 5 1.5 2.4 5.4 1.6 5.8 1.5 3.7 9.6 1.5 6.3 9.6 1.6 10.2 0.8 5.1 12.5 0.8 7.2 12.5 0.6 7.9 24 0.6 13.5 24
12690 0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and 0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 60 C 0.30.6 Uc at 60 C 0.75 70 0.3 7 0.75 70 0.3 7.5 23 1222 419 15 3600
12690 0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and 0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 60 C 0.30.6 Uc at 60 C 0.75 160 0.3 15 0.75 140 0.3 13 45 1226 419 6 3600 1226 419 6 3600 1226 419 6 3600 1226 419 6 3600 1226 419 6 3600 0.851.1 Uc at 55 C 0.30.6 Uc at 55 C 0.81.1 Uc on 50 Hz and 0.851.1 Uc on 60 Hz at 55 C 0.30.6 Uc at 55 C 200 0.75 245 20 0.3 26 220 0.75 245 22 0.3 26 610 2035 620 10 4 3600 2035 620 10 4 3600
24500
0.30.5 Uc at 55 C 0.81.15 Uc on 50/60 Hz at 55 C 0.30.5 Uc at 55 C 300 0.8 280350 22 0.3 218 300 0.8 280350 22 0.3 218 38 2050 620 8 8 2400 0.9 280350 0.9 218 0.9 280350 0.9 218 34.5 2035 4075 8 1200
5/53
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
Contactor type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC1 D09D38 LC1 DT20DT40
LC1 D40AD65A LC1 DT60A and DT80A 12440
LC1 or LP1 D80 LC1 D95
LC1 D115 and LC1 D150
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Rated insulation voltage
d.c. control circuit characteristics

c Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to UL, CSA
V V V
12440 690 600 0.71.25 Uc at 60 C 0.10.25 Uc at 60 C
24440
Control voltage limits
Operation
Standard coil Wide range coil
0.751.25 Uc at 60 C 0.10.3 Uc at 60 C 19 7.4 50 15% 20 20%
0.851.1 Uc at 55 C 0.751.2 Uc at 55 C 0.10.3 Uc at 55 C 22 22 95130 2035
0.751.2 Uc at 55 C 0.150.4 Uc at 55 C 270365 2.45.1 2035 4075
Drop-out Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc Operating time (1) average at Uc c Inrush Sealed Closing Opening "C" O W W ms ms
5.4 5.4 63 15 % 20 20 %
Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase applications, the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time. Time constant (L/R) Mechanical durability at Uc Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature y 60 C In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour ms 28 30 3600 34 10 3600 75 10 3600 25 8 1200
Rated insulation voltage
Low consumption control circuit characteristics

Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V Conforming to UL, CSA V V W W ms ms
690 600 250 2.4 2.4 77 15 % 25 20 % 0.8 to 1.25 Uc 0.10.3 Uc
Maximum voltage Average consumption d.c. at 20 C and at Uc Operating time (1) at Uc and at 20 C Voltage limits (q y 60 C) of the control circuit Time constant (L/R) Mechanical durability Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature y 60 C
Of the control circuit on c Wide range coil (0.71.25 Uc) Closing Opening Operation Drop-out Inrush Sealed "C" O
ms In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour
40 30 3600
(1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate
5/54
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
Mechanically linked contacts Mirror contact
Characteristics of auxiliary contacts incorporated in the contactor

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Up to Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to UL, CSA For ambient temperature y 60 C V V V A Hz V mA
Each contactor has 2 N/O and N/C contacts mechanically linked on the same movable contact holder
The N/C contact on each contactor represents the state of the power contacts and can be connected to a PREVENTA safety module 690 690 600 10 25400 17 5 gG fuse: 10 A A A A A MW a: 140, c: 250 100 120 140 > 10 1.5 (on energisation and on de-energisation) d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W
Millions of oprating cycles 10 8 6 4 3 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,3 0,2 0,1 0,1 440 V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith)
Frequency of the operational current Minimum switching capacity l = 108 Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Short-time rating U min I min Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, Irms Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms Insulation resistance Non-overlap time Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts
ms
Operational power of contacts conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4). V 24 60 16 4
10 8 6 4 3 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,3 0,2 0,1 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 0,8 0,4 0,6 1 5 8 4 6 10 Current broken in A 2 3
48 32 8
115 230 400 440 80 20 160 280 300 40 70 80
600 420 100
24 96 48 14
48 76 38 12
125 76 38 12
250 76 32
440 44
VA VA VA
Millions of oprating cycles
120 280 560 960 1050 1440
AC-15
DC-13
24 V 125 V 250 V 48 V
0,2 0,3 0,5 0,8 0,4 0,6 1
3 4
5 6
8 10
Current broken in A
8 9 10
5/55
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks without dust and damp protected contacts for TeSys D contactors
Contact block type
LAD N or LAD C
LAD T and LAD S
LAD R
LAD 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Connection by cable Spring terminal connections Conforming to IEC 60068 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Permissible for operation at Uc Without derating Phillips N 2 and 6 mm Flexible or solid cable with or without cable end Flexible or solid cable without cable end C C C m mm2 mm2
Environment
IEC 60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 4794, EN 60947-5-1 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X - 60+ 80 - 5+ 60 - 40+ 70 3000 Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5 Max: 2 x 2.5
Number of contacts
Instantaneous and time delay contact characteristics

Up to Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to UL, CSA For ambient temperature y 60 C V V V A Hz U min I min V mA A A A A A MW Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts on LAD C22 Ambient air temperature for operation Repeat accuracy Drift up to 0.5 million operating cycles Drift depending on ambient air temperature ms ms C 690 690 600 10
1, 2 or 4
Frequency of the operational current Minimum switching capacity
25400 17 5 10 a: 140; c: 250 100 120 140 > 10 1.5 (on energisation and on de-energisation) 1.5 30 See page 5/58 - 40+ 70 2% + 15 % 0.25 % per C 5 - 40+ 70 2% + 15 % 0.25 % per C 5 30
Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Short-time rating
Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 and VDE 0660. gG fuse Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Permissible for I rms 1s 500 ms 100 ms
Insulation resistance Non-overlap time Overlap time Time delay (LADT, R and S contact blocks) Accuracy only valid for setting range indicated on the front face
Mechanical durability Operational power of contacts
In millions of operating cycles
5/56
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp protected contacts for TeSys D contactors
Contact block type
LA1 DX
LA1 DZ Protected Non protected
LA1 DY
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature Cabling Number of contacts Conforming to IEC 60068 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage and operation Phillips N 2 and 6 mm Flexible or solid conductor with or without cable end C mm2
Environment
IEC 60947-5-1, VDE 0660 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X - 25+ 70 Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5 2 2 2 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contact characteristics
Up to
V V V A mA Hz U min I min V mA A A A A A MW
50 250 500 3 0.3 > 10 5
50 250 500 3 0.3 > 10 5
690 690 600 10 25400 17 5 10 a:140; c: 250 100 120 140 > 10 30
24 250 50 3 0.3 > 10 5 Gold - Single break with crossed bars
Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to UL, CSA For ambient temperature y 40 C
Maximum operational current (Ie) Frequency of the operational current Minimum switching capacity
Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Short-time rating
Conforming to IEC 609475-1 gG fuse Conforming to IEC 609475-1 Permissible for I rms 1s 500 ms 100 ms
Insulation resistance Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles
Materials and technology used for dust and damp protected contacts
Silver - Single break Silver - Single break
5/57
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp protected contacts for TeSys D contactors
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4).
V 1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles
Millions of oprating cycles 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
Rated operational power of contacts (conforming to IEC 60947-5-1)
24 60 16 4
48 120 32 8
115 280 80 20
230 560 160 40
400 960 280 70
440 1050 300 80
600 1440 420 100
VA VA VA
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
0,1 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9
Current broken in A
d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load.
V 1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles
Millions of operating cycles 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 250 V
24 120 70 25
48 90 50 18
125 75 38 14
250 68 33 12
440 61 28 10
W W W
24 V 48 V 125 V
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
440 V
0,1 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9
Current broken in A
5/58
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Control modules, coil suppressor modules and mechanical latch blocks for TeSys D contactors
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Conforming to IEC 60068 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Permissible for operation at Uc C C C
Environment
IEC 60947-5-1 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X 40+ 80 25+ 55 25+ 70
1 2
LA4 DC, LAD 4D3 Diode c 12250 Uc LA4 DE, LAD 4V, LAD 4V3 Varistor a or c 24250 2 Uc
Suppressor modules
Module type Type of protection Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Maximum peak voltage Natural RC frequency 24/48 V 50/127 V 110/240 V 380/415 V Hz Hz Hz Hz V
LA4 DA, LAD 4RC, LA4 DB, LAD 4T, LAD 4RC3 LAD 4T3 RC circuit a 24415 3 Uc 400 200 100 150 Bidirectional peak limiting diode a or c 24440 2 Uc
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Mechanical latch blocks

Mechanical latch block type For use on contactor Product certifications Rated insulation voltage Power required
(1)
LAD 6K10 LC1 D09D65A DT20DT80A UL, CSA LA6 DK20 LC1 D80D150 LP1 D80 and LC1 D115 UL, CSA 690 24415 25 30 1200 10 % 0.5
Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 For unlatching a c
V V VA W
690 24415 25 30 1200 10 %
Rated control circuit voltage a 50/60 Hz and c
Maximum operating rate On-load factor Mechanical durability at Uc
In operating cycles/hour
0.5
(1) Unlatching can be manually operated or electrically controlled (pulsed). The LA6 DK or LAD 6K latch coil and the LC1 D operating coil must not be energised simultaneously. The duration of the LA6 DK or LAD 6K and LC1 D control signals must be u 100 ms.
5/59
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Electronic serial timer module for TeSys D contactors
Module type
LA4 DT (On-delay) IEC 60255-5 UL, CSA Conforming to IEC 60068 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation For operation at Uc C C C V mm2 TH Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X 40+ 80 25+ 55 25+ 70 250 Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Cabling Phillips n 2 and 6 mm Flexible or solid conductor with or without cable end Of the input
Built-in protection

Contactor coil suppression
By varistor By varistor V a or c : 24250 0.81.1 Uc By mechanical contact only
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Permissible variation Type of control
Timing ranges
Timing characteristics
040 C During time delay period After time delay period
0.12; 1.530; 25500 3 % (10 ms minimum)
Repeat accuracy Reset time
ms ms ms ms ms
150 50 10 2 Illuminates during time delay period
Immunity to microbreaks
During time delay period After time delay period
Minimum control pulse duration Time delay signalling Maximum power dissipated Leakage current Residual voltage Overvoltage protection Electrical durability In millions of operating cycles By LED
Switching characteristics (solid state type)
W mA V
2 <5 3.3 3 kV; 0.5 joule 30
Function diagram
U supply (A1-A2) 1 0 Time delay output 1 Contactor coil 0 Red LED
Electronic on-delay timer LA4 DT
5/60
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Interface modules for TeSys D contactors
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Conforming to IEC 60068 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation Permissible for operation at Uc C C C
Environment
IEC 60255-5 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X 40+ 80 25+ 55 25+ 70 LA4 DFB With relay A V V 8 250 250 By integral LED which illuminates when the contactor coil is energised Control voltage (E1-E2) Permissible variation Current consumption at 20 C State 0 guaranteed for U I State 1 guaranteed for U V V mA V mA V c 24 1730 25 < 2.4 <2 17 By diode By diode 10 ms W a 24250 V a 100250 V a 380415 V 4 0.6 LC1 D80D150 LC1 D09D38, LC1 DT20DT40 LC1 D40AD65A LC1 D40AD65A c 24 530 8.5 for 5 V 15 for 24 V < 2.4 <2 5 By diode By diode 20 1 0.4 LC1 D80D115 LC1 D09D38, LC1 DT20DT40 LC1 D40AD65A LC1 D40AD65A LA4 DWB Solid state
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Module type Conventional thermal current (Ith) Rated insulation voltage Rated operational voltage Indication of input state Input signals For ambient temperature y 50 C Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
Built-in protection
Against reversed polarity Of the input
Electrical durability at 220 A/240 V
Maximum immunity to microbreaks Power dissipated Direct mounting on contactor At 20 C With coil
Mounting with cabling adapter LAD 4BB Mounting with cabling adapter LAD 4BB3 Total operating time at Uc (of the contactor)
With coil
a 24250 V a 380415 V
With coil
a 24250 V a 380415 V
The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate. LC1 D09D38, LC1 DT20DT40 With LA4 DFB "C" O ms ms mm2 2030 1624 Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5 LC1 D40AD65A 2834 2024 LC1 D80 and D95 2843 1832
Cabling
Phillips N 2 and 6 mm Flexible or solid cable with or without cable end
5/61
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors for motor control up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3
For connection by screw clamp terminals and lugs
526216
1 2 3
LC1 D25pp LC1 D09pp
526217
Rated operational current in AC-3 440 V 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 1000 V up to 230 V 400 V 690 V kW 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 25 30 40 kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 25 37 45 45 59 80 kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 45 59 80 kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 55 55 75 90 kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 18.5 30 33 37 45 45 80 100 kW 45 45 65 75 A 9 12 18 25 32 38 40 50 65 80 95 115 150
3-pole contactors
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 (q y 60 C)
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Fixing (1)
Weight (3)
kg 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC1 D09pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D18pp LC1 D25pp LC1 D32pp LC1 D38pp LC1 D40App (5) LC1 D50App (5) LC1 D65App (5) LC1 D80pp LC1 D95pp LC1 D115pp LC1 D150pp 0.320 0.325 0.330 0.370 0.375 0.380 0.850 0.855 0.860 1.590 1.610 2.500 2.500
Connection by screw clamp terminals
Power connections by EverLink BTR screw connectors (4) and control by spring terminals
4 5 6 7 8 9 10

526218
Connection by lugs or bars In the references selected above, insert a figure 6 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 D09pp becomes LC1 D096pp.
Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules: see pages 5/79 to 5/85.
LC1 D65App
526219
Separate components
(1) LC1 D09 to D65A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. LC1 D80 to D95 a: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC1 D80 to D95 c : clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC1 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
a.c. supply
Volts 50/60 Hz LC1 D80D115 50 Hz 60 Hz B5 B6 12 JD JD JW 5 AL D5 24 BD BD BW BD 12 JL E5 E6 36 CD CD CW 20 ZL F5 F6 48 ED ED EW ED 24 BL FE5 60 ND ND ND 48 EL M5 M6 72 SD SD SW SD 110 FL P5 110 FD FD FW FD 220 ML U5 U6 125 GD GD GD 250 UL Q5 Q6 220 MD MD MW MD V5 250 UD UD UD N5 440 RD RD RD R5 R6 S5 24 B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 115 FE7 220 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380 Q7 400 V7 415 N7 440 R7 500 S7 LC1 D09D150 (D115 and D150 coils with built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode).
d.c. supply
LC1 D95pp
526220
Volts U 0.751.25 Uc LC1 D80D95 U 0.851.1 Uc U 0.751.2 Uc U 0.751.2 Uc
LC1 D09D65A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
LC1 D115 and D150 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
Low consumption
Volts c U 0.81.25 Uc LC1 D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91. (3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg from LC1 D09 to D38, 0.075 kg from LC1 D40A to D65A and 1 kg for LC1 D80 and D95. (4) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85). (5) For low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83). Characteristics : pages 5/50 to 5/55 Dimensions : pages 5/92 to 5/95 Schemes : pages 5/96 and 5/97
LC1 D115pp
5/62
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors for motor control up to 30 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3

For connection by spring terminals
526221
Rated operational current in AC-3 440 V 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 1000 V up to 230 V 400 V 690 V kW LC1 D123pp 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 kW A 9 12 18 25 32 (4)
3-pole contactors
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 (q y 60 C)
Weight (3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
kg 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC1 D093pp LC1 D123pp LC1 D183pp LC1 D253pp LC1 D323pp 0.320 0.325 0.330 0.370 0.375
Power and control connections by spring terminals
11
526222
18.5 22 30
22 25 37
22 30 37
22 30 37
30 33 37
40 50 65
1 1 1
1 1 1
LC1 D40A3pp (6) LC1 D50A3pp (6) LC1 D65A3pp (6)
0.850 0.855 0.860
15 18.5
Connection by Faston connectors These contactors are fitted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil and auxiliary terminals. For contactors LC1 D09 and LC1 D12 only, replace the figure 3 with a 9 in the references selected above. Example: LC1 D093pp becomes LC1 D099pp.
LC1 D65A3pp (1) LC1 D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Separate components
a.c. supply
Volts LC1 D09D65A 50/60 Hz B7 12 JD 5 AL D7 24 BD 12 JL E7 36 CD 20 ZL F7 48 ED 24 BL FE7 60 ND 48 EL M7 72 SD 110 FL P7 110 FD 220 ML U7 125 GD 250 UL Q7 220 MD V7 250 UD N7 440 RD R7 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
d.c. supply
Volts U 0.751.25 Uc LC1 D09D65A (coils with built-in suppression as standard, by bi-directional peak limiting diode)
Low consumption
Volts c U 0.81.25 Uc LC1 D09...D32 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91. (3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg from LC1 D09 to D32 and 0.075 kg from LC1 D40A to D65A. (4) Must be wired with 2 x 4 mm2 cables in parallel on the upstream side. On the downstream side, outgoing terminal block LAD 331 may be used (Quickfit technology, see page 1/199). When wired with a single cable, the product is limited to 25 A (11 kW/400 V motors). (5) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85). (6) For low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).
5/63
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys D, 3-pole contactors
for control in category AC-1, from 25 to 200 A
526230
3-pole contactors
Non inductive loads maximum current (q y 60 C) utilisation category AC-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Number of poles
Weight (3)
LC1 D09pp
kg 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC1 D09pp or LC1 D12pp LC1 D18pp LC1 D25pp LC1 D32pp or LC1 D38pp 0.320 0.325 0.330 0.370 0.375 0.380

25 32 40 50
Connection by EverLink, BTR screw connectors (4)

60 80
526231
3 3
1 1
1 1
LC1 D40App (7) LC1 D50App (7) or LC1 D65App (5) (7)
0.850 0.855 0.860

125 200 3 3 1 1 1 1 LC1 D80pp or LC1 D95pp (5) LC1 D115pp or LC1 D150pp (6) 1.590 1.610 2.500 2.500
3-pole contactors for connection by lugs

In the references selected above, insert a figure 6 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 D09pp becomes LC1 D096pp.
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): LC1 D65App
a.c. supply
Volts 50/60 Hz LC1 D80...D150 50 Hz 60 Hz B5 B6 12 JD JD JW 5 AL D5 24 BD BD BW BD 12 JL E5 E6 36 CD CD CW 20 ZL F5 F6 48 ED ED EW ED 24 BL FE5 60 ND ND ND 48 EL M5 M6 72 SD SD SW SD 110 FL P5 110 FD FD FW FD 220 ML U5 U6 125 GD GD GD 250 UL Q5 Q6 220 MD MD MW MD V5 250 UD UD UD N5 440 RD RD RD R5 R6 S5 24 B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 115 FE7 220 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380 Q7 400 V7 415 N7 440 R7 500 LC1 D09...D150 (coils D115 and D150 fitted with integral suppression device as standard)
d.c. supply
Volts U 0.71.25 Uc LC1 or LP1 D80 and D95 U 0.851.1 Uc U 0.751.2 Uc U 0.751.2 Uc LC1 D09...D65A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
Low consumption
Volts c U 0.81.25 Uc LC1 D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91. (2) LC1 D09 to D65A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. LC1 D80 and D95 a: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC1 or LP1 D80 to D95 c: clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC1 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing. (3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg from LC1 D09 to D38, 0.075 kg from LC1 D40A to D65A and 1 kg for LC1 D80 and D95. (4) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85). (5) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve, page 5/198. (6) 32 A with 2 x 4 mm2 cables connected in parallel. (7) For low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83). Selection : pages 5/194 to 5/225 Characteristics : pages 5/50 to 5/55 Dimensions : pages 5/92 to 5/95 Schemes : pages 5/96 and 5/97
5/64
TeSys contactors
For control in category AC-1, 25 to 200 A
526232
These contactors are fitted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil terminals. For contactors LC1 D09 and LC1 D12 only, in the references selected from the previous page, insert a figure 9 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 D09pp becomes LC1 D099pp.
3-pole contactors for connection by Faston connectors
1 2 3 4 5
3-pole contactors
Number of poles
Weight (3)
LC1 D123pp
kg 3 3 1 1 1 1 LC1 D093pp (4) or LC1 D123pp (4) LC1 D183pp (5) or LC1 D253pp (6) or LC1 D323pp (6) 0.320 0.325 0.335 0.325 0.325

16 25
526233
60 80
3 3
1 1
1 1
LC1 D40A3pp (9) LC1 D50A3pp (8) (9) or LC1 D65A3pp (8) (9)
0.850 0.855 0.860
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Separate components
a.c. supply
Volts LC1 D09...D65A 50/60 Hz B7 12 JD 5 AL D7 24 BD 12 JL E7 36 CD 20 ZL F7 48 ED 24 BL FE7 60 ND 48 EL M7 72 SD 110 FL P7 110 FD 220 ML U7 125 GD 250 UL Q7 220 MD V7 250 UD N7 440 RD R7 S7 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
d.c. supply
LC1 D65A3pp Volts U 0.751.25 Uc LC1 D09...D65A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
6 7 8 9 10
Low consumption
Volts c U 0.81.25 Uc LC1 D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91. (2) LC1 D09 to D65A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. (3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg from LC1 D09 to D38 and 0.075 kg from LC1 D40A to D65A. (4) 20 A with 2 x 2.5 mm2 cables connected in parallel. (5) 32 A with 2 x 4 mm2 cables connected in parallel. (6) 40 A with 2 x 4 mm2 cables connected in parallel. (7) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85). (8) Selection according to the number of operating cycles, see AC-1 curve, page 5/198. (9) For low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).
5/65
TeSys contactors
526227
4-pole contactors for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

Non inductive loads maximum current (q y 60 C) utilisation category AC-1 Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (1) Fixing (2)
1 2
LC1 DT20pp
Weight (3)
kg 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC1 DT20pp LC1 D098pp LC1 DT25pp LC1 D128pp LC1 DT32pp LC1 D188pp LC1 DT40pp LC1 D258pp LC1 DT60App LC1 DT80App LC1 D40008pp or LP1 D40008pp LC1 D65008pp or LP1 D65008pp LC1 D80004pp or LP1 D80004pp 2 LC1 D80008pp or LP1 D80008pp LC1 D115004pp 0.365 0.365 0.365 0.365 0.425 0.425 0.425 0.425 1.090 1.150 1.440 2.210 1.450 2.220 1.760 2.685 1.840 2.910 2.860

20 25
3
526228
32 40
Connection by EverLink, BTR screw connectors

60 80 60 80 125 4 4 2 2 4
4 5
LC1 DT80App
200
526229
6 7
In the references selected above, insert a figure 6 before the voltage code. Example: LC1 DT20pp becomes LC1 DT206pp.
4-pole contactors for connection by lugs or bars
a.c. supply
Volts 50/60 Hz LC1 D80...D115 50 Hz 60 Hz B5 B6 12 JD JD JW 5 AL D5 24 BD BD BW BD 12 JL E5 E6 36 CD CD CW 20 ZL F5 F6 48 ED ED EW ED 24 BL FE5 60 ND ND ND 48 EL M5 M6 72 SD SD SW SD 110 FL P5 110 FD FD FW FD 220 ML U5 U6 125 GD GD GD 250 UL Q5 Q6 220 MD MD MW MD V5 250 UD UD UD N5 440 RD RD RD R5 R6 S5 24 B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 115 FE7 220 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380 Q7 400 V7 415 N7 440 R7 500 LC1 D09...D150 and LC1 DT20...DT80A (coils D115 and D150 fitted with integral suppression device as standard)
d.c. supply
LC1 D65008pp Volts U 0.71.25 Uc LC1 or LP1 D80 U 0.851.1 Uc U 0.751.2 Uc U 0.751.2 Uc
8 9 10
LC1 D09...D65A and LC1 DT20...DT80A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
LC1 D115 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
Low consumption
Volts c U 0.81.25 Uc LC1 D09...D38 and LC1 DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91. (2) LC1 D09 to D38 and LC1 DT20 to DT80A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. LC1 D80 a: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC1 or LP1 D80 c: clip-on mounting on 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC1 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing. (3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg from LC1 D09 to D38, 0.075 kg from LC1 DT60A and D80A and 1 kg for LC1 D80. Characteristics : pages 5/50 to 5/55 Dimensions : pages 5/92 to 5/95 Schemes : pages 5/96 and 5/97
5/66
TeSys contactors
4-pole contactors
Number of poles
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Fixing (2)
Weight (3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
kg 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC1 DT203pp LC1 D0983pp LC1 DT253pp LC1 D1283pp LC1 DT323pp LC1 D1883pp LC1 DT403pp LC1 D2583pp 0.380 0.380 0.380 0.380 0.425 0.425 0.425 0.425

20 25 32 40
Connection by by EverLink, BTR screw connectors and control circuit by spring terminals
60 80 4 4 1 1 1 1 LC1 DT60A3pp LC1 DT80A3pp 1.090 1.150
Separate components
a.c. supply
Volts 50/60 Hz 24 B7 12 JD 5 AL 42 D7 24 BD 12 JL 48 E7 36 CD 20 ZL 110 F7 48 ED 24 BL 115 FE7 60 ND 48 EL 220 M7 72 SD 110 FL 230 P7 110 FD 220 ML 240 U7 125 GD 250 UL 380 Q7 220 MD 400 V7 250 UD 415 N7 440 RD 440 R7 500 LC1 D09...D25 and LC1 DT20...DT80A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
d.c. supply
Volts U 0.71.25 Uc LC1 D09...D25 and LC1 DT20...DT80A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
Low consumption
Volts c U 0.81.25 Uc LC1 D09...D25 and LC1 DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91. (2) LC1 D09 to D38 and LC1 DT20 to DT80A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1DP or screw fixing. (3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.160 kg from LC1 D09 to D38, 0.075 kg for LC1 DT60A and DT80A.
5/67
Presentation
TeSys contactors
conforming to UL and CSA
for the North American market,
1
1
In recent years, the North American market has started to harmonise UL, CSA and ANCE standards, as well as the industrial installation codes provided by national regulations (NEC for the United States, CEC for Canada and MEC for Mexico). (1) Major improvements, carried out by the Canena (2) are aimed at harmonising product requirements based on IEC (3) standards. However, the North American codes use specific terminology for defining the functions of a starter. These functions can be fulfilled by standard IEC products, accompanied by appropriate certifications.
Starters for the North American market
2 3
M
2 3 4
Combination Starters are the most common type of packaged motor starter. They are called "Combination" because of their structure and their combined functions. The figure opposite shows the four combined functions that constitute a complete motor starter circuit, defined as a Motor branch circuit by the NEC (US National Electric Code) in article 430. Standard UL508 currently gives different types of combination starter that meet the requirements of a "Motor branch circuit". TypeE, called self-protected combination starter, covers all these functions and can be controlled manually (thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker) or remotely (starter-controller). Type E starters withstand faults within their declared nominal rating without sustaining damage, after which they can be put back into service. In addition, they can withstand more severe short-circuit and durability performance tests without welding or excessive wear of the contact tips. TypeF, called Combination motor starter, consists of a type E manual starter (thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker) combined with a contactor. These starters are evaluated by means of basic short-circuit tests, but are not considered as self-protected. For this combination, the type E starter must be marked Combination Motor Controller when used with ..., followed by the reference of the load side contactor.
(1) UL: Underwriters Laboratories, CSA: Canadian Standards Association, ACNE: Association of Standardization and Certification, NEC: National Electric Code, CEC: Canadian Electrical Code, MEC: Mexican Electrical Code. (2) Canena: Council for Harmonization of Electrotechnical Standardization of North America. (3) IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission.
Combination Starters
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1Motor Disconnect (Disconnect switch) 2Motor Branch Circuit Protection (Short-circuit protection) 3Motor Controller (Contactor) 4Motor Overload Protection (Thermal overload relay)
5/68
TeSys contactors
Control panels
To help users properly coordinate their motor control equipment with their distribution system in the event of a fault, article409 of the 2005 NECrequires panel builders to list the short-circuit withstand rating of their motor control panels. According to standard UL508A, manufacturers must use the short-circuit withstand value of the lowest rated device as the nominal withstand rating of the panel, unless the devices have been tested together for a higher coordinated rating. The minimum short-circuit current rating (SCCR), on motor control components for horsepower ratings of 50 hp or below is 5 000A. Using a typeE or typeF combination starter eliminates the coordination problems of using individual components for the motor branch circuit protection, motor controller and motor overload protection functions. The panel builder uses the declared short-circuit current rating for the combination starter. This value is generally higher than 5 000A. This makes it easier to list the short-circuit current ratings and to check the compatibility of a UL508A motor control panel within a given distribution system.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5/69
TeSys contactors
Group protection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Article 430.53 of the NEC allows a single short-circuit protection device to be used for more than one motor circuit if the components used are marked and listed for such use. Components suitable for use in group protection, known as motor group installations, can be marked in one of the following two ways: Case n 1 The contactor and the motor overload relay are both listed as suitable for group installation. An inverse time circuit-breaker can be used as the short-circuit protection device if it is also listed as suitable for group installation. The panel builder must therefore make sure that the short-circuit protection device selected (fuses or inverse time circuit-breaker) does not exceed the value allowed by article 430.40 for the smallest overload relay used in the circuit. Once these conditions have been met, the panel builder can reduce the size of the conductor connecting the short-circuit protection device to the individual motor contactor/overload relay, to one third of the size of the upstream circuit conductor supplying the protection device. The panel builder must limit the length of the motor starter conductor (connecting the short-circuit protection device to the motor contactor/overload relay) to a maximum of 7.6m (25 feet). Case n 2 The motor contactor and overload relay are listed as suitable for tap conductor protection in group installations. This category allows the panel designer to reduce the size of the conductor connecting the short-circuit protection device to the individual motor contactor/overload relay, to one tenth of the size of the upstream circuit conductor supplying the protection device. The designer must limit the length of this conductor to a maximum of 3.05m (10feet). In both cases, the supply circuits must not be less than 125 % of the connected motor FLA (Full Load Amps) rating. For panel builders, using typeF combination starters in group installations simplifies group motor considerations. Each starter is a fully coordinated motor branch circuit. The panel builder follows the same NEC requirements for sizing the supply conductors as those required for single motor branch circuits. The size of the supply conductors can be reduced in accordance with the specifications of article 430.28. This allows the same flexibility in conductor sizing as that offered in article 430.53 (D), without a requirement to check the short-circuit protection rating marked on the components and the overload relay limit. A UL508A panel does not need a short-circuit protection device when each motor starter installed is a type F. The upstream short-circuit protection device supplying the starter protects the panel. The panel builder only has to consider the panel/enclosure disconnect requirements specified by the NEC or local codes.
5/70
Reference
TeSys contactors
conforming to UL and CSA standards, 20 to 200
Contactors
Single-phase 1 115 V HP LC1 D09pp 0.5 1 1 2 2 230 V 240 V HP 1 2 3 3 5
526168
Standard power ratings of motors 50/60 Hz 3-phase 3 200 V 208 V HP 2 3 5 5 7.5 230 V 240 V HP 2 3 5 7.5 10 460 V 480 V HP 5 7.5 10 15 20 575 V 600 V HP 7.5 10 15 20 30
Size
Associated Continuous Type of contactor required cable current Basic reference, type to be completed (1) 75 C-Cu Fixing, connection (2) A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

00 0 0 1 1 AWG10 AWG10 AWG8 AWG6 AWG6 20 25 32 40 50 LC1 D09pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D18pp LC1 D25pp LC1 D32pp
526169
3 3 5 LC1 D25pp 5 7.5 10 10 15 20 10 15 20 30 40 40 30 40 50 2 2 2 AWG3 AWG3 AWG3 60 70 80 LC1 D40App LC1 D50App LC1 D65App

7.5 7.5 15 15 25 25 30 40 30 30 40 50 60 60 75 100 60 60 100 125 2 2 3 4 AWG2 AWG2 AWG2/0 AWG3/0 110 110 175 200 LC1 D80pp LC1 D95pp LC1 D115pp LC1 D150pp
For contactors LC1 D40A to LC1 D65A, the High-Fault Short-Circuit ratings are 50 kA at 480 V and 25 kA at 600 V.
Applications with High-Fault Short-Circuit ratings
526170
Application example For a 15 HP-230 V motor
Select a contactor type LC1 D50A. Information: the contactor rating selected corresponds to size 2, the associated cable is type AWG3 75 C-Cu.
a.c. supply
Volts LC1 D65App 50/60 Hz LC1 D80D115
526171
24 B7 B5 B6 12 JD JD JW 5 AL
42 D7 D5 24 BD BD BW BD 12 JL
48 E7 E5 E6 36 CD CD CW 20 ZL
110 F7 F5 F6 48 ED ED EW ED 24 BL
115 FE7 FE5 60 ND ND ND 48 EL
220 M7 M5 M6 72 SD SD SW SD 110 FL
230 P7 P5 110 FD FD FW FD 220 ML
240 U7 U5 U6 125 GD GD GD 250 UL
380 Q7 Q5 Q6 220 MD MD MW MD
400 V7 V5 250 UD UD UD
415 N7 N5 440 RD RD RD
440 R7 R5 R6
500 S7 S5
LC1 D09D150 (D115 and D150 coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
50 Hz 60 Hz
d.c. supply
Volts U 0.71.25 Uc LC1 D80 and D95 U 0.851.1 Uc U 0.751.2 Uc U 0.751.2 Uc LC1 D95pp LC1 D09D65A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
Low consumption
Volts c U 0.71.25 Uc LC1 D09D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) (2) LC1 D09 to D65A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 6 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. LC1 D80 and LC1 D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 6 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 6 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC1 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 6 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing.
5/71
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys D, 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control up to 75 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 Horizontally mounted, pre-assembled
526172
1
LC2 D12pp
Pre-wired power connections.
3-pole reversing contactors for connection by screw clamp terminals

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 (q y 60 C) Rated operational current in AC-3 440 V up to Instantaneous auxiliary contacts per contactor Contactors supplied with coil Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) Weight (3)
2
526173
Fixing (1)
220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 1000 V 230 V 400 V 690 V kW 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 25 kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 45 kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 25 37 45 45 kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 45 kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 55 55 kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 18.5 30 33 37 45 45 kW A 9 12 18 25 32 38 40 50 65 80 95 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC2 D09pp (4) LC2 D12pp (4) LC2 D18pp (4) LC2 D25pp (4) LC2 D32pp (4) LC2 D38pp (4) LC2 D40App (5) LC2 D50App (5) LC2 D65App (5) LC2 D80pp LC2 D95pp kg 0.687 0.697 0.707 0.787 0.797 0.807 1.870 1.880 1.890 3.200 3.200
With mechanical interlock, without electrical interlocking, for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
3 4
526175
LC2 D65App
With mechanical interlock and electrical interlocking, for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
30 40 55 75 59 80 59 80 75 90 80 100 65 75 115 150 1 1 1 1 LC2 D115pp LC2 D150pp 6.350 6.400
5 6 7 8 9 10
LC2 D115pp
Connection by lugs or bars For reversing contactors LC2 D09 to LC2 D38, LC2 D115 and LC2 D150, in the references selected above, insert a figure 6 before the voltage code. Example: LC2 D09pp becomes LC2 D096pp. To build a 40 to 65 A reversing contactor, for connection by lugs, order 2 contactors LC1 DppA6 and mechanical interlock LAD 4CM (see page 5/76).
(1) LC2 D09 to D65A: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. LC2 D80 and D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC2 D115 and D150: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages between 16 and 690 V, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Component parts
a.c. supply
Volts 50/60 Hz LC2 D80D115 50 Hz 60 Hz B5 B6 12 JD 5 AL D5 24 BD 12 JL E5 E6 36 CD 20 ZL F5 F6 48 ED 24 BL FE5 60 ND 48 EL M5 M6 72 SD 110 FL P5 110 FD 220 ML U5 U6 125 GD 250 UL Q5 Q6 220 MD V5 250 UD N5 440 RD R5 R6 S5 24 B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 115 FE7 220 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380 Q7 400 V7 415 N7 440 R7 500 S7 LC2 D09D150 (D115 and D150 coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard))
d.c.supply
Volts U 0.751.25 Uc LC2 D09D65A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
Low consumption
Volts c U 0.81.25 Uc LC2 D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91. (3) The weights indicated are for contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.330 kg for LC2 D09 to D38, 0.150 kg for LC1 D40A to D65A. (4) For reversing contactors with electrical interlocking pre-wired at the factory, add suffix V to the references selected above. Example: LC2 D09P7 becomes LC2 D09P7V. (5) For low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83). Note: when assembling a reversing contactor, it is good practice to incorporate a 50 ms time delay. Selection : pages 5/194 to 5/225 Characteristics : pages 5/50 to 5/55 Dimensions, schemes : pages 5/98 and 5/99
5/72
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys D, 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control up to 15 kW at 400 V, in category AC-3 Horizontally mounted, pre-assembled
526174
Pre-wired power connections. Mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking.

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 (q y 60 C) LC2 D123pp 220 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 230 V 400 V 690 V kW 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 kW 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 A 9 12 18 25 32 (4) 1 1 1 1 1 Rated operational current in AC-3 440 V up to
3-pole reversing contactors, for connection by spring terminals
1
Contactors supplied with coil Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Fixing (1) Weight (3)
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts per contactor
2
kg 0.687 0.697 0.707 0.787 0.797
For connection by spring terminals

1 1 1 1 1 LC2 D093pp LC2 D123pp LC2 D183pp LC2 D253pp LC2 D323pp
3 4 5 6
Power connection by EverLink, BTR screw connectors (5) and control by spring terminals 11 18.5 22 22 22 30 40 1 1 LC2 D40A3pp (6) 15 22 25 30 30 33 50 1 1 LC2 D50A3pp (6) 18.5 30 37 37 37 37 65 1 1 LC2 D65A3pp (6)
1.870 1.880 1.890
For connection by Faston connectors All power connections are to be made by the customer. These contactors are fitted with Faston connectors: 2 x 6.35 mm on the power poles and 1 x 6.35 mm on the coil terminals. For reversing contactors LC2 D09 and LC2 D12 only, in the references selected above, replace the figure 3 before the voltage code with a figure 9. Example: LC2 D093pp becomes LC2 D099pp.
(1) LC2 D09 to D32: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office):
Component parts
a.c. supply
Volts LC2 D09D65A 50/60 Hz B7 12 JD 5 AL D7 24 BD 12 JL E7 36 CD 20 ZL F7 48 ED 24 BL FE7 60 ND 48 EL M7 72 SD 110 FL P7 110 FD 220 ML U7 125 GD 250 UL Q7 220 MD V7 250 UD N7 440 RD R7 S7 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 500
d.c. supply
Volts U 0.751.25 Uc LC2 D09D65A (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
7 8 9 10
Low consumption
Volts c U 0.81.25 Uc LC2 D09...D38 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91. (3) The weights indicated are for reversing contactors with a.c. control circuit. For d.c. or low consumption control circuit, add 0.330 kg for LC2 D09 to D38, 0.150 kg for LC1 D40A to D65A. (4) Must be wired with 2 x 4 mm2 cables in parallel on the upstream side. On the downstream side, outgoing terminal block LAD 331 may be used (Quickfit technology, see page 1/199).When wired with a single cable, the product is limited to 25 A (11 kW/400 V motors). (5) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85). (6) For low consumption kit LA4 DBL (see page 5/83).
Dimensions, schemes : pages 5/98 and 5/99
5/73
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys D, 4-pole changeover contactor pairs for control in category AC-1, 20 to 200 A
Pre-assembled. Pre-wired power connections.
526176
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Selection : pages 5/194 to 5/225 LC2 DT20pp
For connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors LC2 DT20 to LC2 DT40: mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. LC2 D80004: order separately 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors (see page page 5/79). For electrical interlocking incorporated in the mechanical interlock, please consult your Regional Sales Office. LC2 D115004: mechanical interlock with integral, pre-wired electrical interlocking.
Utilisation category AC-1 Non-inductive loads Maximum rated operational current (q y 60 C) A 20 25 32 40 125 200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC2 DT20pp LC2 DT25pp LC2 DT32pp LC2 DT40pp LC2 D80004pp LC2 D115004pp Instantaneous auxiliary contacts per contactor Contactors supplied with coil Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Fixing (2) kg 0.730 0.730 0.850 0.850 3.200 7.400 Weight
For connection by lugs or bars

20 25 32 40 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC2 DT206pp LC2 DT256pp LC2 DT326pp LC2 DT406pp 0.730 0.730 0.850 0.850
For customer assembly.

60 80 1 1
For connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

1 1 LC1 DT60App (3) LC1 DT80App (3)
For connection by lugs or bars

60 80 1 1 1 1 LC1 DT60A6pp (3) LC1 DT80A6pp (3)
(1) See note (1) on next page. (2) LC2 DT20 to LC2 DT80: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. LC2 D80: clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or 75 mm 5 rail AM1 DL or screw fixing. LC2 D115: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm 5 rails AM1 DP or screw fixing. (3) For these operational currents, order 2 identical contactors and a mechanical interlock LAD 4CM (see page 5/76). Note: when assembling changeover contactor pairs, it is good practice to incorporate a 50 ms time delay.
Accessories
5/74
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys D, 4-pole changeover contactor pairs for control in category AC-1, 20 A
Pre-assembled. Pre-wired power connections.

For connection by spring terminals.
Utilisation category AC-1 Non-inductive loads Maximum rated operational current (q y 60 C) A 20 1 1 LC2 DT203pp Instantaneous auxiliary contacts per contactor Contactors supplied with coil Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (1) Fixing (2) kg 0.760 Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
For customer assembly.

60 80 1 1
Power connection by EverLink, BTR screw connectors (3) and control by spring terminals
1 1 LC1 DT60A3pp (4) LC1 DT80A3pp (4)
Separate components
a.c. supply
Volts 50/60 Hz LC2 D80004D115004 50 Hz 60 Hz B5 B6 12 JD 5 AL D5 24 BD 12 JL E5 E6 36 CD 20 ZL F5 F6 48 ED 24 BL FE5 60 ND 48 EL M5 M6 72 SD 110 FL P5 110 FD 220 ML U5 U6 125 GD 250 UL Q5 Q6 220 MD V5 250 UD N5 440 RD R5 R6 S5 24 B7 42 D7 48 E7 110 F7 115 FE7 220 M7 230 P7 240 U7 380 Q7 400 V7 415 N7 440 R7 500 LC2 DT20DT40, LC1 DT60DT80
d.c. supply
Volts U 0.71.25 Uc LC2 DT20DT40, LC1 DT60DT80 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard)
Low consumption
Volts c U 0.81.25 Uc LC2 DT20...DT40 (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) For other voltages between 5 and 690 V, see pages 5/86 to 5/91. (2) Clip-on mounting on 35 mm 5 rail AM1 DP or screw fixing. (3) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85). (4) For these operational currents, order 2 identical contactors and a mechanical interlock LAD 4CM (see page 5/76).
5/75
References
TeSys contactors
Component parts for assembling reversing contactors for motor control, low-speed/high-speed starters and star-delta starters
For 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control
Description
537729
1 2
537730
Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors. Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer
For contactors (1) (2 identical contactors) LC1 D09 to D38 Reference Weight kg 0.045
Kits for assembly of reversing contactors

LAD 9R1 Kit comprising: b a mechanical interlock LAD 9V2 with electrical interlocking LAD 9V1. b a set of power connections LAD 9V5 (parallel) and LAD 9V6 (reversing) Kit comprising: b a mechanical interlock LAD 9V2 without electrical interlocking b a set of power connections LAD 9V5 (parallel) and LAD 9V6 (reversing) Kit comprising: b a mechanical interlock LAD 4CM, b a set of power connections LA9 D65A69. LAD 9R1V
LC1 D09 to D38
LAD 9R1
0.045
3 4
537731
LC1 D40A to D65A
LAD 9R3
0.170
Mechanical interlocks
LAD 9R3 Mechanical interlock with integral electrical interlocking LC1 D80 and D95 (a) LC1 D80 and D95 (c) LC1 D115 and D150 Mechanical interlock without integral electrical interlocking LC1 D09 to D38 LC1 D40A to D65A LC1 D80 and D95 (a) LC1 D80 and D95 (c) LA9 D4002 LA9 D8002 LA9 D11502 LAD 9V2 LAD 4CM LA9 D50978 LA9 D80978 LAD 9V5 + LAD 9V6 LAD 9V12 + LAD 9V13 (2) LA9 D65A69 LA9 D8069 LA9 D8069 LA9 D11569 Reference LAD 9PVGV 0.170 0.170 0.290 0.040 0.040 0.170 0.170 0.130 0.490 0.490 1.450 Weight kg 0.016
5 6 7 8 9 10
Selection : pages 5/194 to 5/225 LA9 D8069
Sets of power connections

Comprising: b a set of parallel bars, b a set of reverser bars. LC1 D09 to D38 with screw clamp terminals or connectors LC1 D09D32 with spring terminal connections LC1 D40A to D65A LC1 D80 and D95 (a) LC1 D80 and D95 (c) LC1 D115 and D150
For low-speed/high-speed starter

Description Connection kit enabling reversing of low and high speed directions using a reversing contactor and a 2N/O + 2N/C main pole contactor
For contactors with connection type Screw clamps or connectors
For star-delta starter

Description Mounting kit comprising: b 1 time delay contact block LAD S2 (LC1 D09D80), b power circuit connections (LC1 D09D80), b hardware required for fixing the contactors onto the mounting plate (LC1 D80). Equipment mounting plates
For contactors LC1 D09 and D12 LC1 D18 to D32 LC1 D40A and D50A LC1 D80 LC1 D09, D12 and D18 LC1 D32 LC1 D40A and D50A LC1 D80
Reference LAD 91217 LAD 93217 LAD 9SD3 LA9 D8017 LA9 D12974 LA9 D32974 LA9 D80973
Weight kg 0.180 0.310 0.380 0.680 0.150 0.180 0.300
(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/65 and 5/72. (2) To assemble a reversing contactor with spring terminal connections, the following components must be ordered: - 1 mechanical interlock LAD 9V2, - 1 upstream power connection kit and 1 downstream power connection kit.. Upstream power connection kit LAD 9V10: installed in the Quickfit system with power connection module LAD 34. (If module LAD 34 is not used, replace LAD 9V10 with LAD 9V12). Downstream power connection kit LAD 9V11: installed in the Quickfit system with outgoing terminal block LAD 331. (If LAD 331 is not used, replace LAD 9V11 with LAD 9V13).
5/76
References
TeSys contactors
Component parts for assembling changeover contactor pairs
For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs (3-phase distribution + neutral) Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors. Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer.
Description For contactors (1) (2 identical contactors) LC1 DT20 to DT40 with screw clamps or connectors Reference Weight kg 0.045
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Kits for assembly of changeover contactor pairs

Kit comprising: b a mechanical interlock LAD 9V2 with electrical interlocking LAD 9V1, b a set of power connections (changeover) LAD 9V7. Kit comprising: b a mechanical interlock LAD 9V2 without electrical interlocking, b a set of power connections (changeover) LAD 9V7. LAD T9R1V
LC1 DT20 to DT40 with screw clamps or connectors
LAD T9R1
0.045
537733
With integral electrical interlocking LC1 D80004 LP1 D80004 LC1 D115004 Without integral electrical interlocking LC1 DT20 to DT40 with screw clamps or connectors LC1 DT203 to DT403 with spring terminals LC1 DT60A and DT80A LC1 D80004 LP1 D80004 LA9 D4002 LA9 D8002 LA9 D11502 LAD 9V2 (2) LAD 9V2 (2) LAD 4CM LA9 D50978 LA9 D80978 0.170 0.170 0.280 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.155 0.180
LA9 D50978
537734

Comprising a set of parallel bars
LC1 DT60A and DT80A LC1 D80004 LP1 D80004 LC1 D115004 LC1 DT203 to DT403 with spring terminals LC1 D80004 LP1 D80004
LA9 D65A70 r LA9 D8070 LA9 D8070 LA9 D11570 LAD 9V9 LA9 D8070 (2) LA9 D8070 (2)
0.150 0.280 0.280 1.100 0.100
LA9 D6570
537735
Contactors with screw clamp terminals or connectors. Horizontally mounted, assembled by customer.
Description LA9 D8070 For contactors (1) (2 identical contactors) LC1 D40AD65A LC1 D115 and D150 Reference Weight kg 0.105 0.280
For 3-pole changeover contactor pairs
Without integral electrical interlocking With integral electrical interlocking LAD 9R3S LA9 D11502

Comprising a set of parallel bars, LC1 D115 and D150 LA9 D11571 0.960 (1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/65 and 5/72. (2) Order 2 contact blocks LAD Np1 to build the electrical interlock, see page 5/79.
r Available 4th quarter 2011. Selection : pages 5/194 to 5/225 Characteristics : pages 5/50 to 5/55 Dimensions, schemes : pages 5/98 and 5/99
5/77
1
or
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
See page opposite for mounting possibilities according to the contactor type
5/78
References
TeSys contactors

For use in normal operating environments In order to mount an LAD 8N on an LC1 D80 to D95, a set of shims must be ordered separately, see page 5/85.
Clip-on mounting (1) Number of contacts per block Composition Reference
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals

Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Front
Side
2 4 4 incl. 1 N/O & 1 N/C make before break 2 2 4 2 4 2 1 2
2 1 2 2 2
1 1 2 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1
1 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
Front on 3P contactors and 4P contactors 20 to 80 A Front on 4P contactors 125 to 200 A Front
For terminal referencing conforming to EN 50012
LAD N10 LAD N01 LAD N11 LAD N20 LAD N02 LAD N22 LAD N13 LAD N40 LAD N04 LAD N31 LAD C22 LAD 8N11 LAD 8N20 LAD 8N02 LAD N11G LAD N22G LAD N11P LAD N22P
kg 0.020 0.020 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.030 0.050 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.050 0.060
With dust and damp protected contacts, for use in particularly harsh industrial environments
LA1 DX20 LA1 DX11 LA1 DX02 LA1 DY20 (2) LA1 DZ40 LA1 DZ31
This type of connection is not possible for blocks with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the figure 6 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N116. This type of connection is not possible for LAD 8, LAD N with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other contact blocks, add the figure 3 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N113. This type of connection is not possible for LAD 8, LAD N with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other contact blocks, add the figure 9 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N119.
Time delay Front mounted or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by Faston connectors
(1) Maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be fitted: Contactors Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Type Number of poles and size Side mounted Front mounted 1 contact 2 contacts a 3P LC1 D09D38 1 on LH side and 1 1 LC1 D40AD65A 1 on LH or 1 on RH side and 1 on each side or 2 and 1 LC1 D80 and D95 (50/60 Hz) LC1 D80 and D95 (50 or 60 Hz) 1 on each side and 2 and 1 LC1 D115 and D150 1 on LH side and 1 and 1 4P LC1 DT20DT40 1 on LH side 1 on LH or 1 on RH side and 1 LC1 DT60A and DT80A or 1 or 1 LC1 D40008, D65008 and D80 1 on each side LC1 D115 1 on each side and 1 or 1 c 3P LC1 D09D38 1 1 LC1 D40AD65A 1 or 1 LC1 D80 and D95 LC1 D115 and D150 1 on LH side and 1 1 4P LC1 DT20DT40 1 LC1 DT60A and DT80A 2 and 1 LC1 D40008, D65008 and D80 LC1 D115 1 on each side and 1 BC (3) 3P LC1 D09D38 1 4P LC1 DT20DT40 1 (2) Device fitted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals. (3) LC: low consumption.
4 contacts or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1
5/79
References
TeSys contactors

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks Mechanical latch blocks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: pages 5/56 to 5/58 LAD Tp
Maximum number of auxiliary contact blocks that can be fitted per contactor, see page 5/79. Sealing cover to be ordered separately, see page 5/85. LAD T0 and LAD R0: with extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s. LAD S2: with switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact.
Clip-on mounting Front Number of contacts 1 N/O + 1 N/C Time delay Type On-delay Setting range 0.13 s 0.130 s 10180 s 130 s Off-delay 0.13 s 0.130 s 10180 s LAD T0 LAD T2 LAD T4 LAD S2 LAD R0 LAD R2 LAD R4 Reference Weight kg 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals
Add the figure 6 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD T0 becomes LAD T06.
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs
Add the figure 3 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD T0 becomes LAD T03
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals
LAD Tp3
Add the figure 9 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD T0 becomes LAD T09.
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by Faston connectors Mechanical latch blocks
Clip-on mounting
(1)
For use on contactor LC1 D09D38 (a or c) LC1 DT20DT40 (a or c) LC1 D40AD65A (3 P a or c) LC1 DT60A and DT80A (4 P a or c) Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (2) LAD 6K10p LAD 6K10p Weight kg 0.070 0.070
Unlatching control
Front
Manual or electric
LAD 6K10p
LC1 D80D150 (3 P a) LA6 DK20p LC1 D80 and D115 (3 P c) LC1 D80 (4 P a) LC1 D80 and D115 (4 P a) LP1 D80 and LC1 D115 (4 Pc) (1) The mechanical latch block must not be powered up at the same time as the contactor. The duration of the control signal for the mechanical latch block and the contactor should be: u 100 ms for a contactor operating on an a.c. supply, u 250 ms for a contactor operating on a d.c. supply. Maximum impulse duration for the LAD6K10p mechanical latch block: 10 seconds. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office). Volts 50/60 Hz, c Code 24 B 32/36 C 42/48 E 60/72 EN 100 K 110/127 F 220/240 M 256/277 U
0.090
380/415 Q
5/80
References
TeSys contactors
Suppressor modules
RC circuits (Resistor-Capacitor) Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to "high frequency" interference. For use only in cases where the voltage is virtually sinusoidal. i.e. less than 5% total harmonic distortion. Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
Mounting For use with contactor (1) Rating D09D38 (3P) DT20DT40 D40AD65A (3P) DT60ADT80A (4P) Reference Type Va 2448 50127 110250 2448 50127 110240 380415 2448 50127 110240 380415 Vc Weight kg 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.040 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LAD 4pp
Clip-on side mounting (3)
Clip-on front mounting (3)
Screw fixing (4)
D80D150 (3P) D40D115 (4P)
Varistors (peak limiting) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
Clip-on side mounting (3) D09D38 (3P) DT20DT40 D40AD65A (3P) DT60ADT80A (4P) D80D115 (3P) D80D115 (4P) D80D95 (3P) D80 (4P) 2448 50127 110250 2448 50127 110250 2448 50127 110250 2448 50127 110250 2448 50127 110250 LAD 4VE LAD 4VG LAD 4VU LAD 4V3E LAD 4V3G LAD 4V3U LA4 DE2E LA4 DE2G LA4 DE2U LA4 DE3E LA4 DE3G LA4 DE3U 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018 0.018
LAD 4RCE LAD 4RCG LAD 4RCU LAD 4RC3E LAD 4RC3G LAD 4RC3U LAD 4RC3N LA4 DA2E LA4 DA2G LA4 DA2U LA4 DA2N
Clip-on front mounting (3) LAD 4RC3p, LAD 4V3p, LAD 4D3U, LAD 4T3p
Screw fixing (4)
No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. Increase in drop-out time (6 to 10 times the normal time). Polarised component.
Clip-on side mounting (5) Clip-on front mounting (5) Screw fixing (4) D09D38 (3P), DT20DT40 D40AD65A (3P), DT60ADT80A (4P) D80 and D95 (3P), D40D80 (4P) 24250 24250 24250 LAD 4DDL LAD 4D3U LA4 DC3U 0.012 0.020 0.018
Flywheel diodes
Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks.
LA4 Dpp 24 LAD 4TB 0.012 24 LAD 4TBDL 0.012 72 LAD 4TS 0.012 72 LAD 4TSDL 0.012 125 LAD 4TGDL 0.012 250 LAD 4TUDL 0.012 600 LAD 4TXDL 0.012 Clip-on front mounting D40AD65A (3P) 1224 1224 LAD 4T3B 0.020 (3) DT60ADT80A (4P) (2) 2572 2572 LAD 4T3S 0.020 73125 73125 LAD 4T3G 0.020 126250 126250 LAD 4T3U 0.020 251440 251440 LAD 4T3R 0.020 Screw fixing (4) D80D95 (3P) 1224 1224 LA4 DB2B 0.018 D40D80 (4P) 2572 2572 LA4 DB2S 0.018 24 LA4 DB3B 0.018 72 LA4 DB3S 0.018 (1) For satisfactory protection, a suppressor module must be fitted across the coil of each contactor. (2) From D09 to D65A and from LC1 DT20 to DT80A, d.c. and low consumption 3-pole contactors are fitted with a built-in bidirectional peak limiting diode suppressor as standard. This bidirectional peak limiting diode is removable and can therefore be replaced by the user. (See reference above). If a d.c. or low consumption contactor is used without suppression, the standard suppressor should be replaced with a blanking plug (reference LAD 9DL for LC1 D09 to D38 and LC1 DT20 to DT40; reference LAD 9DL3 for LC1 D40A to D65A and LC1 DT60A to DT80A). (3) Clipping-on makes the electrical connection. The overall size of the contactor remains unchanged. (4) Mounting at the top of the contactor on coil terminals A1 and A2. (5) In order to install these accessories, the existing suppression device must first be removed. D09D38 (3P) DT20DT40 (4P) (2) Clip-on side mounting (3) (5)
Bidirectional peak limiting diodes
LAD 4DDL or LAD 4TpDL
5/81
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
See page opposite for mounting possibilities according to the contactor type
5/82
References
TeSys contactors
Accessories
Electronic serial timer modules (1) b 3-pole contactors LC1 D09 to D38: mounted using adapter LAD 4BB, to be ordered separately, see below. b 3-pole contactors LC1 D40A to D65A: mounted using adapter LAD 4BB3, to be ordered separately, see below. b 3-pole contactors LC1 D80 to D150 and 4-pole contactors LC1 D40 to D115: mounted directly across terminals A1 and A2 of the contactor.
On-delay type
Operational voltage a 24250 V LC1 D09D65A (3P) 100250 V LC1 D80D150 (3P) 0.12 s 1.530 s 25500 s LA4 DT0U LA4 DT2U LA4 DT4U Time delay Reference Weight kg 0.040 0.040 0.040
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
b 3-pole contactors LC1 D09 to D38: mounted using adapter LAD 4BB, to be ordered separately, see below. b 3-pole contactors LC1 D40A to D65A: mounted using adapter LAD4 BB3, to be ordered separately, see below. Relay interface
Operational voltage a 24250 V LC1 D09D150 (3P) Supply voltage E1-E2 (c) 24 V Reference LA4 DFB Weight kg 0.050
Interface modules
Relay interface with "AUTO-I" manual override switch (output forced ON), solid state type
Operational voltage a 24250 V LC1 D09D65A (3P) 100250 V LC1 D80D115 (3P) Supply voltage E1-E2 (c) 24 V Reference LA4 DWB Weight kg 0.045
Low consumption kit

For use on contactors LC1 D40AD65A (3P) (2)
Composition Kit comprising: b a retrofit coil LAD 4BB3. b a relay interface module LA4 DFB.
Reference LA4 DBL
Weight kg 0.077
Retrofit: coil for 3-pole contactor

For use on contactors LC1 D09D38
For adapting existing wiring to a new product

Reference Without coil suppression With coil suppression a 2448 V a 50127 V a 110250 V LC1 D40A65A Without coil suppression LAD 4BB LAD 4BBVE LAD 4BBVG LAD 4BBVU LAD 4BB3 Weight kg 0.019 0.014 0.014 0.014 0.027
(1) For 24 V operation, the contactor must be fitted with a 21 V coil (code Z). See pages 5/86 to 5/91. (2) The kit is compatible with a coil voltage of a 24 V to a 250 V (B7 to U7) and c 24 V to c 250 V (BD to UD).
5/83
TeSys contactors
Accessories
Accessories for main pole and control connections
1
LA9 D3260
Description
For use with contactors LC1 a c DT20, DT25 D09D38 D40AD65A D115, D150 D115 D1156, D1506 D1156 DT20, DT25 D09D38 D40AD65A D115, D150 D115 D1156, D1506 D1156
Sold in Unit lots of reference 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LAD 92560 LA9 D3260 LAD 96560 LA9 D115603 LA9 D115604 LA9 D115503 LA9 D115504 LAD 96570 LA9 D115703 (1) LAD 96580 LA9 D115704 LAD 96575
Weight kg 0.030 0.040 0.087 0.560 0.740 0.300 0.360
Connectors for cable, size (1 connector)
4-pole 10 mm2 3-pole 25 mm2
2 3 4 5 6 7
LA9 D11570p LA9 D11560p LA9 D11550p
EverLink terminal block Connectors for cables (2 connectors)
3-pole 3-pole 120 mm2 4-pole 120 mm2
Connectors for lug type terminals (2 connectors)
3-pole 4-pole
Protective covers for connectors for lug type terminals LAD 96570
3-pole
D40A6D65A6 D1156, D1506
D40A6D65A6 1 D1156, D1506 1
0.021 0.250 0.027 0.300 0.010
4-pole
D60A6D80A6 D1156, D1506
D60A6D80A6 1 D1156, D1506 1
IP 20 covers for lug type terminals (for mounting with circuit-breakers GV3 Ppp6 and GV3 Lpp6) Links for parallel connection of
3 poles
D40A6D65A6
D40A6D65A6 1
2 poles
D09D38 DT20, DT25 (4P) DT32, DT40 (4P) D40AD65A D80, D95
D09D38
10
LA9 D2561 LA9 D1261 LAD 96061 LAD 9P32 LA9 D80961 LAD 9P3 (2) LAD 9P33 LA9 D80962 LA9 D1263 LA9 D80963 LA9 D09966 LA9 D8067 LA9 D11567 GV7 AC03
0.060 0.012 0.060 0.021 0.060 0.005 0.021 0.080 0.024 0.100 0.006 0.010 0.014 0.180
DT20, DT25 (4P) 10 DT32, DT40 (4P) 10 D40AD65A D80 D09D38 D40AD65A D80, D95 DT20, DT25 D80 D80 D80, D95 D115, D150 D115, D150 1 2 10 1 1 2 2 10 10 10 3
3 poles
D09D38 D40AD65A D80, D95
8
Staggered coil connection
4 poles
DT20, DT25 D80, D95 D80, D95 D115, D150
9 10
LA9 D80962 Control circuit take-off from main pole
LA9 D11567
Spreaders for increasing the pole pitch to 45 mm
D115, D150
(1) For 3-pole contactors: 1 set of 6 covers, for 4-pole contactors: 1 set of 8 covers. (2) Separate connecting bar for connecting 2 poles in parallel.
5/84
TeSys contactors
Accessories
Sets of contacts and arc chambers

Description For contactor Sets of contacts GV2 G245 3-pole 4-pole Arc chambers 3-pole 4-pole LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 D115004 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 D115004
Reference LA5 D1158031 LA5 D150803 LA5 D115804 LA5 D11550 LA5 D15050 LA5 D115450
Weight kg 0.260 0.260 0.330 0.395 0.395 0.470
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Terminal block
Power connection accessories
For supply to one or more GV2 G busbar sets
GV1 G09 GV2 G245 GV2 G445 GV3 G264 GV3 G364 (1) GV3 S
0.040 0.036 0.077 0.150 0.250 0.111
Set of 63 A busbars for parallelling of contactors Set of 115 A busbars for parallelling of contactors GV1 G09 Set of S-shape busbars
2 contactors LC1 D09D18 or D25D38 4 contactors LC1 D09D18 or D25D38 2 contactors LC1 D40AD65A 3 contactors LC1 D40AD65A For circuit-breakers GV3 Ppp and GV3 Lpp and contactors LC1 D40AD65A
Protection accessories
Description Miniature control circuit fuse holder Sealing cover Safety cover preventing access to the moving contact carrier GV3 S
Use
Sold in lots of 1 1 1 1 1
Reference LA9 D941 LA9 D901 LAD 9ET1 LAD 9ET3 LAD 9ET4
Weight kg 0.025 0.005 0.026 0.004 0.004
5 x 20 with 4 A-250 V fuse For LAD T, LAD R LC1 D09D65A and DT20DT80A LC1 D80 and D95 LC1 D115 and D150
Marking accessories
Description Sheet of 64 blank legends, self-adhesive, 8 x 33 mm (2) Sheet of 112 blank legends, self-adhesive, 8 x 12 mm (2) Sheet of 64 blank legends for marking using plotter or 8 x 33 mm engraver Sheet of 440 blank legends for marking using plotter or 8 x 12 mm engraver Marker holder snap-in, 8 x 22 mm Marker holder snap-in, 8 x 18 mm
Use Contactors (except 4P) LC1 D80D115 , LAD N (4 contacts), LA6 DK LAD N (2 contacts), LAD T, LAD R, LRD Contactors (except 4P) LC1 D80D115, LAD (4 contacts), LA6 DK All products 4-pole contactors, LC1 D80...D115, LA6 DK
Sold in lots of 10 10 10 35 100
Unit reference LAD 21 LAD 22 LAD 23 LAD 24 LA9 D92 LAD 90 LA9 D93 XBY 2U
Weight kg 0.020 0.020 0.050 0.200 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.100
LA9 D941
LC1 D09...D65A, LC1 DT20...DT80A, 100 LAD N (4 contacts), LAD T, LAD R On holder LA9 D92 Multi-language version: English, French, German, Italian, Spanish 1 1
LAD 9ETp
Bag of 300 blank legends self-adhesive, 7 x 21 mm SIS Label labelling software supplied on CD-Rom
Retrofit plate for screw fixing
For replacement of LC1 D40 to D65 with LC1 D40A to D65A
LAD 7X3 LA9 D730 LA9 D511 LAD ALLEN4
0.150 0.360 0.020 0.026
Mounting plate Set of shims Size 4 Allen key, insulated, 1000 V
For replacement of LC1 F115 or F150 1 with LC1 D115 or D150 For fitting side mounting blocks LAD 8N on LC1 D80 and D95 For use on contactors LC1 D40A to LC1 D150 1 5
LAD 7X3
(1) With this set of busbars, any one contactor can be supplied directly by its EverLink double cage power terminal block. The other two contactors are supplied by the busbar set. The 115 A limitation is therefore applied to these two contactors. Example: 1 LC1 D65A supplied directly + 1 contactor LC1 D65A and 1 contactor LC1 D50 A supplied via the busbar set = 115 A. This combination is compatible with busbar set GV3 G364. (2) These legends are for sticking onto the safety cover of the contactors or add-on block, if fitted.
5/85
References
TeSys contactors
a.c. coils for TeSys D, 3 or 4-pole contactors
For a contactors LC1D09...D38 and LC1DT20DT40
1 2 3
LXD1pp
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos j = 0.75) 70 VA, - sealed (cos j = 0.3) 50 Hz: 7 VA, 60 Hz: 7.5 VA Operating range (q y 60 C): 50 Hz: 0.81.1 Uc, 60 Hz: 0.851.1 Uc. Control circuit voltage Uc V
537496
Average resistance at 20 C 10 % W 1.33 4.17 5.37 10.1 12.8 17 21.7 34.6 100.4 124.1 129.8 150.6 158.5 410.7 430.4 515.4 538.6 562.3 800.7 1551 1633 1694 1993 2398 2499 3294 3810 4656 5020
Inductance of closed circuit H 0.05 0.17 0.22 0.39 0.49 0.67 0.87 1.4 3.8 4.6 5 5.4 6.1 15 16 18 20 22 29 55 60 65 73 87 95 125 136 165 180
Reference (1)
Weight kg
12 21 (2) 24 32 36 42 48 60 100 110
50/60 Hz LXD1J7 LXD1Z7 LXD1B7 LXD1C7 LXD1CC7 LXD1D7 LXD1E7 LXD1EE7 LXD1K7 LXD1F7 LXD1FE7 LXD1G7 LXD1FC7 LXD1L7 LXD1LE7 LXD1M7 (3) LXD1P7 LXD1U7 LXD1W7 LXD1Q7 (4) LXD1V7 LXD1N7 LXD1R7 LXD1T7 LXD1S7 LXD1SC7 LXD1X7 LXD1YC7 LXD1Y7
0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
115 120 127 200 208 220 230 240 277 380 400 415 440 480 500 575 600 660 690
(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code. (2) Voltage for special coils fitted in contactors with serial timer modules, with 24 V supply. (3) Suitable for use on 230 V / 50 Hz. In this case, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor (see pages 5/52 and 5/53). (4) Suitable for use on 400 V / 50 Hz. In this case, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor (see pages 5/52 and 5/53).
5/86
References
TeSys contactors
For a contactors LC1 D40AD65A, LC1 DT60A and LC1 DT80A

Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos j = 0.75) 160 VA. - sealed (cos j = 0.3) 50 Hz: 15 VA, 60 Hz: 15 VA Operating range (q y 60 C): 50 Hz: 0.81.1 Uc, 60 Hz: 0.851.1 Uc. Control circuit voltage Uc V
503984
1
Reference (1) Weight kg 50/60 Hz LXD3J5 (2) LXD3B7 LXD3C7 LXD3D7 LXD3E7 LXD3K7 LXD3F7 LXD3FE7 LXD3G7 LXD3FC7 LXD3L7 LXD3LE7 LXD3M7 (3) LXD3P7 LXD3U7 LXD3W7 LXD3Q7 (4) LXD3V7 LXD3N7 LXD3R7 LXD3T7 LXD3S7 LXD3SC7 LXD3X7 LXD3YC7 LXD3Y7 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070
Average resistance at 20 C 10% W 0.49 1.98 3.76 6.18 7.97 37.63 42.28 48.76 37.63 60.29 149 105 182 192 202 193 512 607 635 682 607 878 1238 1304 1593 1683
Inductance of closed circuit H 0.03 0.12 0.22 0.37 0.48 2.07 2.50 2.74 2.07 3.34 8.27 6.22 10 10.9 11.9 11 29.9 33.1 35.6 40.1 33.1 51.7 68.4 74.5 90.1 98.5
12 24 32 42 48 LXD3pp 100 110 115 120 127 200 208 220 230 240 277 380 400 415 440 480 500 575 600 660 690
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code. (2) This coil can only be used on 50 Hz. (3) Suitable for use on 230 V / 50 Hz. In this case, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor (see pages 5/52 and 5/53). (4) Suitable for use on 400 V / 50 Hz. In this case, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor (see pages 5/52 and 5/53).
5/87
TeSys contactors
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1D40, D50, D65, D80, D95
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
537497
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos j = 0.75) 50 Hz: 200 VA, 60 Hz: 220 VA, - sealed (cos j = 0.3) 50 Hz: 20 VA, 60 Hz: 22 VA Operating range (q y 55 C): 0.851.1 Uc. Control circuit voltage Uc V 24 32 42 48 110 115 120 127 208 220 220/230 230 240 256 277 380 380/400 400 415 440 480 500 575 600 660 Average resistance at 20C 10 % W 1.4 2.6 4.4 5.5 31 31 41 127 133 152 166 381 411 463 513 668 1220 Inductance of closed circuit H 0.09 0.16 0.27 0.35 1.9 1.9 2.4 7.5 8.1 8.7 10 22 25 26 30 38 67 50 Hz LX1D6B5 LX1D6C5 LX1D6D5 LX1D6E5 LX1D6F5 LX1D6FE5 LX1D6G5 LX1D6M5 LX1D6P5 LX1D6U5 LX1D6W5 LX1D6Q5 LX1D6V5 LX1D6N5 LX1D6R5 LX1D6S5 LX1D6Y5 Reference (1) Average resistance at 20C 10 % W 1.05 4.2 22 28 86 98 120 157 300 392 480 675 775 Inductance of closed circuit H 0.06 0.23 1.2 1.5 4.3 4.8 5.7 8 14 19 23 33 36 60 Hz LX1D6B6 LX1D6E6 LX1D6F6 LX1D6G6 LX1D6L6 LX1D6M6 LX1D6U6 LX1D6W6 LX1D6Q6 LX1D6R6 LX1D6T6 LX1D6S6 LX1D6X6 Reference (1) Weight
kg 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280
LX1D6pp
Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos j = 0.75) 50/60 Hz: 245 VA at 50 Hz, - sealed (cos j = 0.3) 50/60 Hz: 26 VA at 50 Hz. Operating range (q y 55 C): 0.851.1 Uc. 50/60 Hz LX1D6B7 LX1D6D7 LX1D6E7 LX1D6F7 LX1D6FE7 LX1D6G7 LX1D6M7 LX1D6P7 LX1D6U7 LX1D6Q7 LX1D6V7 LX1D6N7 LX1D6R7
24 42 48 110 115 120 220/230 (2) 230 230/240 (3) 380/400 (4) 400 415 440
1.22 3.5 5 26 32 102 115 131 310 349 390 410
0.08 0.25 0.32 1.7 2 6.7 7.7 8.3 20 23 24 27
0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280 0.280
(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code. (2) For use on 230 V / 50 Hz, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor, see pages 5/52 and 5/53. This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz. (3) This coil can be used on 220/240 V at 50 Hz and on 240 V only at 60 Hz. (4) For use on 400 V / 50 Hz, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor, see pages 5/52 and 5/53.
5/88
TeSys contactors
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1D115

Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos j = 0.8) 50 or 60 Hz: 300 VA, - sealed (cos j = 0.3) 50 or 60 Hz: 22 VA Operating range (q y 55 C): 0.851.1 Uc. Control circuit voltage Uc V
537502
1
Reference (1) Average resistance at 20C 10 % W 0.87 3.91 19.97 24.02 67.92 79.61 97.04 125.75 243.07 338.51 368.43 Inductance of closed circuit H 0.07 0.28 1.45 1.70 5.06 5.69 6.75 8.89 17.04 22.26 25.55 60 Hz LX1D8B6 LX1D8E6 LX1D8F6 LX1D8G6 LX1D8L6 LX1D8M6 LX1D8U6 LX1D8W6 LX1D8Q6 LX1D8R6 LX1D8T6 Reference (1) Weight
Average resistance at 20C 10 % W 1.24 2.14 3.91 4.51 26.53 26.53 32.75 104.77 104.77 125.25 338.51 368.43 368.43 441.56 566.62
Inductance of closed circuit H 0.09 0.17 0.28 0.36 2.00 2.00 2.44 7.65 8.29 8.89 22.26 25.55 27.65 30.34 38.12
kg 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260 0.260
2 3 4 5 6
LX1D8pp
24 32 42 48 110 115 120 127 208 220 230 240 277 380 400 415 440 480 500
50 Hz LX1D8B5 LX1D8C5 LX1D8D5 LX1D8E5 LX1D8F5 LX1D8FE5 LX1D8FC5 LX1D8M5 LX1D8P5 LX1D8U5 LX1D8Q5 LX1D8V5 LX1D8N5 LX1D8R5 LX1D8S5
For 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1D115, LC1D150

Specifications
Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush: cos j = 0.9 - 280 to 350 VA, - sealed: cos j = 0.9 - 2 to 18 VA. Operating range (q y 55 C): 0.81.15 Uc. Coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard, class B. Control circuit voltage Uc V Average resistance at 20C 10 % W Inductance of closed circuit H Reference (1) Average resistance at 20C 10 % W 147 301 498 1061 4377 4377 4377 6586 10 895 9895 9895 9895 21 988 21 011 21 011 21 011 21 501 32 249 32 249 Inductance of closed circuit H 3.03 8.28 13.32 24.19 109.69 109.69 109.69 152.65 260.15 210.72 210.72 210.72 533.17 482.42 482.42 482.42 507.47 938.41 938.41 50/60 Hz LX1D8B7 LX1D8C7 LX1D8D7 LX1D8E7 LX1D8F7 LX1D8FE7 LX1D8G7 LX1D8FC7 LX1D8LE7 LX1D8M7 LX1D8P7 LX1D8U7 LX1D8UE7 LX1D8Q7 LX1D8V7 LX1D8N7 LX1D8R7 LX1D8T7 LX1D8S7 Reference (1) Weight
kg 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290 0.290
24 32 42 48 110 115 120 127 208 220 230 240 277 380 400 415 440 480 500 (1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code.
7 8 9 10
5/89
References
TeSys contactors

d.c. coils for TeSys D, 3 or 4-pole contactors
For 3-pole contactors LC1 D80 or 4-pole contactors LP1 D80
1 2 3
LX4D7pD
537503
Specifications
Average consumption: 22W. Operating range: 0.851.1 Uc. Control circuit voltage Uc V 12 24 36 48 60 72 Average resistance at 20 C 10% W 6.6 27 57 107 170 230 564 718 2215 2850 9195 Inductance of closed circuit H 0.46 1.89 4 7.5 11.9 16.1 39.5 50.3 155 200 640 Reference (1) Weight kg 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680
LX4D7JD LX4D7BD LX4D7CD LX4D7ED LX4D7ND LX4D7SD LX4D7FD LX4D7GD LX4D7MD LX4D7UD LX4D7RD
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
110 125 220 250 440
(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code.
5/90
References
TeSys contactors

d.c. coils for TeSys D, 3 or 4-pole contactors
For contactors LC1 D115, D150

Specifications
Consumption: inrush 270 to 365 W, sealed 2.4 to 5.1 W. Operating range: 0.751.2 Uc. Coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard, class B. Control circuit voltage Uc V 24 48 60 72 110 125 220 LX4D8pD 250 440 18 022 21 501 345.40 684.66 LX4D8UD LX4D8RD 0.300 0.300 Average resistance at 20 C 10 % W 147 1061 1673 2500 4377 6586 9895 Inductance of closed circuit H 3.03 24.19 38.44 56.27 109.69 152.65 210.72 Reference (1) Weight kg 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300
1 2 3 4 5 6
537504
LX4D8BD LX4D8ED LX4D8ND LX4D8SD LX4D8FD LX4D8GD LX4D8MD
For 3-pole contactors LC1 D80 or 4-pole contactors LP1 D80

Specifications
Wide range coils for specific applications Average consumption: 23W. Operating range: 0.75 to 1.2 Uc. Coils with "TH" treatment as standard. Control circuit voltage Uc V 12 24 36 48 72 110 220 Average resistance at 20 C 10 % W 6.2 23.5 51.9 94.2 204 483 1922 Inductance of closed circuit H 0.49 1.75 4.18 7 15.7 36 144 Reference (1) Weight kg 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680 0.680
LX4D7JW LX4D7BW LX4D7CW LX4D7EW LX4D7SW LX4D7FW LX4D7MW
7 8 9 10
(1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code.
5/91
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
LC1 D09D18 (3-pole)
LC1 D25D38 (3-pole), LC1 DT20DT40 (4-pole)

44
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10
44
Minimum electrical clearance LA4 b1 b
LA4
b1 b
c c1 c2 c3
12,5 (LAD 8)
45
12,5 (LAD 8) (1)
10 c1 c2 c3
D099 D129 80 95,5 111,5 (1) 120,5 (1) 127,5 (1) 84 86 117 129 137 141 D25 D38 85 98 114 (1) 123 (1) 130 (1) 90 92 123 135 143 147
12,5 (LAD 8)
45
12,5 (LAD 8) (1)
LC1 b without add-on blocks b1 with LAD 4BB with LA4 Dp2 with LA4 DF, DT with LA4 DW, DL c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LA6 DK10, LAD 6K10 c3 with LAD T, R, S with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover (1) Including LAD 4BB.
D09D18 D093 D123 77 99 94 107 123 (1) 110 (1) 119 (1) 132 (1) 126 (1) 139 (1) 84 84 86 86 117 117 129 129 137 137 141 141
D183 D323 99 107 123 (1) 132 (1) 139 (1) 90 92 123 135 143 147
D098, D128, DT203 and DT20 and DT25 DT253 85 99 98 114 129 190 90 90 92 92 123 123 135 135 143 143 147 147
DT32 and DT40 91 97 99 131 143 151 155
D188, D258, DT323 and DT403 105 97 99 131 143 151 155
LC1 D40AD65A (3-pole), LC1 DT60ADT80A (4-pole)

LA4 DpB
LC1 D80 and D95 (3-pole), LC1 D80004 and D80008 (4-pole), D40008 and D65008 (4-pole)
32 44
Min. electrical clearance

LAD 4BB3
LA4
b1
b1
122
LAD 4BB3
12
c c1 c2 c3
LA4 DpB 12,5 (LAD 8N)
117
12
a
12,5 (LAD 8N)
c c1 c2 c3
D95, D65008 85 135 142 150 125 130 150 158 170 178 182 Min. electrical clearance
127
12,5 (LAD 8)
12,5 (LAD 8)
LC1 a b1 with LA4 Dp2 with LA4 DB3 or LAD 4BB3 with LA4 DF, DT with LA4 DM, DW, DL c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD N (1 contact) with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LAD 6K10 or LA6 DK c3 with LAD T, R, S with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover LC1 a b1 with LA4 DA2 with LA4 DF, DT with LA4 DM, DL with LA4 DW c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LA6 DK20 c3 with LAD T, R, S with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover
D40AD65A DT60ADT80A D40008 55 136 157 166 118 120 150 163 171 175 D115, D150 120 174 185 188 188 132 136 150 155 168 172 70 118 120 150 163 171 175 D115004 150 174 185 188 188 132 150 155 168 172 85 135 142 150 125 139 147 159 167 171 D1150046 155 174 185 188 188 115 150 155 168 172
D80 85 135 135 142 150 125 130 150 158 170 178 182
D80004 96 135 142 150 125 150 158 170 178 182
D80008 96 135 142 150 140 150 158 170 178 182
LC1 D115 and D150 (3-pole), LC1 D115004 (4-pole)

LA4
10
158
LAD 8
c c1 c2 c3
5/92
b1
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
LC1 D09D18 (3-pole)

LC1 D25D38 (3-pole)

1
45
10 c1 c2 c3
45
10 c1 c2 c3
D09D18 77 93 95 126 138 146 150 D093D123 99 93 95 126 138 146 150
2
D183D323 99 99 101 132 144 152 156
LC1 b c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LA6DK10 c3 with LADT, R, S with LADT, R, S and sealing cover
D099D129 80 93 95 126 138 146 150
D25D38 85 99 101 132 144 152 156
3 4
LC1 DT20DT40 (4-pole)

10 c1 c2 c3
LC1 b c c1 c2 c3
45
5
DT20 and DT25 D098 and D128 85 99 123 135 143 147 DT203 and DT253 D0983 and D1283 99 99 123 135 143 147 DT32 and DT40 D188D258 91 107 131 143 151 155 DT323 and DT403 D1883 and D2583 105 107 131 143 151 155
with cover with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) with LA6 DK10 with LAD T, R, S with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover
6 7 8
LC1 D40AD65A (3-pole), LC1 DT60ADT80A (4-pole)

LA4 DpB
LC1 D80 and D95 (3-pole), LP1 D80004, LP1 D80008 (4-pole), LP1 D40008 and D65008 (4-pole)

LAD 4BB3
b1
122
LAD 4BB3
12
c c1 c2 c3
LA4 DpB 12,5 (LAD 8N)
117
12
a
12,5 (LAD 8N)
c c1 c2 c3
127
LC1 D40A LC1 D65A DT60ADT80A a 55 70 b1 with LAD 4BB3 136 136 with LA4 DF, DT 157 157 c without cover or add-on blocks 118 118 with cover, without add-on blocks 120 120 c1 with LAD N (1 contact) with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 150 150 c2 with LA6 DK10 163 163 c3 with LAD T, R, S 171 171 with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 175 175 LC1 D115ppp and LC1 D150ppp with c coil: see page 5/92.
LP1 D40008 and D65008 85 182 196 202 213 221 225
LC1 D80 and D95 85 181 186 204 210 221 229 233
LP1 D80004 96 181 204 210 221 229 233
LP1 D80008 96 196 204 210 221 229 233
9 10
5/93
Mounting
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
LC1 D09D38, DT20DT40
1 2
On mounting rail AM1 DP200, DR200 or AM1 DE200 (width 35 mm)
On mounting rail AM1 DL200 or DL201 (width 75 mm) On mounting rail AM1EDppp or AM1 DE200 (width 35 mm)
LC1 D40AD65A, LC1 DT60A and DT80A, LC1 D80 and D95, LC1 D40008 and D65008
b
=
3 4 5 6
Control circuit: a.c. LC1 b c c
D09 D18 77 (AM1 DP200 or DR200) (1) 88 (AM1 DE200) (1) 96
D25 D38 85 94 102
DT20 and DT25 85 94 102
DT32 and DT40 100 109 117
Control circuit: a.c. LC1 b c c c
(AM1 DL200) (1) (AM1 DL201) (1) (AM1 EDppp or DE200) (1)
D40AD65A DT60ADT80A 122 128
D80 and D95 127 147 137 137
D40008 and D65008 127 143 133 133
D09 D18 b 77 c (AM1 DP200 or DR200) (1) 97 c (AM1 DE200) (1) 105 (1) with safety cover.
Control circuit: d.c. LC1
D25 D38 85 103 110
DT20 and DT25 94 103 111
DT32 and DT40 109 118 1236
Control circuit: d.c. LC1 c (AM1 DL200) (1) c (AM1 DL201) (1) c (AM1 EDppp or DE200) (1) (1) with safety cover.
D40AD65A DT60ADT80A 128
D80 and D95 205 195 128
D40008 and D65008 200 190 190
LC1 D80 and D95, LP1 D80

On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres
DZ5 ME5
Control circuit: a.c. LC1 c with cover Control circuit: d.c. LC1 c with cover LP1 c D80 and D95 130
120
110
D80 and D95 186 D80 181
7 8 9
15
40
LC1 D115, D150

On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres
100
= 158
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c. LC1 c (AM1 DP200 or DR200) c (AM1 DE200 or EDppp)
D115 and D150 134,5 142,5
D1156 and D1506 117,5 125,5
10
Selection: pages 5/194 to 5/225 Characteristics: pages 5/50 to 5/55 References: pages 5/62 to 5/65 Schemes: pages 5/96 to 5/97
5/94
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
LC1 D09D38 and LC1 DT20DT40

On 2 mounting rails DZ5 MB
DZ5 ME8
15
Control circuit: LC1 c with cover G H H1 4-pole contactors LC1 c G H H1
a.c. D09D18 86 35 60 70 DT20 and DT25 92 35 60 70
D25D38 92 35 60 70 DT32 and DT40 100 35 60 70
d.c. D09D18 95 35 70 70 DT20 and DT25 101 35 70 70
D25D38 101 35 70 70 DT32 and DT40 109 35 70 70
1 2 3 4
H1
LC1 D09D38 and LC1 DT20DT40

On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC
LC1 D40AD65A, LC1 DT60ADT80A
On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC and panel mounted
AF1 EA4
G
c 37,5 a.c D40A65A , DT60ADT80A 120 AF1 EA4 37,5 3x6,5
Control circuit: LC1 c with cover G H LC1 c with cover G H Panel mounted
a.c D09D18 86 35 60/70 DT20 and DT25 80 35 60
D25D38 92 35 60/70 DT32 and DT40 93 35 60
d.c D09D18 95 35 70 DT20 and DT25 118 35 70
D25D38 101 35 70 DT32 and DT40 132 35 70
Control circuit: LC1 c with cover
128
d.c. D40A65A , DT60ADT80A 120
128
5 6 7
3x6,5
LC1 D09D38, LC1 DT20DT40

2xM4 2xM4 2x4,5
= =
LC1 D80 and D95, LC1 D40008 and D65008, LP1 D80
On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC and panel mounted
60/70
c
Control circuit: LC1 c with cover 4-pole contactors LC1 c with cover
35
35
c Control circuit: LC1 c with cover LP1 c without cover
40
AF1 EA6
40
a.c D09D18 86 DT20 and DT25 90
D25D38 92 DT32 and DT40 98
d.c D09D18 95 DT20 and DT25 90
D25D38 101 DT32 and DT40 98
a.c D80 and D95, D40008 and D65008 130
d.c. D80 and D95 D40008 and D65008 186 D80 181
100/110
50
110
8 9 10
LC1 D115, D150

Panel mounted
130 158
c
Selection: pages 5/194 to 5/225
LC1 c G (3-pole) G (4-pole) References: pages 5/62 to 5/65
D115 132 96/110 130/144 Schemes: pages 5/96 to 5/97
D1156 115 96/110 130/144
D150 132 96/110
D1506 115 96/110
5/95
Schemes
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
Contactors
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3-pole contactors (References: pages 5/62 to 5/65)

LC1D09 to D150
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 13/NO 14 21/NC 22
A2
A1
2/T1
4/T2
4-pole contactors (References: pages 5/66 and 5/67)

LC1DT20 to DT80A LC1D115004
3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 7/L4
6/T3
LC1D098 to D258
13/NO 21/NC R1 R3 1 3
LC1 and LP1 D40008 to D80008

R1 R3 R4
A1
A1
A2
A2
R2
R4
14
A2
22
A1
8/T4
6/T3
R2
2/T1
Front mounting add-on contact blocks

1 N/O LAD N10 (1)
43/NO (94)
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/79)

1 N/C LAD N01 (1)
41/NC (92)
4/T2
1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11

53/NO 61/NC
2 N/O LAD N20

53/NO 63/NO
62
42 (91)
44 (93)
2 N/C LAD N02

51/NC 61/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22

61/NC 53/NO 83/NO 71/NC
54
1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
53/NO
54
4 N/O LAD N40

63/NO 73/NO 74 73/NO 74
32 31/NC
64
52
62
62
82
62
72
54
72
64
54
4 N/C LAD N04

51/NC 71/NC 61/NC 81/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C including 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break LAD C22
53/NO 87/NO 61/NC 75/NC
84
54
3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31

53/NO 83/NO
42 41/NC
44 43/NO
54
62
76
52
72
62
82
88
54
62
61/NC
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: page 5/79)

1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11G
43/NO 31/NC
1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11P

13/NO 21/NC

53/NO 63/NO 31/NC 41/NC

13/NO 21/NC
32
22
44
32
42
54
14
64

31/NC 43/NO 53/NO 63/NO
3 N/O + 1 N/C LADN31P

21/NC 13/NO 33/NO 43/NO

31/NC 51/NC 63/NO 41/NC
14

13/NO 21/NC 31/NC 32
32
22
44
54
64
14
34
44
32
42
52
(1) Items in brackets refer to blocks mounted on right-hand side of contactor.
64
5/96
14
22
22
84
84
83/NO
Schemes (continued)
TeSys contactors
TeSys D contactors
Front mounting add-on contact blocks

2 N/O (24-50 V) LA1 DX20 2 N/C (24-50 V) LA1 DX02
Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/79)
2 N/O (5-24 V) LA1 DY20 2 N/O protected (24-50 V) 2 N/O standard LA1 DZ40
53/NO 83/NO 63/NO 73/NO
2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard LA1 DZ31

53/NO 73/NO 61/NC 83/NO
1 2 3 4
64
74
62
54
84
54
74
Time delay auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/80)

On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD T
67/NO 55/NC
Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD R

57/NO 65/NC
On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make LAD S

67/NO 55/NC
56
58
68
66
56
Mechanical latch blocks (References: page 5/80)

LAD 6K10 and LA6 DK20
A1 E1
A2
Side mounting add-on contact blocks

1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD 8N11 (1)
153/NO 161/NC (172) (184)
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References: page 5/79)

2 N/O LAD 8N20 (1)
153/NO (184) 163/NO (174)
E2
2 N/O LAD 8N02 (1)

251/NC (282) 261/NC (272)
68
84
5 6 7 8
154 (183)
162 (171)
154 (183)
164 (173)
Electronic serial timer modules

On-delay LA4 DTpU
Interface modules
Relay output
LA4 DFB
252 (281)
262 (271)
Solid state
LA4 DWB
9 10
References: page 5/83. Selection: pages 5/194 to 5/225 Characteristics: pages 5/50 to 5/55 References: pages 5/62 to 5/83 Dimensions : pages 5/92 to 5/95
5/97
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
TeSys D reversing contactors
LC2 D09 to D38
LC2 DT20 to DT40

2 x LC1 DT20 to DT40
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 x LC1 D09 to D38
e1
60/70
e2
e2
G a
60/70
2xM4
2xM4
LC2 or 2 x LC1 D09 to D18 a D093 to D123 a D09 to D18 c D093 to D123 c D25 to D38 a D183 to D383 a D25 to D32 c D183 to D383 c
a 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90
b 77 99 77 99 85 99 85 99
c (1) 86 86 95 95 92 92 101 101
e1 4 4 9 9
e2 1.5 1.5 5 5
G 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
LC2 or 2 x LC1 DT20 and DT25 a DT32 and DT40 a DT20 and DT25 c DT32 and DT40 c c, e: including cabling.
a 90 90 90 90
b 85 91 85 91
c 92 99 102 109
G 80 80 80 80
e1 and e2: including cabling. (1) With safety cover, without add-on block.
LC2 D40A to D65A

2 x LC1 D40A to D65A 37,5 26,5 37,5
6xM4
122
120
18,7
64 119
18,7
7 8 9 10
128
5/98
TeSys contactors
LC2 D80 and D95

2 x LC1 D80 and D95 a 2 x LC1 D80 and D95 c
6x6,5 = G1 =
e1
6x6,5 G1
=
8
e1
1
100/110
100/110
2 3 4
13
e2
e2
40
G a
40 =
40
G a
40
LC2 or 2 x LC1 D80 and D95 a D80004 a
a 182 207
b 127 127
c 158 158
e1 13
e2 20
G 57 71
G1 96 111
2 x LC1 D80 and D95
a 207
b 127
c 215
e1 13
e2 20
G 96
c, e1 and e2: including cabling.
LC2 D115 and D150

2 x LC1 D115 and D150
e1
13
G1 111
5 6
158
e2
G a
130
LC2 or 2 x LC1 D115 and D150 D115004
a 266 334
c 148 148
e1 56
e2 18 60
G 242/256 310/324
7 8 9 10
5/99
Schemes
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control
1 2 3
LC2D09D150 Horizontally mounted

L1 L2 L3
LAD 9R1V With integral electrical interlocking

L1 L2 L3
13/NO
21/NC
13/NO
21/NC
13/NO
21/NC
13/NO
A1
21/NC
A1
A1
A2
22
14
14
22
A2
A2
14
22
Changeover contactor pairs
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC2DT20DT40 Horizontally mounted

1/L1 1/L2 1/L3 1N 2/L1 2/L2 2/L3 2N
LAD T9R1V With integral electrical interlocking

1/L1 1/L2 1/L3 2/L1 2/L2 2/L3 1N 2N
13/NO
21/NC
13/NO
21/NC
14
13/NO
21/NC
13/NO
22
A1
21/NC 22
A1
A1
A2
A1
A2
22
14
14
22
A2
A2
22
14
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
5/100
14
A2
A1
Schemes (continued)
TeSys contactors
Electrical interlocking of reversing contactors fitted with:

Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts LA9 D4002, LA9 D8002 and LA9 D11502 Mechanical interlock without integral electrical contacts LAD 9V2, LAD 4CM, LA9 D50978 and LA9 D80978
1 2
A1
A2
A1
01
A2
KM2
KM1
KM1
01 02
02
KM2
A1 A1
KM2
A2
A2
KM1
A2
A2
3
Low speed-High speed cabling kit, screw clamp terminals
L1 L2 L3
Low speed-High speed cabling kit, spring terminals

L1 L2 L3
A1
A1
4 5
13/NO
21/NC
13/NO
13/NO
21/NC
13/NO
21/NC
A1
21/NC 22
A2
A2
A2
22
14
22
14
14
22
13 14
R1
R3
13
R1
R3
21
A1
A2
A1
R2
A2
R4
R2
R4
14
22
22
21
LAD 9PV/GV
LAD 3PV/GV
14
A2
A1
LAD 3PV/GV10
PV GV
6 7 8 9 10
W1
U1
U2
PV
GV
W2
V1
V2
5/101
References
TeSys contactors
Direct connection without choke inductors
For switching 3-phase capacitor banks, used for power factor correction,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Dimensions, schemes : page 5/103
Special contactors LC1 DpK are designed for switching 3-phase, single or multiple-step capacitor banks; they conform to standards IEC 60070 and 60831, UL and CSA.
Special contactors
Specification Contactors fitted with a block of early make poles and damping resistors, limiting the value of the current on closing to 60 In max. This current limitation increases the life of all the components of the installation, in particular that of the fuses and capacitors. The patented design of the add-on block (n 90 119-20) ensures safety and long life of the installation. Operating conditions There is no need to use choke inductors for either single or multiple-step capacitor banks. Short-circuit protection must be provided by gI type fuses rated at 1.72 In. Maximum operational power
The power values given in the selection table below are for the following operating conditions: Prospective peak current at switch-on LC1 DpK Maximum operating rate LC1 DFK, DGK, DLK, DMK, DPK LC1 DTK, DWK Electrical durability at nominal load All contactor ratings 400 V 690 V Operational power at 50/60 Hz (1) q y 55 C (2) Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Tightening torque on cable end 200 In 240 operating cycles/hour 100 operating cycles/hour 300 000 operating cycles 200 000 operating cycles Weight
Contactor applications
Basic reference*, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3)
220 V 240 V kVAR 6.7 8.5 10 15 20 25 40
400 V 440 V kVAR 12.5 16.7 20 25 33.3 40 60
660 V 690 V kVAR 18 24 30 36 48 58 92
N/O 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
N/C 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
N.m 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.5 5 5 9
LC1 DFKpp LC1 DGKpp LC1 DLKpp LC1 DMKpp LC1 DPKpp LC1 DTKpp LC1 DWK12pp
kg 0.430 0.450 0.600 0.630 1.300 1.300 1.650
Switching of multiple-step capacitor banks (with equal or different power ratings)

The correct contactor for each step is selected from the above table, according to the power rating of the step to be switched. Example: 50 kVAR 3-step capacitor bank. Temperature: 50 C and U = 400 V or 440 V. One 25 kVAR step: contactor LC1 DMK, one 15 kVAR step: contactor LC1 DGK, and one 10 kVAR step: contactor LC1 DFK. (1) Operational power of the contactor according to the scheme on the page opposite. (2) The average temperature over a 24-hour period, in accordance with standards IEC 60070 and 60831 is 45 C. (3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 24 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 For other voltages between 24 and 440 V, please consult your Regional Sales Office *note: new offer, available in september 2011. Existing offer, refer to catalogue 2010 / 2011
5/102
Dimensions, schemes
TeSys contactors
5
For switching 3-phase capacitor banks, used for power factor correction

Dimensions
LC1DFK, DGK
LC1DPK, DTK
1
77
103
91
77
2
121 45 127 45
3
LC1 DFK DGK Type of fixing LC1D18 See pages 5/94 and 5/95 LC1D18 See pages 5/94 and 5/95 LC1 DPK DTK Type of fixing LC1D40A LC1D65A See pages 5/94 and 5/95 See pages 5/94 and 5/95
LC1DLK, DMK
LC1DWK
4 5
127
166
113
180
6
156 55 154
LC1 DLK DMK Type of fixing LC1D25 See pages 5/94 and 5/95 LC1D32 See pages 5/94 and 5/95 LC1 DWK Type of fixing LC1D80 See pages 5/94 and 5/95
85
7 8 9
Schemes
LC1DpK
-R 13 21 NO NC A1 31 NC
1/L1
3/L2 4/T2
A2 14 22
2/T1
6/T3
5/L3
-R
32
R = Pre-wired resistor connections.
10
5/103
Selection guide
TeSys contactors
From 115 to 2750 A
Applications
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Rated operational current le max. AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) Ie max. AC-1 (q y 40 C)
Control of all types of motor for standard or severe duty applications Control of resistive, inductive and capacitive circuits: heating, lighting, cos j rectification, transformers, normal-standby
115 A 200 A
150 A 250 A
185 A 275 A
225 A 315 A
265 A 350 A
330 A 400 A
400 A 500 A
500 A 700 A
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
Number of poles
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4
2, 3 or 4
2, 3 or 4
Rated operational power in category AC-3
220/240 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V 1000 V
30 kW 55 kW 59 kW 59 kW 75 kW 80 kW 65 kW
40 kW 75 kW 80 kW 80 kW 90 kW 100 kW 65 kW
55 kW 90 kW 100 kW 100 kW 110 kW 110 kW 100 kW
63 kW 110 kW 110 kW 110 kW 129 kW 129 kW 100 kW
75 kW 132 kW 140 kW 140 kW 160 kW 160 kW 147 kW
100 kW 160 kW 180 kW 200 kW 200 kW 220 kW 160 kW
110 kW 200 kW 220 kW 250 kW 257 kW 280 kW 185 kW
147 kW 250 kW 280 kW 295 kW 355 kW 335 kW 335 kW
Add-on auxiliary contact blocks
Front mounting, identical to those used on LC1 D contactors (contacts: instantaneous LA1 DNpp, time delay LA2 DT or LA3 DR, dust and damp protected LA1 DX or DY or DZ)
Associated thermal overload relays and controllers Interfaces
Manual-auto Electronic
LR9 F TeSys T
Specific Universal
LA4 FWB With or without, depending on the control circuit
Contactor type
LC1 F115 LC2 F115
LC1 F150 LC2 F150
LC1 F185 LC2 F185
LC1 F225 LC2 F225
LC1 F265 LC2 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
Reversing contactor type
For customer assembly
Pages
5/114 and 5/115 5/116 and 5/117
5/114 and 5/115 5/118 to 5/121
5/104
1 2
630 A 1000 A
780 A 1600 A
800 A 1000 A
1250 A
1400 A
1700 A
2100 A
750 A 800 A
1000 A 1250 A
1500 A 2000 A
1800 A 2750 A
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
2, 3 or 4
3 or 4
1 to 4
1 to 4
1 to 4
1 to 4
200 KW 335 kW 375 kW 400 kW 400 kW 450 kW 450 kW
220 kW 400 kW 425 kW 425 kW 450 kW 475 kW 450 kW
250 kW 450 kW 450 kW 450 kW 450 kW 475 kW 450 kW
220 kW 400 kW 425 kW 450 kW 500 kW 560 kW 530 kW
280 kW 500 kW 530 kW 560 kW 600 kW 670 kW 530 kW
425 kW 750 kW 800 kW 800 kW 700 kW 750 kW 670 kW
500 kW 900 kW 900 kW 900 kW 900 kW 900 kW 750 kW
Front mounting, identical to those used on LC1 D contactors (contacts: instantaneous LA1 DNpp, time delay LA2 DT or LA3 DR, dust and damp protected LA1 DX or DY or DZ)
4 instantaneous contact compositions: 2 N/C + 2 N/O, 3 N/O + 1 N/C, 1 N/O + 3 N/C or 4 N/O
LR9 F TeSys T
LR9 F TeSys T
LA4 FWB With or without, depending on the control circuit
LC1 F630
LC1 F780
LC1 F800
LC1 F1250 LC1 F1400 LC1 F1700 LC1 F2100
LC1 BL
LC1 BM
LC1 BP
LC1 BR
For customer assembly
5/114 and 5/115 5/118 to 5/121
5/184 and 5/185 5/184
5/105
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
TeSys F contactors (115 to 2100 A)
Environment
1 2 3 4 5
Contactor type Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C
V V kV
LC1 F115 1000 1500 8
LC1 F150 1000 1500 8
LC1 F185 1000 1500 8
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection
Coil not connected to the power circuit
EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1, JEM 1038 CSA, UL, BV, GL, DNV, RINA, RMROS, LROS, CCC Conforming to IEC 60529 Conforming to VDE 0106 Standard version Storage Operation Permissible at Uc (1) Without derating Without derating C C C m IP 2X front face with shrouds LA9 F Front face protected against direct finger contact with shrouds LA9 F TH -60+80 -5+55 -40+70 3000
Maximum operating altitude Operating positions
(not to be used for LC1 F780, F1700 and F2100) With derating
6 7 8 9 10
Selection : pages 5/194 to 5/217 References : pages 5/114 and 5/115 Dimensions : pages 5/140 to 5/142 Shock resistance (2) 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Vibration resistance (2) 5300 Hz
Apply the following derating coefficients: 0.75 on the pull-in voltage, 0.9 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1 Apply the following derating coefficients: 1.15 on the pull-in voltage, 1.1 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1 In either case: neither the making and breaking capacities nor the electrical and mechanical durabilities can be assured. Not to be used
Contactor open Contactor closed Contactor open Contactor closed
9 gn 15 gn 2 gn 6 gn
(1) In these conditions, it is recommended that LX9 F coils be used for contactor sizes F115 to F225. (2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil at Uc). Where higher resistance to mechanical shock is required, select shock-proof contactors. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/106
LC1 F225 1000 1500 8
LC1 F265 1000 1500 8
LC1 F330 1000 1500 8
LC1 F400 1000 1500 8
LC1 F500 1000 1500 8
LC1 F630 1000 1500 8
LC1 F780 1000 1500 8
LC1 F800 1000 1500 8
LC1 F1250 LC1 F1400 LC1 F1700 LC1 F2100 1000 1000 1000 1000 1500 8 1500 8 1500 8 1500 8
1 2 3 4 5
EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1, JEM 1038 CSA, UL, BV, GL, DNV, RINA, RMROS, LROS, CCC IP 20 front face with shrouds LA9 F Front face protected against direct finger contact with shrouds LA9 F TH -60+80 -5+55 -40+70 3000 -60+80 -5+55 -5+55 -60+80 -5+40 -40+60 UL, CSA, GL, LROS CSA, CCC, ETL-UL
(not to be used for LC1 F780, F1400, F1700 and F2100) Not to be used Apply the following derating coefficients: 0.75 on the pull-in voltage, 0.9 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1. Apply the following derating coefficients: 1.15 on the pull-in voltage, 1.1 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on the operational current in AC-1. In either case: neither the making and breaking capacities nor the electrical and mechanical durabilities can be assured
6 7
6 gn 15 gn 1.5 gn 5 gn
5 gn 15 gn 2.5 gn 5.5 gn
8 9 10
5/107
TeSys contactors
1 2 3 4 5 6
Contactor type Number of poles Rated operational current (le)(Ue y 440 V) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Frequency limits Conventional thermal current Rated making capacity In AC-3, q y 55 C In AC-1, q y 40 C Up to Of the operational current (1) q y 40 C A A V Hz A A A A A A A A A A A mW W W
LC1 F115 3 or 4 115 200 1000 162/3200 200
LC1 F150 3 or 4 150 250 1000 162/3200 250
LC1 F185 3 or 4 185 275 1000 162/3200 275
LC1 F225 3 or 4 225 315 1000 162/3200 315
LC1 F265 3 or 4 265 350 1000 162/3200 350
I rms conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Rated breaking capacity I rms conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Maximum permissible current For 10 s No current flowing for previous For 30 s 60 minutes, at q y 40 C For 1 min For 3 min For 10 min Short-circuit protection by fuses U y 440 V Motor circuit (type aM) With thermal overload relay (type gG) gG fuses At lth and 50 Hz AC-3 AC-1
Making current: 10 x I in AC-3 or 12 x I in AC-4 Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3 or 10 x I in AC-4 1100 640 520 400 320 125 200 200 0.37 5 15 Maximum c.s.a. 2 20 x 3 95 95 6 1200 700 600 450 350 160 200 250 0.35 8 22 1500 920 740 500 400 200 315 315 0.33 12 25 1800 1000 850 560 440 250 315 315 0.32 16 32 2200 1230 950 620 480 315 500 400 0.3 21 37
Average impedance per pole Power dissipation per pole for the above operational currents Connection Bar
Number of bars Bar Cable with lug Cable with connector Bolt diameter
mm mm2 mm2 mm
2 25 x 3 120 120 8
2 25 x 3 150 150 8
2 32 x 4 185 185 10
2 32 x 4 240 240 10
Tightening torque
N.m
10
18
18
35
35
7 8 9 10
Selection: pages 5/194 to 5/217 References: pages 5/114 and 5/115
(1) Sine wave without interference. Above these values, please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) With set of right-angled connectors LA9 F2100 (see page 5/125). (3) Paralleling of poles must be carried out only in accordance with the fuse manufacturer's recommendations.
Schemes: page 5/146
5/108
LC1 F330 3 or 4 330 400 1000 162/3200 400
LC1 F400 2, 3 or 4 400 500 1000 162/3200 500
LC1 F500 2, 3 or 4 500 700 1000 162/3200 700
LC1 F630 2, 3 or 4 630 1000 1000 162/3200 1000 1250
LC1 F780 3 or 4 780 1600 1000 162/3200 1600
LC1 F800 3 800 1000 1000 162/3200 1000
LC1 F1250 3 1260 1000 162/3200 1260
LC1 F1400 3 1400 1000 162/3200 1400
LC1 F1700 3 1700 1000 162/3200 1700
LC1 F2100 3 2100 (2) 1000 162/3200 2100 (2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1250
Making current: 10 x I in AC-3 or 12 x I in AC-4 Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3 or 10 x I in AC-4 2650 1800 1300 900 750 400 500 500 0.28 31 44 3600 2400 1700 1200 1000 400 630 500 0.26 42 65 4200 3200 2400 1500 1200 500 800 800 0.18 45 88 5050 4400 3400 2200 1600 630 800 1000 0.12 48 120 6250 5600 4600 3000 2200 800 1000 2 x 800 (3) 0.10 60 250 5500 4600 3600 2600 1700 800 1000 1000 0.12 77 120
Making current: 1.5 x I in AC-1 Making and breaking current: 1.5 x I in AC-1 8000 5200 4000 3000 2000 1000 0.12 120 8000 6000 4500 4000 2600 2 x 800 0.10 150 10000 7500 5500 4200 3000 2 x 800 (3) 0.10 200 10000 7500 5500 4200 3000 2 x 1000 (3) 0.10 200
2 30 x 5 240 10
2 30 x 5 2 x 150 10
2 40 x 5 2 x 240 10
2 3 60 x 5 60 x 5 12
2 100 x 5 2 x 12
2 60 x 5 12
2 100 x 5
2 100 x 5
3 100 x 5
4 100 x 5
3 x 12 4 x 12 ( 11.5 with set of right-angled ( 11.5 with set connectors LA9 F2100) of right-angled connectors LA9 F1250) 58 (35 with set 58 (35 with set of right-angled of right-angled connectors LA9 F2100) connectors LA9 F1250)
35
35
35
58
58
58
5/109
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Control circuit characteristics with LX1 or LX9 coil
1 2 3 4
Contactor type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits (q y 55 C) 50 or 60 Hz coils
50 or 60 Hz
LC1 F115 241000
LC1 F150
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
Operation Drop-out Operation Drop-out
0.851.1 Uc 0.350.55 Uc
0.851.1 Uc 0.350.55 Uc
40400 Hz coils
Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50 Hz Inrush
50 Hz coil 40400 Hz coil Cos j 50 Hz coil 40400 Hz coil Cos j 60 Hz coil 40400 Hz coil Cos j 60 Hz coil 40400 Hz coil Cos j
VA VA
550 0.3 45 0.3 660 0.3 55 0.3 1216 2335 515 10 2400 Min/max c.s.a. 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
550 0.3 45 0.3 660 0.3 55 0.3 1216 2335 515 10 2400
805 0.3 55 0.3 970 0.3 66 0.3 1824 2035 715 10 2400
805 0.3 55 0.3 970 0.3 66 0.3 1824 2035 715 10 2400
650 0.9 10 0.9 650 0.9 10 0.9 8 4065 100170 10 2400
Sealed
VA VA
a 60 Hz Inrush
VA VA
Sealed
VA VA
Heat dissipation
W Closing "C" Opening "O" In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour ms ms
5 6 7 8 9 10
Operating time (1)
Mechanical durability at Uc Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature y 55 C Connection Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque Mechanical latching
1 or 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 or 2 conductors
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors. For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F. See pages 5/240 to 5/267. (1) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate. (2) Control circuit characteristics with LX1 coil.
Schemes: page 5/147
5/110
LC1 F330 241000
LC1 F400 481000
LC1 F500
LC1 F630 481000
LC1 F780 110500
LC1 F800 110400
LC1 F1250 110...600
LC1 F1400 110...500 (2)
LC1 F1700 110500 (2)
LC1 F2100 110500 (2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0.851.1 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.350.55 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.250.5 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.4 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.25...0.5 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 0.30.5 Uc
650 0.9 10 0.9 650 0.9 10 0.9 8 4065 100170 10 2400
1075 0.9 15 0.9 1075 0.9 15 0.9 14 4075 100170 10 2400
1100 0.9 18 0.9 1100 0.9 18 0.9 18 4075 100170 10 2400
1650 0.9 22 0.9 1650 0.9 22 0.9 20 4080 100200 5 1200
2100 0.9 50 0.9 2100 0.9 50 0.9 2 x 22 4080 130230 5 600
1700 0.9 12 1700 0.9 12 25 6080 150180 5 600
1650 0.9 22 0.9 1650 0.9 22 0.9 20 4080 100...200 1 1200
2200 0.9 36 0.9 2200 0.9 36 0.9 2 x 18 4075 100...170 0.5 600
2200 0.9 36 0.9 2200 0.9 36 0.9 2 x 18 4075 100170 0.5 600
2200 0.9 36 0.9 2200 0.9 36 0.9 2 x 18 4075 100170 0.5 600
Min/max c.s.a. 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors. For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F. See pages 5/240 to 5/267.
5/111
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Control circuit: d.c.
Control circuit characteristics with LX4 coil
1 2 3 4 5
Contactor type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits (q y 55 C)
c Operation Drop-out
LC1 F115 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc
LC1 F150 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 560 4.5 3040 3050
LC1 F185 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 800 5 3040 3050
LC1 F225 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 800 5 3040 3050
LC1 F265 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 750 5 4050 4065
Inrush Sealed
W W ms ms
560 4.5 3040 3050
Average operating time at Uc (1)
Closing "C" Opening "O"
Mechanical durability at Uc
Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase applications, the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time. 10 10 10 10 10 2400 Min/max c.s.a. 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2 2400 2400 2400 2400
Maximum operating rate at In operating cycles per hour ambient temperature y 55 C Cabling Flexible cable 1 conductor without cable end 2 conductors Flexible cable 1 conductor with cable end 2 conductors Solid cable 1 conductor without cable end 2 conductors Tightening torque
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
6 7 8 9 10
Mechanical latching
Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors. For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F. See pages 5/240 to 5/267. (1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
Schemes: page 5/147
5/112
LC1 F330 24460 0.851.1 Uc 0.150.2 Uc 750 5 4050 4065
LC1 F400 48440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 1000 6 5060 4560
LC1 F500 48440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 1100 6 5060 4560
LC1 F630 48440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 1600 9 6070 4050
LC1 F780 110440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.4 Uc 2 x 1000 2 x 21 7080 100130
LC1 F800 110400 0.851.1 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 1900 12 6080 4050
LC1 F1250 48250 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 1600 9 6070 4050
LC1 F1400 110440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 2100 10 5060 4560
LC1 F1700 110440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 2100 10 5060 4560
LC1 F2100 110440 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.35 Uc 2100 10 5060 4560
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For all normal 3-phase applications. the arcing time is less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time. 10 2400 10 2400 10 2400 5 1200 5 600 5 600 1 1200 0.5 600 0.5 600 0.5 600
Min/max c.s.a. 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 1.2
Mechanical latch blocks LA6 DK must not be fitted on LC1 F contactors. For similar type of operation, use magnetic latching contactors CR1 F. See pages 5/240 to 5/267.
5/113
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors for motor control in utilisation category AC-3 (115 to 800 A)
3-pole contactors
1 2 3 4
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3
Rated operational current in AC-3 440 V up to A 115 150 185 225 265 330 400 500 630 780 800
220 V 230 V kW 30 LC1 F225 40 55

813079
660V 380V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V kW kW kW kW kW kW 55 59 59 75 80 65 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 335 400 450 80 100 110 140 180 220 280 375 425 450 80 100 110 140 200 250 295 400 425 450 90 110 129 160 200 257 355 400 450 450 100 110 129 160 220 280 335 450 475 475 65 100 100 147 160 185 335 450 450 450
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Screw fixing, cabling (1) LC1 F115pp LC1 F150pp LC1 F185pp LC1 F225pp LC1 F265pp LC1 F330pp LC1 F400pp LC1 F500pp LC1 F630pp LC1 F780pp LC1 F800pp
813080
Weight
kg 3.430 3.430 4.650 4.750 7.440 8.600 9.100 11.350 18.600 39.500 18.750
63 75 100 110 147 200 LC1 F630 220 250
5 6 7 8 9 10
Selection : pages 5/194 to 5/217 References : pages 5/106 and 5/113
Note: auxiliary contact blocks, modules and accessories: see pages 5/122 to 5/127. (1) Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered separately, except on contactors LC1 F780 (see page 5/126). (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office) . Volts a 24 48 110 115 120 208 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 LC1 F115F225 B5 E5 F5 FE5 M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5 50 Hz (coil LX1) E6 F6 G6 L6 M6 U6 Q6 R6 60 Hz (coil LX1) E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 40400 Hz (coil LX9) LC1 F265F330 B7 E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 40400 Hz (coil LX1) LC1 F400F630 E7 F7 FE7 G7 (3) L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 40400 Hz (coil LX1) LC1 F780 F7 FE7 F7 L7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 40400 Hz (coil LX1) LC1 F800 FW FW FW MW MW MW QW QW QW 40400 Hz (coil LX4) (4) Volts c 24 48 110 LC1 F115F330 (coil LX4 F) BD ED FD LC1 F400F630 ED FD (coil LX4 F) LC1 F780 FD (coil LX4 F) LC1 F800 FW (coil LX4 F) (3) F7 for LC1 F630. (4) Coil LX4F8pp + rectifier DR5TEpp. 125 220 GD MD GD MD GD MD FW MW 230 250 400 440 MD UD UD UD RD RD RD
MW
QW
5/114
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors for control in category AC-1, (200 to 2100 A )
2, 3 or 4-pole contactors
Maximum current in AC-1 ( y 40 C) A 200
813082
Number of poles
Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (2) Screw fixing, cabling (1) LC1 F115pp LC1 F1154pp LC1 F150pp LC1 F1504pp LC1 F185pp LC1 F1854pp LC1 F225pp LC1 F2254pp LC1 F265pp LC1 F2654pp LC1 F330pp LC1 F3304pp LC1 F4002pp LC1 F400pp LC1 F4004pp LC1 F5002pp LC1 F500pp LC1 F5004pp LC1 F6302pp LC1 F630pp LC1 F6304pp LC1 F1250pp LC1 F1400pp LC1 F780pp LC1 F7804pp LC1 F1700pp LC1 F2100pp
Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3 4
kg 3.430 3.830 3.430 3.830 4.650 5.450 4.750 5.550 7.440 8.540 8.600 9.500 8.000 9.100 10.200 9.750 11.350 12.950 15.500 18.600 21.500 19.000 29.000 39.500 48.000 30.000 31.000
LC1 F1854
250
3 4
813084
275
3 4
315
3 4
350 LC1 F4004 400
3 4 3 4
813083
500
2 3 4
700 LC1 F6304
2 3 4
568674
1000
2 3 4
1260 1400 1600 LC1 F1700 1700

568675
3 3 3 4 3 3
2100 (3)
Note: auxiliary contact blocks, modules and accessories: see pages 5/122 to 5/127. (1) Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered separately (except LC1 F780, LC1 F1250, LC1 F1400, LC1 F1700 and LC1 F2100), see page 5/126. (2) Standard control circuit voltages, see previous page. (3) With set of right-angled connectors LA9 F2100 (see page 5/125).
LC1 F2100
5/115
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys F reversing contactors for motor control in utilisation category AC-3 (115 to 265 A), pre-assembled
3-pole reversing contactors (horizontally mounted) (1)
Operational current in AC-3 440 V up to A 115 150 185 225 265 Maximum Contactors operasupplied tional without coil (2) voltage Complete reference Fixing, cabling (3) V 1000 LC2F115 1000 1000 1000 1000 LC2F150 LC2F185 LC2F225 LC2F265 Weight
1 2 3 4 5
DB402428
Pre-wired power connections

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
LC2F115
220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V kW kW kW kW kW kW kW 30 55 59 59 75 80 65 40 55 63 75 75 90 110 132 80 100 110 140 80 100 110 140 90 110 129 160 100 110 129 160 65 100 100 147
kg 7.560 7.560 10.100 14.200 16.480

Description Power terminal protection shrouds For reversing contactors LC2F115 LC2F150, F185 LC2F225, F265 Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules Quantity required 2 2 2 Reference LA9F701 LA9F702 LA9F703 See pages 5/122 to 5/127 Weight kg 0.250 0.250 0.250
6 7 8 9 10
Selection: pages 5/194 to 5/217 Dimensions: pages 5/148 to 5/150
(1) Fitted with a mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Order separately 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2contactors, see page 5/123 For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127. (2) Coils to be ordered separately: - a.c. supply, see pages 5/130 and 5/131, - d.c. supply, see page 5/133. (3) Screw fixing. Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered separately, see above.
Schemes: page 5/151
5/116
TeSys contactors
TeSys F changeover contactor pairs for control in utilisation category AC-1 (200 to 350A), pre-assembled
4-pole changeover contactor pairs (horizontally mounted) (1)
Pre-wired power connections
Utilisation category AC-1 Non inductive loads Maximum operational current q < 40 C Maximum operational voltage Contactors supplied without coil (2) Complete reference Fixing, cabling (3) LC2F1154 LC2F1504 LC2F1854 LC2F2254 LC2F2654
526098
Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC2F1854
A 200 250 275 315 350
V 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
kg 8.860 8.860 12.100 15.200 19.480

Description Power terminal protection shrouds For changeover pairs LC2F1154 Quantity required 2 Reference LA9F706 LA9F707 LA9F708 See pages 5/122 to 5/127 Weight kg 0.250 0.250 0.250
LC2F1504, F1854 2 LC2F2254, F2654 2 Auxiliary contact blocks and add-on modules
(1) Fitted with a mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking. Order separately 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2contactors, see page 5/123 For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127. (2) Coils to be ordered separately: - a.c. supply, see pages 5/130 and 5/131, - d.c. supply, see page 5/133. (3) Screw fixing. Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered separately, see above.
Schemes: page 5/151
5/117
Combinations
TeSys contactors
TeSysF reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs
Components for assembling 3-pole reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Horizontally mounted Mechanical interlocks
LA9Fp970 (2)

Reversing contactors LA9Fppp76 (2)
L1 L2 L3
1 2 3
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type: LC1F115 LC1F150 LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F630 LC1F800
3-pole changeover contactor pairs (1) LA9Fppp82 (2)

1/L3 3 1/L2 1/L1 2/L1 1 2/L2 3 4 L2 5 2/L3 L3 6
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
Vertically mounted
LA9FF4F LA9FG4G LA9FH4H LA9FJ4J LA9FK4K LA9FL4L
4 5 6 7 8
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type: LC1F115 LC1F150 LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F630 LC1F800 Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings, see page 5/120
LC1F780
LA9FX970
(1) For 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/120 and 5/121. (2) Complete references: see page 5/119.
9 10
5/118
L1
A2
A1
References
TeSys contactors
TeSysF reversing contactors and changeover pairs

Components for assembling 3-pole reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating
Contactor type (1) Set of power connections Reference Weight kg Mechanical interlock Kit reference Weight kg
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
For assembly of 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control

Horizontally mounted LC1F115 LC1F150 LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F630 or F800 Vertically mounted LC1F115 or F150 LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 or F330 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F630 or F800 LC1F780 LA9FF976 LA9F15076 LA9FG976 LA9F22576 LA9FH976 LA9FJ976 LA9FJ976 LA9FK976 LA9FL976 0.600 0.600 0.780 1.500 1.500 2.100 2.100 2.350 3.800
LA9FF970 LA9FF970 LA9FG970 LA9FG970 LA9FJ970 LA9FJ970 LA9FJ970 LA9FJ970 LA9FL970
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (3)
LA9FF4F LA9FG4G LA9FG4G LA9FH4H LA9FJ4J LA9FK4K LA9FL4L LA9FX970 (3)
0.345 0.350 0.350 1.060 1.200 1.200 1.220 6.100
For assembly of 3-pole changeover contactor pairs (4)

Horizontally mounted LC1F115 LC1F150 LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F630 or F800 LA9FF982 LA9F15082 LA9FG982 LA9F22582 LA9FH982 LA9FJ982 LA9FJ982 LA9FK982 LA9FL982 0.460 0.460 0.610 1.200 1.200 1.800 1.800 2.300 3.400 LA9FF970 LA9FF970 LA9FG970 LA9FG970 LA9FJ970 LA9FJ970 LA9FJ970 LA9FJ970 LA9FL970 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150
Vertically mounted LC1F115 or F150 (2) LA9FF4F 0.345 (2) LA9FG4G 0.350 LC1F185 (2) LA9FG4G 0.350 LC1F225 (2) LA9FH4H 1.060 LC1F265 or F330 (2) LA9FJ4J 1.200 LC1F400 (2) LA9FK4K 1.200 LC1F500 (2) LA9FL4L 1.220 LC1F630 or F800 (3) LA9FX970 (3) 7.800 LC1F780 (1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/114 and 5/115. For the 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 required to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 5/123 For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127. (2) With the exception of contactors LC1 F780, all power connections are to be made by the customer. (3) Double mechanical interlock mechanism with 2 interlock connecting rods and 3 power connecting links. (4) For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/120 and 5/121.
Schemes: page 5/151
5/119
Combinations
TeSys contactors
TeSysF changeover contactor pairs
Components for assembling 3 and 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly
Horizontally mounted
LA9Fp970

4-pole changeover contactor pairs (1) LA9Fppp77
1N 3 1/L3 5 1/L2 7 1/L1 1 2/L1 3 2/L2 5 2/L3 L3 6 2N 7 N 8 A2 A1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type: LC1F1154 LC1F1504 LC1F1854 LC1F2254 LC1F2654 LC1F3304 LC1F4004 LC1F5004 LC1F6304
A2
A1
2 L1
Vertically mounted
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type: LC1F1154 LC1F1504 LC1F1854 LC1F2254 LC1F2654 LC1F3304 LC1F4004 LC1F5004 LC1F6304
Assembly A LA9FF4F LA9FG4G Assembly B LA9FH4H LA9FJ4J LA9FK4K LA9FL4L Assembly C LA9FX971
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings, type: LC1F115 or F1154 LC1F150 or F1504 LC1F185 or F1854 LC1F225 or F2254 LC1F265 or F2654 LC1F330 or F3304 LC1F400 or F4004 LC1F500 or F5004 LC1F630 or F6304 LC1F800
Assembly A LA9FG4F
Assembly B LA9FH4F, LA9FH4G LA9FJ4F, LA9FJ4G LA9FK4F, LA9FK4G LA9FL4F, LA9FL4G
Assembly C LA9FJ4H LA9FK4H, LA9FK4J LA9FL4H, LA9FL4J and LA9FL4K
Contactor pairs assembled using 3 contactors of identical or different ratings, type: LC1F115 or F1154 LC1F150 or F1504 LC1F185 or F1854 LC1F225 or F2254 LC1F265 or F2654 LC1F330 or F3304 LC1F400 or F4004 LC1F500 or F5004 LC1F630 or F6304 LC1F800
LA9Fp4p4p: see pages 5/128 and 5/129.
Important: the contactor ratings must be in decreasing size from top to bottom. (1) For 3-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/118 and 5/119.
5/120
L2
References
TeSys contactors
TeSysF changeover contactor pairs
Components for assembling 3 and 4-pole changeover contactor pairs, for customer assembly Control circuit: a.c. or d.c.
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating
Set of power connections Reference Weight kg LA9FF977 LA9F15077 LA9FG977 LA9F22577 LA9FH977 LA9FJ977 LA9FJ977 LA9FK977 LA9FL977 0.460 0.460 0.610 1.200 1.200 1.800 1.800 2.300 3.400 Mechanical interlock Kit reference Weight kg LA9FF970 LA9FF970 LA9FG970 LA9FG970 LA9FJ970 LA9FJ970 LA9FJ970 LA9FJ970 LA9FL970 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150
For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs (1)

Contactor type (2) Horizontally mounted LC1F1154 LC1F1504 LC1F1854 LC1F2254 LC1F2654 LC1F3304 LC1F4004 LC1F5004 LC1F6304 Vertically mounted LC1F1154 or F1504 LC1F1854 LC1F2254 LC1F2654 or F3304 LC1F4004 LC1F5004 LC1F6304 LC1F7804
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (4)
LA9FF4F LA9FG4G LA9FG4G LA9FH4H LA9FJ4J LA9FK4K LA9FL4L LA9FX971 (4)
0.345 0.350 0.350 1.060 1.200 1.200 1.220 7.800
Contactor pairs assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings

For assembly of 3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
Contactor type(1) At bottom Vertically mounted LC1F115 or F1154 or LC1F150 or F1504 At top Mechanical interlock Kit reference Weight kg LA9FG4F LA9FG4F LA9FH4F LA9FH4F LA9FJ4F LA9FK4F LA9FL4F LA9FH4G LA9FH4G LA9FJ4G LA9FK4G LA9FL4G LA9FJ4H LA9FK4H LA9FL4H LA9FK4J LA9FL4J LA9FL4K 0.350 0.350 0.870 0.870 0.930 0.940 0.940 0.860 0.860 0.940 0.940 0.950 1.130 1.130 1.140 1.200 1.210 1.210
LC1F185 or F1854 or LC1F225 or F2254
LC1F265 or F2654 or LC1F330 or F3304 LC1F400 or F4004 LC1F500 or F5004
LC1F185 or F1854 LC1F225 or F2254 LC1F265 or F2654 LC1F330 or F3304 LC1F400 or F4004 LC1F500 or F5004 LC1F630, F6304 or F800 LC1F265 or F2654 LC1F330 or F3304 LC1F400 or F4004 LC1F500 or F5004 LC1F630, F6304 or F800 LC1F400 or F4004 LC1F500 or F5004 LC1F630, F6304 or F800 LC1F500 or F5004 LC1F630 or F6304 or F800 LC1F630 or F6304 or F800
For assembly of reversers using 3 contactors, vertically mounted

See pages 5/128 and 5/129. (1) For assembly of 3-pole changeover contactor pairs, see pages 5/118 and 5/120. (2) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 5/114 and 5/115. For the 2 auxiliary contact blocks LAD Np1 required to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors, see page 5/123. For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127. (3) All power connections are to be made by the customer. (4) Double mechanical interlock mechanism with 2 interlock connecting rods and 4 power connecting links.
Schemes: page 5/151
5/121
1 2
LAD N
3 4
LAD N, LAD C LAD N10, N01 LC1 F
5 6 7 8 9
LA1 DX, DY, DZ LAD R
LAD T, LAD S
10
5/122
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors

For use in normal operating environments
Number of contacts Maximum number of blocks per contactor Clip-on mounting 1 Composition Reference Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 1 2 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 2
1 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 (1) 1 1 2 2
LAD N10 LAD N01 LAD N11 LAD N20 LAD N02 LAD N22 LAD N13 LAD N40 LAD N04 LAD N31 LAD C22 LAD N11P LAD N11G LAD N22P LAD N22G
kg 0.020 0.020 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.050
With terminal referencing conforming to EN 50012

2 2
This type of connection is not possible for blocks with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the figure 6 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N116.
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks with dust and damp protected contacts
Recommended for use in particularly harsh industrial environments
Number of contacts Maximum number of blocks per contactor Clip-on mounting 2 Composition Reference Weight
2 2 2 2
2 (2) 2 1
LA1 DX20 LA1 DY20 LA1 DZ40 LA1 DZ31 Reference
kg 0.040 0.040 0.050 0.050
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks

Number of contacts 1 N/O + 1 N/C Maximum number of blocks per contactor Clip-on mounting 2 Time delay Type Range s LAD T0 LAD T2 LAD T4 LAD S2 LAD R0 LAD R2 LAD R4 Weight
On-delay 0.13 (3) 0.130 10180 130 (4) Off-delay 0.13 (3) 0.130 10180
kg 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
(1) Including 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break (2) Device fitted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals. (3) With extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s. (4) With switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact.
5/123
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Suppressor blocks
Suppressor blocks
813089
1 2
b Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to "high frequency" interference. For use only in cases where the voltage is virtually sinusoidal, i.e. less than 5% total harmonic distortion. b Voltage limited to 3 Uc max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max. b Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.3 times the normal time). Mounting Clip-on mounting on all ratings and all a.c. coils. LA9 D09981 LA4 Fppp Suppressor block bracket Uc a 2448 V 50110 V 127240 V 265415 V Reference LA4FRCE LA4FRCF LA4FRCP LA4FRCV LA9D09981 Weight kg 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.010
RC circuits (resistor-capacitor)
3
813087
Varistors (peak limiting)

b Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Clip-on mounting on all ratings a or c LA4FVE 2448 V and all coils. LA4FVF 50110 V 127240 V LA4FVP 265415 V LA4FVV 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040
4 5
LA9 Fp602
Diodes
b No overvoltage or oscillating frequencies. b Increase in drop-out time (3 to 4 times the normal time). b Polarised component. c Clip-on mounting on all ratings 2448 V and all d.c. coils. 55110 V 125250 V 280440 V
LA4FDE LA4FDF LA4FDP LA4FDV
0.040 0.040 0.040 0.040
Bidirectional peak limiting diodes (transil)

b Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to between 2 and 2.5 times Uc max. b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. 0.040 Clip-on mounting on all ratings a or c LA4FTE 2448 V and all coils. LA4FTF 0.040 50110 V 0.040 127240 V LA4FTP 0.040 265415 V LA4FTV
6 7 8
813088
For use on 4-pole contactors LA9 Fp601 Set of 4 links Set reference LA9FF602 LA9FG602 LA9FH602 LA9FK602 LA9FL602 Weight kg 0.200 0.350 1.000 1.750 3.000
Links for parallel connection of poles (in pairs)

LC1F1154 LC1F1504, F1854 LC1F2254, F2654, F3304, F4004 LC1F5004 LC1F6304
Links for star connection of 3 poles

LC1F115 LC1F150, F185 LC1F225, F265, F330, F400 LC1F500 LC1F630, F800 DZ3 FA3 LA9FF601 LA9FG601 LA9FH601 LA9FK601 LA9FL601 0.035 0.050 0.120 0.180 0.550
813090
9 10
Control circuit voltage take-off from power terminals

For use with contactors LC1F115 LC1F150, F185 LC1F225F500 LC1F630, F800 Mounted on bolt size M6 M8 M10 M12 Sold in lots of 10 10 10 10 Unit reference DZ3FA3 DZ3GA3 DZ3HA3 DZ3JA3 Weight kg 0.004 0.004 0.006 0.009
5/124
TeSys contactors
TeSys Fcontactors
Accessories
Right-angled connectors
For use with Contactors Thermal overload relays (1) LC1F115 LA9Fp981 LC1F150, F185 LR9F5p69, F5p71, LR9F69, F71 LR9F5p67, LR9F67
813091
For contactors or thermal overload relays

With connector plates Width 15 mm Type Rear Side Large surface area Rear Side Large surface area Rear Side Large surface area Rear Side Large surface area Rear Side Large surface area With connector plates Width 60 mm 60 mm Type Rear Rear Set of 3 connectors Set reference Weight kg LA9FF981 0.060 LA9FF979 LA9FF980 LA9FG981 LA9FG979 LA9FG980 LA9FJ981 LA9FJ979 LA9FJ980 LA9FK981 LA9FK979 LA9FK980 LA9FL981 LA9FL979 LA9FL980 0.240 0.150 0.080 0.350 0.200 0.430 0.750 0.490 0.480 0.920 0.800 1.210 2.570 3.190
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
20 mm
813093
LC1F225, F265, F330, F400 LA9Fp979 LC1F500

510487
LR9F7p75,LR9F75
25 mm
LR9F7p79, F7p81, LR9F79, F81
30 mm
LC1F630, F800
LR9F7p81,LR9F81
40 mm
For use with Contactors LA9FL980 LC1F1250 LC1 F1400, F1700, F2100
Set of 6 connectors Set reference Weight kg LA9F1250 5.480 LA9F2100 9.550
DB402137
For use with Contactors Thermal overload relays (1) LR9F5p57, F5p63 LC1F115 LR9F5p67, F5p69 LR9F69, F71 LC1F150 LR9F5p57, F5p63 and F185 LC1F185 LA9F1250 LC1F225 and F265 LR9F5p71, LR9F71 LR9F5p71, LR9F71 LR9F7p75, F7p79 LR9F75, F79 LC1F330 and F400 LC1F400 LC1F500 LR9F7p75, F7p79 LR9F75, F79 LR9F7p81,LR9F81 LR9F7p75, F7p79 LR9F7p81 LR9F75, F79, F81 LR9F7p81, LR9F81
For reversing contactors or "star-delta" contactors combined with a thermal overload relay
Width of connector plates 15 mm 20 mm 25 mm 25 mm 25 mm 25 mm 25 mm 30 mm Set of 3 busbars Set reference LA7F401 LA7F402 LA7F407 LA7F403 LA7F404 LA7F404 LA7F404 LA7F405 Weight kg 0.110 0.110 0.160 0.160 0.160 0.160 0.160 0.270
DF569547
LC1F630, F800
40 mm
LA7F406
0.600
(1) For protection relays class 10, replace the p with a 3 and for class 20, replace the p with a 5. LA9F2100
5/125
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Accessories
Insulated terminal blocks
1 2
813094
For use on 3-pole contactors LC1F115, F150, F185
Connection 1 x 16150 mm2 or 2 x 1695 mm2
Tightening tool 4 mm hexagonal socket key
Set of 2 blocks Set reference LA9F103
Weight kg 0.560
Power terminal protection shrouds

LA9 F103 For use on 2, 3 and 4-pole contactors LC1F115 LC1F150, F185 LC1F225, F265, F330, F400 and F4002 F500 and F5002 LC1F630, F6302 and F800 LC1F1154 Number of Set reference shrouds per set 6 LA9F701 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 LA9F702 LA9F703 LA9F704 LA9F706 LA9F707 LA9F708 LA9F709 Weight kg 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LA9 F701
813095
LC1F1504 and F1854 LC1F2254, F2654, F3304, F4004, F5004 LC1F6304
5/126
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Spare parts
813096
Per pole: 2 fixed contacts, 1 moving contact , 2 deflectors, 1 back-plate, clamping screws and washers. For contactor 2-pole Type LC1 F4002 LC1 F5002 LC1 F6302 LC1 F6302S011 LC1 F115. F150 LC1 F185. F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330. F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 LC1 F780 LC1 F800 LC1 F630S011 4-pole LC1 F1504. F1154 LC1 F1854. F2254 LC1 F2654 LC1 F3304. F4004 LC1 F5004 LC1 F6304 LC1 F7804 LC1 F6304S011 Replacement for 2 poles 2 poles 2 poles 2 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 1 pole 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 1 pole 4 poles 4 poles Reference LA5F400802 LA5F500802 LA5F630802 LA5F630802S011 LA5FF431 LA5FG431 LA5FH431 LA5F400803 LA5F500803 LA5F630803 LA5F780801 (1) LA5F780803 LA5F800803 LA5F630803S011 LA5FF441 LA5FG441 LA5FH441 LA5F400804 LA5F500804 LA5F630804 LA5F780801 (1) LA5F780804 LA5F630804S011 Weight kg 1.350 1.950 4.700 4.800 0.270 0.350 0.660 2.000 2.950 6.100 4.700 13.200 6.100 6.200 0.360 0.465 0.880 2.700 3.900 8.150 4.700 17.300 8.400
Sets of contacts
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3-pole LA5 FG431
569555
Arc chambers
For contactor LA5F40050 2-pole LC1 F4002 LC1 F5002 LC1 F6302 LC1 F6302S011 LC1 F115 LC1 F150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 LC1 F780 LC1 F800 LC1 F630S011 LC1 F1250 LC1 F1400 LC1 F1700 LC1 F2100 LC1 F1154 LC1 F1504 LC1 F1854 LC1 F2254 LC1 F2654 LC1 F3304 LC1 F4004 LC1 F5004 LC1 F6304 LC1 F7804 LC1 F6304S011 Type Replacement for 2 poles 2 poles 2 poles 2 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 1 pole 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 6 poles 6 poles 6 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 4 poles 1 pole 4 poles Reference LA5F400250 LA5F500250 LA5F630250 LA5F630250 LA5F11550 LA5F15050 LA5F18550 LA5F22550 LA5F26550 LA5F33050 LA5F40050 LA5F50050 LA5F63050 LA5F780150 (1) LA5F80050 LA5F63050 LA5F125050 LA5F140050 (2) LA5F170050 (2) LA5F210050 (2) LA5F115450 LA5F150450 LA5F185450 LA5F225450 LA5F265450 LA5F330450 LA5F400450 (3) LA5F500450 (3) LA5F630450 (4) LA5F780150 (1) LA5F630450 Weight kg 0.870 1.250 2.100 2.100 0.490 0.490 0.670 0.670 0.920 1.300 1.300 1.850 3.150 2.100 3.150 3.150 3.150 3.750 3.750 3.750 0.660 0.660 0.910 1.000 1.220 1.740 1.740 2.500 4.200 2.100 4.200
3-pole
569556
4-pole LA5F210050
(1) Comprising 2 identical items per pole. (2) Comprising three 2-pole arc chambers. (3) Comprising two 2-pole arc chambers. (4) Comprising single-pole arc chambers.
5/127
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Accessories for assembly of reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs using 3 contactors, vertically mounted - for customer assembly
Closing of one of the 3 contactors prevents closing of the other 2.
813215
1 2 3
Mechanical interlock kits

Contactor type (1) Top Middle
Bottom LC1F115, F150, F1154 or F1504 LC1F115, F150, F1154 or F1504
LC1F115, F150, F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, F1854 or F2254
LC1F115, F150, F1154 or F1504 LC1F115, F150, F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, F1854 or F2254
Mechanical interlock (2) Kit reference (3) Weight kg LA9FF4F4F 0.554 LA9FG4F4F 0.559
LA9Fp4p4p
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC1F115, F150, LA9FG4G4F 0.559 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LA9FG4G4G 0.562 F1854 or F2254 LC1F265, F330, LC1F115, F150, LC1F115, F150, LA9FH4F4F 1.350 F1154 or F1504 F1154 or F1504 F2654 or F3304 LC1F185, F225, LC1F115, F150, LA9FH4G4F 1.375 F1854 or F2254 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LA9FH4G4G 1.375 F1854 or F2254 LC1F265, F330, LC1F115, F150, LA9FH4H4F 1.524 F2654 or F3304 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LA9FH4H4G 1.527 F1854 or F2254 LC1F265, F330, LA9FH4H4H 1.684 F2654 or F3304 LC1F400, F4002 LC1F115, F150, LA9FJ4F4F 1.421 LC1F115, F150, F1154 or F1504 or F4004 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LC1F115, F150, LA9FJ4G4F 1.424 F1854 or F2254 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LA9FJ4G4G 1.428 F1854 or F2254 LC1F265, F330, LC1F115, F150, LA9FJ4H4F 1.595 F2654 or F3304 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LA9FJ4H4G 1.598 F1854 or F2254 LC1F265, F330, LA9FJ4H4H 1.755 F2654 or F3304 LC1F400, F4002 LC1F115, F150, LA9FJ4J4F 1.666 or F4004 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LA9FJ4J4G 1.669 F1854 or F2254 LC1F265, F330, LA9FJ4J4H 1.829 F2654 or F3304 LC1-F400, F4002 LA9FJ4J4J 1.890 or F4004 LC1F500, F5002 LC1F115, F150, LC1F115, F150, LA9FK4F4F 1.421 or F5004 F1154 or F1504 F1154 or F1504 (continued on LC1F185, F225, LC1F115, F150, LA9FK4G4F 1.424 page 5/129) F1854 or F2254 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LA9FK4G4G 1.428 F1854 or F2254 LC1F265, F330, LC1F115, F150, LA9FK4H4F 1.595 F2654 or F3304 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LA9FK4H4G 1.598 F1854 or F2254 LC1F265, F330, LA9FK4H4H 1.755 F2654 or F3304 LC1F400, F4002 LC1F115, F150, LA9FK4J4F 1.666 or F4004 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LA9FK4J4G 1.669 F2654 or F3304 LC1F265, F330, LA9FK4J4H 1.829 F2654 or F3304 LC1F400, F4002 1.896 LA9FK4J4J or F4004 LC1F500, F5002 LC1F115, F150, LA9FK4K4F 1.666 or F5004 F1154 or F1504 (1) To order the 3 contactors, see pages 5/114 and 5/115. For auxiliary contact blocks LADN02 used for electrical locking, see page 5/123. For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127. (2) Minimum distances between contactors, see page 5/129. (3) The kit contains the lever arms, the 2 x 8 mm rods and all parts required for assembly.
5/128
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Accessories for assembly of reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs using 3 contactors, vertically mounted - for customer assembly
Mechanical interlock kits (continued)
Contactor type (1) Top Middle LC1F500, F5002 or F5004 (continued) LC1F500, F5002 or F5004 Bottom
813216
LA9Fp4p4p
LC1F185, F225, F1854 or F2254 LA9FK4K4H 1.825 LC1F265, F330, F2654 or F3304 LC1F400, F4002 1.896 LA9FK4K4J or F4004 LC1-F500, F5002 LA9FK4K4K 1.896 or F5004 LC1F630, F800, LC1F115, F150, LC1F115, F150, LA9FL4F4F 1.428 F6302 or F6304 F1154 or F1504 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LC1F115, F150, LA9FL4G4F 1.431 F1854 or F2254 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LA9FL4G4G 1.436 F1854 or F2254 LC1F265, F330, LC1F115, F150, LA9FL4H4F 1.602 F2654 or F3304 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LA9FL4H4G 1.606 F1854 or F2254 LC1F265, F330, LA9FL4H4H 1.751 F2654 or F3304 LC1F400, F4002 LC1F115, F150, LA9FL4J4F 1.673 or F4004 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LA9FL4J4G 1.676 F1854 or F2254 LC1F265, F330, LA9FL4J4H 1.832 F2654 or F3304 LC1F400, F4002 1.903 LA9FL4J4J or F4004 LC1-F500, F5002 LC1F115, F150, LA9FK4K4F 1.666 or F5004 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LA9FK4K4G 1.669 F1854 or F2254 LC1F265, F330, LA9FK4K4H 1.825 F2654 or F3304 LC1F400, F4002 1.896 LA9FK4K4J or F4004 LC1-F500, F5002 LA9FK4K4K 1.896 or F5004 LC1F630, F800, LC1F115, F150, LA9FL4L4F 1.680 F6302 or F6304 F1154 or F1504 LC1F185, F225, LA9FL4L4G 1.683 F1854 or F2254 LC1F265, F330, LA9FL4L4H 1.910 F2654 or F3304 LC1F400, F4002 LA9FL4L4J 1.896 or F4004 LC1F500, F5002 LA9FL4L4K 1.896 or F5004 LC1F630, F800, LA9FL4L4L 1.920 F6302, or F6304 (1) To order the 3 contactors, see pages 5/114 and 5/115. For auxiliary contact blocks LADN02 used for electrical locking, see page 5/123. For accessories, see pages 5/124 to 5/127. (2) Minimum distances between contactors. This is the distance, in mm, between the centres of two adjacent contactors (between the top and middle contactors or between the middle and bottom contactors). Contactor Bottom or top
Mechanical interlock (2) Kit reference (3) Weight kg LA9FK4K4G 1.669
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Middle LC1F115 LC1F185 LC1F265 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F630 or F225 or F150 or F330 or F800 LC1F115 or F150 200 210 240 250 270 320 210 220 250 250 270 330 LC1F185 or F225 240 250 250 260 280 350 LC1F265 or F330 260 280 320 LC1F400 250 250 260 280 300 340 LC1F500 270 270 280 320 330 350 320 340 380 LC1F630 or F800 (3) The kit contains the lever arms, the 2 x 8 mm rods and all parts required for assembly.
5/129
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
a.c. 50/60 Hz supply coils
References
1
813181
Maximum ambient air temperature: 55 C. Above this, use an LX9F coil, see page 5/135. Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): y 2400. Control circuit Average Inductance Voltage Reference Weight voltage resistance at of closed code Uc - 50 Hz Uc - 60 Hz 20 C 10 % circuit W V V H kg
For contactors LC1F115 and LC1F150
2 3 4 5 6 7
LX1 FGppp
813182
LX1 FFppp
24 0.27 0.04 B5 42 0.94 0.13 D5 48 0.78 0.11 E6 48 1.17 0.16 E5 110 4.55 0.59 F6 120 4.77 0.64 G6 110 6.38 0.86 F5 115 6.38 0.86 FE5 127/132 9.14 1.15 G5 200/208 14.5 1.87 L6 220 18.4 2.38 M6 240 18.9 2.5 U6 220 265/277 28.1 3.44 M5 230 28.1 3.44 P5 240 31.1 4.1 U5 380 57.2 7.05 Q6 440 72.6 9.21 R6 380 460/480 86.9 10.3 Q5 400 86.9 10.3 V5 415 95.1 12 N5 500 141 17 S5 660 172 20.3 Y6 660/690 254 28.9 Y5 1000 414 48.9 1000 610 68.5 Specifications Average consumption at 20C: - inrush 50Hz: 550VA; 60Hz: 660 VA, - sealed 50Hz: 45VA; 60 Hz: 55 VA, cos j= 0.3. Heat dissipation: 1216 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 2335 ms, opening = 515 ms.
LX1FF024 LX1FF042 LX1FF040 LX1FF048 LX1FF092 LX1FF095 LX1FF110 LX1FF110 LX1FF127 LX1FF162 LX1FF184 LX1FF187 LX1FF220 LX1FF220 LX1FF240 LX1FF316 LX1FF360 LX1FF380 LX1FF380 LX1FF415 LX1FF500 LX1FF550 LX1FF660 LX1FF850 LX1FF1000
0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430

24 0.18 0.03 B5 42 0.57 0.09 48 0.47 0.08 E6 48 0.71 0.12 E5 110 2.74 0.44 F6 115/120 2.87 0.49 G6 110 4.18 0.65 F5 115 4.18 0.65 FE5 127/132 5.35 0.86 G5 200/208 8.8 1.41 L6 220 11.1 1.8 M6 240 11.4 1.87 U6 220 265/277 16.5 2.59 M5 230 16.5 2.59 P5 240 20.1 3.09 U5 380 34 5.32 Q6 440 43.5 6.94 R6 380 460/480 51.3 7.75 Q5 400 51.3 7.75 V5 415 62.3 9.06 N5 500 82.7 12.8 S5 660 103 15.3 Y6 660/690 154 21.8 Y5 1000 249 36.6 1000 370 51.6 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush 50 Hz: 805VA; 60Hz: 970 VA, - sealed 50 Hz: 55VA; 60Hz: 66 VA, cos j= 0.3. Heat dissipation: 1824 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 2035 ms, opening = 715 ms. LX1FG024 LX1FG042 LX1FG040 LX1FG048 LX1FG092 LX1FG095 LX1FG110 LX1FG110 LX1FG127 LX1FG162 LX1FG184 LX1FG187 LX1FG220 LX1FG220 LX1FG240 LX1FG316 LX1FG360 LX1FG380 LX1FG380 LX1FG415 LX1FG500 LX1FG550 LX1FG660 LX1FG850 LX1FG1000 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550
8 9 10
5/130
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils
References
Low sealed consumption. Operate on networks with harmonic numbers y 7. Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): y 2400. Control Average resistance Inductance Voltage circuit at 20 C 10 % of closed code voltage circuit Inrush Sealed Uc W W V H
Reference
Weight
1 2 3 4 5
kg 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750
LX1 FHppp2
24 0.8 20 (1) B7 LX1FH0242 48 2.96 67 (1) E7 LX1FH0482 110 18.7 440 (1) F7 LX1FH1102 115 18.7 440 (1) FE7 LX1FH1102 120/127 22.9 536 (1) G7 LX1FH1272 200/208 58.4 1366 (1) L7 LX1FH2002 220 70.6 1578 (1) M7 LX1FH2202 230 70.6 1578 (1) P7 LX1FH2202 240 87.94 1968 (1) U7 LX1FH2402 277 113 2444 (1) W7 LX1FH2772 380 217 4631 (1) Q7 LX1FH3802 400 217 4631 (1) V7 LX1FH3802 415 217 4631 (1) N7 LX1-FH3802 440 265 6731 (1) R7 LX1FH4402 480/500 329 8543 (1) S7 LX1FH5002 (1) X7 LX1FH6002 600/660 296 10245 (1) LX1FH10002 1000 696 25880 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz and cos j = 0.9: - inrush: 600700 VA, - sealed: 810 VA. Heat dissipation: 8W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4065 ms, opening = 100170 ms.
813183
For contactor LC1F400

48 1.6 29.5 0.18 E7 110/120 9.8 230 1.35 F7 115 9.8 230 1.35 FE7 120/127 12.8 280 1.75 G7 200/208 30 815 4.1 L7 220 37 1030 5.1 M7 230 37 1030 5.1 P7 240 47.5 1320 6.4 U7 265/277 61 1700 8.1 W7 380 120 3310 15.8 Q7 400 120 3310 15.8 V7 415 145 4070 19.4 N7 440 145 4070 19.4 R7 500 190 4980 25.5 S7 550/600 243 6310 27.4 X7 84.6 1000 720 19 420 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz and cos j = 0.9: - inrush: 10001150 VA, - sealed: 1218 VA. Heat dissipation: 14W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4075 ms, opening = 100170. (1) Please consult your Regional Sales Office. LX1FJ048 LX1FJ110 LX1FJ110 LX1FJ127 LX1FJ200 LX1FJ220 LX1FJ220 LX1FJ240 LX1FJ280 LX1FJ380 LX1FJ380 LX1FJ415 LX1FJ415 LX1FJ500 LX1FJ600 LX1FJ1000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
813184
6 7 8 9 10
LX1 FJppp
5/131
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
1 2 3
LX1 FKppp
Low sealed consumption. Operate on networks with harmonic numbers y 7. Control Average resistance Inductance Voltage circuit at 20 C 10 % of closed code voltage circuit Inrush Sealed Uc W W V H
Reference
Weight
kg 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150

48 1.9 33.5 0.19 E7 LX1FK048 110/120 9.55 260 1.25 F7 LX1FK110 115 9.55 260 1.25 FE7 LX1FK110 120/127 11.5 315 1.5 G7 LX1FK127 200/208 29 735 3.75 L7 LX1FK200 220 35.5 915 4.55 M7 LX1FK220 230 35.5 915 4.55 P7 LX1FK220 240 44.5 1160 5.75 U7 LX1FK240 265/277 56.5 1490 7.3 W7 LX1FK280 380 112 2980 14.7 Q7 LX1FK380 400 112 2980 14.7 V7 LX1FK380 415 143 3730 18.4 N7 LX1FK415 440 143 3730 18.4 R7 LX1FK415 500 172 4590 22.8 S7 LX1FK500 550/600 232 5660 23.9 X7 LX1FK600 72 LX1FK1000 1000 679 16 960 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos j = 0.9: - inrush: 10501150 VA, - sealed: 1620 VA. Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): y 2400. Heat dissipation: 18W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4075 ms, opening = 100170 ms.
813186
4 5 6
LX1 FLppp
813187
For contactor LC1F630 and LC1 F1250

48 1.1 17.1 110/120 6.45 165 115 6.45 165 127 8.1 205 200/208 20.5 605 220 25.5 730 230 25.5 730 240 25.5 730 265/277 31 900 380 78 2360 400 78 2360 415 96 2960 440 96 2960 500 120 3660 550/600 155 4560 1000 474 12 880 (1) Incompatible with LC1F1250. Specifications 0.09 1.85 1.85 1.05 2.65 3.35 3.35 3.35 4.1 10.5 10.5 13 13 16.5 19.5 56.2 E7 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 W7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 X7 LX1FL048 (1) LX1FL110 LX1FL110 LX1FL127 LX1FL200 LX1FL220 LX1FL220 LX1FL220 LX1FL260 LX1FL380 LX1FL380 LX1FL415 LX1FL415 LX1FL500 LX1FL600 LX1FL1000 (1) 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500
7 8 9 10
Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos j = 0.9: - inrush: 15001730 VA, - sealed: 2025VA. Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 1200. Heat dissipation: 20W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4080 ms, opening = 100200 ms.
5/132
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Low sealed consumption. Operate on networks with harmonic numbers y 7. Control Average resistance Inductance Voltage Reference circuit at 20 C 10 % of closed code voltage circuit Inrush Sealed Uc W W V H Weight
1 2 3 4
kg 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000

110/120 4.95 (2) 115 4.95 (2) 127 6.1 (2) 200/208 15.5 (2) 220 19.5 (2) 230 19.5 (2) 240 19.5 (2) 265/277 29.8 (2) 380 60.9 (2) 400 60.9 (2) 415/480 74.3 (2) 440 74.3 (2) 500 92 (2) Specifications 230 (2) 230 (2) 280 (2) 750 (2) 920 (2) 920 (2) 920 (2) 1330 (2) 2780 (2) 2780 (2) 3340 (2) 3340 (2) 4180 (2) 0.21 0.21 0.26 0.66 0.82 0.82 0.82 1.25 2.3 2.3 2.8 2.8 3.5 F7 FE7 G7 L7 M7 P7 U7 W7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 LX1FX110 (1) LX1FX110 (1) LX1FX127 (1) LX1FX200 (1) LX1FX220 (1) LX1FX220 (1) LX1FX220 (1) LX1FX280 (1) LX1FX380 (1) LX1FX380 (1) LX1FX415 (1) LX1FX415 (1) LX1FX500 (1)
Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos j = 0.9: - inrush: 19002300 VA, sealed: 4455 VA. Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 600. Heat dissipation: 2 x 22 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4080 ms, opening = 130230 ms.

Control circuit Voltage Rectifier Coil voltage code Reference Reference Uc (3) V 110/127 FE7 DR5TE4U LX4F8FW 220/240 P7 DR5TE4U LX4F8MW 380/440 V7 DR5TE4S LX4F8QW Specifications Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 600. Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos j = 0.8: - inrush: 1700VA, sealed: 12 VA Operating time at Uc: closing = 6080 ms, opening = 160180 ms. Control circuit voltage Uc V Average resistance at 20 C 10 % Inrush W Sealed W 106 106 260 260 315 420 735 735 915 915 1160 Inductance Voltage Reference of closed code circuit H 0.72 0.72 1.25 1.25 1.50 2.25 3.75 3.75 4.55 4.55 5.75 F7 G7 M7 P7 U7 W7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 LX1FK065 (4) LX1FK070 (4) LX1FK110 (4) LX1FK110 (4) LX1FK127 (4) LX1FK140 (4) LX1FK200 (4) LX1FK200 (4) LX1FK220 (4) LX1FK220 (4) LX1FK240 (4) Weight kg 1.650 1.650 1.650
5 6
Weight
kg 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150
110 5.92 120 5.92 220 9.55 230 9.55 240 11.5 277 16.5 380 29 400 29 415 35.5 440 35.5 500 44.5 Specifications
For contactors LC1F1700, LC1F1700 and LC1F2100
7 8 9 10
Average consumption at 20 C for 50 or 60 Hz, cos j = 0.9: - inrush: 16002400 VA, sealed: 2937 VA. Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 600. Heat dissipation: 2 x 18 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4075 ms, opening = 100170 ms. (1) Reference of set of 2 identical coils, to be connected in series. (2) Value for the 2 coils in series. (3) Rectifier to be ordered separately: 0.100 kg. (4) Order 2 coils and connect them in series.
5/133
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils for specific applications (1)
References
1 2 3
LX9 FFppp
813188
Low sealed consumption. High tolerance to inrush voltage drops. Immune to micro-breaks (mains supply or contact chain). Operate on networks with harmonic numbers y 7. Control Average resistance Inductance Voltage circuit at 20 C 10 % of closed code voltage circuit Inrush Sealed Uc W W V H
Reference
Weight
kg 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Schemes: page 5/146
48 3.03 80.2 0.3 E7 LX9FF048 110 14.8 579 2.08 F7 LX9FF110 115 14.8 579 2.08 FE7 LX9FF110 120/127 19 746 2.65 G7 LX9FF127 208 45 1788 5.95 L7 LX9FF200 220 59.4 2190 7.7 M7 LX9FF220 230 59.4 2190 7.7 P7 LX9FF220 240 73.5 2750 9.68 U7 LX9FF240 380 173 6540 23 Q7 LX9FF380 400 173 6540 23 V7 LX9FF380 415 218 8460 30 N7 LX9FF415 440 218 8460 30 R7 LX9FF415 36 S7 LX9FF500 500 262 10 300 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 690855 VA, sealed: 6.68.1 VA. Heat dissipation: 5.97.2 W. Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): < 2400. Operating time at Uc: closing = 35 ms, opening = 130 ms.

48 2.2 60 0.23 E7 LX9FG048 110 10.4 411 1.46 F7 LX9FG110 115 10.4 411 1.46 FE7 LX9FG110 120/127 13 520 1.85 G7 LX9FG127 208 33 1339 4.9 L7 LX9FG200 220 42.1 1680 5.84 M7 LX9FG220 230 42.1 1680 5.84 P7 LX9FG220 240 50.6 2060 7.22 U7 LX9FG240 380 128 4730 16.4 Q7 LX9FG380 400 128 4730 16.4 V7 LX9FG380 415 157 5930 20.6 N7 LX9FG415 440 157 5930 20.6 R7 LX9FG415 500 194 7550 26.3 S7 LX9FG500 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 9501180 VA, sealed: 8.910.9 VA. Heat dissipation: 89.8 W. Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): < 2400. Operating time at Uc: closing = 35 ms, opening = 130 ms. 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550
813189
LX9 FGppp

48 2.96 72 (2) LX9FH0482 0.750 0.750 110/115 18.7 415 (2) LX9FH1102 0.750 120/127 22.9 156 (2) LX9FH1272 0.750 220/230 71.6 1621 (2) LX9FH2202 0.750 240 88 1968 (2) LX9FH2402 0.750 380/415 222 5075 (2) LX9FH3802 0.750 500 345 7990 (2) LX9FH5002 Specifications Average consumption at 20 C: inrush: 560660 VA, sealed: 810 VA. Heat dissipation: 8.410.4 W. Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): < 3600. Operating time at Uc: closing = 45 ms, opening = 25 ms. (1) Application examples: hoisting (inching, high operating rates), Main-Standby (unstable mains supplies). These coils are particularly suited for use at higher operating temperatures (mounting in non-ventilated compartments, enclosures, etc.). (2) Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/134
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
a.c. 40 to 400 Hz supply coils for specific applications
Coils with short operating times (at Uc): - N/O: 60 ms, - N/C: 50 ms (a side); 20 ms (c side). Coils with high operating rates (qy70C): - 3600 operating cycles/hour, - 1800 for LC1F630. Coils with low inrush consumption. Control Average resistance circuit at 20 C 10 % voltage Inrush Sealed Uc W W V
813190
1 2 3 4
0.18 1.1 1.4 4 12 16 19 DR5TF4V DR5TE4U DR5TE4U DR5TE4U DR5TE4S DR5TE4S DR5TE4S LX9FK917 LX9FK925 LX9FK926 LX9FK931 LX9FK936 LX9FK937 LX9FK938 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080
Inductance Rectifier of closed Reference circuit (1) H 0.22 1.3 1.7 5 15 19 23 DR5TF4V DR5TE4U DR5TE4U DR5TE4U DR5TE4S DR5TE4S DR5TE4S
Coil Reference
Weight
kg LX9FJ917 LX9FJ925 LX9FJ926 LX9FJ931 LX9FJ936 LX9FJ937 LX9FJ938 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970
LX9 FJppp
48 4.03 43 110 25.7 246 127 32.3 302 220/230 99.5 919 380/415 311 3011 440 386 3690 500 478 4380 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 500 VA, - sealed: 23 VA Heat dissipation: 11.413.9 W.

48 3.73 30.7 110 24 204 127 29.8 250 220/230 89.9 770 380/415 274 2075 440 361 3060 500 448 3750 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 550 VA, - sealed: 31 VA Heat dissipation: 1518.3 W.
813191
5 6
LX9 FKppp
813191
LX9 FLppp
48 2.81 20.8 0.17 110 13.5 114 0.77 127 20.8 167 1.2 220 52 425 2.9 220/240 64.5 518 3.6 380/400 163 1360 8.8 415/440 204 1670 11 500 312 2510 17 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 830 VA, - sealed: 47 VA Heat dissipation: 22.827.8 W. (1) Rectifier to be ordered separately: 0.100 kg.
DR5TF4V DR5TE4U DR5TE4U DR5TE4U DR5TE4U DR5TE4S DR5TE4S DR5TE4S
LX9FL917 LX9FL924 LX9FL926 LX9FL930 LX9FL931 LX9FL935 LX9FL936 LX9FL938
1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450
7 8 9 10
Schemes: page 5/146
5/135
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
d.c. supply coils
References
1 2 3
LX4 FFppp
Low sealed consumption. Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): y 2400. Inductance Voltage Control Average resistance of closed code circuit at 20 C 10 % circuit voltage Inrush Sealed Uc W W V H
Reference
Weight
kg LX4FF024 LX4FF048 LX4FF110 LX4FF125 LX4FF220 LX4FF250 LX4FF440 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430

24 1.12 177 11 BD 48 4.52 715 42.7 ED 110 21.7 2940 179 FD 125 26.8 3560 223 GD 704 MD 220/230 84 11100 868 UD 250 105 13000 4000 RD 440/460 301 48200 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 543665 W, - sealed: 3.944.83 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 3040 ms, opening = 3050 ms.
813193
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Schemes: page 5/146
813192
24 0.79 169 14.9 BD 48 3.2 662 55.3 ED 110 14.9 2810 241 FD 125 19 3320 289 GD 890 MD 220/230 57.7 10200 1140 UD 250 76 12400 4210 RD 440/460 223 39700 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 737902 W, - sealed: 4.135.07 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 3040 ms, opening = 3050 ms.
LX4FG024 LX4FG048 LX4FG110 LX4FG125 LX4FG220 LX4FG250 LX4FG440
0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550

24 0.9 192 26.3 BD 48 3.49 707 92.9 ED 110 16.8 3180 424 FD 125 20.8 3840 530 GD 1590 MD 220/230 65.7 11500 1910 UD 250 84 13900 7570 RD 440/460 255 44000 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 655803 W, - sealed: 3.684.53 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 4050 ms, opening = 4065 ms. LX4FH024 LX4FH048 LX4FH110 LX4FH125 LX4FH220 LX4FH250 LX4FH440 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740
LX4 FHppp

48 2.5 558 56 ED 110 12.7 2660 270 FD 125 15.8 3130 330 GD 220 47 8820 910 MD 1200 UD 250 61 10 500 4435 RD 440 236 33 750 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 9201140 W, - sealed: 47.5 W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 5060 ms, opening = 4560 ms. LX4FJ048 LX4FJ110 LX4FJ125 LX4FJ220 LX4FJ250 LX4FJ440 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970
5/136
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
d.c. supply coils
Low sealed consumption. Control Average resistance circuit at 20 C 10 % voltage Inrush Sealed Uc W W V
813194
Inductance Voltage of closed code circuit H
Reference
Weight
1 2 3
kg LX4FK048 LX4FK110 LX4FK125 LX4FK220 LX4FK250 LX4FK440 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080

48 2.35 515 67 ED 110 11.5 2450 280 FD 125 15 2930 400 GD 220 44 8150 1080 MD 250 56 9650 1350 UD 5270 RD 440 225 31300 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 9901220 W, - sealed: 4.548 W. Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 2400. Operating time at Uc: closing = 5060 ms, opening = 4560 ms.
LX4 FKppp
For contactor LC1F630 and LC1 F1250

48 1.7 353 40.5 ED 110 8.1 1680 180 FD 125 10 2110 230 GD 220 31 5160 650 MD 250 38 6080 815 UD 2910 RD 440 152 23120 (1) Incompatible with LC1 F1250. Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 14201920 W, - sealed: 6.512.5 W. Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 1200. Operating time at Uc: closing = 6070 ms, opening = 4050. LX4FL048 LX4FL110 LX4FL125 (1) LX4FL220 LX4FL250 LX4FL440 (1) 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450
4 5

110 6.1 (2) 280 (3) 0.26 FD LX4FX110 (2) 125 7.7 (2) 410 (3) 0.33 GD LX4FX125 (2) 220 24.6 (2) 1100 (3) 1 MD LX4FX220 (2) 250 29.8 (2) 1330 (3) 1.25 UD LX4FX250 (2) 440 92 (2) 4180 (3) 3.5 RD LX4FX440 (2) Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 19602420 W, - sealed: 4252 W. Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 600. Operating time at Uc: closing = 7080 ms, opening = 100130 ms. 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000
6 7

110/120 FW LX4F8FW 220/240 MW LX4F8MW 380/400 QW LX4F8QW Specifications Heat dissipation: 25W. Operating time at Uc: closing = 6080 ms, opening = 4050 ms. 1.650 1.650 1.650
For contactors LC1F1400, LC1F1700 and LC1F2100

110 2.94 734 98 FD 125 3.73 916 122 GD 220 11.5 2450 280 MD 250 15 2930 400 UD 440 44 8150 1080 RD Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 20002200 W, - sealed: 810 W. Operating cycles/hour (q y 55 C): 600. Operating time at Uc: closing = 5060 ms, opening = 4560 ms. (2) Reference of set of 2 identical coils, to be connected in series. (3) Value for the 2 coils in series. (4) Order 2 coils and connect them in series. LX4FK055 (4) LX4FK065 (4) LX4FK110 (4) LX4FK125 (4) LX4FK220 (4) 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080
8 9 10
Schemes: page 5/146
5/137
References
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
d.c. supply coils for specific applications
References
1 2 3 4
813196 813194
Coils with short operating times (at Uc) : - N/O: 60 ms, - N/C: 20 ms. Coils with high operating rates (q y 70 C): - 3600 operating cycles/hour, - 1800 for LC1F630. Coils with low inrush consumption. Control Average circuit resistance voltage at 20 C 10 % Uc Inrush Sealed W W V Induc- Resistor (1) tance of Qty Reference closed required circuit H 0.27 1.7 2 6.1 23 1 1 1 1 1 DR2SC0047 DR2SC0330 DR2SC0390 DR2SC1200 DR2SC4700 LX9FJ918 LX9FJ926 LX9FJ927 LX9FJ932 LX9FJ938 Coil Reference
Weight kg 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970 0.970
48 5.11 110 32.3 125 39.4 220 123 440/460 478 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 430 W, - sealed: 22 W. LX9 FJppp
99 632 760 2320 9080

48 4.67 110 29.8 125 37.4 220 115 440/460 448 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 470 W. - sealed: 29 W. 76.7 470 637 1935 7050 0.22 1.4 1.7 5.1 19 1 1 1 1 1 DR2SC0039 DR2SC0220 DR2SC0330 DR2SC1000 DR2SC3300 LX9FK918 LX9FK926 LX9FK927 LX9FK932 LX9FK938 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080 1.080
5
LX9 FKppp
6 7 8 9 10
48 3.43 110 17.2 125 20.8 220 64.5 440/460 260 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 733 W. - sealed: 48 W. LX9 FLppp
52.9 272 333 1018 4010
0.20 0.98 1.2 3.6 14
2 2 2 2 2
DR2SC0047 DR2SC0270 DR2SC0330 DR2SC1000 DR2SC3900
LX9FL918 LX9FL925 LX9FL926 LX9FL931 LX9FL937
1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450 1.450
813195
(1) Resistor to be ordered separately, weight of resistor: 0.030 kg.
Schemes: page 5/146
5/138
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Wide range d.c. supply coils for specific applications
Wide range coils: 0.71.25 Uc. Operating cycles/hour: y 60 (1). Ambient temperature (operation): - 55 to + 70 C. Control Average resistance circuit voltage at 20 C 10 % Uc Inrush Sealed W W V
813198
Inductance of closed circuit H 7.4 27 66 121 149
Reference
Weight
1 2 3
kg LX4FF020 LX4FF040 LX4FF060 LX4FF090 LX4FF100 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430

24 0.71 48 2.86 72 7.05 110 13.2 125 16.9 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 4151300 W, - sealed: 39 W. 24 0.52 48 2 72 5.07 110 9.66 125 12 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 5801820 W, - sealed: 3.19.5 W. 120 392 1055 1970 2340
LX4 FFppp

112 359 984 1840 2230 9.3 34.4 85 157 196 LX4FG020 LX4FG040 LX4FG060 LX4FG090 LX4FG100 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
813197

24 0.58 48 2.19 72 5.58 110 11 125 13.8 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 5151600 W, - sealed: 2.78.5 W. Oper- Average ational resistance voltage at 20 C 10 % V W 129 400 1110 2120 2520 17.3 59.5 149 287 353 LX4FH020 LX4FH040 LX4FH060 LX4FH090 LX4FH100 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740
LX4 FHppp
Induc- Coil Economy resistor tance Resistors in // of closed circuit Reference No. W Reference H LX2FJW11 3 LX2FJW18 3 LX2FJW21 3
Reference of the assembly (2)
Weight
kg 0.970 0.970 0.970
24 1.05 0.049 48 4.8 0.22 72 9.6 0.44 Specifications Average consumption: - inrush: 290860 W, - sealed: 1647 W.
56 DR2SC0056 LX5FJW11 220 DR2SC0220 LX5FJW18 470 DR2SC0470 LX5FJW21
(1) The mechanical durability of the contactor is limited to 1 million operating cycles. (2) The set comprises: 1 coil LX2 FJ and 3 resistors DR2 SC.
Schemes: page 5/146
5/139
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
LC1 F115 to F330
1 2
S (1)
S1
X1
b2
b1
J1
3
L c
= Z Q P a P Q1 f
G1 G
= Y
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. 200500 V 6001000 V LC1 F115, F150 10 15 F185 10 15 F225, F265 10 15 F330 10 15 (1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/126). L 107 107 107 107 113.5 113.5 113.5 113.5 141 141 145 145 M 147 147 150 150 154 154 172 172 178 178 181 181 P 37 37 40 40 40 40 48 48 48 48 48 48 Q 29.5 29.5 26 26 29 29 21 17 39 34 43 43 Q1 60 60 57.5 55.5 59.5 59.5 51.5 47.5 66.5 66.5 74 74 S 20 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25 25 25 S1 26 26 34 34 34 34 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 44.5 Y 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 38 38 38 38 Z 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 21.5 21.5 20.5 20.5
X1
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC1 F115
a b b1 b2 3P 163.5 162 137 265 4P 200.5 162 137 265 F150 3P 163.5 170 137 301 4P 200.5 170 137 301 F185 3P 168.5 174 137 305 4P 208.5 174 137 305 F225 3P 168.5 197 137 364 4P 208.5 197 137 364 F265 3P 201.5 203 145 375 4P 244.5 203 145 375 F330 3P 213 206 145 375 4P 261 206 145 375 f = minimum distance required for coil removal.
c 171 171 171 171 181 181 181 181 213 213 219 219
f 131 131 131 131 130 130 130 130 147 147 147 147
G 106 143 106 143 111 151 111 151 142 190 154.5 202.5
=
G1 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 96 96 96 96
J 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106
J1 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
LC1 F400 and F500

56 (1)
=
44,5 6xM10x35
X1
209
120 =
= b2 M b
180
G 23,5 G1 J Q P P a Q1 f
L c
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. 200500 V 6001000 V LC1 F400 15 20 F500 15 20 (1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/126). J 19.5 19.5 67.5 39.5 39.5 34.5 L 145 145 145 146 146 146 M 181 181 181 208 208 208 P 48 48 48 55 55 55 Q 69 43 43 76 46 46 Q1 96 74 74 102 77 77 S 25 25 25 30 30 30
LC1 F400
X1
b2
f 146 146 146 150 150 150
2P 213 206 375 219 3P 213 206 375 219 4P 261 206 375 219 F500 2P 233 238 400 232 3P 233 238 400 232 4P 288 238 400 232 f = minimum distance required for coil removal.
G supplied 80 80 80 80 80 140
G min. 66 66 66 66 66 66
G max. 102 102 150 120 120 175
G1 supplied 170 170 170 170 170 230
G1 min 156 156 156 156 156 156
5/140
=
G1 max. 192 192 240 210 210 265
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
LC1 F630 and F800

72 (1) 40 64 6xM12x45
1
=
X1
280
304
464
264
X1
185
2 3 4 5 6
155 197 255
60,5
Q 80 a 80 Q1 181 (2)
J1
LC1 F630 F630, F800 F630 2P 3P 4P
a 309 309 389
G supplied 180 180 240
G min. 100 100 150
G max. 195 195 275
J1 68.5 68.5 68.5
Q 102 60 60
Q1 127 89 89
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. Voltage 200500 V 6901000 V 200690 V 1000 V LC1 F630 20 30 LC1 F800 10 (1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/126). (2) Minimum distance required for coil removal. 20
LC1 F780
60
=
12xM12x45
26
=
26
X1
22
348
280
X1
434
400
7
191 183 (1) 160 160 191 183 (1)
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. Voltage 200500 V 6901000 V X1 (mm) 30 35
165 255
3P=702, 4P=862
(1) Minimum distance required for coil removal.
Fixing centres of LC1 F7804

127
Fixing centres of LC1 F780

127
8 9
185
185
10
90
240
190
240
102
127
90
240
240
132
5/141
127
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
LC1 F1250
1 2 3 4
LC1 F1400, LC1 F1700 and LC1 F2100
X1 X1
50
18xM12x50
280
338
153.5 255
60
80
80 309
89
264 181 (1)

X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. Voltage 200500 V 6901000 V 20 30 X1 (mm)
129,7 = 34 =
129,7 24x14 34
5 6 7 8 9 10
X1
210
X1
332
14
137,3 238,6 200 (1)
LC1 F1700 : 84,9 LC1 F2100 : 91 438 200 (1)
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. Voltage 200500 V 6901000 V X1 (mm) 90 100
Fixing centres of LC1 F1400, F1700 and 2100

4x5x15
240 50 190 50 49,5
185
5/142
298
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Accessories
Right-angled connectors LA9 Fp981 (set of 3) for rear connection
1
LA9 a b b1 c G H FF981 15 18 3 42 24 10.5 6.5 FG981 20 23 3 45 26 13 9 FJ981 25 29 4 55 32.5 16.5 11 FK981 30 35 5 52 26 20 11 FL981 40 48 8 86 45 28 13
b1
2 3
c
b1
Right-angled connectors LA9 Fp979 (set of 3) for side connection
LA9 a b b1 c G G1 H
FF979 15 54 5 80 24 20 36 6.5
FG979 20 58 5 92 28 22 39 9
FJ979 25 63.5 6 120 37 29 41 11
FK979 30 68 6 120 37 29 42 11
FL979 40 117 10 130 37.5 35 76 13
4 5 6 7 8
Right-angled connectors LA9 Fp980 with large surface area (set of 3)

c c1 = a G =
H1
LA9 a b b1 c c1 G H H1 H2 (1) FF980 35 70.5 40 29 3 18 18 10 60.5 6.5 7 x 10 FG980 40 82.5 45 29 3 20 20 12 72.5 9 9 x 12 FJ980 50 98.5 55 33 5 25 22 14 84.5 11 11 x 14 FK980 60 114 65 33 5 29 26 17 97 11 12.5 x 15 FL980 100 154 85 43 10 53 40 20 132 13 12.5 x 15
G1
b1 H2
(1)
Right-angled connectors LA9 F1250 (set of 6)
Right-angled connectors LA9 F2100 (set of 6) for rear connection

11.5
20
25
25 25
125
11.5
9 10
13 47
34 60
16 34
38
5/143
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Accessories
Paralleling links (set of 4)
1 2
LA9 FF602, FG602, FH602
a c = =
H1 b
b1
LA9 FK602, FL602
a c = G =
H2 H1
b1
3 4
b
LA9 a b b1 c G H H1 H2 1 2
FF602 25 45 30 4 37.5 12.5 6.5 11
FG602 30 55 35 5 45 15 9 11
FH602 40 60 40 8 52.5 15 11 13
FK602 50 85 55 10 22 70 14 22 11 11
FL602 60 100 65 10 26 85 17 26 13 14
Links for "star" connection of 3 poles

LA9 Fp601
= =
5 6 7 8 9 10
a
b
LA9 a b c
FF601 69 15 3 6.5 x 8.5
FG601 100 20 3 8.5 x 10.5
FH601 121 20 5 10.5 x 13
FK601 140 30 5 11
FL601 200 40 8 13
5/144
Mounting
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
LC1 F115 to F330

On panel On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 PA, PB, PC On rails DZ5 MB on 120 mm centres
(1)
=
1 2 3
DZ5 MF5
120
110
AF1 EA6
110
= J c
LC1 c (2) 3P 4P G 3P 4P J 3P 4P J1 3P 4P F115 F150 171 171 80 80 26.5 45 57 75.5 F185 F225 181 181 80 80 29 49 59.5 79.5 F265 213 213 96 96 44.5 68.5 61.5 85.5
= G J1 c
F330 219 219 96 96 44.5 68.5 61.5 85.5 LC1 c (2) 3P 4P G 3P 4P F115 F150 171 171 80 80 F185 F225 181 181 80 80 F265 213 213 96 96 F330 219 219 96 96 LC1 c (2) 3P 4P G 3P 4P
c
F115 F150 171 171 80 80
15
F185 F225 181 181 80 80 F265 213 213 96 96 F330 219 219 96 96
110
4 5
LC1 F
On 2 notched rails AM1 ECppp
LC1 F115 to F330

AM1 EC200
LC1 F400 to F800

AF1 CD081 + AF1 VC820
(4)
AF1 CD101+ AF1 VC10
(3)
AF1 CD061+ AF1 VA618 AF1 VA618 M6
AF1 CD061
AF1 VA618 M6 LA9 F100
AF1 CD081+ AF1 VC820
6 7
120
25
G AM1 EC200
35
G AM1 EC200 G3
G1 G2
180
110
M6
F330 F400 F500 F630 F115, F150 F185, F225 F265 3P 165 (5) 176 207 213 219 232 255 4P 165 (5) 176 207 213 219 232 255 G (M6) 3P 80 80 96 96 4P 80 80 96 96 80 80 G1 ( 8.5) 3P 4P 80 140 180 G2 ( 10.5) 3P 4P 240 (1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/126). (2) See X1 (minimum electrical clearance) pages 5/140 and 5/141. (3) AF1CDppp and AF1VAppp. (4) This AM1EC200 upright is required when G2 or G3 is greater than 700 mm (please consult your Regional Sales Office). (5) + 6 mm with time-delay block on LC1 F. LC1 c
F780 255 255 See page 5/141
F800 255 180
8 9 10
5/145
Schemes
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Contactors
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2, 3 and 4-pole contactors LC1 F115 to F630 , F1250 (coil LX1 F a)

3/L2 7/L4 5/L3 1/L1
LC1 F115 to F630 , F1250 (coil LX4 F c) LC1 F115 to F265 (coil LX9 F a) LC1 F800 (coil LX8 F a/ c)
3/L2 7/L4 5/L3 1/L1 A2
LC1 F780 a or c
LC1 F1400 a or c LC1 F1700 a or c LC1 F2100 a or c

7/L4
3/L2 T2/4 A2 1/L1 5/L3 T3/6
3/L2
A2
03
A1
A1
04
A2
1/L1
5/L3
T3/6
T4/8
T3/6
T3/6
T4/8
T1/2
T1/2
T2/4
T1/2
T2/4
T2/4
T4/8
Coils
Standard a coils LX1 FF, FG, FJFL LX1 FH0422FH3802
03 A1 A2
LX1 FH0202FH0362 LX1 FH4402FH10002 LX1 F8p

A1 A2
LX1 FX Rectifier supplied and fixed on the contactor
+
A1 A2 A1 A2
A2 A1 A2
A1
Standard c coils LX4 FF, FG, FH, FJ, FK, FL, FX (1), LX4 F8p
A1 A2
A1
A2
(1) 2 coils in series. Special a coils LX9 FF, FG

A1 A2
LX9 FHppp2
A1 B1 A2/B2
LX9 FJ, FK, FL
LX4 F8p
(1)
A2
(1) Breaking on a side. Drop-out time 50 ms . (2) Breaking on c side. Drop-out time 20 ms .
01
A1
A2
A1
(2)
+
A1 A2
5/146
T1/2
A1
A1
Schemes (continued)
TeSys contactors
TeSys F contactors
Add-on blocks
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts 1 N/O LAD N10 (1) 1 N/C LAD N01 (1)
43/NO
1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N11

53/NO 61/NC
2 N/O LAD N20

53/NO 63/NO
2 N/C LAD N02

51/NC 61/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22

53/NO 83/NO 51/NC 71/NC
44 (93)
(94)
42 (91)
41/NC (92)
1 2 3 4
54
64
54
62
1 N/O + 3 N/C LAD N13

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
4 N/O LAD N40

53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
54
4 N/C LAD N04

51/NC 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C (2) LAD C22

53/NO 87/NO 61/NC 75/NC
52
3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31

53/NO 73/NO 74 83/NO 84 61/NC
54
54
64
74
54
84
62
52
62
82
72
82
76
88
54
(1) Items in brackets: See TeSys D contactors. (2) 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break. Instantaneous auxiliary contacts with terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: pages 5/122 and 5/123) 1 N/O + 1 N/C 1 N/O + 1 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C 2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N11G LAD N22P LAD N22G LAD N11P
13/NO
53/NO
62
72
43/NO
13/NO
43/NO
31/NC
21/NC
22
31/NC
32
14
22
32
42
54
44
14
32
Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts 2 N/O (24-50 V) 2 N/O (5-24 V) 2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 2 N/O standard LA1 DX20 LA1 DY20 LA1 DZ40
53/NO 63/NO
53/NO 63/NO
44
64
63/NO
21/NC
31/NC
41/NC
2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard LA1 DZ31

53/NO 73/NO 83/NO 61/NC
62
72
62
62
84
53/NO
63/NO
64
74
73/NO
83/NO
5 6 7 8 9 10
62
54
64
54
54
64
84
54
74
Time delay auxiliary contacts On-delay 1 N/O +1 N/C LAD Tp

67/NO 55/N
Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Rp

57/NO 65/NC
On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make LAD Sp

55/NC 67/NO
56
58
68
66
68
84
5/147
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Pre-assembled
1 2
LC2F115 to F265 (reverser supplied on 2 bars which can be used for fixing the device)
S
X1 =
X1
Q1 f
P1 a
Q1 f
J1
= G1
= J a2
= G1
= J1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
f - Minimum distance required for coil removal. X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. LC1 200500 V 6601000 V F115, F150 10 15 F185 10 15 F225, F265 10 15
Bar fixing centres Vertical: 120mm Horizontal: a2 see table
LC2 F115 F150 F185 F225 F265
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
a 345 419 345 422 357 437 357 437 425 521
a2 317 378 317 381 326 390 326 390 386 464
b 162 162 170 170 174 174 197 197 203 203
b1 137 137 137 137 137 137 137 137 145 145
c 171 171 171 171 181 181 181 181 213 213
G1 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 96 96
J 71 108 71 111 78 118 78 118 109 157
J1 57 75.5 57 75.5 59.5 79.5 59.5 79.5 61.5 85.5
L 107 107 107 107 113.5 113.5 113.5 113.5 141 141
M 147 147 150 150 154 154 172 172 178 178
P 37 37 40 40 40 40 48 48 48 48
P1 77 77 71 71 78 78 62 54 100 100
Q1 60 60 57 55.5 59.5 59.5 51.5 47.5 66.5 66.5
S 20 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25
f 131 131 131 131 130 130 130 130 147 147
M6 M6 M8 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10 M10
5/148
110/120
120
b1
TeSys contactors
For customer assembly, fixing recommended on AM1EC uprights, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
2 x LC1F115 to F330 2 x LC1F400, F500, F630, F800
P1
X1 =
(1)
P1
(1)
= =
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
b
110/120
120 (2) =
X1
L c J1
= G1
= J a
= G1
= J1
J1 J3
G G1
J J2 a
G G1
J1 J3
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. LC1 200500 V 6601000 V 200690 V 1000 V F115, F150 10 15 F185 10 15 F225, F265 10 15 F330 10 15 F400 15 20 F500 15 20 F630 20 30 F800 10 20
2 x LC1 F115 F150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F800
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P
a 345 419 345 422 357 437 357 437 425 521 447 543 446 542 485 595 636 796 636
b 162 162 170 170 174 174 197 197 203 203 206 206 206 206 238 238 304 304 304
b1 137 137 137 137 137 137 137 137 145 145 145 145 209 209 209 209 280 280 280
c 171 171 171 171 181 181 181 181 213 213 219 219 219 219 232 232 255 255 255
G 80 80 80 140 180 240 180
G1 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 96 96 96 96 170 170 170 230
J 71 108 71 111 78 118 78 118 109 157 124 172 157 157 156 156 139 139 139
J1 57 75.5 57 75.5 59.5 79.5 59.5 79.5 61.5 85.5 65.5 89.5 64.5 112.5 84.5 79.5 68.5 88.5 68.5
J2 67 67 66 66
J3 19.5 67.5 39.5 34.5
L 107 107 107 107 113.5 113.5 113.5 113.5 141 141 145 145 145 145 146 146 155 155 155
P1 77 77 71 71 78 78 62 54 100 100 107 107 107 107 112 112 137 137 137
(1) Except LC1F630 and F800 : 4 x 10.5. (2) Except LC1F630 and F800. For other dimensions: see pages 5/140 and 5/141.
180
b1
5/149
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Vertically mounted
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
For customer assembly, with mechanical interlock (MI) LA9F, fixing recommended on AM1EC uprights (please consult your Regional Sales Office). 2 x LC1 identical or different ratings (LC1F115 to F630 and F800). See pages 5/118 to 5/121. Assembly A Assembly B Assembly C
J3
80
(1) (3) = =
H
12,5 (5) (1)
G5
G1
12,5 (5) (1)

F330 } 120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630 F800
G5
G1
= =
H
H1
(1)
=
(3)
120
=
120
(1)
(3) =
(1) (5)
9 12,5
(6)
= =
(4)
J4 80 J2
(1) Mechanical interlock shaft. (2) For assembly of contactors of different ratings only. (3) 4 x 6.5 for LC1F115 to F225. Assembly A (7) - Mechanical interlock reference G3 3P G3 4P H min. H max. H1 min.H1 max.J1 3P J1 4P LA9FF4F 0 0 200 310 80 190 137 155.5 LA9FG4F 3 4 210 300 90 180 139.5 159.5 LA9FG4G 0 0 220 310 100 190 139.5 159.5 J2 3P J2 4P J3 3P J3 4P J4 3P J4 4P 48.5 67 LA9FF4F 137 155.5 48.5 67 LA9FG4F 137 155.5 53 73 54 69 73 LA9FG4G 139.5 159.5 53 73 53 For customer assembly, fixing recommended on AM1EC uprights, please consult your Regional Sales Office 2 x LC1F780
J4
80 J2
G4
G2 J2
(4) 4 x 6.5 for LC1F265. (5) Mechanical interlock guide bracket.
(6) 4 x 8.5 for LC1F400, F500 or 4 x 10.5 for LC1F630 and F800.
9 10
250
191
160
160
191
702(LC1 F780), 862(LC1 F7804)
X1 and fixings, see page 5/140. (7) Only 3P for F800. (8) In this case, G4 is greater than G5. Selection : pages 5/194 to 5/217 References : pages 5/116 to 5/121
Assembly B (7) - Mechanical interlock reference G1 3P G1 4P G3 3P G3 4P G5 3P 96 21 27 60 LA9FH4F 96 80 45 26 83 LA9FJ4F 80 140 45 26 83 LA9FK4F 80 LA9FL4F 180 240 35 17 74 LA9FH4G 96 96 19 23 60 80 42 22 83 LA9FJ4G 80 LA9FK4G 80 140 42 22 83 LA9FL4G 180 240 33 13 74 H1 min.H1 max.J1 3P J1 4P J2 3P 250 157.5 181.5 137 LA9FH4F 110 LA9FJ4F 80 210 144.5 192.5 137 LA9FK4F 100 210 164.5 219.5 137 LA9FL4F 140 210 248.5 328.5 137 LA9FH4G 120 250 157.5 181.5 139.5 LA9FJ4G 90 220 144.5 192.5 139.5 LA9FK4G 110 220 164.5 219.5 139.5 LA9FL4G 150 220 248.5 328.5 139.5 Assembly C (7) G1 3P G1 4P G2 3P G2 4P G3 3P 96 96 96 0 LA9FH4H 96 LA9FJ4H 80 80 96 96 23 LA9FK4H 80 140 96 96 23 LA9FL4H 180 240 96 96 14 LA9FJ4J 80 80 80 80 0 LA9FK4J 80 140 80 80 0 LA9FL4J 180 240 80 80 9 (8) 140 80 140 0 LA9FK4K 80 LA9FL4K 180 240 80 140 9 (8) LA9FL4L 180 240 180 240 0 H min. H max. H1 min.H1 max.J1 3P LA9 FH4H 250 380 130 260 157.5 LA9 FJ4H 260 380 110 230 144.5 LA9 FK4H 280 380 130 230 164.5 LA9 FL4H 330 380 170 220 248.5 LA9 FJ4J 260 380 60 200 144.5 380 100 200 164.5 LA9 FK4J 280 380 140 195 248.5 LA9 FL4J 325 200 164.5 LA9 FK4K 300 380 120 LA9 FL4K 345 380 160 195 248.5 LA9 FL4L 380 380 200 200 248.5
G5 4P 83 83 83 74 83 83 83 74 J2 4P 155.5 155.5 155.5 155.5 159.5 159.5 159.5 159.5 G3 4P 0 0 0 9 (8) 0 0 9 (8) 0 9 (8) 0 J1 4P 181.5 192.5 219.5 328.5 192.5 219.5 329.5 329.5 328.5 328.5
H min. H max. 240 380 250 380 270 380 310 380 250 380 250 380 270 380 310 380 J4 3P J4 4P 48.5 67 48.5 67 48.5 67 48.5 67 53 73 53 73 53 73 53 73 G4 3P 60 60 60 60 83 83 83 83 83 74 J2 3P 157.5 157.5 157.5 157.5 144.5 144.5 144.5 164.5 164.5 248.5 G4 4P 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 74 J2 4P 181.5 181.5 181.5 181.5 192.5 192.5 192.5 219.5 219.5 328.5 G5 3P G5 4P 60 83 83 83 83 83 74 74 83 83 83 83 74 74 83 83 74 74 74 74
X1
X1
180
420 1034
180
5/150
F330 } 120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630 F800
H1
G3 (2)
H1
J1
9 G3(2) J1
(4)
G3(2)
J1
F330 } 120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630 F800
(6)
120
(6)
Schemes
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors for motor control LC2F

2 x LC1F 2 x LC1F
L1 L2 L3
Vertically mounted
1/L1 1/L2 1/L3
1 2 3 4
N L3 L2 L1
3 4
A1
A1
A2
A1
L3 L2 L1
A2
A2
3 2/L2
1/L2
A2
A1
2/L1
Changeover contactor pairs for distributionLC2F

2 x LC1F 2 x LC1 F
1/L1 2/L1 2/L2 2/L3 1N 1/L3 1/L2 2N
Vertically mounted
1/L1 1/L3 5 6 1N 8 7
A1
A1
A2
A1
2/L3
5 6 7
A2
A2
A2
A1
5 2/L3 6
L1
L2
L3
2/L1
2/L2
Electrical interlocking of reversers fitted with mechanical interlock without integral electrical contacts
LA9 F
KM2
KM1
A1
A1
KM1
KM2
A2
A2
2N
8 9 10
Selection : pages 5/194 to 5/217 References : pages 5/116 to 5/121
5/151
Contacteurs-inverseurs de sources grande puissance
General
TeSys contactors
General
Circuit de commande en courant alternatif ou continu
1 2 3
A changeover contactor pair ensures continuity of operation of an installation and energy management. It switches between: b a power supply source M (main) which normally supplies the installation, b and a power supply source S (standby) which may be an incoming line from an additional network or a generating set. The supply sources may be 3-phase or 3-phase + neutral. Supply - 3-phase
Main Standby
1/1L1
1/2L1
5/1L3
KM1
3/1L2
3/2L2
5/2L3
KM2
4
Application
4 V/L2
5 6 7 8 9 10
Dimensions : pages 5/154 and 5/155 Schemes : page 5/155
Supply 3-phase + neutral

Main Standby
1/1L1
1/2L1
3/2L2
W/L3
U/L1
7/1N
3/1L2
KM1
5/1L3
5/2L3
7/2N
KM2
6 W/L3
U/L1
V/L2
Application
The 2 contactors must be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent any paralleling, even transitory, of the two supplies.
CIDESOURCEGPTRIPH-SCH-2-B
5/152
References
TeSys contactors
Vertically mounted. Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V Utilisation category: AC-1 Maximum temperature in the vicinity of the devices: 40 C
813221
Changeover contactor pairs for customer assembly: 3-phase
1
Mechanical interlock (2) Reference LA9FX970
Maximum operational current Main Standby 3-phase 3-phase 1000 A 1600 A
Contactors (1) Main Reference LC1F780
Standby Reference LC1F6309
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1600 A
1600 A
LC1F780
LC1F780
LA9FX970
LA9FX970
Vertically mounted. Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V Utilisation category: AC-1 Maximum temperature in the vicinity of the devices: 40 C
Maximum operational current Main Standby 3-phase + N 3-phase + N 1600 A + 1000 A 1000 A + 1000 A Contactors (1) Main Reference LC1F78041
Changeover contactor pairs for customer assembly: 3-phase + neutral
Standby Reference LC1F63049
Mechanical interlock (2) Reference LA9FX970 (3)
813222
1600 A + 1000 A
1600 A + 1000 A
LC1F78041
LC1F78040
LA9FX970 (3)
1600 A + 1600 A
1000 A + 1000 A
LC1F7804
LC1F63049
LA9FX971
1600 A + 1600 A
1600 A + 1600 A
LC1F7804
LC1F7804
LA9FX971
LA9FX971
(1) Coils to be ordered separately, see pages 5/132 to 5/137. (2) Double mechanical interlock mechanism with 2 interlock connecting rods and 4 power connecting links. To order the the 2 auxiliary contact blocks LADNp1 required to obtain electrical interlocking between the 2 contactors: see page 5/123. (3) Neutral connecting link not supplied (to be ordered separately).
5/153
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Dimensions
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Contactors used to assemble high power changeover contactor pairs LC1 F780: see page 5/141
LC1F6309 Common side view LC1F63049
40
40
180/190 280 348
202
165 250
204 183 (1)

LC1F78040
160 702
160
178 183 (1) 183 (1)
306
204
160
160 862
160
178 183 (1)
LC1F78041
Common side view
60 40 40
60
180/190 280 434
202
165 250
191 183 (1)
160
160 862
173
178 183 (1) 183 (1)
264
264
178
173
160 862
160
191 183 (1)
(1) Minimum distance required for removal of each coil.
3-phase changeover contactor pairs

LC1F780 + LC1F780 + LA9FX970: see page 5/150 LC1F780 + LC1F6309 + LA9FX970
180
180
420
969
250
702
9 10
5/154
306
TeSys contactors
5
3-phase + neutral changeover contactor pairs

LC1F78041 + LC1 F63049 + LA9 FX970 LC1F78041 + LC1 F78040 + LA9 FX970
1 2
180
180 420 1034
420
969
180
250
862
180
3
862
250
4 5
LC1F7804 + LC1 F63049 + LA9 FX971
LC1F7804 + LC1 F7804 + LA9 FX971
180
180
969
420
420
1034
6 7 8
N L3 L2 L1
250
180
862
180
250
862
Schemes
3-phase changeover contactor pairs

1 1/L1 3 1/L2 5 1/L3
3-phase + neutral changeover contactor pairs

1 1/L1 3 1/L2 5 1/L3 1N 7 8 A2 A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A1
L3 L2 L1
3 A1 1 5 A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
2/L3 6
2/L1 2
2/L2 4
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
2N
A2
A1
9 10
5/155
References, dimensions
TeSys contactors
5

For TeSys D contactors
References
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
108 114
LAZR90F
These devices prevent inadvertent opening of a contactor in the event of a brief volt drop or momentary supply failure. Control circuit : d.c. supply
For use with contactor Type (1) Contactor reference to be completed (2) LC1D09, LC1D12, LC1D18, LC1D25, LC1D32 or LC1D38 LC1DppPD LC1DppQD LC1DppTD LC1DppVD LC1DppWD LC1DppXD LC1DppPD LC1DppQD LC1DppTD LC1DppWD LC1DppXD LC1DppPD LC1DppQD LC1DppTD LC1DppVD LC1DppWD LC1DppXD Corresponding delayed opening device Supply voltage NonReference 50/60 Hz adjustable delay time (Tr) V 110115 120127 220 240 380 415440 110115 120127 220240 380 415440 110120 120127 220 240 380 415440 s 1.55 2.55 48 510 48 5.513 0.51 0.51.5 12.5 12.5 13 0.41 0.51 0.52 12.5 12 12.5 Weight
LAZR90F LAZR90F LAZR90M LAZR90M LAZR90Q LAZR90Q LAZR90F LAZR90F LAZR90M LAZR90Q LAZR90Q LAZR90F LAZR90F LAZR90M LAZR90M LAZR90Q LAZR90Q
kg 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215
LC1D40, LC1D50 or LC1D65
LC1D80
Add-on blocks for delayed opening devices

Application LAZR91F For use with delayed opening device LAZR90F LAZR90M LAZR90Q Operational voltage V 110127 220240 380440 Nonadjustable delay time s Tr x 2 Tr x 2 Tr x 2 Reference Weight
To double the delay time
LAZR91F LAZR91M LAZR91Q
kg 0.165 0.165 0.165
(1) These contactors can be supplied as standard for this application or can be adapted by replacing the coil (except for contactors LC1D09pppp to LC1D38pppp on which the coil is not replaceable). (2) Reference to be completed : see page 5/62.
Dimensions
LAZR9pp
Schemes
LAZR9pp + LC1D
D+ (LAZ R)
LAZR9pp + LC1F
L+ (LAZ R) F1
F1
77
1
A1
55
L (LAZ R)
A2
A1
L (LAZ R)
10
Other versions
Delayed opening devices for use with other types of contactor. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/156
A2
References
TeSys contactors
For TeSys F contactors
References
These devices prevent inadvertent opening of a contactor in the event of a brief volt drop or momentary supply failure. Control circuit : d.c. supply (1)
For use with contactor Type With coil Corresponding delayed opening device NonReference Supply adjustable voltage delay time (Tr) 50/60Hz V s 110 25 LAZR90F 127 25 LAZR90F 220 25 LAZR90M 240 25 LAZR90M 380415 25 LAZR90Q 440 25 LAZR90Q 110 127 220 240 380415 440 110 127 220 240 380415 440 110 127 220 240 380 415 440 110 127 220 240 380 415 440 110 127 220 240 380 415 440 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 LAZR90F LAZR90F LAZR90M LAZR90M LAZR90Q LAZR90Q LAZR90F LAZR90F LAZR90M LAZR90M LAZR90Q LAZR90Q LAZR90F LAZR90F LAZR90M LAZR90M LAZR90Q LAZR90Q LAZR90Q LAZR90F LAZR90F LAZR90M LAZR90M LAZR90Q LAZR90Q LAZR90Q LAZR90F LAZR90F LAZR90M LAZR90M LAZR90Q LAZR90Q LAZR90Q Weight kg 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215 0.215
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC1F115 or LC1F150
LX4FF110 LX4FF125 LX4FF220 LX4FF250 LX4FF375 LX4FF440 LX4FG110 LX4FG125 LX4FG220 LX4FG250 LX4FG375 LX4FG440 LX4FH110 LX4FH125 LX4FH220 LX4FH250 LX4FH375 LX4FH440 LX4FJ110 LX4FJ125 LX4FJ220 LX4FJ250 LX4FJ375 LX4FJ400 LX4FJ440 LX4FK110 LX4FK125 LX4FK220 LX4FK250 LX4FK375 LX4FK400 LX4FK440 LX4FL110 LX4FL125 LX4FL220 LX4FL250 LX4FL375 LX4FL400 LX4FL440
LC1F185 or LC1F225
LC1F265 or LC1F330
LC1F400
LC1F500
LC1F630
Add-on blocks for delayed opening devices (1)

Application For use with Operational delayed voltage opening device V LAZR90F 110127 LAZR90M LAZR90Q 220240 380440 Nonadjustable delay time s Tr x 2 Tr x 2 Tr x 2 Reference Weight kg 0.165 0.165 0.165
To double the delay time
LAZR91F LAZR91M LAZR91Q
(1) Dimensions and schemes: see page 5/156. Other versions Delayed opening devices for use with other types of contactor. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/157
Presentation
TeSys contactors
3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG
PF537334
Presentation
In an environment subject to severe mechanical shocks, unwanted closing of a contactor's poles and the serious consequences of this, is not permissible. Shockproof contactors LC1 FG150 to FG630 are equipped with an auxiliary electromechanical device which ensures that the contactor is mechanically locked in the open position when its main electromagnet is not energised.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC1 FG150
If the contactor is subjected to mechanical impact, from back to front or from front to back, accidental closing of the poles is then impossible. In addition, accidental opening of the poles (when the contactor is in the on position), is virtually impossible due to the significant pull-in force characteristic of these contactors.
PF537336
Applications
b Marine: on-board equipment, windlasses, capstans, winches, etc b Military equipment: land, sea, launching silos. b Heavy mechanical handling systems: travelling cranes, cranes, gantries. b Conveying and handling: lifts, hoists, conveyors.
LC1 FG265
b Equipment for power stations. b Distribution boards.

-
5/158
TeSys contactors
Description of shockproof device

Shockproof contactors LC1 FGppp are equipped with: b A lever 1 that is rotated by the core of the contactors electromagnet. b An auxiliary electromagnet (EV) for the locking function. b An RC circuit (Resistor-Capacitor) to limit overvoltage. BACK
0,30,6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Direction of impact 2 ON KM1 OFF KM1
FRONT
EV
KM1
Operation
b In the off position (contactor open and not energised) the core 2 of the electromagnet (EV) locks the lever 1 and therefore the contactor. b The coils (KM1) and (EV) are energised simultaneously, the core 2 releases the lever 1 and allows the contactor to close. b De-energisation of the locking electromagnet (EV) is achieved by an auxiliary contact within the contactor. The core 2 rests freely in lever 1. b On de-energisation of coil KM1, the moving contact drops out. Core 2, under spring pressure, once again locks lever 1.
a 21 KM1 22 C1
EV C2 a
KM1 A2
A1
8 9 10
5/159
Selection
TeSys contactors
3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG a.c. supply
According to the utilisation category and required electrical durability

1 2 3 4
Operational current and power (q y 55 C)

LC1 FG150 A 220/230 V kW hp 380/400 V kW hp 415 V kW hp 440 V kW hp 500 V kW hp 660/690 V kW hp 1000 V kW hp 150 40 54 75 100 80 110 80 110 90 125 100 136 65 85 LC1 FG185 185 55 75 90 185 100 136 100 136 110 150 110 150 100 136 LC1 FG265 265 75 100 132 180 140 180 140 190 160 220 160 220 147 200 LC1 FG400 400 110 150 200 270 220 300 250 340 257 350 280 380 185 250 LC1 FG500 500 147 200 250 340 280 380 295 400 355 480 335 450 335 450 LC1 FG630 630 200 270 335 450 375 500 400 545 400 545 450 600 450 610
Contactors Operational current Operational power Standard power ratings of motors)
Maximum operating rate (operating cycles/hour) (1)

On-load factor Operational power P 0.5 P P LC1 FG150 750 2000 1200 LC1 FG185 750 2000 1200 LC1 FG265 750 2000 1200 LC1 FG400 500 1200 1200 LC1 FG500 500 1200 1200 LC1 FG630 500 1200 1200
5 6 7 8 9 10
y 85 % y 85 % y 25 %
(1) Depending on the operational power and the on-load factor (q y 55 C)
Electrical durability in utilisation category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V)

LC1 FG400 LC1 FG500 LC1 FG150 LC1 FG185 LC1 FG265 LC1 FG630
10 8 6
1 0,8 0,6 0,4 20
30
40
50
60
70 80
100
200
300
400
500 600
800
1000
Current broken in Amperes
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ie) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current of the motor. Example: Asynchronous motor with P = 55 kW - Ue = 380 V - Ie = 105 A 4 million operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 FG265.
Presentation : pages 5/158 and 5/159 Characteristics : pages 5/166 to 5/171 References : page 5/174 Dimensions, schemes : pages 5/180 and 5/181
5/160
Selection (continued)
TeSys contactors

Contactors Connection Cable Bar C.s.a. Number C.s.a. Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour Operational current AC-1 y 40 C y 55 C y 70 C (1) (1) Only for operation with coil supplied at Uc. A A A mm mm2
LC1 FG150 120 600 250 220 170
LC1 FG185 150 600 270 240 180
LC1 FG265 240 600 350 300 250
LC1 FG400 2 30 x 5 600 500 430 340
LC1 FG500 2 40 x 5 600 700 580 500
LC1 FG630 2 60 x 5 600 1000 850 700
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Increase in operational current by parallel connection of poles Apply the following multiplying factors to the current values given above. The factors take into account the often unbalanced current distribution between the 2 poles: b 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.6 b 3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25 b 4 poles in parallel: K = 2.8 Recommended connection scheme to equalise the currents in each pole (see opposite).
Electrical durability in utilisation category AC-1 (Ue y 440 V)

400 500 600 300 350 270
10 8 6 4
1 0,8 0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1
20
30
40
50
60 70 80
100
200
800 1000
2000
Example: Control of resistive circuits (cos j u 0.95). The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load. Ue = 220 V - Ic = Ie = 300 A - q = 40 C. 1 million operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 FG400.
5/161
TeSys contactors

Thermal limits in utilisation categories AC-2/AC-4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Contactors
LC1 FG150
LC1 FG185
LC1 FG265
LC1 FG400
LC1 FG500
LC1 FG630
Thermal limit zone A B C D E
Operating cycles/hour (1) and on-load factor From 150 and 15 % to 300 and 10 % From 150 and 20 % to 600 and 10 % From 150 and 30 % to 1200 and 10 % From 150 and 55 % to 2400 and 10 % From 150 and 85 % to 3600 and 10 %
Maximum current broken according to the duty requirements (thermal limit, ambient temperature y 55 C) 310 280 240 190 145 380 350 300 240 170 560 500 400 320 230 780 700 600 450 350 1100 950 750 600 500 1400 1250 950 720 660
(1) Do not exceed the maximum limit for the mechanical operating cycles.
Counter current braking (plugging) The current varies from the maximum plug-braking current to the rated motor current. The current made must be compatible with the making and breaking capacities of the contactor. In most cases, breaking occurs at a current value close to the locked rotor current and contactor selection can therefore be made using the criteria for utilisation categories AC-2 and AC-4.
Electrical durability in utilisation categories AC-2/AC-4 (Ue y 440 V)

1 0,8 0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04
0,02
0,01 100
200
300
400
500 600
800
1000
2000
3000
5000 7000 9000 Current broken in Amperes
Example: Contactor selection

Operating cycles/hour
For an on-load factor of 10 % at 400 operating cycles per hour, the curve on the left indicates zone B. If the current broken is 600 A, the above table leads to selection of an LC1 FG400 contactor. Referring to the electrical durability curves, it can be seen that the contactor will be able to perform 350 000 operating cycles. Where a higher value of electrical durability is required, 1 million operating cycles for example, an LC1FG630 contactor would be recommended.
On-load factor as %
10
Presentation : pages 5/158 and 5/159 Characteristics : pages 5/166 to 5/171 References : page 5/174 Dimensions, schemes : pages 5/180 and 5/181
5/162
TeSys contactors
For switching 3-phase capacitor banks, used for power factor correction
Switching the primaries of 3-phase transformers (LV/LV)
Switching 3-phase capacitors

Capacitors, together with the circuits to which they are connected, form oscillatory circuits which can, at the moment of switch-on, give rise to high transient currents (> 180 In) at high frequencies (1 to 15 kHz). The contactors are used for direct switching. The values of peak current at switch-on must not exceed the values indicated below. An inductor or an early break resistor may be inserted in each of the three phases supplying the capacitors to reduce the peak current, if necessary. This must be done when switching multiple step capacitor banks. Inductance values are determined according to the selected operating temperature: please refer to our Motor starter solutions - Control and protection components catalogue. In addition, in accordance with standards IEC 60070, NF C 54 100, VDE 0560, the switching contactor must be able to withstand a continuous current of 1.43 times the rated current of the capacitor bank step being switched. The rated operational powers given in table the below take this overload into account. Short-circuit protection is normally provided by g1 fuses rated at 1.3 to 1.6 In. .
1 2 3
Maximum operational power of contactors
Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour. Electrical durability at maximum load: 100 000 operations. With choke inductors connected, where necessary.
Operational power at 50/60 Hz q y 40 C 220 V 240 V kvar 60 70 90 125 180 250 400 V 440 V kvar 100 125 160 220 300 400 600 V 660 V kvar 135 160 225 300 400 600 q y 55 C 220 V 240 V kvar 40 50 75 100 125 190 400 V 440 V kvar 85 100 125 160 220 350 600 V 660 V kvar 90 100 125 200 300 500 A 3200 3500 5000 8000 10 000 12 000 LC1 FG150 LC1 FG185 LC1 FG265 LC1 FG400 LC1 FG500 LC1 FG630 Maximum peak current Contactor to be used
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Switching the primaries of 3-phase transformers (LV/LV)

When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which can reach 20 to 40 times the rated current for the power ratings shown below. This current reaches its peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases in a largely exponential manner, quickly dropping back down to its steady state value.
Contactor selection
Operating rate less than 120 operating cycles/hour. Maximum operational voltages: 1000 V 50/60 Hz. The value of the peak magnetising current must be lower than the values indicated below. Maximum ambient temperature: 55 C.
Contactor Maximum permissible current peak at switch-on Maximum operational power (1) 220 V 380 V 415/440 V 500 V 660 V 1000 V A kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA LC1 FG150 1700 25 50 55 65 80 100 LC1 FG185 2800 40 75 80 95 120 150 LC1 FG265 3500 50 90 100 110 140 200 LC1 FG400 5500 75 130 140 170 200 250 LC1 FG500 6800 100 170 190 225 270 375 LC1 FG630 9000 140 225 250 280 315 470
(1) Maximum operational power corresponding to a current peak at switch-on of 30 In.
5/163
TeSys contactors
3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG d.c. supply
Selection guide for utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Use in category DC-1 (resistive loads; time constant L/R y 1 ms) Rated operational current Ie
Operational voltage (Ue) V 24 1 2 3 4 48/75 1 2 3 4 125 1 2 3 4 225 1 2 3 4 300 3 4 460 4 Number of poles to be wired in series Contactors LC1 FG150 A 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 130 130 130 100 130 130 100 130 100 LC1 FG185 A 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 170 170 170 150 170 170 150 170 150 LC1 FG265 A 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 250 300 300 250 300 250 LC1 FG400 A 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 350 400 400 350 400 350 LC1 FG500 A 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 550 600 600 450 600 600 450 600 450 LC1 FG630 A 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 700 850 850 700 850 700
Use in category DC-2 to DC-5 (inductive loads; time constant L/R y 15 ms)
Rated operational current Ie
Operational voltage (Ue) V 24 1 2 3 4 48/75 1 2 3 4 125 1 2 3 4 225 1 2 3 4 300 3 4 460 4 Number of poles to be wired in series Contactors LC1 FG150 A 140 140 140 140 140 140 140 140 100 120 120 80 100 120 80 120 80 LC1 FG185 A 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 140 160 160 100 140 160 100 160 100 LC1 FG265 A 280 280 280 280 280 280 280 280 250 280 280 200 250 280 200 280 200 LC1 FG400 A 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 280 350 350 280 350 280 LC1 FG500 A 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 450 550 550 450 550 450 LC1 FG630 A 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 700 850 850 700 850 700
9 10
5/164
TeSys contactors
3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG d.c. supply
Selection guide for utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5
Utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 8 6 4 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01
10
20
30
40 50 60
80 100
140
200
300 400
600
The electrical durability can be read directly from the curve above, having previously calculated the power broken Pc. The following table gives, for each utilisation category, the value of Pc according to the operational current Ie and the operational voltage Ue.
Utilisation categories DC-1 DC-2 DC-3 DC-4 DC-5 Non-inductive loads Shunt motors, breaking whilst running Shunt motors, reversing Series wound motors, breaking whilst running Series wound motors, reversing Pc (Power broken) Pc = Ue x Ie Pc = 0.1 Ue x Ie Pc = Ue x 2.5 Ie Pc = 0.3 Ue x Ie Pc = Ue x 2.5 Ie Pc = 1.5 Ue x 1.5 Ie
Determining the electrical durability
Counter current braking (plugging)
Example: Series wound motor, breaking whilst motor running, category DC-4. P = 50 kW, Ue = 200 V, Ie = 250 A. Select contactor LC1 FG265 with 3 poles in series. The power broken is: Pc = 0.3 Ue x Ie = 0.3 x 200 x 250 = 15 kW. The electrical durability read from the curve is 8 million operating cycles.
The following operating rate used at Ie must not be exceeded: 120 operating cycles/hour.
Maximum operating rate Use of poles in parallel
The electrical durability is equal to the number of operating cycles performed by a pole, multiplied by the number of poles in parallel, multiplied by a coefficient of 0.70.
5/165
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Environment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contactor type
LC1 FG150 Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 V Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C V 1000 1500 8
LC1 FG185
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection
Coil not connected to the power circuit
kV
EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1 N.A.T.O. Conforming to IEC 60529 Conforming to VDE 0106 IP 20 front face with shrouds LA9 F Front face protected against direct finger contact with shrouds LA9 F TH C C C m - 60+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 40+ 70 3000
Standard version Storage Operation Permissible at Uc (1)
Without derating Without derating
With derating (3)
Fixing A
Fixing B
Not to be used
Shock resistance (2)
12 g, 50 ms on the three axes: X, Y, Z 15 g, 11 ms on the three axes: X, Y, Z
(1) In these conditions, it is recommended that coils LX9F be used for contactor sizes FG150 to FG265. (2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil at Uc). (3) Horizontal fixing: - The operational current AC-1 is equivalent to 80% of the value indicated in the catalogue - Breaking and making capacities not guaranteed - Mechanical and electrical durabilities not guaranteed
Derating of pull-in and drop-out voltage

Contactors LC1 Fixing A Fixing B Pull-in Drop-out Pull-in Drop-out FG150 75% 105% 115% 90% FG185 75% 105% 115% 90% FG265 75% 105% 115% 90% FG400 80% 110% 120% 95% FG500 80% 110% 120% 95% FG630 80% 110% 120% 95%
5/166
LC1 FG265 1000 1500 8
LC1 FG400
LC1 FG500
LC1 FG630
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1 N.A.T.O. IP 20 front face with shrouds LA9 F Front face protected against direct finger contact with shrouds LA9 F TH - 60+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 40+ 70 3000
12 g, 50 ms on the three axes: X, Y, Z 15 g, 11 ms on the three axes: X, Y, Z
5/167
TeSys contactors
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Contactor type
LC1 FG150 3 In AC-3, y 55 C In AC-1, y 55 C y 70 C y 70 C A A V Hz C A A A A A A A A 150/150 220/170 1000 25 to 200 250 Making current: 10 x I in AC-3
LC1 FG185 3 185/180 240/180 1000 25 to 200 275
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue y 440 V)
Rated operational voltage (Ue) Frequency limits Conventional thermal current Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity Permissible short time rating No current flowing for preceding 60 minutes with y 40 C
Up to Of the operational current (1) y 40 I rms conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 I rms conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 For 1.5 or 10 s For 30 s For 1 mn For 3 mn For 10 mn
Making and breaking current: 8 x I in cat. AC-3 1200 700 600 450 350 160 200 250 0.35 8 22 2 1500 920 740 500 400 200 315 315 0.33 12 25 2 25 x 3 150 150 8 18
Fuse protection against short-circuits (U y 440 V)
Motor circuit (type aM)
With thermal overload relay A (type gG) gG fuses A mW W W No. of bars Bar Cable with lug Cable with connector Bolt diameter mm mm2 mm2 mm N.m
Average impedance per pole Power dissipation per pole for the above operational currents
At Ith and 50 Hz AC-3 AC-1
Cabling Minimum c.s.a.
Bar
25 x 3 120 120 8 18
Tightening torque
8 9 10
(1) Sine wave without interference. Above these values, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/168
LC1 FG265 3 265/250 300/250 1000 25 to 200 350 Making current: 10 x I in AC-3
LC1 FG400 3 400/340 430/340 1000 25 to 200 500
LC1 FG500 3 500/500 580/500 1000 25 to 200 700
LC1 FG630 3 630/630 850/700 1000 25 to 200 1000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Making and breaking current: 8 x I in AC-3 2200 1230 950 620 480 315 500 400 0.3 21 37 2 32 x 4 240 240 10 35 3600 2400 1700 1200 1000 400 630 500 0.26 42 65 2 30 x 5 2 x 150 10 35 4200 3200 2400 1500 1200 500 800 800 0.18 45 88 2 40 x 5 2 x 240 10 35 5050 4400 3400 2200 1600 630 800 1000 0.12 48 120 2 60 x 5 12 58
5/169
TeSys contactors
Control circuit characteristics with LX1 coil
1 2
Contactor type
LC1 FG150 V 48440 0.851.1 Uc 0.350.55 Uc
LC1 FG185
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits ( y 55 C) 50 or 60 Hz coils
50 or 60 Hz Operation Drop-out 40400 Hz coils Operation Drop-out
a 50 Hz
Inrush
50 Hz coil 40400 Hz coil Cos j
VA VA
550 0.3
805 0.3 55 0.3 970 0.3 66 0.3 1824 2035 715 10 2400 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
3 4 5
Heat dissipation
Sealed
VA VA
45 0.3
a 60 Hz
Inrush
VA VA
660 0.3
Sealed
VA VA
55 0.3
W Closing "C" Opening "O" ms ms
1216 2335 515 10 2400
6 7 8 9 10
Operating time (1)
Mechanical durability at Uc Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature y 55 C Cabling Min/max c.s.a.
In millions of operating cycles In operating cycles per hour 1 or 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end
1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque
1 or 2 conductors
Characteristics of the locking electromagnet (shockproof device)

Contactor type LC1 FG150 48440 100 20 2400 1 x 106 Control circuit voltage 50/60 Hz Inrush consumption Maximum energisation time at Uc Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability at Uc In operating cycles per hour In millions of operating cycles V VA ms
LC1 FG185 48440 100 20 2400 1 x 106
(1) The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "O" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
References : page 5/178 and 5/179
5/170
LC1 FG265 48440 0.851.1 Uc 0.350.55 Uc 650 0.9 10 0.9 650 0.9 10 0.9 8 4065 100170 10 2400 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
LC1 FG400 110440 0.851.1 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 1075 0.9 15 0.9 1075 0.9 15 0.9 14 4075 100170 10 2400 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
LC1 FG500 110440 0.851.1 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 1100 0.9 18 0.9 1100 0.9 18 0.9 18 4075 100170 10 2400 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
LC1 FG630 110440 0.851.1 Uc 0.250.5 Uc 1650 0.9 22 0.9 1650 0.9 22 0.9 20 4080 100200 10 1200 1/4 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1.2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC1 FG265 48440 100 20 2400 1 x 106
LC1 FG400 110440 100 20 2400 1 x 106
LC1 FG500 110440 100 20 2400 1 x 106
LC1 FG630 110440 100 20 1200 1 x 106
5/171
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Auxiliary contact blocks for 3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG
Environment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contact block type Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60068 Conforming to VDE 0106 C C C m mm2
LAD N
LAD T and LAD S
LAD R
IEC 60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 4794, EN 60947-5-1 UL, CSA TH Protection against direct finger contact IP2X - 60+ 80 - 5+ 60 - 40+ 70 3000 Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5
Ambient air temperature Storage around the device Operation Permissible for operation at Uc Maximum operating altitude Cabling Without derating Phillips N 2 and 6 mm. Flexible or solid cable with or without cable end
Instantaneous and time delay contact characteristics

Contact block type Number of contacts Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional thermal current (Ith) Up to Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to UL, CSA For ambient temperature y 60 C V V V A Hz V mA A A A A A MW Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts Ambient air temperature for operation Repeat accuracy Drift up to 0.5 million operating cycles Drift depending on ambient air temperature Mechanical durability Rated operational power of contacts Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 In millions of operating cycles V 1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity VA VA VA VA ms C
LAD N 1 or 4
LAD T and LAD S 2
LAD R 2
660 690 600 10 25400 17 5 10 a 140; c 250 100 120 140 > 10 1.5 (on energisation and on de-energisation) 30 24 150 80 30 1200 48 300 170 65 2600 - 40+ 70 2% + 15 % 0.25 % per C 5 110/127 400 250 90 7000 220/230 480 290 120 13 000 - 40+ 70 2% + 15 % 0.25 % per C 5 380/400 500 320 130 15 000 440 500 320 130 13 000 600 500 320 130 9000
Frequency of the operational current Minimum switching capacity Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Short-time rating U min I min Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 and VDE 0660. gG fuse Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, I rms Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms Insulation resistance Non-overlap time Time delay (LADT, R and S contact blocks) Accuracy only valid for setting range indicated on the front face
5/172
TeSys contactors
Environment
Module type Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Cabling Conforming to IEC 60068 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation For operation at Uc Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Phillips N 2 and 6 mm. Flexible or solid cable with or without cable end C C C V mm2
LAD T (On-delay) IEC 60255-5 UL, CSA TH
LAD R (Off-delay)
1 2 3
Protection against direct finger contact IP2X - 40+ 80 - 25+ 55 - 25+ 70 250 Min: 1 x 1; max: 2 x 2.5

Module type Built-in protection Of the input Contactor coil suppression Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Permissible variation Control type V
LAD T (On-delay) By varistor By varistor a or c 24250 0.81.1 Uc By mechanical contact only
LAD R (Off-delay) By varistor By bidirectional peak limiting diode a 24250 0.81.1 Uc By mechanical contact only connecting cable < 10 m LAD R (Off-delay) 0.12 ; 1.530 ; 25500 3 % (10 ms minimum) 225 20 40 Illuminates during time delay period
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time delay characteristics

Module type Timing ranges Repeat accuracy Reset time 040 C During time delay period After time delay period Immunity to microbreaks During time delay period After time delay period ms ms ms ms ms s
LAD T (On-delay) 0.12 ; 1.530 ; 25500 3 % (10 ms minimum) 150 50 10 2 Illuminates during time delay period
Minimum impulse duration Time delay signalling By LED
Switching characteristics (solid state type)

Module type Maximum power dissipated Leakage current Residual voltage Overvoltage protection Electrical durability In millions of operating cycles W mA V
LAD T (On-delay) 2 <5 3.3 3 kV; 0.5 joule 30
LAD R (Off-delay) 3.5 <5 3.3 3 kV; 0.5 joule 30
Operating diagrams
U supply (A1 - A2) Time delay output Contactor coil Red LED 1 0 1 0
Electronic On-delay timer LAD T
Electronic Off-delay timer LAD R

U supply (A1 - A2) t Control (A2 - B2) Time delay output Contactor coil Red LED 1 0 1 0 1 0 40 ms
5/173
References
TeSys contactors
For control of motors and distribution circuits. Control circuit: a.c.
PF537334
3-pole shockproof contactors
1 2
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 220 V 380 V 660 V 230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V kW 40 LC1 FG150 55 75 kW 75 90 132 200 250 335 kW 80 100 140 220 280 375 kW 80 100 140 250 295 400 kW 90 110 160 257 355 400 kW 100 110 160 280 335 450 kW 65 100 147 185 335 450
Rated operational current in cat. AC-3, 440 V/AC-1 up to A 150/250 185/275 265/350 400/500 500/700 630/1000
Basic reference, (1) to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) DCN ref. CR182 CR242 CR302 CR432 CR582 CR852 Screw fixing, cabling (2)
Weight
kg LC1 FG150pp LC1 FG185pp LC1 FG265pp LC1 FG400pp LC1 FG500pp LC1 FG630pp 3.430 4.650 7.440 9.100 11.350 18.600
PF537335
110 147 200
3
LC1 FG185
Note: These contactors have instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks with 2 N/O contacts, 1 N/C contact and one coil maintaining contact.
4
PF537336
(1) Devices approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for on-board use. (2) Power terminals can, if required, be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds, to be ordered separately (see page 5/176). (3) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): (1)
Volt a LC1 FG 150FG185 50 Hz (coil LX1) 60 Hz (coil LX1) 50/60 Hz (coil LX9) LC1 FG265 LC1 FG265 LC1 FG400FG500 LC1 FG630 40400 Hz (coil LX1) 40400 Hz (coil LX1) 40400 Hz (coil LX1)
48 E5 E6 E7 E7
110 F5 F6 F7 F7 F7 F7
115 F5 F7 F7 F7 F7
120 G6 G7 G7 F7
208 220 230 240 L6 L7 L7 L7 L7 M5 M6 M7 M7 M7 M7 P5 P7 P7 P7 P7 U5 U6 U7 U7 U7 U7
380 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q7 Q7 Q7
400 V5 V7 V7 V7 V7
415 N5 N7 N7 N7 N7
440 R6 R7 R7 R7 R7
5 6 7 8 9 10
Presentation : pages 5/158 and 5/159 Selection : pages 5/160 to 5/165
5/174
References
TeSys contactors

Number of contacts Clip-on mounting kg LAD Npp 1 1 4 1 1 2 4 3 1 2 4 1 LAD N10 LAD N01 LAD N22 LAD N40 LAD N04 LAD N31 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) 0.020 0.020 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 Max. number of blocks per contactor Composition Reference Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Number of contacts 1 N/O + 1 N/C Clip-on mounting 1
Max. number of blocks per contactor
Time delay Type Range s On-delay 0.13 (2) 0.130 10180 130 (3) Off-delay 0.13 (2) 0.130 10180
Reference
Weight kg
LAD T0 LAD T2 LAD T4 LAD S2 LAD R0 LAD R2 LAD R4 (1) (1)
0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
LAD Tp
LAD Rp
(1) Device approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for on-board use. (2) With extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s. (3) With switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact.
Schemes: page 5/181
5/175
References
TeSys contactors
Accessories for 3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG
1
LA9 F103
For use with contactors
Cabling
Tightening
Set of 2 blocks Set reference Weight kg 0.560
LC1FG150 and FG185
1 x 16150 mm2 or 2 x 1695 mm2 Number of shrouds per set
4 mm hexagonal socket key
LA9F103
Power terminal protection shrouds

For use with contactors LC1FG150 and FG185 6
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LA9 FGppp
Set reference LA9F702 LA9F703 LA9F704 (1) (1) (1)
Weight kg 0.250 0.250 0.250
LC1FG265, FG400 and FG500 6 LC1 FG630 6
Shockproof devices (locking electromagnet) (2)

Maximum energisation time at Uc ms 20 Inrush consumption
For contactors
Kit reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (3) LA9 FG150603pp (1) LA9 FG265603pp (1) LA9 FG400603pp (1) LA9 FG630603pp (1)
Weight
VA 250 LC1FG150 and FG185 LC1 FG265 LC1 FG400 and FG500 LC1 FG630
kg 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
(1) Device approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for on-board use. (2) Replacement shockproof device, supplied in kit form, comprising: - 1 locking electromagnet. - fixings suitable for the contactor rating. (3) Control circuit voltage: Volt a LA9 FG150 to FG265 LA9 FG400 to FG630 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 48 E 110 F F 115/120 208 F F M M 220 M M 230/240 380 M M Q Q 415 N N 440 N N
5/176
TeSys contactors
Accessories for 3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG
Sets of contacts
For use on contactors LC1 FG150 LC1 FG185 LC1 FG265 LA5 FG431 LC1 FG400 LC1 FG500 LC1 FG630
Per pole: 2 fixed contacts, 1 moving contact , 2 deflectors, 1 back-plate, clamping screws and washers.
Replacement for 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles Reference LA5FF431 LA5FG431 LA5FH431 LA5F400803 LA5F500803 LA5F630803 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) Weight kg 0.270 0.350 0.660 2.000 2.950 6.100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Arc chambers
For use on contactors LC1 FG150 LC1 FG185 LC1 FG265 LC1 FG400 LC1 FG500 LA5 F40050 LC1 FG630
Replacement for 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles
Reference LA5F15050 LA5F18550 LA5F26550 LA5F40050 LA5F50050 LA5F63050 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
Weight kg 0.490 0.670 0.920 1.300 1.850 3.150
(1) Device approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for on-board use.
5/177
References
TeSys contactors
Spare or replacement parts a.c. supply 50/60 Hz
Coils for 3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG
References
1 2
LX1 FFppp
Control circuit voltage Uc 50 Hz V 48 110/115 120 208 220/230 240 60 Hz V 48 110 115/120 208 320 230/240 380 415 440
Voltage code
Coil reference
Weight kg
Coils for contactors LC1 FG150

E6 E5 F6 G6 F5 FE5 L6 M6 U6 LE5 M5 U5 Q6 N6 R6 Q5 N5 LX1 FF040 LX1 FF048 LX1 FF092 LX1 FF095 LX1 FF110 LX1 FF120 LX1 FF170 LX1 FF184 LX1 FF187 LX1 FF200 LX1 FF220 LX1 FF240 LX1 FF316 LX1 FF340 LX1 FF360 LX1 FF380 LX1 FF415 (1) 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430 0.430
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Scheme : page 5/181
380 415/440
Specifications Average consumption at 20C: - inrush 50 Hz: 550 VA; 60Hz: 660 VA, - sealed 50 Hz: 45 VA; 60Hz: 55 VA, cos j = 0.32. Operating cycles/hour (q = 55 C): 2400.

48 110/115 120 LX1 FGppp 208 220/230 240 380 415/440 48 110 115/120 208 320 230/240 380 415 440 E6 E5 F6 G6 F5 FE5 L6 M6 U6 LE5 M5 U5 Q6 N6 R6 Q5 N5 LX1 FG040 LX1 FG048 LX1 FG092 LX1 FG095 LX1 FG110 LX1 FG120 LX1 FG170 LX1 FG184 LX1 FG187 LX1 FG200 LX1 FG220 LX1 FG240 LX1 FG316 LX1 FG340 LX1 FG360 LX1 FG380 LX1 FG415 (1) 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.550
Specifications Average consumption at 20C: - inrush 50 Hz: 805 VA; 60 Hz: 970 VA, - sealed 50 Hz: 55 VA; 60Hz: 66 VA, cos j = 0.34. Operating cycles/hour (q = 55 C): 2400. (1) Device approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for onboard use.
5/178
TeSys contactors
Spare or replacement parts a.c. supply 50/60 Hz
Coils for 3-pole shockproof contactors LC1 FG
Control circuit voltage Uc 50 and 60 Hz V
Voltage code
Coil reference
Weight kg
1 2 3

110/120 208 220/230 240 380/415 F7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 LX1 FH1102 LX1 FH2002 LX1 FH2202 LX1 FH2402 LX1 FH3802 (1) 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740 0.740
LX1 FHppp
Specifications Average consumption at 20C: - inrush 50 or 60 Hz: 600 to 700 VA, - sealed 50 or 60 Hz: 8 to 10 VA, cos j= 0.9. Operating cycles/hour (q = 55 C): 2400.

110/120 208 220/230 230/240 380/400 415/440 LX1 FJppp F7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 LX1 FJ110 LX1 FJ200 LX1 FJ220 LX1 FJ240 LX1 FJ380 LX1 FJ415 (1) 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
4 5
Specifications Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush 50 or 60 Hz: 1000 to 1150 VA, - sealed 50 or 60 Hz: 12 to 18 VA, cos j= 0.9. Operating cycles/hour (q = 55 C): 2400.

110/120 208 220/230 230/240 380/400 415/440 LX1 FKppp F7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 LX1 FK110 LX1 FK200 LX1 FK220 LX1 FK240 LX1 FK380 LX1 FK415 (1) 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150
6 7 8 9 10
Specifications Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush 50 or 60 Hz: 1050 to 1150 VA, - sealed 50 or 60 Hz: 16 to 20 VA, cos j= 0.9. Operating cycles/hour (q = 55 C): 2400.

110/120 208 220/230 380/400 415/440 LX1 FLppp F7 L7 M7 Q7 N7 LX1 FL110 LX1 FL200 LX1 FL220 LX1 FL380 LX1 FL415 (1) 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500
Specifications Average consumption at 20C: - inrush 50 or 60 Hz: 1500 to 1730 VA, - sealed 50 or 60 Hz: 20 to 25 VA, cos j= 0.9. Operating cycles/hour (q = 55 C): 1200. (1) Device approved by the DCN (French naval shipyard department) and authorised for onboard use.
Scheme : page 5/181
5/179
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Dimensions
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC1 FG150, FG185 and FG265

S (1) = S1 FG150 M8x25 F1G85 M8x25 FG265 M10x35 = b2 b1
X1
J1
= Z Q P a P Q1 f =
G1 G
= Y
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. LC1 FG150 FG185 FG265 200500 V 10 10 10 6001000 V 15 15 15
X1
L c
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/176).
LC1 FG150 FG185 FG265
a 181
b 170
b1 137 137 145
b2 301 305 375
c 180 190 222
f 131 130 147
G 106 111 142
G1 80 80 96
J 106 106 106
J1 120 120 120
L 116 150
M 150 178
P 40 40 48
Q 26 29 39
Q1 57.5 59.5 66.5
S 20 20 25
S1 34 34 44.5
Y 44 44 38
Z 13.5 13.5 21.5
183.5 174 217.5 203
122.5 154
f = minimum distance required for coil removal.
LC1 FG400 and FG500

56 (1) = S 44,5 6xM10x35
X1
209
120
= 180 b2 M b
G 23,5 G1 J Q P a P Q1 f
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. LC1 FG400 FG500 200500 V 15 15 6001000 V 20 20
= X1 L c =
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/176).
LC1 FG400 FG500
a 237 257
b 206 238
b2 375 400
c 234 247
f 146 150
G G supplied min. 80 80 66 66
G G1 G1 max. supplied min. 102 120 223 223 156 156
G1 J max. 192 210 19.5 39.5
L 160 181
M 181 208
P 48 55
Q 75 78
Q1 74 77
S 25 30
f = minimum distance required for coil removal.
5/180
TeSys contactors
LC1 FG630
72
Dimensions
(continued)
40 64 6xM12x45
1
=
(1) X1 =
2 3 4 5
280
304
464
X1
264
155 197 255
60,5 79 80 321 80 89 180 (2)
282
68,5
X1 (mm) = Minimum electrical clearance according to operating voltage and breaking capacity. LC1 FG630 200500 V 20 6901000 V 30
(1) Power terminal protection shroud (see page 5/176). (2) Minimum distance required for coil removal.
Schemes
a
Contactors LC1-FG150 to FG630 d 50-60 Hz max

3/L2 1/L1 5/L3 13/NO 43/NO 21/NC 31/NC 03
A1
A2
04
14
32
22
44
180
Un y 240 V a
Add-on blocks
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts 1 N/O LAD N10
43/NO (94)
C2
6 7 8 9 10
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
1 N/C LAD N01

41/NC (92)
C1
2 N/O + 2 N/C LAD N22

53/NO 83/NO 51/NC 71/NC
4 N/O LAD N40

53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
4 N/C LAD N04

51/NC 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
3 N/O + 1 N/C LAD N31

53/NO 73/NO 74 83/NO 84 61/NC 62
44 (93)
42 (91)
54
84
54
64
74
84
62
52
72
62
Time delay auxiliary contacts On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Tp

67/NO 55/N
Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LAD Rp

57/NO 65/NC
56
68
58
Coils a
LX1 FF, FG, FH, FJ, FK and FL
03 A1 A2
A1
A2
66
72
82
54
5/181
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
TeSys LC1B contactors
Environment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contactor type Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Conforming to IEC 60158-1/IEC 60947-4 Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C
V V
LC1BL 1000 1500
LC1BM 1000 1500
LC1BP 1000 1500
LC1BR 1000 1500
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Standard version Special version Storage Operation Permissible Without derating Without derating C C C m
IEC 60158-1, IEC 60947-4, NF C 63-110,VDE 0660, BS 5424 CSA, BV, RINA TC TH - 60+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 50+ 60 3000 30 occasional, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
Ambient air temperature around the device (for operation at Uc) Maximum operating altitude Operating positions
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-3, q y 55 C (Ue y 440 V) In AC-1, q y 40 C Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to Frequency limits Without derating (sine wave) Derating coefficient Maximum thermal current (Ith) Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity q y 40 C I rms conforming to IEC 60158-1 and 60947-4 I rms up to 440 V conforming to 500 V IEC 60158-1 660-690 V and 60947-4 1000 V A A V Hz 1, 2, 3 or 4 750 800 1, 2, 3 or 4 1000 1250 1, 2, 3 or 4 1500 2000 1, 2, 3 or 4 1800 2750
1000 50/60 100 Hz: 0.9 - 150 Hz: 0.8 - 250 Hz: 0.7 - 400 Hz: 0.5 800 10 000 10 000 9000 8000 4000 9600 9600 7000 4800 3500 2100 1200 800 1000 800 0.18 88 115 2 50 x 5 4x8 1250 10 000 10 000 9000 8000 4000 9600 9600 8000 5200 3800 2400 1800 1200 1500 1200 0.18 180 280 2 80 x 5 4 x 10 2000 15 000 15 000 12 000 9000 5000 12 000 12 000 9600 6400 5200 3600 2800 2 x 800 (1) 2 x 1000 (1) 2 x 1000 (1) 0.13 290 520 3 100 x5 4 x 10 2750 18 000 18 000 15 000 11 000 6000 15 000 15 000 12 000 8000 6300 4400 3600 2 x 1000 (1) 2 x 1200 (1) 2 x 1200 (1) 0.09 360 680 4 100 x 5 4 x 10
A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A mW W W
Permissible short time rating For 1 s From cold state, with no current For 5 s flowing for previous 60 minutes For 10 s at q y 40 C For 30 s For 1 min. For 3 min. For 10 min. Short-circuit protection by fuses U y 440 V Motor circuit (type aM) With thermal overload relay (type gl) gl fuses At Ith and 50 Hz AC-3 AC-1 Number of bars Bar
Average impedance per pole Power dissipated per pole
Connection
mm mm
Bolt diameter Tightening torque Power circuit connections
N.m 21 35 35 35 (1) Fuses must not be connected in parallel unless specified by the manufacturer.
Dimensions and schemes : pages 5/192 and 5/193
5/182
TeSys contactors


Contactor type Rated control voltage 50/60 Hz c 1,2 or 3-pole contactors c 4-pole contactors Operation Drop-out a Number of poles: 1 Number of poles: 2 Number of poles: 3 Number of poles: 4 Number of poles: 1 Number of poles: 2 Number of poles: 3 Number of poles: 4 V V V V V VA VA VA VA W W W W ms ms ms LC1BL 110500 48500 48500 0.851.1 Uc 0.300.50 Uc LC1BM 110500 48500 48500 0.851.1 Uc 0.300.50 Uc LC1BP 110500 48500 48500 0.851.1 Uc 0.350.50 Uc LC1BR 110500 48500 60500 0.851.1 Ucw 0.400.50 Uc
1 2 3 4
Voltage limits
Maximum consumption (coil + economy resistor)
Inrush: 620 - sealed: 10 Inrush: 1000 - sealed: 20 Inrush: 1300 - sealed: 31 Inrush: 1600 - sealed: 47 Inrush: 520 - sealed: 10 Inrush: 800 - sealed: 20 Inrush: 1100 - sealed: 31 Inrush: 1400 - sealed: 47 100150 50100 2040 1.2 100150 50100 2040 1.2 120 100150 50100 2040 1.2 120 100150 50100 2040 1.2 120
c (1)
Operating time (2) average at Uc (in milliseconds) Mechanical durability (at Uc) Maximum operating rate in mechanical operating cycles
C O breaking on a side O breaking on c side In millions of operating cycles Ambient temperature y 55 C
Op. 120 cycs/h
5 6
Characteristics of instantaneous auxiliary contacts ZC4GMp

Rated thermal current Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to VDE, group C Conforming to IEC 60947-1 and VDE 0660 A V V A 20 660 750 20
Short-circuit protection gl type cartridge fuses Operational power
1 million operating cycles Making and breaking capacity Cabling With cable end Without cable end
V VA/W VA/W mm2 mm2
a supply 110/127 220 2000 4000 14 000 23 000
380 4000 35 000
415/440 500 4000 3500 45 000 35 000
c supply 110 220 250 250 1600 800
440 230 400
500 200 360
7 8 9 10
1 or 2 x 4 mm2 conductors 1 or 2 x 6 mm2 conductors
(1) The inrush and sealed power values of d.c. electromagnets often require the use of an intermediate relay for control. (2) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
5/183
References
TeSys contactors

Contactors for motor control in category AC-3, from 750 to 1800 A (a or c )
1 2 3 4
3-pole contactors
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3
Rated operational current in AC-3 440V up to 500 V kW 500 660 V 690 V kW 560 1000 V kW A 530 750
Weight
220 V 230 V kW 220
380 V 400 V kW 400
415 V kW 425
440 V kW 450
522612
2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4
2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3
LC1BL33p22 LC1BL33p31 LC1BL33p13 LC1BL33p40 LC1BM33p22 LC1BM33p31 LC1BM33p13 LC1BM33p40 LC1BP33p22 LC1BP33p31 LC1BP33p13 LC1BP33p40 LC1BR33p22 LC1BR33p31 LC1BR33p13 LC1BR33p40
kg 58.000 58.000 58.000 58.000 57.000 57.000 57.000 57.000 94.000 94.000 94.000 94.000 129.000 129.000 129.000 129.000
LC1BP33
280
500
530
560
600
670
530
1000
425
750
800
800
700
750
670
1500
500
900
900
900
900
900
750
1800
5 6 7 8 9 10
Contactors for control in category AC-1, from 800 to 2750 A (a or c )

Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors
Maximum operational current in AC-1 (q y 40 C) A 800 Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Weight
2 2 LC1BL31p22 3 1 LC1BL31p31 1 3 LC1BL31p13 4 LC1BL31p40 2 2 2 LC1BL32p22 3 1 LC1BL32p31 1 3 LC1BL32p13 4 LC1BL32p40 3 2 2 LC1BL33p22 3 1 LC1BL33p31 1 3 LC1BL33p13 4 LC1BL33p40 4 2 2 LC1BL34p22 3 1 LC1BL34p31 1 3 LC1BL34p13 4 LC1BL34p40 (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 48 110 120 125 127 220 230 240 380 400 a 50400 Hz F K G M P U Q V 1 c ED FD GD MD UD
kg 32.000 32.000 32.000 32.000 45.000 45.000 45.000 45.000 58.000 58.000 58.000 58.000 72.000 72.000 72.000 72.000 415 N 440 R RD 500 S SD
For voltages other than those indicated above, replace the p in the reference with the the operational voltage (3 figures) and the type of current (2 letters: AC for a.c. supply and DC for d.c. supply). Example: 82 V d.c., the reference becomes LC1BP33082DC22. For coil characteristics, see pages 5/188 to 5/191.
5/184
TeSys contactors
Contactors for control in category AC-1, from 800 to 2750 A (a or c ) (continued)

Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors
Maximum operational current in AC-1 (q y 40 C) Number of poles Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
522612
A 1250
2 LC1BP33 3
2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 4
2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3
LC1BM31p22 LC1BM31p31 LC1BM31p13 LC1BM31p40 LC1BM32p22 LC1BM32p31 LC1BM32p13 LC1BM32p40 LC1BM33p22 LC1BM33p31 LC1BM33p13 LC1BM33p40 LC1BM34p22 LC1BM34p31 LC1BM34p13 LC1BM34p40 LC1BP31p22 LC1BP31p31 LC1BP31p13 LC1BP31p40 LC1BP32p22 LC1BP32p31 LC1 BP32p13 LC1BP32p40 LC1BP33p22 LC1BP33p31 LC1BP33p13 LC1BP33p40 LC1BP34p22 LC1BP34p31 LC1BP34p13 LC1BP34p40 LC1BR31p22 LC1BR31p31 LC1BR31p13 LC1BR31p40 LC1BR32p22 LC1BR32p31 LC1BR32p13 LC1BR32p40 LC1BR33p22 LC1BR33p31 LC1BR33p13 LC1BR33p40 LC1BR34p22 LC1BR34p31 LC1BR34p13 LC1BR34p40
kg 31.000 31.000 31.000 31.000 44.000 44.000 44.000 44.000 57.000 57.000 57.000 57.000 71.000 71.000 71.000 71.000 41.000 41.000 41.000 41.000 65.000 65.000 65.000 65.000 94.000 94.000 94.000 94.000 120.000 120.000 120.000 120.000 52.000 52.000 52.000 52.000 85.000 85.000 85.000 85.000 129.000 129.000 129.000 129.000 160.000 160.000 160.000 160.000
2000
2750
(1) See previous page.
5/185
References
TeSys contactors
813307
Spare parts
Description Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks ZC4GM1 Description Set of contacts (1 moving contact, 1 fixed contact) For contactor LC1B Composition 1 N/O 1 N/C For contactor LC1BL LC1BM LC1BP Number of sets required per contactor pole 1 1 2 3 Reference ZC4GM1 ZC4GM2 Set reference PA1LB80 PA1LB80 PA1LB80 PA1LB80 Reference PA1LB75 PA1LB76 PA1LB89 PA1LB50 PA1LB50 PA1PB50 PA1RB50 Weight kg 0.030 0.030 Weight kg 0.420 0.420 0.420 0.420 Weight kg 0.220 0.200 0.120 3.700 3.700 6.200 8.500
1 2 3 4 5
PA1LB50
813306
813308
813309
LC1BR PA1LB80 (PA1LB76 + PA1LB75) PA1LB89 Description For contactor
Moving contact LC1B only (for 1 finger) Fixed contact only LC1B (for 1 finger) Blow-out horn only LC1B (for 1 finger) Arc chamber LC1BL (for 1 contactor pole) LC1BM LC1BP LC1BR
Description For contactor Sold in lots of 2 Unit reference LA9B103 Weight kg 1.620
6
813305
Bar support LC1BL to BR bracket for mounting on 120 or 150 mm centres
Assembly of two vertically mounted contactors by the customer

Description Mechanical interlock and locking device components For contactor LC1B Reference EZ2LB0601 Weight kg 1.280
7 8 9 10
EZ2LB0601
Specifications
- Positive mechanical interlock between two vertically mounted contactors of the same or different ratings. - Connecting rod with cranks mounted on the right-hand, pole side. - Vertical fixing centres of the two contactors: 600 mm. Description Notched mounting rails used as uprights and as equipment support 1/4 turn sliding clip nut and corresponding screw for assembly of rails AM1EC Specification 2 mm steel, with zinc chromate treatment Height mm 1650 1850 2000 M8 M8 x 18 Sold in lots of 4 4 4 10 10 Unit reference AM1EC165 AM1EC185 AM1EC200 AF1CD081 AF1VC820 Weight kg 2.460 2.760 2.980 0.020 0.024
5/186
Adjustment characteristics
TeSys contactors
5
Electromagnet
Electromagnet EB5KB50
Adjustment of pick-up travel and pull-in travel

Moving circuit
E e
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Coil Moving circuit
Return spring
Poles
Complete pole
N/O pole
Fixed contact Moving contact
F
Opening gap adjustment
Pole spring
Adjustment of application force
c or a supply adjustment characteristics with economy resistor (and rectifier on a)

Contactor type Electromagnet Pick-up travel (E) Pull-in travel (e) Coil Pull-in voltage Drop-out voltage N/O pole Adjustment of application force (F) on the contact per pole according to contactor composition 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole V V daN daN daN daN mm mm LC1BL EB5KB50 30 10 WB1KBppp 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 30 30 30 30 LC1BM EB5KB50 30 10 WB1KBppp 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 30 30 30 30 LC1BP EB5KB50 30 10 WB1KBppp 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 30 (1) 30 (1) 30 (1) 30 (1) LC1BR EB5KB50 30 10 WB1KBppp 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 30 (2) 30 (2) 30 (2) 30 (2)
(1) Each pole has 2 contacts; the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts. (2) Each pole has 3 contacts; the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts.
5/187
References
TeSys contactors
Replacement coils and accessories for single-pole contactors
1 2 3 4
WB1KBppp
522634
The same coils are used for c or a contactor control supply. b For d.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil: - 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + 1 or 2 auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor). b For 50 to 400 Hz a.c. operation, the following must be associated with the coil: - 1 individual rectifier (to be wired), - 1 economy resistor arrangement (resistors + auxiliary contact(s) or 1 contactor) wired into the rectified current side.
Operating range min-max (1) d.c. a.c. Coil Resistance at 20 C 10 % W 5.1 5.9 7.3 9.5 11.6 16.2 19.9 25.5 33.1 50.9 61.36 78.4 94.8 123.9 159.9 199.6 247.4 382 506.7 I inrush 10 % at Un max A 10.3 9.5 8.9 7.1 6.9 5.3 4.7 4.3 4.2 3 2.7 2.4 2.3 1.9 1.7 1.6 1.6 1.1 (2) 1 (3) Economy resistor Resistor Unit reference Contact Qty Reference Rectifier Coil (for a only) Reference Reference Weight
References
Total resistance W 270 330 390 560 680 820 1000 1200 1800 2700 3300 3900 4700 6800 4700 + 3300 5600 + 4700 6800 + 5600 20 000 24 000
5 6 7 8 9 10
V 47-51 52-56 57-64 65-68 69-79 80-87 88-94 95-108 109-136 137-151 152-166 167-189 190-221 222-243 244-267 268-318 319-405 406-446 447-500
V 110-125 126-155 156-173 174-191 192-216 217-256 257-280 281-307 308-365 366-463 464-500
DR2SC0270 DR2SC0330 DR2SC0390 DR2SC0560 DR2SC0680 DR2SC0820 DR2SC1000 DR2SC1200 DR2SC1800 DR2SC2700 DR2SC3300 DR2SC3900 DR2SC4700 DR2SC6800 DR2SC8200 DR2SC1001 DR2SC1201 DR2SC1001 DR2SC1201
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 LC1DT20LDS135 LC1DT20LDS135
DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1S
WB1KB155 WB1KB132 WB1KB123 WB1KB133 WB1KB121 WB1KB130 WB1KB140 WB1KB134 WB1KB124 WB1KB122 WB1KB135 WB1KB136 WB1KB139 WB1KB125 WB1KB137 WB1KB126 WB1KB138 WB1KB127 WB1KB128
kg 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
LC1DT20UDS135 DR5TE1S LC1DT20TDS135 DR5TE1S LC1DT20VDS135 DR5TE1S LC1DT20RDS135
Specifications
b Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption): - d.c.: inrush 380520 W, sealed 0.150.20 W - a.c. (with rectifier): inrush 450620 VA, sealed 0.150.20 VA b Time constant when sealed 25 ms b Economy resistor consumption: 710 W b Operating cycles/hour at q y 55 C: y 120 b Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles b With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level y 7. (1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V, beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current. (2) 2 resistors in series: 2 x 10 000 W. (3) 2 resistors in series: 2 x 12,000 W.
5/188
References
TeSys contactors
Replacement coils and accessories for 2-pole contactors
Operating range min-max (1) d.c. a.c. Coil Resistance at 20 C 10 % W 3.22 4.04 4.96 5.86 7.2 9.6 11.4 16.3 19.7 25.2 32.5 49.7 61 77.2 94 128 160 197 257 I inrush 10 % at Un max A 15.8 13.8 12.5 11.6 11 8.8 8.6 6.6 6 5.4 5.3 3.8 3.4 3 3 2.4 2.1 2 1.9 Economy resistor Resistors (2 in series) Unit Total reference resistance DR2SC0068 DR2SC0082 DR2SC0100 DR2SC0100 DR2SC0120 DR2SC0120 DR2SC0150 DR2SC0180 DR2SC0220 DR2SC0220 DR2SC0270 DR2SC0330 DR2SC0390 DR2SC0470 DR2SC0680 DR2SC1000 DR2SC1200 DR2SC1500 DR2SC1800 DR2SC1800 DR2SC2200 DR2SC2700 DR2SC3300 DR2SC3900 DR2SC4700 DR2SC5600 W 2x68 82 + 100 100 + 120 2x120 2 x 150 180 + 220 220 + 270 2x330 2x390 2x470 2x680 2x1000 2x1200 1500 + 1800 1800 + 2200 2x2700 2x3300 2x3900 4700 + 5600 Contact Qty Reference Rectifier Coil (for a only) Reference Reference Weight
References
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V 48-51 52-56 57-62 63-68 69-79 80-85 WB1KBppp 86-98 99-108 109-119 120-136 137-173 174-191 192-210 211-238 239-279 280-310 311-341 342-399 400-500
V 99-113 114-125 126-136 137-156 157-196 197-216 217-238 239-272 273-318 319-359 360-387 388-452 453-500
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2
DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U
kg 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
522634
LP1DT20LDS135 DR5TE1S LP1DT20UDS135 LP1DT20TDS135 LP1DT20TDS135 LP1DT20VDS135 DR5TE1S DR5TE1S DR5TE1S DR5TE1S
Specifications
b Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption): - d.c.: inrush 600800 W, sealed 0.350.5 W - a.c. (with rectifier): inrush 7201000 VA, sealed 0.350.5 VA b Time constant when sealed 25 ms b Economy resistor consumption: 1520 W b Operating cycles/hour at q y 55 C: y 120 b Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles b With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level y 7. (1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V, beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current.
5/189
References
TeSys contactors
1 2 3 4
WB1KBppp
522634
Operating range min-max (1) d.c. a.c. Coil Resistance at 20 C 10 % W 1.85 2.35 3.22 4.04 4.96 5.86 7.2 9.6 11.4 16.3 11.7 25.2 32.2 49.7 61 77.2 94 128 160 197 257 I inrush 10 % at Un max A 27 23.5 18.5 16 14.5 13.5 12.8 10.2 10 7.7 7 6.3 6.2 4.5 4 3.6 3.5 2.8 2.5 2.4 1.9 Economy resistor Resistors (2 in parallel or in series) Unit Total reference resistance W DR2SC0150 2x150// DR2SC0180 2x180// DR2SC0220 2x220// DR2SC0270 2X270// DR2SC0330 2x330// DR2SC0100 2x100 DR2SC0120 2x120 DR2SC0150 150 DR2SC0180 + 180 DR2SC0180 180 DR2SC0220 + 220 DR2SC0270 2x270 DR2SC0330 2x330 DR2SC0390 390 DR2SC0470 + 470 DR2SC0560 2x560 DR2SC0820 2x820 DR2SC1000 2x1000 DR2SC1200 2x1200 DR2SC1500 2x1500 DR2SC1500 3x1500 DR2SC1800 3x1800 DR2SC2200 3x2200 DR2SC2700 3x2700 Contact Qty Reference kg 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 Rectifier Coil (for a only) Reference Reference Weight
References
V 47-50 51-55 56-60 61-66 67-72 73-79 80-92 93-98 99-114
V 108-113 114-132 133-145 146-160 161-181 182-228 229-255 256-282 283-316 317-372 373-408 409-452 453-500
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 LC1DT20LDS135 LC1DT20LDS135 LC1DT20UDS135 LC1DT20TDS135 LC1DT20VDS135 LC1DT20VDS135 LC1DT20RDS135
DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1S DR5TE1S DR5TE1S DR5TE1S DR5TE1S DR5TE1S
WB1KB154 WB1KB153 WB1KB141 WB1KB142 WB1KB155 WB1KB132 WB1KB123 WB1KB133 WB1KB121 WB1KB130 WB1KB140 WB1KB134 WB1KB124 WB1KB122 WB1KB135 WB1KB136 WB1KB139 WB1KB125 WB1KB137 WB1KB126 WB1KB138
5 6 7 8 9 10
115-126 127-139 140-159 160-201 202-222 223-246 247-277 278-327 328-360 361-399 400-469 470-500
Specifications
b Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption): - d.c.: inrush 9001100 W, sealed 0.71 W - a.c. (with rectifier): inrush 11001300 VA, sealed 0.71 VA b Time constant when sealed 25 ms b Economy resistor consumption: 2430 W b Operating cycles/hour at q y 55 C: y 120 b Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles b With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level y 7. (1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V, beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current.
5/190
References
TeSys contactors
Operating range min-max (1) d.c. a.c. Coil Resistance at 20 C 10 % W 2.35 3.22 4.04 4.96 5.86 7.2 9.6 11.4 16.3 19.7 25.2 32.5 49.7 61 77.2 94 128 160 197 I inrush 10 % at Un max A 26 21 18 16.3 15 14 11.5 11.3 8.7 8 7.1 6.9 5 4.5 4 3.9 3.2 2.8 2.5 Economy resistor Resistors (3 in series) Reference Total unit resistance DR2SC0027 DR2SC0033 DR2SC0039 DR2SC0047 DR2SC0056 DR2SC0068 DR2SC0100 DR2SC0100 DR2SC0150 DR2SC0180 DR2SC0220 DR2SC0330 DR2SC0470 DR2SC0560 DR2SC0680 DR2SC0820 DR2SC1200 DR2SC1500 DR2SC1800 W 3x27 3x33 3x39 3x47 3x56 3x68 3x100 3x100 3x150 3x180 3x220 3x330 3x470 3x560 3x680 3x820 3x1200 3x1500 3x1800 Contact Qty Reference Rectifier Coil (for a only) Reference Reference Weight
References
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
WB1KBppp
V 57-61 62-67 68-73 74-81 82-89 90-102 103-111 112-129 130-143 144-157 158-180 181-226 227-251 252-278 279-313 314-368 369-408 409-448 449-500
V 105-119 120-128 129-148 149-163 164-179 180-204 205-259 260-288 289-317 318-356 357-418 419-462 463-500
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM2 LC1DT20LDS135 LC1DT20UDS135 LC1DT20UDS135 LC1DT20TDS135 LC1DT20VDS135 LC1DT20VDS135 LC1DT20RDS135
DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1S DR5TE1S DR5TE1S DR5TE1S DR5TE1S DR5TE1S
kg 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
522634
Specifications
b Average coil consumption (low sealed consumption): - d.c.: inrush 11001400 W, sealed 1.21.6 W - a.c. (with rectifier): inrush 13001600 VA, sealed 1.21.6 VA b Time constant when sealed 25 ms b Economy resistor consumption: 3545 W b Operating cycles/hour at q y 55 C: y 120 b Mechanical durability at Uc: 1.2 million operating cycles b With a.c. operation: good resistance to voltage drop on inrush, non susceptibility to micro-breaks, mains harmonics: level y 7. (1) For supply voltages of less than 110 V, beware of voltage drops caused by the inrush current.
5/191
Dimensions
TeSys contactors

330
330
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole contactors LC1 B Common side view

185 290
Single, 2 or 3-pole contactors LC1Bp31, Bp32 or Bp33
4-pole contactors LC1Bp34
15
15
15
260
365
44 30 15
P
M
Q1 30
30
P M1 L
51 M2
Q1 30
c 85 b c
T
LC1BL 1 2 50 50 59 59 16 16 345 445 285 385 121 121 100 100 100 100 122 122 10 10 30 30 9 9 3 50 59 16 540 480 121 100 100 122 10 30 9 4 50 59 16 760 308 392 121 100 100 122 10 30 9 LC1BM 1 2 63 63 55 55 20 20 345 445 285 385 125 125 100 100 100 100 157 157 17 17 30 30 11 11 3 63 55 20 540 480 125 100 100 157 17 30 11 4 63 55 20 760 308 392 125 100 100 157 17 30 11 LC1BP 1 2 100 100 55 55 20 20 385 540 325 480 125 125 150 150 110 110 173 173 20 20 60 60 11 11 3 100 55 20 760 700 125 150 110 173 20 60 11 4 100 55 20 1065 455 550 125 150 110 173 20 60 11 LC1BR 1 2 125 125 50 50 25 25 445 635 385 575 130 130 195 195 130 130 173 173 20 20 60 60 11 11 3 125 50 25 885 825 130 195 130 173 20 60 11 4 125 50 25 1065 455 550 130 195 130 173 20 60 11
Number of poles a b c L M M1 M2 N P Q1 R S T
Electrical safety clearance
Values X1 and X2 are given for a breaking capacity of 10 In (a 3-phase supply).
N
a 3-phase voltage 380/440 V
X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X2
LC1BL 100 150 100 150 150 200 200 250
LC1BM 100 150 100 150 150 200 200 250
LC1BP 150 200 150 220 200 250 200 250
LC1BR 200 250 200 250 200 250 250 300
X2
500 V
660/690 V
1000 V
X1
8 9 10
Mechanical interlock for assembling vertically mounted reversing contactors

EZ2LB0601
A = (E112) 488
E = 600
5/192
Schemes
TeSys contactors

LC1Bp31p22
A1
LC1Bp31p31
A1
LC1Bp31p13
A1
LC1Bp31p40
A1
1 2 3 4
A2
A2
LC1Bp32p22
A1
LC1Bp32p31
A1
LC1Bp32p13
A1
A2
LC1Bp32p40
A1
A2
LC1Bp33p22
A1
A2
LC1Bp33p31
A1
A2
LC1Bp33p13
A1
LC1Bp33p40
A1
A2
LC1Bp34p22
A1
LC1Bp34p31
A1
A2
LC1Bp34p13
A1
A2
LC1Bp34p40
A1 A2
A2
A2
a.c. control circuit
S3
S1
A2
A2
A2
A2
KM
2-wire control
S2
3-wire control
5 6
KM
KM
Dotted lines show optional wiring and external items required.
d.c. control circuit
7
S3 S1 KM
2-wire control
S3
KM
2-wire control
S1
KA
S2
3-wire control
S2
3-wire control
KM R
KM R
8 9 10
KM
KM
KA
Nota : It is essential to check that the control circuit contacts have ratings compatible with the voltage and power consumption of the operating coil of the contactor. If not, an intermediate KA relay must be fitted and wired as shown. Dotted lines show optional wiring and external items required.
5/193
Selection
TeSys contactors

For utilisation category AC-3
Operational current and power conforming to IEC (q y 60 C)
1 2 3
Contactor size
Maximum operational current in AC-3 Rated operational power P (standard motor power ratings)
y 440 V 220/240 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V 1000 V
A kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
LC1/ LP1 K06 6 1.5
LC1/ LP1 K09 9 2.2
LC1 K12 12
LC1 K16 16 3 7.5 7.5 7.5 5.5 4
LC1 D09 9 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5
LC1 D12 12 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5
LC1 D18 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10
LC1 D25 25 5.5 11 11 11 15 15
LC1 D32 32 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5
LC1 D38 38 9 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5
LC1 D40A 40 11 18.5 22 22 22 30
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 4 4
2.2 2.2 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour (1)

On-load factor
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
y 85%
Operational power P 0.5 P
LC1 D09 1200 3000 1800
LC1 D12 1200 3000 1800
LC1 D18 1200 2500 1800
LC1 D25 1200 2500 1800
LC1 D32 1000 2500 1200
LC1 D38 1000 2500 1200
LC1 D40A 1000 2500 1200
y 25%
Operational current and power conforming to UL, CSA

Contactor size Maximum operational current in AC-3 Rated operational power P (standard motor power ratings 60 Hz) y 440 V 200/208 V 230/240 V 460/480 V 575/600 V A HP HP HP HP LC1/ LP1 K06 6 LC1/ LP1 K09 9 2 3 5 5
(q y 60 C)
LC1/ LP1 K12 12 3 3 7.5 10 LC1 D09 9 2 2 5 7.5 LC1 D12 12 3 3 7.5 10 LC1 D18 18 5 5 10 15 LC1 D25 25 7.5 7.5 15 20 LC1 D32 32 10 10 20 25 LC1 D38 LC1 D40A 40 10 10 30 30
1.5 1.5 3 3
(1) Depending on the operational power and the on-load factor (q y 60 C).

Dimensiopns, Schemes : pages 5/92 to 5/97
5/194
LC1 LC1 D50A D65A 50 15 22 25 30 30 33 65 18,5 30 37 37 37 37
LC1 D80 80 22 37 45 45 55 45 45
LC1 D95 95 25 45 45 45 55 45 45
LC1 D115 115 30 55 59 59 75 80 65
LC1 D150 150 40 75 80 80 90 100 75
LC1 F185 185 55 90 100 100 110 110 100
LC1 F225 225 63 110 110 110 129 129 100
LC1 F265 265 75 132 140 140 160 160 147
LC1 F330 330 100 160 180 200 200 220 160
LC1 F400 400 110 200 220 250 257 280 185
LC1 F500 500 147 250 280 295 355 335 335
LC1 F630 630 200 335 375 400 400 450 450
LC1 F780 780 220 400 425 425 450 475 450
LC1 F800 800 250 450 450 450 450 475 450
LC1 BL 750 220 400 425 450 500 560 530
LC1 BM 1000 280 500 530 560 600 670 530
LC1 BP 1500 425 750 800 800 750 750 670
LC1 BR 1800 500 900 900 900 900 900 750
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LC1 LC1 D50A D65A 1000 1000 2500 1200 2500 1200
LC1 D80 750 2000 1200
LC1 D95 750 2000 1200
LC1 D115 750 2000 1200
LC1 D150 750 1200 1200
LC1 F185 750 2000 1200
LC1 F225 750 2000 1200
LC1 F265 750 2000 1200
LC1 F330 750 2000 1200
LC1 F400 500 1200 1200
LC1 F500 500 1200 1200
LC1 F630 500 1200 1200
LC1 F780 500 1200 600
LC1 F800 500 600 600
LC1 BL 120 120 120
LC1 BM 120 120 120
LC1 BP 120 120 120
LC1 BR 120 120 120
LC1 LC1 D50A D65A 50 15 15 40 40 65 20 20 40 50
LC1 D80 80 30 30 60 60
LC1 D95 95 30 30 60 60
LC1 D115 115 30 40 75 100
LC1 D150 150 40 50 100 125
LC1 F185 185 50 60 125 150
LC1 F225 225 60 75 150 150
LC1 F265 265 60 75 150 200
LC1 F330 330 75 100 200 250
LC1 F400 400 100 125 250 300
LC1 F500 500 150 200 400 500
LC1 F630 630 250 300 600 800
LC1 F780 780 450 900
LC1 F800 800 350 400 900 900
5/195
TeSys contactors
1 2
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue y440 V) Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06 LC1, LP1, LP4 K09 LC1, LP1, LP4 K12 LC1 D12
LC1 D40A
LC1 D50A
LC1 D65A
10 8
6 4
3 4
2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,5
7 8 9 10 12
16 20 18
50 25 30 37 32 40
LC1 D150
65 80
LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115
LC1-D09
LC1 D18
LC1 D25
LC1 D32 LC1 D38
LC1 K16
0,75
0,55
1,5
18,5
2,2
5,5
7,5
15
22 25
30
11
230 V
kW
0,75
5,5
18,5
1,5
2,2
7,5
22
15
30
37
45
55
75
11
400 V
kW
5 6 7
1,5
18,5
2,2
5,5
7,5
15
37 45
30
55
22
75
11
440 V
kW
Operational power in kW-50 Hz. Example: Asynchronous motor with P=5.5kW-Ue=400 V-Ie=11 A-Ic=Ie=11 A or asynchronous motor with P=5.5kW-Ue=415V-Ie=11 A-Ic=Ie=11 A 3 million operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1D18.
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue = 660/690 V) (1) Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
LC1 D40A LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D80 LC1 D150 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D32, LC1 D38 LC1 D09 LC1 D12 LC1 D18 LC1 D25
10 8
6 4 3 2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 6,6 9 11 15 17 20 22 50 60 33 40 35 42 48 200 80 90 100 Current broken in A
8 9 10
(1) For Ue = 1000 V, use the 660/690 V curves, but do not exceed the operational current at the operational power indicated for 1000 V.
Dimensiopns, Schemes : pages 5/92 to 5/97
5/196
TeSys contactors
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue y440 V) Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
LC1 BL, BM LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F800 LC1 F780 LC1 F630 LC1 BR LC1 BP
1 2
10 8
6 4
2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 20 30 40 50 60 80 90

18,5 147 5,5 110 200 220 7,5
(1)
3
100 200 400 600 800 1000 2000 Current broken in A
220 V 230 V 380 V 400 V
kW
500 750 900
18,5
110 132
200
250
160
335
15
45
30
37
55
75
90
400
4 5 6 7 8
15
25
40 45
22
22
11
30
55
11
75
kW
18,5
132
200
37
55
90
285
15
22
30
45
75
11
440 V
kW
Operational power in kW-50 Hz. Example:
Asynchronous motor with P=132kW-Ue=380V-Ie=245A-Ic=Ie=245A or asynchronous motor with P=132kW-Ue=415V-Ie=240A-Ic=Ie=240A 1.5 million operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1F330. (1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1 BL contactors.
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst running. The current broken (Ic) in category AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) of the motor.
LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 BL, BM LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500
LC1 F630
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-3 (Ue = 660/690 V)
LC1 F780 LC1 F800
10 8
6 4
2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 20 30 40 50 60 80 90 100 118 129

129 110
(1)
170 200 220

220 160
400 305 355

335 355
600 485
475 560 670
LC1 BR
LC1 BP
800 1000
2000
Current broken in A
9 10
750
900
660 V 690 V
kW
Example: Asynchronous motor with P = 132 kW - Ue = 660 V - Ie = 140 A - Ic = Ie = 140 A 1.5 million operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1F330.
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1 BL contactors. Characteristics : pages 5/50 to 5/55 References : pages 5/62 to 5/67 Dimensiopns, Schemes : pages 5/92 to 5/97
5/197
Selection
TeSys contactors
Maximum operational current (open-mounted device)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Contactor size Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour Connection conforming to IEC 60947-1 Cable c.s.a. Bar c.s.a. Operational current in AC-1 in A, according to the ambient temperature conforming to IEC 60947-1 Maximum operational power y 60 C y 40 C y 60 C y 70 C 220/230 V 240 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V 1000 V (1) Please consult your Regional Sales Office. mm2 mm A A A (at UC) kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
LC1/ LP1 K09 600 4 20 20 (1) 8 8 14 14 15 17 22
LC1/ LP1 K12 600 4 20 20 (1) 8 8 14 14 15 17 22
LC1 D09 600 4 25 25 17 9 9 15 17 18 20 27
LC1 DT20 600 4 20 20 (1) 8 8 14 14 15 17 22
LC1 D12 DT25 600 4 25 25 17 9 9 15 17 18 20 27
LC1 D18 DT32 600 6 32 32 22 11 12 20 21 23 23 34
LC1 D25 DT40 600 6 40 40 28 14 15 25 27 29 33 43
LC1 D32 600 10 50 50 35 18 19 31 34 36 41 54
LC1 D38 600 10 50 50 35 18 19 31 34 36 41 54
LC1 D40A DT60A 600 35 60 60 42 21 23 37 41 43 49 65
Increase in operational current by parallel connection of poles Apply the following coefficients to the currents or power values given above; these coefficients take into account an often unbalanced current distribution between the poles: b 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.6 b 3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25 b 4 poles in parallel: K = 2.8
Selection according to required electrical durability, in category AC-1 (Ue y440 V)

LC1, LP1, LP4 K09 LC1, LP1, LP4 K12 LC1 D32, LC1 D38 LC1, LP1 D80
LC1 D40A
LC1 D50A LC1 D65A
10 8 6 4
7 8 9 10
2 1,5 1 0,8 0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1
LC1 D115 LC1 D150
LC1 D09
LC1 D12
LC1 D18
LC1 D25
LC1 D95
10
20
25
32 40
50 60
80 100
125
200 250
400
Current broken in A
Control of resistive circuits (cos u 0.95). The current broken (Ic) in category AC-1 is equal to the current (Ie) normally drawn by the load. Example: b Ue=220 V - Ie=50 Aq y40 C - Ic = Ie = 50 A. b 2 million operating cycles required. b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: either LC1 or LP1D50.
Characteristics : pages 5/50 to 5/55 References : pages 5/62 to 5/67 Dimensions, schemes : pages 5/92 to 5/97
5/198
LC1 D50A 600 35 80 80 56 29 31 50 54 58 65 80
LC1 LC1/ D65A LP1 DT80A D80 600 35 80 80 56 29 31 50 54 58 65 80 600 50 125 125 80 45 49 78 85 90 102 135 120
LC1 D95 600 50 125 125 80 45 49 78 85 90 102 135 120
LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 600 120 250 200 160 80 83 135 140 150 170 235 345 600 120 250 200 160 80 83 135 140 150 170 235 345 600 150 275 275 180 90 100 165 170 180 200 280 410 600 185 315 280 200 100 110 175 185 200 220 300 450 600 185 350 300 250 120 125 210 220 230 270 370 540 600 240 400 360 290 145 160 250 260 290 320 400 640 600 600 600
LC1 F780 600
LC1 F800 600
LC1 LC1 LC1 F1700 F2100 BL 200 200 120
LC1 BM 120
LC1 BP 120
LC1 BR 120
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 2 2 30 x 5 40 x 5 60 x 5 500 430 340 170 180 300 310 330 380 530 760 700 580 500 240 255 430 445 470 660 740 950 1000 850 700 350 370 600 630 670 750 1000 1500
2 2 100 x 5 60 x 5 1600 1350 1100 550 570 950 1000 1050 1200 1650 2400 1000 850 700 350 370 600 630 670 750 1000 1500
3 4 100 x 5 100 5 1700 1450 570 600 1000 1050 1100 1250 1700 2500 2100 (2) 1750 700 780 1200 1300 1350 1550 2100 3100
2 2 2 2 50 x 5 80 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 10 800 700 600 300 330 500 525 550 600 800 1250 2000 1100 1750 900 425 450 800 825 850 900 1500 700 800 1200 1250 1400 1500 2750 2400 2000 1000 1100 1600 1700 2000 2100 2700 4200
1100 1900
1100 1700 3000
(2) With set of right-angled connectors LA9 F2100.
LC1 BL, BM
LC1 F330 LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265
LC1 F630 LC1 F800
LC1 F780
10 8 6 4
LC1 BR
LC1 BP
7 8 9 10
1 0,8 0,6 0,4
(3)
0,2
0,1
20
40
50
60
80
100
200
600 800 1000 300 350 275 315 400 500 700
1600 2000
4000
Current broken in A
Example: b Ue=220 V - Ie=500 A-qy40 C-Ic=Ie=500 A. b 2 million operating cycles required. b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1F780.
(3) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1F225.
5/199
Selection
TeSys contactors

For utilisation categories AC-2 or AC-4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Category AC-2: slip ring motors - breaking the starting current. Category AC-4: squirrel cage motors - breaking the starting current.
Contactor size In category AC-4 (le max) Ue y 440 V le max broken = 6 x l motor 440 V < Ue y 690V le max broken = 6 x l motor A A LC1/ LP1 K06 36 26 LC1/ LP1 K09 54 40 LC1/ LP1 K12 54 40 LC1 D09 54 40 LC1 D12 72 50 LC1 D18 108 70 LC1 D25 150 90 LC1 D32 192 105 LC1 D38 192 105 LC1 D40A 240 150
Maximum breaking current
Depending on the maximum operating rate (1) and the on-load factor, q y 60 C (2)
From 150 and 15 % to 300 and 10 % From 150 and 20 % to 600 and 10 % From 150 and 30 % to 1200 and 10 % From 150 and 55 % to 2400 and 10 % From 150 and 85 % to 3600 and 10 % A A A A A 20 18 16 13 10 30 27 24 19 16 30 27 24 19 16 30 27 24 19 16 40 36 30 24 21 45 40 35 30 25 75 67 56 45 40 80 70 60 50 45 80 70 60 50 45 110 96 80 62 53
(1) Do not exceed the maximum number of operating cycles.. (2) For temperatures higher than 60 C, use a maximum operating rate value equal to 80% of the actual value when selecting from the tables.
Counter current braking (plugging) The current varies from the maximum plug-braking current to the rated motor current. The making current must be compatible with the rated making and breaking capacities of the contactor. As breaking normally takes place at a current value at or near the locked rotor current, the contactor can be selected using the criteria for categories AC-2 and AC-4.
Permissible AC-4 power rating for 200 000 operating cycles

Operational voltage 220/230 V 380/400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660/690 V kW kW kW kW kW kW LCp/ LPp K06 0.75 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.2 3

LCp/ LPp K09 1.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 4
LCp LPp K12 1.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 4
LCp D09 1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 3 4
LCp D12 1.5 3.7 3 3 4 5.5
LCp D18 2.2 4 3.7 3.7 5.5 7.5
LCp D25 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 10
LCp D32 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 9 11
LCp D38 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 9 11
LCp D40A 4 9 9 11 11 15
5/200
1
LC1 LC1 D50A D65A 300 170 390 210 LC1 D80 480 250 LC1 D95 570 250 LC1 D115 630 540 LC1 D150 830 640 LC1 F185 1020 708 LC1 F225 1230 810 LC1 F26 1470 1020 LC1 F330 1800 1410 LC1 F40 2220 1830 LC1 F500 2760 2130 LC1 F630 3360 2760 LC1 F780 4260 2910 LC1 F800 3690 2910 LC1 BL 4320 4000 LC1 BM 5000 4800 LC1 BP 7500 5400 LC1 BR 9000 6600
2 3 4 5
140 120 100 80 70
160 148 132 110 90
200 170 145 120 100
200 170 145 120 100
280 250 215 150 125
310 280 240 170 145
380 350 300 240 170
420 400 330 270 190
560 500 400 320 230
670 600 500 390 290
780 700 600 450 350
1100 950 750 600 500
1400 1250 950 720 660
1600 1400 1100 820 710
1600 1400 1100 820 710
2250 2000 1500 1000 750
3000 2400 2000 1500 1000
4500 3750 3000 2000 1500
5400 5000 3600 2500 1800
LCp LCp D50A D65A 5.5 11 11 11 15 15 7.5 11 11 15 15 18.5
LCp D80 7.5 15 15 15 22 25
LCp D95 9 15 15 15 22 25
LC1 D115 9 18.5 18.5 18.5 30 30
LC1 D150 11 22 22 22 37 45
LC1 F185 18.5 33 37 37 45 63
LC1 F225 22 40 45 45 55 75
LC1 F265 28 51 55 59 63 90
LC1 F330 33 59 63 63 75 110
LC1 F400 40 75 80 80 90 129
LC1 F500 45 80 90 100 110 140
LC1 F630 55 100 100 110 132 160
LC1 F780 63 110 110 132 150 185
LC1 F800 63 110 110 132 150 185
LC1 BL 90 160 160 160 180 200
LC1 BM 110 160 160 200 200 250
LC1 BP 150 220 250 250 250 315
LC1 BR 200 250 280 315 355 450
6 7 8 9 10
5/201
TeSys contactors
1 2
Selection according to required electrical durability, in categories AC-2 or AC-4 (Ue y440 V) Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors (AC-4) or slip ring motors (AC-2) with breaking whilst motor stalled. The current broken (Ic) in AC-2 is equal to 2.5 x Ie. The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06 LC1 D32 et D38 LC1 D40A LC1 D50A LC1, LP1, LP4 K09,K12
LC1 D65A LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115
1 0,8
0,6 0,4
3 4 5 6 7
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02
(1)
0,01
8 9 10
20
30 36 40
50 54
72 80
108
LC1 D150
LC1 D09
LC1 D12
LC1 D18
LC1 D25
150 192 240 300
390 480 570 630
828 1000
Current broken in A
Example: b Asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 400 V - Ie = 11 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 66 A b or asynchronous motor with P = 5.5 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 11 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 66 A. b 200 000 operating cycles required. b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1 D25.
(1) The dotted lines are only applicable to LC1, LP1 K12 contactors.
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst motor stalled The current broken (Ic) in AC-2 is equal to 2.5 x Ie. The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
LC1 D32, D38 LC1 D40A LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D150 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115
70
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in category AC-4 (440 V < Ue y 690 V)
LC1 D09
LC1 D12
LC1 D18
1 0,8
0,6 0,4
8 9 10
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,07 0,06 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02
0,01
8 9 10
20
LC1 D25
30
40
50
90 105 121 150
210 250 300
400 500 540 640 800 1000

Current broken in A
5/202
TeSys contactors
Selection according to required electrical durability, in categories AC-2 or AC-4 (Ue y440 V) Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors (AC-4) or slip ring motors (AC-2) with breaking whilst motor stalled. The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
LC1 BL, BM LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 LC1 F800 LC1 F780 LC1 BR LC1 BP
1 2 3 4
1 0,8
0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04
0,02
0,01 100 200 400 600 800 1020 1470 2220 3360 4260 5000 8000 20 000 6000 10 000 1230 1800 2760 3690 Current broken in A
Example: b Asynchronous motor with P = 90 kW - Ue = 380 V - Ie = 170 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 1020 A or asynchronous motor with P = 90 kW - Ue = 415 V - Ie = 165 A. Ic = 6 x Ie = 990 A. b 60 000 operating cycles required. b The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed: LC1F265.
5 6 7 8 9
Control of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage motors with breaking whilst motor stalled. The current broken (Ic) in AC-4 is equal to 6 x Ie. (Ie = rated operational current of the motor).
LC1 F780, F800 LC1 BL, BM
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in category AC-4 (440 V < Ue y 690 V)
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400 LC1 F500
LC1 F630
1 0,8
0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04
0,02
0,01 100 200 400 600 800 1000 2000 4000 8000 10 000 20 000
LC1 BR
LC1 BP
Current broken in A
10
5/203
Selection
TeSys contactors

For utilisation categories DC-1 to DC-5
Rated operational current (Ie) in Amperes, in utilisation category DC-1,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 5/50 to 5/55 References : pages 5/62 to 5/67
resistive loads: time constant

Rated operational voltage Ue V
Contactor rating (1) No. of poles LC1 LC1 LC1 connec- D09 DT20 D12 ted in DT25 series
L __ R
y 1 ms, ambient temperature y 60 C

LC1 D18 DT32 LC1 D25 DT40 LC1 D32 LC1 D38 LC1 D40A LC1 DT60A
24
48/75
1 pole
125
250
300
2 poles
460 900 1200 1500
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 3 4 1 4 2 3 4
20 20 20 20 20 20 4 20 20 1 4 20 4
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 4 20 20 20 1 4 20 20 4 20
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 4 20 20 20 1 4 20 20 4 20
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 4 25 25 25 1 4 25 25 4 25
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 7 32 32 32 1 7 32 32 7 32
40 40 40 40 40 40 7 40 40 1 7 40 7
40 40 40 40 40 40 7 40 40 1 7 40 7
50 50 50 50 50 50 7 50 50 1 7 50 7
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 7 50 50 50 1 7 50 50 50
Rated operational current (Ie) in Amperes, in utilisation category DC-2

to DC-5, inductive loads: time constant
3 poles
Rated operational voltage Ue V 24
Contactor rating (1) No. of poles LC1 LC1 LC1 connec- D09 DT20 D12 ted in DT25 series 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 3 4 1 4 2 3 4 20 20 20 20 20 20 2 20 20 0,5 2 8 2 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 2 20 20 20 0,5 2 8 20 2 8 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 2 20 20 20 0,5 2 8 20 2 8
L __ R
y 15 ms, ambient temperature y 60 C

LC1 D25 DT40 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 3 32 32 32 0,5 3 32 32 3 32 LC1 D32 LC1 D38 LC1 D40A LC1 DT60A
LC1 D18 DT32 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 2 25 25 25 0,5 2 8 25 2 8
48/75
125
250
4 poles
300 460 900 1200 1500
40 40 40 40 40 40 3 40 40 0,5 3 40 3
40 40 40 40 40 40 3 40 40 0,5 3 40 3
50 50 50 50 50 50 4 50 50 1 4 50 3
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 4 50 50 50 1 4 50 50 3 50
(1) For rated operational currents of contactors LC1 and LP1 K: please consult your Regional Sales Office. Dimensions, schemes : pages 5/92 to 5/97
5/204
LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 D50A D65A DT80A D80
LC1 D95
LC1 D115
LC1 D150
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F630
LC1 F780
LC1 F800
LC1 BL
LC1 BM
LC1 BP
LC1 BR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
65 65 65 65 65 65 7 65 65 1 7 65 7
65 65 65 65 65 65 7 65 65 1,5 7 65 7
65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 7 65 65 65 1,5 7 65 65 7 65
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 12 100 100 100 2 12 100 100 12 100
100 100 100 100 100 100 12 100 100 2 12 100 12
200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 12 200 200 200 10 200 200 200 200 200 200
200 200 200 200 200 200 12 200 200 10 200 200 200
240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 210 210 240 240 190 240 240 190 240 190
260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 230 230 260 260 200 260 260 200 260 200
300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 270 270 300 300 250 300 300 250 300 250
360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 320 320 360 360 280 360 360 280 360 280
430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 380 380 430 430 350 430 430 350 430 350
580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 520 520 580 580 450 580 580 450 580 450
850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 760 760 850 850 700 850 850 700 850 700
1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1180 1180 1300 1300 1000 1300 1300 1000 1000 1000
850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 760 760 850 850 700 850 850 700 850 700
700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700
1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100
1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400
LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 D50A D65A DT80A D80
LC1 D95
LC1 D115
LC1 D150
LC1 F185
LC1 F225
LC1 F265
LC1 F330
LC1 F400
LC1 F500
LC1 F630
LC1 F780
LC1 F800
LC1 BL
LC1 BM
LC1 BP
LC1 BR
65 65 65 65 65 65 4 65 65 1 4 65 3
65 65 65 65 65 65 4 65 65 1.5 4 65 3
65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 4 65 65 65 1.5 4 65 65 3 65
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 5 100 100 100 1 5 100 100 5 100
100 100 100 100 100 100 5 100 100 1 5 100 5
200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 10 200 200 200 3 200 200 200 200 200 200
200 200 200 200 200 200 10 200 200 3 200 200 200
240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 160 240 240 140 160 240 140 240 140
260 260 260 260 260 260 260 260 180 240 240 160 180 260 160 260 160
300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 250 280 280 220 250 300 220 300 220
360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 300 310 310 280 300 360 280 360 280
430 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 350 350 350 310 350 430 310 430 310
580 580 580 580 580 580 580 580 500 550 550 480 500 580 480 580 480
850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 700 850 850 680 700 850 680 850 680
1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1000 1000 1000 900 1000 1300 900 1300 800
850 850 850 850 850 850 850 850 700 850 850 680 700 850 680 850 680
700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700
1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100
1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400

Characteristics : pages 5/50 to 5/55 References : pages 5/62 to 5/67 Dimensions, schemes : pages 5/92 to 5/97
5/205
Selection
TeSys contactors

1 2 3
The criteria for contactor selection are: b the rated operational current Ie, b the rated operational voltage Ue, b the utilisation category and the time constant L/R, b the required electrical durability.
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in categories DC-1 to DC-5
Maximum operating rate (operating cycles) The following limits must not be exceeded: 120 operating cycles/hour at rated operational current Ie. Electrical durability
LC1 D40A, DT60A LC1 D65A, DT80A LC1 D115, D150 7 8 9 10
10 8 6 4 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9 2 3 4 5 6 14 16 20 24 40 50 60 70 90 100 30 80 32 36 Power broken per pole in kW
Example Series wound motor - P = 1.5 kW - Ue = 200 V - Ie = 7.5 A. Utilisation: reversing, inching. b Utilisation category = DC-5. b Select contactor LC1 D09 with 3 poles in series. b The power broken is: Pc total = 2.5 x 200 x 7.5 = 3.75 kW. b The power broken per pole is: 1.25 kW. b The electrical durability read from the curve is u 3 millions of operating cycles. Use of poles in parallel
Electrical durability can be increased by using poles connected in parallel. With N poles connected in parallel, the electrical durability becomes: electrical durability read from the curves x N x 0.7.
Note: 1
When the poles are connected in parallel, the maximum operational currents indicated on pages 5/204 et 5/205 must not be exceeded.
Note: 2
Ensure that the connections are made in such a way as to equalise the currents in each pole.
5/206
LC1, LP1 D80 LC1 D95
LC1 D50A
LC1 D32, LC1 D38
LC1 D09
LC1 D12
LC1 D18
LC1 D25
TeSys contactors

Determining the electrical durability The electrical durability can be read directly from the curves below, having previously calculated the power broken as follows: P broken = U broken x l broken. The tables below give the values of Uc and Ic for the various utilisation categories. Power broken
Utilisation categories DC-1 Non inductive or slightly inductive loads DC-2 Shunt wound motors, breaking whilst motor running DC-3 Shunt wound motors, reversing, inching DC-4 Series wound motors, breaking whilst motor running DC-5 Series wound motors, reversing, inching
LC1 F185, F225 LC1 F630, F800
Selection according to required electrical durability, use in categories DC-1 to DC-5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
U broken Ue 0.1 Ue Ue 0.3 Ue Ue
I broken Ie Ie 2.5 Ie Ie 2.5 Ie
P broken Ue x Ie 0.1 Ue x Ie Ue x 2.5 Ie 0.3 Ue x Ie Ue x 2.5 Ie
LC1 F400 LC1 F500
LC1 F265
LC1 BL, BM
LC1 F330
LC1 F780
10 8 6 4 2 1 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 90 100 200 4000 300 400 600 800 1000 2000 3000 500 700 900 5000 Power broken per pole in kW
Example Series wound motor: P = 40 kW - Ue = 200 V - Ie = 200 A. Utilisation: reversing, inching. Utilisation category = DC-5. b Select contactor LC1 F265 with 2 poles in series. b The power broken is: Pc total = 2.5 x 200 x 200 = 100 kW. b The power broken per pole is 50 kW. b The electrical durability read from the curve is 500 000 operating cycles.
LC1 BR
LC1 BP
5/207
Selection
TeSys contactors
For lighting circuits
General
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The operating conditions of lighting circuits have the following characteristics: b continuous duty: the switching device can remain closed for several days or even months, b a dispersion factor of 1: all luminaires in the same group are switched on or off simultaneously, b a relatively high temperature around the device due to the enclosure, the presence of fuses, or an unventilated control panel location. This is why the operational current for lighting is lower than the value given for AC-1 duty.
Protection
The continuous duty current drawn by a lighting circuit is constant. In fact: b it is unlikely that the number of luminaires of an existing circuit will be modified, b this type of circuit cannot create an overload of long duration. It is therefore only necessary to provide short-circuit protection. This can be provided by: b gG type fuses, or b modular circuit-breakers. Nevertheless, it is always possible and sometimes more economical (smaller cable size) to protect the circuit by a thermal overload relay and associated aM type fuses.
Distribution system
Single-phase circuit, 220/240 V The tables on pages 5/209 to 5/213 are based on a single-phase 220/240V circuit and can therefore be applied directly in this case. 3-phase circuit, 380/415 V (with neutral) The total number of lamps (N) to be switched simultaneously is divided into three equal groups, each connected between one phase and neutral. The contactor can then be selected from the 220/240 V single-phase tables for a number of lamps equal to N lamps. ---3 3-phase circuit, 220/240 V The total number of lamps (N) to be switched simultaneously is divided into three equal groups, each connected between 2 phases (L1-L2), (L2-L3), (L3-L1). The contactor can then be selected N lamps. from the 220/240 V single-phase table for a number of lamps equal to -------
Contactor selection tables

For the different types of lamps, the tables on pages 5/209 to 5/213 give the maximum number of lamps of unit power P (in Watts), which can be switched simultaneously for each size of contactor. They are based on: b a 220/240 V single-phase circuit, b an ambient temperature of 55 C (1), taking into account the operating conditions (see General paragraph). b an electrical life of more than 10 years (200 days operation per year). They take into account: b the total current drawn (including ballast), b transient phenomena which occur at switch-on, b the starting currents and their duration, b the circulation of any harmonics which may be present. Lamps with compensating capacitor C (F) connected in parallel Parallel connected compensating capacitors C cause a current peak at the moment of switch-on. To ensure that the value of this current peak remains compatible with the making characteristics of the contactors, the unit value of the capacitance must not exceed the following: Switching contactor LC1 LP1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 rating K09 K09 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40A D50A D65A D80 Maximum unit value C (F) of parallel 7 3 18 18 25 60 96 96 120 120 240 240 connected compensating capacitor Switching contactor LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 rating D95 D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F800 Maximum unit value C (F) of parallel 240 300 360 800 1200 1700 2500 4000 6000 9000 10800 connected compensating capacitor This value is independent of the number of lamps switched by the contactor. (1) For an ambient temperature of 40 C, multiply the number by 1.2.
5/208
TeSys contactors
Usual values
The tables show the following values: b IB: value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage, b C: unit capacitance for each lamp, corresponding to the values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers. These values are given for an ambient temperature of 55 C (for 40 C, multiply the number by 1.2).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Incandescent and halogen lamps

P (W) 60 IB (A) 0.27 Max. no. 35 of lamps 59 according 77 to P (W) 92 129 163 207 296 430 466 710 770 888 1006 1274 1718 2328 2776 75 0.34 28 47 61 73 103 129 164 235 340 370 564 610 704 800 1010 1364 1850 2204 100 0.45 21 35 46 55 77 97 124 177 256 280 426 462 532 604 764 1030 1396 1666 150 0.68 14 23 30 36 51 64 82 117 170 184 282 304 352 400 504 682 924 1102 200 0.91 10 17 23 27 38 48 62 88 126 138 210 228 262 298 378 508 690 824 300 1.40 6 11 15 18 25 31 40 57 82 90 136 148 170 194 244 330 448 534 500 2.30 4 7 9 11 15 19 24 34 50 54 82 90 104 118 148 200 272 326 750 3.40 2 4 6 7 10 13 16 23 34 36 56 60 70 80 100 136 184 220 1000 4.60 2 3 4 5 7 9 12 17 24 26 40 44 52 58 74 100 136 162 LC1 K09 D09, D12 D18 D25 D32, D38 D40A D50A, D65A D80, D95 D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F800
Mixed lighting lamps

P (W) IB (A) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) 100 0.45 21 35 46 55 77 97 124 177 256 280 426 462 532 604 764 1030 1398 1666 160 0.72 13 22 29 36 48 61 77 111 160 174 266 288 332 378 478 644 874 1040 250 1.10 8 14 18 23 30 38 49 70 104 114 174 188 218 246 312 422 572 680 500 2.30 4 7 9 11 15 19 24 34 50 54 82 90 104 118 150 202 272 326 1000 4.50 2 3 4 5 7 9 12 17 26 28 42 46 52 60 76 102 140 166 LC1 K09 D09, D12 D18 D25 D32, D38 D40A D50A, D65A D80, D95 D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F800
5/209
TeSys contactors
Usual values
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Fluorescent lamps with starter. Single fitting

P (W) IB (A) C (F) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) Non corrected 20 40 0.39 0.45 24 21 41 35 53 46 66 57 89 77 112 97 143 124 205 177 410 354 492 426 532 462 614 532 696 604 882 764 1190 1030 1612 1398 65 0.70 13 22 30 37 50 62 80 114 228 274 296 342 388 490 662 698 80 0.80 12 20 26 32 43 55 70 100 200 240 260 300 340 430 580 786 With parallel correction 110 20 40 65 1.2 0.17 0.26 0.42 5 5 7 8 56 36 22 13 94 61 38 17 123 80 50 21 152 100 61 29 205 134 83 36 258 169 104 46 329 215 133 66 470 367 190 132 940 614 380 160 1128 738 456 172 1224 800 490 200 1412 922 570 226 1600 1046 648 286 2024 1322 818 386 2728 1724 1104 524 3700 2418 1498 80 0.52 7 18 30 40 50 67 84 107 153 306 368 400 462 522 662 892 1210 110 0.72 16 22 29 36 48 61 77 111 222 266 288 332 378 478 644 874
LC1 K09 D09, D12 D18 D25 D32, D38 D40A D50A, D65A D80, D95 D115, D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630, F800
Fluorescent lamps with starter. Twin fitting

P (W) IB (A) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) Non corrected 2x20 2x40 2x0.22 2x0.41 2x21 2x11 2x36 2x18 2x46 2x24 2x58 2x30 2x78 2x42 2x100 2x52 2x126 2x68 2x180 2x96 2x360 2x194 2x436 2x234 2x472 2x254 2x544 2x292 2x618 2x332 2x782 2x420 2x1054 2x566 2x1430 2x766 2x65 2x0.67 2x7 2x10 2x14 2x18 2x26 2x32 2x40 2x58 2x118 2x142 2x154 2x178 2x202 2x256 2x346 2x468 2x80 2x0.82 2x5 2x8 2x12 2x14 2x20 2x26 2x34 2x48 2x96 2x116 2x126 2x146 2x166 2x210 2x282 2x384 2x110 2x1.1 2x4 2x6 2x8 2x10 2x14 2x18 2x24 2x36 2x72 2x86 2x94 2x108 2x124 2x156 2x210 2x286 With series correction 2x20 2x40 2x65 2x0.13 2x0.24 2x0.39 2x36 2x20 2x12 2x60 2x32 2x20 2x80 2x42 2x26 2x100 2x54 2x32 2x134 2x72 2x44 2x168 2x90 2x56 2x214 2x116 2x70 2x306 2x166 2x102 2x614 2x332 2x204 2x738 2x400 2x246 2x800 2x432 2x266 2x922 2x500 2x308 2x1046 2x566 2x348 2x1322 2x716 2x440 2x1784 2x966 2x594 2x2418 2x1310 2x806 2x80 2x0.48 2x10 2x16 2x20 2x26 2x36 2x44 2x58 2x82 2x166 2x200 2x216 2x250 2x282 2x358 2x482 2x654 2x110 2x0.65 2x7 2x12 2x16 2x20 2x26 2x32 2x42 2x60 2x122 2x148 2x160 2x184 2x208 2x264 2x356 2x484
5/210
TeSys contactors
Usual values
1 2
Fluorescent lamps without starter. Single fitting

P (W) IB (A) C (F) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) Non corrected 20 40 0.43 0.55 22 17 37 29 48 38 60 47 97 63 102 80 130 101 186 145 372 290 446 348 484 378 558 436 632 494 800 624 1078 844 1462 1144 65 0.80 12 20 26 32 43 55 70 100 200 240 260 300 340 430 580 786 80 0.95 10 16 22 27 36 46 58 84 168 202 218 252 286 362 488 662 110 1.4 6 11 15 18 25 31 40 57 114 136 148 170 194 246 330 448 With parallel correction 20 40 65 0.19 0.29 0.46 5 5 7 50 33 20 84 55 34 110 72 45 136 89 56 184 101 76 231 151 95 294 193 121 421 275 173 842 550 346 1010 662 416 1094 716 452 1262 828 522 1432 938 590 1810 1186 748 2442 1600 1008 3310 2168 1366 80 0.57 7 16 28 36 45 61 77 98 140 280 336 364 420 476 604 814 1104 110 0.79 16 20 26 32 44 55 70 101 202 242 262 304 344 434 586 796
3 4 5
Fluorescent lamps without starter. Twin fitting

Non corrected P (W) 2x20 2x40 IB (A) 2x0.25 2x0.47 Max. no. 2x19 2x10 of lamps 2x32 2x16 according 2x42 2x22 to P (W) 2x52 2x26 2x70 2x36 2x88 2x46 2x112 2x58 2x160 2x84 2x320 2x170 2x384 2x204 2x416 2x220 2x480 2x254 2x544 2x288 2x688 2x366 2x928 2x494 2x1258 2x668 2x65 2x0.76 2x6 2x10 2x12 2x16 2x22 2x28 2x36 2x52 2x104 2x126 2x136 2x158 2x178 2x226 2x304 2x414 2x80 2x0.93 2x5 2x8 2x10 2x12 2x18 2x22 2x30 2x42 2x86 2x102 2x112 2x128 2x146 2x184 2x248 2x338 2x110 2x1.3 2x3 2x6 2x8 2x10 2x12 2x16 2x20 2x30 2x60 2x74 2x80 2x92 2x104 2x132 2x178 2x242 With series correction 2x20 2x40 2x65 2x0.14 2x0.26 2x0.43 2x34 2x18 2x11 2x56 2x30 2x18 2x74 2x40 2x24 2x92 2x50 2x30 2x124 2x66 2x40 2x156 2x84 2x50 2x200 2x106 2x64 2x234 2x152 2x92 2x570 2x306 2x186 2x686 2x368 2x222 2x742 2x400 2x242 2x856 2x462 2x278 2x970 2x522 2x316 2x1228 2x662 2x400 2x1656 2x892 2x540 2x2246 2x1210 2x730 2x80 2x0.53 2x9 2x14 2x18 2x24 2x32 2x40 2x52 2x74 2x150 2x180 2x196 2x226 2x256 2x324 2x438 2x592 2x110 2x0.72 2x6 2x10 2x14 2x18 2x24 2x30 2x38 2x54 2x110 2x132 2x144 2x166 2x188 2x238 2x322 2x436
6 7 8 9 10
5/211
TeSys contactors
Usual values
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Low pressure sodium vapour lamps

P (W) IB (A) C (F) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) Non corrected 35 55 90 1.2 1.6 2.4 6 5 3 10 7 5 12 9 6 15 11 7 21 16 10 27 20 13 35 26 17 50 37 25 100 75 50 140 104 70 152 114 76 174 130 88 198 148 98 250 188 124 338 254 168 496 372 248 135 3.1 2 3 4 6 8 10 13 19 38 54 58 68 76 96 130 192 150 3.2 2 3 4 5 8 10 13 18 36 52 56 66 74 94 126 186 180 3.3 2 3 4 5 7 10 12 18 36 50 54 64 72 90 122 180 200 3.4 2 3 4 5 7 9 12 17 34 48 54 62 70 88 118 174 With parallel correction 35 55 90 135 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.9 17 17 25 36 40 30 50 37 25 63 47 31 21 86 65 43 28 110 82 55 36 140 105 70 46 200 150 100 66 400 300 200 132 560 420 280 186 606 454 302 202 700 524 350 232 792 594 396 264 1002 752 502 334 1352 1014 676 450 1982 1488 992 660 150 1 36 19 26 33 42 60 120 168 182 210 238 300 406 594 180 1.2 36 15 21 27 35 50 100 140 152 174 198 250 338 496 200 1.3 36 14 20 25 32 46 92 128 140 162 182 252 312 458
High pressure sodium vapour lamps

P (W) IB (A) C (F) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) Non corrected 150 250 1.9 3.2 4 2 6 3 7 4 10 5 13 8 17 10 22 13 31 18 62 36 88 52 96 56 110 66 124 74 158 94 214 126 312 186 400 5 1 2 3 3 5 6 8 12 24 34 36 42 48 60 80 118 700 8.8 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 18 20 24 26 34 46 68 1000 12.4 1 1 2 2 3 4 8 14 16 18 20 24 32 48 With parallel correction 150 250 400 0.84 1.4 2.2 20 32 48 17 22 13 8 30 18 11 39 23 15 50 30 19 71 42 27 142 84 54 200 120 76 216 130 82 250 150 94 282 170 108 358 214 136 482 290 184 708 424 270 700 3.9 96 6 8 10 15 30 42 46 54 60 76 104 152 1000 5.5 120 6 7 10 20 30 32 38 42 54 74 108
5/212
TeSys contactors
Usual values
1 2
High pressure mercury vapour lamps

P (W) IB (A) C (F) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) Non corrected 50 80 125 0.54 0.81 1.20 14 9 6 22 14 9 27 18 12 35 23 15 48 32 21 61 40 27 77 51 34 111 74 49 222 148 100 310 206 140 336 224 152 388 258 174 440 294 198 556 372 250 752 500 338 1102 734 496 250 2.30 3 5 6 8 11 14 17 26 52 72 78 90 102 130 176 258 400 4.10 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 14 28 40 44 50 58 72 98 144 700 6.80 1 2 2 3 4 6 8 16 24 26 30 34 44 60 88 1000 9.90 1 1 1 2 3 4 6 12 17 18 20 24 30 40 60 With parallel correction 50 80 125 250 0.3 0.45 0.67 1.3 10 10 10 18 40 26 17 9 50 33 22 11 63 42 28 14 86 57 38 20 110 73 49 25 140 93 62 32 200 133 89 46 400 266 178 92 560 372 250 128 606 404 272 140 700 466 312 162 792 528 354 182 1002 668 448 232 1352 902 606 312 1982 1322 888 458 400 2.3 25 6 8 11 14 18 26 52 72 78 90 102 130 176 258 700 3.8 40 5 6 8 11 15 30 44 48 54 62 78 106 156 1000 5.5 60 3 4 6 7 10 20 30 32 38 42 54 74 108
3 4 5
Metal iodine vapour lamps

P (W) IB (A) C (F) Max. no. of lamps according to P (W) Non corrected 250 400 2.5 3.6 3 2 4 3 6 4 7 5 10 7 13 9 16 11 24 16 48 32 66 46 72 50 84 58 94 66 120 84 162 112 238 164 1000 9.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 18 20 22 24 32 42 62 2000 20 1 1 2 3 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 30 With parallel correction 250 400 1000 1.4 2 5.3 32 32 64 13 9 18 13 4 23 16 6 30 21 7 42 30 11 84 60 22 120 84 32 130 90 34 150 104 40 170 118 44 214 150 56 290 202 76 424 298 112 2000 11.2 140 5 10 14 16 18 20 26 36 52
6 7 8 9 10
5/213
Selection
TeSys contactors
For heating circuits
Selection
1 2 3 4 5 6
U
General
A heating circuit is a power switching circuit supplying one or more resistive heating elements switched by a contactor. The same general rules apply as for motor circuits, except that heating circuits are not normally subjected to overload currents. It is therefore only necessary to provide short-circuit protection.
Characteristics of heating elements

The examples below are based on resistive heating elements used for industrial furnaces or for the heating of buildings (infra-red or resistive radiant type, convector heaters, closed loop heating circuits, etc.). The variation in resistance values between hot and cold states causes a current peak at switchon which never exceeds 2 to 3 times the rated operational current (In). This initial peak does not recur during normal operation where subsequent switching is thermostatically controlled. The rated power and current of a heater are given for the normal operating temperature.
Protection
The steady state current drawn by a heating circuit is constant when the voltage is stable. In fact: b It is unlikely that the number of loads in an existing circuit will be modified; b This type of circuit cannot create overloads. It is therefore only necessary to provide shortcircuit protection. This can be provided by: b gG type fuses, or b modular circuit-breakers. Nevertheless, it is always possible and sometimes more economical (smaller cable size) to protect the circuit by a thermal overload relay and associated aM type fuses.
Switching, control, protection

A heating element or group of heating elements of a given power may be either single-phase or 3-phase and may be supplied from a 220/127 V or a 400/230 V distribution system. Excluding a single-phase 127 V system (which is no longer commonly used), the following 3 types of circuit arrangement are possible: b Single-phase, 2-pole switching b Single-phase, 4-pole switching b 3-phase switching
Component selection according to the power switched

The combinations suggested below are based on an ambient temperature of 55C and for powers at the nominal voltage, but they also ensure switching in the event of prolonged overloads up to 1.05 Ue.
Single-phase, 2-pole switching

Maximum power (kW) 220/240 V 380/415 V 3.5 6.5 4.5 8 6 10.5 7 13 10 18 13 22.5 16.5 28.5 24 42 44 76 48 83 52 90 60 104 75 130 86 145 200 116 170 290 270 460 140 242 220 380 350 605 480 830 Contactor rating 660/690 V 11 14 18.5 22.5 30.5 39.5 43.5 73 118 130 145 160 200 230 310 450 715 370 580 925 1270 1000 V 48 68 82.5 157 170 185 210 250 300 400 695 945 490 770 1225 1680 LC1, LP1K09 LC1D12 LC1D18 LC1D25 LC1D32, LC1D38 LC1D40A LC1D65A LC1, LP1D80 LC1D115, LC1D150 LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F4002 LC1F5002 LC1F6302, LC1F800 LC1F780 LC1BL32 LC1BM32 LC1BP32 LC1BR32
7
KM1
8 9 10
Circuit controlled by 2 poles of the contactor.
5/214
TeSys contactors
For heating circuits

Component selection according to the power switched
(continued) Single-phase, 4-pole switching
Maximum power (kW) 220/240 V 380/415 V 4.5 8 7 13 12 21 26 45.5 38 66 70 121 76 132 80 142 96 166 120 205 137 236 185 320 272 470 425 735 224 387 352 608 560 968 768 1328 Contactor rating 660/690 V 13.5 22.5 36.5 79.5 117.5 190 202 230 253 320 363 490 718 1140 590 930 1478 2025 1000 V 109 132 251 270 295 335 400 480 650 950 1520 785 1230 1960 2685 LC1, LP1K09004 LC1DT25 LC1DT40 LC1DT80A LC1, LP1D80004 LC1D115004 LC1F1854 LC1F2254 LC1F2654 LC1F3304 LC1F4004 LC1F5004 LC1F6304 LC1F7804 LC1BL34 LC1BM34 LC1BP34 LC1BR34
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
KM1
Circuit controlled by a 4-pole contactor with the poles parallel connected in pairs using appropriate connecting links. This solution enables the control of power values approximately equivalent to those controlled by the same contactor on 3-phase.
3-phase switching
U U U
KM1
Circuit controlled by 3 poles of the contactor.
Maximum power (kW) 220/240 V 380/415 V 4.5 8 7 13 10 18 13 22.5 18 31 22.5 38 28.5 49 70.5 40.5 76 131 82 143 90 155 103 179 130 225 149 256 200 346 294 509 463 800 242 419 380 658 606 1047 830 1437 Application example
Contactor rating 660/690 V 13.5 22.5 30.5 39.5 52.5 68 86 126 206 220 250 275 345 395 530 780 1235 640 1005 1600 2200 1000 V 78 112.5 135.5 275 295 320 370 432 525 710 1030 1650 850 1350 2150 2950 LC1, LP1K09 LC1D12 LC1D18 LC1D25 LC1D32, LC1D38 LC1D40A LC1D65A LC1, LP1D80 LC1D115, LC1D150 LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F630, LC1F800 LC1F780 LC1BL33 LC1BM33 LC1BP33 LC1BR33
For a 220 V, 50 Hz, single-phase circuit supplying a total heating load of 12.5 kW. Select a 3-pole contactor LC1D65A. (1) See complete contactor references on pages 5/62 to 5/67 or consult your Regional Sales Office.

5/215
Selection
TeSys contactors

For switching the primaries of 3-phase LV/LV transformers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Maximum ambient temperature: 55 C. When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which reaches its peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases in a largely exponential manner to quickly reach its steady state value. The value of this current depends on: b the characteristics of the magnetic circuit and of the windings (cross sectional area of the core, rated inductance, number of turns, layout and size of the windings, ...) b the performance of the magnetic laminations used, b the magnetic state of the circuit and the instantaneous value of the a.c. mains voltage at the moment of switch-on. The inrush current at the moment of switch-on can reach 20 to 40 times the rated current for the various kVA power ratings in the tables below. This value is independent of the no-load or onload state of the transformer.
Contactor selection
The peak magnetising current of the transformer must be lower than the values given in the tables below. Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour. LC1/ LC1/ LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LP1 LP1 D09 D12 D18 D25 D32 D38 D40A D50A D65A D80 D95 D115 D150 K06 K09 160 225 350 350 420 630 770 770 1100 1250 1400 1550 1650 1800 2000 2 3.5 4 5 6 2.5 5 5.5 7 8.5 4 7 8 9 12 4 7 8 9 12 5 8 9 11 14 7 8.5 8.5 15 17 20 14 24 28 32 42 16 27 32 36 48 18 31 36 40 53 19.5 34 39 45 59 85 19.5 25 34 39 45 59 95 50 55 65 80 25 50 55 65 80
Contactor rating Maximum permissible current peak at switch-on Maximum operational power (1) 220 V 240 V 380 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 690 V 1000 V Contactor rating Maximum permissible current peak at switch-on Maximum operational power (1) 220 V 240 V 380 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V 690 V 1000 V A kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA A kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA
12.5 15 14 17
16.5 20
21.5 26.5 26.5
100 100
LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LP1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 LC1 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F780 F800 BL BM BP BR 2900 3300 3800 5000 6300 7700 9000 12 000 11 000 18 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 40 75 80 95 120 150 45 80 90 100 130 170 50 90 100 110 140 200 65 120 130 140 170 225 75 130 140 170 200 250 100 120 175 170 200 280 190 220 310 225 260 350 270 350 400 375 470 650 145 245 270 315 425 550 230 400 450 480 600 700 230 400 450 480 600 700 300 530 560 600 800 380 660 700 750 950
1000 1200
5/216
Selection
TeSys contactors
For switching 3-phase capacitor banks used for power factor correction

Standard contactors
Capacitors, together with the circuits to which they are connected, form oscillatory circuits which can, at the moment of switch-on, give rise to high transient currents (> 180 In) at high frequencies (1 to 15 kHz). As a general rule, the peak current on energisation is lower when: b the mains inductances are high, b the line transformer ratings are low, b the transformer short-circuit voltage is high, b the ratio between the sum of the ratings of the capacitors already switched into the circuit and that of the capacitor to be switched in is small (for multiple step capacitor banks). In accordance with standards IEC 60070, NF C 54-100, VDE 0560, the switching contactor must be able to withstand a continuous current of 1.43 times the rated current of the capacitor bank step being switched. The rated operational powers given in the tables below take this overload into account. Short-circuit protection is normally provided by gI type HPC fuses rated at 1.7 to 2 In.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contactor applications
Capacitors are directly switched. The values of peak current at switch-on must not exceed the values indicated opposite. An inductor may be inserted in each of the three phases supplying the capacitors to reduce the peak current, if necessary. Inductance values are determined according to the selected operating temperature.
Power factor correction by a single-step capacitor bank

The use of a choke inductor is unnecessary: the inductance of the mains supply is adequate to limit the peak to a value compatible with the contactor characteristics.
Power factor correction by a multiple-step capacitor bank

Select a special contactor as defined on page 5/102. If a standard contactor is used, it is essential to insert a choke inductor in each of the three phases of each step.
Maximum operational power of contactors

Standard contactors
Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour. Electrical durability at maxiumum load: 100 000 operating cycles. With choke inductors connected, where necessary. Operational power at 50/60 Hz q y 40 C (1) q y 55 C (1) 220/240 V 400/440 V 600/690 V 220/240 V 400/440 V 600/690 V kvAR kvAR kvAR kvAR kvAR kvAR 6 11 15 6 11 15 9 15 20 9 15 20 20 25 11 20 25 11 14 25 30 14 25 30 37 17 30 37 17 30 22 40 50 22 40 50 22 40 50 22 40 50 35 60 75 35 60 75 38 75 80 50 90 125 135 40 85 90 60 110 100 70 125 160 50 100 60 110 110 80 140 190 90 160 225 75 125 125 165 100 190 275 85 140 160 200 125 220 300 100 180 300 400 125 220 300 190 350 500 250 400 600 250 400 600 190 350 500 200 350 500 180 350 500 300 550 650 250 500 600 400 750 750 500 850 950 1000 1000 600 1100 1300 500 (1) Upper limit of temperature category conforming to IEC 60070. Max. peak current A 560 850 1600 1900 2160 2160 3040 3040 3100 3300 3500 4000 5000 6500 8000 10 000 12 000 14 200 25 000 25 000 25 000 25 000 Contactor rating
LC1D09, D12 LC1D18 LC1D25 LC1D32, D38 LC1D40 LC1D50 LC1D65 LC1D80, D95 LC1D115 LC1D150 LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F630 LC1F800 LC1BL LC1BM LC1BP LC1BR

5/217
Recommended wiring scheme, operation, curves

Applications
TeSys contactors

For auto-transformer starting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Auto-transformer starting is suitable for starting all types of squirrel cage motors: with 3, 6 or even 9 terminals according to North American technology. Starting is performed at reduced voltage and produces maximum torque at minimum line current. It allows the starting torque (C = f(U)2) to be adapted to the resistive torque of the driven machine by means of the 2 or 3 intermediate voltage take-off connections on the auto-transformer (0.65 and 0.8 Un or 0.5, 0.65 and 0.8 Un). In general, only one take-off connection is used. This type of starting is used for high power and/or high inertia machines. The motor is never disconnected from its power supply during starting (closed transition) and transient phenomena are eliminated.
Recommended wiring scheme

F2 F3 96 95 96 95 14
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
13 2 F1
1 2
3 4
5 6
S1
F2
S2
13
13
U1 2
V1 4
W1 6
KA1
KM1
KM3
13
KM3
KM2
55 14
13 22
21
Q1
Q1
Q1/2
KM2
14
14
51
61
A1 52
A1 62
A1 62
A1 14
2 U2
A2
A2
A2
A2
Starting is performed in 3 stages: b star connection of the auto-transformer is made by KM1, then contactor KM2 closes and the motor starts under reduced voltage; b the neutral point is opened by KM1; part of the auto-transformer winding is switched into each phase for a short moment, constituting a stator starting inductance; b KM3 switches the motor to full mains voltage and causes the auto-transformer to be shunted out of circuit by KM2. The auto-transformer used generally has an air gap (adjusted or not) in order to obtain, during the second phase of starting, a series inductance whose value is compatible with correct starting.
Operation
Operating curves
Current Torque
Q1/6
KM1
KM3
KM2
KA1
XIN
2,5
XCN
ID 6 5
1
4 I2 3 2
1,5
1 2
CN 1
2
0,5
IN 1 0 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1 Speed 0 0 0,25
3
0,50 0,75 1 Speed
1 Direct switching current 2 Current with auto-transformer
1 Direct motor torque 2 Torque with auto-transformer 3 Resistive torque of the machine
5/218
6
F3
KM1
6 W2
4 V2
U3 V3 W3
KM3
KM1
13
61
KA1 KM3 T3
T1
56
14
TeSys contactors

For auto-transformer starting
Auto-transformer starters from 59 to 900 kW up to 440 V (type 1 coordination) The components recommended in the table below have been determined according to the following characteristics: b auto-transformer: on 0.65 Un connection with non adjusted air gap, b 3 starts per hour, of which 2 consecutive, b Motor starting current: Id/In = 6, b Iq = 70 kA, b Transient current on closing of KM3 y 7 2 In, b Maximum starting time: 30 seconds, b Ambient temperature q y 40 C.
Switch-disconnector-fuses: operators and accessories, please consult your Regional Sales Office. Contactors: 3-pole. LC1D: see pages 5/62 and 5/65, LC1F: please consult your Regional Sales Office, LC1B: please consult your Regional Sales Office. Auxiliary contact blocks: b for contactors LC1D: one LADN11 (1 N/O + 1 N/C) on KM1, b for contactors LC1F: one LADN22 (2 N/O + 2 N/C) on KM1, KM2 and KM3. Thermal overload relays: b LR: see pages 6/20 to 6/25, b LR9D: see pages 6/21 to 6/25, b LR9F: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 220/ 230 V kW 30 40 51 63 75 90 110 140 180 200 380/ 415 V 440 V 400 V kW kW kW 55 59 59 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 80 90 110 132 160 200 257 355 375 80 100 110 150 185 220 280 375 400 SwitchaM fuses disconnector- Size Rating fuse Reference Contactors KM3 KM2 LC1 LC1 Overload relays Reference Setting (1) range
1 2 3 4
KM1 LC1
In max A 105 GSpK 138 170 205 245 300 370 460 584 635 GSpL GSpN GSpN GSpN GSpQQ GSpQQ GS2S GS2S GS2V
22 x 58 T0 T1 T1 T1 T2 T2 T3 T3 T4
A 125 160 200 250 250 315 400 500 630 800
D115 D150 F185 F225 F265 F330 F400 F500 F630 F800
D115 D115 D115 D150 F185 F265 F330 F400 F400 F500
D3210 D5011 D5011 D8011 D115 D115 D115 D115 D185 F185
LR9D5369 LRD 4367 LR9 D5369 LRD 4369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5371 LR9 F5375 LR9 F5375 LR9 F5379 LR9 F5379 LR9 F5381
A 90150 95120 90150 110140 132220 132220 200330 200330 300500 300500 380630 505800 505800 6301000 6301000 7901250 7901250 9451500 1001750 2602000
5 6 7 8 9 10
TC800/1 + LRD 05 220 400 425 450 710 GS2V T4 800 F800 F500 F265 TC800/1 + LRD 05 250 450 475 500 800 GS2V T4 800 F800 F500 F265 TC1000/1 + LRD 05 280 500 530 560 900 GS2V T4 1000 BM33p22 F630 F330 TC1000/1 LRD 05 315 560 600 630 1000 GS2V T4 1000 BM33p22 F630 F400 TC1250/1 LRD 05 335 630 670 710 1100 GS2V T4 1250 BP33p22 F630 F400 TC1250/1 LRD 05 400 710 750 800 1260 On base T4 2 x 800 BP33p22 F780 F400 TC1500/1 (2) LRD 05 450 800 800 800 1450 On base T4 2 x 800 BP33p22 F780 F400 TC1750/1 (2) LRD 05 500 900 900 900 1600 On base T4 2 x 800 BR33p22 F780 F500 TC2000/1 (2) LRD 05 (1) For power ratings greater than or equal to 400 kW at 415 V, use one LRD-05 on the current transformer. (2) Check with the motor manufacturer whether the fuses should be fitted in parallel.
5/219
Operation
TeSys contactors

Applications
For rotor circuits of slip-ring motors
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
These contactors are used to eliminate starting resistance in the rotor circuit of slipring motors. The most common application is for starters without inching and without rotor speed adjustment: pumps, fans, conveyors, compressors, ... In the case of control by means of a manually operated master controller, the use of contactors with magnetic blow-out is recommended. Please consult your Regional Sales Office. For hoisting applications, contactor selection must take into account the type of motor duty, the operating rate, the rotor voltage and current, the type of connection, the ambient temperature, etc. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
The rotor circuit contactors are interlocked with the stator contactor and therefore do not open until after the stator contactor has opened, when the rotor voltage has disappeared, or virtually disappeared. They make the current corresponding to the normal starting peak (1.5 to 2.5 times the rated rotor current) and open the circuit under no-load. Making and breaking are easy.
Different types of rotor connection Star connection Delta connection
Operation
V connection
W connection
5/220
Selection
TeSys contactors

For rotor circuits of slip-ring motors
Rotor current and voltage coefficients Coefficients to be applied to the operational current values shown in the table below.
Contactor selection according to the type of connection
1
With counter-current LC1 F LC1B 1000 V 1000 V 850 V 850 V 850 V 850 V 850 V 850 V
Type of connection
Rotor I coefficient Operational I 1 1.4 1 1.6
Star Delta In V In W
3-phase rotor Ue (1) Maximum LC1 F 2000 V 1700 V 1700 V 1700 V
LC1B 2000 V 1700 V 1700 V 1700 V
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The selection examples below take into account: b a ratio of 2 between the maximum operational rotor voltage (Uer) and the rated stator operational voltage (Ues). This ratio is given in standard IEC 60947-4, b a guarantee of occasional duty (making and breaking capacities) specified in the above standards.
Time current flowing Contactor rating LC1 LC1 D150 F185 450 A 280 A 220 A
Selection according to the operational current
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 30/h

10 s 30 s 60 s 550 A 400 A 300 A 800 A 550 A 400 A 1100 A 730 A 550 A
LC1 F265
LC1 F400
LC1 F500 1500 A 1000 A 750 A
LC1 F630 2000 A 1500 A 1200 A
LC1 F780 2500 A 2000 A 1500 A
LC1 BL 2000 A 1200 A 1000 A
LC1 BM 2400 A 1800 A 1500 A
LC1 BP 3750 A 2600 A 2200 A
LC1 BR 5000 A 3600 A 3000 A
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 60/h

5s 10 s 30 s 450 A 330 A 220 A 550 A 450 A 300 A 800 A 620 A 400 A 1100 A 860 A 550 A 1500 A 1250 A 750 A 2000 A 1800 A 1200 A 2500 A 2300 A 1500 A 2000 A 1600 A 1000 A 2400 A 2200 A 1500 A 3750 A 3400 A 2200 A 5000 A 4500 A 3000 A
Intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles y 150/h for LC1F and 120/h for LC1B
5s 10 s 300 A 250 A 420 A 350 A 580 A 430 A 820 A 600 A 1150 A 850 A 1650 A 1300 A 2200 A 1600 A 1500 A 1100 A 2100 A 1600 A 3200 A 2300 A 4200 A 3200 A
Rotor short-circuit contactor and intermediate contactor: with number of operating cycles > 150/h for LC1F and 120/h for LC1B
200 A 270 A 350 A 500 A 700 A 1000 A 1600 A 800 A 1250 A 2000 A 2750 A
For automatic starting, the electrical durability is in the region of 1 million operating cycles. (1) For use up to 3000 V, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/221
General
TeSys contactors

Long distance remote control
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
When the operating coil of a contactor is energised, the inrush current produces a voltage drop in the control circuit cable caused by the resistance of the conductors, which can adversely affect closing of the contactor. An excessive voltage drop in the control supply cables (both a.c. and d.c.) can lead to non closure of the contactor poles or even destruction of the coil due to overheating. This phenomenon is aggravated by: b a long line, b a low control circuit voltage, b a cable with a small c.s.a., b a high inrush power drawn by the coil. The maximum length of cable, depending on the control voltage, the inrush power and the conductor c.s.a., is indicated in the graphs below. Remedial action To reduce the voltage drop at switch-on: b increase the conductor c.s.a., b use a higher control circuit voltage, b use an intermediate control relay. Selection of conductor c.s.a. These graphs are for a maximum line voltage drop of 5%. They give a direct indication of the copper conductor c.s.a. to be used for the control cable, depending on its length, the inrush power drawn by the contactor coil and the control circuit voltage (see example page 5/223).
Total resistance of the 2 conductors in the control cable in W (1) Total resistance of the 2 conductors in the control cable in W (1)
Voltage drop caused by the inrush current
1000
1000
6
100
5 4 3X 2 1
100
10
10
A B C Y DE F
100 500 5000 150 1000 10 000 Length of control cable in m (2)
0,1
10
100 500 2000 50 200 1000 Inrush power drawn in VA
0,1 10
50
1 a 24 V 2 a 48 V
1000
3 a 115 V 4 a 230 V
5 a 400 V 6 a 690 V
A 0.75 mm2 B 1 mm2
C.s.a. of copper cables C 1.5 mm2
D 2.5 mm2
E 4 mm2 F 6 mm2
Total resistance of the 2 conductors in the control cable in W (1)
Total resistance of the 2 conductors in the control cable in W (1)
1000
100
100
10
10
9 8 7
10
A BC DE F
100 10 000 1000 5000 500 Length of control cable in m (2)
0,1
10
2000 100 500 1000 50 200 Inrush power drawn in W
0,1 10
50
(1) For 3-wire control, the current only flows in 2 of the conductors. (2) This is the length of the cable comprising 2 or 3 conductors. (Distance between the contactor and the control device).
7 c 24 V 8 c 48 V
9 c 125 V 10 c 250 V
A 0.75 mm2 B 1 mm2
C.s.a. of copper cables C 1.5 mm2
D 2.5 mm2
E 4 mm2 F 6 mm2
5/222
General (continued)
TeSys contactors

Voltage drop caused by the inrush current (continued) What cable c.s.a. is required for the control circuit of an LC1 D40A, 115V contactor, operated from a distance of 150 metres?
b Contactor LC1 D40A, voltage 115 V, 50 Hz: inrush power: 200 VA On the left-hand graph on the page opposite, point X is at the intersection of the vertical line corresponding to 200 VA and the a 115 V voltage curve. On the right-hand graph on the page opposite, point Y is at the intersection of the vertical line corresponding to 150 m and the horizontal line passing through point X. Use the conductor c.s.a. indicated by the curve which passes through point Y, i.e.: 1.5 mm2. If point Y lies between two c.s.a. curves, choose the larger of the c.s.a. values. Calculating the maximum cable length The maximum permissible length for acceptable line voltage drop is calculated by the formula: U2 L = ___ .s.K SA where: L : distance between the contactor and the control device in m (length of the cable), U : supply voltage in V, SA : apparent inrush power drawn by the coil in VA, s : conductor c.s.a. in mm2, K : factor given in the table below.
a.c. supply SA in VA K 20 1.38 40 1.5 100 1.8 150 2 200 2.15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
d.c. supply
Irrespective of the apparent inrush power SA, expressed in W K = 1.38
5/223
General (continued)
TeSys contactors

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Residual current in the coil due to cable capacitance

When the control contact of a contactor is opened, the control cable capacitance is effectively in series with the coil of the electromagnet. This capacitance can cause a residual current to be maintained in the coil, with the risk that the contactor will remain closed. This only applies to contactors operating on an a.c. supply. This phenomenon is aggravated by: b a long line length between the coil control contact and the contactor, or between the coil control contact and the power supply, b a high control circuit voltage, b a low coil consumption, sealed, b a low value of contactor drop-out voltage. The maximum control cable length, according to the contactor coil supply voltage, is indicated in the graph on the page opposite . Remedial action Various solutions can be adopted to avoid the risk of the contactor remaining closed due to cable capacitance: b use a d.c. control voltage, or, b add a rectifier, connected as shown in the scheme below, but retaining an a.c. operating coil: in this way, rectified a.c. current flows in the control cable. When calculating the maximum cable length, take the resistance of the conductors into account. .
1
A2
b Connect a resistor in parallel with the contactor coil (1). Value of the resistance : R (C capacit du cble de commande) W = 1 ___ R W = 103 C (F) (C capacitance of the control cable)
Power to be dissipated : U2 PW = ___ R
(1) To avoid increasing the voltage drop due to inrush current, this resistor must be brought into operation after the contactor has closed by using an N/O contact.
5/224
Supply 50/60 Hz
A1
General (continued)
TeSys contactors

Residual current in the coil due to cable capacitance (continued)

These graphs are for a capacitance, between 2 conductors, of 0.2 F/km. They make it possible to determine whether there is a risk of the contactor remaining closed due to the power drawn by the coil when sealed, as well as the control circuit voltage, according to the length of the control cable.
Cable capacitance in F Cable capacitance in F
1 2
100
100
10
1 2
10
3
0,1
7 8
4 5 6
0,1
B
0,01 100 300 500 1000 5000 10 000 Length of control cable in m
0,01
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 7 10 50 100 Power drawn, sealed in VA
1 a 24 V 2 a 48 V
3 a 115 V 4 a 230 V
5 a 400 V 6 a 690 V
7 3-wire control 8 2-wire control
In the zones below the straight lines for 3-wire and 2-wire control respectively, there is a risk of the contactor remaining closed. Examples What is the maximum length for the control cable of an LC1 D12 contactor, operating on 230 V, with 2-wire control? b Contactor LC1D12, voltage 230 V, 50 Hz: power sealed 7 VA. On the left-hand graph, point A is at the intersection of the vertical line for 7 VA with the a 230 V voltage curve. On the right-hand graph, point B is at the intersection of the horizontal line with the 2wire control curve. The maximum cable length is therefore 300 m. In the same example, with a 600 m cable, the point lies in the risk zone. A resistor must therefore be connected in parallel with the contactor coil. Value of this resistance : 1 1 R = __ = ___ = 8.3 W 103 . C 103 . 0.12 Power to be dissipated : U2 (220)2 P = ___ = ___ = 6 W R 8300 Alternative solution: use a d.c. control supply. Calculating the cable length The maximum permitted length of control cable to avoid the effects of capacitance is calculated using the formula: S L = 455 . ___ U2.Co L : distance between the contactor and the control device in km (length of the cable), S : apparent power, sealed, in VA, U : control voltage in V, Co : line capacitance of the cable in F/km.
5/225
Selection guide
TeSys contactors

Variable composition standard and high performance contactors
Applications
1 2 3 4
Type
b b b b b
Motor switching in categories AC-3 Resistive load switching : heating, etc. Distribution circuit switching : line contactor Supply changeover switching : circuit coupling etc Transformer, capacitor, lighting switching
Standard contactors
5 6 7 8 9 10
AC-3 AC-4/DC-5 AC-1
80 A 72 A/ 80 A
170 A 145 A/ 200 A
250 A 205 A/ 300 A
350 A 290/470 A (1) 470 A
460 A 380/630 A (1) 630 A
700 A 584/1000 A (1) 1000 A
690 V a
690 V a
690 V a
690 V a
690 V a
690 V a
Control circuit
Standard applications a.c. supply a
d.c. supply c
A1
A1
A2
Contactors
Type Rating
CV1 F G H J K L
Pages
Please consult TeSys variable composition catalogue (1) With PN3 poles.
5/226
A2
A1 A2
b b b b
Motor switching in categories AC-4, DC-5 Inductive circuit switching High voltage d.c. switching : crane electromagnets, railway locomotives Load switching at high operating rates
1 2 3 4
High performance contactors
80 A 80/80 A 80A
200 A 170/200 A 200 A
250 A 208/300 A 300 A
320 A 250/320 A 320 A
460 A 380/500 A 500 A
800 A 720/800 A 800 A
1000 A 830/1000 A 1250 A
1500 A 1200/1800 A 2000 A
1800 A 1500/2500 A 2750 A
5 6 7
1000 V a
1000 V a
1000 V a
1000 V a
1000 V a
1000 V a
1000 V a
1000 V a
1000 V a
Low consumption applications a.c. supply via economy resistor
d.c. supply via economy resistor
KM
A1
KM
KM
A2
KM
CV3 F G H J K
A2
A1
CV3 and LC1B L M P R
8 9 10
5/227
Selection
TeSys contactors
Variable composition contactors CV1B (80 to 1000 A) and CV3B (80 to 500 A)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
To define a contactor The criteria required to define the composition of a contactor are: b the number of N/O and N/C power poles, b the current and power supply voltage, L (note: on a d.c. supply, the time constant - of the load must be known in order to R define the number of poles to be wired in series to break the arc), b the control circuit voltage, b the number of auxiliary contacts. To order a contactor Contactor selectable by code combinations b Use the symbol combination table on page 5/229. b Check the maximum number of poles in the selection table on page 5/230. b Check the operational currents possible below (selection restrictions). Contactor not selectable by code combinations b For a composition that cannot be selected using these tables, use order form CF452, page 5/231.
Selection
Selection restrictions
Contactor type Rated operational current 11 A 13 A 20 A 40 A 50 A 80 A 125 A 200 A 250 A 300 A 320 A 400 A 470 A 500 A 630 A 1000 A 0 Without arc chamber CV1BF CV3BF E M N P Q F Z CV1BG CV3BG Q R G Z CV1BH CV3BH R G H Z CV1BJ CV3BJ S T J Z CV1BK CV3BK U V K Z CV1BL K L Z
5/228
Symbol combination table
TeSys contactors
(see examples on page 26218/4) Type of contactor related to application a 690 V, c 220 V/pole a 1000 V, c 440 V/pole Contactor size AC-1/AC-3 CV3 : 80/80 A CV1 : 80/80 A CV1 : 200/170 A CV3 : 200/200 A CV1 : 300/250 A CV3 : 300/285 A CV1 : 470/350 A CV3 : 320/320 A CV1 : 630/460 A CV3 : 500/460 A CV1 : 1000/700 A Number of poles N/O poles 1 N/O 2 N/O 3 N/O 4 N/O 5 N/O N/C poles 1 N/C 2 N/C 3 N/C No main poles Operational current (determines the blow-out coil size) 11 A 13 A 20 A 40 A 50 A 80 A 125 A 200 A 250 A 300 A 320 A 400 A 470 A 500 A 630 A 1000 A Without breaking Control circuit voltage 24 V 48 V 110 V 120 V 127 V 208 V 220 V 230 V 240 V 380 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 480 V 500 V 600 V Operating frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 50/60 Hz (rectifier + economy resistor) c c + economy resistor Auxiliary contacts (type ZC4GM) N/O instantaneous
Reference to be constituted
CV1B CV3B F G H J K L 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3
Z E M N P Q F R G S H T U J V K L Z B E F K G L M P U Q V N R T S X 5 6 7 D R 1 2 3 4
Z E M N P Q F R G S H T U J V K L Z
1 2 3 0
4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 0
1 N/O 2 N/O 3 N/O 4 N/O N/C instantaneous 1 N/C 2 N/C 3 N/C 4 N/C No instantaneous auxiliary contacts On-delay 1 C/O Off-delay 1 C/O To check whether the symbol combinations are possible, refer to the selection information and guide on pages 5/228 and 5/230. If in doubt, fill out order form CF 452.
10
J N
5/229
Selection
TeSys contactors
Guide to selection of code combinations
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CV1 contactors: maximum number of power poles

Contactor type Pole type Number of poles CV1BF N/O N/C 5 0 0 2 2 1 CV1BG N/O N/C 4 0 0 2 2 1 CV1BH N/O N/C 4 0 0 2 2 1
CV1BJ N/O N/C 4 0 0 2 2 1
CV1BK N/O N/C 4 0 0 2 2 1
CV1BL N/O N/C 2 0 (1) 0 1 (2)
CV3 contactors: maximum number of power poles

Contactor type Pole type Number of poles CV3BF N/O N/C 5 0 0 1 3 2 2 1 CV3BG N/O N/C 4 0 0 1 2 2 2 1 CV3BH N/O N/C 4 0 0 2 2 1 CV3BJ N/O N/C 2 0 CV3BK N/O N/C 2 0
CV1 or CV3 contactors: Maximum number of auxiliary contacts: 4 + 1 time delay if necessary Selection restrictions, according to coil type:
(1) 4-pole with economy resistor. (2) 2-pole with economy resistor.
b Switching of single-phase capacitor: 400 V - 80 A - 1 N/O main pole. 220 V / 50Hz control circuit voltage, 1 N/O and 1 N/C auxiliary contacts. Reference: CV1BF1F0ZM511. b Switching of d.c. heating circuits: 800 V - 150 A - 2 N/O main poles - 48 V c control circuit, instantaneous auxiliary contact 1 N/O + 1 on-delay. Reference: CV3BG2W0ZED10J.
Examples
To obtain a composition with more main poles or with more than 4 auxiliary contacts, please use order form CF452 (see page 5/231).
Other versions
5/230
Reference constitution or order form CF 452
TeSys contactors
Variable composition contactors CV1 and CV3
Date of order
Editor
Geog. area
Order n
Required delivery (1)
Job n
/
Company: ................................ Activity sector: ................................ Number of contactors: ....... Type - size or symbol combination: ..........
Customer Order N: ............................... Application: .............................. For use by Schneider Electric Poles
1 2 3 4
(N/O) (N/C) (N/C) (N/C+N/O) (N/O+N/O) (ON-Del) (OFF-Del)
For devices with symbol combination: Do not fill out the form below
POWER CIRCUIT
Voltage: .......... V
AC DC
...... Hz
Number of N/O main poles: Rated current: ................... Amp Number of N/C main poles: Rated current: ................... Amp Any special details: ..................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................
Ref: Ref:
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Voltage: .......... V Economy resistor:
Customer marking: ..........
AC DC Yes
...... Hz
No
Electromag: Coil: Coil maint. cont: Rectifier: Econ. resist. contact: Econ. Resist.:
No. ZC4GM1 : No. ZC4GM2 : No. ZC1GP4 : No. ZC1GP5 :
(unless specified, an economy resistor will only be included if necessary)
AUXILIARY CONTACTS AVAILABLE

Instantaneous contacts: Number of N/O Number of N/C
5 6 7 8 9 10
If a specific type or block of contacts is required, please indicate below. Number
GM1:
GM2:
GP4:
On delay
GP5:
or
GP6:
Off delay
LA1:
No. ZC1GP6 : No. ZC2GG1 : No. ZC2GG5 : No. LA1BNp31 : No. LA1DNpp : No. LApDTp :
If CV1, specif. n:
Note : For mechanical interlocking, a N/C contact must be specified for the interlocking function.
Time delay contacts N/C + N/O :
Note: If LA1 is used, a build specification is required.
MOUNTING
Fixing centres L: Standard Specified Mechanical interlock MI: Yes No With L = ............
Dimensions in catalogue
Shaft: C or E = Code.: Bar: L = : Code.: Build see drwg. N : MI bearing W1 MI ref
Vertically mounted reversers fixing centres E =.......... mm Upper position contactor: ........................... Lower position contactor: If mechanical interlock specified : Ref: .....................................
Supply linking components for the 2 contactors (Rod, clevis, cranks, lock, etc...) : Yes No
Note : MI components that are part of the contactor such as the bearing, clevis or lock support are factory fitted.
ANY SPECIAL DETAILS
(Comments / Specific requirements / Special MI / Accessories / Etc...)
Launch date Delivery date
Contactor reference* .....................................
* 3 possibilities
1 ) Device with symbol combination (see drwg 1492177) 2) Device n defined on the basis of this form Type/size/order n/year. E.g.: CV1GB000599 3) Reference defined to specification
(1) Standard delivery time: 3 weeks, from receipt of order. For faster delivery, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/231
Selection, characteristics
TeSys contactors
3-pole vacuum contactors andreversing contactors
Selection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Degree of protection Operating position
Contactor size
LC1V160 A 230 V 400 V 525 V 690 V 1000 V 1500 V 200 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V 800 V 1000 V 1500 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 1500 V 208 V 240 V 480 V 600 V kW kW kW kW kW kW 160 45 75 110 150 200 280 50 60 100 125 150 200 250 400 47 95 100 250 20 23 47 59
LC1V320 320 90 160 220 280 400 600 100 125 200 250 300 400 500 800 94 190 200 500 41 47 94 117
LC1V610 610 160 300 400 560 800 930 150 200 300 400 500 700 1000 1300 176 356 400 1000 81 94 188 234

Maximum operational current in AC-3 Rated operational power P (standard power ratings of motors)
For 3-phase motors conforming to CSA standards

Rated operational power P (standard power ratings of 3-phase CSA motors) hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp kVAR kVAR kVAR kVAR kVA kVA kVA kVA
For switching 3-phase capacitors

Rated operational power P
For switching the primaries of 3-phase transformers (LV/LV)

Rated operational power P
Contactor type Shock resistance (1/2 sine wave = 11 ms) Vibration resistance Operating altitude Above sea level Below sea level Contacts closed Contacts open 10500 Hz Maximum Minimum Storage Operation 0.8 1.1 Uc Permissible for operation at Uc Conforming to IEC 60529 m m C C C
LC1V160 10 gn 10 gn 2 gn 3600 2500 - 40+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 10+ 75 IP 00 Any
LC1V320 10 gn 10 gn 2 gn 3600 4500 - 40+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 10+ 75 IP 00 Any 185 20 39 2000 600 20 0.81.1 Uc 24...32
LC1V610 10 gn 10 gn 2 gn 3600 4500 - 40+ 80 - 5+ 55 - 10+ 75 IP 00 Any 2 x 185 20 39 2000 1700 28 0.81.1 Uc 24...32
Ambient air temperature around the device
8 9 10
Cabling

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Consumption
Cable c.s.a. Key for hex. screws Tightening torque To earth Inrush Sealed
mm2 mm N.m V VA VA
70 Allen 4 14 2000 300 30 0.81.1 Uc
Permissible control circuit voltage Closing time (1) Opening time (1) ms
18...22
95...115 ms 95...115 95...115 (1) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.
5/232
TeSys contactors
3-pole vacuum contactors andreversing contactors
Contactor type

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Approvals Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) Rated operational current (Ie) q y 40 C AC-1 q y 55 C AC-3 q y 55 C AC-4 Electrical durability in millions of operating cycles (400 V at I max) Mechanical durability Maximum operating rate in operating cycles per hour AC-1 AC-3 AC-4 In millions of operating cycles Mechanical AC-1 AC-3 AC-4 Ue = 1500 V To IEC 60947 Ue = 1500 V To IEC 60947 For 1 s For 2 s For 10 s For 30 s aM fuse A A A A A A A A A A A V kV
LC1V160
LC1V320
LC1V610
1500 8
1500 8
1500 8
1 2
EN 60947-4-1 - IEC 60947-4-1 CSA 160 160 160 130 1.2 1.6 0.18 5 1200 900 900 450 1900 1600 2400 2000 1600 960 160 320 320 320 270 1 1.5 0.15 2.5 1200 900 900 450 3800 3200 4500 3750 3200 1920 400 630 630 610 540 1 1.5 0.12 2 1200 900 900 450 7300 6100 9000 7580 6100 3600 630
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Maximum making capacity (lrms) Maximum breaking capacity (lrms) Maximum permissible current
Short-circuit protection at Ie in cat. AC-3 max.

V A A A A A A A mm2 A ms ms 690 10 0.78 0.45 0.35 1.1 0.24 0.12 2.5 10 5 5
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) Rated operational current (Ie) AC-15, 230 V AC-15, 400 V AC-15, 500 V DC-13, 24 V DC-13, 110 V DC-13, 220 V Cabling Short-circuit protection Operating time (1) (at 100 % of Uc) Cable c.s.a. gG fuse C O
(1) Operating time in relation to the main contacts.
5/233
References
TeSys contactors
Power and control circuits a.c. supply
Vacuum contactors
1 2 3
Standard power ratings 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
Rated operational current Ie
Control Basic Weight circuit reference (1) voltage (50/60 Hz)
105194
230 V 400 V 525 V 690 V 1000 V AC-3 AC-1 kW kW kW kW kW A A 45 LC1 V320 90 160 75 160 300 110 220 400 150 280 560 200 400 800 160 320 610 160 320 630 2 1 1 1 (1) 1 (1) 1 (1) LC1 V160pp LC1 V320pp LC1 V610pp
kg 3.800 10.500 13.000
Reversing vacuum contactors

L1 L2 L3
5 L3 3 L2 1 L1 5 L3 3 L2 1 L1
LC1V6
10
KM2
ON / I /0 OFF 6 T3 4 T2
The reversing contactor range comprises : b for 160 A rating, a kit with set of power connections allowing assembly of the starter, b for 320 and 610 A ratings, a complete starter, ready for use.
Standard power ratings 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 Rated operational current Ie Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Control Basic Weight circuit reference (1) voltage (50/60 Hz)
LC1V6
10
KM1
ON / I 2 T1 /0 OFF 6 T3
4
LC2 V610
4 T2 2 T1
5 6 7 8 9 10
Selection : page 5/232 Characteristics : pages 5/232 and 5/233
LA9 V974
5/234
gf
230 V 400 V 525 V 690 V 1000 V AC-3 AC-1 kW kW kW kW kW A A 45 90 75 160 110 220 150 280 200 400 160 320 160 320 2 1 1 LA9 V974 (2)
kg 1.200 30 30 30 36 36
1 110-120 V LC2 V320FE7 220-240 V LC2 V320P7 380-415 V LC2 V320V7
160
300
400
560
800
610
630
1 110-120 V LC2 V610FE7 220-240 V LC2 V610P7
(1) Basic reference; add code indicating control circuit voltage. Standard control circuit voltages : Volts 50/60 Hz 110120 220240 380415 440480 550600 Item FE7 P7 V7 R7 X7 (2) Kit containing a mechanical interlock, a set of power connections and a fixing plate. To build a complete reversing contactor, order contactors LC1 V160pp separately.
TeSys contactors
Power and control circuits a.c. supply
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (1)

500308
Number of contacts
Maximum number of blocks per contactor
Auxiliary contacts
Reference
Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
kg 2 LA1 VN11 4 1 2 1 1 2 1 LA1 VN11 LA1 VN02 LA1 VN20 LA1 VN11X (2) 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
50/60 Hz coils
Rated voltage V Voltage code Reference Weight kg 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400 0.400
For contactors LC1 V160

110120 220240 380415 440480 550600 FE7 P7 V7 R7 X7 LX1 V160FE7 LX1 V160P7 LX1 V160V7 LX1 V160R7 LX1 V160X7
500310

LX1 V320pp 110120 220240 380415 440480 550600 FE7 P7 V7 R7 X7 LX1 V320FE7 LX1 V320P7 LX1 V320V7 LX1 V320R7 LX1 V320X7 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800

110120 220240 380415 440480 550600 FE7 P7 V7 R7 X7 LX1 V610FE7 LX1 V610P7 LX1 V610V7 LX1 V610R7 LX1 V610X7 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800
(1) LC1 V160 : auxiliary contact blocks mounted at the top of the contactor, with no change to the overall dimensions. LC1 V320 or LC1 V610 : 2 auxiliary contact blocks mounted on the RH and LH side of the contactor, with no change to the overall dimensions. (2) For LC1 V160 : 1 N/C contact for the coil + 1 N/O contact.
5/235
Dimensions, mounting, schemes

TeSys contactors
3-pole vacuum contactors
1
500311
LC1V160
48 24
9
152
2
151 36,5 123
168
36,5
24 48
3
500312
LC1V320
156 133
3,5
50 35
70 2x10,5
2x8,5x19
4
130
185
222
203
191
2x8 2x8,5
9,5
37 63,5 63,5 201
38 48 76 170 15
5 6 7
159
LC1V610
178 127 68 68
500313
2x8,5x19
222 328 356 203
2x8,5
95
32,5
68 201
68
8 9 10
Schemes
LC1V160
1/L1 3/L2 A1 03/NO 13/NO 21/NC 5/L3
LC1V320, V610
13/NO 21/NC 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 A1
2/T1
4/T2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
6/T3
A2
A2
04

LA1VN11 1 N/O & 1 N/C
13/NO 21/NC
14
LA1VN02 2 N/C
51/NC 500316 61/NC
22
LA1VN20 2 N/O
33/NO 43/NO
14
22
LA1VN11X 1 N/O
03/NO NC
34
14
5/236
22
44
coil
52
62
04
9,5
172
15
TeSys reversing contactors

3-pole reversing vacuum contactors
LA9V974 + 2 x LC1V160
88,9
562320
53
152,4
215
11,18
1 2 3
22 54
151
254
48
81,8 177,8
48
LC2V320
559 168
536047
107 16
63
96
41
4
446
463
356
5
104 54 = 63
241 418 616
108
63
48
6 7
105 117
LC2V610
559 112 165 16
562322
69 L1
=
69 L2 L3
41
8
463 356 432
9
T1 T2 T3
199 616
Selection : page 5/232 Characteristics : pages 5/232 and 5/233 References : page 5/234
68
68 112
10
5/237
Schemes

Schemes
1/L1
3/L2 3
A2
3
LC2V320
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
A2
5/L3 1
LA9V974 + 2 x LC1V160
A1
5 A1
KM1
KM2
4
1 3 5 A1
F1
Stop
A1
(1)
6
KM1
A2 2 4 6 2 4
KM2
6 A2
5 6 7 8 9 10
Start
- KM1
- KM1
Start
- KM2
- KM2
- KM2
A1
- KM1
A2
- KM1
A2 A1
- KM2
(1) Dotted line indicates wiring to be installed by the customer.
5/238
Schemes (continued)

Schemes (continued)
LC2V610
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
1
F1
Stop
(1) KM2
6
KM1
A2 2 4 6 2 4 6 A2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A1
5 A1
Start
- KM1 - KM1
Start
- KM2 - KM2
- KM2 - KM1
- KM1 - KM2
A1
- KM1
A2
- KM2
A2
(1) Dotted line indicates wiring to be installed by the customer.
A1
5/239
General
TeSys contactors
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Selection : pages 5/241 to 5/245 Characteristics : pages 5/246 to 5/249
Magnetic latching contactors of both block and bar mounted types are fitted with a special electromagnet which enables them to remain in the On position when the coil is no longer energised. Applications The special properties of magnetic latching contactors make them suitable for a large number of applications.
Properties Applications
b Retention of the sequence memory in automatic control equipment in the event of loss of control voltage. b Energy saving, since the source of supply to the coil does not need to supply current when the contactor is latched in the closed state. b Change of state from Closed to Open by current signal through the coil. b Unaffected by mains interference. b Utilisation of contactors beyond their breaking capacity, as operations are performed off-load. b Contactors are silent in the latched position. Operation of the electromagnet
b Refineries, power stations, excitation circuits. b Contactors remaining in the closed state for long periods. Examples: refineries, power supplies, low voltage distribution b Selective opening control. b No unwanted opening and closing of the main power poles. b Current carrying at voltages up to 1000 Volts.
CR1F block contactors CR1F magnetic latching contactors are fitted with a double coil with 3 terminals comprising a latching winding and an unlatching winding. The 2 windings have a common point which can necessitate special wiring precautions when the latching supply is separate from the unlatching supply. The power supplies may be a.c. or d.c. For d.c. operation, the polarities indicated must be complied with. Operating precautions: v the 2 windings must not be supplied simultaneously, v a winding must not be supplied continuously, v supply to the coils must be via pulsed contacts. Manual opening: if the control voltage is not present, the contactor can be unlatched manually. CR1B bar mounted contactors CR1B magnetic latching contactors are fitted with a single coil, supplied with d.c. or with a.c. through a rectifier. Latching is obtained by direct supply of the coil in one direction of current flow. Unlatching is obtained by a reverse current, adjusted by resistors.
Mechanical latching contactors
LC1D block contactors For applications using smaller contactor sizes than those described on page 5/241, it is possible to obtain the same function by the addition of a mechanical latch block type LA6DK, which can be mounted on LC1 D contactors (see page 5/80).
5/240
Selection
TeSys contactors
Selection guide for direct on-line starting of squirrel cage motors
Continuous or intermittent duty up to 30 operating cycles/hour

Motor (1) 220 V 230 V P kW 25 30 33 37 40 45 51 55 59 63 75 80 90 100 110 129 132 140 147 In A 85 103 113 126 134 150 170 182 195 203 240 260 295 325 356 420 425 450 472 380 V 400 V P kW 51 55 59 63 75 80 90 100 110 129 132 140 147 150 160 180 185 200 In A 98 105 112 117 138 147 170 188 205 242 245 260 273 280 300 333 342 370 415 V 440 V 3-pole contactor (2) P kW 55 59 63 75 80 90 100 110 129 132 140 147 150 160 180 185 200 220 250 257 280 295 300 315 335 355 375 400 425 445 450 475 500 530 560 600 In A 100 105 115 135 138 165 182 200 230 240 250 260 270 280 320 325 340 385 425 450 475 500 510 535 550 580 610 650 690 730 740 780 820 870 920 978 P kW 59 63 75 80 90 100 110 129 132 140 147 150 160 180 185 200 220 250 257 280 295 300 315 335 355 375 400 425 445 450 475 500 530 560 600 630 In A 97 109 125 131 146 162 178 209 215 227 236 246 256 289 295 321 353 401 412 450 473 481 505 518 549 575 611 650 680 690 730 780 825 870 920 965 Reference CR1F150 CR1F150 CR1F150 CR1F150 CR1F185 CR1F185 CR1F265 CR1F265 CR1F265 CR1F400 CR1F400 CR1F400 CR1F400 LR9F5367 LR9F5369 LR9F5369 LR9F5369 LR9F5369 LR9F5371 LR9F5371 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7375 LR9F7379 LR9F7379 A 60100 90150 90150 90150 90150 132220 132220 200330 200330 200330 200330 300500 300500 3-pole differential thermal overload relay Reference Setting range 3 fuses Type aM BS-88
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
HP 35 40 45 50 54 60 70 75 80 85 100 110 125 136 150 175 180 190 200
HP 70 75 80 85 100 110 125 138 150 175 180 190 200 205 220 245 250 270
HP 75 80 85 100 110 125 136 150 175 180 190 200 205 220 245 250 270 300 340 350 380 400 410 430 450 480 500 g g g g g g g g g
HP 80 85 100 110 125 136 150 175 180 190 200 205 220 245 250 270 300 340 350 380 400 410 430 450 480 500 454 g g g g g g g g g
Rating A A 100 125 100 160 125 160 160 200 250 250 315 315 315 400 400 160 200 200 250 315 315 400 400 400 500 500
220 300 408 CR1F500 300500 500 630 LR9F7379 LR9F7381 380630 500 630 250 340 460 CR1F500 CR1F500 380630 500 630 LR9F7381 LR9F7381 380630 500 630 257 350 475 CR1F630 150 205 483 280 380 510 CR1F630 LR9F7381 380630 630 800 160 220 520 295 400 546 180 245 578 300 410 565 CR1F630 LR9F7381 380630 630 800 185 250 595 315 430 584 200 270 626 335 450 620 CR1F630 380630 800 1000 LR9F7381 LR2F8383 500800 800 1000 220 g 700 355 g 635 CR1BL33 375 g 670 400 g 710 250 g 800 425 g 760 CR1BM33 500800 800 1000 LR2F8383 LR2F8383 6301000 1000 1250 257 g 826 445 g 790 CR1BM33 280 g 900 450 g 800 295 g 948 475 g 850 300 g 980 500 g 900 315 g 990 530 g 950 (1) The ratings are for standard 220/230 V, 380/400 V, 415 or 440 V motors. The overload relays should preferably be set to the motor full-load current shown on the motor rating plate. For other power ratings, select the overload relay with the appropriate range; the associated contactor and fuses must have ratings equal to or immediately greater than In. (2) Reference to be completed, see page 5/250. g There are no standard power ratings for these motors.
5/241
Selection
TeSys contactors
Selection guide for utilisation category AC-3
Contactor size
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CR1 F150 A 150 135 130 47
CR1 F185 185 175 140 73
CR1 F265 265 245 230 95
CR1 F400 400 385 365 135
CR1 F500 500 500 435 270
CR1 F630 630 540 470 330
CR1 BL 750 750 700 400
CR1 BM 1000 900 800 400
CR1 BP 1500 1200 900 500
CR1 BR 1800 1500 1100 600
440 V 500 V
Rated operational current in AC-3 (q y 55 C)

A A A
660/690 V 1000 V
Rated operational power (standard motor power ratings)

220240 V kW HP 380400 V kW HP 415 V kW HP 440 V kW HP 500 V kW HP 660/690 V kW HP 1000 V kW HP 40 54 75 100 80 110 80 110 90 125 100 65 55 75 90 185 100 136 100 136 110 150 110 100 136 75 100 132 180 140 180 140 190 160 220 160 147 200 110 150 200 270 220 300 250 340 257 350 280 185 250 147 200 250 340 280 380 295 400 355 480 335 335 200 270 335 450 375 500 400 545 400 545 450 610 450 610 220 300 400 545 425 580 450 610 500 680 560 760 530 720 280 380 500 680 530 720 560 760 600 810 670 910 530 720 425 580 750 1000 800 1100 800 1100 750 1000 750 1000 670 910 500 680 900 1220 900 1220 900 1220 900 1220 900 1220 750 1000
Maximum operating rate in operating cycles/hour, at rated operational power with an on-load factor = 85%: 750 for CR1F150 to F265, 500 for CR1F400 to F630 and 120 for CR1B.
5/242
Selection
TeSys contactors
Selection according to required electrical durability
Use in category AC-3 (Ue y 440 V) (1) (q y 55 C) The current (Ic) in AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current (Ie) drawn by the motor.
CR1 BL, BM CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265 CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630
Millions of operating cycles 1 0,8
1 2 3 4
AC-3 AC-2 AC4
0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04 0,02 0,01 0,008 0,006 0,004 0,002 0,001 0,008
Current breaking limits In categories
20
CR1 BR
CR1 BP
30
40
Example: Asynchronous motor with P = 50 kW, Ue = 380 V, Ie = 100 A, Ic = Ie = 100 A, or asynchronous motor with P = 55 kW, Ue = 415 V, Ie = 100 A, Ic = Ie = 100 A 600000 operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed, CR1F185.
(1) For 660 V, multiply the number of operating cycles by 0.8.
50 60 70 8090 100
150
200
300
400
600 800 1000 500
1500 2000
3000 4000
5 6 7 8 9 10
5/243
Selection
TeSys contactors
Selection guide for utilisation category AC-1 and according to required electrical durability
Maximum operational current (on-load factor u 0.95)
1 2 3 4
Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour

Contactor size Cable c.s.a. Number of bars Bar c.s.a. Operational current in category AC-1 at ambient temperature y 40 C y 55 C y 70 C mm A A A mm2
CR1 F150 120 250 250 170
CR1 F185 150 275 275 180
CR1 F265 185 350 300 250
CR1 F400 2 30 x 5 500 430 340
CR1 F500 2 40 x 5 700 580 500
CR1 F630 2 60 x 5 1000 850 700
CR1 BL 2 50 x 5 800 700 600
CR1 BM 2 80 x 5 1250 1100 900
CR1 BP 3 100 x 5 2000 1750 1500
CR1 BR 4 100 x 5 2750 2400 2000
Increase in operational current by parallel connection of poles Apply the following coefficients to the above currents; these coefficients take into account an often unbalanced distribution of current between the poles: v 2 poles in parallel: K = 1.6 v 3 poles in parallel: K = 2.25 v 4 poles in parallel: K = 2.8
Electrical durability (Ue y 440 V) (1)

CR1 F150 CR1 F185 CR1 F265 CR1 F400 CR1 F500 CR1 F630

CR1 BL, BM CR1 BR CR1 BP
1 0,8
5 6 7 8 9 10
0,6 0,4
0,2
0,1 0,08 0,06 0,04
0,02
0,01 60 80 100 250 275 350 400 500 600 700 800 1000 1250 2000 2750
Current broken in A
4000
Example: Ue = 220 V - Ie = 200 A - q = 40 C - Ic = Ie = 200 A 600 000 operating cycles required. The above selection curves show the contactor rating needed, CR1F400.
(1) For 660 V, multiply the number of operating cycles by 0.8.
5/244
Selection
TeSys contactors
Selection guide for switching the primaries of 3-phase transformers
Maximum ambient temperature: 55 C Maximum operational voltage: 1000 V, 5060 Hz When a transformer is switched on, there is generally an initial current surge which reaches its peak value almost instantaneously and then decreases in a largely exponential manner to quickly reach its steady state value. The value of this current depends on: v the characteristics of the magnetic circuit and of the windings (cross sectional area of the core, rated inductance, number of turns, size of the windings, ...) v the performance of the magnetic laminations used (residual induction and saturation inductance), v the magnetic state of the circuit and the instantaneous value of the a.c. mains voltage at the moment of switch-on. The peak current at the moment of switch-on can reach 20 to 40 times the rated current for the various kVA power ratings in the tables below. This value is independent of the no-load or on-load state of the transformer. The peak magnetising current of the transformer must be lower than the values given in the tables below.
1 2 3 4
Contactor selection
Contactor size Maximum permissible current peak at switch-on Maximum operational power (1)
Maximum operating rate: 120 operating cycles/hour

A 220230 V 380400 V 415440 V 500 V 660 V 1000 V kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA kVA CR1 F150 1700 25 50 55 65 80 100 CR1 F185 2800 40 75 80 95 120 150 CR1 F265 3500 50 90 100 110 140 200 CR1 F400 5500 75 130 140 170 200 250 CR1 F500 6800 100 170 190 225 270 375 CR1 F630 9000 140 225 250 280 315 470 CR1 BL 18 000 230 400 450 480 600 700 CR1 BM 18 000 230 400 450 480 600 700 CR1 BP 24 000 300 530 560 600 800 1000 CR1 BR 30 000 380 660 700 750 950 1200
5 6 7 8 9 10
5/245
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Contactor type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60158-1, BS 775, 60947-4 Conforming to VDE 0110 grC Standard version Special version Storage For operation at Uc Without derating Without derating C C m V V
CR1F150 1000 1500 TH - 60+ 80 - 15+ 70 3000 5
CR1F185 1000 1500
CR1F265 1000 1500
Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Operating positions
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue y 440 V) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Frequency limits (sine wave) Rated making capacity Rated breaking capacity In AC-3, y 40 C In AC-1, y 40 C In AC-4, y 40 C Up to Of the opeational current I rms I rms 220440 V 500 V 660/690 V 1000 V A A A V Hz A A A A A A A A A A A A A A mW W W 3 or 4 150 250 138 1000 25200 1700 1500 1200 1100 450 1200 1200 1200 700 600 450 350 160 250 0.45 6 18 1 120 120 2 25 x 3 8 18 3 or 4 185 275 170 1000 25200 2100 1800 1600 1200 600 1500 1500 1500 920 740 500 400 200 315 0.36 12 26 1 150 150 2 25 x 3 8 18 3 or 4 265 350 245 1000 25200 2940 2450 2200 1700 800 2200 2200 2200 1230 950 620 480 315 400 0.32 22 39 1 240 240 2 32 x 4 10 35
Permissible short time rating from cold state, with no current flowing for previous 60 minutes at y 40 C
For 1 s For 5 s For 10 s For 30 s For 1 min For 3 min For 10 min Short-circuit protection by fuses Motor circuit AC-3 (type aM) q y 440 V AC-1 circuit (type gG, BS 88) At lth and 50 Hz AC-3 AC-1 Number of conductors Cable with lugs Cable with connector Number of bars Bar c.s.a. Bolt diameter Tightening torque
Average impedance per pole Power dissipated per pole for the above operational currents Connection
mm2 mm2 mm N.m
5/246
CR1F400 1000 1500 TH - 60+ 80 - 15+ 70 3000
CR1F500 1000 1500
CR1F630 1000 1500
CR1BL 1000 1500 TC TH - 60+ 80 - 15+ 60 3000
CR1BM 1000 1500
CR1BP 1000 1500
CR1BR 1000 1500
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
5 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane
3 or 4 400 500 370 1000 25200 4500 4000 3500 3000 1200 3600 3600 3600 2400 1700 1200 1000 400 500 0.28 45 70
3 or 4 500 700 460 1000 25200 5000 5000 4500 3560 2500 4200 4200 4200 3200 2400 1500 1200 500 800 0.18 45 88
3 or 4 630 1000 560 1000 25200 6740 6300 5400 4600 3200 5050 5050 5050 4400 3400 2200 1600 630 1000 0.12 48 120
1, 2, 3 or 4 750 800 700 1000 5060 10 000 10 000 9000 8000 4000 9600 9600 7000 4800 3500 2100 1200 800 800 0.18 88 115
1, 2, 3 or 4 1000 1250 800 1000 5060 10 000 10 000 9000 8000 4000 9600 9600 8000 5200 3800 2400 1800 1200 1200 0.18 180 280
1, 2, 3 or 4 1500 2000 1250 1000 5060 15 000 15 000 12 000 9000 5000 12 000 12 000 9600 6400 5200 3600 2800 800 x 2 (1) 1000 x 2 (1) 0.13 290 520 3 100 x 5 4 x 10 35
1, 2, 3 or 4 1800 2750 1500 1000 5060 18 000 18 000 15 000 11 000 6000 15 000 15 000 12 000 8000 6300 4400 3600 1000 x 2 (1) 1200 x 2 (1) 0.09 360 680 4 100 x 10 4 x 10 35
2 2 150 240 2 2 2 2 2 40 x 5 60 x 5 50 x 5 80 x 5 30 x 5 10 10 12 4x8 4 x 10 35 35 58 21 35 (1) Paralleling of poles must be carried out only in accordance with the fuse manufacturers recommendations.
5/247
Characteristics
TeSys contactors
Contactor type
CR1F150 a 50 or 60 Hz a 400 Hz c c low consumption Latching Unlatching In operating cycles per hour In millions of operating cycles Latching 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole Unlatching 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole 400 Hz and c Latching 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole Unlatching 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA W W ms ms V V V V 48415 48220 48220 48220 0.851.1 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 120 1 1100 100 7.3 7.3 1260 1260 10 10 500 15 3540 50100
CR1F185
CR1F265
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)
Control voltage limits a and c Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature y 40 C Mechanical durability Average consumption 50/60 Hz
1600 1600 8 8 1750 1750 11 11 500 20 3540 50100
1650 1650 9 9 1800 1800 12 12 500 40 4550 50100
4-pole c low consumption Average operating time at Uc (1) Latching Unlatching Latching Unlatching 3/4-pole 3/4-pole
(1) The closing time is measured from the moment the closing coil is energised to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time is measured from the moment the opening coil is energised to the moment the main poles separate. Nota : the arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the main poles. For 3-phase applications the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time.

Type of contacts Conventional thermal current Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Connection Operational power of contacts LADN for contactors CR1F A Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V Flexible or solid conductor with or without cable end mm2 LADN for contactors CR1F 10 690 1 x 1 min; 2 x 2.5 max d.c. supply Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W 48 90 700 125 75 400 250 68 260 440 61 220
a.c. supply Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4). V 48 120 2600 115 280 7000 230 560 400 960 600 1440
1 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity
VA VA
13 000 15 000 9000
9 10
Selection : pages 5/241 to 5/245 References : pages 5/250 to 5/259 Dimensions : pages 5/260 to 5/264 Schemes : pages 5/266 and 5/267
5/248
CR1F400 48415 48220 48220 48220 0.851.1 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 120 1 1450 1450 12 12 1600 1600 16 16 500 70 4075 50100
CR1F500
CR1F630
CR1BL 110500 110500 110500 0.851.1 Uc 0.851.1 Uc 120 1
CR1BM
CR1BP
CR1BR
1 2
650 1100 1650 1850 110 125 165 175 600 1000 1500 1700 100 115 150 160 100150 2040 650 1100 1650 1850 110 125 165 175 600 1000 1500 1700 100 115 150 160 100150 2040 650 1100 1650 1850 110 125 165 175 600 1000 1500 1700 100 115 150 160 100150 2040
1650 1650 9.5 9.5 1800 1800 13 13 550 60 4080 50100
2100 2100 8 8 2300 2300 11 11 620 45 4080 50100
650 1100 1650 1850 110 125 165 175 600 1000 1500 1700 100 115 150 160 100150 2040
3 4 5 6 7
(1) The closing time is measured from the moment the closing coil is energised to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time is measured from the moment the opening coil is energised to the moment the main poles separate. Nota : the arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the main poles. For 3-phase applications the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time. LAD N for contactors CR1 F 10 690 1 x 1 min; 2 x 2.5 max Operational power of contacts ZC4GM for contactors CR1B ZC4GM for contactors CR1 B 20 660 2 min; 4 max a.c. supply Electrical durability (valid for up to 2400 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4). V 1 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity VA VA 110 127 2000 220 4000 380 4000 415 440 4000 500 3500 d.c. supply Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W 110 250 1600 120 250 800 440 230 400 500 200 360
8 9 10
14 000 23 000 35 000 45 000 35 000
5/249
References
TeSys contactors

Control circuit: a.c. or d.c. supply
1 2
CR1 F1854
501612_1
Maximum thermal current in category AC-1 40 C A 250
Rated operational current in category AC-3 (440 V max) A 150
Number of poles
Weight
3 4 5
CR1 F500
6 7 8
CR1 BP33
501614_1
9 10
275 185 350 265 500 400 700 500 1000 630 800 750 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1250 1000 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 2000 1500 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 2750 1800 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 (1) Standard control circuit voltages: see page opposite. Reference : pages 5/250 to 5/259 Dimensions : pages 5/260 to 5/264
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 1
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
CR1 F150pp CR1 F1504pp CR1 F185pp CR1 F1854pp CR1 F265pp CR1 F2654pp CR1 F400pp CR1 F4004pp CR1 F500pp CR1 F5004pp CR1 F630pp CR1 F6304pp CR1 BL31p12 CR1 BL31p21 CR1 BL31p30 CR1 BL32p12 CR1 BL32p21 CR1 BL32p30 CR1 BL33p12 CR1 BL33p21 CR1 BL33p30 CR1 BL34p12 CR1 BL34p21 CR1 BL34p30 CR1 BM31p12 CR1 BM31p21 CR1 BM31p30 CR1 BM32p12 CR1 BM32p21 CR1 BM32p30 CR1 BM33p12 CR1 BM33p21 CR1 BM33p30 CR1 BM34p12 CR1 BM34p21 CR1 BM34p30 CR1 BP31p12 CR1 BP31p21 CR1 BP31p30 CR1 BP32p12 CR1 BP32p21 CR1 BP32p30 CR1 BP33p12 CR1 BP33p21 CR1 BP33p30 CR1 BP34p12 CR1 BP34p21 CR1 BP34p30 CR1 BR31p12 CR1 BR31p21 CR1 BR31p30 CR1 BR32p12 CR1 BR32p21 CR1 BR32p30 CR1 BR33p12 CR1 BR33p21 CR1 BR33p30 CR1 BR34p12 CR1 BR34p21 CR1 BR34p30
kg 3.500 3.800 4.600 5.400 7.400 8.500 9.100 10.200 11.300 12.900 18.600 21.500 32.000 32.000 32.000 45.000 45.000 45.000 58.000 58.000 58.000 72.000 72.000 72.000 31.000 31.000 31.000 44.000 44.000 44.000 57.000 57.000 57.000 71.000 71.000 71.000 41.000 41.000 41.000 65.000 65.000 65.000 94.000 94.000 94.000 120.000 120.000 120.000 52.000 52.000 52.000 85.000 85.000 85.000 129.000 129.000 129.000 160.000 160.000 160.000
501613_1
5/250
References
TeSys contactors
Accessories
Accessories for contactors CR1F

Description
501377_1
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts Time delay auxiliary contacts Contact blocks with protected terminals for 3-pole contactors (for mounting on contactors with closed arc chamber) Power terminal protection shrouds LADN
Number of contacts or shrouds (1) (1) Set of 2 blocks
For use on CR1F CR1F CR1F150 and CR1F185
Reference LADN (1) LADp (1) LA9F103
Weight kg 0.050 0.060 0.300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Set of 6 shrouds for 3-pole contactors
CR1F150 and CR1F185 CR1F265 to CR1F500 CR1F630 CR1F1504 and CR1F1854 CR1F2654 to CR1F5004 CR1F6304
LA9F702 LA9F703 LA9F704 LA9F707 LA9F708 LA9F709 Reference See pages 5/252 and 2/253
0.250 0.250 0.250 0.300 0.300 0.300
501616_1
Set of 8 shrouds for 4-pole contactors
LA9F103 Description
501617_1
Application For assembly of reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs
Mechanical interlock and power connections
Accessories for contactors CR1B

Description Application Reference Mechanical interlock For vertical assembly of EZ2LB0601 with mounting reversing contactors and accessories (3) changeover contactor pairs 1.620 Kit containing 2 For mounting on LA9B103 bar mounting brackets 120 or 150 mm centres (1) For maximum number per contactor and complete reference, see page 5/123. (2) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 48 110 125 127 220 230 240 250 380 400 415 440 500 Weight kg 1.560
LA9F70p
501618_1
For contactors CR1F

a 50/60 Hz a 400 Hz c c low consumption E7 E7 E7 EZ7 F7 F7 F7 FZ7 G7 G7 G7 GZ7 M7 M7 M7 MZ7 M7 M7 M7 U7 Q7 Q7 N7
For contactors CR1B
a 50400 Hz c
F G M M U Q V N R S FD GD MD UD UCD RD SD (3) Positive mechanical interlocking between 2 vertically mounted contactors of identical or different ratings. Connecting rods and cranks assembled on right-hand sides, crank pins on the pole side. Vertical fixing centre distance between the two contactors: 600 mm.
EZ2LB0601
10
Selection : pages 5/241 to 5/245 Reference : pages 5/250 to 5/259 Dimensions : pages 5/260 to 5/264 Schemes : pages 5/266 and 5/267
5/251
Mounting
TeSys contactors
Components for assembling reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs CR1F Horizontally or vertically mounted
1 2 3

Reversing contactors LA9Fp976
L1 L2 L3
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type: CR1F150 CR1F185 CR1F265 CR1F400 CR1F500 CR1F630
LA9Fp970
3 1/L3
5 1/L2
7 1/L1
1 2/L1
3 2/L2
5 2/L3
1N
A1
7 N 8
2N
3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs LA9Fp977 or LA9Fp982
A1
A1
A2 E1
A2 E1
A2 E1
L1
L2
Vertically mounted
LA9FF4F LA9FG4G Assembly A LA9FH4H LA9FJ4J LA9FK4K LA9FL4L Assembly C
4 5 6 7 8 9
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating, type: CR1F150 CR1F185 CR1 F265 CR1F400 CR1F500 CR1 F630
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings, type: CR1F150 CR1 F185 CR1F265 CR1F400 CR1F500 CR1F630
LA9FG4F
Assembly A
LA9FH4F LA9FJ4F LA9FK4F LA9FL4F LA9FH4G LA9FJ4G LA9FK4G LA9FL4G
Assembly B
LA9FJ4H LA9FK4H LA9FL4H LA9FK4J LA9FL4J LA9FK4K
Assembly C
Reversers assembled using 3 contactors of identical or different ratings
LA9Fp4p4p
CR1 F500
F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630 F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630 F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630
Warning: the contactor ratings must be in decreasing size from top to bottom.
CR1 F265
10
CR1 F185
5/252
L3
A2 E1
A1
References
TeSys contactors
Components for assembling reversing contactors and changeover contactor pairs CR1F
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of identical rating

Contactor type Set of power connections 3-pole Reference For assembly of 3-pole reversing contactors for motor control (1) 4-pole Reference LA9FF977 LA9FG977 LA9FH977 LA9FJ977 LA9FK977 LA9FL977 Weight kg 0.600 0.780 1.500 2.100 2.350 3.800 0.460 0.610 1.200 1.800 2.300 3.400 Mechanical interlock Kit reference Weight kg 0.060 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150 0.345 0.350 1.060 1.200 1.200 1.220 0.060 0.060 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.150 0.345 0.350 1.060 1.200 1.200 1.220
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CR1F150 CR1F185 CR1F265 CR1F400 CR1F500 CR1F630 CR1F150 CR1F185 CR1F265 CR1F400 CR1F500 CR1F630 LA9FF976 LA9FG976 LA9FH976 LA9FJ976 LA9FK976 LA9FL976 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) LA9FF982 LA9FG982 LA9FH982 LA9FJ982 LA9FK982 LA9FL982 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) LA9FF970 LA9FG970 LA9FJ970 LA9FJ970 LA9FJ970 LA9FL970 LA9FF4F LA9FG4G LA9FH4H LA9FJ4J LA9FK4K LA9FL4L LA9FF970 LA9FG970 LA9FJ970 LA9FJ970 LA9FJ970 LA9FL970 LA9FF4F LA9FG4G LA9FH4H LA9FJ4J LA9FK4K LA9FL4L
Vertically mounted
For assembly of 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
CR1F1504 CR1F1854 CR1F2654 CR1F4004 CR1F5004 CR1F6304 CR1F1504 CR1F1854 CR1F2654 CR1F4004 CR1F5004 CR1F6304
Vertically mounted
Reversers assembled using 2 contactors of different ratings

Contactor type At bottom At top
For assembly of 3 or 4-pole changeover contactor pairs
Vertically mounted (3)

CR1F150 or F1504 CR1F185 or F1854 CR1F265 or F2654 CR1F400 or F4004 CR1F500 or F5004 CR1F630 or F6304 CR1F185 or F1854 CR1F265 or F2654 CR1F400 or F4004 CR1F500 or F5004 CR1F630 or F6304 CR1F265 or F2654 CR1F400 or F4004 CR1F500 or F5004 CR1F630 or F6304 CR1F400 or F4004 CR1F500 or F5004 CR1F630 or F6304 CR1F500 or F5004 CR1 F630 or F6304 Using 3 contactors (vertically mounted) of identical or different ratings
Mechanical interlock Kit reference Weight kg LA9FG4F LA9FH4F LA9FJ4F LA9FK4F LA9FL4F LA9FH4G LA9FJ4G LA9 FK4G LA9FL4G LA9FJ4H LA9FK4H LA9FL4H LA9FK4J LA9FL4J LA9FL4K Mechanical interlock Kit reference (4) LA9Fp4p4p 0.350 0.870 0.930 0.940 0.940 0.860 0.940 0.940 0.950 1.130 1.130 1.140 1.200 1.210 1.210
For assembly of 3 or 4-pole reversing contactors
The contactor ratings must be in decreasing size from top to bottom. (1) A 3-pole reversing contactor for motor control can be converted into a 3-pole changeover contactor pair by removing the upper connecting links. (2) All power connections are to be made by the customer. (3) With identical or different number of poles. Power connections to be made by the customer. (4) Complete the reference by replacing the first dot with the code for the upper contactor, the second dot with the code for the middle contactor and the third dot with the code for the bottom contactor. Contactors CR1F150 CR1F185 CR1F265 CR1F400 CR1F500 CR1F630 Code F G H J K L Example: mechanical interlock for reversing contactor made up of 3 different contactors: CR1F500 top, CR1F26 middle and CR1F185 bottom: LA9FK4H4G. Illustrations : page 5/252 Dimensions : pages 5/260 and 5/263 Schemes : pages 5/266 and 5/267
5/253
References
TeSys contactors
Coils for contactors CR1F
Standard coils
1 2 3 4 5 6
LX0FH009
501471_1 501470_1
Usual voltages 50400 Hz 50 Hz, 60 Hz or c V V 48 110 127 208 220/230 240 380/400 415
Resistance of winding at q = 20 C Latching Unlatching W 1.98 9.35 11.61 23.50 37.55 45.16 114.10 139.50 W 230.8 1453 1788 4098 5139 6544 12 447 16 717
Reference
Voltage code
Weight
kg LX0FF005 LX0FF006 LX0FF007 LX0FF020 LX0FF008 LX0FF009 LX0FF010 LX0FF011 E7 F7 G7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440
For contactors CR1F150
LX0FF009

48 110 127 208 220/230 240 380/400 415 1,42 6.92 8.45 21.30 26.27 32.95 82.29 102.30 220 1339 1676 3169 4729 4729 11 885 14 305 LX0FG005 LX0FG006 LX0FG007 LX0FG020 LX0FG008 LX0FG009 LX0FG010 LX0FG011 E7 F7 G7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 0,560 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.560 0.560

48 110 127 208 220/230 240 380/400 415 1.34 6.90 8.56 20.20 25.77 33.03 78.39 102.9 183.4 1031 1325 2654 4090 5002 11 803 15 006 LX0FH005 LX0FH006 LX0FH007 LX0FH020 LX0FH008 LX0FH009 LX0FH010 LX0FH011 E7 F7 G7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780 0.780

48 110 127 208 220/230 240 380/400 415 1.32 8.09 9.79 24.40 30.14 37.02 94.80 121.10 90.5 813 1027 2643 3309 4074 9380 11 763 LX0FJ005 LX0FJ006 LX0-FJ007 LX0FJ020 LX0FJ008 LX0FJ009 LX0FJ010 LX0FJ011 E7 F7 G7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
7 8 9 10

48 110 127 208 220/230 240 380/400 415 1.57 7.53 9.56 23.60 28.81 35.67 89.56 112.06 166 916 1159 2981 3733 4595 10 570 13 256 LX0FK005 LX0FK006 LX0FK007 LX0FK020 LX0FK008 LX0FK009 LX0FK010 LX0FK011 E7 F7 G7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220

48 110 127 208 220/230 240 380/400 415 0.87 5.20 6.45 20.20 25.36 25.36 60.95 77.97 204 1423 1830 2961 4603 5658 10 676 13 003 LX0FL005 LX0FL006 LX0FL007 LX0FL020 LX0FL008 LX0FL009 LX0FL010 LX0FL011 E7 F7 G7 L7 M7 U7 Q7 N7 1.460 1.460 1.460 1.460 1.460 1.460 1.460 1.460
5/254
TeSys contactors
Coils with two windings with common point, allowing the use of two separate power sources for latching and unlatching.
Coil voltages at 50Hz, 60Hz, 400 Hz or c Latching Unlatching V V 220 24 Resistance of winding at q = 20 C Latching Unlatching W W 29.5 39.5
501472_1
Special coils
Reference
Voltage code
Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
kg LX0FF224 MB7 0.440
For contactors CR1F150 For contactors CR1F185

220 24 26.5 19 LX0FG224 MB7 0.560

LX0FF030 220 24 26 29.5 LX0FH224 MB7 0.780

220 24 30 23 LX0FJ224 MB7 1.120

220 24 29 26 LX0FK224 MB7 1.220

220 24 26 41 LX0FL224 MB7 1.460
Coils with low inrush consumption

Usual voltages c V 48 110 127 220 Resistance of winding at q = 20 C Latching Unlatching W W 4.56 22.37 35.54 89.85 140.56 706.44 1086.36 3342.51 Reference Voltage code Weight
kg LX0FF055 LX0FF056 LX0FF057 LX0FF058 EZ7 FZ7 GZ7 MZ7 0.440 0.440 0.440 0.440

48 110 127 220 5.19 25.50 32.75 102.44 106.54 536.26 732.64 2378.62 LX0FG055 LX0FG056 LX0FG057 LX0FG058 EZ7 FZ7 GZ7 MZ7 0.570 0.570 0.570 0.570

48 110 127 220 5.19 25 30.98 97.89 74.26 364.61 458.45 1344.46 LX0FH055 LX0FH056 LX0FH057 LX0FH058 EZ7 FZ7 GZ7 MZ7 0.800 0.800 0.800 0.800

48 110 127 220 5.05 25.39 31.86 98.19 36.36 171.49 221.20 648.79 LX0FJ055 LX0FJ056 LX0FJ057 LX0FJ058 EZ7 FZ7 GZ7 MZ7 1.150 1.150 1.150 1.150

48 110 127 220 4.42 22.74 28.25 85.12 41 193.36 313.60 918.68 LX0FK055 LX0FK056 LX0FK057 LX0FK058 EZ7 FZ7 GZ7 MZ7 1.270 1.270 1.270 1.270

48 110 127 220 3.94 19.36 25.39 74.44 59.17 365.33 452.27 1071.43 LX0FL055 LX0FL056 LX0FL057 LX0FL058 EZ7 FZ7 GZ7 MZ7 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500
5/255
References
TeSys contactors
Coils for contactors CR1B
Coils with TC treatment (associated accessories, see page opposite)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
501473_1
Usual voltages c a 50400 Hz V 110125 220 250 V 110120 220240 380400 415440
Resistance at q = 20 C W 19.7 25.2 77.2 94 128 197 257
Reference
Weight
kg WB1KB140 WB1KB134 WB1KB136 WB1KB139 WB1KB125 WB1KB126 WB1KB138 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
For contactors CR1Bp31

WB1KBppp 110 125 220 250 110 120127 220/230 240 380400 415440 9.6 11.4 19.7 32.5 49.7 77.2 128 160 WB1KB133 WB1KB121 WB1KB140 WB1KB124 WB1KB122 WB1KB136 WB1KB125 WB1KB137 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120

110 125 220 250 110 120127 240 380415 440 7.2 9.6 11.4 32.5 61 94 128 WB1KB123 WB1KB133 WB1KB121 WB1KB124 WB1KB135 WB1KB139 WB1KB125 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120

110 125 250 110 120127 220/230 240 380 400440 5.8 7.2 11.4 25.2 32.5 49.7 77.2 94 WB1KB132 WB1KB123 WB1KB121 WB1KB134 WB1KB124 WB1KB122 WB1KB136 WB1KB139 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120 1.120
Coils with TH treatment (associated accessories, see page opposite) Add suffix TH to the references selected above. Example: WB1KB140TH.
5/256
TeSys contactors
Coils for contactors CR1B
Accessories for use with coils (1)

Coils (TC or TH) Additional resistors (2) R1 W
501474_1
Reference
R2 W
Reference
Automatic coil cut-out contact (3) Nb Reference
Rectifier (4) Reference
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

WB1KB140 WB1KB134 WB1KB136 WB1KB139 DR2SC0220 WB1KB125 WB1KB126
501475_1
68 68 220 270 330 470 1000
DR2SC0068 47 DR2SC0068 68 DR2SC0220 180 DR2SC0270 220 DR2SC0330 270 DR2SC0470 470 DR2SC1000 470
DR2SC0047 DR2SC0068 DR2SC0180 DR2SC0220 DR2SC0270 DR2SC0470 DR2SC0470
2 2 2 2 3 3 3
WB1KB138
ZC4GM2 or ZC4GM8 ZC4GM2 or ZC4GM8 ZC4 GM2 or ZC4GM8 ZC4GM2 or ZC4GM8 ZC4GM2 or ZC4GM8 ZC4GM2 or ZC4GM8 ZC4GM2 or ZC4GM8 PR4FB0011 PR4FB0010 PR4FB0009 PR4 FB0007 PR4FB0007 PR4FB0006 PR4FB0005 PR4FB0004
DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1S DR5TE1S

WB1KB133 WB1KB121 WB1KB140 ZC4GM2 WB1KB124 WB1KB122 WB1KB136 10 47 100 120 220 330 470 680 DR2SC0010 33 DR2SC0047 39 DR2SC0100 47 DR2SC0120 120 DR2SC0220 150 DR2SC0330 220 DR2SC0470 470 DR2SC0680 560 DR2SC0033 DR2SC0039 DR2SC0047 DR2SC0120 DR2SC0150 DR2SC0220 DR2SC0470 DR2SC0560 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1S DR5TE1S
501476_1
WB1KB125 WB1KB137

WB1KB123 WB1KB133 WB1KB121 WB1KB124 WB1KB135 WB1KB139 WB1KB125 39 47 56 180 270 470 680 DR2SC0039 27 DR2SC0047 39 DR2SC0056 47 DR2-SC0180 120 DR2SC0270 270 DR2SC0470 390 DR2-SC0680 470 DR2SC0027 DR2SC0039 DR2SC0047 DR2SC0120 DR2SC0270 DR2SC0390 DR2SC0470 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PR4FB0012 PR4FB0011 PR4FB0010 PR4FB0008 PR4FB0006 PR4FB0005 PR4FB0004 DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1S DR5TE1S

WB1KB132 PR4FB0014 WB1KB123 WB1KB121 WB1KB134
501477_1
33 47 56 150 180 270 390 560
DR2SC0033 27 DR2SC0047 33 DR2SC0056 56 DR2SC0150 120 DR2-SC0180 150 DR2SC0270 220 DR2SC0390 390 DR2SC0560 470
DR2SC0027 DR2SC0033 DR2SC0056 DR2SC0120 DR2SC0150 DR2SC0220 DR2SC0390 DR2SC0470
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
PR4FB0014 DR5TE1U PR4FB0012 PR4FB0010 PR4FB0008 PR4FB0007 PR4FB0007 PR4FB0006 PR4FB0005 DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1U DR5TE1S DR5TE1S
WB1KB124 WB1KB122 WB1KB136 DR5TE1U WB1KB139
(1) For connections, see page 5/267. (2) Weight of resistors DR2SCpppp : 0.030 kg. (3) Weight of automatic coil cut-out contacts: ZC4GMp : 0.030 kg and PR4FB00pp : 0.600 kg. (4) Weight of rectifier DR5TE1p : 0.100 kg. The rectifier is for use on a.c. only.
5/257
References
TeSys contactors
Accessories and replacement parts for contactors CR1F
References
1 2
501478_1
Description Complete sets of contacts for 3 or 4 poles (1)
For contactor 3-pole CR1F150 CR1F185 CR1F265 CR1F400
Reference LA5FF431 LA5FG431 LA5FH431 LA5F400803 LA5 F500803 LA5F630803 LA5FF441 LA5FG441 LA5FH441 LA5F400804 LA5F500804 LA5F630804 LA5F15050 LA5F18550 LA5F26550 LA5F40050 LA5F50050 LA5F63050 LA5F150450 LA5F185450 LA5F265450 LA5F400450 LA5F500450 LA5F630450
Weight kg 0.270 0.350 0.660 0.660 0.660 0.660 0.360 0.465 0.880 0.465 0.465 0.465 0.490 0.670 0.920 1.300 1.850 3.150 0.660 0.910 1.220 1.740 2.500 4.200
LA5FG431
CR1F500 CR1F630 4-pole CR1F1504 CR1F1854 CR1F2654 CR1F4004
3 4
501479_1
CR1F5004 CR1F6304 Arc chambers 3-pole CR1F150 CR1F185 CR1F265 CR1F400 CR1F500 CR1F630
5 6
LA5F40050 4-pole
CR1F1504 CR1F1854 CR1F2654 CR1F4004 CR1F5004 CR1F6304
7 8 9 10
(1) Set containing the following (per pole): 2 fixed contacts, 1 moving contact , 2 deflectors, 1back-plate, clamping screws and washers.
5/258
TeSys contactors
Accessories and replacement parts for contactors CR1B
Description
501480_1
For contactors CR1BL CR1BM CR1BP
Sets of contacts (1 moving contact, 1 fixed contact)
Number of sets required per pole 1 1 2 3 Composition 1 N/O contact - normal 1 N/C contact - normal 1 N/O contact - gold flashed 1 N/C contact - gold flashed No. of parts required 1 2 1 per pole 1 per pole
Unit reference of set PA1LB80 PA1LB80 PA1LB80 PA1LB80 Reference PA1LB75 PA1LB76 PA1LB89 PA1LB50 PA1LB50 PA1PB50 PA1RB50 ZC4GM1 ZC4GM2 ZC4GM9 ZC4GM8 PR4FB00pp (1) PV1FA80 PN1FB50 ET1KB50 Reference DV1RT292 DV1RT292 DV1RC201 DV1RC155
Weight kg 0.420 0.420 0.420 0.420 Weight kg 0.220 0.200 0.120 3.700 3.700 6.200 8.500 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.600 0.035 0.220 10.600 Weight kg 0.050 0.050 0.020 0.020
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PA1LB80 (PA1LB76 + PA1LB75)
CR1BR Description Moving contact only (for one finger) Fixed contact only (for one finger) Blow-out horn only (for 1 finger) Arc chambers (for a single pole) PA1LB89 For contactors All ratings All ratings All ratings CR1BL CR1BM
501481_1
ZC4GM1
501482_1
CR1BP CR1BR Auxiliary contact blocks All ratings All ratings All ratings All ratings N/C pole for automatic cut-out coil Set of moving and fixed contacts for N/C pole Arc chamber for N/C pole Electromagnet All ratings All ratings All ratings All ratings For contactors CR1B (1 pole) CR1B (2, 3 or 4 poles) CR1BL, BM or BP CR1BR
501483_1
PA1LB50
Description Return springs for moving part of electromagnet N/O pole springs
501484_1
(1) Reference to be completed, see page 5/257.
PR4FB004pp
5/259
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Magnetic latching contactors CR1F
CR1F150 to F500
1 2
Common side view
CR1F150, F185, F265
S1
CR1F400, F500
(1)
=
F150 M8x25 F185 M8x25 F265 M10x35

=
44,5 6xM10x35 8x8,5
3x6,5
= =
X1
b b2
b1
J J1
=
X1
=
=
Z
3
CR1
G1 G
= Y
23,5 Q P a P Q1 f
G G1
L c
P a
Q1 f
CR1
4 5 6 7 8 9
F150 F185 F265 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 208.5 201.5 244.5 a 163.5 201.5 168.5 b 170 170 174 174 203 203 b1 137 137 137 137 145 145 b2 301 301 305 305 370 370 c 171 171 181 181 213 213 f 131 131 130 130 147 147 G 106 143 111 151 142 190 G1 80 80 80 80 96 96 J 106 106 106 106 106 106 J1 120 120 120 120 120 120 L 107 107 113.5 113.5 141 141 M 150 150 154 154 178 178 P 40 40 40 40 48 48 Q 26 26 29 29 39 34 55.5 59.5 59.5 66.5 66.5 Q1 57.5 S 20 20 20 20 25 25 S1 27 27 34 34 38 38 Y 44 44 38.5 30.5 30.5 21.5 15.5 Z 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 15.5 f = minimum distance required for coil removal. X1: Minimum electrical clearance according to operational voltage and breaking capacity. Voltage in V 200500 10 CR1F150 CR1F185 10 CR1F265 10 (1) Power terminal protection shroud. 6601000 15 15 15
F400 3P a 213 G min. 66 b 206 b2 375 c 219 f 146 G supplied 80 G max. 102 G1 supplied 170 G1 min. 156 G1 max. 192 J 12 L 145 M 181 P 48 Q 43 Q1 74 S 25
4P 261 66 206 375 219 146 80 150 170 156 240 60 145 181 48 43 74 25
F500 3P 233 66 238 400 232 150 80 120 170 156 210 32 146 208 55 47 77 30
4P 288 66 238 400 232 150 140 175 230 156 265 27 146 208 55 47 77 30
f = minimum distance required for coil removal. X1: Minimum electrical clearance according to operational voltage and breaking capacity. Voltage in V 200500 6601000 CR1F400 15 20 CR1F500 15 20
CR1F630
72 40 64 6xM12x45
=
(1)
4x10,5
10
60,5
J1
155 197 255

80 a
80
Q1
181 (2)
CR1F630 3P 4P a 309 389 G supplied 180 240 G min. 100 150 G max. 195 275 J1 61 81 Q 60 60 Q1 89 89 X1: Min. electrical clearance according to operational voltage and breaking capacity. Voltage in V X1 200500 20 6901000 30 (1) Power terminal protection shroud. (2) Minimum distance required for coil removal.
X1
280 304 464
264
X1
5/260
180
120 180
Mounting
TeSys contactors
CR1F150F265
Panel mounted On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1PA, PB, PC On rails DZ5MB on 120 mm centres
(1)
3x6,5
=
1 2 3
110
G
DZ5 MF5
110
110
AF1 EA6
= J c G
= J1
c
F265 213 213 96 96 44.5 68.5 61.5 85.5 CR1 c G F150 171 171 80 80 F185 181 181 80 80 F265 213 213 96 96 CR1 c G
15
F150 171 171 80 80 F185 181 181 80 80 F265 213 213 96 96
F150 F185 3P 171 181 4P 171 181 G 3P 80 80 4P 80 80 J 3P 26.5 29 4P 45 49 J1 3P 57 59.5 4P 75.5 79.5 (1) Power terminal protection shroud.
CR1 c
3P 4P 3P 4P
3P 4P 3P 4P
120
4 5
CR1F150F650
On 2 notched uprights AM1ECppp
AM1 EC200
AF1 CD081 + AF1 VC820 (2) AF1 CD101+ AF1 VC10
(1)
AF1 CD061+ AF1 VA618 AF1 VA618 M6
AF1 CD061
AF1 VA618 M6 LA9 F100
AF1 CD081+ AF1 VC820
6 7
110
120
10,5
25
G AM1 EC200
35
G AM1 EC200 G3
G1 G2
180
M6
8,5
F150 F185 F265 F400 F500 F630 3P 171 181 213 213 226 250 4P 171 181 213 213 226 250 G (M6) 3P 80 80 96 4P 80 80 96 G1 ( 8.5) 3P 80 80 4P 80 140 G2 ( 10.5) 3P 180 4P 240 (1) AF1CDppp or AF1VAppp. (2) This AM1EC200 upright is required when G2 or G3 is greater than 700 mm (please consult your Regional Sales Office).
CR1 c
8 9 10
5/261
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors 2 x CR1F150F265
Reversing contactors 2 x CR1F400F630

1 2
3x6,5
P1
3x6,5
=
8x8,5 (1)
P1
8x8,5 (1)
= 120 (2) = = 180 =
F500 485 595 238 238 80 140 170 230 156 156 84.5 79.5 66 66 39.5 34.5 112 112
110/120
= J1 G1
= J a
= G1
= J1
J1 J3
G G1
J J2 a
G G1
J1 J3
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Selection : pages 5/241 to 5/245 2 x CR1 a 3P 4P b 3P 4P G1 3P 4P J 3P 4P J1 3P 4P P1 3P 4P
F150 345 422 170 170 80 80 71 111 57 75.5 71 71
F185 357 437 174 174 80 80 78 118 59.5 79.5 78 78
F265 425 521 203 203 96 96 109 157 61.5 85.5 100 100
3P 4P b 3P 4P G 3P 4P G1 3P 4P J 3P 4P J1 3P 4P J2 3P 4P J3 3P 4P P1 3P 4P (1) Except F630: 4 x 10.5. (2) Except F630: 180.
2 x CR1 a
F400 446 542 206 206 80 80 170 170 157 157 64.5 112.5 67 67 19.5 67.5 107 107
F630 636 796 304 304 180 240 139 139 68.5 68.5 137 137
5/262
TeSys contactors
Reversing contactors
Vertically mounted with mechanical interlock LA9Fppp. 2 contactors CR1F of identical or different ratings (CR1F150F630), see pages 5/252 and 5/253. Assembly A Assembly B Assembly C
1
G1
F330 }120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630
J3 (1)
80
12,5 (5) (1)
G5
G1
12,5 (5) (1)

F330 }120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630
G5
120
(3) = =
H
(6) = =
H
(6)
2 3 4 5
120
180
(5) 9 12,5
= = (4)
J4
80 J2
J4
80 J2
G4
G2 J2
(1) Mechanical interlock shaft. (2) For assembly of contactors of different ratings only. (3) 3 x 6.5 mm for CR1F150F265. (4) 3 x 6.5 mm for CR1F265. (5) Mechanical interlock guide bracket. (6) 4 x 8.5 mm for CR1F400, F500 or 4 x 10.5 mm. Assembly type A B LA9F F4F G4F G4G H4F J4F G1 3P 96 80 4P 96 80 G2 3P 4P G3 3P 0 3 0 21 45 4P 0 4 0 27 26 G4 3P 4P G5 3P 60 83 4P 83 83 H min. 200 210 220 240 250 max. 310 300 310 380 380 H1 min. 80 90 100 110 80 max. 190 180 190 250 210 J1 3P 133 134 134 149.5 137 4P 145 146 146 164.5 185 J2 3P 133 133 134 183 133 4P 145 145 146 145 145 J3 3P 48.5 53 53 4P 67 73 73 53 48.5 48.5 J4 3P 48.5 54 4P 67 69 73 67 67 (7) In this case, G4 is greater than G5.
K4F 80 140 45 26 83 83 270 380 100 210 157 212 183 145 48.5 67
L4F 180 240 35 17 74 74 310 380 140 210 241 321 133 145 48.5 67
H4G 96 96 19 23 60 83 250 380 120 250 149.5 164.5 134 146 53 73
J4G 80 80 42 22 83 83 250 380 90 220 137 185 134 146 53 73
K4G 80 140 42 22 83 83 270 380 110 220 157 212 134 146 53 73
L4G 180 240 33 13 74 74 310 380 150 220 241 321 134 146 53 73
C H4H 96 96 96 96 0 0 60 83 60 83 250 380 130 260 149.5 164.5 142.5 164.5
J4H 80 80 96 96 23 0 60 83 83 83 260 380 110 230 137 185 149.5 164.5
K4H 80 140 96 96 23 0 60 83 83 83 280 380 130 230 157 212 149.5 164.5
L4H 180 240 96 96 14 9 (7) 60 83 74 74 330 380 170 220 24 321 149.5 164.5
J4J 80 80 80 80 0 0 83 83 83 83 260 380 60 200 137 185 137 185
K4J 80 140 80 80 0 0 83 83 83 83 280 380 100 200 157 212 137 185
L4J 180 240 80 80 9 (7) 9 (7) 83 83 74 74 325 380 140 195 241 321 137 185
K4K 80 140 80 140 0 0 83 83 83 83 300 380 120 200 157 212 157 212
L4K 180 240 80 140 9 (7) 9 (7) 83 83 74 74 345 380 160 195 244 321 157 212
(1)
(3) = =
(1)
(6)
F330 }120 F265 F400 F500 180 F630

L4L 180 240 180 240 0 0 74 74 74 74 380 380 200 200 241 321 241 312
(1)
(3)
H1
H1
G3 (2)
H1
J1
9 G3(2) J1
(4)
G3(2)
J1
6 7 8 9 10
5/263
Dimensions
TeSys contactors
Magnetic latching contactors CR1B
Contactors CR1B
Single-pole, 2-pole or 3-pole

4-pole

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Common side view
185 R
290
350
15
350
15
15
c 85 b c
260
365
44
N
30 15
P M L
Q1 30
30
P M1
51 M2 L
Q1 30
CR1BL 1P 2P 50 50 59 59 16 16 345 445 285 385 121 121 100 100 100 100 122 122 10 10 30 30 9 9 3P 50 59 16 540 480 121 100 100 122 10 30 9 4P 50 59 16 760 308 392 121 100 100 122 10 30 9 CR1BM 1P 2P 63 63 55 55 20 20 345 445 285 385 125 125 100 100 100 100 157 157 17 17 30 30 11 11 3P 63 55 20 540 480 125 100 100 157 17 30 11 4P 63 55 20 760 308 392 125 100 100 157 17 30 11 CR1BP 1P 2P 100 100 55 55 20 20 385 540 325 480 125 125 150 150 110 110 173 173 20 20 60 60 11 11 3P 100 55 20 760 700 125 150 110 173 20 60 11 4P 100 55 20 1065 455 550 125 150 110 173 20 60 11 CR1BR 1P 2P 125 125 50 50 25 25 445 635 385 575 130 130 195 195 123 123 173 173 20 20 60 60 11 11 3P 125 50 25 885 825 130 195 123 173 20 60 11 4P 125 50 25 1065 455 550 130 195 123 173 20 60 11
a b c L M M1 M2 N P Q1 R S T

Values X1 and X2 are given for a breaking capacity of 10 In (3-phase a current). 3-phase a voltage 380-415-440 V X1 X2 500 V X1 X2 600 V X1 X2 1000 V X1 X2 CR1BL 100 150 100 150 150 200 200 250 CR1BM 100 150 100 150 150 200 200 250 CR1BP 150 200 150 220 200 250 200 250 CR1BR 200 250 200 250 200 250 250 300
X2
X1
Mechanical interlock for assembly of vertically mounted reversing contactors EZ2LB0601
A = (E112) 488
E = 600
5/264
Adjustment characteristics
TeSys contactors
Magnetic latching contactors CR1B
501391_1
Complete pole
1
Adjustment of pick-up travel and pull-in travel

E e
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 3
1 2 3 4
Moving circuit Coil Moving circuit Return spring
N/O pole adjustment

1
F
3
1 2 3 4 5
Fixed contact Moving contact Pull-in gap adjustment Adjustment of application force Pole spring
4 5
N/C automatic coil cut-out pole adjustment

1 b
F
2
3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
Fixed contact Moving contact Opening gap adjustment Adjustment of application force Pole spring
7 8
a.c. or d.c. supply with economy resistor (and rectifier on a)

Contactor type Electromagnet (EB5KB50) Coil (WB1KB) N/O power pole (PA1) N/C automatic coil cut-out pole (PR4) Pick-up travel (E) Pull-in travel (e) Pull-in voltage Drop-out voltage Application force (F) to contact per pole Application force (F) Opening gap (b) with electromagnet closed mm mm V V daN daN mm CR1BL 30 10 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 30 0.9 3.5 0.5 CR1BM 30 10 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 30 0.9 3.5 0.5 CR1BP 30 10 0.75 Uc 0.30.5 Uc 30 (1) 0.9 3.5 0.5 CR1BR 30 10 0.30.5 Uc 30 (2) 0.9 3.5 0.5
9 10
(1) Each pole has 2 contacts: the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts. (2) Each pole has 3 contacts: the force must be applied evenly to each of these contacts. Selection : pages 5/241 to 5/245 Characteristics : pages 5/246 to 5/249 References : pages 5/250 to 5/259 Schemes : pages 5/266 and 5/267
5/265
Schemes
TeSys contactors
Contactors CR1F
3-pole
3/L2 5/L3 1/L1 A1
4-pole
3/L2 A1 1/L1 5/L3 T3/6 7/L4 T4/8
1
1 N/O LADN10 (1)
43 NO 43/NO
A2 E1
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
A2 E1
T1/2
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/123)

1 N/C LADN01 (1)
41/NC (92)
1 N/O + 1 N/C LADN11

61/NC 53/NO
2 N/O LADN20
53/NO 63/NO
2 N/C LADN02
51/NC 61/NC
T2/4

53/NO 61/NC 83/NO 71/NC 72
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(94)
62
42 (91)
52
44 (93)
54
54
62
54
62
64
53/NO

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
4 N/O LADN40
63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
4 N/C LADN04
51/NC 71/NC 61/NC 81/NC
53/NO
53/NO
73/NO 74
54
62
76
52
72
82
88
82
54
54
62
62
62
72
64
74
1 N/O +1 N/C LADN11P

13/NO 21/NC
54
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts conforming to standard EN 50012 (References: page 5/123)

1 N/O +1 N/C LADN11G
43/NO 31/NC
84
2 N/O + 2 N/C LADN22P

13/NO 43/NO 21/NC 31/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C LADN22G

53/NO 63/NO 31/NC 41/NC
22
32
22
14
32
44
32
42
54
14
Front mounting add-on contact blocks - Dust and damp protected instantaneous auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/123)
2 N/O (24-50 V) LA1DX20
53/NO 63/NO
2 N/O (5-24 V) LA1DY20

53/NO 63/NO
44
2 N/O protected (24-50 V) 2 N/O standard LA1DZ40

53/NO 83/NO 63/NO 73/NO
64
2 N/O protected (24-50 V) + 1 N/O + 1 N/C standard LA1DZ31

53/NO 73/NO 61/NC 83/NO
64
74
62
54
64
54
64
54
84
54
74
Time delay auxiliary contacts (References : page 5/123)

On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LADTp
67/NO 55/NC
Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LADRp

57/NO 65/NC
56
58
68
66
56
3-pole reversing contactors 2 x CR1F150F630

L1 L2 L3
4-pole reversing contactors 2 x CR1F1504F6304

1N 1/L3 1/L2 1/L1 2/L1 2/L2 2/L3 2N
68
67/NO
55/NC
On-delay 1 N/C + 1 N/O break before make LADSp
A1
A1
A1
84
A2 E1
A2 E1
A2 E1
L1
L2
L3
Vertically mounted contactors using 2 contactors of identical or different ratings

1/L1 1/L2 1/L3
1/L1 1/L2 1/L3 1N
A1
A2 E1
A2 E1
A1
L3 L2 L1
N L3 L2 L1
A1
A2 E1
A2 E1
A1
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
2/L1
2/L2
2/L3
5/266
2N
A2 E1
A1
84
83/NO
87/NO
61/NC
61/NC
75/NC
2 N/O + 2 N/C of which 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break LADC22
84
Schemes (continued)
TeSys contactors
Contactors CR1B
CR1Bp31p12
A1
CR1Bp31p21
A1
CR1Bp31p30
A1
1 2 3 4
KM1:5
A2
A2
CR1Bp32p12
A1
CR1Bp32p21
A1
CR1Bp32p30
A1
A2
A2
CR1Bp33p12
A1
CR1Bp33p21
A1
CR1Bp33p30
A1
A2
A2
CR1Bp34p12
A1
CR1Bp34p21
A1
CR1Bp34p30
A1
A2
A2
Wiring schemes
Contactors CR1F and CR1B Contactors CR1F with thermal overload relay
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
KM1:5
Connectors CR1B
KM1:1
KM1
A2
A2
A2
A2
F1
21
S2
F1
97
14
R1
KM1
14
13
S1
KM1
A1 96
22
13
13
98
95 2
F1
S2
KM1
(1)
96
98
14
5 6 7 8 9 10
14
97
95
13
A2
KM1:1
(1) automatic coil cut-out contact ZC4GM or PR4FB00pp S1: latching pushbutton S2: unlatching pushbutton

Pushbutton control
Start Latching winding Stop
Scheme of internal circuit
14
M 3a
S1
R2
KM1
13 A2
A1 E1
A1
A2
Switch control
Start/Stop Unlatching winding
E1
Warning: terminal A2 is common to both windings in all cases.
Dimensions : pages 5/264
5/267
Selection guide
Modular equipment
Applications
Control of lighting, heating, hot water systems, ventilation systems and small motors
1 2
Functions GC contactors for standard applications GY Dual tariff contactors
3
Rating 1663 A 1663 A
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Number of 17.5 mm modules (variable, depending on size and number of poles)
13
14
Device type
GC
GY
Pages
5/278
5/292
5/268
Control of lighting heating, hot water systems, ventilation systems and small motors
Direct control of motors
Fuse protection
Motor control and protection
1 2
Impulse relays
Rotary switch disconnectors
Single, 2, 3 or 4-pole fuse carriers, with or without neutral
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
16 A
2580 A
Up to 125 A
0.132 A
2.5
18
2.5
GF 16
VVD, VVE

DF8, DF10, DF14, DF22
GV2 M
5/286
Please consult your Regional Sales Office
4/26
3/50
5/269
Presentation, standards
Modular equipment
Standard contactors TeSys GC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Selection : pages 5/272 to 5/275 Characteristics : pages 5/276 and 5/277
TeSys GC contactors are designed for use in modular panels and enclosures. These contactors feature: b Easy installation v quick clip-on fixing and locking onto 35 mm omega rail, v easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten, captive, pozidrive screw terminals. b Compact size All units have a common depth of 60 mm and width in modules of 17.5 mm (width of one module: 17.5 mm). b User safety v use of materials conforming to strictest fire safety standards, v live parts protected against direct finger contact, v completely safe operation, v state indication on front panel.
Presentation
538862
GC25
Standards
This range of modular contactors has been designed taking into account the requirements of international standard IEC 61095. This standard is specific to Electromagnetic contactors for domestic and similar use. It has very strict requirements, meeting the expectations of users, with regard to the safety of equipment and persons in premises and areas accessible to the public. Conformity with this standard makes it possible to obtain the following quality labels without the need for additional tests: NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, etc. Applications TeSys GC modular contactors are designed for switching all single-phase, 3-phase or 4phase loads up to 100 A. Power switching These contactors have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and commercial premises, hospitals and the home, i.e. wherever switching of a specific supply is required: b lighting, b heating, b ventilation, b motorised shutters or gates.
5/270
Setting-up precautions
Modular equipment
The contactor controls must be bounce free. If not, connect a coil suppression block 1 (GAP 21, 22 or 23) across the coil terminals y 250 V. When several contactors which operate at the same time are mounted side by side, a GAC 5 ventilation 1/2 module 2 must be fitted every 2 contactors.

1 2 3 4 5
It is advisable to mount electronic units at the bottom of the modular panel and to separate them from electromechanical units by a space 3 equal to one module, or by 2 ventilation 1/2 modules (GAC 5).

3
Derating of contactors mounted in a modular enclosure if the temperature within the enclosure is > 40 C
Contactor rating 40 C 16 A 16 A 25 A 25 A 40 A 40 A 63 A 63 A 100 A 100 A (1) Ventilation 1/2 module must be fitted 50 C 14 A 22 A 36 A 57 A 87 A 60 C (1) 13 A 20 A 32 A 50 A 80 A
6 7 8 9 10
5/271
Contactor selection for lighting circuits
Modular equipment
Modular contactors
Lighting (Maximum number of lamps depending on the power of each unit)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 5/276 and 5/277 References : pages 5/278 and 5/279
Presentation of installations according to type of supply

Single-phase circuit, 230 V
N
230V
L1
3-phase circuit, 230 V

L2 L3
230V 230V
L1
The maximum number of lamps which can be operated per phase is equal to the number of lamps in the single phase 230V table divided by 3.
3-phase circuit, 400 V (with neutral)

L1 L2 L3 N
230V
230V
Contactor rating for a single-phase 230 V circuit (single-pole)

Fluorescent lamps with starter Single fitting P (W) IB (A) C (F) Non corrected 20 40 50 80 110 0.39 0.43 0.70 0.80 1.2 20 28 60 90 13 17 35 56 10 15 30 48 7 10 20 32 With parallel correction 20 40 58 80 110 0.19 0.29 0.46 0.57 0.79 5 5 7 7 16 15 20 40 60 15 20 40 60 10 15 30 43 10 15 30 43 5 7 14 20 Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A
Maximum 22 number 30 of lamps 70 100 Twin fitting P (W) IB (A) C (F)
Non corrected 2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58 2 x 80 2 x 140 0.44 0.82 1.34 1.64 2.2 11 16 26 42 7 10 16 25 5 8 13 21 4 6 10 16
230V
The maximum number of lamps which can be operated per phase is equal to the total number of lamps in the singlephase 230 V table.
230V
With series correction 2 x 18 2 x 36 2 x 58 2 x 80 2 x 140 0.26 0.48 0.78 0.96 1.3 18 3.5 4.5 7 9 30 46 80 123 17 25 43 67 10 16 27 42 9 13 22 34 6 10 16 25
Maximum 20 number 30 of lamps 50 75

High pressure mercury vapour lamps Non corrected P (W) IB (A) C (F) 50 80 125 250 400 700 0.6 0.8 1.15 2.15 3.25 5.4 With parallel correction 50 80 125 250 400 700 1000 0.35 0.50 0.7 1.5 2.4 4 5.7 7 8 10 18 25 40 60 2 2 5 7 1 3 5 Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A
Maximum 15 10 8 4 2 1 10 9 9 4 3 number 20 15 10 6 4 2 15 13 10 6 4 of lamps 34 27 20 10 6 4 28 25 20 11 8 53 40 28 15 10 6 43 38 30 17 12 IB : value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage. C : unit capacitance for each lamp. IB and C correspond to values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers
5/272
Contactor selection for lighting circuits (continued)
Modular equipment
Modular contactors
Contactor rating for a single-phase 230 V circuit (single-pole) (continued)

Low pressure sodium vapour lamps Non corrected P (W) IB (A) C (F) 18 35 55 90 135 180 0.35 1.4 1.4 2.1 3.1 3.1 4 9 14 24 5 9 14 24 3 6 9 19 2 4 6 10 2 4 6 10 With parallel correction 18 35 55 90 135 180 0.35 0.6 0.6 0.9 0.9 0.9 5 20 20 26 45 40 14 21 40 60 3 5 10 15 3 5 10 15 2 4 8 11 1 2 4 6 1 2 5 7 Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
High pressure sodium vapour lamps Non corrected P (W) IB (A) C (F) 70 1 150 250 400 1000 1.8 3 4.4 10.3 4 7 13 18 2 4 8 11 1 3 5 8 1 2 3 With parallel correction 70 150 250 400 1000 0.6 0.7 1.5 2.5 6 12 20 32 45 100 6 9 18 25 6 9 18 25 2 3 6 9 2 4 8 12 1 2 4 6 Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A
Metal iodine or halogen vapour lamps Non corrected P (W) IB (A) C (F) 35 70 150 250 400 0.3 0.5 1 1.5 2.5 6 16 24 42 64 8 12 20 32 5 8 14 21 3 5 8 13 1 2 4 5 With parallel correction 39 70 150 250 400 0.3 0.5 1 1.5 2.5 6 6 12 20 32 45 85 12 18 31 50 6 9 16 25 4 6 10 15 3 4 7 10 2 3 5 7 1 3 4 2000 5.5 60 1 2 3 5 Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A
Incandescent and halogen lamps Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A
P (W) IB (A)
60 75 100 150 200 300 0.26 0.32 0.44 0.65 0.87 1.3 25 38 70 100 19 28 50 73 12 18 35 50 10 14 26 37 7 10 18 25
500 1000 2.17 4.4 4 6 10 15 2 3 6 8
Halogen lamps used with transformer Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A
P (W) IB (A)
60 80 105 150 0.26 0.35 0.45 0.65
Maximum 9 8 6 4 of lamps 14 12 9 6 27 23 18 13 40 35 27 19 IB : value of current drawn by each lamp at its rated voltage. C : unit capacitance for each lamp. IB and C correspond to values normally quoted by lamp manufacturers Characteristics : pages 5/276 and 5/277 References : pages 5/278 and 5/279 Dimensions, schemes : pages 5/280 and 5/281
5/273
Contactor selection for heating circuits (continued)
Modular equipment
Modular contactors
1 2
Heating (AC-7a) Single-phase, 2-pole switching

3 4 5 6 7
3-phase switching

U U
Heating by resistive elements or by infra-red radiators, convectors or radiators, heating ducts, industrial furnaces. The current peak between the hot and cold states must not exceed 2 to 3 In at the moment of switch-on. Contactor selection according to power and required electrical life
Electrical durability (in operating cycles) Single-phase switching 230 V (2-pole) Maximum power (kW) 100 x 103 150 x 103 200 x 103 500 x 103 106 3.5 3 2.2 1 0.8 5.4 8.6 13.6 21.6 3-phase switching 400 V (3-pole) 10 16 26 41 64.8 4.6 7.4 11.6 18.4 9 14 22 35 55.2 3.5 5.6 8.8 14 6.5 10 17 26.5 42 1.6 2.6 4 6.4 3.2 5 7.5 12 19.2 1.2 1.9 3 4.8 2.2 3.5 6 9 14.4 Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 100 A 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 100 A
8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 5/276 and 5/277 References : pages 5/278 and 5/279 Dimensions, schemes : pages 5/280 and 5/281
5/274
Contactor selection for motor control
Modular equipment
Modular contactors
Motor control (AC-7b) Single-phase circuit, 230 V

L1
U M
1 2
L2
3-phase circuit, 400 V

L1 L2 L3
U V W M
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contactor selection according to maximum power in kW

230 V single-phase capacitor motor (2-pole) 0.55 1.1 2.2 4 400 V 3-phase motor 2.2 4 7.5 11 Contactor rating (Ith) 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A
5/275
Characteristics
Modular equipment
TeSys GC standard contactors
Contactor type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Operating positions Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 10 ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Flame resistance Conforming to VDE 0106 Standard version Storage Operation Without derating Without derating Contactor open Contactor closed Contactor open Contactor closed C C m Conforming to IEC 61095 Conforming to VDE 0110 V V kV
GC16 500 500 4 in enclosure
GC25
GC40
GC63
GC100
IEC 61095, VDE 0637-3 and IEC 60947-5 for auxiliary contacts NF- USE, VDE, CEBEC, VE Protection against direct finger contact (IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure) TC - 40+ 70 - 5+ 50 (0.851.1 Uc) 3000 30 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane 10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 3 gn Conforming to IEC 61095
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue y 440 V) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Frequency limits Conventional thermal current (lth) Rated breaking and making capacity Permissible short time rating no current flowing for preceding 15 minutes with q y 40 C Short-circuit protection by fuse or circuit breaker U y 440 V Average impedance per pole Power dissipated per pole Maximum cabling c.s.a. In AC-7a (heating) In AC-7b (motor control) Up to Of the operating current q y 50 C Conforming to IEC 61095 (AC-7b) I rms 400 V 3-phase For 10 s For 30 s gl fuse Circuit-breaker I2t 230 V (at 3 kA rms 400 V prospective) At lth and 50 Hz A A V Hz A A A A A A2s A 2s mW W mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 2, 3 or 4 16 5 25 8.5 40 15 63 25 100
250 two-pole contactors, 415 three and four-pole contactors 400 16 40 128 40 16 5000 9000 2.5 0.65 6 4 6 1.5 6 4 0.8 25 68 200 62 25 10 000 14 000 2.5 1.6 6 4 6 1.5 6 4 0.8 40 120 320 100 40 16 000 17 500 2 3.2 25 16 16 4 25 6 3.5 63 200 504 157 63 18 000 20 000 2 8 25 16 16 4 25 6 3.5 100 800 250 100 1 10 35 35 35 10 3.5
For the above operational currents Flexible cable 1 conductor without cable end 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors
Flexible cable with cable end
Solid cable 1 conductor without cable end 2 conductors Tightening torque Power circuit connections
5/276
Modular equipment
Contactor type
GC16, GC25 single or 2-pole

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits 50 Hz coils (q y 50 C) Average coil consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50 Hz 50 or 60 Hz Operational Drop-out Inrush Sealed 50/60 Hz Closing C Opening O In operating cycles In operating cycles per hour 1 or 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 or 2 conductors V
GC16, GC25 3 or 4-pole GC40, GC63 2-pole
GC40, GC63 3 or 4-pole GC100 2-pole
GC100 4-pole
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office 0.851.1 Uc 0.20.75 Uc 15 3.8 1.3 1030 1025 106 300 34 4.6 1.6 53 6.5 2.1 106 13 4.2
VA VA W ms ms
Maximum heat dissipation Operating time
Mechanical durability Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature y 50 C Maximum Flexible cable cabling c.s.a. without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 0.8
Instantaneous auxiliary contact characteristics

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to IEC 60947-5 Conforming to VDE 0110 For ambient q y 50 C Operating cycles Flexible or solid conductor mm2 N.m V V V A 250 500 500 5 106 2.5 0.8
Conventional thermal current (Ith) Mechanical durability Maximum cabling c.s.a. Tightening torque
5/277
References
Modular equipment
Standard contactors, TeSys GC

Maximum current rating category AC-7a A 16 No. of poles Number of 17.5 mm modules Sold in lots of Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Weight
1 2 3 4 5
526286
526285
GC2520
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 4
1 2 1 2 2 4 1 2 2 4 1 2 2 4
1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 6
12 12 6 6 12 6 12 12 6 6 12 6 12 6 6 4 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 4 6 4 6 4 4 2
GC 1610pp GC 1620pp GC 1630pp GC 1640pp GC 1611pp GC 1622pp GC 2510pp GC 2520pp GC 2530pp GC 2540pp GC 2511pp GC 2522pp GC 2502pp GC 2504pp GC 4020pp GC 4030pp GC 4040pp GC 4011pp GC 4022pp GC 4002pp GC 4004pp GC 6320pp GC 6330pp GC 6340pp GC 6311pp GC 6322pp GC 6302pp GC 6304pp GC 10020pp GC 10040pp
kg 0.110 0.110 0.230 0.230 0.110 0.230 0.110 0.110 0.230 0.230 0.110 0.230 0.110 0.230 0.230 0.350 0.390 0.230 0.390 0.230 0.390 0.340 0.390 0.390 0.340 0.390 0.340 0.390 0.680 0.780
25
GC4040
40
63
6
100
7
GC10020
8 9 10
Selection : pages 5/272 to 5/275 References : pages 5/276 and 5/277
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 12 24 48 110 220/240 50 Hz J5 B5 E5 F5 M5 60 Hz J6 B6 E6 F6 M6
5/278
Modular equipment

Number of contacts
533715
No. of poles
Reference
Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
kg 2 1 1 GAC 0521 0.016
GAC05pp
GAC 0531
0.016
526287
GAC 0511
0.016
Accessories
Description For use on Number Operational Sold in contactor of voltage lots of modules V 1 1248 1 Unit reference Weight kg 0.090
GAP2p
Coil suppression blocks comprising 2 RC circuits
GAP 21
110240
GAP 23
0.090
Ventilation 1/2 module Clips onto 5 rail Cover plates
1/2
10
GAC 5
0.015
1/2
10
GA1 C7
0.001
GAC5
GA1Cp
10
GA1 C6
0.001
Set of sealable 16 or 25 A terminal covers 3 or 4 (10 top parts + contacts 10 bottom parts) 40 or 63 A 2 contacts GW254 GW63p 40 or 63 A 3 or 4 contacts
GW 254
0.040
GW 632
0.040
GW 634
0.050
5/279
Dimensions
Modular equipment
Dimensions
1 2 3 4 5 6
Contactors
Common side view
GC 1610, 1611, 1620 GC 2502, 2510, 2511, 2520 1 module
GC 1622, 1640 GC 2504, 2522, 2530, 2540 2 modules
44,4
81
43,7 60 65
17,5
35
Common side view
GC 4002, 4011, 4020 GC 6302, 6311, 6320 2 modules
GC 4004, 4022, 4030, 4040 GC 6304, 6322, 6330, 6340 3 modules
44,4
81
43,7 60 65
35
52,5
Common side view
GC 10020 3 modules
GC 10040 6 modules
7
44,4
8 9 10
43,7 60 65
81
54
108
Schemes : pages 5/281
5/280
Dimensions (continued) schemes
Modular equipment
Dimensions
Auxiliary contacts
GAC 0511, 0531 and 0521
Coil suppression blocks

GAP 21, 22 and 23
1
44,4
44,4
81
2 3
43,7 60 65
8,75 12,75
81
43,7 60 65
17,5
Clip-on ventilation 1/2 module

GAC 5
Cover plates
GA1 C6 GA1 C7
44
67
11,5
18
11,5
65
54
54
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Schemes
Contactors
A1
A1
A1
A1
GC pp10
1
GC pp20
GC pp30
GC pp40
1 3 5 6 7
A2
A2
A2
R1
R1
R3
R1
R3
R1
R3
R5 R6
A1
A1
A1
R2
R2
R4
R2
R4
A1
R2
R4
Auxiliary contacts
13/NO
13/NO
23/NO
GAC 0521
21/NC
GAC 0531
GAC 0511
13/NO
14
22
14
24
14/NO
12
R8
A2
A2
A2
A2
R7
GC pp11
GC pp22
GC pp02
A2
GC pp04
5/281
Presentation
Modular equipment
TeSys GF impulse relays
PF526284
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TeSys GF impulse relays are designed for use in modular enclosures. They feature: b Easy installation v quick clip-on fixing and locking onto 35 mm omega rail, v easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten captive, pozidrive screw terminals. b Compact size Units have a common depth of 60 mm and width of 18 mm. b v v v User safety live parts protected against direct finger contact, completely safe operation, state indication on front panel.
Presentation
GF 1611M7
This range of modular impulse relays has been designed taking into account the requirements of international standard IEC 60669-2. This standard is specific to Impulse relays. Conformity with this standard makes it possible to obtain the following quality labels without the need for additional tests: NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, etc. Functions Modular impulse relays are designed for opening and closing of circuits which are remotely controlled by impulses. The position is mechanically maintained. These impulse relays are used in lighting circuits when there are more than two switching points. Power switching TeSys GF impulse relays have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and commercial premises, hospitals and the home, i.e. wherever switching of a specific lighting supply is required:
Standards
5/282
Selection for lighting and heating circuits
Modular equipment
Lighting circuits
Single fitting Power in W Number of lamps Twin fitting Power in W Number of lamps
Fluorescent lamps with starter

Non corrected 18 70 36 35 58 21 With parallel correction 18 50 36 25 58 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
With series correction 2 x 18 56 2 x 36 28 2 x 58 17
Incandescent lamps: filament lamps

Power in W Number of lamps 40 40 60 25 75 20 100 16 200 8
Incandescent lamps: halogen lamps

Power in W Number of lamps 300 5 500 3 1000 1 1500 1
Incandescent lamps: very low voltage halogen lamps

Power in W Number of lamps 20 70 50 28 75 19 100 4
Low pressure sodium vapour lamps

Non corrected Power in W Number of lamps 55 24 90 15 135 10 180 7
High pressure sodium vapour lamps

Non corrected Power in W Number of lamps 250 5 400 3 1000 1
Heating circuits
Power in kW
Single-phase 230 V, 2-pole

3.6
5/283
Characteristics
Modular equipment
Environment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Conforming to IEC 60947-1-5 Conforming to VDE 0110
V V kV
400 400 4 in enclosure IEC 60669-1 and 60669-2, NF C 61-112 NF-USE, CEBEC, ASE, KEMA, N, S, D, FI, VDE
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device Conforming to VDE 0106 Standard version Storage Operation Maximum operating altitude Operating positions Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 10 ms Without derating Without derating Impulse relay open Impulse relay closed Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Impulse relay open Impulse relay closed
Protection against direct finger contact IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure TC C C m - 40+ 80 - 20+ 50 2000 90 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane Please consult your Regional Sales Office Please consult your Regional Sales Office 4 gn 4 gn
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) (Ue y 250 V) Rated operational voltage Conventional thermal current (lth) Permissible short time rating no current flowing for preceding 15 minutes with q y 40 C In AC-7a (heating) A V q y 50 C For 1 s For 10 s For 30 s Short-circuit protection by fuse or circuit-breaker gl fuse Circuit-breaker I2t (at 3kA rms prospective) At lth and 50 Hz A A A A A A 2s mW W 1 or 2 16 250 16 320 96 48 16 5000 4 1 Min. 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 Max. 6 4 6 4 6 4
Average impedance per pole Power dissipated per pole Maximum cabling c.s.a.
Flexible cable without cable end
1 conductor 2 conductors
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm

2
Flexible cable with cable end
mm2 mm
2
Tightening torque
N.m

Presentation : page 5/282 Selection : page 5/283 References : page 5/286 Dimensions, schemes : page 5/287
5/284
Modular equipment

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits (q < 50 C) Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc Operating time Operating threshold, dual frequency 50/60 Hz Inrush at 50 Hz Closing C Opening O Minimum impulse time Mechanical durability Electrical durability AC-21 AC-22 Maximum operating rate Maximum cabling c.s.a. Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end 1 or 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque 1 or 2 conductors mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m 2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 0.8 Operating cycles per hour 200 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles 900 V V VA ms ms ms 12240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office 0.851.1 Uc 19 70 70 70 106 operating cycles
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5/285
References
Modular equipment
PF526284

Maximum current rating category AC-1 Composition Coil voltages a 50/60 Hz c Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A 16
V 12 24 48 110
V 6 12 24 48 110 6 12 24 48 110 6 12 24 48 110
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
GF 1610J7 GF 1610B7 GF 1610E7 GF 1610F7 GF 1610M7 GF 1610U7 GF 1620J7 GF 1620B7 GF 1620E7 GF 1620F7 GF 1620M7 GF 1620U7 GF 1611J7 GF 1611B7 GF 1611E7 GF 1611F7 GF 1611M7 GF 1611U7
kg 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110 0.110
GF 1611M7
220 230/240 2 12 24 48 110 220 230/240 1 1 12 24 48 110 220 230/240
5/286
Dimensions, schemes
Modular equipment
Dimensions
GF 1610, GF 1611, GF 1620
1 2 3
GF 1620
A1 1
81
44 60 64 5,5
18
Schemes
GF 1610
A1 1
GF 1611
A1 R1 1
45
A2
R2
A2
A2
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5/287
Presentation standards
Modular equipment
TeSys GY dual tariff contactors
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TeSys GY dual tariff contactors are designed for use in modular panels and enclosures. These contactors feature: b Easy installation v quick clip-on fixing and locking onto 35 mm omega rail, v easy connection by means of ready-to-tighten captive, pozidrive screw terminals.
GY25
Presentation
526295
b Compact size All units have a common depth of 60 mm and width in modules of 17.5 mm (width of one module: 17.5 mm). b v v v v User safety use of materials conforming to strictest fire safety standards, live parts protected against direct finger contact, completely safe operation, state indication on front panel.
Dual tariff contactors are designed for use with Electricity Supply Authority dual tariffs. They have a 4-position selector switch on the front panel: Stop (O) For switching off the load, e.g. for prolonged periods of absence. Off peak Automatic start (A) The contactor switches automatically during off peak hours as set by the Supply Authority remote control and thus supplies the load, (washing machine, dishwasher, convector heater, water heater) during this period, at an economy rate to the user. In this position, the contactor supplies the load to cater for additional requirements for hot water, heating, etc., but at the standard rate. The contactor returns automatically to the off-peak position at the start of the off-peak period. Facility for setting the contactor to continuous manual operation, ignoring the automation system and the Supply Authority control; setting and locking is achieved by means of a tool, with manual return to the AUTO position.
Peak time Manual start (I)
Peak time Manual override with lock
This range of modular contactors has been designed taking into account the requirements of international standard IEC 61095. This standard is specific to Electromagnetic contactors for domestic and similar use. It has very strict requirements, meeting the expectations of users, with regard to the safety of equipment and persons in premises and areas accessible to the public. Conformity with this standard makes it possible to obtain the following quality labels without the need for additional tests: NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, etc. Applications Dual tariff modular contactors are designed for switching all single-phase, 3-phase or 4-phase loads up to 63 A. Power switching TeSys GY contactors have multiple applications in industrial, agricultural and commercial premises, hospitals and the home, i.e. wherever switching of a specific supply is required: v lighting, v heating, ventilation, v motorised shutters or gates.
Standards
5/288
Modular equipment
The contactor controls must be bounce free. If not, connect a coil suppression block 1 (GAP21, 22 or 23) across the coil terminals y 250 V. When several contactors which operate at the same time are mounted side by side, a GAC5 ventilation 1/2 module 2 must be fitted every 2 contactors.
1 2 3 4 5
It is advisable to mount electronic units at the bottom of the modular panel and to separate them from electromechanical units by a space equal to one module 3 or by 2 ventilation 1/2 modules GAC5
Derating of contactors mounted in a modular enclosure if the temperature within the enclosure is > 40 C
Contactor rating 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 40C 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 50C 14 A 22 A 36 A 57 A 60 C (1) 13 A 20 A 32 A 50 A
6 7 8 9 10
(1) Ventilation 1/2 module must be fitted
5/289
Characteristics
Modular equipment
Environment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Type
GY16
Conforming to IEC 61095 Conforming to VDE 0110 V V kV 500 500 4 in enclosure
GY25
GY40
GY63
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Operating positions Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Flame resistance Conforming to VDE 0106 Standard version Storage Operation Without derating Without derating Contactor open Contactor closed Contactor open Contactor closed
IEC 61095, VDE 0637-3 and IEC 60947-5 for auxiliary contacts NF-USE, VDE, CEBEC, VE Protection against direct finger contact IP 20 open, IP 40 in enclosure TC C C m - 40+ 70 - 5+ 50 (0.851.1 Uc) 3000 30 in relation to normal vertical mounting plane 10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 3 gn Conforming to IEC 61095
Number of poles Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-7a (heating) (Ue y 440 V) In AC-7b (motor control) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to Frequency limits Of the operating current Conventional thermal current (lth) Rated breaking and making capacity q y 50 C Conforming to IEC 61095 (AC-7b) I rms 400 V 3-phase For 10 s For 30 s A A V Hz A A A A 2, 3 or 4 16 5 25 8.5 40 15 63 25
250 - 2-pole contactors, 415 - 3 and 4-pole contactors 400 16 40 128 40 25 68 200 62 40 120 320 100 63 200 504 157
Short time rating with no current flow for the previous previous 15 minutes with q y 40 C Short-circuit protection by fuse or circuit breaker U y 440 V gl fuse 230V Circuit breaker I2t (at 3 kA rms prospective) 400V Average impedance per pole Power dissipated per pole Maximum cabling c.s.a. Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque At lth and 50 Hz
A A 2s A 2s mW W
16 5000 9000 2.5 0.65
25 10 000 14 000 2.5 1.6
40 16 000 17 500 2 3.2
63 18 000 20 000 2 8
For the above operational currents 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors Power circuit connections
6 4 6 1.5 6 4 0.8
6 4 6 1.5 6 4 0.8
25 16 16 4 25 6 3.5
25 16 16 4 25 6 3.5
5/290
Modular equipment

Type GY40, GY63 GY16, GY25 3 or 4-pole 3 or 4-pole GY40, GY63 2-pole 12240 V, for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office GY16, GY25 single or 2-pole
1 2
Rated control 50 or 60 Hz circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits (q y 50 C) 50 Hz coils Operational Drop-out Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50 Hz Inrush Sealed Heat dissipation Operating time 50/60 Hz Closing C Opening O In operating cycles
0.851.1 Uc 0.20.75 Uc
VA VA W ms ms
15 3.8 1.3 10 ... 30 10 ... 25 106 300
34 4.6 1.6
53 6,5 2.1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Mechanical durability
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour at ambient temperature y 50 C Maximum cabling c.s.a. Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors without cable end Flexible cable 1 conductor with cable end 2 conductors Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque 1 or 2 conductors
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 0.8
Instantaneous auxiliary contact characteristics

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to IEC 60947-5 Conforming to VDE 0110 Conventional thermal current (Ith) Mechanical durability Maximum cabling c.s.a. Tightening torque For ambient q y 50 C In operating cycles Flexible or solid conductor mm2 N.m V V V A 250 500 500 5 106 2.5 0.8
5/291
References
Modular equipment
1 2 3
526296 526295
Maximum current rating category AC-7a A 16
No. of poles
Number of 17.5 mm modules
Sold in lots of
Weight
2 4 1
1 1
1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 3 2 3 3
12 6 12 12 6 6 12 6 4 4 6 4 4
GY1620pp GY1640pp GY1611pp GY2520pp GY2530pp GY2540pp GY2511pp GY4020pp GY4030pp GY4040pp GY6320pp GY6330pp GY6340pp
kg 0.110 0.230 0.110 0.110 0.230 0.230 0.110 0.230 0.350 0.390 0.340 0.390 0.390
25
2 3
GY2520M5
4 1 40 2 3 4 63 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 GY6340M5
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts 12 24 48 110 220/240 50 Hz J5 B5 E5 F5 M5 60 Hz J6 B6 E6 F6 M6
5/292
References
Modular equipment
526287

Number of contacts Number of poles Reference Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2
GAC0521 GAC0531 GAC0511
kg 0.016 0.016 0.016
GAP 23
812029
812029
Accessories
Description Coil suppression blocks comprising 2 RC circuits For use on contactor Number of modules 1 Operational voltage in V 1248 110240 Sold in lots of 1 1 Unit reference GAP21 GAP23 Weight kg 0.090 0.090
GAC5
522643
GA1Cp
Ventilation 1/2 module clips onto 5 rail Cover plates
1/2 1/2 1
10 10 10
GAC5 GA1C7 GA1C6
0.015 0.001 0.001
GW254 Set of sealable terminal covers (10 top parts + 10 bottom parts) 16 or 25 A 2 3 or 4 contacts 40 or 63 A 2 contacts 2 1 1 1 GW254 GW632 GW634 0.040 0.040 0.050
522644
3 40 or 63 A 3 or 4 contacts
GW63p
5/293
Dimensions
Modular equipment
Dual tariff contactors
1 2 3 4 5
Common side view
GY1611, 1620 GY2511, 2520 1 module
GY1640 GY2530, 2540 2 modules
44,4
43,7 64 69
81
17,5
35
Common side view
GY4020 GY6320 2 modules
GY4030, 4040 GY6330, 6340 3 modules
44,4
43,7 64
81
35
52,5
6 7 8 9 10
69
Dimensions and schemes : page 5/295
5/294
Modular equipment
Dimensions
Auxiliary contacts GAC0511, 0531 and 0521 Coil suppression block GAP21, 22 and 23
1
44,4 81
44,4
81
2 3
43,7 60 65
Clip-on ventilation 1/2 module GAC5
8,75 12,75
43,7 60 65
Cover plates GA1C6
17,5
GA1C7
67
11,5
18
11,5
65
54
54
4 5 6 7
Schemes
Contactors GYpp20
A1 1 3
GYpp30
A1 1 3 5
44
GYpp40
A1 1 3 5 7
GYpp11
A1 R1 R2 1 2
A2
A2
A2
Auxiliary contacts GAC0521

13/NO 21/NC
GAC0531
13/NO 23/NO
GAC0511
13/NO
14
22
14
24
14/NO
12
A2
8 9 10
Selection : pages 5/272 to 5/275 Characteristics : pages 5/290 and 5/291 References : pages 5/292 and 5/293 Dimensions : page 5/294
5/295
Contents
6 - TeSys protection components: relays and controllers
1 2
b Motor and machine protection.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/4
TeSys K relays
b Adjustable from 0.11 to 16 A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/10
TeSys D, 3-pole thermal overload relays

b Description, characteristics .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/14 b References .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/20 b Accessories.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/25 b Dimensions, mounting and schemes.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/26
TeSys LR9 D, 3-pole electronic thermal overload relays
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
b Characteristics.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/18 b References .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/23 b Accessories.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/25 b Dimensions .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/27 b Schemes.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/29
TeSys LR9 F, 3-pole electronic thermal overload relays

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/30 b Description. b Characteristics.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/31 b References .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/34 b Accessories.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/36 b Dimensions, schemes and setting-up .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/38
TeSys RM1 XA, single pole magnetic current relays

b Presentation, characteristics.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/40 b References .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/41 b Dimensions and schemes .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/43
LT3, thermistor protection units for use with PTC thermistor probes
Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/44 b General, characteristics.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/46 b References .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/50 b Dimensions, schemes and setting-up .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/52 b Operation.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/53
6/0
TeSys LR97 D and LT47, electronic over current relays

b Presentation, description.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/54 b Curves, characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/55 b References .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/58 b Dimensions, mounting and schemes.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/59
1 2
TeSys U controllers
b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/60 b Application example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/61 b Characteristics.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/62 b References .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/64 b Associations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/65 b Dimensions and mounting.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/66 b Schemes.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/67
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TeSys T Motor Management System

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/68 b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/70 b Functions.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/75 b Programming.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/79 b Characteristics.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/81 b References .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/86 b Dimensions and mounting.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/90 b Schemes.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/92
6/1
Selection guide

Protection relays and controllers
Applications
Motor protection
1 2 3 4 5 6
Used with contactor type
Thermal motor protection
Protection
- Motor overload - Stalling - Phase failure
Tripping class
Class 10 A
Classes 10 A and 20
Classes 10 and 20
Communication
LC1 K, LP1 K
LC1 D
LC1 F
7 8 9 10
Motor current (In)
0.1116 A
0.1150 A
30630 A
Relay or controller type
LR2 K
Page 6/12
LRD, LR2 D and LR9 D

Pages 6/20 to 6/23
LR9 F
Pages 6/34 and 6/35
Pages
6/2
Machine protection
Motor and machine protection
Protection of slip ring motors and of circuits without current peaks
Protection of resistors, bearings, capacitors
Specific motor protection
Protection and control
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
- Strong overcurrent - Stalling
- Frequent starting - Harsh environments
- Overtorque - Mechanical shocks - Locked rotor - Phase failure
- Overtorque - Mechanical shocks
- Thermal overload - Phase imbalance and phase failure - Motor stalling - Long starting times - Earth fault
- Thermal overload - Phase imbalance and phase failure - Locked rotor - Long starting times - Phase reversal - Earth fault
Classes 5 to 30
Classes 5 to 30
Modbus, CANopen, DeviceNet, ProfibusDP, AdvantysSTB, AS-Interface
Modbus, CANopen, DeviceNet, ProfibusDP, EthernetTCP/IP
All contactors
0.7630 A
Unlimited
0.338 A
0.360 A
0.35800 A
0.4810 A
RM1 XA
Pages 6/41 and 6/42
LT3 S
Page 6/50
LR97D
Page 6/58
LT47
LUTM p0BL
Page 6/64
LTM R
Page 6/86
6/3
General
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Exceeding the operating limits of an electric motor will lead, eventually, not only to destruction of the motor itself but also of the mechanisms it drives. This type of load can be the cause of electrical or mechanical faults. b Electrical faults: v overvoltage, voltage drop, imbalance and phase failure which cause variations in the current drawn, v short-circuits which can cause the current to reach levels capable of destroying the load. b Mechanical faults: v locked rotor, v brief or prolonged overload which leads to an increase in the current drawn by the motor, and therefore overheating. The cost of these faults must take into account loss of production, loss of raw materials, repair of the production tool, poor quality of production and delays in delivery. These faults can also have dramatic consequences on the safety of persons in direct or indirect contact with the motor. To prevent these faults, protection measures are necessary. They make it possible to isolate the equipment to be protected from the mains supply by measuring variations in electrical values (voltage, current, etc). Each motor starter must therefore have: b short-circuit protection, to detect and break, as quickly as possible, abnormal currents generally greater than 10 times the rated current (In). b overload protection, to detect increases in current up to about 10 In and switch off the starter before overheating of the motor and conductors damages the insulation. This protection is provided by specific devices such as fuses, circuit-breakers and thermal overload relays, or by more integrated devices offering several types of protection.
Introduction
6/4
General (continued)
Causes, effects and consequences of various faults
There are two types of fault: b Internal faults within the motor. b External faults: these are located outside the electric motor but their consequences can lead to damage inside the motor.
Effects Consequences on the motor and on the machine
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Faults
Causes
Short-circuit
Contact between several phases, or between one phase and neutral or between several turns of the same phase.
b Current peak b Electrodynamic forces on the conductors Dielectric breakdown in the windings
Destruction of windings
b Lightning b Electrostatic discharge b Operation Phase imbalance b Opening of a phase and phase failure b Single-phase load upstream of the motor b Short-circuit between the turns of the same winding High starting b Failure of the automation system frequency b Too many manual control operations b Numerous fault trips Voltage variations Harmonics Long starting time Jamming No-load running b Instability of the mains voltage b Connection of heavy loads
Overvoltage
Destruction of the windings due to loss of insulation
b Reduction of usable torque, efficiency Overheating (1) and speed b Increase in losses b Starting impossible if phase failure High stator and rotor temperature rise due to the frequent start current Overheating (1) Consequences on the process
b Reduction of usable torque b Increase in losses
Overheating (1) Overheating (1) Overheating 1) Overheating (1) Consequences on the process Consequences on the process
b Pollution of the mains supply by b Reduction of usable torque variable speed drives, inverters, etc... b Increase in losses b Resistive torque too high (load too heavy) b Voltage drop b Mechanical problem (crusher) b Seizures b Pump running empty b Mechanical break in drive to the load b Overload of a supply powered by limited independent sources b Faulty alternator speed regulator b Increase in resistive torque b Voltage drop b Drop in power factor b Significant drop in excitation current b Break in rotor winding Increase in starting time Overcurrent Drop in current drawn
Frequency fluctuations Overload
b Increase in losses b Interferes with synchronous devices (clock, recorder, ...) Increase in current consumption
Overheating (1)
Loss of machine excitation
b Increase in active power b Drop in power factor b Overvoltage developed in the mains supply b Rise in earth potential (safety of persons)
Significant overheating of rotor and cage
Phase-Earth fault b Accidental Phase-Earth contacts b Accidental Phase-machine casing contacts (casing connected to earth)
Consequences on safety of persons
(1) Then, in the longer or shorter term, depending on the seriousness of the fault and/or its frequency, short-circuit and destruction of the windings.
6/5
General (continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
526179 526180 526177 526178
Short-circuit protection General A short-circuit results in a very rapid rise in current which can reach several hundred times the value of the operational current. The consequences of a short-circuit are dangerous to both equipment and persons. It is therefore imperative to use protection devices to detect the fault and very quickly break the circuit. Two types of protection are commonly used: b fuses (cutout) which break the circuit by melting, which then requires their replacement, b magnetic trip circuit-breakers, often more simply called "magnetic circuitbreakers", which only require re-setting to put them back into service. Short-circuit protection can also be built-into multifunction devices such as motor circuit-breakers and contactor-breakers. The main characteristics of short-circuit protection devices are: b their breaking capacity: this is the highest prospective short-circuit current value that a protection device can break at a given voltage. b their making capacity: this is the highest current value that the protection device can make at its rated voltage in specified conditions. The making capacity is equal to k times the breaking capacity.
Protection functions
LS1D32 fuse carrier
GS2N3 switch disconnectors
Fuses (cutouts) Fuses provide individual phase protection (single-pole), with a high breaking capacity in a compact size: b mounted either in fuse carriers, b or in isolators, replacing the original links or shunt bars. For motor protection, aM type fuses are used. Their design characteristics allow them to conduct the high magnetising currents that occur when motors are switched on. They are therefore unsuitable for overload protection (unlike gG type fuses). This is why an overload relay must be included in the motor power supply circuit.
Magnetic circuit-breakers These circuit-breakers protect installations against short-circuits, within the limit of their breaking capacity. Magnetic circuit-breakers provide omnipole breaking as standard. For relatively low short-circuit currents, the operation of a circuit-breaker is faster than that of fuses. This protection conforms to standard IEC 60947-2. The thermal and electrodymanic effects are also limited, therefore ensuring better protection of cables and equipment.
GV2L magnetic circuit-breraker
TeSys U LUB 12 starter with LUCApp control unit
6/6
General (continued)
Overload protection General An overload condition is the most frequently encountered fault. The symptoms are a rise in the current drawn by the motor and thermal effects. A rapid return to normal operating conditions is important. The actual operating conditions (ambient temperature, operating altitude and type of standard duty) are essential to determine the operating values of the motor (power, current) and to be able to select effective overload protection. These operational values are given by the motor manufacturer.
LRD02 thermal overload relay
Protection functions (continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
526181
According to the level required, protection can be provided by: b overload relays and thermal overload relays (bi-metallic or electronic type) which protect motors in the event of: v overload, by monitoring the current drawn by each phase, v phase imbalance or failure, by their differential mechanism. b relays with PTC thermistor probes (Positive Temperature Coefficient). b overtorque relays, b multifunction relays. Overload relays These relays protect motors against overload. They must allow the temporary overload that occurs on starting and must only trip if the starting time is abnormally long. The overload relay will be selected according to the length of the starting time (tripping class) and the motor rating. These relays have a thermal memory (except for certain electronic overload relays, indicated by their manufacturers) and can be connected: b either in series with the load, b or to current transformers placed in series with the load. Bi-metallic thermal overload relays Combined with a contactor, these relays protect the line and the equipment against small and prolonged overloads. They must be protected against strong overcurrent by a circuit-breaker or fuses. These relays may be used on an a.c. or d.c. system and are generally: b 3-pole, b compensated, i.e. insensitive to ambient temperature variations, b with manual or automatic reset, b graduated with a "motor FLC" scale: allowing direct setting to the full load current as shown on the motor rating plate. They can also be sensitive to phase failure: this is known as 'differential'. This function conforms to standards IEC 60947-4-1 and 60947-6-2 This type of relay is extremely reliable and is a relatively low cost device. Electronic thermal overload relays Electronic thermal overload relays have the advantage of electronics which allow a more complex thermal image of the motor to be created. They can be combined with products having complementary functions, such as: b temperature sensing via PTC probes, b protection against jamming and overtorque, b protection against phase reversal, b earth fault protection, b protection against no-load running, b alarm function.
526182
LRD365 thermal overload relay
526183
RM4JA current measurement relay

526184
TeSys U starter with thermal overload alarm function module
6/7
General (continued)
526185
1 2
LT3S relays for use with thermistor probes
Overload protection (continued) Relays for use with PTC thermistor probes With direct sensing of the stator windings, these relays can be used to protect motors against: b overload, b a rise in ambient temperature, b a ventilation circuit fault, b a high starting frequency, b mechanical shocks, etc... Overload (or overtorque) relays These relays protect the drive line in the event of a locked rotor, seizure or mechanical shocks. This is an additional protection. Unlike thermal overload relays, these relays do not have a thermal memory. They have definite time characteristics (adjustable current threshold and time delay). The overtorque relay can be used as overload protection for motors with long starting times or very frequent starting (for example, lifting hoists).
Protection functions (continued)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
526186
LR97D07 instantaneous electronic overcurrent relays
Multifunction relays b Overcurrent relays are limited when it is necessary to take into account problems associated with voltage, temperature or special applications. New production or maintenance management needs have prompted manufacturers to offer products which provide not only adaptable protection, but also complete management of the motor and its load. They incorporate: b current and voltage sensors (TeSys T controllers), b hybrid analog and digital electronic technology, b the use of communication buses for data exchange and control, b powerful motor modelling algorithms, b integrated application programs whose parameters can be set. These products make it possible to reduce installation and operating costs by reducing maintenance and downtime. TeSys U starters: The multifunction relay is incorporated in the motor starter. This solution is very compact with reduced wiring. It is limited to 32 A.
526187
526188
TeSys U LUB 32 starter with multifunction control unit LUC M
TeSys U controller LUTM20BL
TeSys U controllers: The multifunction relay is separate from the power line and reuses the function blocks from the TeSys U solution. It can be used in conjunction with a contactor up to 810 A. TeSys T controllers: The multifunction relay is separate from the power line and incorporates inputs and outputs. It can be used in conjunction with a contactor up to 810 A.
526189
TeSys T controller LTMR08MBD
6/8
General (continued)
Protection relay selection table

Motor protection Relay type Thermal overload relay LR2K, LRD, LRD 3, LR9F, LR9D (1) Causes of overheating Slight overload Locked rotor No-load running Supply phase failure Ventilation fault Abnormal temperature rise Shaft bearing seizure Insulation fault Protracted starting time Severe duty Voltage variation Frequency fluctuations Loss of machine excitation Ideally suited Possible solution Not suitable (no protection) (1) for motor circuit-breaker type GV2ME. (2) Protection based on current. (3) Protection based on current and voltage. With probes LR9 7D With probes With probes With probes (2) Relays for use with PTC probes LT3 S Machine Motor and machine protection protection Overtorque TeSys U controller relays LR97D, LT47 LUT M TeSys T controller LTMR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(2)
(2)
(3)
6/9
Characteristics
TeSys K thermal overload relays, adjustable from 0.11 to 16 A
Environment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device Conforming to IEC 60068 (DIN 50016) Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage For normal operation (IEC 60947) Operating limit Without derating C C C m
IEC 60947, NF C 63-650, VDE 0660, BS 4941 UL, CSA TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protectionagainstdirectfi ngercontact - 40...+ 70 - 20...+ 55 (without derating) - 30...+ 60 (with derating) (1) 2000 Vertical axis Horizontal axis
Without derating Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to NF F 16-101 and 16-102 Shock resistance, hot state Conforming to IEC 60068, (1/2 sine wave, 11 ms) N/C contact Conforming to IEC 60068, N/O contact Vibration resistance, Conforming to IEC 60068, hot state N/C contact 5 to 300 Hz Conforming to IEC 60068, N/O contact Safe separation of Conforming to VDE 0106 circuits and IEC 60536 Cabling Screw clamp terminals Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Tightening torque Mounting Connections Philips head n 2 - 6 Flame resistance Self-extinguishing material V1 Conforming to requirement 2 10 gn 10 gn 2 gn 2 gn VLSV (2), up to 400 V Minimum 1 x 1.5 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.34 0.8 Directly under the contactor or reversing contactor Maximum 2x4 2x4 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5
With derating (1)
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
Maximum to IEC 60947 1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5
Made automatically when mounted under the contactor, as follows : b contactor terminal A2 connected to overload relay terminal 96 on all products, b contactor terminal 14 connected to overload relay terminal 95 on products with 3 P + N/O. When using 3 P + N/C, or 4 P contactors, or the N/O auxiliary contact marked 13-14, at a voltage other than the coil voltage, break off the link marked 14.

Number of contacts Conventional thermal current Short-circuit protection Maximum power of the controlled contactor coils (sealed) (Occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96) Maximum operational voltage Conforming to IEC 60947, VDE 0660. gG fuse or circuit-breaker GB2 CBpp a.c. d.c. A A V VA V W V V 1 N/C + 1 N/O 6 6 max. 24 100 24 100 690 250 48 200 48 100 110 400 110 50 220/230 600 220 45 400 600 250 35 415/440 600 600/690 600
a.c., category AC-15 d.c., category DC-13
(1) Please consult your Regional Sales Office. (2) Very low safety voltage.
Schemes : page 6/13
6/10
Electrical characteristics of the power circuit

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Up to Conforming to BS 4941 Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to VDE 0110 group C Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14 V V V V V kV Hz W 690 690 690 750 600 6 Up to 400 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Frequency limits of the operational current Power dissipated per pole
Sensitivity to phase failure Reset Signalling Reset-Stop function Test function By pushbutton Conforming to IEC 60947 Manual or automatic On front of relay Yes Selected by means of a lockable and sealable switch on the front of the relay Trip indicator Pressing the Reset-Stop button : - actuates the N/C contact - has no effect on the N/O contact Pressing the Test button enables : - checking of the control circuit wiring - simulation of overload tripping (actuation of both N/C and N/O contacts, and of the trip indicator) See pages 1/18 and 1/28
Short-circuit protection and coordination
Tripping curves
Average operating time related to multiples of the current setting (Class 10 A) Balanced 3-phase operation, from cold state Balanced operation with 2 phases only, from cold state
Time 2h 1h 20 min 1h Time 2h 1h 20 min 1h
40 min 20 min 10 min 6 min 4 min 2 min 1 min 40 s 20 s 10 s 6s 4s 2s 1s
40 min 20 min 10 min 6 min 4 min 2 min 1 min 40 s 20 s 10 s 6s 4s 2s 1s 1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 X setting current (Ir)
1 2
1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15
1 Setting : at lower end of scale 2 Setting : at upper end of scale
X setting current (Ir)
Schemes : page 6/13
6/11
References
1 2 3
106167_1
These overload relays are designed for the protection of motors. They are compensated and phase failure sensitive. Resetting can either be manual or automatic. Direct mounting: under the contactor for versions with screw clamp terminals only; pre-wired terminals, see pages 22008/2 and 22009/3. Separate mounting: using terminal block LA7 K0064 (see below). On the front face of the overload relay: b selection of reset mode: Manual (marked H) or Automatic (marked A), b red pushbutton: Trip Test function, b blue pushbutton: Stop and manual Reset, b yellow trip flag indicator: overload relay tripped. Protection by magnetic circuit-breaker GV2LE, see pages 1/18 and 1/28. Class 10 A (the standard specifies a tripping time of between 2 and 10 seconds at 7.2 In)
Relay setting range Fuses to be used with selected relay Maximum rating Type aM gG BS88 A A A 0.25 0.5 0.25 0.5 1 1 2 2 4 4 6 8 10 16 20 0.5 1 1.6 2 4 6 8 10 16 20 25 32 40 6 6 10 16 16 20 20 25 32 Reference Weight
3-pole relays with screw clamp terminals
A 0.110.16 0.160.23 0.230.36 0.360.54 LR2 K0307 0.540.8 0.81.2 1.21.8 1.82.6 2.63.7
LR2 K0301 LR2 K0302 LR2 K0303 LR2 K0304 LR2 K0305 LR2 K0306 LR2 K0307 LR2 K0308 LR2 K0310 LR2 K0312 LR2 K0314 LR2 K0316 LR2 K0321 LR2 K0322
kg 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145 0.145
4 5 6 7 8
LA7 K0064
812559
3.75.5 5.58 811.5 1014 1216
Class 10 A: To order, replace the prefix LR2 by LR7 in the references selected from above (only applicable to overload relays LR2 K0305 to LR2 K0322). Example: LR7 K0308.
Overload relays for unbalanced loads
Accessory
Description Terminal block for separate clip-on mounting of the overload relay on 35 mm 7 rail Type of connection Screw clamp Reference LA7 K0064 Weight kg 0.100
9 10
Characteristics: pages 6/10 and 6/11 Dimensions: page 6/13 Schemes: page 6/13
6/12

LR2 K
Direct mounting beneath the contactor
Separate mounting with terminal block LA7 K0064 on 35 mm 7 rail (AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200)
1 2
8
=
35
=
38
50
116
75
58
80
45
65
45
AM1 DP200 DE200 c 78.5 86
3 4
A1
KM1
Schemes
LR2 K
LR2 K + LCp K
Pre-wiring scheme
A H
13
13
95
97
95
14
A2
96
98
5 6 7 8 9 10
96
95
14
96
97
95
98
96
Test Reset/stop
KM1
LR7 K
A H
Note: If pre-wiring is not required, break off the 2 links located on the thermal overload relay.
95
96
Test Reset/stop
98
97
A1
A2
6/13
Presentation, description

3-pole thermal overload relays
TeSys D
Presentation
1 2 3 4
TeSys D thermal overload relays are designed to protect a.c. circuits and motors against: b overloads, b phase failure, b excessively long starting times, b prolonged stalled rotor condition. Power connection
LRD01 to LRD35
526212
LRD08
526213
LRD 01 to 35 relays are designed for connection by screw clamp terminals. They can be supplied for connection by spring terminals or by lugs (1).
LRD313 to LRD365
LRD 313 to 365 relays are for connection by BTR screw connectors (hexagon socket head). The screws are tightened by means of a size 4, insulated Allen key. This type of connection uses the EverLink system with creep compensation (2) (Schneider Electric patent). This technique makes it possible to achieve accurate and durable tightening torque.
LRD365
These relays are also available for connection by lugs (1).
526215
LRD3361 to 4369, LR2D3561 to D3563
5 6 7 8
37
41
A
LRD 3361 to 4369 and LR2D3561 to D3563 relays are designed for connection by screw clamp terminals. They can be supplied for connection by lugs (1).
LRD33pp
Description
1 6 2, 5 4 3 7
TeSys D 3-pole thermal overload relays are designed to protect a.c. circuits and motors against overloads, phase failure, long starting times and prolonged stalling of the motor. 1 Adjustment dial Ir. 2 Test button. Operation of the Test button allows: - checking of control circuit wiring, - simulation of relay tripping (actuates both the N/O and N/C contacts). 3 Stop button. Actuates the N/C contact; does not affect the N/O contact. 4 Reset button. 5 Trip indicator. 6 Setting locked by sealing the cover. 7 Selector for manual or automatic reset. LRD 01 to 35 and LRD313 to LRD365 relays are supplied with the selector in the manual position, protected by a cover. Deliberate action is required to move it to the automatic position.
RESET 3 5 4 3,5 0 1 STOP
LRD0135 and LRD313LRD365
1 5 3 4 2 6
9 10
TEST
R A E S E T
98
NO
LRD33614369, LR2D35613563
6/14
50
46
97
95
NC
96
(1) Connection by lugs meets the requirements of certain Asian markets and is suitable for applications subject to strong vibration, such as railway transport. (2) Creep: normal crushing phenomenon of copper conductors, that is accentuated over time.
Dimensions, mounting : pages 6/26 to 6/28
Schemes: page 6/29
Characteristics

TeSys D
Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device Conforming to VDE 0106 Conforming to IEC 60068 Storage Normal operation, without derating (IEC 60947-4-1) Minimum /maximum operating temperatures (with derating) Operating positions without derating Flame resistance Shock resistance Vibration resistance (2) Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Surge withstand In relation to normal vertical mounting plane Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-7 Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60255-5 Conforming to IEC 60801-5 kV kV C C C C
Environment
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n 14. ATEX directive 94/9/EC (1) UL, CSA. (2) CCC, GOST ATEX INERIS (1). GL, DNV, RINA, BV, LROS Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X TH - 60+ 70 - 20+ 60 - 40+ 70 Any position. When mounting on a vertical rail, use a stop. V1 850 15 gn - 11 ms 6 gn 6 6
1 2 3 4
Electrical characteristics of power circuit

Relay type
LRD 01 LRD 1508 1532 16, LR3 D01 16 10 A V V 690 600 20
LRD 21 35, LR3 D21 35 10 A
LRD 313 LRD 313L 365 365L LR3 D313 365 10 A 20
LRD 3322 33696 LR3 D3322 33696 10 A 1000 (3)
LR2 D3522 3563 20
LRD 4365 4369 10 A
5 6 7 8 9 10
Tripping class Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Conforming to UL 508, IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to UL, CSA
600 except LRD 4369
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated operational voltage (Ue) Frequency limits Setting range Of the operating current Depending on model
kV V Hz A
6 690 0400 0.113 2.532 1238 965 965 17140 1780 80140
Conventional thermal current Max. sealed consumption of the operating coils of controlled contactors (Occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96) Protection against short-circuits

a.c. supply, AC-15 d.c. supply, DC-13 By gG, BS fuses. Maximum rating or by GB2
A V A V A A
5 120 3 125 0.22 5 240 1.5 250 0.1 380 0.95 440 0.06 480 0.75 500 0.72 600 0.12
(1) For relays LRD 01 to LRD 365, LRD 3322 to LRD 3365, LRD 4365 to LRD 4369, LRD 33656 to LRD 33696. (2) For relays LRD 313 to LRD 365: 6 gn only with independent plate mounting and 4 gn when mounted beneath the contactor. (3) 750 V for LRD 33656, LRD 33676, LRD 33696.
Schemes: page 6/29
6/15

TeSys D
1 2 3 4 5 6
Relay type
LRD 01 LRD 1508 1532 16, LR3 D01 16
LRD 21 35, LR3 D21 35
LRD 313 LRD 313L 365 365L LR3 D313 365 135 135 135
LRD 3322 LR2 33696 D3522 LR3 3563 D3322 33696 435 435
LRD 4365 4369
Connection to screw clamp terminals Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Solid cable without cable end Tightening torque Connection to spring terminals (Min/max c.s.a.) Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Connection by bars or lugs 1 conductor 1 conductor mm2 mm2 1.54 1.54 1.54 1.54 1 conductor 1 conductor mm2 mm2 1.510 14 1.510 450 435
16 135 except LRD 21: 14 1.5/10 135 except LRD 21: 1/6 1.85 2.5
1 conductor
mm2
16
135
435
450
N.m
1.7
125 : 5 125 : 5 35 : 8 35 : 8
e Relay type Pitch Bars or cables with lugs Without spreaders e mm N.m mm mm LRD 016 166 14.5 y6 y8 y 9.5 y7 M4 Tightening torque N.m 2.3
L LRD 216 356 17.5 y6 y8 y 10 y7 M4 2.3
L LRD 3136 3656 17.5 y6 y 13.5 y 16.5 y 10 M6 6
L' LRD 313L6 365L6 17.5 y6 y 13.5 y 16.5 y 10 M6 6 LRD 3322A66 3365A66 21.5 y6 y 16 y 16 y 12 M10 11.3
L
L d Screws
7 8 9 10

Bare cables
Connection to screw clamp terminals or spring terminals
Relay type
LRD 01 LRD 1508 1532 16, LR3 D01 16
LRD 21 35, LR3 D21 35
LRD 313 LRD 313L 365 365L LR3 D313 365
LRD 3322 33696 LR3 D3322 33696
LR2 D3522 3563
LRD 4365 4369
Connection to screw clamp terminals (1)
Solid cable without cable end Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end
mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m mm2 mm2
2 x 12.5 2 x 12.5 2 x 12.5 1.7 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5
Tightening torque Connection to spring terminals (Min/max c.s.a.) Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end
(1) For relays LRD 313 to 365: BTR hexagon socket head screws, EverLink system. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85). References: pages 6/20 and 6/21 Dimensions, mounting : pages 6/26 to 6/28 Schemes: page 6/29
6/16

TeSys D
Relay type
LRD 01 LRD 1508 1532 16, LR3 D01 16 C Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 A - 20+ 60 1.14 0.06 Ir
LRD 21 35, LR3 D21 35
LRD 313 LRD 313L 365 365L LR3 D313 365
LRD 3322 33696 LR3 D3322 33696
LR2 D3522 3563
LRD 4365 4369
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Temperature compensation Tripping threshold Sensitivity to phase failure
Tripping current 130 % of Ir on two phases, the third phase at 0.
Tripping curves
Average operating time related to multiples of the setting current LRD01 to LRD35, LR2D and LRD3322 to LRD 4369
Time Class 10 A
LRD1508 to LRD32 and LR2 D3522 to LR2 D3563

Time Class 20
hours
hours minutes seconds
2 1 40 20
2 1 40 20 10 4 2 1 40 20 10 4 2 1 0,8 0,8 1 2 4 6 10 17 20 x the setting current (Ir)
minutes seconds
10 4 2 1 40 20 10 4 2 1 0,8 0,8 1 2
1 2 3
4 6 10 17 20 x the setting current (Ir)
1 2 3
LRD313 to LRD365
Time Class 10 A
LRD313L to LRD365L
Time Class 20
hours
1 50 15 10
hours minutes seconds
2 1 40
20 10 5 2 1 40 20
minutes seconds
1 40 20 10 4 2 1
1 2 3
10 4 2 1 1 2 4
1 2 3
9 10
0,1
1 Balanced operation, 3-phase, without prior current flow (cold state). 2 2-phase operation, without prior current flow (cold state). 3 Balanced operation, 3-phase, after a long period at the set current (hot state).
References: pages 6/20 and 6/21 Dimensions, mounting : pages 6/26 to 6/28 Schemes: page 6/29
6/17
Description, characteristics

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, TeSys LR9 D
Description
1
107 Ir(A) 127
1 2 5 4 3
98 NO 97 95 NC 96
LR9 D electronic thermal overload relays are designed for use with contactors LC1 D115 and D150. In addition to the protection provided by TeSys D thermal overload relays (see page 6/14), they offer the following special features: b protection against phase imbalance, b choice of starting class, b protection of unbalanced circuits, b protection of single-phase circuits, b alarm function to avoid tripping by load shedding.
2 3
90
150
6
LR9D5367D5569
7 8 2
Class 107 127 Ir(A) 20 10 + 90 150
24 V - / 103 104
Load
5 4 3
Alarm 98 NO 97 95 NC 96
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
LR9D67 and D69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Adjustment dial Ir. Test button. Stop button. Reset button. Trip indicator. Setting locked by sealing the cover. Class 10/class 20 selector switch. Selector for balanced load /unbalanced load
Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device (Conforming to IEC 60255-8) Maximum operating altitude Operating positions without derating Shock resistance Vibration resistance Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Surge withstand Resistance to electrostatic discharge Conforming to IEC 60529 and VDE 0106 Standard version Storage Normal operation Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-7 Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60255-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 kV kV kV V/m kV C C m
Environment
IEC 60947-4-1, 255-8, 255-17, VDE 0660 and EN 60947-4-1 UL 508 , CSA 22-2 IP 20 on front panel with protective covers LA9 D11570p or D11560p TH - 40+ 85 - 20+ 55 (1) 2000 Any position 13 gn - 11 ms 2 gn - 5300 Hz 6 6 8 10 2 Meets requirements
Immunity to radiated Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 radio-frequency disturbances and NF C 46-022 Immunity to fast transient currents Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4
Electromagnetic compatibility Draft EN 50081-1 and 2, EN 50082-2
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts

Conventional thermal current Max. sealed consumption of the operating coils of controlled contactors (Occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96) Protection against short-circuits Cabling Flexible cable without cable end a.c. supply d.c. supply By gG or BS fuses or by circuit-breaker GB2 1 or 2 conductors Tightening torque A V VA V W A mm2 Nm 5 24 100 24 100 5 Minimum c.s.a.: 1 Maximum c.s.a.: 2.5 1.2 48 200 48 100 110 400 110 50 220 600 220 45 380 600 440 25 600 600
(1) For operating temperatures up to 70 C, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Schemes: page 6/29
6/18

3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, TeSys LR9 D
Relay type Tripping class
LR9 D Conforming to UL 508, IEC 60947-4-1 A V V Hz Hz A mm N.m 10 or 20 1000 600 8 5060 (1) 60150 20 M8 18

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to UL, CSA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Frequency limits Setting range Power circuit connections Of the operating current Depending on model Width of terminal lug Clamping screw Tightening torque
Temperature compensation Tripping thresholds
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Alarm Trip
C A A
- 20+ 70 1.05 0.06 In 1.12 0.06 In Tripping in 4 s 20 % in the event of phase failure
Sensitivity to phase failure Rated supply voltage Supply voltage limits Current consumption Switching capacity Protection Voltage drop Cabling Tightening torque
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 d.c. supply V V No-load Short-circuit and overload Closed state Flexible cable without cable end V mm2 N.m mA mA
Alarm circuit characteristics
24 1732 y5 0150 Self protected y 2.5 0.51.5 0.45
(1) For other frequencies and for applications involving the use of these overload relays with soft starters or variable speed drives, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
LR9 D tripping curves

Tripping time in seconds 1000
Average operating time related to multiples of the setting current
100
10
1 2
8
0 1
1,12
7 8 9 10 11 12 x the setting current (Ir)
1 Cold state curve 2 Hot state curve
9 10
Schemes: page 6/29
6/19
References

526200
Differential thermal overload relays

for use with fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers GV2 L and GV3 L b Compensated relays with manual or automatic reset, b with relay trip indicator, b for a.c. or d.c.
LRD pp Relay setting range (A) 0.100.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1624 2332 3038 913 1218 1725 2332 3040 3750 4865 1725 2332 3040 3750 4865 5570 6380 80104 80104 95120 110140 80104 95120 110140 Fuses to be used with selected relay aM (A) 0.25 0.5 1 1 2 2 4 6 8 12 12 16 20 25 40 40 16 20 25 40 40 63 63 25 40 40 63 63 80 80 100 125 125 160 100 125 160 gG (A) 2 2 2 2 4 4 6 10 16 20 20 25 35 50 63 80 25 32 50 63 80 100 100 50 63 100 100 100 125 125 160 200 200 250 160 200 250 BS88 (A) 6 10 16 16 20 20 25 32 50 63 80 25 35 50 63 80 100 100 50 63 80 100 100 125 125 160 160 200 200 160 200 200 For use with contactor LC1 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D12D38 D18D38 D25D38 D25D38 D32 and D38 D40AD65A D40AD65A D40AD65A D40AD65A D40AD65A D40AD65A D50A and D65A D80 and D95 D80 and D95 D80 and D95 D80 and D95 D80 and D95 D80 and D95 D80 and D95 D80 and D95 D115 and D150 D115 and D150 D150 (2) (2) (2) Reference Weight kg 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.124 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.510 0.900 0.900 0.900 1.000 1.000 1.000
1 2 3 4
LRD 3pp
526201
Class 10 A (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors

LRD 01 LRD 02 LRD 03 LRD 04 LRD 05 LRD 06 LRD 07 LRD 08 LRD 10 LRD 12 LRD 14 LRD 16 LRD 21 LRD 22 LRD 32 LRD 35 LRD 313 LRD 318 LRD 325 LRD 332 LRD 340 LRD 350 LRD 365 LRD 3322 LRD 3353 LRD 3355 LRD 3357 LRD 3359 LRD 3361 LRD 3363 LRD 3365 LRD 4365 LRD 4367 LRD 4369 LRD 33656 LRD 33676 LRD 33696
Class 10 A (1) for connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors (3)
526202
5 6
Class 10 A (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals or connectors
LRD 33pp
7 8 9 10
526203
LRD 3pp6
Class 10 A (1) for connection by lugs Select the appropriate overload relay with screw clamp terminals or connectors from the table above and add one of the following suffixes: b figure 6 for relays LRD 01 to LRD 35 and relays LRD 313 to LRD 365. b A66 for relays LRD 3322 to LRD 3363. Relays LRD 43pp are suitable, as standard, for use with lug-clamps. Class 10 A (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals or lugs In the references selected above, change the prefix LRD (except LRD 4ppp) to LR3 D. Example: LRD 01 becomes LR3 D01. Example with EverLinkconnectors: LRD 340 becomes LR3 D340. Example with lugs: LRD 3406 becomes LR3 D3406.
(1) Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current IR : class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds (2) Independent mounting of the contactor. (3) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85). Dimensions: Schemes: pages 6/26 to 6/28 page 6/29
Thermal overload relays for use with unbalanced loads
6/20

526204

Relay setting range (A) LRD pp3 0.100.16 0.160.25 0.250.40 0.400.63 0.631 11.6 1.62.5 2.54 46 5.58 710 913 1218 1624 Fuses to be used with selected relay aM (A) 0.25 0.5 1 1 2 2 4 6 8 12 12 16 20 25 gG (A) 2 2 2 2 4 4 6 10 16 20 20 25 35 50 BS88 (A) 6 10 16 16 20 20 25 32 50 For use with contactor LC1 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D09D38 D12D38 D18D38 D25D38 Reference Weight kg 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140 0.140
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Classes 10 A (1) for connection by spring terminals (only for direct mounting beneath the contactor)
LRD 013 LRD 023 LRD 033 LRD 043 LRD 053 LRD 063 LRD 073 LRD 083 LRD 103 LRD 123 LRD 143 LRD 163 LRD 213 LRD 223
Class 10 A with connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors(2) and control by spring terminals
913 1218 1725 2332 3040 3750 4865 16 20 25 40 40 63 63 25 32 50 63 80 100 100 25 35 50 63 80 100 100 D40AD65A D40AD65A D40AD65A D40AD65A D40AD65A D40AD65A D50A and D65A LRD 3133 LRD 3183 LRD 3253 LRD 3323 LRD 3403 LRD 3503 LRD 3653 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375
Classes 10 A (1) for connection by BTR screw connectors (2) and control by spring terminals In the references selected above, replace LRD 3 with LR3 D3. Example: LRD 3653 becomes LR3 D3653.
Classes 10 A (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals For relays LRD 06 to LRD 35 only, for an operating voltage of 1000 V, and only for independent mounting, the reference becomes LRD 33ppA66. Order an LA7 D3064 terminal block separately, see page 6/25. Standard relay
LRD06 LRD07 LRD08 LRD10 LRD12 LRD14 LRD16 LRD21 LRD22 LRD32 LRD35
Thermal overload relays for use on 1000 V supplies
Relay for 1000 V network

LRD 3306A66 LRD 3307A66 LRD 3308A66 LRD 3310A66 LRD 3312A66 LRD 3314A66 LRD 3316A66 LRD 3321A66 LRD 3322A66 LRD 3353A66 LRD 3355A66
(1) Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current IR: class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds (2) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85).
6/21

TeSysD, thermal overload relays
526205

Relay setting range (A) 2.54 46 5.58 Fuses to be used with selected relay aM (A) 6 8 12 16 16 25 32 40 40 gG (A) 10 16 20 20 25 35 50 63 63 BS88 (A) 16 16 20 25 25 40 50 63 63 For use with contactor LC1 D09D32 D09D32 D09D32 D09D32 D12D32 D18D32 D25 and D32 D25 and D32 D25 and D32 Reference Weight kg 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190 0.190
1 2 3 4
LRD 3ppL
526201
LRD 15pp
Classes 20 (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals

LRD 1508 LRD 1510 LRD 1512 LRD 1514 LRD 1516 LRD 1521 LRD 1522 LRD 1530 LRD 1532
710 913 1218 1725 2328 2532
Class 20 (1) for connection by EverLink BTR screw connectors (2)

913 1218 1725 2332 3040 3750 4865 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 35 40 50 63 80 100 125 D40AD65A D40AD65A D40AD65A D40AD65A D40AD65A D40AD65A D50A and D65A LRD 313L LRD 318L LRD 325L LRD 332L LRD 340L LRD 350L LRD 365L 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375
5 6 7 8 9 10
526206
Classes 20 (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals

LR2 D35pp 1725 2332 3040 3750 4865 5570 6380 32 40 40 63 80 100 100 50 63 100 100 125 125 160 50 63 80 100 100 125 125 D80 and D95 D80 and D95 D80 and D95 D80 and D95 D80 and D95 D80 and D95 D80 and D95 LR2 D3522 LR2 D3553 LR2 D3555 LR2 D3557 LR2 D3559 LR2 D3561 LR2 D3563 0.535 0.535 0.535 0.535 0.535 0.535 0.535
Class 20 (1) for connection by lugs For relays LRD 1508 to LRD 1532 and relays LRD 313L to LRD 365L, select the appropriate overload relay with screw clamp terminals or connectors from the table above and add the suffixe 6. Example: LRD 1508 becomes LRD 15086. Class 20 (1) for connection by screw clamp terminals or lugs For relays LRD 1508 to LRD 1532 and relays LR2 D3522 to LR2 D3563, select the appropriate overload relay with screw clamp terminals or connectors from the table above and change the prefix LRD or LR2 D to LR3 D. Example: LRD 1508 becomes LR3 D1508.
(1) Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current IR: class 20: between 6 and 20 seconds (2) BTR screws: hexagon socket head. In accordance with local electrical wiring regulations, a size 4 insulated Allen key must be used (reference LAD ALLEN4, see page 5/85).
6/22

TeSysD, thermal overload relays

for use with fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers NSX b Compensated relays, with relay trip indicator, b for a.c., b for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting(1).
Relay setting range (A) Fuses to be used with selected relay aM (A) 100 160 gG (A) 160 250 For mounting beneath contactor LC1 D115 and D150 D115 and D150 Reference Weight kg
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Classes 10 or 10A (2) for connection using bars or connectors

60100 90150 LR9 D5367 LR9 D5369 0.885 0.885
Classes 20 (2) for connection using bars or connectors

60100 90150 125 200 160 250 D115 and D150 D115 and D150 LR9 D5567 LR9 D5569 0.885 0.885
b Compensated relays, b with separate outputs for alarm and tripping.

Relay setting range (A)
Electronic thermal overload relays for use with balanced or unbalanced loads
Fuses to be used with selected relay aM (A) gG (A)
For mounting beneath contactor LC1 D115 and D150 D115 and D150
Reference
Weight kg
Classes 10 or 20 (2) selectable, for connection using bars or connectors

60100 90150 100 160 160 250 LR9 D67 LR9 D69 0.900 0.900
(1) Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds and/or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 5/84). (2) Standard IEC 60947-4-1 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current IR: class 10: between 4 and 10 seconds, class 10 A: between 2 and 10 seconds, class 20 A: between 6 and 20 seconds
Other versions
Thermal overload relays for resistive circuits in category AC-1. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
6/23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6/24
References

Separate components for relays

Description Pre-wiring kit allowing direct connection of the N/C contact of relay LRD 0135 or LR3 D01D35 to the contactor Terminal block (2) for clip-on mounting on 35 mm rail (AM1 DP200) or screw fixing; for fixing centres, see pages 6/26 to 6/28 EverLink terminal block for independent mounting Size 4 Allen key, insulated , 1000 V Terminal block adapter for mounting a relay beneath an LC1 D115 or D150 contactor LAD 7Cp Mounting plates (4) for screw fixing on 110 mm centres Marker holders, snap-in 8 x 18 mm
For use with
Sold in Unit lots of reference 10 10 1 1 1 1 5 1 10 1 100 100 1 10 1 1 2 1 1 1 LAD 7C1 (1) LAD 7C2 (1) LAD 7B106 LAD 7B105 LA7 D3064 (3) LAD 96560 LAD ALLEN4 LA7 D3058 (3) DX1 AP25 LA7 D902 LAD 90 LA7 D903 LA9 D91 LA7 D901 LAD 703p (6) (7) LA7 D03p (6) LA9F103 LAD 96570 LAD 96575 LAD 96566
Weight kg 0.002 0.003 0.100 0.100 0.370 0.087 0.026 0.080 0.065 0.130 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.005 0.090 0.090 0.560 0.021 0.010 0.010
LC1 D09D18 LC1 D25D38 LRD 0135 and LR3 D01D35 LRD 150832 LRD 43pp, LRD 33ppp, LR3 D33ppp, LR2 D35pp LRD 3pp, LRD 3ppL and LR3 D3pp LRD 3pp, LRD 3ppL and LR3 D3pp LRD 3pp, LR3 D3ppp, LRD 35pp LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35, LRD 150832 LRD 3ppp, LR3 D3ppp, LR2 D35pp LRD 3pp All relays except LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35, LRD 3pp, LRD 3ppL and LR3 D3pp All relays All relays except LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35, LR9 D and LRD 313LRD 365 LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35 and LRD 313LRD 365 All relays except LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35, LRD 3pp, LRD 3ppL and LR3 D3pp LR9 D LRD 31363656
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Bag of 400 blank legends (self-adhesive, 7 x 16 mm) Stop button locking device Remote Stop or electrical reset device (5) Remote tripping or electrical reset device (5) Block of insulated terminals LAD 7B106 IP 20 cover for lug type terminals for independent mounting
LRD 31363656 IP 20 cover for lug type terminals for mounting with contactor LC1 D40A6D65A6 Terminal block for lug type terminals for independent mounting LAD 96570 LRD 31363656
Remote control
Reset function
Description By flexible cable (length = 0.5 m) For use with LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35 and LRD 313LRD 365 All relays except LRD 0135, LR3 D01D35, LRD 3pp, LRD 3ppL and LR3 D3pp Sold in Unit lots of reference 1 1 LAD 7305 (7) LA7 D305 Weight kg 0.075 0.075
"Stop" and/or "Reset" functions The terminal protection shroud must be removed and the following 3 products must be ordered separately:
Adapter for door mounting Operating heads for spring return pushbutton LRD 33pp, LR2 D and LRD 15pp. Stop Reset All relays All relays 1 1 1 LA7 D1020 XB5 AL84101 XB5 AA86102 0.005 0.027 0.027
LAD 96570
LAD 96575
(1) These pre-wiring kits cannot be used with reversing contactors. (2) Terminal blocks are supplied with terminals protected against direct finger contact and screws in the open, "ready-to-tighten" position. (3) To order a terminal block for connection by lugs, the reference becomes LA7 D30646. (4) Remember to order the terminal block corresponding to the type of relay. (5) The time for which the coil of remote tripping or electrical resetting device LA7 D03 or LAD703 can remain energised depends on its rest time: 1 s pulse duration with 9 s rest time; 5 s pulse duration with 30 s rest time; 10 s pulse duration with 90s rest time; maximum pulse duration 20 s with a rest time of 300 s. Minimum pulse time: 200 ms. (6) Reference to be completed by adding the code indicating the control circuit voltage. Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office) : Volts 50/60 Hz c 12 J 24 B B 48 E E 96 DD 110 F F 220/230 M M 380/400 Q 415/440 N
Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 VA Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 W. (7) Not compatible with 3-pole relays fitted with spring terminals.
6/25

TeSys D thermal overload relays
LRD 0135
LRD 150832
Direct mounting beneath contactors with screw clamp connections
LRD 013223
Direct mounting beneath contactors with spring terminal connections c
1 2
Direct mounting beneath contactors with screw clamp connections c
92 70 c 45
45
3
LC1 b D09D18 123 D25D38 137 LC1 b c e a D09 a D25 c D09 c D25 D18 D38 D18 D38 90 97 53 97 96 60 90 107 53 97 106 60 LC1 b c
66 D093D253 168 See pages 5/92 and 5/93
45
4 5
See pages 5/92 and 5/93
LRD 313 365

Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1 D40AD65A with screw clamp connections or EverLink connectors
LRD 3136 3656

Direct mounting beneath contactors LC1 D40A6D65A6 with lugs
LAD 96570
115 185
123
55
7 8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 6/14 to 6/17 References : pages 6/20 and 6/21 Schemes : page 6/29
70
123
126
126
LAD 96575
55
6/26
192
236
Dimensions, mounting (continued)

LRD 4ppp
Direct mounting beneath contactors LC 1D115 and D150
LR9 D
Direct mounting beneath contactors LC 1D115 and D150
1 2
267
255 150 174
189
136
3
132 132 AM1 d d DL200 and DR200 2.5 120 DE200 and EDppp 10.5 AM1 d DP200 and DR200 2.5 DE200 and EDppp 10.5 d 120
LRD 0135
Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200 Independent mounting on 110 mm centres 46 LAD 7B106 LAD 7B106 35 10 = =
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
15
85
37,5
90
DX1 AP25
2x6,5
LRD 313 365

Mounting on rail AM1 Dp200 or ED200 With terminal block LAD 96560 LAD 96560 Panel mounting Outgoing terminal block not shown Mounted on plate AM1 P
(1)
2
LAD 96560
AF1 EA4
87
72
116 AM1 d DP200 2
d DE200 9.5
55
ED200 9.5
43
(1) 2 elongated holes 4.2 x 6.
43
LRD 0135 and LRD 313365

Remote tripping or electrical reset
LAD 703 (1) 32 (1) Can only be mounted on RH side of relay LRD0135 and LRD313365 Characteristics : pages 6/14 to 6/17 References : pages 6/20 and 6/21 Schemes : page 6/29
74
80
45
50
125
110
6/27
Dimensions, mounting(continued)

LRD 15pp
1 2
Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200 45 LAD 7B105 = 35 =
LA7 D03 (1)
41
82
50/65
100
2x4,5 17
96
34
3 4 5
AM1 d
DP200 2
DE200 9.5 (1) Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relay LR2 D15.
LRD 3ppp and LR2 D35pp

Independent mounting on 50 mm centres or on rail AM1 DP200 or DE200 75 LA7 D3064 = 50 =
LRD 3ppp, LR2 D35pp and LR9 D

LA7 D03 (1) 2 75/87
51,5
100
119 121 d 2x4,5 32 AM1 d DP200 2 DE200 9.5 23,5
21
(1) Can be mounted on RH or LH side of relay LRD 3ppp, LR2 D35pp or LR9 D.
6 7
LRD 15 and LRD 3ppp

Adapter for door mounted operator LA7 D1020 c 10 Stop Reset
LA7 D1020 c : adjustable from 17 to 120 mm
8 9
LRD, LRD 313365, LRD 15 and LR9 D

Reset by flexible cable LA7 D305 and LAD 7305 Mounting with cable straight Mounting with cable bent
c e M10x1
10
e : up to 20 mm c : up to 550 mm
e : up to 20 mm
Schemes : page 6/29
6/28
Schemes

LRD pp, LRD 3pp and LR2 Dpp
Pre-wiring kit LAD 7C1, LAD 7C2

_ KM
95 97
Man.
Test Stop
96
98
A2
Reset
Auto
1 2 3
95 96 _ LRD
LR9 D5ppp
L1 L2 L3
_ KM1 2 4 6
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
(3)
(4)
Test Stop Man. reset.
u112%
(3)
A1
(2)
95 97 96
_A
4 5 6 7
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
M 3
_M A1
_ KM 14
_ KM N A2
(1) Tripped. (2) Overload.
(3) Setting current. (4) Specialised circuit.
LR9 D67 and LR9 D69

L1 L2 L3
0V
_ KM1 2 4 6
(5)
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
103
(3)
(4)
104
13
(1)
98
u105% Test Stop Man. reset.
u112%
(3)
(5)
(2)
95 97 96 98
8 9 10
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
_ M 3
A _ KM A1 14 13
_M
_ KM N A2
(1)
(1) Tripped. (2) Overload. (3) Setting current. Characteristics : pages 6/14 to 6/17
(4) Specialised circuit. (5) Alarm.
6/29
Presentation
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, TeSys LR9 F
1 2 3 4
TeSys LR9 F electronic protection relays are especially suited to the operating conditions of motors. They provide protection against: b thermal overload of 3-phase or single-phase balanced or unbalanced circuits; b phase failure and large phase unbalance, b protracted starting times, b prolonged stalled rotor condition. LR9 F electronic protection relays are mounted directly below an LC1 F type contactor. They cover a range from 30 to 630 A, in eight ratings. The settings can be locked by sealing the transparent protective cover. A reset button is mounted on the front of the relay. Two versions are available: b simplified version: class 10: LR9 Fp3pp, class 20: LR9 Fp5pp, b complete version: class 10, 10 A or class 20, selectable, conforming to EN609474-1: LR9 Fpp. This latter version includes an alarm function which makes it possible to forestall tripping by load shedding. Simplified version: class 10 or 20
1
Presentation
2 5 4 3
98 NO 97 95 NC 96
107
Ir(A) 127
90
150
5 6
Class Ir(A) 20 107 127 + 90 150 Load
Complete version: class 10, 10 A or class 20, selectable, and alarm circuit
7 8 2 5 4 3
Alarm 98 NO 97 95 NC 96
7 8 9 10
10
24 V - / 103 104
9 1 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Ir adjustment dial Test button Stop button Reset button Trip indicator Setting locked by sealing the cover Class 10/class 20 selector switch Selector switch for balanced load /unbalanced load Alarm circuit
6/30
Characteristics
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Conforming to IEC 60529 Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device (conforming to IEC 60255-8) Maximum operating altitude Operating positions without derating Shock resistance Vibration resistance Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Surge withstand Resistance to electrostatic discharge Resistance to radiated radio-frequency disturbance Resistance to fast transient currents Electromagnetic compatibility Standard version Storage Normal operation Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-7 Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 255-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 EN 50081-1 and 2, EN 50082-2 kV kV kV V/m kV C C m IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60255-8, IEC 60255-17, EN 60947-4-1 and VDE 0660 UL 508, CSA 22-2 IP 20 IP 20 on front of relay with accessories LA9 F103 or LA7 F70p, see page 6/37 TH - 40+ 85 - 20+ 55 (1) 2000 Any position 13 gn - 11 ms 2 gn - 5 to 300 Hz 6 4 8 (in air) 6 (in indirect mode) 10 2 Conforming (1) For operating temperatures up to 70 C, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6/31
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Relay type Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-4 (Ui) Rated operational voltage Conforming to VDE 0110 gr C (Ue) Rated impulse Conforming to IEC 60947-1 withstand voltage (Uimp) Rated operational current (Ie) Short-circuit protection and coordination Frequency limits Power circuit connections Of the operating current Width of terminal lug
LR9 V V kV A
F5p57, F57 1000 1000 8 30 to 630
F5p63, F63 F5p67, F67 F5p69, F69
F5p71, F71
F7p75, F75 F7p79, F79
F7p81, F81
See pages: 1/18, 1/19, 1/30 and 1/31 Hz mm 5060. For other frequencies, please consult your Regional Sales Office (1) 20 25 25 30 LR9 F7p75 and LR9 F75 40 LR9 F7p79 and LR9 F79 M10 35 40
Clamping screw Tightening torque N.m
M6 10
M8 18
M10 35
M12 58
Auxiliary contact electrical characteristics

Conventional thermal current Short-circuit protection Control circuit connections By gG or BS fuses or by circuitbreaker GB2 CD10 Flexible cable with cable end 1 conductor 2 conductors Flexible cable 1 conductor without cable end 2 conductors Solid cable 1 conductor 2 conductors A A 5 5 Min. 1 x 0.75 2x1 1 x 0.75 2x1 1 x 0.75 2x1 1.2 24 100 24 100 48 200 48 100 110 400 110 50 220 600 220 45 380 600 440 25 600 600 Max. 1 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 1x4 2 x 2.5 1 x 2.5
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m V VA V W
Tightening torque Maximum sealed current consumption of the coils of associated contactors (occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96) a.c. supply
d.c. supply
(1) For applications involving the use of these overload relays with soft starters or variable speed drives, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
6/32
Tripping class Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 C 10, 10 A and 20 - 20+ 70 Manual on front of relay On front of relay On front of relay Actuation of N/C contact, without affecting N/O contact Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Alarm Tripping A A 1.05 0.06 In 1.12 0.06 In Tripping in 4 s 20 % in the event of phase failure Setting dial on front of relay Yes Temperature compensation Reset Fault indication Test function Stop function Tripping thresholds
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Sensitivity to phase failure Adjustment (nominal motor current) Security sealing
Alarm circuit characteristics

Rated supply voltage Supply voltage limits Current consumption Switching current Protection Voltage drop Connection Tightening torque Short-circuit and overload Closed state Flexible cable without cable end V mm2 N.m No-load d.c. supply V V mA mA 24 1732 y5 0150 Auto-protected y 2.5 0.51.5 0.45
LR9 F tripping curve

Average operating times depending on multiples of the setting current Class 10
Class 20
100
100
10
1 2
1 2
10
1 2 1,12
7 8 9 10 11 12 x times the setting current (Ir)
1 1,12
5 6 7 8 9 x times the setting current (Ir)
1 Cold state curve 2 Hot state curve
10
References : pages 6/34 to 6/37 Dimensions, schemes : pages 6/38 and 6/39
6/33
References
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, TeSys LR9 F for motor protection
1 2
819555
Thermal overload relays: b compensated and differential, b with relay trip indicator, b for a.c., b for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (1).
Relay setting range A Fuses to be used with selected relay aM gG A A 50 80 100 160 250 400 500 630 80 125 200 250 315 500 800 800 For direct mounting Reference beneath contactor LC1 Weight
Compensated and differential overload relays
kg F115F185 F115F185 F115F185 F115F185 F185F400 F225F500 F225F500 F400F630 and F800 F115F185 F115F185 F115F185 F115F185 F185F400 F225F500 F225F500 LR9 F5357 LR9 F5363 LR9 F5367 LR9 F5369 LR9 F5371 LR9 F7375 LR9 F7379 LR9 F7381 0.885 0.900 0.900 0.885 0.950 2.320 2.320 4.160
Class 10 (2)
3050 4880
3
LR9 F53pp
60100 90150 132220
4 5
200330
819556
300500 380630
Class 20 (2)
3050 4880 60100 LR9 F73pp 90150 132220 200330 300500 380630 50 80 100 160 250 400 500 630 80 125 200 250 315 500 800 800 LR9 F5557 LR9 F5563 LR9 F5567 LR9 F5569 LR9 F5571 LR9 F7575 LR9 F7579 0.885 0.900 0.900 0.885 0.950 2.320 2.320
6 7 8 9 10
Presentation : page 6/30 Characteristics : pages 6/31 to 6/33
F400F630 and LR9 F7581 4.160 F800 (1) When mounting overload relays up to size LR9 F5371 directly beneath the contactor, they may be additionally supported by a mounting plate (see page 6/37). Above this size it is always necessary to use the mounting plate. Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds and/or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 6/37). (2) Standard IEC 60947-4 specifies a tripping time for 7.2 times the setting current In: - class 10: between 4 and 10 seconds, - class 20: between 6 and 20 seconds.
6/34
3-pole electronic thermal overload relays, TeSys LR9 F for motor protection
Thermal overload relays: b compensated, b with relay trip indicator, b for a.c., b for direct mounting on contactor or independent mounting (1), b class 10 or 20 by selector switch, b protection of 3-phase or single-phase circuits by selector switch, b with alarm function that enables tripping to be forestalled.
Relay setting range A 3050 4880 60100 90150 LR9 F57 132220 200330 300500 380630 Fuses to be used with selected relay aM gG A A 50 80 80 100 160 250 400 500 630 125 200 250 315 500 800 800
Compensated overload relays, class 10 or 20 with alarm
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
For direct mounting Reference beneath contactor LC1 F115F185 F115F185 F115F185 F115F185 F185F400 F225F500 F225F500 LR9 F57 LR9 F63 LR9 F67 LR9 F69 LR9 F71 LR9 F75 LR9 F79
Weight
819557
kg 0.885 0.900 0.900 0.885 0.950 2.320 2.320
F400F630 and LR9 F81 4.160 F800 (1) When mounting overload relays up to size LR9 F71 directly beneath the contactor, they may be additionally supported by a mounting plate (see page 6/37). Above this size it is always necessary to use the mounting plate. Power terminals can be protected against direct finger contact by the addition of shrouds and/or insulated terminal blocks, to be ordered separately (see page 6/37).
6/35
References
Control accessories
1
LA7 D03p
Description Remote electrical reset device (1) Remote Reset function control by flexible cable (length = 0.5 m) Remote Stop and/or Reset function control Adapter for door mounted operator Rod (snap-off end to obtain required length, between 17 and 120 mm) Operating head for spring return pushbutton
Sold in lots of 1 1
Unit reference LA7 D03p (2) LA7 D305
Weight kg 0.090 0.075
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Presentation : page 6/30 Characteristics : pages 6/31 to 6/33
1 10
LA7 D1020 ZA2 BZ13
0.005 0.100
ZA2 Bpppp (3)
0.012
For mounting an LR9 F5p71 thermal overload relay together with an LC1F185 contactor
Description Reference LA7 F407 Set of 3 busbars Weight kg 0.160
LA7 D305
For mounting a thermal overload relay beneath a reversing contactor or stardelta contactors
Application For relay LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, F69, F71 LR9 F5p57, F5p63 LR9 F5p71, LR9 F71 LR9 F5p71, LR9 F71 LR9 F7p75, F7p79, LR9 F75, F79 LR9 F7p81, LR9 F81 For contactor LC1 F115 LC1 F150, F185 LC1 F185 LC1 F225, F265 LC1 F225...F400 LC1 F400 Width of terminal lug mm 15 20 25 25 25 25 30 40 Set of 3 busbars Reference LA7 F401 LA7 F402 LA7 F407 LA7 F403 LA7 F404 LA7 F404 LA7 F405 LA7 F406 Weight kg 0.110 0.110 0.160 0.160 0.160 0.160 0.270 0.600
LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, LC1 F500 LR9 F75, F79, F81 LR9 F7p81, LR9 F81 LC1 F630, F800
(1) The time for which the coil of remote electrical reset device LA7D03 can remain energised depends on its rest time: 1 s pulse duration with 9 s rest time; 5 s pulse duration with 30 s rest time; 10 s pulse duration with 90 s rest time. Maximum pulse duration of 20 s with rest time of 300 s. Minimum pulse time: 200 ms. (2) Reference to be completed by adding the coil voltage code. Standard control circuit voltages, (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office) : Volts 12 24 48 96 110 F F 220/ 230 M M 380/ 400 Q 415/ 440 N
a 50/60 Hz B E Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 VA c J B E DD Consumption, inrush and sealed: < 100 W. (3) Stop: ZA2 BL432 and Reset: ZA2 BL639.
6/36
Mounting plates for overload relay

For use with relays LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, F5p71, LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69, F71 LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, LR9 F75, F79, F81 Reference LA7 F901 LA7 F902 Weight kg 0.100 0.100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LA7 F90p
Sets of power terminal protection shrouds, single-pole

For use with relays LR9 F5p57, LR9 F57 LR9 F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, LR9 F63, F67, F69 LR9 F5p71, LR9 F71 LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, LR9 F75, F79, F81 Number of shrouds per set 6 6 6 6 Set reference LA9 F701 LA9 F702 LA9 F705 LA9 F703 Weight kg 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
LA9 F70p
Power terminal protection shrouds, 3-pole

For use with relays LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69 LR9 F5p71, LR9 F71 LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, LR9 F75, F79, F81 Reference LA7 F701 LA7 F702 LA7 F703 Weight kg 0.030 0.030 0.030
LA7 F70p

For use with relays LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, LR9 F57, F63, F67, F69 Set of 2 blocks Reference LA9 F103 Weight kg 0.560
Marking accessories
Description Clip-in marker holder LA9 F103 Bag of 400 blank self-adhesive legends 7 x 16 mm Sold in lots of 100 1 Unit reference LA7 D903 LA9 D91 Weight kg 0.001 0.001
6/37
Dimensions
Common side view
LR9 F5p71, F71

48 25
5,5
1 2
LR9 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, LR9 F5p69, F57, F63, F67, F69
120 50 50
123,5 56,8 (1) 3
48
50 (2) 40
50 40
5,5
44,8
101
96
60
71
60
76
71
46,8
115
(2) 6.5 x 13.5 for LR9 F5p57 and F57. 8.5 x 13.5 for LR9 F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, F63, F67, F69
20 115
(1) Terminal shroud LA9 F70p
3 4
Common side view

127,6
14 22,1
LR9 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, LR9 F75, F79, F81

P1 P2 30
LR9 F7p81 (for mounting beneath LC1 F630 and F800), LR9 F81
200 80
20
(1)
42,2
80
6 82 136,8
108,8 70
44,8
228,8
25
51,5 66 150
P1 48 55
51,5 66
40
5 6
(1) Terminal shroud LA9 F70p LR9 F7p75, F75 LR9 F7p79, F7p81, F79, F81
P2 48 55
188,8
62,1
40
76,5 193
76,5
Direct mounting beneath contactor LC1 F
Mounting beneath contactors: reversing LC2 F or star-delta LC3 F
Mounting plate for LR9 F
H3
H3
7
(1) (2) (3)
H1
H1
LA7 F4
(1)
(2) (3)
8 9 10
Contactors LC1 With LR9 relays b F115 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, 240 F57, F63, F67, F69 F150 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 246 F57, F63, F67, F69 F185 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 250 F57, F63, F67, F69 F225 F5p71, F71 273 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 308 F265 F5p71, F71 279 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 314 F330 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 317 F400 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 317 F500 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 346 F630, F800 F7p81, F81 510 (1) Relay mounting plate LA7 F90p, see page 6/37 (2) AM1 EC or AM1 DF for LC1 F115 to F630 and LC1 F800 Presentation : page 6/30 Characteristics : pages 6/31 to 6/33
H1 30 30 30 40 50 40 60 60 60 70 110
H2 50 50 50 50 58 50 58 58 58 58 58
H3 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 180 180 180
Contactors LC1 With LR9 relays F115 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69, F57, F63, F67, F69 F150 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 F57, F63, F67, F69 F185 F5p57, F5p63, F5p67, F5p69 F57, F63, F67, F69 F225 F5p71, F71 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 F265 F5p71, F71 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 F330 F7p75, F7p79, F75, F79 F400 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 F500 F7p75, F7p79, F7p81, F75, F79, F81 F630, F800 F7p81, F81 (3) DZ5 MB for LC1 F115 to F400
H2
LA7 F901 F902
G 145 190
H2
b H1 279 60 283 60 285 60
H2 50 50 50
360 332 363 364 364 390 509
100 90 100 100 100 110 120
58 50 58 58 58 58 58
Schemes : page 6/39
6/38
H2
H3 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 180 180 180
76
Schemes, setting-up
Schemes
L1 L2 L3
LR9 F5p57F7p81
LR9 F57F81 (with alarm)

L1 L2 L3
1
+
0V
(2)
KM1
2 4 6
KM1
5/L3
5/L3
103
1/L1
3/L2
1/L1
(3) (1)
112 %
3/L2
(4)
Test Stop Man. reset
(4)
(2)
104
(3)
2
(1)
95
Test Stop Man. reset
95 97
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
96
6/T3
97
98
3 4 5 6
96
A M 3 M
A1
A KM
14
M 3
13
KM
KM
A2
(1)
N
KM
A1
14
13
(1)
(1) Tripped on thermal overload (2) Overheating alarm (3) Setting current (4) Specialised circuit
Setting the relay b Lift the transparent cover 7 to gain access to the various settings. b Adjustment is achieved by turning dial 1 which is graduated directly in Amperes. b The setting can be locked by sealing the cover 7.
Setting-up the special functions of TeSys LR9 F thermal overload relays
LR9 F5369
Ir(A) 105 125 TEST
TRIPPED STOP RESET
1 7
90
150 98
NO
97
95
NC
96
6 5 4 3 2
A2
98
7
Test function 2
Test Trip indicator
Stop function 3
Stop
PED
8
ED STOP RE
T RESE STOP
TRIPP TEST
ED STOP RESE T
TRIPP TEST
9 10
b The Stop function is obtained by pressing the red STOP button 3. b Pressing the Test button: v actuates the N/C contact, v has no effect on the N/O contact. b The STOP button can be locked by fitting a U clip (reference: LA7 D901).
b The Test function is obtained by pressing the red TEST button 2 with a screwdriver. b Operation of the TEST button simulates tripping of the relay and: v actuates both the N/O and N/C contacts, v actuates the trip indicator 5.
6/39
Presentation, characteristics
Single-pole magnetic over current relays
Presentation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
References: pages 6/41 and 6/42 Dimensions: page 6/43
The RM1XA electromagnetic relay detects over current peaks in excess of the maximum permissible current value. It is designed for the protection of circuits which are not subject to current peaks (starters, resistors) or for controlling starting peaks on slip ring motors. It trips instantaneously and is not suitable for frequent operation (12 operating cycles per hour). It can withstand a continuous current equivalent to 1.25 times the minimum setting current.
Conforming to standards Approvals Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Operating position C m Standard version NF C 63-650, VDE 0660 CSA Standard version TC, special version TH Storage: - 60+ 70 Operation: - 40+ 60 3000 15 in relation to normal vertical mounting position

Maximum rated operational voltage Frequency limits of the rated operational current Conventional thermal current Occasional making and breaking capacities V Hz a or c 600 060
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts

A 10
a.c. supply
Voltage Power (1)
V VA V W
48 4000 48 240
110 12 000 110 200
220 17 000 220 190
380 22 000 440 180
600 600 180
d.c. supply
Voltage Power (2)
(1) Circuit such as the electromagnet of a contactor - cos j j inrush: 0.7 and cos j sealed: 0.4. (2) Circuit such as an electromagnet without economy resistor ; time constant varying from 20 ms for 5 W to 200 ms for 100 W or more.
Operating times
Time in ms
Operating times: because of the numerous applications for RM1XA over current relays, it is not possible to give precise operating times. The curves shown are therefore purely indicative.
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20
Setting points
4 25 In 3 1,6 In
2 In
10 8 0,9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 current passing/set current
0,8 In
Schemes: page 6/43
6/40
References
533558
Non-latching
Recommanded operating range (motor In) A a or c RM1 XA001
With 1 C/O contact block, non-latching

Setting range (trip current) A 1.254 26.3 3.210 516 825 12.540 2063 32100 50160 80250 125400 160500 250800 400 1250 6302200 6302000 Maximum continuous current a or c A 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 200 315 500 1000 1000 Reference Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0.71.15 1.161.8 1.92.9 34.6 4.77.2 7.311.5 11.618 18.129 29.146 46.172 73115 116145 146230 231360
RM1 XA001 RM1 XA002 RM1 XA004 RM1 XA006 RM1 XA010 RM1 XA016 RM1 XA025 RM1 XA040 RM1 XA063 RM1 XA100 RM1 XA160 RM1 XA200 RM1 XA315 RM1 XA500 RM1 XA101 RM1 XA101
kg 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990
a c
361630 361570
Accessory (to be ordered separately)

Description 1 C/O contact block, non-latching Reference RM1 ZG21 Weight kg 0.060
Schemes: page 6/43
6/41
533559
Latching with manual reset

Recommanded operating range (motor In) A a or c Setting range (trip current) A 1.254 26.3 3.210 516 825 12.540 2063 32100 50160 80250 125400 160500 250800 4001250 6302200 6302000
1 2 3 4
With 1 C/O contact block, latching with manual reset

Maximum continuous current a or c A 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 40 63 100 160 200 315 500 1000 1000 Reference Weight
0.71.15 1.161.8 1.92.9 34.6 4.77.2
RM1 XA0011 RM1 XA0021 RM1 XA0041 RM1 XA0061 RM1 XA0101 RM1 XA0161 RM1 XA0251 RM1 XA0401 RM1 XA0631 RM1 XA1001 RM1 XA1601 RM1 XA2001 RM1 XA3151 RM1 XA5001 RM1 XA1011 RM1 XA1011
kg 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990 0.990
RM1 XA0011
533560
7.311.5 11.618 18.129 29.146 46.172 RM1 XA1001 + ER1 XA2p 73115 116145 146230 231360 a 361630 361570
5
533561
6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics: page 6/40 Dimensions: page 6/43 RM1 XA0011 + RM1 ZH21

Description 1 C/O contact block, latching Reference RM1 ZH21 Weight kg 0.070 0.240
Electrical reset (1) ER1 XA2p (consumption: inrush, sealed: 500 VA) (fitted to the relay together with a latching contact block) Basic reference. Complete with code indicating control circuit voltage (2) (1) The impulse duration must not exceed 2 seconds within 10 minute intervals. (2) Standard coil voltages for electrical reset: Volts 24 48 110 220 50 Hz B E F M
380 Q
Schemes: page 6/43
6/42
Dimensions, schemes
Dimensions
RM1 XAppp, RM1 XAppp1
RM1 XA001XA040 RM1 XA0011XA0401
RM1 XA063, XA100 and XA315 RM1 XA0631, XA1001 and XA3151
RM1 XA160, XA200, and XA500 RM1 XA1601, XA2001, and XA5001
RM1 XA101, RM1 XA1011
1 2
Common side view
RM1 ZH2
d1
L1
M4/M5
M12 25
25 25 25
110
124
L 13 123
27,5 27,5 55
S d
S d
50 63,5
3
M6 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10
RM1 XAppp1 with electrical reset ER1 XA2p

48
RM1 XA 063 XA 100 XA 160 XA 200 XA 315 XA 500 XA 101
d 20.5 20.5 27.5 27.5 35.5 40.5
d1 5.5 5.5 7
M 83 87 94 94 74 84
L 25 25 25 25 44 44 37
2
L1 40 40 40 40 55 55 64
S 15 20 25 25 30 40
4 5 6
155
27,5 27,5 55
Schemes
Latching
91
RM1 XAppp1
RM1 XAppp
Non-latching
RM1 XA
3-wire control (without mechanical latching)
91 1 93
2-wire control (with mechanical latching)

91 1 93
3-wire control (with trip signal)

91 93 1
93
91
93
RM1
RM1
RM1
7 8
92
94
92
94
92
94
92
94
92
94 X1 X2
S1
11
S1
12
13
13
13
S2
KM1
13
S2
KM1
14
A1 14
14
A1 14
A1
14
13
12
11
KM1
KM1
KM1
H1
A2
A2
A2
9 10
Characteristics: page 6/40 References : pages 6/41 and 6/42
6/43
Selection guide

Thermistor protection units for use with PTC thermistor probes (1)
Applications
General protection and protection of motors fitted with PTC thermistor probes (1)
1 2 3
Standards and approvals IEC 60034-11, UL, CSA
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Reset method
Automatic
Fault signalling
Fault memory in the event of a supply failure
Fault test
Rated control circuit voltages a 50/60 Hz
Single voltage 115 V or 230 V
Rated control circuit voltages c
Single voltage 24 V
Contact type
1 N/C
Protection unit type
LT3 SE
Page 6/50 (1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient
Pages
6/44
1 2 3
IEC 60034-11, PTB, UL, CSA LROS
Automatic
Manual or automatic
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
On front panel of unit and remote
Yes
By pushbutton on front panel of unit
Dual voltage 115/230 V Multivoltage 24230 V
Single voltage 400 V Dual voltage 24/48 V, 115/230 V Multivoltage 24230 V Dual voltage 24/48 V Multivoltage 24230 V
Dual voltage 24/48 V
Dual voltage 1 N/C + 1 N/O Multivoltage 2 C/O
Single voltage or dual voltage 1 N/C + 1 N/O Multivoltage 2 C/O
LT3 SA
Page 6/50
LT3 SM
6/45
General
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LT3Sp thermistor protection units continuously monitor the temperature of the machines to be protected (motors, generators, etc.) by means of PTC thermistor probes embedded in the machine windings. If the nominal operating temperature of the probes is reached, they convert the rapid increase in resistance into a switching function which can be used to switch off the machine or signal a fault (see paragraph relating to thermistor probes below). Accidental breaks in the supply circuits of the thermistors are also detected.
Application
Conforming to Electromagnetic compatibility directive. Conforming to standard EN 61000-6-2. Resistance to electrostatic discharge (conforming to IEC 61000-4-2) Resistance to fast transients (conforming to IEC 61000-4-4) Susceptibility to electromagnetic fields (conforming to IEC 61000-4-3) Surge resistance 1.2/50 - 8/20 (conforming to IEC 61000-4.5) Immunity to microbreaks and voltage drops (IEC 61000-4-11) Suitable for use with variable speed controllers
Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 4
Electromagnetic compatibility
Range of most commonly used PTC thermistor probes: from 90 to 160C, in steps of 10 C. Curve R = f (q), characteristic of a PTC thermistor probe, is defined by standard IEC60947-8. The choice of PTC thermistor probe to be incorporated in the motor winding depends on the insulation class, the type of motor and the most suitable location for the probe. This choice is usually made by the motor manufacturer or the motor rewinder, who have all the necessary information. Application example
Insulation class of rotating machines conforming to IEC 60034-11 (S1 duty) NOT Nominal operating temperature C Temperature at which rapid increase in resistance occurs Probes used for Alarm Fault C C
Thermistor probes
A B E F H
100 110 120 140 160
100 110 120 140 160
100 120 130 150 170
(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient
6/46
Characteristics
Protection unit type Reset method Fault indication Fault test Probe interchangeability
LT3SE Automatic Label Mark A to IEC60034-11 IEC 60034-11 VDE 0660
LT3SA Automatic On front panel of unit and remote Label Mark A to IEC60034-11 IEC 60034-11 VDE 0660 LROS
LT3SM Manual/Automatic On front panel of unit and remote By pushbutton on front panel of unit Label Mark A to IEC60034-11 IEC 60034-11 VDE 0660
1 2 3 4 5
Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection e marking Ambient air temperature around the device Storage Conforming to IEC 60068-2-1 and 2-2 Operation Without derating With derating Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 In relation to normal vertical mounting plane C C
IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529, VDE 0106 LT3Sp protection units have been designed to comply with the basic recommendations of European directives relating to low voltage and EMC. Therefore LT3Sp products bear the European Community e mark. - 40+ 85 - 25+ 60 1500 m Up to 3000 m, the maximum permissible ambient air temperature for operation (60 C) must be reduced by 5 C per additional 500 m above 1500 m 2.5 gn (225 Hz) 1 gn (25150 Hz) 5 gn (11 ms) Any position
Maximum operating altitude
Vibration resistance Shock resistance Operating positions without derating
Power supply circuit characteristics

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) a 50/60 Hz 0.851.1 Uc a 50/60 Hz 0.851.1 Uc c 0.81.25 Uc 0.851.1 Uc Sealed Single voltage Dual voltage Multivoltage Single voltage Dual voltage Multivoltage a c V V V V V V VA W 115 or 230 24 < 2.5 <1 115/230 24230 24/48 24230 < 2.5 <1 400 115/230. 24/48 24230 24/48 24230 < 2.5 except (400 V : 2.7) <1
6 7 8 9 10
Average consumption
6/47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Protection unit type Resistance Maximum number of probes fitted in series (2) Voltage at terminals in the thermistor circuit
Tripping Reset Probes y 250 W at 25 Normal operation (R = 1500 W) Conforming to IEC 60034-11 (R = 4000 W) Operating threshold Distance Minimum c.s.a. of conductors
W W
LT3SE 27003100 15001650 6 < 2.5 < 7.5 300 0.75 400 1
LT3SA 27003100 15001650 6 < 2.5 < 7.5 < 20 500 1.5
LT3SM 27003100 15001650 6 < 2.5 < 7.5 < 20 1000 (3) 2.5
V V W m mm2
Thermistor probe short-circuit detection Connection of probes to the LT3
Electrical characteristics of the output relay contacts

Contact type Rated insulation voltage Maximum operational voltage Rated impulse withstand voltage Conventional thermal current Operational power Breaking capacity Uimp Single voltage or dual voltage Multivoltage V V kV A VA 120 V 250 V 24 V A A A mm2 mm2 N.m 1 N/C a 500 1 N/C + 1 N/O 2 C/O 1 N/C + 1 N/O 2 C/O
a 250 (a 400 V for LT3SM00V) 2.5 5 100 for 0.5 million operating cycles 6 3 2 2 x 11 x 2.5 1 x 0.752 x 2.5 0.8
At 220 V In cat. AC-16
In DC-13 Cabling (cage type connector) for flexible or solid cable Tightening torque
Without cable end With cable end
Thermistor probe characteristics

Probe type Conforming to standards Resistance Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Insulation Length of connecting cables At 25 C Per probe W V kV DA1TTppp IEC 60034-11. Mark A 3 x 250 in series c 2.5 V max 2.5 Reinforced Between probes Between probe and motor terminal plate mm m 250 1 DA1TSppp
250 c 2.5 V max 1 Reinforced 1
(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient (2) Provided that the total resistance of the probe circuit is less than 1500 W at 20 C. (3) For distances greater than 500 m take cabling precautions (twisted shielded pairs).
6/48
Guaranteed operating zones: examples with 3 probes type DA1TTppp (250 W at 25C) in series, conforming to standard IEC 60034-11, Mark A. LT3SE, LT3SA, LT3SM protection units
Resistance (ohms)
LT3S protection unit/thermistor probe combination
1 2
10 000
3100 2700 1650 1500 1000 750
Trip zone Reset zone
3 4
Trip zone on probe short-circuit NOT -5 C NOT NOT +5 C Temperature (C)
100
20 10
1 3 probes type DA1TTppp (250 W at 25 C) in series. NOT: Nominal Operating Temperature Protection unit tripped. Protection unit reset. (1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient
NOT + 15 C
NOT -20 C
-20
5 6 7 8 9 10
6/49
References
1 2 3 4 5
108694-24-M
Protection units (without fault memory) Units with automatic reset with thermistor short-circuit detection
Connection Cage connectors Voltage a 50/60 Hz 115 V 230 V c 24 V Output contact N/C N/C N/C Reference LT3SE00F LT3SE00M LT3SE00BD Weight kg 0.220 0.220 0.220
Units with automatic reset with thermistor short-circuit detection On front panel: fault and voltage signalling indicator.
LT3SE00M
108698-24-M
Connection Cage connectors
Voltage a 50/60 Hz c a 50/60 Hz or c 115/230 V 24/48 V
Output contact N/C + N/O N/C + N/O
Reference LT3SA00M LT3SA00ED LT3SA00MW
Weight kg 0.220 0.220 0.220
24230 V 2 C/O
Protection units (with fault memory) Units with manual reset with thermistor short-circuit detection On front panel: - fault and voltage signalling indicator, - Test and Reset button.
Connection LT3SA00M
108696-24-M
Voltage a 50/60 Hz 400 V 24/48 V 115/230 V c a 50/60 Hz or c 24/48 V
Cage connectors
Output contact N/C + N/O N/C + N/O N/C + N/O N/C + N/O
Reference LT3SM00V LT3SM00E LT3SM00M LT3SM00ED LT3SM00MW
Weight kg 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.220 0.220
6 7
LT3SM00M
24230 V 2 C/O
8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 6/47 to 6/49 Dimensions : page 6/52 Schemes : pages 6/52 and 6/53
6/50
813383
PTC thermistor probes (1)

Nominal Operating Temperature (NOT) C Integrated triple 90 probes 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 DA1TTppp Surface probes 60 70 80 Description Colour Sold in lots of Unit reference Weight
1 2 3 4 5
Green/green Brown/brown Grey/grey Blue/blue White/blue Black/black Blue/red White/green White/grey White/brown White/white Green/green Red/red
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
DA1TT090 DA1TT110 DA1TT120 DA1TT130 DA1TT140 DA1TT150 DA1TT160 DA1TT170 DA1TS060 DA1TS070 DA1TS080 DA1TS090 DA1TS100
kg 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005
813384
90 100

Description Adapter Application For fixing on 4 rail DZ5MB Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference RHZ66 Weight kg 0.005
Marking accessories
Clip-in markers Strips of 10 identical numbers 25 (maximum of (0 to 9) 5 per unit) Strips of 10 identical capital letters 25 (A to Z) DA1TSppp AB1Rp (2) AB1Gp (2) 0.002 0.002
6 7 8 9 10
(1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient (2) When ordering, replace the p in the reference with the number or letter required.
6/51
Dimensions, schemes, setting-up

Dimensions
1 2 3 4 5 6
LT3SE, SA, SM Mounting on 5 rail AM1DP200
Mounting on 1 4 rail (with adapter RHZ66)
100
115
98,4
100
50
50
RHZ 66
22,5
Schemes for no fault operation

LT3SE Without fault memory
A1
LT3SA dual voltage
LT3SA multivoltage
T1
(2)
96 95
T1 T2
96 (2) 98 97 95
Ue
Fault
T1
95 (2) 05 08 06 98 96 A
A1 or B1
T2
T2
A2
A1
Ue
Fault
A M K
LT3SM dual voltage and 400 V (without B1) LT3SM multivoltage
A2
A2
M K
K H
M K
LT3Sp dual voltage Terminal Voltage A1 48 V 230 V B1 24 V 115 V
K H
T1 T2 Rd
96 (2) 98 97 95 Rd A M K K H
Ue
Fault Reset
T1 T2
95 (2) 05 08 06 98 96 A M K K H
A1 or B1
Y1 Test Y2
Y1 Test Y2
A1
Ue
Fault
7
Setting-up
8 9 10
Cabling It is inadvisable to use the same multi-core cable for the thermistor probe circuit and the power circuit. This is especially important for long cable runs. If it is impossible to comply with the above recommendation, a pair of twisted conductors must be used for the thermistor probe circuit. Testing the insulation of the line connecting the thermistors to the LT3S unit Before carrying out this test, short-circuit all the terminals of the LT3S protection unit. Measure the insulation value between these terminals and earth using a megger or a flash tester, progressively increasing the voltage to the value defined by the standards. Checking the PTC thermistor probes for correct operation With the machine stopped, in the cold state and after having taken all the necessary safety precautions: b disconnect the line linking the thermistors to the LT3S protection unit, at the terminals of the machine being protected: motor, etc., b using an ohmmeter with a voltage rating less than or equal to 2.5 V, measure the resistance of the probe circuit at the machine terminals, b depending on the number and type of thermistors connected in series, check that their resistance value at 25 C is correct. Example: motor fitted with 3 PTC thermistor probes with a resistance y 250 W at 25 C. Any value higher than 250 x 3 = 750 W indicates a problem. (1) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient (2) Relay energised: the contacts are shown in the operating position.
A2
6/52
A2
Reset
Operation
L1
A1 or B1
L2 L3 N T1 T2
96 98 97
Ko
Ue
Fault
Starting The LT3SA is normally energised and its internal relay is in the pre-energised position. The motor is started by operating pushbutton M automatically held in by K (3-wire control circuit).
LT3SA protection units
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
95
A2
A M K K H
Thermal fault The strong increase in resistance of the PTC probes at the moment their temperature reaches the nominal operating temperature (NOT) is detected by the LT3SA unit and causes the relay to drop out; indicator H comes on, as does the built-in indicator on unit LT3SA. Contactor K drops out and pressing button M has no effect.
Operating temperature NOT, Tripping threshold Reset threshold Relay Ko Fault indicator Contactor K Pushbutton M
Reset As the motor cools, it reaches the reset threshold, 2 to 3 C below the nominal operating temperature. The relay resets and the motor can be started by pressing button M.
L1
A1 or B1
L2 L3 N T1 T2
Operation is very similar to that described above, except for the following:
96 98 97
Ko
LT3SM protection units
Ue
Fault
95
Reset After tripping on thermal fault and cooling to the reset threshold, the Test/RESET button on the unit (R1) or a remote reset button (Rd) must be pressed to energise the relay. The fault is therefore memorised, even though the temperature of the probes has dropped to well below the reset threshold.
K H
R1 K
A2
A Rd M K
Signalling circuit As the relay is fitted with 2 separate contacts, the signalling voltage may be different from the contactor control voltage.
Operating temperature NOT, Tripping threshold Reset threshold Test/Reset button Reset Rd Relay Ko Fault indicator Contactor K
Test Pressing the Test/RESET button simulates a fault and causes the relay to drop out: the FAULT indicator comes on, as does the remote signalling indicator. The unit is reset by pressing the Test/RESET button again.
Pushbutton M
6/53
Presentation, description

Electronic over current relays
Presentation
510429
1 2 3 4 5
LR97D and LT47 electronic over current relays have been developed to satisfy machine protection requirements. These relays have definite time characteristics: current threshold and time based function. They are particularly recommended for providing mechanical protection on machines with high resistive torque, high inertia and with strong probability of jamming under steady state conditions. They can be used for motor protection in the case of long starting times or frequent starting. The LR97D relay also incorporates two fixed time protection functions, one of 0.5 seconds against locked rotor and one of 3 seconds against phase failure. LR97D and LT47 can be used to provide mechanical shock protection. In this case, setting the O-Time knob to minimum will ensure tripping in 0.3 seconds.
Applications
LR97D and LT47 relays are particularly suitable for the following machines: b Monitoring function for excessively long starting time on machines with a risk of difficult starting: v Machines with high resistive torque, high inertia machines. b Monitoring of machines during steady state operation: overtorque detection function v Machines with strong risk of jamming, machines with torque build-up over time, v Mechanical failure monitoring, v Faster detection of malfunctioning on machines where the motor is oversized in relation to its thermal protection It. b Motor protection for specific applications: v Machines with long starting times, v Machines with high on-load factor: more than 30 to 50 starts/hour, v Machine with fluctuating load from a steady state, where the thermal image of a thermal overload relay (thermal memory) is unsuitable in relation to actual overheating of the motor. Examples of machines: v Conveyors, crushers and mixers, v Fans, pumps and compressors, v Centrifuges and spin-dryers, v Presses, shearing machines, saws, broaching machines, sanders and lifting hoists.
LR97D
510430
Operation
Because of their two separate time settings, LR97D and LT47 relays can be combined with the motor-starter function: D-Time: starting time, O-Time: trip time during steady state. The D-Time function is only available during the motor starting phase. During this phase the overload detection function is inhibited in order to allow starting. Under steady state conditions, when the motor current is greater than the setting current due to an overload or single-phasing, the red LED lights up and the internal relay switches its contact after a time preset by the O-Time knob. The red LED stays on, indicating that the relay has tripped. The relays are simple to set, in 5 easy steps: - Adjust the 3 knobs to maximum (Load, D-Time and O-Time), - Adjust the D-Time knob to the value corresponding to the motor starting time. - When the motor reaches steady state, adjust the Load knob (turn the knob counter-clockwise until the red LED starts to flicker). - Slowly turn the Load knob clockwise until the LED goes out. - Set the required tripping time, using the O-Time knob.
LT47
6 7 8
A1 A2 98
Description
Description
LR97Dppppp LT47ppppp
Status signalling
LR97Dppppp LT47ppppp To assist fast diagnostics, two LEDs (one green and one red) allow signalling of the operating status:
Status Voltage Starting Steady state On On Off Off L1 Off L2 Off On Off On LED signal Green LED Off Red LED Condition Voltage Starting Steady state Overload Trip On On Off On Off On LED signal Green LED Off Red LED
RESET
3 4 9 1 8 2
3 4 2
TEST RESET
TEST/STOP
95
96
2T1
4T2
6T3
9 10
5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 RESET knob TEST/STOP knob Ready/Run Indicator Relay tripped indicator Current setting Adjustment of starting time
10
Overload OverTrip current Rotor locked Pha se failure
7 Adjustment of tripping time 8 Manual/Auto adjustment 9 Single-phase/3-phase adjustment 10 Retractable fixing lugs
L3 Off
Curves : pages 6/55 and 6/56
Dimensions, mounting : page 6/59
Schemes : page 6/59
6/54
Curves

Curves
LR97D
Overload protection Protection against locked rotor and mechanical jamming under steady state conditions
U power supply A1-A2 Starting Locked rotor on starting Mechanical jamming during steady state operation Overload Brief overload
1 2
t
O-Time Reset: Manual (1) or electric (3)
3 x I setting
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current D-Time
0,5 s
O-Time
Tripping due to locked rotor or mechanical jamming during 95 steady state operation Tripping on overload 95
96 98 96 98
Reset: Manual (1) automatic (2) or electric (3)
3 4 5
Overload protection Protection against phase failure during starting and during steady state operation
U power supply A1-A2 Starting Phase failure Missing phase Overload Brief overload
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current D-Time
t <3s
O-Time O-Time
<3s
Tripping due to 95 phase failure Tripping on overload 95
96 98 96 98
Reset: Manual (1) or electric (3)
6 7 8
Reset: Manual (1) automatic (2) or electric (3)
Mechanical shock protection

U power supply A1-A2 Starting Overload
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current D-Time O-Time set to minimum (02-03 s) Reset: Manual (1) automatic (2) or electric (3)
Tripping to due mechanical shock 95
96 98
9 10
(1) By Reset button. (2) Fixed time of 120 s. Selectable by dip switch. Function not available in the event of tripping due to locked rotor/mechanical jamming (I > 3 x I setting ) or phase failure. (3) By brief interruption of power supply, minimum 0.1 s.
Presentation, description : page 6/54
Schemes : page 6/59
6/55
Curves (continued), characteristics

Curves (continued)
1 2 3 4
LT47 Overload protection
U power supply A1-A2
Starting Brief overload
Overload
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current D-Time O-Time O-Time Reset: Manual (1) automatic (2) or electric (3)
Trip 95 on overload 97
96 98
Mechanical shock protection

U power supply A1-A2 Starting Overload
Setting current Normal steady state operation Current
t
D-Time O-Time set to minimum (02-03 s) Reset: Manual (1) automatic (2) or electric (3)
5 6 7 8 9 10
Tripping due to 95 mechanical shock 97
96 98
(1) By Reset button. (2) Only available on version with automatic reset (LT47ppppA). Time adjustable from 1 to 120 s with the R-Time knob. (3) By brief interruption of power supply, minimum 0.1 s.
Characteristics
Environment
Relay type Conforming to standards Product certifications Degree of protection Protective treatment Ambient air temperature around the device LR97Dppppp IEC60255-6, IEC 60947 UL, CSA IP 20 (front face) TH - 30+ 80 - 25+ 60 2000 Any position 15 gn - 11 ms 4 gn kV kV kV kV V/m kV V 2 6 8 (level 3) 6 (level 3) 10 (level 3) 2 Class A 10 LT47ppppp IEC60255-6, IEC 60947 UL, CSA IP 20 (front face) TH - 30+ 80 - 25+ 60 2000 Any position 15 gn - 11 ms 4 gn 2 6 8 (level 3) 6 (level 3) 10 (level 3) 2 Class A 10
Conforming to IEC 60529 and VDE 0106 Conforming to IEC 60068 Storage Normal operation without derating (IEC 60947-4-1)
C C m
Maximum operating altitude Operating positions In relation to normal without derating vertical mounting plane Shock resistance Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-7 Vibration resistance Permissible acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Dielectric strength at 50 Hz Conforming to IEC 60255-5 Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 Resistance to In open air electrostatic discharge In direct mode Immunity to radiated radio-frequency disturbance Immunity to fast transient currents Conducted emissions Conforming to EN 55011 Conducted HF disturbance Conforming to EN 61000-4-6
Schemes : page 6/59
6/56

Characteristics

Relay type Contact type Conventional thermal current Maximum hold consumption of controlled contactor coils (occasional operating cycles of contact 95-96) Short-circuit protection LR97Dppppp 1 NO/NC 3 a 24 a 48 70 140 c 24 c 48 55 55 3 LT47ppppp 1 N/O + 1N/C 3 a 24 a 48 70 140 c 24 c 48 55 55 3
1
a 110 360 c 110 28 a 220 360 c 220 28
Conforming to IEC 60947
By gG, BS fuses. Maximum rating or GB2 circuit-breaker Connection by cable or lug-clamps Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors Min. without cable end Max. Flexible cable 1 or 2 conductors Min. with cable end Max. External of lugs of screw Tightening torque
A V VA V W A
a 110 360 c 110 28
a 220 360 c 220 28
2 3 4 5 6
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm mm N.m
1 x 0.75 2 x 2.5 1 x 0.34 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 7 M3 0.61.2
1x1 2 x 2.5 1x1 2 x 2.5 7 M3.5 0.8...1.7

Relay type Setting range Tripping class Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Depending on model Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Conforming to UL, CSA A V V kV Hz mm2 mm2 mm mm N.m LR97D015pp to LR97D25pp 0.338 Adjustable 690 600 6 5060 1.5 10 1 4 10 M4 2 2.5 10 1 6 12 M4 2 LR97D38pp LT47ppppp 0.560 Adjustable 690 600 6 5060
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Frequency limits Of the operating current Connection by cable or lug-clamps Flexible cable 1 conductor Min. without cable end Max. Flexible cable 1 conductor Min. with cable end Max. External of lugs of screw Tightening torque
Relay type Adjustment Current Time A s s s LR97Dppppp Load knob 0.530 0.2/0.310 Reset button 120 s fixed By interruption of power supply (minimum 0.1 s) On starting Steady state Inhibited After O-time during D-time After D-time <0.5 s <3 s 2 LEDs Test Stop No load Under load Yes <3 s LT47ppppS Load knob 0.530 0.2/0.310 Reset button By interruption of power supply (minimum 0.1 s) On starting Steady state Inhibited After O-time during D-time Inhibited After O-time during D-time Inhibited After O-time during D-time 2 LEDs No load Under load Yes LT47ppppA Load knob 0.2/0.330 1120 Reset button R-time knob: 1-120 s By interruption of power supply (minimum 0.1 s) After O-time After O-time After O-time 2 LEDs No load Under load Yes
D-time knob O-time knob R-time knob
7 8 9 10
Reset
Manual Automatic Electrical
Protection functions Overload Imax > Isetting Locked rotor, mechanical jamming I > 3 x Isetting Tripping Tripping
Sensitivity to phase failure Tripping Status and fault signalling (see table page 6/54) TEST/STOP function Sealing
Schemes : page 6/59
6/57
References

510429
LR97D electronic over current relays

Relay setting range A 0.31.5 Usable range (1) A 0.31.3 For use with contactor (2) LC1D09D38 Relay supply voltage a 200240 V a 100120 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 V a 100120 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 V a 100120 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 V a 100120 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V Reference (3) Weight kg 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172 0.172
1 2
LR97D07pp
1.27
1.26
LC1D09D38
525
521
LC1D09D38
3 4 5
2038
2034
LC1D25D38
LR97D015M7 LR97D015F7 LR97D015B LR97D015E LR97D07M7 LR97D07F7 LR97D07B LR97D07E LR97D25M7 LR97D25F7 LR97D25B LR97D25E LR97D38M7 LR97D38F7 LR97D38B LR97D38E
510430
LT47 electronic over current relays

Relay setting range A 0.56 Usable range (1) A 0.55 Relay supply voltage Reference Weight kg a 200240 V a 100120 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 V a 100120 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 V a 100120 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 V a 100120 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 V a 100120 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V a 200240 V a 100120 V c/a 24 V c/a 48 V For use with Sold in lots of LT4706M7S LT4706F7S LT4706BS LT4706ES LT4730M7S LT4730F7S LT4730BS LT4730ES LT4760M7S LT4760F7S LT4760BS LT4760ES LT4706M7A LT4706F7A LT4706BA LT4706EA LT4730M7A LT4730F7A LT4730BA LT4730EA LT4760M7A LT4760F7A LT4760BA LT4760EA Unit reference 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0,192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 Weight
LT47 relay with manual/electric reset
330
325
6 7 8 9 10
LT4730ppp
560
550
LT47 relay with automatic reset

0.56 0.55
330
325
560
550

Description kg LC1D09D18 10 LAD7C1 0.002 Pre-wiring kits allowing connection of the LR97D LC1D25D38 10 LAD7C2 0.003 relay N/C contact directly to the contactor LR97D 1 LAD7B106 0.100 Terminal block for clip-on mounting on 35 mm rail (AM1DP200) (1) To allow adjustment of the tripping sensitivity, see adjustment method (page 6/54). (2) Please see pages 5/46 and 5/47. (3) If a pre-wiring kit is used, it is no longer possible to electrically wire signalling of tripped status.
Schemes : page 6/59
6/58

Dimensions
LR97Dpppp

LT47pppp
62,2
13
63 51
12
1 2 3 4
10
51,5
20,4
19,5
67,5
45
77,2 56 71
Mounting
LR97Dpppp Direct mounting beneath the contactor c LT47pppp
50,8
70,3
5
67,5
LC1 b c D09D18 D25D38 123 137 See pages 5/92 and 5/93
45
Note: Can be mounted on 5 rail.
6 7
Schemes
LR97Dpppp
L1 L2 L3
LT47pppp
L1 L2 L3
MCBB
MCBB
Stop
Stop
8 9 10
13
13
KM1 KM1
Start
KM1
Test/Stop Reset
Start
L1
L2
L3
Test/Stop Reset
KM1
A1 A2 98 95 96
T1
T2
T3
KM1
M3
a M3
LT47
A1 A2 97 98 95 96
A1 A2 98 95 96
A2
A1
A2
A1
LR 97D
14
14
6/59
Presentation, application example

TeSys U controllers
Presentation
Above 32 A, the TeSys U controller provides a motor starter management solution identical to that provided by TeSys U starter-controllers. Used in conjunction with a short-circuit protection device and a contactor, it provides a motor starter whose functions are the same as those of a TeSys U startercontroller and, in particular, provides the following functions: overload protection, motor starter control and application monitoring.
1 2 3
520973
107226
It consists of a control unit whose adjustment range is compatible with the secondary of current transformers, plus a control base which also allows fitment of a function module or a communication module. It requires a c 24 V external power supply. The secondaries of current transformers, the c 24 V power supply, the 10 inputs and the 5 outputs are connected by screw terminal block.
Application example
Detecting blockage of a rock crusher by monitoring the motor current. Operating conditions b b b b b Power: 90 kW at 400 V. In: 185 A. Duty class S1. Control circuit voltage: a 230 V Control-command by PLC and serial link using the Modbus protocol.
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Quantity Reference 1 1 1 3 1 1 LUTM20BL LUCMT1BL LUL C033 LUTC4001 LC1F185P7 NS250HMA Page 6/64 6/64 1/95 6/64
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Characteristics : pages 6/62 and 6/63 References : page 6/64
523762
Products used
Description Controller Multifunction control unit Modbus communication module Current transformer Contactor Circuit-breaker
Functions performed b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 70 kA at 400V. b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4. b Detection of crusher blockage by monitoring the induced overcurrent. To use the "overtorque or jam" function, the following parameters must be entered: v trip: the answer yes/no enables or disables the function, v time before tripping: the time period during which the value of the current must be above the tripping threshold in order to cause tripping (adjustable from 1 to 30 s). v tripping threshold: value as a % of the load current ratio in relation to the setting current. If the ratio remains above this threshold for the time specified in the previous parameter, the product trips (adjustable from 100 to 800 %). It is possible to set the parameter for an alarm at a preset threshold under the same conditions as above.
1 2
Schemes : page 6/67
6/60
Application example
(continued)

TeSys U controllers
Application example (continued)

Scheme
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
KA1 LUCM T1BL Multifunction Control Unit

D (B) D (A) Gnd
KA1 LUT M20BL S2

LO1
Controller 24 V Aux
KA1 LUL C033

Modbus Module
230 V a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Q6
S1
L1 L2 L3 I.6 I.3 I.7
LI1
LI2
D (B) D (A) Gnd
24 V 24 V c Aux COM
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
4 5 8
From S1/T1, S1/T2, S1/ T3, S2/T1, S2/T2, S2/ T3
4 5 8
KA1
T1
S1
S2
T2
KA1 KM1 Q6 Q6
13
S1
S2
T3
S2
KM1
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
+
c 24 V
KM1
V1 4T2
W1 6T3
U1 2T1
KA1
Modbus
VW3 A8 306 TF03
M 3a
Other functions The multifunction control unit incorporates other control and protection functions, such as: monitoring and control of phase current, alarm, Communication module LULC033 also provides a programmable output and two programmable inputs.
Schemes : page 6/67
A2
A1
S1
To KA1
96
6/61
Characteristics

TeSys U controllers
Environment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Control base and control unit type Product certifications Conforming to standards Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, of the outputs overvoltage category III, (Ui) degree of pollution: 3 V
LUTM + LUCBT1BL or LUCDT1BL without LULC UL, CSA, ASEFA
LUTM + LUCMT1BL or LULC
IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 N14 250 250 4 IP 40 IP 20 IP 20 TH Cycles 12 h C C m 48 - 40+ 85 - 25+ 70 2000 - 25+ 60
Conforming to UL508, CSA C22-2 n14 V Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 voltage of the outputs (Uimp) Degree of protection Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 (protection against direct finger contact) Protective treatment Front panel (outside connection zone) Front panel and wired terminals Other faces Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 Ambient air temperature Storage around the device Operation Maximum operating altitude Operating positions Without derating In relation to normal vertical mounting plane kV
30
90
90
30
Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12 C C Shock resistance 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms Vibration resistance 5300 Hz Resistance to electrostatic discharge Resistance to radiated fields Immunity to fast transient currents Immunity to radioelectric fields Immunity to dissipated shock waves Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (1) Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 kV kV Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 V/m kV kV Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 V V2 960 (parts supporting live components) 650 15 gn 4 gn In open air: 8 - Level 3 On contact: 6 - Level 3 10 - Level 3 CT outputs and inputs: 4 - Level 4 Inputs and supply: 2 - Level 3 10
Control base and control unit relays

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Output relays / power line Inputs Serial communication kV kV kV Common mode 4 2 2 Serial mode 2 1
(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
Schemes : page 6/67
6/62

TeSys U controllers
Control circuit supply characteristics

Operational voltage Power consumption Associated protection Cabling Connectors Flexible cable without cable end Pitch 1 conductor 2 identical conductors Flexible cable with cable end Without insulated ferrule 1 conductor 2 identical conductors With insulated ferrule 1 conductor 2 identical conductors (1) Solid cable without cable end 1 conductor 2 identical conductors Conductor size Tightening torque Flat screwdriver 1 conductor N.m mm mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 0.252.5 0.251 0.252.5 0.51.5 0.22.5 0.21 AWG 24 to AWG 12 0.50.6 3 mm mm2 mm2 5 0.22.5 0.21.5 V W A c 20.428.8 2 max gG fuse. 0.5
1 2 3 4 5
LUTM20BL B 300 24 V/5 A 500 30 gG fuse, 4 Control voltage a 100240 V: LC1K, LC1D, LC1F185F500
Input characteristics
Operational voltage Logic inputs V c 24 Logic state 1: I u 6 mA - 16 V Logic state 0: I y 1.5 mA - 5 V LUT M10BL Single break volt-free contacts a.c. supply d.c. supply Permissible power in cat. AC-15 Permissible power in cat. DC-13 Associated protection Used with contactor type (2) For 500 000 operating cycles For 500 000 operating cycles VA W A C 300 24 V/5 A 180 30 gG fuse, 4 Control voltage c 24 V: LP1K, LC1D09D95. Control voltage a 24240 V: LC1K, LC1D.
Discrete output characteristics

Base controller type Type Load
6 7 8
Characteristics of external current transformers LUTCppp1

Precision Precision limit factor Maximum operating temperature Transformer ratio Diameter of conductor passage hole Maximum wire c.s.a. mm mm2 C Class 5P 10 70 30/1 28 30 x 10 50/1 22 30 x 10 100/1 35 40 x 10 200/1 32 65 x 32 400/1 38 x 127 800/1 53 x 127
(1) Use a double cable end. (2) For other combinations, use an intermediate relay between the output of controller LUTM and the contactor coil.
9 10
Schemes : page 6/67
6/63
References

TeSys U controllers
References
Connection Current transformers Screws
532083
1 2 3
LUTM + LUCMT1BL + LUTC pp
Control bases (auxiliary supply voltage c 24 V)

Control Screws For use with contactor LC1Dpp LC1Fppp Reference Weight kg LUT M10BL LUT M20BL 0.800 0.800
Control units
Description Class Advanced 10 20 Multifunction 5 to 30 For motor type 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase Setting range 0.351.05 0.351.05 0.351.05 Reference LUCB T1BL LUCD T1BL LUCM T1BL Weight kg 0.140 0.140 0.175
Current transformers
Operating current Reference LUT C0301 LUT C0501 LUT C1001 LUT C2001 LUT C4001 LUT C8001 Primary 30 50 100 Secondary 1 1 1 1 1 1 Weight kg 0.550 0.330 0.450 0.590 0.870 1.210
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Presentation : page 6/60 Characteristics : pages 6/62 and 6/63
200 400 800
Function modules and communication modules The TeSys U controller is compatible with the modules listed below: b Thermal overload alarm module LUF W10, b Motor load indication module LUFV2, b Communication modules: v Modbus (LUL C033), v CANopen (LULC08), v DeviceNet (LULC09), v Advantys STB (LUL C15).
Note : Communication modules LULC07 (ProfibusDP), ASILUFC5 and ASILUFC51 (AS-Interface) are not compatible with the TeSys U controller. Module LUFW10 is only compatible with control units LUCBT1BL and LUCDT1BL.
Schemes : page 6/67
6/64
Combinations

TeSys U controllers
Combinations providing type 2 coordination

With circuit-breaker
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V PkW 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 IeA 35 41 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 230 280 350 385 430 Circuit-breaker Reference GV3L40 GV3L50 GV3L65 NS80HMA NS100HMA NS160HMA NS160HMA NS250HMA NS250HMA NS400HMA NS400HMA NS630HMA NS630HMA NS630HMA Rating A 40 50 65 80 100 150 150 220 220 320 320 500 500 500 Irm (1) A 560 700 910 1040 1300 1350 1800 2200 2640 3200 4160 5000 5500 6000 Contactor Reference (2) LC1 D50A LC1 D50A LC1 D65A LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 TeSys U controller Reference LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp Current transformers Reference 3 x LUT C0501 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C2001 3 x LUT C2001 3 x LUT C2001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C8001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
With fuses
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V PkW 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 IeA 35 41 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 230 280 350 385 430 540 Circuit-breaker Reference GSpF GSp J GSp J GSp J GSp J GSp L GSp L GSp N GSp N GSp QQ GSp QQ GS2 S GS2 S GS2 S GS2 S aM fuses Size 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 T0 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 T3 Rating A 40 50 80 100 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 500 500 630 Contactor Reference (2) LC1 D40A LC1 D50A LC1 D80 LC1 D80 LC1 D95 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F630 TeSys U controller Reference LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp LUTM + LUCp Current transformers Reference 3 x LUT C0501 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C1001 3 x LUT C2001 3 x LUT C2001 3 x LUT C2001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C4001 3 x LUT C8001 3 x LUT C8001
Schemes : page 6/67
6/65

TeSys U controllers
1 2
Controllers
LUTMp0BL
Rail mounting
Rail mounting
163
173
73
a (1)
45
a
3 4 5
2x4
30
With Modbus module With Advantys STB, CANopen or DeviceNet modules (1) Depth with communication module
135 147
LUTC03011001 LUTC20018001
4,2 G
c 5,2/6,2 G
a 94 99 125 a1 32 38 54 b 99 170 170 b1 55 127 127 c 40 40 40 G 68 75 95 J 52 64 67
6 7 8 9 10
b1
a1
b1
J
LUTC 0301 0501 1001 a 78 57 78 b 108 86 108 b1 42 31 42 c 46 42 46 28 23 35 G 45 45 45 J 54 50 54 LUTC 2001 4001 8001
Schemes : page 6/67
6/66
171
Schemes

TeSys U controllers
Schemes
LUTM
Reversing controller LUT M

LUTM S2 S1
L1 L2 L3 I.1 I.2 I.3 I.4
24 V Aux.
LUTM
1
I.10 I.6 I.7 I.8 I.9
+
I.5
LUTM
2
23/NO 96/NO 97/NC
13/NO
(1)
98 05
06/NC
3 4

24 V c 24250 V a
Any fault
KM1
95
KM2
95
96
97
98
05
06
13
23
Channel 1
Channel 2
Control unit fault
I.5 RST
I.7 SR
I.6 SF
24 V c
I.10 I.8 I.9
24 V c
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
AV
KM1
AR
Reset KM2
Q1 Trip
External fault
Stop
6 7
Any fault Local/remote
Control for Modbus communication module LUL C033
KM1
KM2
24 V c 24250 V a
Manu 1
Manu 2
KM1
Stop
KM2
AU
Modbus network port Communication module
8
LI2
95
96
97
98
05
COM
OA1
OA3
LO1
LI1
Channel 1
Channel 2
Any fault
06
13
23
Controll unit fault
I.5 RST
I.7 SR
I.6 SF
24 V c
I.10 I.8 I.9
9 10
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
Free
Free
Reset KM1
KM2
Q1 Trip
Q1 On
AU
Local/ remote
(1) The contacts are represented with controller powered up and not in a fault condition. Presentation : page 6/60 Characteristics : pages 6/62 and 6/63 References : page 6/64 Dimensions, mounting : page 6/66
24 V c
6/67
Selection guide
Applications
Multifunction motor and machine protection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Device type Device type Controllers
For network/bus
Modbus
CANopen
DeviceNet
Profibus DP
Ethernet TCP/IP
Current range
0.4100 A (with internal current transformer) 100810 A (with external current transformer)
Control voltage
c 24 V a 100240 V
Number of I/O
6 inputs 4 outputs
Measurements
- Current between phases - Earth fault. - Motor temperature. Protection and monitoring functions: - thermal overload, - motor temperature monitoring, - phase imbalance and phase failure, - locked rotor, - long starting times, - phase reversal, - earth fault.
Functions
LTMRppMpp
LTMRppCpp
LTMRppDpp
LTMRppPpp
LTMRppEpp
8 9 10
Pages
6/86
6/68
1 2
Input extension modules, for all LTM R controllers Operator control unit
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
c 24 V (1)
a 100240 V (1)
Powered via the LTM R controller or via the LTM E extension module.
4 independent inputs
Voltage between phases
Monitoring functions: - voltage, - power, - Cos jj (power factor)
Display functions: - measurements, - faults and alarms, - statistics, etc..j.
LTMEV40BD
LTMEV40FM
LTMCU
6/87 (1) Input control voltage. The electronics are powered via the controller.
6/87
6/69
Presentation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TeSys T is a motor management system that provides protection, metering and monitoring functions for single-phase and 3-phase, constant speed, a.c. motors up to 810 A. Suitable for the harshest applications, this product range offers: b high-performance multifunction protection, independent of the automation system, b a local HMI control unit for reading, displaying and modifying the parameters monitored, diagnostics, etc..... b configuration of the application using PowerSuite software, b connection to the automation system via a communication network (selection according to various protocols). 1 LTM EV40BD extension module 2 LTM R08MBD controller Application The TeSys T motor management system is used for motor control and protection in harsh industrial applications, in which downtime must be avoided because it is very costly: Oil & Gas, chemical industry, water treatment, metal, minerals and mining, pharmaceutical industry, microelectronics, tunnels, airports etc. With TeSys T, untimely stoppages of a process or manufacturing, associated with a motor, are anticipated via predictive analysis of fault situations. Fault tripping is therefore reduced to a minimum. Its use in motor control panels makes it possible to: b increase the operational availability of installations, b improve flexibility from project design through to implementation, b increase productivity by making available all information needed to run the system. The TeSys motor management system integrates perfectly with Schneider Electric low voltage equipment, such as Okken, Blokset and Prisma.
Presentation
526378
3 4
9 10
M 3
1 2 3 4 6/70
Magnetic circuit-breaker Contactor Controller with extension module Operator control unit
526379
LTM R08MBD
Composition of the motor management system The system comprises: b an LTM R motor management controller v with integral current transformer up to 100 A, v above 100 A, by external current transformer up to 810 A, b an LTM E extension module, b an LTM CU operator control unit, b configuration software incorporated in the PowerSuite software application, b accessories for system set-up. Communication The LTM R controller is equipped with a communication interface to allow remote monitoring and control of the motor. All motor information is then available at automation system level. The following networks are available: b Modbus, CANopen, DeviceNet, ProfiBus DP and Ethernet TCP/IP. TeSys T system functions Protection functions: b against thermal overload, b against phase imbalance and phase failure, b thermal motor protection via PTC probes, b against phase reversal, b against earth faults, b against long starting times and motor stalling, b against automatic load shedding and restarting, b against load fluctuations (I, U, P), b against variations of Cos (power factor). Metering functions b Measurements (rms values): v current on the 3 phases, v voltage on the 3 phases (shedding), v motor temperature, v earth fault, b Values calculated: v average current, v frequency, v Cos (power factor), power, power consumption... Motor control functions A motor managed by TeSys T can be controlled: b locally, using the logic inputs present on the product, or via the HMI terminal b remotely, via the network (connection by terminal block or connector except for DeviceNet: terminal block only)., Motor control modes 5 predefined motor control modes are incorporated in the controller: b overload mode: monitoring of motors whose control is not managed by the controller, b independent mode: starting of non-reversing motors, b reverser mode: starting of reversing motors, b 2-step mode: 2-step starting of motors (star-delta, by autotransformer and by resistor), b 2-speed mode: 2-speed starting of motors (Dahlander, pole changer). A 6th Custom mode is available to allow the user to create a specific motor control mode that is not predefined in the controller. Statistical and diagnostic functions b fault statistics: counters per type of protection and history of the last 5 faults, b motor statistics: saving of motor statistics values, b diagnosis of faults affecting correct operation of the product.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
526380
LTM EV40BD
568605
LTM CU
6/71
Description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LTMRpp
526381
The LTM R controller The controller is the central component in the motor management system. It manages the basic functions such as: b measurement of 3-phase current via integral current transformers from 0.4 to 100A (up to 810 A by external current transformers), b measurement of earth current by external earth fault toroid. b measurement of motor temperature by PTC probe, b inputs and outputs for the various motor control modes, fault management and associated functions. Characteristics As standard, the controller manages the following predefined control mode functions: b overload mode, b independent mode, b reverser mode, b 2-speed mode, b 2-step mode, b "Custom" mode. Supply 2 types of controller power supply are available: b c 24 V, b a 100240 V. Current ranges 3 current ranges allow measurement of motor current from 0.4 to 100 A: b 0.48 A, b 1.3527 A, b 5100 A. For use with external current transformers, choose the 0.48 A range (1 or 5 A current transformer secondary). Inputs b 6 discrete logic inputs. Outputs b 3 relay logic outputs (1N/O) b 1 relay output for fault signalling (1N/O + 1N/C)) Measurements b connections for a temperature probe, b connections for an earth fault toroid. LTM E extension module The extension module adds the following functionalities to the TeSys T controller: b voltage measurement on the 3 phases. This enables it to calculate numerous engine monitoring parameters (power, frequency, Cos j ), b 4 additional inputs. Characteristics Inputs b 4 discrete logic inputs (independent). Power supplies b 2 types of power supply for the inputs: c 24 V and a 100240 V. A c 24 V controller can be assembled with an a100240 V extension module and vice versa. Voltage measurement between phases up to 690 V nominal.
Description
6/72
568605
Human/Machine Interfaces (HMI) Depending on the application, 2 types of HMI can be used with the LTMR controller. b The LTMCU operator control unit: v Entirely dedicated to the TeSys T range, v Only for control/monitoring of an LTMR controller. b A Magelis XBTN410 terminal v For control/monitoring of 1 to 8 LTMR controllers. LTMCU operator control unit Dedicated exclusively to TeSys T controllers, control unit LTMCU makes it possible to: b Configure the parameters of the LTMR controller b Display information on controller configuration and operation. b Monitor the alarms and faults generated by the controller. b Local control of the motor via the local control interface (keys can be customised). Three different languages can be loaded into the LTMCU controller at the same time. By default, these 3 languages are: English, French and Spanish. Note: English is the only compulsory language. A language download utility (LangTool), together with all the other languages, are available on the website www.schneider-electric.com. This tool allows the languages present in the LTMCU control unit to be adapted. The LTMCU HMI control unit has an RJ45 port, protected by a flexible cover to provide a good level of protection (IP54). This port on the front panel allows connection to a PC, via a connecting cable, in order to use PowerSuite software. In this case, the control unit acts as a transmitter and all information can then be viewed in PowerSuite. The Magelis XBT N410 HMI terminal Two applications have been predefined for TeSys T. Depending on the application loaded, the HMI terminal makes it possible to: b configure and monitor a motor starter (LTM_1T1_V1.dop). b monitor and modify certain parameters on up to 8 motor starters (LTM_1T8_X_V1.dop) (1). XBT L1000 programming software is needed for loading applications into the HMI terminal. These applications are available on the website www.schneider-electric.com.
(1) Replace the X with an E for the English version, or an F for the French version.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LTMCU
6/73
LTM R controllers
1 2 3 4 5
Modbus 1
DeviceNet 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 7
Controllers feature the following on their front panel: 1 2 3 4 Controller power supply. Input connections. Fault outputs (N/O+N/C). Port for connection to the HMI terminal, a PC or an extension module (RJ45). 5 Controller status LEDs. 6 Network port for connection to the network by connector (except DeviceNet) (1). 7 Test/Reset button. 8 Connection to the network by terminal block (except Ethernet TCP/IP). 9 Connection for an earth fault toroid and temperature probes. 10 Outputs for motor control mode function.
8 9 10 Profibus DP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CANopen 1 2
8 9 10 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 Ethernet TCP/IP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6
8 9 10
6 7 8 9 10
9 10
(1) Connection using power extension (daisychaining) is possible for Ethernet TCP/IP.
LTM EV40pp extension modules

1 2 3 4
LTMCU operator control unit

1
3 5 Extension modules have the following on their front face: 1 Inputs for voltage measurement. 2 Port for connection to the HMI terminal or to the PC. 3 Port for connection to the controller. 4 Extension module status LEDs. 5 Connection of additional inputs. 6/74 4 The control unit has the following on its front face: 1 Screen. LCD display 2 Local control interface including control keys and LEDs. 3 RJ45 port on front panel for connection to a PC (protected by a cover). 4 Contextual navigation keys.
Functions
Thermal and current protection functions

Functions Description Setting range Controller LTMR Controller and extension module (LTMR + LTME) Alarm threshold Fault threshold
1 2 3 4 5 6
Thermal overload: thermal protection of motor by monitoring current consumption Motor temperature: thermal monitoring of the motor using temperature probes (winding, paper...). Up to 3 sensors in series. Phase imbalance: monitors the symmetry of currents. To be used for imbalance <80% of the average current (1). Phase failure: monitors the symmetry of currents. To be used for imbalance <80% of the average current (1). Phase reversal: signals when the phase sequence is different from the defined sequence (motor running). Long starting time: monitors the motor starting time Locked rotor: locking detected by a sudden increase in current after the start phase Min/max current load limit variations: monitors motor load through variations of current around preset thresholds.
Class: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30. Inverse ther/definite time PTC binary PTC/NTC analogue: 20 6500 Ohm 1070% I average 0.220 s 0.130 s A-B-C A-C-B 100800 % of FLC (2) 1200 s 100800 % of FLC (2) 130 s min.: 30100 % of FLC (2) 1200 s max.: 20800 % of FLC (2) 1250 s internal: 20500 % min FLC (2) 0.0525 s external: 0.0210 A 0.0525 s 0999.9 s
Earth fault: signals internal insulation faults, by vectorial summing of external currents, via earth fault toroid.
Frequent starting: Protects the motor against overheating due to frequent starting.
Voltage and power protection functions

Phase imbalance: monitors the symmetry of voltage between phases. To be used for imbalance < 40 % of the average voltage (3). Phase failure: monitors the symmetry of voltage between phases. To be used for imbalance > 40 % of the average voltage (3). Phase reversal: signals when the phase sequence is different from the defined sequence (motor stopped). Voltage variations. Min/max voltage limits: monitors voltage variations around preset thresholds. 315 % 0.220 s 0.130 s A-B-C A-C-B min.: 7099 % 0.225 s max.: 101115 % 0.225 s 68115 % 19999 s 20800 % 0100 s 01025 s
7 8 9 10
Load shedding: opens outputs O.1 and O.2 if voltage drops below a preset threshold. Power variations. Min/max power limits: monitors power variations around preset thresholds. Variations of Cos j. Min/max limits of Cos j : monitors variations of Cos j around preset thresholds. Function performed.
(1) Average current value measured on the 3 phases. (2) FLC: Full Load Current (setting current). (3) Average voltage value measured on the 3 phases.
6/75
Motor control functions
1 2
Functions Control modes
Description Local, via terminal block Local, via HMI terminal (1) Remote, via network Overload Independent Reverser 2-step 2-speed "Custom" mode Manual reset Automatic reset Remote reset
With controller LTM R X X X X X X X X X X X X
With controller LTMR and extension module LTME X X X X X X X X X X X X
Operating modes
Fault management
3 4 5 6 7 8
Metering functions and statistics

Functions Measurements (2) Description Current/Phase Earth current Average current Current imbalance between phases Thermal capacity level Motor temperature rise Frequency Voltage between phases Voltage imbalance between phases Active power Reactive power Cos j (power factor) Active power consumption Reactive power consumption Fault statistics Protection fault counters Protection alarm counters Diagnostic fault counters Motor control function counters Fault history Internal watchdog fault Controller internal temperature Temperature sensor connection Current connection Voltage connection Motor control commands (start, stop, run check back and stop check back) Control configuration checksum Loss of communication Number of motor control commands (O.1/O.2 starts) Operating time Number of starts/hour Last start I max. Duration of last start Time to trip Time to restart Run, ON, Start, alarm, fault. Measurement range 0.081000 A 0.1633 x CT ratio 0.081000 A 0200 % 0200 % 06500 Ohm 0 100 Hz a 0830 V 0200 % 06553.5 kW 06553.5 kWr 0100 0400 kWh 0400 kWrh X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X (1) HMI: Human Machine Interface. See measurement details page 6/82. With controller LTM R X X X X X X With controller LTMR and extension module LTME X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Fault diagnostics
Motor statistics
9
Thermal overload statistics System operating statistics
10
6/76
Functions (continued), Topology
Service classes offered by the Ethernet TCI/IP version

Class Basic Web server Basic communications services Ethernet TCP/IP Ethernet TCP/IP communication advanced management services I/O Scanning Global Data Client FDR (1) A 20 ETH10/100 + FTP server None Modbus messaging (read/write of data words) Yes No Automatic monitoring and updating of product parameter configuration. Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters. Yes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SNMP network administrator (2)
TeSys T
TeSys T
Star topology
Ethernet: different network topologies
In a star topology, all the peripherals are linked via an intermediate peripheral (hub or switch).. In industrial Ethernet applications, the use of full duplex switches (instead of hubs) as central peripherals is strongly recommended.
TeSys T
Star topology
TeSys T
Power extension (Daisy chain) topology Power extension (or Daisy chaining), at bus level, is another connection topology commonly used in traditional, industrial automation system networks. The cable segments link several peripherals to each other, constituting the peripheral "section" of the network cable. Ethernet Power extension (Daisy chain) Power extension is not yet a very commonly used Ethernet connection topology, but will quickly become so when a large number of peripherals are made available in the market. In an Ethernet power extension topology, the peripherals have: b 2 Ethernet ports b and an integrated switch. Schneider Electric is progressively introducing, into the industrial market, Ethernet peripherals that can be used in daisy chain type architectures. Implementation of a power extension topology No hub or switch is required for using a power extension topology. Each peripheral must have an integrated switch (two ports). A port on the peripheral is connected to a port on the neighbouring upstream and downstream peripherals. These consecutive connections constitute the power extension (daisy chain). Ethernet switches may be included in a power extension (daisy chain) topology when several scan chains are used by the monitoring peripheral. The Ethernet switch must be installed close to the monitoring peripheral, with the various scan chains coming from the switch. (1) FDR: Faulty Device Replacement. (2) SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol.
TeSys T
TeSys T
TeSys T
Daisy chain topology
6/77
Topology (continued)
Ethernet: different network topologies (continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ring topology
TeSys T
TeSys T
In a ring topology, all the peripherals or components of the network infrastructure are connected within a loop. This type of topology makes it possible to achieve different levels of redundancy of the network. Ethernet ring Ethernet rings are generally the main networks in applications where a high level of reliability is required. If a ring topology is required, the switches handling this function must be used. Redundancy Redundancy of the network infrastructure is the key to development of applications with high operational reliability. Implementing a single or double ring architecture makes it possible to provide protection against breaks in network segments. Single ring The first level of redundancy can be achieved by installing a single ring. ConneXium switches can be used to establish main network ring configurations. The ring is created using HIPER-Ring ports. If a section of the line fails, the ring structure (including a maximum of 50 switches) converts into a line type configuration in less than 0.5 seconds.
TeSys T
Ring topology
TeSys T
6/78
Programming
Possible configurations and applications

LTM CU TeSys T
PLC (automation platform)
1 2
or Network or bus
PowerSuite
3 4
LTM CU
TeSys T
PowerSuite
5
TeSys T
6 7 8 9 10
6/79
Programming (continued)
568609
1 2
Example of TeSys T configurator setup screen
The TeSys T configurator is incorporated in the PowerSuite software application, as from version 2.5. (1) It allows configuration, commissioning and maintenance of motor starters protected by TeSys T. A library containing predefined motor control mode functions is available in order to: b allow standardisation, b avoid errors, b reduce motor starter setup times. 5 predefined motor control modes are incorporated in the controller: b overload mode: monitoring of motors whose control is not managed by the controller, b independent mode: starting of non-reversing motors, b reverser mode: starting of reversing motors, b 2-step mode: 2-step starting of motors (star-delta, by autotransformer and by resistor), b 2-speed mode: 2-speed starting of motors (Dahlander, pole changer). By using logic functions, a "Custom" mode makes it possible to: b easily adapt these predefined motor control mode functions to the specific needs of your applications, b create a link with the motor starter environment or b create new functions. The functions thus defined can be saved and used to build your function library for future applications. To create special functions, a logic editor is incorporated in the configurator and allows a choice of 2 programming languages: b function block, b structured text.
Example of logic editor screen. (1) An update file is available, free of charge, on the website www.schneider-electric.com. It will enable you to take advantage of the latest functions in the TeSysT motor management system.
Configuration with PowerSuite
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
536196
6/80
Characteristics
Environment
Product type Conforming to standards Product certifications Rated insulation voltage of the outputs (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, V overvoltage category III, degree of pollution 3 Conforming to UL 508, V CSA C222 n 14 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 a 100240 V supply, inputs and outputs c 24 V supply, inputs and outputs Communication circuits Current or voltage measurement circuit Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 kV kV kV kV kA LTM R controllers LTM EV40pp extension modules IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA 22-2 n14, IACSE10 UL, CSA,BV, LROS, DNV, GL, RINA, ABS, RMRos, NOM, CCC, C-TICK, ATEX, GOST, KERI (1) 690 690
1 2
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
4 0.8 0.8 6 100 TH 12 x 24 hour cycles 48 - 40+80 - 20+60 30 in relation to mounting plate, 90
4 0.8 6
3 4 5
Short-circuit withstand Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature around the device Operating position without dating
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Conforming to IEC/EN 60070-2-11 h Storage C Operation C In relation to normal vertical mounting plane
Flame resistance Shock resistance (1/2 sine wave, 11 ms) Vibration resistance Resistance to electrostatic discharge Immunity to radiated electromagnetic interference Immunity to fast transient bursts Immunity to radioelectric fields Immunity to dissipated shock waves
Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 (2) Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (2) 5300 Hz Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Relay outputs and supply c 24 V inputs a 100240 V inputs Voltage inputs Communication Temperature sensor (IT1/IT2) Rated operational voltage (Ui) Max. operating temperature
C C
960 (for parts supporting live components) 650 (for other parts) 15 gn 4 gn (plate mounted) 1 gn (mounted on 5 rail)
6 7
Common mode 1 2 4 2 4000 m 0.8 0.9 Serial mode 1 1 2 4500 m 0.7 0.88
kV V/m kV V
In open air: 8 - Level 3 On contact: 6 - Level 3 10 - Level 3 On supply and relay outputs: 4 - Level 4 Other circuits: 2 - Level 3 10 - Level 3 Common mode 4 1 2 2 1 2000 m 1 1 Serial mode 2 1 1 0.5 3000 m 0.93 0.93 3500 m 0.87 0.92
kV kV kV kV kV kV
8 9 10
Altitude derating
(1) Certain certifications are pending; please consult your Customer Care Centre. (2) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavorable direction.
6/81
Controller and extension module characteristics
1 2 3 4 5 6
Product type
Controllers LTMRpppBD Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 V Conforming to V IEC/EN 61000-4-11 A V 50/60 Hz mA
LTMRpppFM
Extension modules LTM EV40BD LTMEV40FM
Control supply
Operational voltage (U) Resistance to voltage dips Associated protection Operational voltage Current consumption Cabling Connectors Flexible cable without cable end c 24 a 100240 0 for 3 ms 70% of U for 500 ms gG fuse, 0.5 c 20.426.24 c 56127 a 93.5264 a 862.8
Pitch 1 conductor 2 identical conductors
mm mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m mm
5.08 0.22.5 0.21.5 0.252.5 0.51.5 0.252.5 0.21 0.22.5 0.21 AWG 24 to AWG 14 0.50.6 3
5.08 0.22.5 0.21.5 0.252.5 0.51.5 0.252.5 0.21 0.22.5 0.21 AWG 24 to AWG 14 0.50.6 3
Flexible cable with cable end Without insulated ferrule 1 conductor 2 identical conductors With insulated ferrule 1 conductor 2 identical conductors Solid cable without cable end 1 conductor 2 identical conductors Conductor size Tightening torque Flat screwdriver
Input characteristics
Nominal values Conforming to IEC/EN 61131-1 Voltage V Current mA Logic state 1 Voltage Current V mA V mA ms ms Type 1 positive logic (c: resistive, a: capacitive) c 24 a 100240 c 24 c7 c7 a 3.1 for 100 V a 7.5 for 240 V 15 max 79 < U < 264 15 max 2 min15 max 2 min at 110 V 2 min15 max 3 min at 220 V 5 max 0 < U < 40 5 max 15 max 15 max 15 max 15 25 15 5 25 5 a 100240 a 3.1 for 100 V a 7.5 for 240 V 79 < U < 264 2 min at 110 V 3 min at 220 V 0 < U < 40 15 max 25 25
Logic inputs
Response time
Voltage Current Change to state 1 Change to state 0
Logic state 0
Output characteristics
7 8 9 10
Type Load Permissible power in cat. AC-15 Permissible power in cat. DC-13 Associated protection Max. frequency Max. operating level Response time
a c
For 500 000 operating cycles VA For 500 000 operating cycles W A Hz op. cycles/h Change to state 1 ms 10 max Change to state 0 ms 10 max
Volt free, single break 250 V / 5 A B300 30 V / 5 A 480 / Ie max: 2 A 30 / Ie max: 1.25 A gG fuse, 4 2 1800
Measurement details
Current Voltage Earth fault current 1 % for the 0.48 A and 1.3527 A ranges 2 % for the 5100 A range 1% from 100 to 830 V 515 % for current > 0.1 A in the 0.48 A range current > 0.2 A in the 1.3527 A range current > 0.3 A in the 5100 A range < 5 % or 0.01 A 2% 3 % for a Cos j > 0.6 5 % (typical value) 30 min / year
Internal measurement without earth fault toroid External measurement with earth fault toroid
Temperature measurement Power factor Active and reactive power Internal clock
6/82
Bus and network characteristics

Type of bus/network Physical interface Addressing Transmission speeds Modbus 2-wire RS 485 1 to 247 1.2 to 19.2 K bits/s RJ45/terminal block 2 shielded twisted pairs CANopen ISO 11898 1 to 127 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800 and 1000Kbits/s + Auto baud 9-way SUB-D/ terminal block 4 twisted, shielded wires DeviceNet ISO 11898 1 to 64 125 to 500 K bits/s Terminal block 4 twisted, shielded wires Profibus DP polarised 2-wire RS 485 1 to 125 9.6 K to 12 M bits/s 9-way SUB-D/ terminal block 2 shielded twisted pairs, type A Ethernet IEEE 802.3 0 to 159 10/100 Mbit/s, with automatic recognition RJ45 2 shielded twisted pairs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Connections Cables

Environment
Conforming to standards Product certifications Ambient air temperature around the device Relative humidity Protective treatment Degree of protection Shock resistance Vibration resistance Flame resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 530 Hz Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Conforming to UL 94 Storage Operation C C IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 22-2 n14 UL, CSA, CE, C-TICK, NOM, GOST -40+80 -20+60 1595 % without condensation 12 x 24 hour cycles IP 54 15 gn / 11ms 4 gn C 650 V2
Electrical characteristics
Supply to the product Maximum current Maximum power dissipated Resistance to electromagnetic discharge Immunity to radiated electromagnetic interference Immunity to fast transient bursts Immunity to radioelectric fields Immunity to shock waves Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-5 mA W kV V/m kV V kV Powered via the controller 140 1 In open air: 8. Level 3 On contact: 4. Level 3 10 - Level 3 2, shielded access. Level 3 10. Level 3 2, shielded access. Level 3
Physical characteristics
Mounting Display Signalling Cabling Flush mounted Backlit LCD By 4 LEDs RJ45
6/83
Characteristics(continued)
LT6 CTpppp external current transformer characteristics
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Conforming to standards Precision Precision limit factor Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Maximum operating temperature Transformer ratio Diameter of conductor passage hole Maximum cabling c.s.a. C A mm mm2
IEC 60185, BS 7626 Class 5P 15 690 50 100/1 35 30 x 10
200/1 35 30 x 10
400/1 35 30 x 10
800/1 35 incorporated (1)
Earth fault toroid characteristics

Toroid type Rated insulation voltage Ui Operating temperature Protection index Transformer ratio Rated operational current le Max. conductor c.s.a. per phase V C 50437 50438 50439 50440 50441 50442 50485 1000 - 35+ 70 IP30 (connections IP20) 1/1000 65 85 160 250 25 50 95 240 50486
A mm2
400 2x 185
630 2x 240
85 50
250 240
DA1TTpp probe characteristics

Conforming to standards Economy resistor Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Insulation Length of connecting cables At 25 C Per probe W V kV IEC 60034-11 mark A 3 x 250 in series c 2.5 max 2.5 Reinforced 250 1
Between probes Between probe and motor terminal plate
mm m
Guaranteed operating zones: example with 3 probes type DA1TTppp (250 W at 25 C) in series, conforming to standard EC 60034-11, mark A.
Economy resistor (ohms)
10 000 4000
Trip zone
1650 1500 1000 750
Reset zone
100
20 10
Trip zone on probe short-circuit
1 3 probes type DA1ppp (250 W at 25 C) in series.

NOT - 20 C NOT + 15 C
-20
NOT - 5 C NOT NOT + 5 C
Temperature (C)
NOT: Nominal Operating Temperature. Protection unit tripped. Protection unit reset.
(1) Electrical connection to be made using M10 bolt.
6/84
Tripping curves
Cold state curves

10 000 t (s)
1 2 3
1000
100
10
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 1,12
1,5
I/Ir
Hot state curves

10 000 t (s)
1000
100
10
Class 30 Class 25 Class 20 Class 15 Class 10 Class 5 I/Ir
1 1,12
1,5
6/85
References
526387
Controllers
Setting range A Control voltage V c 24 a 100240 V c 24 a 100240 V c 24 a 100240 V Current range A 0.48 0.48 1.3527 1.3527 5100 5100 Reference Weight kg LTMR08MBD LTMR08MFM LTMR27MBD LTMR27MFM LTMR100MBD LTMR100MFM 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530
1 2
526388
For Modbus
8
27 LTM R08MBD
100
For CANopen
8 c 24 a 100240 V c 24 a 100240 V c 24 a 100240 V 0.48 0.48 1.3527 1.3527 5100 5100 LTMR08CBD LTMR08CFM LTMR27CBD LTMR27CFM LTMR100CBD LTMR100CFM 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530
3 4
526389
27
100 LTM R08CBD
For DeviceNet
8 c 24 a 100240 V c 24 a 100240 V c 24 a 100240 V 0.48 0.48 1.3527 1.3527 5100 5100 LTMR08DBD LTMR08DFM LTMR27DBD LTMR27DFM LTMR100DBD LTMR100DFM 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530
27
5 6
526390
100
For Profibus DP
8 LTM R08DBD c 24 a 100240 V c 24 a 100240 V c 24 a 100240 V 0.48 0.48 1.3527 1.3527 5100 5100 LTMR08PBD LTMR08PFM LTMR27PBD LTMR27PFM LTMR100PBD LTMR100PFM 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530
27
100
7 8 9 10
LTM R08EBD
526391
For Ethernet TCP/IP

8 c 24 a 100240 V c 24 a 100240 V c 24 a 100240 V 0.48 0.48 1.3527 1.3527 5100 5100 LTMR08EBD LTMR08EFM LTMR27EBD LTMR27EFM LTMR100EBD LTMR100EFM 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530 0.530
27
LTM R08PBD
100
6/86
526380
Extension modules. with voltage measurement on the 3 phases

Input control voltage V c 24 a 100240 Number of inputs Supply to the electronics Reference Weight kg 0.210 0.210
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 4
Via the controller Via the controller
LTMEV40BD LTMEV40FM
LTM EV40BD
HMI terminals
Description Operator control unit Supply Voltage Supply via the controller c 24 V external Number and type of connectors 2 x RJ45 Length m 1 3 5 Reference LTM CU XBTN410 Reference VW3 A1 104R10 VW3 A1 104R30 VW3 A1 104R50 XBTZ938 Weight kg 0.400 0.380 Weight kg 0.065 0.140 0.210 0.200
568605
Magelis compact display. Description Connecting cables for the LTM CU control unit
LTM CU
Connecting cables for the XBTN410
SUB-D 25-way female 2.5 RJ45
Cables
Description Connecting cables For connecting the controller to the extension module Number and type of connectors 2 x RJ45 Length m 0.04 0.3 1 Reference LTMCC004 (1) LU9R03 LU9R10 Weight kg 0.120 0.045 0.065
Replacement connectors
Description Complete set of connectors for controllers and extension modules (1) Sold in lots of 6. Number and type of connectors 10 screw terminals (all network versions included) Reference LTM9TCS Weight kg 0.200
6/87
Configuration tools
1 2
526392
Description Connection kit for PC serial port for Modbus multidrop connection Interface for USB port (for use with cable VW3A8106) Length: 1.8 m
Composition
Reference
b 1 x 3 m length cable with two VW3A8106 RJ45 connectors, b 1 RS 232/RS 485 converter with one 9-way female SUB-D connector and one RJ45 connector. b 1 USB cable, SUB-D 9-way SR2CBL06 b Drivers supplied on CD-Rom
Weight kg
0.350
Current transformers (1)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Operational current Primary A 100 200 400 800 LT6CT4001
Reference Secondary A 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2)
Weight kg 0.550 0.550 0.550 0.680
LT6CT1001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT8001
Earth fault toroids (marketed under the Schneider Electric brand)

Rated operational current Ie A Internal of toroid mm 30 50 80 120 200 300 Reference Weight kg 50437 50438 50439 50440 50441 50442 0.120 0.200 0.420 0.530 1.320 2.230
Closed toroids, type A

65 85 160 250 400 630
Split toroids, type OA

85 250
510575
46 110
50485 50486
1.300 3.200
PTC thermistor probes (3)

Description Nominal Operating Temperature (NOT) C 90 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 Colour Unit reference (4) Weight
Triple probes
DA1TTppp
Green/green Brown/brown Grey/grey Blue/blue White/blue Black/black Blue/red White/green
DA1TT090 DA1TT110 DA1TT120 DA1TT130 DA1TT140 DA1TT150 DA1TT160 DA1TT170
kg 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
(1) The transformers offered for use with TeSys U starters are suitable. Please consult our "TeSys U starter-controllers" catalogue. (2) For use with LTMR08pp controllers. (3) PTC: Positive Temperature Coefficient. (4) Sold in lots of 10.
6/88
Marking accessories (to be ordered separately)

Description Clip-in markers (maximum of 5 per unit) Composition Strips of 10 identical numbers (0 to 9) Strips of 10 identical capital letters (A to Z) Sold in lots of 25 25 Unit reference AB1Rp (1) AB1Gp (1) Weight kg 0.002 0.002
1 2
Description Length m Reference Weight kg VW3 A8 306 R03 VW3 A8 306 R10 VW3 A8 306 R30 VW3 A8 306 TF03 VW3 A8 306 TF10 VW3A8306 R 0.045 0.065 0.125 0.032 0.032 0.012
For Modbus connection

Cables fitted with 2 x RJ45 connectors T-junctions RS 485 line terminator 0.3 1 3 0.3 1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
For CANopen connection

Cables 50 100 300 IP20 connectors SUB-D 9-way female Line end adapter switch Elbowed (90) Straight Elbowed (90) with SUB-D 9-way connector for connection to PC or diagnostic tool TSX CAN CA50 TSX CAN CA100 TSX CAN CA300 TSX CAN KCDF 90T TSX CAN KCDF 180T TSX CAN KCDF 90TP 4.930 8.800 24.560 0.046 0.049 0.051
For DeviceNet connection

Cables 50 100 300 TSX CAN CA50 TSX CAN CA100 TSX CAN CA300 4.930 8.800 24.560
For Profibus DP connection (2)

Cables Connectors With line terminator 100 400 TSXPBSCA100 TSXPBSCA400 490NAD91103 490NAD91104 490NAD91105
Without line terminator With line terminator and terminal port
For Ethernet TCP/IP connection

Shielded twisted pair cables to standard EIA/TIA568 Cables fitted with 2 x RJ45 connectors for connection to terminal equipment Straight 2 5 12 40 80 Shielded twisted pair cables, UL and CSA 22.1 approved Cables fitted with 2 x RJ45 connectors for connection to terminal equipment Straight 2 5 12 40 80 490 NTW 000 02U 490 NTW 000 05U 490 NTW 000 12U 490 NTW 000 40U 490 NTW 000 80U 490 NTW 000 02 490 NTW 000 05 490 NTW 000 12 490 NTW 000 40 490 NTW 000 80
(1) When ordering, replace the p in the reference with the number or letter required. (2) To order other connectors and cables (UL cables for harsh environments, etc.), please consult our Customer Care Centre.
6/89
LTM Rpp controllers

5,2
(2)
1 2
122,5 (1) 91
30,2
(2)
(2)
3
LTM EV40pp extension modules
120,7 (1)
(2)
30,2
4 5 6 7
50
5,5
45

Panel mounting, cut-out 23 117 92
70
61
61
8 9 10
(1) 140 mm with RJ45 connector for connection to extension module and to network, 166 mm with Profibus DP/CANopen connector. (2) Leave a gap around the device of: 9 mm at 45 C, 9 to 40 mm from 45 to 50 C, 40 mm at 60 C.
6/90
45
LT6CT
HMI terminal
XBTN410
1
(2)
42
2
74 (1)
25
35 95
25 5
30
35 107
6
2,5
5 42,5 42,5 5
132
3 4 5
Earth fault toroids

50437 and 50438 50439, 50440 and 50441
c2 8
2,5
(1) 104 mm with fixing clips (supplied with the product). (2) 58 mm with SUB-D 25-way elbowed cable XBTZ9680 for Twido, TSX Micro and Premium or XBTZ998 for Advantys STB. 104 mm with SUB-D 25-way cable XBTZ68/Z9681 for Twido, TSX Micro and Premium
10 10 20
21 4
16
b1
b2
b1
29 c1
a J c1 G a1
b 122 164 256 b1 80 80 120 b2 55 55 90 c 80 120 196 c1 150 190 274 G 35 35 37 H 65 65 104 J 126 166 254 K 40 40 60
6 7 8 9 10
Type 50437 50438
b 83 109
b1 53 66
c 30 50
c1 60 87
c2 31 45
H 50 60
Type 50439 50440 50441
a 26.5 26.5 29
a1 44 44 46
50442
50485 and 50486
G
a
344
299
29
Type 50485 50486
a 72 78
b 148 224
c 46 110
G 57 76
6/91
Schemes
Schemes
1 2 3 4 5
Overload mode
3-wire local-control
(1)
Stop
KM1
KM1
Start
I.1 C
I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6

O.3
A1 A2
O.1
O.2
13
14
23
24
33
34
(1) Connection of a single-phase motor is possible. In this case, do not use the central current transformer.
Independent mode
3-wire local-control\
KM1
Start Stop
6 7
3
I.1 C
I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6
A1 A2
O.1
O.2
O.3 O.4
13
14
23
24
33
34
KM1
8 9 10
3-wire with switchable local/network control

L ON
97 98 95 96
97 98 95 96
O.4
LTM R
LTM R
2-wire with switchable local/network control

L ON
Start/Stop
Start Stop
I.1 C
I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6
97 98 95 96
I.1 C
97 98 95 96
I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6
I.1 C
I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6
O.4
O.4
L : Local control O : Stop N : Network control
6/92
97 98 95 96
O.4
Schemes (continued)
Schemes (continued)
Reverser mode
1 2
97 98 95 96
KM2
KM1
Start Forw.
Start Rev.
Stop
I.1 C
A1 A2
O.1
O.2
I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6
O.3 O.4
13
14
23
24
33
34
LTM R
3 4 5
KM2 KM1
KM1 (1) KM2
2-step mode, star-delta application

KM2
KM3
KM1
Start
Stop
6
97 98 95 96
I.1 C
A1 A2
I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6
O.1
O.2
O.3 O.4
7 8 9 10
13
14
23
24
33
34
LTM R
KM3 KM1
KM3
KM1 KM2
KM1 (1) KM3
(1) Contacts for interlocking KM1 and KM2 are not obligatory because the controller electronically interlocks outputs O.1 and O.2.
6/93
Schemes (continued)
1 2 3
Schemes (continued) 2-step mode, primary resistor application

KM2
KM1
Start Stop
I.1 C
I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6
A1 A2
O.1
O.2
O.3 O.4
13
14
23
24
33
34
4
KM1
KM2
2-speed mode, Dahlander application
5
KM2 KM1 KM3
Low speed High speed
6 7 8
3
I.1 C
I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6
97 98 95 96
LTM R
Stop
A1 A2
(1)
13
O.1
O.2
O.3 O.4
14
23
24
33
34
KM2 M KM1
KM1 KM2
KM2 (2) KM3
9 10
(1) For a Dahlander application, all the power cables must pass through current transformers. The controller can also be placed upstream of the contactor. In this case, and if the Dahlander motor is used in "variable torque" mode, all the cables downstream of the contactors must be of identical size. (2) Contacts for interlocking KM1 and KM2 are not obligatory because the controller electronically interlocks outputs O.1 and O.2.
6/94
97 98 95 96
LTM R
Schemes (continued)
Schemes (continued)
Earth fault toroid and motor temperature probe connection
1
LTM R
O.1
O.2
O.3
Z1 Z2 T1 T2
2 3
13
14
23
24
33
Connection of outputs for motor control mode function

Without intermediate relay With intermediate relay
34
4 5
LTM R
KM1
KM1
O.1
O.1
13
13
14
LTM R
14
KM1
KA1
KM1
6 7 8 9 10
6/95
Combinations for customer Protection components TeSys T Motor Management System assembly
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
With switch-disconnector, contactor and class 10 controller

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 10 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 Ie A 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 19 22 29 35 41 55 66 80 97 132 160 195 230 280 350 430 540 610 GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GS1DD GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpK GSpL GSpN GSpN GSpQQ GSpQQ GS2S GS2S GS2S GS2V 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 10 x 38 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 T00 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 T4 Switchdisconnector Reference (1) aM fuses Size Rating A 2 2 4 4 4 6 8 10 16 16 25 25 32 40 50 80 100 100 125 160 200 250 315 355 500 500 630 800 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D12 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D32 LC1D40A LC1D50A LC1D65A LC1D80 LC1D95 LC1D115 LC1D150 LC1F185 LC1F225 LC1F265 LC1F400 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F630 LC1F630 LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR27pp LTMR27pp LTMR27pp LTMR27pp LTMR27pp LTMR27pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LT6CT2001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT8001 LT6CT8001 LT6CT8001 LT6CT8001 Contactor Reference (2) TeSys T controller Reference External current transformer Reference
(1) GSp: GS1 for direct operator, GS2 for external operator. (2) For reversing operation, replace the prefix LC1 with LC2.
6/96
Combinations for customer Protection components TeSys T Motor Management System assembly (continued)

With circuit-breaker, contactor and class 10 controller
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 45 Ie A 0.2 0.3 0.44 0.6 0.85 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.9 6.5 8.5 11.5 15.5 18.1 22 29 35 41 55 66 80 80 Icc kA 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 70 25 70 GV2L03 GV2L03 GV2L04 GV2L04 GV2L05 GV2L05 GV2L06 GV2L07 GV2L07 GV2L08 GV2L10 GV2L14 GV2L14 GV2L16 GV2L20 GV2L22 GV2L22 GV3L32 GV3L40 GV3L50 GV3L65 NS80HMA NS100HMA NS100HMA LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D18 LC1D18 LC1D18 LC1D18 LC1D18 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D40A LC1D50A LC1D50A LC1D65A LC1D80 LC1D115 LC1D115 LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR27pp LTMR27pp LTMR27pp LTMR27pp LTMR27pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp Circuit-breaker Contactor TeSys T controller Reference External current transformer Reference
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Reference
Reference
6/97
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
With circuit-breaker, contactor and class 10 controller

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 400/415 V P kW 55 55 75 75 90 90 110 110 132 132 160 160 200 200 220 220 250 250 Ie A 97 97 132 132 160 160 195 195 230 230 280 280 350 350 388 388 430 430 Icc kA 36 70 36 70 36 70 36 70 70 130 70 130 70 130 70 130 70 130

Circuit-breaker Contactor TeSys T controller Reference LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp External current transformer Reference LT6CT2001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT6001 LT6CT6001
Reference NS160NMA NS160HMA NS160NMA NS160HMA NS250NMA NS250HMA NS250NMA NS250HMA NS400HMA NS400LMA NS400HMA NS400LMA NS630HMA NS630LMA NS630HMA NS630LMA NS630HMA NS630LMA
Reference LC1 D115 LC1 D115 LC1 D150 LC1 D150 LC1 F185 LC1 F185 LC1 F225 LC1 F225 LC1 F265 LC1 F265 LC1 F330 LC1 F330 LC1 F400 LC1 F400 LC1 F500 LC1 F500 LC1 F500 LC1 F500
Substitution table
Motor current
Old range LT6P multifunction protection relay

Reference Reference External current transformer Reference LT6CT1001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT8001
New range TeSys T controllers

Reference Reference External current transformer Reference LT6CT2001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT8001
a 100240 V
I < 5A 5 A < I < 25 A 25 A < I < 100 A 100 A < I < 200 A 200 A < I < 400 A 400 A < I < 800 A LT6P0M005FM LT6P0M025FM LT6P0M005FM LT6P0M005FM LT6P0M005FM LT6P0M005FM
c 24 V
LT6P0M005S144 LT6P0M025S144 LT6P0M005S144 LT6P0M005S144 LT6P0M005S144 LT6P0M005S144
a 100240 V
LTMR08pFM LTMR27pFM LTMR100pFM LTMR08pFM LTMR08pFM LTMR08pFM
c 24 V
LTMR08pBD LTMR27pBD LTMR100pBD LTMR08pBD LTMR08pBD LTMR08pBD
6/98

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 P kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 290 315 355 400 Ie A 0.64 0.87 1.1 1.6 2.1 2.8 3.8 4.9 6.7 8.9 12.8 17 21 24 32 39 47 57 77 93 113 134 162 203 224 250 292 313 354 400 GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpF GSpG GSpG GSpG GSpG GSpJ GSpJ GSpJ GSpKK GSpKK GSpKK GSpL GSpN GSpN GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GSpQQ GS2S GS2S Switchdisconnector (1) Reference
With switch-disconnector, contactor and class 10 controller

aM fuses Size 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 14 x 51 T000 T000 T000 T000 22 x 58 22 x 58 22 x 58 T00 T00 T00 T0 T1 T1 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3 T3 Rating A 1 2 2 2 4 4 6 6 8 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 125 160 200 250 250 315 355 355 400 500 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D09 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D25 LC1D32 LC1D32 LC1D40A LC1D50A LC1D65A LC1D80 LC1D115 LC1D115 LC1F150 LC1F185 LC1F265 LC1F265 LC1F330 LC1F400 LC1F400 LC1F500 LC1F500 LC1F630 LC1F630 LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR27pp LTMR27pp LTMR27pp LTMR27pp LTMR27pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp LTMR100pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LTMR08pp LT6CT2001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT2001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT4001 LT6CT8001 Contactor Reference TeSys T controller Reference External current tranformer Reference
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(1) GSp: GS1 for direct operator, GS2 for external operator.
6/99
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
7/0
Contents
7 - TeSys control relays
TeSys K control relays
b For a.c. or d.c. control circuit page 7/4 b For d.c. control circuit (low consumption) page 7/5 b Instantaneous and time delay auxiliary contact blocks page 7/6 b Mounting and marking accessories page 7/7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TeSys SK mini-control relays
b Mini-control relays CA2 SK and CA3 SK page 7/12 b Mini-control relay with alternating contacts CA2 SKE page 7/12 b Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and coil suppressor modules page 7/13
TeSys D control relays and add-on blocks
b Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption page 7/21 b Add-on blocks page 7/22 b Accessories and spare parts page 7/23
7/1
Characteristics
Control relays
Environment
1 2
Conforming to standards Product certifications Operating positions
IEC 60947, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 5424 UL, CSA
Vertical axis
Horizontal axis
Without derating
Without derating
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Connection Screw clamp connections Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Spring terminals Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Faston connectors Clip Solder pins for With locating device between printed circuit board power and control circuits Tightening torque Philips head n 2 and 6 Terminal referencing Conforming to standards EN 50005 and EN 50011 Protective treatment Conf. to IEC 60068 (DIN 50016) Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Vibration resistance 5...300 Hz Flame resistance Storage Operation Without derating Control relay open Control relay closed Conforming to UL 94 Conforming to NF F 16-101 and 16-102 Control relay open Control relay closed Conforming to VDE 0106 and IEC 60536
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm
Min. 1 x 1.5 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.34 1 x 0.75 1 x 0.75 2 x 2.8 or 1 x 6.35 4 mm x 35 microns 0.81.3 Up to 8 contacts
Max. 2x4 2x4 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5
Possible positions for CA2 K only, with derating, please consult your Regional Sales Office. Max. to IEC 60947 1 x 4 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 2.5 1 x 1.5 + 1 x 2.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
N.m
C C m
TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct finger contact (devices with screw clamp terminals or pins for printed circuit board) - 50...+ 80 - 25...+ 50 2000 2 gn 4 gn Self-extinguishing material V1 Conforming to requirement 2 10 gn 15 gn SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage), up to 400 V
Shock resistance (1/2 sine wave, 11 ms) Safety separation of circuits
Control relay type Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits For operation (y 50 C) single voltage coil For drop-out Mechanical durability at Uc 50/60 Hz coil In millions of operating cycles Standard c coil Wide range, low consumption c coil Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour Average consumption Inrush at 20 C and at Uc Sealed Heat dissipation Operating time Between coil energisation and at 20 C and at Uc opening of the N/C contacts closing of the N/O contacts Between coil de-energisation and opening of the N/O contacts closing of the N/C contacts Maximum immunity to microbreaks
CA2 K a 12...690 0.8...1.15 Uc y 0.2 Uc 10 10 000 30 VA 4.5 VA 1.3 5...15 10...20 10...20 15...25 2
CA3 K c 12...250 0.8...1.15 Uc y 0.1 Uc 20 10 000 3W 3W 3 25...35 30...40 10 15 2
CA4 K c 12...120 0.7...1.3 Uc y 0.1 Uc 30 6000 1.8 W 1.8 W 1.8 25...35 30...40 10...20 15...25 2
W ms ms ms ms ms
Schemes : page 7/9
7/2
Control relays
Contact characteristics of control relays and instantaneous contact blocks

On CAp K On LA1 K Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to BS 5424 Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to VDE 0110 group C Conforming to CSA C 22-2 n 14 Conventional thermal current For ambient temperature y 50 C (Ith) Frequency of the operational current Minimum switching capacity U min (DIN 19 240) I min Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947 and VDE 0660, gG fuse Rated making capacity Conforming to IEC 60947 I rms Short-time rating Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms Insulation resistance Non-overlap distance CApK and LA1K: linked contacts conforming to INRS, BIA and CNA specifications Number of auxiliary contacts V V V V V A Hz V mA A 4 2 or 4 for CA2 K and CA3 K, 2 for CA4 K 690 690 690 750 600 10 Up to 400 17 5 10
1 2 3 4
d.c. supply, category DC-13
A A A A MW mm
110 80 90 110 > 10 0.5 (see schemes page 7/9)

a.c. supply, category AC-15
Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4)
V 1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity VA VA VA VA 110/ 127 48 96 240 17 34 86 14 36 7 1000 2050 5000 24 48 220/ 380/ 440 600/ 230 400 690 440 800 880 1200 158 288 317 500 66 120 132 200 10 000 14 000 13 000 9000
Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load.
V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 440 600 52 28 8 300 51 26 7 230 50 25 6 200
5 6 7 8 9 10
2 Electrical durability of contacts for: b 1 million operating cycles (2a) b 3 million operating cycles (2b) b 10 million operating cycles (2c). 3 Breaking limit of contacts valid for: b maximum of 20 operating cycles at 10 s intervals with current passing for 0.5 s per operating cycle. 4 Thermal limit
10 000 8000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 800 600 500 400 300 200 100 80 60 40 24 48
Time constant in ms
1 Breaking limit of contacts valid for: b maximum of 50 operating cycles at 10 s intervals (power broken = making current x cos j 0.7).
Power broken in VA
Power broken in W
16 000
1000 700 500 300 200 100 80 60 50 40 30 20 10 8 6 12 24 48
4 3
250
200 140
2a 2b 2c
2a 2b 2c
100
50 20
110 120
220 380 500 440 690 V
110
220 440 600 V
Schemes : page 7/9
7/3
References
Control relays
For a.c. or d.c. control circuit
1 2 3 4 5
816892
b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail or 4 screw fixing. b Screws in the open ready-to-tighten position.

Control circuit Consumption
Control relays for a.c. control circuit
Auxiliary contacts
Weight
kg

CA2 KN40pp 4.5 VA 4 3 2 1 2 CA2 KN40pp CA2 KN31pp CA2 KN22pp 0.180 0.180 0.180
816891

4.5 VA 4 3 2 1 2 CA2 KN403pp CA2 KN313pp CA2 KN223pp 0.180 0.180 0.180

4.5 VA CA2 KN403pp 4 3 2 1 2 CA2 KN407pp CA2 KN317pp CA2 KN227pp 0.180 0.180 0.180

4.5 VA 4 3 2 1 2 CA2 KN405pp CA2 KN315pp CA2 KN225pp 0.210 0.210 0.210

819411
Control relays for d.c. control circuit

3W 4 3 2 1 2 CA3 KN40pp CA3 KN31pp CA3 KN22pp 0.225 0.225 0.225
6
3W CA3 KN407pp
4 3 2
1 2
CA3 KN403pp CA3 KN313pp CA3 KN223pp
0.225 0.225 0.225
7 8 9 10


(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Offi ce): Control relays CA2 K (0.8...1.15 Uc) (0.85...1.1 Uc) Volts a 12 20 24(2) 36 42 48 110 115 127 220/ 230 230/ 380/ 400 400/ 440 500 50/60 Hz 230 240 400 415 Code J7 Z7 B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 FC7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 S7 Up to and including 240 V, coil with integral suppression device available: add 2 to the code required. Example: J72 Control relays CA3 K (0.8...1.15 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24(2) 36 48 60 72 100 110 125 200 220 230 240 250 Code JD ZD BD CD ED ND SD KD FD GD LD MD MPD MUD UD Coil with integral suppression device available: add 3 to the code required. Example: JD3. (2) When connecting an electronic sensor or timer in series with the coil of the control relay, select a 20 V coil (a code Z7, c code ZD) so as to compensate for the incurred voltage drop.
660/ 690 Y7
Schemes : page 7/9
7/4
References
Control relays
For d.c. control circuit

Control circuit Consumption
816895
Low consumption control relays (d.c. control circuit)
1
Auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) Weight kg

1.8 W CA4 KN40ppp 4 3 2 1 2 CA4 KN40pp CA4 KN31pp CA4 KN22pp 0.235 0.235 0.235
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1.8 W 4 3 2 1 2 CA4 KN403pp CA4 KN313pp CA4 KN223pp 0.235 0.235 0.235


(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Offi ce): Control relays CA4 K (Wide range coil: 0.7...1.3 Uc) Volts c 12 20 24 48 72 110 120 Code JW3 ZW3 BW3 EW3 SW3 FW3 GW3
Schemes : page 7/9
7/5
References
Control relays
Instantaneous and time delay auxiliary contact blocks
1 2 3 4 5
816899
Clip-on front mounting, 1 per control relay

Connection
Composition
Reference
Weight
LA1 KN20
Screw clamp terminals
2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1
2 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 2 3 4
LA1 KN20 LA1 KN02 LA1 KN11 LA1 KN40 (1) LA1 KN31 (1) LA1 KN22 (1) LA1 KN13 (1) LA1 KN04 (1) LA1 KN203 LA1 KN023 LA1 KN113 LA1 KN403 (1) LA1 KN313 (1) LA1 KN223 (1) LA1 KN133 (1) LA1 KN043 (1) LA1 KN207 LA1 KN027 LA1 KN117 LA1 KN407 (1) LA1 KN317 (1) LA1 KN227 (1) LA1 KN137 (1) LA1 KN047 (1)
kg 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Spring terminals
Faston connectors 1 x 6.35 or 2 x 2.8
6
816899
b b b b b
Relay output with common point changeover contact, a or c 240 V, 2 A maximum Control voltage 0.85...1.1 Uc Maximum switching capacity 250 VA or 150 W Operating temperature - 10...+ 60 C Reset time: 1.5 s during the time delay period 0.5 s after the time delay period
Clip-on front mounting, 1 per control relay

Voltage Type Timing range Composition Reference Weight
7
LA2 KT2p V a or c 24...48 a 110...240 On-delay On-delay
s 1...30 1...30
1 1
LA2 KT2E LA2 KT2U
kg 0.040 0.040
8 9 10
Other versions
Electronic timers type RE4. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(1) Block of 4 contacts for use on CA2 K and CA3 K.
Schemes : page 7/9
7/6
References
Control relays
Mounting and marking accessories
Suppressor modules incorporating LED indicator

Mounting and connection Clips onto front of relay with locating device. No tools required. Type Varistor (1) For voltages a and c 12...24 V a and c 32...48 V a and c 50...129 V LA4 Kppp a and c 130...250 V Diode + Zener diode (2) c 12...24 V c 32...48 V RC (3) a 220...250 V Sold in lots of 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Unit reference LA4 KE1B LA4 KE1E LA4 KE1FC LA4 KE1UG LA4 KC1B LA4 KC1E LA4 KA1U Weight kg 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Description Mounting plates Application On 1 4 rail On 2 4 rails Clip-on 110/120 mm fixing centres Sold in lots of 1 10 Unit reference LA9 D973 DX1 AP25 Weight kg 0.025 0.065
LA9 D973
Marking accessories
Description Marker holder Clip-in markers Application Clip-on fixing on front face 4 maximum per relay Strips of 10 identical numbers 0 to 9 Strips of 10 identical capital letters A to Z Sold in lots of 100 25 Unit reference LA9 D90 AB1 Rp (4) Weight kg 0.001 0.002
25
AB1 Gp (4)
0.002
(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. Polarised component. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (3) Protection by limiting the transient voltage to 3 Uc max. and limitation of the oscillating frequency. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time). (4) Complete the reference by replacing the dot with the required character.
7/7
Control relays
Control relays
1 2
CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K

On panel On printed circuit board
LA1 K
=
8,65
= = =
A1
58
58
50
50
35
57
35 45
45
A2
3 4 5
On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
58
57
45
LA9 D973
On asymmetrical rail with clip-on mounting plates
DX1 AP25
On asymmetrical rail with clip-on mounting plates
DZ5 ME5
50
53
120
57
21
35 45
6 7 8 9 10
LA4 K
25
57
57
27
45
LA2 KT

On control relay
LA2 KT
27
38
38
57
Suppressor modules
On control relay
LA4 K
22
Characteristics: pages 7/2 and 7/3 References: pages 7/4 to 7/7 Schemes: page 7/9
57
7/8
58
22
58
38
110
Schemes
Control relays
Control relays
4 N/O
13/NO 23/NO 33/NO 43/NO
CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K

3 N/O + 1 N/C
13/NO 33/NO 43/NO 21/NC

CA3 K
2 N/O + 2 N/C
13/NO 43/NO 21/NC 31/NC
CA4 K
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
14
22
34
44
44
A1
14
22
32
14
24
34
44
+A1
1 2
2 N/O + 2 N/C LA1 KN22, LA1KN227
53/NO 83/NO 61/NC 71/NC
A2
+ A1
_ A2
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks LA1 K

For CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K
2 N/O LA1 KN20, LA1KN207
53/NO 63/NO
For CA2 K, CA3 K

4 N/O LA1 KN40, LA1KN407
53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
2 N/C LA1 KN02, LA1KN027

51/NC 61/NC
1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1 KN11, LA1KN117

53/NO 61/NC
3 N/O + 1 N/C LA1 KN31, LA1KN317

53/NO 73/NO 83/NO 61/NC
3 4 5 6
52
62
54
64
54
62
84
54
84
54
62
72
54
64
74
62
1 N/O + 3 N/C LA1KN13, LA1KN137

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
4 N/C LA1KN04, LA1KN047

51/NC 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
52
62
72
74
54
62
72
Electronic time delay contact blocks LA2KT

For CA2 K, CA3 K, CA4 K
1 C/O LA2 KT2
A1
16 18
Suppressor modules
LA4 KC
82
LA4 KE
A2
15
82
84
7 8 9 10
Schemes: page 7/8
7/9
Characteristics
Control relays
Mini-control relays TeSys CAp SK and CA2 SKE
Environment
1 2 3
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947, VDE 0110 gr C, BS 5424, CSA 22-2 n 14, UL508 Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Conforming to IEC 60068 (DIN 50015) Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Ambient air temperature Storage around the device Operation Maximum operating altitude Without derating Operating position
690 IEC 60947, NF C 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424 UL, CSA TC (Klimafest, Climateproof) Protection against direct finger contact - 50+ 70 - 20+ 50 2000 Horizontal axis
C C m
Vertical axis
Without derating
Without derating Max. 1 x 6 or 2 x 4 1 x 6 or 2 x 2.5 1 x 6 or 2 x 1.5
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Connection by connectors Solid cable Flexible cable without cable end Flexible cable with cable end Pozidriv n 1 head Conforming to standards EN 50005 and EN50011 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
Tightening torque Terminal referencing
Min. 1 x 1.5 or 2 x 1.5 1 x 0.5 or 2 x 0.35 1 x 0.35 or 2 x 0.35 0.8 Up to 4 contacts
Control relay Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) For operation Control voltage limits (y 50 C) For drop-out Inrush Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc Sealed Heat dissipation Between coil energisation and Operating time at 20 C and at Uc opening of the N/C contacts closing of the N/O contacts Between coil de-energisation and opening of the N/O contacts closing of the N/C contacts Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour Mechanical durability at Uc 50/60 Hz coil in millions of operating cycles Standard c coil
W ms ms ms ms
CA2 SK a 24400 0.851.1 Uc u 0.20 Uc 16 VA 4.2 VA 1.4 816 714 68 810 1200 10
CA2 SKE
23 VA 4.9 VA 1.5
CA3 SK c 1272 0.851.1 Uc u 0.10 Uc 2.2 W 2.2 W 2.2 1018 812 46 68 1200 10
Schemes : page 7/15
7/10
Control relays
Auxiliary contact characteristics of mini-control relays and instantaneous contact blocks

Conforming to IEC 96047, BS 5424, VDE0110 groupC, CSA C 22-2 n 14 For ambient temperature Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) y 55 C Frequency of the operational current Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947 and VDE 0660, gl fuse Rated operational voltage (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V V A Hz A Up to 690 690 10 Up to 400 10
1 2
d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the load. V W W W W 24 120 55 15 720 48 80 38 11 600 110 60 30 9 400 220 52 28 8 300 440 51 26 7 230

a.c. supply, category AC-15 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4). V 1 million operating cycles 3 million operating cycles 10 million operating cycles Occasional making capacity VA VA VA VA 110/ 127 48 96 240 17 34 86 14 36 7 1000 2050 5000 24 48 220/ 230 440 158 66 10000 380/ 400 800 288 120 14000 440 880 317 132 13 000
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Schemes : page 7/15
7/11
References
Control relays
Mini-control relays TeSys CA2 SK and CA3 SK
Mini-control relay TeSys CA2 SKE with alternating contacts
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
b Width of mini-control relays 27 mm. b Mounting on 35 mm 7 rail. b Connection by connectors.

Control circuit supply Auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) CA2 SK20pp CA2 SK11pp CA3 SK20pp CA3 SK11pp Weight
Mini-control relays
533664
CA2 SK20pp
a.c. supply
2 1
1 1
kg 0.132 0.132 0.132 0.132
d.c. supply
2 1
This mini-control relay with alternating contacts (see function diagram page 7/15) makes it possible to automatically split the operating time between 2 circuits of a redundant system. By regularly energising the safety circuits, this device makes it possible to ensure that they are operating correctly. b b b b b
CA2 SKE20pp
Mini-control relay with alternating contacts
533665
Width of mini-control relay 45 mm. Fixing by 4 screws. Connection by connectors. Cannot be fitted with front-mounted auxiliary contact block. Cannot be fitted with coil suppressor module.
Auxiliary contacts Basic reference, to be completed by adding the voltage code (1) CA2 SKE20pp Weight
Control circuit supply
a.c. supply
kg 0.175
(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Offi ce): Mini-control relays CA2 SK and CA2 SKE Volts a 24 48 110 120 220 230 240 50/60 Hz Code B7 E7 F7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Mini-control relays CA3 SK Volts c 12 24 36 48 72 Code JD BD CD ED SD
380 Q7
400 V7
Schemes: page 7/15
7/12
References
Control relays
Mini-control relays TeSys CA2 SK and CA3 SK

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts and coil suppressor modules

533666
Clip-on front mounting

For use on control relays
Maximum number of blocks per contactor 1
Composition
Reference
Weight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CA2 SK20 LA1 SK11
2 1
2 1
LA1 SK20 LA1 SK02 LA1 SK11
kg 0.022 0.022 0.022
Suppressor modules
533667
Connection without need for tools by clipping onto right-hand side of contactor
For use on control relays CA2 SK and CA3 SK LA4 SKp1p Type Varistor (1) For voltages a and c 24 V48 V Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference LA4 SKE1E LA4 SKE1U LA4 SKC1U Weight kg 0.003 0.003 0.003
a and c 110 V250 V 10 Diode (2) c 24 V250 V 10
(1) Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). (2) No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time).
Schemes: page 7/15
7/13
Control relays
Dimensions
1 2
Mini-control relays
CA2 SK and CA3 SK
55,5
27
84,5 55,5 27
56
LA4 SK
3,5
LA1 SK (1) 3,5
3 4 5 6 7
(1) Only on CA2SK20.
Mounting
Mini-control relays
CA2 SK and CA3 SK On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
55,5
27
CA2 SKE
Dimensions
68 45
56
8 9
CA2 SKE
On panel
Mounting
On mounting rail AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 (7 35 mm)
58
68
45
48-50
34-35
10
Schemes : page 7/15
7/14
58
56
Schemes
Control relays
Schemes
2 N/O
CA2 SK20, CA3 SK20

13/NO 23/NO A1
1 N/O + 1 N/C
CA2 SK11, CA3 SK11

13/NO A1 21/NO
1 2
A2
14
24
A2
14
A2
CA2 SKE
2 N/O
CA2 SKE
Function diagram

13/NO 23/NO A1

A1
Energised De-energised
22
A2
14
24
13
14
Close Open
3 4
23
24
Close Open

2 N/O LA1 SK20 2 N/C LA1 SK02 1 N/O + 1 N/C LA1 SK11

33/NO 43/NO

31/NC 41/NC

33/NO 41/NC
34
32
34
44
42
42
5 6 7 8 9 10
Schemes : page 7/14
7/15
Characteristics
TeSys control relays

TeSys D control relays

Control relay type
CAD a
CAD c
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Environment
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Overvoltage category III and degree of pollution 3 Conforming to UL, CSA Conforming to IEC 60947 Conforming to IEC 60536 and VDE 0106 V V kV 690 600 6 690 600 6
CAD low consumption 690 600 6
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Separation of electrical circuits Conforming to standards Product certifications Protective treatment Degree of protection Ambient air temperature around the device
Reinforced insulation up to 400 V IEC 60947-5-1, N-F C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 4794, EN 60947-5 UL, CSA
Conforming to IEC 60068 Conforming to VDE 0106 Storage Operation, conforming to IEC 60255 (0.81.1 UC) For operation at Uc Without derating Without derating in the following positions C C C m
TH Front face protected against direct finger contact IP 2X -60+80 -5+60 -40+70 3000 -60+80 -5+60 -40+70 3000 Protection against direct finger contact -60+80 -5+60 -40+70 3000
30
30
90
90
180
180
180
Shock resistance (1) half sine wave for 11ms Vibration resistance (1) 5300 Hz Screw clamp connections
Control relay open Control relay closed Control relay open Control relay closed Flexible 1 conductor conductor 2 conductors without cable end Flexible 1 conductor conductor with 2 conductors cable end Solid conductor 1 conductor without cable 2 conductors end Tightening torque mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 N.m
10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 1.7 12.5
10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 1.7 12.5
10 gn 15 gn 2 gn 4 gn 14 14 14 12.5 14 14 1.7 12.5
1 or 2 flexible or rigid conductors mm2 without cable end
(1) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state, with coil supplied at Uc.
Schemes: page 7/25
7/16


Control relay type
CAD a
CAD c

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) Control voltage limits Operation With coil 50/60 Hz With standard coil, wide range Drop-out Average consumption at 20 C and at Uc a 50/60 Hz (at 50 Hz) VA V 12690 0.81.1 Uc at 50 Hz 0.851.1 Uc at 60 Hz 0.30.6 Uc Inrush: 70 sealed: 8 419 1222 412 617 2 3 30 12440 0.71.25 Uc 0.10.25 Uc Inrush or sealed: 5.4 55 15 % 63 15 % 20 20 % 25 20 % 2 3 30 28
CAD low consumption c 572 0.71.25 Uc 0.10.25 Uc Inrush or sealed: 2.4 67 15 % 77 15 % 27 20 % 35 20 % 2 3 30 40
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
With standard coil Operating time (at rated control circuit voltage and at 20 C)
ms Between coil energisation and - opening of the N/C contacts - closing of the N/O contacts ms Between coil de-energisation ms and - opening of the N/O contacts - closing of the N/C contacts ms
Short supply failure Maximum operating rate Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles
Time constant L/R
Maximum duration without ms affecting hold-in of the device In operating cycles per second With coil 50/60 Hz (at 50Hz) With standard coil c wide range ms
Schemes: page 7/25
7/17

Characteristics of instantaneous contacts incorporated in the control relay
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Number of contacts Rated operational voltage Up to (Ue) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to UL, CSA Conventional For ambient temperature 60C thermal current (Ith) Frequency of the operational current Minimum switching capacity U min I min Short-circuit protection Rated making capacity Short-time rating Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Conforming to I rms IEC 60947-5-1 Permissible for 1s 500 ms 100 ms V V V A Hz V mA
5 690 690 600 10 25...400 17 5 gG fuse: 10 A a : 140, c : 250 A A A MW Guaranteed between N/C and N/O contacts Philips head n 2 and 6 ms N.m 100 120 140 > 10 1.5 (on energisation and on de-energisation) 1.2 Linked contacts in association with auxiliary contacts LADN Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 The 3 N/O contacts and the 2 N/C contacts of CADN32 are linked mechanically by one mobile contact carrier.
Insulation resistance Non-overlap time Tightening torque Non-overlap distance Mechanically linked contacts
Schemes: page 7/25
7/18

a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current (cos j 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos j 0.4).
Rated operational power of contacts (conforming to IEC 60947-5-1)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
V VA VA VA
24 60 16 4
48 120 32 8
115 280 80 20
230 560 160 40
400 960 280 70
440 1050 300 80
600 1440 420 100
10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
0,1
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9
6 8 10 5 7 9 Current broken in A
d.c. supply, category DC-13 Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant increasing with the power.
V W W W
24 120 70 25
48 90 50 18
125 75 38 14
250 68 33 12
440 61 28 10
10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 250 V
24 V 48 V 125 V
1 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2
440 V
0,1
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6 0,8 1 0,7 0,9
4 6 8 10 5 7 9 Current broken in A
10
Schemes: page 7/25
7/19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
See page opposite for mounting possibilities according to control relay type and rating
10
7/20
References
TeSys D control relays and add-on blocks

Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption
Control relays for connection by screw clamp terminals

Type Number of contacts Composition Basic reference, to be completed by adding the control voltage code (1)
Weight
Standard voltages a c P7 P7 BD BD B7 B7 LC (2) BL BL kg 0.580 0.580
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Instantaneous 5
5 3
CAD 50pp (3) CAD 32pp (3)
CAD 50pp
Instantaneous 5
Control relays for connection by spring terminals

5 CAD 503pp 3 2 CAD 323pp
B7 B7
P7 P7
BD BD
BL BL
0.580 0.580
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals

Number of contacts Maximum number per relay Clip-on mounting front side 1 on LH side 1 on LH side 1 on LH side Composition Reference Weight
CAD 32pp
4 (4)
1 1 1 1
4 (4) 1 Including 1 N/O and 1 N/C make before break. CAD 503pp Number of contacts Maximum number per relay Front mounting 1 Composition
1 1 2 2 2 1 4 3 2
1 1 2 2 2 3 4 1 2
LAD N11 LAD 8N11 (6) LAD N20 LAD 8N20 (6) LAD N02 LAD 8N02 (6) LAD N22 LAD N13 LAD N40 LAD N04 LAD N31 LAD C22
kg 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050 0.050
With dust and damp protected contacts, for use in particularly harsh industrial environments
Reference
Weight
4 (4)
protected (5) 2 2 2 2 2 2
kg 2 1 1 LA1 DX20 LA1 DX02 LA1 DY20 LA1 DZ40 LA1 DZ31 0.040 0.040 0.040 0.050 0.050
CAD 323pp
This type of connection is not possible for contact blocks LAD 8 and blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the digit 3 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LAD N11 becomes LAD N113. (1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Offi ce). a.c. supply Volts a 24 42 48 110 115 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 d.c. supply (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) Volts c 12 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 U from 0.7 to 1.25 Uc JD BD CD ED ND SD FD GD MD UD RD Low consumption (coils with integral suppression device fitted as standard) Volts c 5 12 20 24 48 110 220 250 Code AL JL ZL BL EL FL ML UL (2) LC: low consumption. (3) To order control relays with connection by lugs, add the digit 6 to the end of the selected reference. Example: CAD50pp becomes CAD506pp. (4) Blocks with 4 auxiliary contacts cannot be used on low consumption control relays. (5) Product fi tted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals. (6) These contact blocks cannot be used on low consumption control relays. Characteristics : pages 7/16 and 7/17 Dimensions : page 7/24 Schemes : page 7/25
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals
7/21
References

Add-on blocks
1 2 3 4 5 6
LAD4pp
Number and type of contacts
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by screw clamp terminals (1)
Maximum number per relay Front mounting 1 Time delay Type On-delay Reference LAD T0 LAD T2 LAD T4 LAD S2 LAD R0 LAD R2 LAD R4 Range 0.13 s(2) 0.130 s 10180 s 130 s(3) 0.13 s(2) 0.130 s 10180 s
Weight kg 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
1 N/C and 1 N/O
Off-delay (Sealing cover: see page 5/85) LAD T
Add the digit 3 to the references selected above. Example: LAD T0 becomes LAD T03.
Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals
Mechanical latch blocks (4)

Unlatching control Maximum number per relay Front mounting 1
Basic reference to be completed (5) LAD 6K10p
Weight kg 0.070
Manual or electric
Suppressor modules
These modules clip onto the top of the control relay and the electrical connection is instantly made. Fitting of an input module is still possible. LAD 6K10 b Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. b Voltage limited to 3 Uc maximum and oscillating frequency limited to 400Hz maximum. b Slight time delay on drop-out (1.2 to 2 times the normal time). For Operational Reference mounting on voltage CAD a a 2448 V LAD 4RCE a 110240 V LAD 4RCU
RC circuits (Resistor-Capacitor)
Weight kg 0.012 0.012
b Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage value to 2Uc maximum. b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. b Slight time delay on drop-out (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). CAD a a 2448 V LAD 4VE a 50127 V LAD 4VG a 110250 V LAD 4VU
Varistors (peak limiting)
0.012 0.012 0.012
7 8 9 10
b No overvoltage or oscillating frequency. b Increase in drop-out time (6 to 10 times the normal time). b Polarised component. CAD c c 24250 V
Freewheel diode
LAD4DDL
0.012
b Protection provided by limiting the transient overvoltage value to 2Uc maximum. b Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. CAD a a 24 V LAD 4TB a 72 V LAD 4TS CAD c c 24 V LAD4TBDL c 72 V LAD4TSDL c 125 V LAD4TGDL c 250 V LAD4TUDL c 600 V LAD4TXDL
Bidirectional peak limiting diode
0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012 0.012
(1) These contact blocks cannot be used on low consumption control relays. (2) With extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s. (3) With switching time of 40 ms 15 ms between opening of the N/C contact and closing of the N/O contact. (4) Power should not be simultaneously applied or maintained to the mechanical latching block of the CAD N. The duration of the control signal to the mechanical latching block and the CAD N should be u 100 ms. (5) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages, please consult your Regional Sales Office): Volts a and c 24 32/36 42/48 60/72 100 110/127 220/240 256/277 380/415 Code B C E EN K F M U Q (6) CADpp d.c. and low consumption control relays are fitted with a built-in bi-directional peak limiting diode suppressor as standard. On control relays produced after 15th July 2004, this diode is removable. It can therefore be replaced by the user (see references LAD 4Tppp above). It can also be replaced by a freewheel diode LAD 4DDL . If a d.c. or low consumption control replay is used without suppression, the standard suppressor should be replaced with a blanking plug LAD 9DL. Illustrations: page 7/20 Dimensions : page 7/24 Schemes : page 7/25
7/22
References


Description For marking Sheet of 64 blank legends, self-adhesive, 8 x 33 mm For mounting on
Sold in lots of 10
Unit reference LAD 21 LAD 22
Weight kg 0.020 0.020 0.200 0.100
CAD, LAD (4 contacts)
1 2 3
Sheet of 112 blank legends, LAD (2 contacts), self-adhesive, 8 x 12 mm LAD T Strips of blank, self-adhesive All products legends for printing by plotter (4 sets of 5 strips) Multi-language version: SIS Label labelling software for legends LAD 21 English, French, German, Italian, Spanish and LAD 22, supplied on CD-Rom Legend holder, snap-in, LC1 D09...38 8 x 18 mm LC1DT20...40 LADN (4 contacts) LAD T, LAD R For protection Sealing cover LAD T, LAD R Safety cover preventing CAD access to the moving contact carrier 35 1
LAD 24 XBY 2U
100
LAD 90
0.001
1 1
LA9 D901 LAD 9ET1
0.005 0.004
LA9 D901
LAD 9ET1
LXD 1
Specifications b Average consumption at 20 C: - inrush (cos j = 0.75) 50/60 Hz: 70 VA at 50 Hz, - sealed (cos j = 0.3) 50/60 Hz: 8 VA at 60 Hz, b Operating range (q < 60 C): 0.85 to 1.1 Uc Control circuit Average resistance Inductance of Reference (1) voltage Uc at 20 C 10 % closed circuit 50/60 Hz V V H 12 6.3 0.26 LXD 1J7 21 (2) 5.6 0.24 LXD 1Z7 24 6.19 0.26 LXD 1B7 32 12.3 0.48 LXD 1C7 36 LXD 1CC7 42 19.15 0.77 LXD 1D7 48 25 1 LXD 1E7 60 LXD 1EE7 100 LXD 1K7 110 130 5.5 LXD 1F7 115 LXD 1FE7 120 159 6.7 LXD 1G7 127 192.5 7.5 LXD 1FC7 200 LXD 1L7 208 417 16 LXD 1LE7 220/230 539 22 LXD 1M7 (3) 230 595 21 LXD 1P7 230/240 645 25 LXD 1U7 (4) 277 781 30 LXD 1W7 380/400 1580 60 LXD 1Q7 400 1810 64 LXD 1V7 415 1938 74 LXD 1N7 440 2242 79 LXD 1R7 480 2300 85 LXD 1T7 500 2499 LXD 1S7 575 3294 LXD 1SC7 600 3600 135 LXD 1X7 690 5600 190 LXD 1Y7 (1) The last 2 digits in the reference represent the voltage code. (2) Voltage for special coils fitted in control relays with serial timer module with 24 V supply. (3) This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz. (4) This coil can be used on 230/240 V at 50 Hz and on 240 V only at 60 Hz.
Spare parts: coils
4
Weight kg 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070 0.070
5 6 7 8 9 10
Schemes : page 7/25
7/23
TeSysD control relays and add-on blocks
Dimensions
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CAD a
CAD c or LC (low consumption)
c c1 c2 c3
12,5 (LAD8)
45
c c1 c2 c3
45
CAD
b c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LAD6K10 c3 with LADT, R, S with LADT, R, S and sealing cover
32 50
77 84 86 117 129 137 141
323 503
99 84 86 117 129 137 141
CAD
b c without cover or add-on blocks with cover, without add-on blocks c1 with LADN or C (2 or 4 contacts) c2 with LAD6K10 c3 with LADT, R, S with LADT, R, S and sealing cover
32 50
77 93 95 126 138 146 150
323 503
99 93 95 126 138 146 150
Mounting
CAD
Panel mounted Mounted on rail AM1DP200 or DE200
(1)
=
= = 78
60/70
45
CAD a
c with cover 86
CAD c or LC
95 c c (AM1DP200) (2) (AM1DP200) (2)
35
CAD a
88 96
CAD c or LC
97 105
(1) 2 elongated holes 4.5 x 9 Mounted on plate AM1P
(2) With cover
AF1 EA4
35
CAD a
CAD c or LC
95
10
with cover
86
Illustrations: page 7/20
60/70
Schemes : page 7/25
7/24
Schemes
TeSysD control relays and add-on blocks

5 N/O CAD50
13/NO 23/NO 33/NO 43/NO 03/NO
3 N/O + 2 N/C CAD32

13/NO 43/NO 03/NO 21/NC 31/NC
1 2
LADN02
51/NC 61/NC
A1
A2
A1
14
22
32
A2
14
24
34
44

61/NC 53/NO
04
44
04
LAD8N11 (1)
161/NC (172) 153/NO (184)
2 N/O LADN20
53/NO 63/NO
LAD8N20 (1)
163/NC (174) 153/NO (184)
2 N/C LAD8N02
151/NC (182) 161/NC (172)
152 (181)
162 (171)
154 (183)
(1) The figures in brackets are for the device mounted on the RH side of the control relay. 2 N/O + 2F N/C LADN22
53/NO 83/NO 61/NC 71/NC

53/NO 61/NC 71/NC 81/NC
4 N/O LADN40
53/NO 63/NO 73/NO 83/NO
4 N/C LADN04
71/NC 51/NC 61/NC 81/NC
154 (183)
164 (173)

53/NO 73/NO 83/NO 61/NC
162 (171)
3 4 5
54
62
54
64
52
54
64
74
84
54
62
74
54
62
72
84
62
72
82
72
54
52
2 N/O + 2 N/C including 1 N/O + 1 N/C make before break LADC22
With dust and damp protected contacts 2 N/O protected 2 N/C protected
62
82
2 N/O protected (2)
2 N/O protected + 2 N/O non protected LA1DZ40
84
LA1DX20
LA1DX02
LA1DY20
2 N/O protected + 1 N/O + 1 N/C non protected LA1DZ31
62
53/NO
63/NO
53/NO
53/NO
63/NO
83/NO
53/NO
53/NO
87/NO
61/NC
75/NC
63/NO
73/NO
54
62
76
88
64
74
62
52
62
54
64
54
54
64
84
54
74
73/NO
61/NC
84
83/NO
51/NC
61/NC
6 7 8 9 10
(2) Product fitted with 4 earth screen continuity terminals.

On-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LADT
67/NO 55/NC
Mechanical latch blocks

Off-delay 1 N/O + 1 N/C LADR
57/NO 65/NC
LADS
67/NO 55/NC
LAD6K10
A1
56
68
56
68
58
66
A2
Illustrations: page 7/20
E2
E1
Schemes : page 7/25
7/25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8/0
Contents
8 - Technical information
b Protective treatment of equipment according to climatic environment.. . . page 8/2 b Product standards and certifications .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/4 b Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) .. . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8/1
General
Protective treatment of equipment according to climatic environment
1 2 3 4 5
Depending on the climatic and environmental conditions in which the equipment is placed, Schneider Electric can offer specially adapted products to meet your requirements. In order to make the correct choice of protective finish, two points should be remembered: b the prevailing climate of the country is never the only criterion, b only the atmosphere in the immediate vicinity of the equipment need be considered.
This is the standard treatment for Schneider-electric brand equipment and is suitable for the vast majority of applications. It is the equivalent of treatments described as Klimafest, Climateproof. In particular, it meets the requirements specified in the following publications: b Publication UTE C 63-100 (method l), successive cycles of humid heat at: + 40 C and 95 % relative humidity. b DIN 50016 - Variations of ambient conditions within a climatic chamber: + 23 C and 83 % relative humidity, + 40 C and 92 % relative humidity. It also meets the requirements of the following marine classification societies: BV-LR-GL-DNV-RINA. Characteristics b Steel components are usually treated with zinc. When they have a mechanical function, they may also be painted. b Insulating materials are selected for their high electrical, dielectric and mechanical characteristics. b Metal enclosures have a stoved paint finish, applied over a primary phosphate protective coat, or are galvanised (e.g. some prefabricated busbar trunking components). Limits for use of TC (All climates) treatment b TC treatment is suitable for the following temperatures and humidity: Temperature (C) Relative humidity (%)
20 40 50 95 80 50
All climates treatment TC
7 8 9 10
TC treatment is therefore suitable for all latitudes and in particular tropical and equatorial regions where the equipment is mounted in normally ventilated industrial premises. Being sheltered from external climatic conditions, temperature variations are small, the risk of condensation is minimised and the risk of dripping water is virtually non-existent. Extension of use of TC (All climates) treatment In cases where the humidity around the equipment exceeds the conditions described above, or in equatorial regions if the equipment is mounted outdoors, or if it is placed in a very humid location (laundries, sugar refineries, steam rooms, etc.), TC treatment can still be used if the following precautions are taken: b The enclosure in which the equipment is mounted must be protected with a TH finish (see next page) and must be well ventilated to avoid condensation and dripping water (e.g. enclosure base plate mounted on spacers). b Components mounted inside the enclosure must have a TC finish. b If the equipment is to be switched off for long periods, a heater must be provided (0.2 to 0.5 kW per square decimetre of enclosure), that switches on automatically when the equipment is turned off. This heater keeps the inside of the enclosure at a temperature slightly higher than the outside surrounding temperature, thereby avoiding any risk of condensation and dripping water (the heat produced by the equipment itself during normal running is sufficient to provide this temperature difference). b Special considerations for Operator dialog and Detection products: for certain pilot devices, the use of TC treatment can be extended to outdoor use provided their enclosure is made of light alloys, zinc alloys or plastic material. In this case, it is also essential to ensure that the degree of protection against penetration of liquids and solid objects is suitable for the applications involved.
8/2
General
Protective treatment of equipment according to climatic environment
This treatment is suitable for hot and humid atmospheres where installations are regularly subject to condensation, dripping water and the risk of fungi. In addition, plastic insulating components are resistant to attacks from insects such as termites and cockroaches. These properties have often led to this treatment being described as Tropical Finish, but this does not mean that all equipment installed in tropical and equatorial regions must systematically have undergone TH treatment. On the other hand, certain operating conditions in temperate climates may well require the use of TH treated equipment (see limitations for use of TC treatment). Special characteristics of TH treatment b All insulating components are made of materials which are either resistant to fungi or treated with a fungicide, and which have increased resistance to creepage (Standards IEC60112, NF C 26-220, DIN5348). b Metal enclosures receive a top-coat of stoved, fungicidal paint, applied over a rust inhibiting undercoat. Components with TH treatment may be subject to a surcharge (1). Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
TH treatment for hot and humid environments
1 2 3 4 5
Protective treatment selection guide

Surrounding environment Duty cycle Internal heating of enclosure when not in use Not necessary No Yes Not necessary Type of climate Protective treatment of of equipencloment sure TC TH TH TH TH
Indoors
No dripping water or condensation Presence of dripping water or condensation Unimportant Frequent switching off for periods of more than 1day Continuous
Unimportant TC Temperate TC Equatorial TH Unimportant TC Unimportant TC
Outdoors (sheltered)
No dripping water or dew Frequent and regular presence of dripping water or dew Unimportant Not necessary Temperate TC Equatorial TH Temperate TC Equatorial TH Unimportant TC Unimportant TC TC TH TH TH TH TH
Exposed outdoors or near the sea

Frequent switching off for periods of more than 1day Continuous No Yes Not necessary
These treatments cover, in particular, the applications defined by methods I and II of guide UTE C 63-100.
7 8 9 10
Electronic products always meet the requirements of TC treatment. A number of them are TH treated as standard. Some electronic products (for example: programmable controllers, flush mountable controllers CCX and flush mountable operator terminals XBT) require the use of an enclosure providing a degree of protection to at least IP 54, as defined by standards IEC 60664 and NF C 20 040, for use in industrial applications or in environmental conditions requiring TH treatment. These electronic products, including flush mountable products, must have a degree of protection to at least IP 20 (provided either by their own enclosure or by their installation method) for restricted access locations where the degree of pollution does not exceed 2 (a test booth not containing machinery or other dust producing activities, for example).
Special precautions for electronic equipment
For particularly harsh industrial environments, Schneider Electric is able to offer special protective treatments. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(1) A large number of the Schneider-electric brand products are TH treated as standard and are, therefore, not subject to a surcharge.
Special treatments
8/3
General
Product standards and certifications
Standardisation
1 2 3 4 5
Schneider Electric products satisfy, in the majority of cases, national (for example: BS in Great Britain, NF in France, DIN in Germany), European (for example: CENELEC) or international (IEC) standards. These product standards precisely define the performance of the designated products (such as IEC 60947 for low voltage equipment). When used correctly, as designated by the manufacturer and in accordance with regulations and correct practices, these products will allow users to build equipment, machine systems or installations that conform to their appropriate standards (for example: IEC60204-1, relating to electrical equipment used on industrial machines). Schneider Electric is able to provide proof of conformity of its production to the standards it has chosen to comply with, through its quality assurance system. On request, and depending on the situation, Schneider Electric can provide the following: b a declaration of conformity, b a certificate of conformity (ASEFA/LOVAG), b a homologation certificate or approval, in the countries where this procedure is required or for particular specifications, such as those existing in the merchant navy. Code ANSI BS CEI DIN/VDE EN GOST IEC JIS NBN NEN NF SAA UNE Certification authority Name American National Standards Institute British Standards Institution Comitato Elettrotecnico Italiano Verband Deutscher Electrotechniker Comit Europen de Normalisation Electrotechnique Gosudarstvenne Komitet Standartov International Electrotechnical Commission Japanese Industrial Standards Committee Institut Belge de Normalisation Nederlands Normalisatie Institut Union Technique de lElectricit Standards Association of Australia Asociacion Espaola de Normalizacion y Certificacion Country Abbreviation ANSI USA BSI Great Britain CEI Italy VDE Germany CENELEC Europe GOST Russia IEC Worldwide JISC Japan IBN Belgium NNI Netherlands UTE France SAA Australia AENOR Spain
Conformity to standards
7 8 9 10
These are technical specifications established in conjunction with, and with approval of, the relative bodies within the various CENELEC member countries (European Union, European Free Trade Association and many central and eastern European countries having member or affiliated status). Prepared in accordance with the principle of consensus, the European standards are the result of a weighted majority vote. Such adopted standards are then integrated into the national collection of standards, and contradictory national standards are withdrawn. European standards incorporated within the French collection of standards carry the prefix NFEN. At the Union Technique de lElectricit (Technical Union of Electricity) (UTE), the French version of a corresponding European standard carries a dual number: European reference (NFEN ) and classification index (C ). Therefore, the standard NF EN 60947-4-1 relating to motor contactors and starters, effectively constitutes the French version of the European standard EN 60947-4-1 and carries the UTE classification C 63-110. This standard is identical to the British standard BS EN 60947-4-1 or the German standard DIN EN 60947-4-1. Whenever reasonably practical, European standards reflect the international standards (IEC). With regard to automation system components and distribution equipment, in addition to complying with the requirements of French NF standards, Schneider Electric brand components conform to the standards of all other major industrial countries.
European EN standards
Regulations
Opening up of European markets assumes harmonisation of the regulations pertaining to each of the member countries of the European Union. The purpose of the European Directive is to eliminate obstacles hindering the free circulation of goods within the European Union, and it must be applied in all member countries. Member countries are obliged to transcribe each Directive into their national legislation and to simultaneously withdraw any contradictory regulations. The Directives, in particular those of a technical nature which concern us, only establish the objectives to be achieved, referred to as essential requirements. The manufacturer must take all the necessary measures to ensure that his products conform to the requirements of each Directive applicable to his production. As a general rule, the manufacturer certifies conformity to the essential requirements of the Directive(s) for his product by affixing the e mark. The e mark is affixed to Schneider Electric brand products concerned, in order to comply with French and European regulations. Significance of the e mark b The e mark affixed to a product signifies that the manufacturer certifies that the product conforms to the relevant European Directive(s) which concern it; this condition must be met to allow free distribution and circulation within the countries of the European Union of any product subject to one or more of the E.U. Directives. b The e mark is intended solely for national market control authorities. b The e mark must not be confused with a conformity marking.
European Directives
8/4
General
Product standards and certifications
For electrical equipment, only conformity to standards signifies that the product is suitable for its designated function, and only the guarantee of an established manufacturer can provide a high level of quality assurance. For Schneider Electric brand products, one or several Directives are likely to be applicable, depending on the product, and in particular: b the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC: the e mark relating to this Directive has been compulsory since 16th January 2007. b the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by Directives 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC: the e mark on products covered by this Directive has been compulsory since 1st January 1996.
European Directives (continued)
1 2 3 4 5
The function of ASEFA (Association des Stations dEssais Franaise dAppareils lectriques Association of French Testing Stations for Low Voltage Industrial Electrical Equipment) is to carry out tests of conformity to standards and to issue certificates of conformity and test reports. ASEFA laboratories are authorised by the French authorisation committee (COFRAC). ASEFA is now a member of the European agreement group LOVAG (Low Voltage Agreement Group). This means that any certificates issued by LOVAG/ASEFA are recognised by all the authorities which are members of the group and carry the same validity as those issued by any of the member authorities.
ASEFA-LOVAG certification
When components can be used in domestic and similar applications, it is sometimes recommended that a Quality label be obtained, which is a form of certification of conformity. Code Quality label Country CEBEC Comit Electrotechnique Belge Belgium KEMA-KEUR Keuring van Electrotechnische Materialen Netherlands NF Union Technique de lElectricit France VE sterreichischer Verband fr Electrotechnik Austria SEMKO Svenska Electriska Materiel Kontrollanatalten Sweden
Quality labels
In some countries, the certification of certain electrical components is a legal requirement. In this case, a certificate of conformity to the standard is issued by the official test authority. Each certified device must bear the relevant certification symbols when these are mandatory: Code Certification authority Country CSA Canadian Standards Association Canada UL Underwriters Laboratories USA CCC China Compulsory Certification China Note on certifications issued by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL). There are two levels of approval: ) The component is fully approved for inclusion in equipment built in a Recognized ( workshop, where the operating limits are known by the equipment manufacturer and where its use within such limits is acceptable by the Underwriters Laboratories. The component is not approved as a Product for general use because its manufacturing characteristics are incomplete or its application possibilities are limited. A Recognized component does not necessarily carry the certification symbol. Listed (UL) The component conforms to all the requirements of the classification applicable to it and may therefore be used both as a Product for general use and as a component in assembled equipment. A Listed component must carry the certification symbol.
7 8 9 10
Prior approval (= certification) by certain marine classification societies is generally required for electrical equipment which is intended for use on board merchant vessels. Code Classification authority Country BV Bureau Veritas France DNV Det Norske Veritas Norway GL Germanischer Lloyd Germany LR Lloyds Register Great Britain NKK Nippon Kaiji Kyoka Japan RINA Registro Italiano Navale Italy RRS Register of Shipping Russia
Marine classification societies
Note
For further details on a specific product, please refer to the Characteristics pages in this catalogue or consult your Regional Sales Office.
8/5
Presentation
IP code
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
1 2 3
Degrees of protection against the penetration of solid bodies, water and personnel access to live parts
The European standard EN 60529 dated October 1991, IEC publication 529 (2ndedition - November 1989), defines a coding system (IP code) for indicating the degree of protection provided by electrical equipment enclosures against accidental direct contact with live parts and against the ingress of solid foreign objects or water. This standard does not apply to protection against the risk of explosion or conditions such as humidity, corrosive gasses, fungi or vermin. Certain equipment is designed to be mounted on an enclosure which will contribute towards achieving the required degree of protection (example : control devices mounted on an enclosure). Different parts of an equipment can have different degrees of protection (example : enclosure with an opening in the base). Standard NFC15-100 (May 1991 edition), section512, table51 A, provides a cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according to external factors. Practical guide UTEC15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection), according to the locations in which they are installed.
4 5
The IP code comprises 2 characteristic numerals (e.g. IP 55) and may include an additional letter when the actual protection of personnel against direct contact with live parts is better than that indicated by the first numeral (e.g. IP 20C). Any characteristic numeral which is unspecified is replaced by an X (e.g. IP XXB). 2nd characteristic numeral: Additional letter: 1st characteristic numeral: corresponds to protection of the equipment corresponds to protection of the equipment against corresponds to protection of against penetration of water with harmful effects. personnel against direct contact penetration of solid objects and protection of personnel against direct contact with live parts. with live parts.
Protection of the equipment
IP ppp code
0 1
Non-protected Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 50 mm Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 12.5 mm. Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 2.5 mm. Protected against the penetration of solid objects having a diameter greater than or equal to 1 mm. Dust protected (no harmful deposits).
Protection of personnel Non-protected Protected against direct contact with the back of the hand (accidental contacts). Protected against direct finger contact.
0 1
Non-protected Protected against vertical dripping water, (condensation).
A B
With the back of the hand.

With the finger.
15
Protected against dripping water at an angle of up to 15.
With a 2.5 mm tool.
7
4
Protected against direct contact with a 2.5 mm tool.
60
Protected against rain at an angle of up to 60.
With a 1 mm wire.
Protected against direct contact with a 1 mm wire.
Protected against splashing water in all directions.
8 9 10
Protected against direct contact with a1 mm wire.
Protected against water jets in all directions.
Dust tight.
Protected against direct contact with a1 mm wire.
Protected against powerful jets of water and waves.
7
1m
15 cm min
Protected against the effects of temporary immersion. Protected against the effects of prolonged immersion under specified conditions.
8
m
8/6
Presentation
IK code
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
Degrees of protection against mechanical impact
The European standard EN50102 dated March 1995 defines a coding system (IKcode) for indicating the degree of protection provided by electrical equipment enclosures against external mechanical impact. Standard NF C 15-100 (May 1991 edition), section 512, table 51A, provides a cross-reference between the various degrees of protection and the environmental conditions classification, relating to the selection of equipment according to external factors. Practical guide UTEC15-103 shows, in the form of tables, the characteristics required for electrical equipment (including minimum degrees of protection), according to the locations in which they are installed.
1 2 3 4 5
The IK code comprises 2 characteristic numerals (e.g. IK 05). 2 characteristic numerals: corresponding to a value of impact energy.
h (cm) Energy (J)
IK pp code
00 01 02 03 04 05
Non-protected 7.5 10 17.5 25 35 0.15 0.2 0.35 0.5 0.7
0,2 kg h
06 07
0,5 kg h
20 40
1 2
08
1,7 kg h
30
09 10
5 kg h
20 40
10 20
7 8 9 10
8/7
1 2 3 4 5
7 8 9 10
8/8
Schneider Electric Industries SAS

35, rue Joseph Monier CS 30323 F- 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex RCS Nanterre 954 503 439 Capital social 896 313 776 www.schneider-electric.com MKTED210011EN
As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication. This document has been printed on ecological paper
Design: Schneider Electric Photos: Schneider Electric Printed:
03-2011
2011 - Schneider Electric - All rights reserved.

Schneider Switch Fuse 464

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Schneider Switch Fuse 464

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Low voltage

Control and protection components

Product reference index

AB1 Pp AB1 Rpp

GS2 Tpp GS2 Vpp

GSp K GSp KK GSp L

GV3 ME80 GV3 Ppp

GV3 PCpp GV3 S GV7 AB11 GV7 ACpp

Product reference index

LAD Rp LAD S2 LAD Tp

LC2 Dpppppppp 5/72 to 5/75 LR97 Dppppp LRD pppp

LAD T9Rpp LAD UL1 LAZ R9pp LB1 LD03ppp

LB6 LD03ppp LC1 BL LC1 BLppppp

LC1 BM LC1 BMppppp

LC1 BP LC1 BPppppp

LC1 BR LC1 BRppppp

LAD 2p LAD 3pppppp LAD 4pppp

LC1 BR34p40 LC1 Dppppppp

LA9 Epp LA9 F100 LA9 F103

LU9 SP0 LU9B pppp

LC1 DpKpppp LC1 Dpppp LC1 DTpppppppp LC1 DWK12pp

LU9C p LU9M ppp

Product reference index

LUA1 pppp LUA8 E20 LUB ppp

LX4 D8pp LX4 F8pp LX4 FFppp

LX4 FXppp LX5 FJWpp LXD 1ppp LXD 3ppp N NSpppppp

LUF pppp LUL pppp

1 - TeSys motor starters: open version

2 - TeSys motor starters: enclosed version

3 - TeSys protection components: motor circuit-breakers

4 - TeSys protection components: fuse protection

5 - TeSys contactors and reversing contactors

6 - TeSys protection components: relays and controllers

7 - TeSys control relays

1 - TeSys motor starters: open version

b Levels of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2

Selection guide .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4

Combination automatic motor starters

Combination starters for customer assembly

page 1/26 page 1/28 page 1/30 page 1/32

D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control

Star-delta starters for motor control

integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers

Adaptators for use with busbar sytem

TeSys Quickfit, installation system for motor starter components

AK5 pre-assembled panel busbar system

TeSys motor starters

Type 1 and type 2 coordination according to the standard

0,75 Ico 1,25 Ico Ico

TeSys motor starters

TeSys motor starters - open version

D.O.L. or reversing starters with circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters with fuse protection

Fuse carrier + plate-mounted contactor

3 contactors (line, star and delta, mounted on plate, rail or chassis)

1/6 and 1/7

1/8 and 1/9

1/10 and 1/11

D.O.L. or reversing starters D.O.L., reversing or star-delta starters with circuit-breakers

Type 1 and type 2 coordination

Thermal magnetic circuit-breaker + contactor(s)

Magnetic circuit-breaker + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay

Fuse carrier + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay

Switch-disconnector-fuse + contactor(s) + thermal overload relay

TeSys motor starters

TeSys motor starters

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys motor starters - open version

TeSys motor starters - open version